CT outewis.

PART II.

Nov ls9:

Puge.

I.—Report of a Visit to the Pakchan River, and of some Tin localities in the

southern portion of the Tenasserim Provinces. By Capt. G. B. Tremenheere,

F. G. S. Executive Engineer, Tenasserim Provinces. With a Map and

Section of the Peninsula, .. : : We a ss Oue

II.—Memoir on the application of Asphalite costee to Flooring, eine and

Hydraulic works in India. By Capt. Goodwyn, Engineers. With a plate, .. 934

II11.—Contributions towards a History of the Development of the Mineral Re-

sources of India. By S. G. Tollemache Heatly, Esq. . oe ale ». 042

1V.—Journal of a Tour through parts of the Panjab and Aolanisten, in the year

1837. By Agha Abbas of Shiraz, arranged and translated by Major R. Leech,

by whom the tour was planned, and instructions furnished. From the Secre-

tariat of the Government of India, .. ate ate wis se sie »- 064

V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, .. ae ae a aa AAS en Oae

No. 140.

I.—Report on the Manners, Customs and Superstitions of the People of Shoa, and

on the History of the Abyssinian Church. By Capt. Graham, B. A. From the

Secretariat of the Government of India, .. an oe ae sie e. 625

II.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, oe ee oe oe oe es 729

No. 14l.

I.—As-Soytiti’s work on aris called port Khaadaa j was

ie gawd Ns Se 5) cia’, Kashf-as-@alsalah ’an wasf Az-zal-zalah,

i. e. removing S noise from the description of the Earthquakes, (or clearing

up the description of Earthquakes.) Translated from the Arabic by A.

Sprenger, Esq. B. M.S. ee oe oe oe a3 ee ee -» 741

I1.—A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-

21. By Captain Patrick Gerard, .. ee a oe oe ee «- 749

111.—Meteorological Register kept at Kathmandoo, Valley of Nepal. By Captain

G.H. Robinson, for the month of March 1834, .. A aie 8 ae COG

1V.—Supplementary Note to Mr. Commissioner Lushington’s Report on the Cop-

per Mines of Kemaon and Ghurwal, Journal, p. 472, .. or A 2» (69

V.—Note on a Fossil Antelope, from the Dadoopoor Museum. By Captain

W. E. Baker, Bengal Engineers, .. oe as he “ih ae »» 769

Vi.—A Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India; being the Pooree and

Cuttack Storms of 2nd, and the Gya and Patna Storms of the 5th and 6th

October, 1842. By Henry Piddington, x9 an 40 oie Sei h |

VII.—Notes on a curious species of Tiger or Jauguar, killed near the Snowy

Range, north of Darjeeling. By Lieut. Tickell, Bengal Native Infantry,

Assistant Agent to the Governor General, S. W. Frontier, .. ee -. $14

iv Contents.

Page.

VIII.—M. Stanislas Julien on the Study of the Chinese Language. Translated

for the Journal of the Asiatic Society. By Henry Piddington, Sub-Secretary,

Asiatic Society, ee ee oe As oe ee A Ae -. 816

IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Lys ce se oe Sh =», Gul

No. 142.

I.—Tables of Comparative Philology, shewing specimens of the affinity of the

Greek, Latin and English Languages, with the Sanskrit, Persian, Russian,

Gaelic, Welsh, Lithuanian, German, Hebrew, and Anglo-Saxon. By the

Rev. James Long, .-. oe os : Ste ee - 837

II].—On a new species of Cervus (Cervus Dimorphé, ) ByB. H. Fiaieie iy.

Resident, Kathmandoo. Witha Plate, .. An a EA Ms a 007

II1I.—Note on the ‘‘ Flata Limbata,’’ and the White Wax of China. By Captain

Thomas Hutton, B. N. I... ag os a aig : ee -. 898

1V.—Qualitative Examination of the Native Copper found on Round Island in

the Cheduba group, South-East of Ramree, and forwarded to the Society by

Captain Campbell, See Proceedings Asiatic Society for April 1843. By S. :

Mornay, Esq..... Ae oe ae ae oe zs oe ae -.- 904

V.—Memoranda of Earthquakes and other remarkable Occurrences in Upper

Assam, from January 1839 to September 1843. By Captain Hannay, B. N.I. 907

VI.—Memorandum of various Phenomena in 1843. By the Rev. N. Brown,

Missionary, Assam, ae ee oY et et a wee «- 909

VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ar si ee oe sie -» 910

No. 143.

I.—Mr. Blyth’s Monthly Report for December Meeting, 1842, with Addenda

subsequently appended, ee oe oe ee ae oe ve se 925

II].—Note on the Flata limbata, p. 898 et seq., ante... 5 “. ma »» POLI

i11.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, +5 a ee we -- 1012

No. 144.

I.—Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. By Lieut. R. Baird Smith, Bengal En-

gineers,.. ve ee ee oe oe we «» 1029

11.—Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality, the Expectation of Life, and

the Values of Annuities in India and England. By Captain J. C. Hannyng-

ton, 24th N. I. Ist Assistant G.G. A. Maunbhoom, .. ea : -. 1057

II1I.—Experiments and Papers principally by W. B. O’Shaughnessy, Ba B.

M.S. relating to the effects of Sea-water on Iron. Communicated by the

Government of Bengal, ee ee oe ae . ee ve -» 1066

1V.—Notes on, and a short Vocabulary of, the fitdnres Dialect of Bundel-

khand. By Major R. Leech, c. B. Political Agent. From the Political Se-

cretariat of the Government of India. ee oe . ve -- 1085

V.—A Note on the Winds, as influencing the Tracks sailed by Bermuda Fate

and on the advantage which may be derived from sailing on Curved Courses

when meeting with Revolving Winds by Lt. Col. Reid, Governor of Bermuda. 1104

V1I,—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ae oe ve ee ee «» 1107

TnoeX

TO PART II, VOL. XII.

Page-

Asphaltic Mastic to Flooring, Roof-

ing, and Hydraulic works in In-

dia. Memoir on the application of.

By Capt. Goodwyn, .. .. .. 584

As-Soytiti’s on Earthquakes, Trans-

lated from the Arabic, by A. Spren-

ger, Esq. ie °- an -. 741

Cervus. Cervus Dimorphé. On a

new species of. By B. H. Hodgson,

with a Plate... .. ve csOuT

Comparative Philology, shewing spe-

cimens of the affinity of the Greek,

Latin and English Languages with

the Sanskrit, Persian, Russian,

Gaelic, Welsh, Lithuanian, Ger-

man, Hebrew, and Anglo-Saxon.

Tables of. By the Rev. James Long, 837

Copper Mines of Kemaon and Ghur-

wal. Supplementary Notes to Mr.

Commissioner Lushington’s Re-

porton the. Journal, p. 472, .. 769

Corrosion of Iron by Salt-Water, &c.

Ce ee ee ee ee ee

Earthquakes and other remarkable

Occurrences in Upper Assam, from

January 1839 to September 1843.

Memoranda of. By Capt. Hannay, 907

Flata limbata. Note on the, p. 898

= SECO See ee Ac -. 1011

Fossil Antelope, from Dadoopoor

Museum. Note ona. By Captain

W.E. Baker, .. .. ele ae

Hinduvee Dialect of Bundelkhand.

short Vocabulary of the. By Major

R. Leech, we we .. 1086

History of the Developement of the

Mineral Resources of India. Con-

tribution towards a. By S. G. Tol-

lemache Heatly, Esq. .. .. «. 042

Indian Earthquakes, Memoir on. B

Lieut. R. Baird Smith. .. .. 1029

Law of Mortality, the Expectation

of Life, and the Values of Annui-

ties in India and England. Compa-

rative Tables of the. By Captain

J.C. Hannyngton,.. Efe -+ 105

Law of Storms in India. A Ninth

Memoir on the. Being the Pooree

and Cuttack Storms of 2nd, and the

Gya and Patna Storms of the 5th

and 6th October, 1842. By Henry

Piddington, .. oe ae de

771

Page.

M. Stanislas Julien on the study of

the Chinese Language. ‘Translat-

ed for the Journal of the Asiatic

Society. By Henry Piddington, 816

Manners, Customs and Superstitions

of the People of Shoa, and on the

History of the Abyssinian Church.

Report on the. By Capt. Graham, 625

Meteorological Register kept at

Kathmandoo. By Captain G. H.

Robinson, .. be ee ae

Monthly Report for December Meet-

ing, 1842, with Addenda subse-

quently appended. By Mr. Blyth. 925

Native Copper. Qualitative Exa-

mination of the, found on Round

Island in the Cheduba group,

South East of Ramree, and for-

warded to the Society by Captain

Campbell, See Proceedings Asia-

tic Society for April 1843. By S.

Mornay, Esq... «+ ar oe

Phenomena in 1843. Memorandum

of various. By the Rev. N. Brown, 909

Proceedings of the Asiatic Socie- '

ty, «. 622, 729, 821, 910, 1012-1107

Tiger or Jaguar, killed near the

Snowy Range, north of Darjeeling.

Notes on a curious species of. By

Lieut. Tickell, Bet 4s ae

Tour through parts of the Panjab

and Affghanistan in the year 1837.

Journal of a. By Agha Abbas of

Shiraz, arranged and translated by

Major R. Leech, .. as Ss

Tracks sailed by Bermuda Vessels,

A note on the Winds, as influenc-

ing the. By Lt. Col. Reid, -. 1104

Visit to the Pakchan River, and of

some Tin localities in the southern

portion of the Tenasserim Pro-

vinces. Report of a. By Capt. G.

B. Tremenheere, .. ae ate

Weather at Kotgurh and Soobathoo,

for 1819-20-21. A general State-

ment of the. By Captain Patrick

Gerrards.) <s aie as ot

White Wax of China. “ Flata Lim-

bata.’’ Note onthe. By Captain

Thomas Hutton, .. AG e. 898

768

904

814

564

INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS

TO PART II, VOL. XII.

Page

Baker, W. E. Captain. Note ona

Fossil Antelope, from the Dadoo-

poor Museum, 56 en -» 769

Biytu, Mr. Monthly Report for

December Meeting, 1842, with

Addenda subsequently appended,.. 925

Brown, N. Rev. Memorandum of

various Phenomena in Assam

1843, .. ee aS se «- 909

GERARD, Patrick, Captain. A ge-

neral Statement of the Weather at

Kotgurh and Soobathoo, for 1819-

20-21,.. a 3 ue -- 749

Goopwyn, Capt. Memoir on the

application of Asphaltic Mastic to

Flooring, Roofing, and Hydraulic

works in India, 7 ae oe Dun

Grauam, B. A. Captain. Report on

the Manners, Customs and Super-

stitions of the people of Shoa, and

on the History of the Abyssinian

Church, we oe oe « 620

Hannay, Captain. Memoranda of

Earthquakes and other remarkable

Occurrences in Upper Assam, .. 907

Hannyneton, J. C. Captain. Com-

parative Tables of the Law of Mor-

tality, the Expectation of Life, and

the Values of Annuities in India

and England, ee ve -- 1097

Heatty, 8S. G. ToLtemacueE, Esq.

Contributions towards a History of

the Development of the Mineral

Resources of India, sie ste O42

Hopeson, B. H. Esq. On a new

species of Cervus, Cervus Dimor-

p e, ee ee ee

Horton, Tuomas, Captain. Note on

the ‘*‘ Flata Limbata,’? and the

White Wax of China, .. -- 898

Leecu, R. Major. Journal of a Tour

through parts of the Panjab and

Affghanistan, in the year 1837-

By Agha Abbas of Shiraz, -- 064

—__—_—__—___—_—_— Notes on, anda

short Vocabulary of, the Hinduvee

Dialect of Bundelkhand, -- -. 1086

Lone, James, Rev. Tables of Com-

parative Philology, shewing spe-

cimens of the affinity of the Greek,

Latin and English Languages, with

the Sanskirt, Persian, Russian,

Page.

Gaelic, Welsh, Lithuanian, Ger-

man, Hebrew, and Anglo-Saxon, . 837

LusHineton, Mr. Commissioner.

Supplementary Note to Report on

the Copper Mines of Kemaon and

Ghurwal, .. ee ae sia FOO

Morney, S. Esq. Qualitative

Examination of the Native Cop-

per found on Round Island in the

Cheduba group, South Bast of

Ramree, and forwarded to the So-

ciety, -. as Le Be As 02

Note on the Flata limbata, p. 898 et.

seq.-, ante, .. ° oe 2°

O’SHaucunessy, W. B. Esq. Ex-

periments and Papers principally,

relating to the effects of Sea-water

on Iron, 35 ai ii -- 1066

PippineTon, Henry. A Ninth Me-

moir on the Law of Storms in

India; being the Pooree and Cut-

tack Storms of 2nd, and the Gya

and Patna Storms of oth and 6th

October, 1842, wie ee ae

—_—__—________—_— M Stanislas

Julien on the study of the Chinese

Language. ‘l'ranslated for the

Journal of the Asiatic Society, .. 316

Proceedings of the Asiatic Socie-

ty, ee. 622-729-821-910-1012-1107

Rerp, Lt. Col. A note on the Winds,

as influencing the ‘Tracks sailed by

Bermuda Vessels; and on the ad-

vantage which may be derived from

sailing on Curved Courses when

meeting with Revolving Winds,.. 1104

Rosinson, G. H. Captain. Meteo-

rologica! Register kept at Kath-

mandoo, ee sie ee ai

Sprencer, A. Esq. As-Soyitti’s

work on Earthquakes, _.. «- 741

Smiru Bairp, R, Lieut. Memoir on

Indian Earthquakes. ma

TicKELL, Lieut. Notes on a curious

species of ‘Tiger or Jaguar, killed

near the Snowy Range, north of

Darjeeling, .. ee ee -. 814

TREMENHEERE, G. B. Capt. Report

of a Visit to the Pakchan River,

and of some Tin localities in the

southern portion of the Tenasserim

Provinces, «+ os ae a Bao

771

768

«+ 1029

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Report of a Visit to the Pakchan River, and of some Tin localities in

the southern portion of the Tenasserim Provinces. By Captain G. B.

TREMENHEERE, FP’. G. S. Hxecutive Engineer, Tenasserim Provinces.

With a Map and Section of the Peninsula.

1. The boundary between our provinces and the Siamese territory at

the south and western extremity of Tenasserim, has never been dis-

tinctly defined. }

After a correspondence with the Court of Bangkok, it had been

arranged that an agent on their part should meet Mr. Commissioner

Blundell on the Pakchan river on the Ist of March, where evidence

was to be heard on both sides, and the question finally settled. The

departure of the Commissioner from Maulmain was unavoidably delayed

till the 4th of March. At Mr. Blundell’s request, I formed one of his

party in the H. C. Steamer Hoogly, and touching at Amherst and

Mergui, entered the Pakchan river on the 10th of March.

2. The entrance is about two miles wide, affording ample room

and deep water for the admission of ships of the largest burthen. The

numerous islands which range along either shore of this fine river, and

the bold hilly country beyond, afford views which would be thought

picturesque in any country. For the first ten miles it is very slightly

contracted in breadth, and has little of the character of a river, but of a

capacious inlet of the sea. To this distance we carried not less than

four fathom water, but, for the most part six and seven. After proceed-

ing thus far, we turned into the Malewan river, and anchored at about

No. 189. New Serizs, No. 55. 3 Z

524 Vistt to the Pakchan River. [ No. 139.

one and half mile in a N. W. direction, for the purpose of communi-

cating with the British Settlement of that name. The next day,

proceeding eight miles higher up the main river, we anchored in three

fathoms abreast the confluence of the great Kaman river, beyond which

the channel being much contracted by sand banks, the Steamer could

not proceed. From thence we moved in boats, and arrived at Pakchan

in eight hours; the distance as surveyed by Captain R. Ross, command-

ing the Hoogly, being thirty miles. The river narrows gradually,

and from the great Kaman, passes through level country ; approaching

Pakchan, hills again appear, and it becomes very tortuous, at which

spot it is about 50 yards broad, with a rise and fall of tide of eight feet

at the springs.

3. The governor of Pakchan, a Chinaman, informed Mr. Blundell,

that the chief of Peechapooree, who had been deputed by the Siam

government to meet him, had arrived at Pakchan punctually on the Ist

of March; after waiting ten days, he had retired to Chimpohun, on the

plain of the east side of the peninsula. It was therefore determined that

Dr. Richardson, Assistant to the Commissioner, should go to the chief

and invite his return to the projected conference: accordingly, Dr.

Richardson and myself, with a few of our own followers, commenced our

journey on foot a little after 5 a. m., the prospect of crossing the penin-

sula being an object of peculiar interest.

Following generally the course of a small stream called the Kraa,

which joins the main river at Pakchan, we proceeded by a good and

clear road of ten to fifteen feet wide through the jungle towards the

Kraa Pass, distant three miles in a N. E. direction. Theroad here turns

to the South of East and the Pass, which is not intricate, leads for some

distance along the beg of the rivulet, and terminates to the South-East

at six and five-sixth miles from Pakchan. Here the greatest altitude is

attained between the valley of the Pakchan and the alluvial plains on

the east side of the peninsula, for soon after, at eight hours and seven

minutes a.M., we came upon the waters of the Chimpohun, running in

an easterly direction towards the gulf of Siam, the country then be-

gins to slope gradually to the East; at eight hours thirty-seven minutes

A. M., we halted two hours for refreshment by the side of the Chimpo-

hun, at a spot. where there are three or four houses, having the name of

Bantapakchan. We here observed a canoe, which can be floated to

1843.] Visit to the Pakchan River. 525

Chimpohun during the rains, and if necessary, to the gulf itself. From

thence the road continues good. It erosses the Chimpohun very fre-

quently, besides many dry ravines which communicate with it; the

banks of these, where crossed by the road have not more than thirty

or thirty-five feet of abrupt declivity, the rest of the ground being very

regular, and partaking of the general slope of the country. At 3 P. M.,

having walked seventeen and half miles, we fell in with an elephant,

and inducing the driver to take us on, were relieved from further per-

sonal exertion. The first eight miles of the eastern slope of the Pass

have the greatest fall, after which the descent is easy till we reach the

alluvial plain of Chimpohun. Nearing this plain, at 5 Pp. M., we ob-

served the influence of the tide in the river, and at 5-30 reached

Chimpohun. The plain is covered with rice fields, bearing signs of

abundant crops as far as could be observed on all sides, and is bounded

by a range of hills bending in a curved direction to the South-East.

Some of these near the plain have much the same isolated and abrupt

character, as the limestone hills near Maulmain. After half an hour’s

delay, the headman forwarded us on fresh elephants to the camp of the

chief, which we found at Tasapaow, three and half miles distant further

East, and reached it at 8. Pp. M., the entire distance between Pakchan

and Tasapaow, being nearly twenty-eight miles.

4. We were here hospitably treated, and visited the chief early

the following morning. After a slight dinner, Dr. Richardson suc-

ceeded in inducing him to return and confer with Mr. Blundell, whom

he expressed himself anxious to meet. His encampment was on the

right bank of the Chimpohun, where the river is about 180 yards

broad, running through a level country over a sandy bed, free from

obstructions, and with a rise and fall of tide of about six feet at the

“springs. The depth of water at 8 a. mM. on the 13th of March, was

six feet with a rising tide. It communicates directly with the gulf

of Siam, from which, by the best information, we were distant five

miles. A sea-going boat of about thirty tons was under a shed at

this spot; but junks trading on the Siam coast do not pass beyond

Tayang, a town four miles East of Tasapaow, and within a mile of the

sea. Time would not admit of cur going to the coast, as Mr. Blundell

and the rest of the party were expecting our speedy return to Pakchan.

The distance of Tasapaow from the sea, as above given, may I think

526 Visit to the Pakchan River. [ No. 139.

be relied on, having been obtained from one of our own people who

had formerly resided some time at Chimpohun. The protraction of

my route also, with these five miles added, makes the Kast coast of

the peninsula correspond, within one mile short, with its longitude

by Horsburgh’s chart. The distance therefore between Pakchan and

the coast of the gulf of Siam is thirty-two miles, and the entire breadth

of the peninsula at this point from the Bay of Bengal to the gulf, is as

nearly as possible sixty miles.

5. After receiving the chief’s return visit, elephants were provided

to take us back to Pakchan; we started at 11 a. m. and halted for the

night on the Chimpohun river at a shed about half way, named

Tacumlae, and reached Pakchan the next day, 14th March, at 2 p. M.

On the way back, I paid particular attention to the inclination of the

country, with the view of forming a probable estimate of the elevation

of the top of the Kraa Pass, where the head waters of the Kraa and

Chimpohun rise, and I am of opinion, that the difference of level be-

tween that point and the plains at Chimpohun and Pakchan does

not exceed 450 feet. Along the entire route between these two

places, or twenty-three miles, running water was crossed thirty-two

times, besides which, there are numerous dry nullahs before mentioned,

which would be occasionally unfordable during the rains.

The road is never more than 100 feet above the bed of the river-

course ; it has an easy slope, and except at the crossings of the streams

and nullahs, is now passable by guns; but no part of the road would

during the dry season present any difficulty to the passage of an army.

6. Some speculations having appeared lately in the columns of the

Moulmain Chronicle, on the practicability of carrying a canal across

the Isthmus of Kraa, whereby ships might pass by a short route from

India to China, instead of round the Malayan peninsula, I am induced

to offer some observations, under the idea, that enquiries on the subject

might probably be made at some future period.

From the tidal waters of the Pakchan flowing westward to the Bay

of Bengal, to those of the Chimpohun running eastward to the Gulf of

Siam, I paid as much attention to the slopes and facilities for such a

work as the nature of our journey allowed, and while no work of this

description, where the physical difficulties are not absolutely insur-

mountable, ought perhaps to be pronounced impracticable, I have no

1843. ] Visit to the Pakchan River. 527

hesitation in saying, that the scheme alluded to, is not in my opinion

reasonably practicable.

On a rough estimate, I assume 450 feet as the greatest rise of

ground between the two seas, and if we suppose the line of road to be

100 feet above the level of the bed of the water-courses of the Pass as

they now exist, and deduct that from the above, it will leave 350 feet

- of excavation, chiefly in solid rock, to be effected at the head of the

Pass, to which the depth of the ship channel would remain to be added.

As no ships could come higher up than the second anchorage of the

Hoogly, or 25 miles in a direct line below Pakchan, the length of the

canal would be increased by that distance, as well, in all probability,

by the five miles beyond Tasapaow, as the rivers on that side of the

Peninsula are known to be generally obstructed by bars of sand.

Both the Kraa and Chimpohun rivers are very small streams at this

season, running over rocky beds, and no supply of fresh water could,

I think, be depended on from either, to feed such a canal, or that would

be sufficient at any period of the year to supply tie loss by absorption

and evaporation. An approximate section of the ground is given

on the accompanying plan, by which it will appear, that the probable

cutting for such a canal, supposing its width 100 feet and of rec-

tangular form, would be on the lowest calculation as follows :—

Length. Breadth. Depth. Cubic Feet.

From the Great Kawan

River to Pakchan, ...... 25 miles + 100 feet-+- 60 feet 870,000,000

From Pakchan to top of 5

Kraa Pass, wece.see00e 6G Do. 100 Do. +4 380 ——2= 685,520,000

From top of Pass toa spring

marked in the Map, ... 16 Do. -- 100 Do. -+ 380 —- 2= 1,605,120,000

_ From the spring to Tasa-

paow, petiscs cess 5 Do. -- 100 Do. -- 180 = 264,000,000

From Tasapaow fo “the

GUE ais den'eee seceeee 5 Do.-+- 100 Do. + 50 = 132,000,000

3,556,640 ,o00 f Peeeareet of Excas

which, supposing that one man excavated during the entire work

twenty cubic feet per day, and placed it where it was eventually

to remain, and that one man’s labor is there worth one rupee per day,

would cost eighteen millions sterling.

7. Having remained at Pakchan during the 15th, for the purpose of

the conference between the Siam Chief and Mr. Blundell, which took

place on the morning of that day, we left the place the same evening,

and rejoined the steamer again in eight hours. On the 16th, we

528 Visit to the Pakchan River. [ No. 139.

dropped down to our first anchorage, and on the same day visited the

settlement of Malewan, which is on a branch of the Malewan about

seven miles from its junction with the Pakchan. On the flood tide,

junks of twenty or thirty tons can approach it; but at low tide there

is no water to float the smallest canoe.

Malewan is but a recent settlement, and is particularly interesting, |

as being the only spot in these Provinces, where people have located

themselves for the purpose of collecting tin. Although inhabited only

for three years, there are already about 100 Chinese, 160 Malays, and

about as many Siamese on the spot, more than 500 in all, including

women and children. The surface of the country is pleasingly undu-

lated, having a range of high hills between it and the sea. It possesses

a rich moist soil, highly favourable to cultivation. ‘The sugar cane

shewn to us was of large size, and the areca tree, which in other parts

of Tenasserim does not fruit till the 7th or 8th year, was seen here in

flower after being three years in the ground. Two heavy falls of rain

occurred while we were in this neighbourhood, and it would appear

that its climate, more resembling that of Penang than any other part

of our coast, would be well adapted, with the advantages of soil before

mentioned, to the cultivation of nutmegs, spices, &c.

8. The Siamese and Malays are occupied principally in clearing

for cultivation, and the Chinese are the chief adventurers in tin. The

head Chinaman has established a store of provisions, consisting of every

description of supply suited to the wants of the people about him,

which he exchanges for tin ore, to those who may be industrious

enough to collect it. Of this he had three or four tons on hand, from

which sample A was taken. It is precisely similar to specimens I have

forwarded on other occasions, and consists of pure peroxide of tin, col-

lected by washing from the beds of streams in that neighbourhood.

On the 17th, I proceeded to a spot which one of the Chinamen had

fixed on for a stream work, and reached it after walking between four

and five miles.

The stream is one of the tributaries of the Malewan, marked No. 1

in the plan. Their principal work was not on the main stream, the

course of which we had followed to reach the place, but on a small

branch, which then afforded water scarcely sufficient to clean and exhi-

bit a sample of the ore dug out with its sand and gravels before me.

1843.] Visit to the Pakchan River. 529

This tin soil consisted of fine grey sand, mixed with quartz and gra-

nite pebbles, and was taken from near the surface of the bed of the

water-course; it was not here more than eighteen inches deep, for as

soon as the iron pick, with which it was loosened, penetrated to the clay,

they seemed assured there was no tin below. The subsoil all around

is said to contain tin, the deposit of former periods; and in some of

their excavations, I observed soil precisely similar to that from which

tin was washed on the lower levels. From its occurrence so near the

surface in existing water-courses, which from their slope must become

rapids during the rains, I infer that tin must be washed down from its

source in considerable quantities every year.

The trough used for washing is circular, about eighteen inches in

diameter and six inches deep, in which the sand and gravel is piled

and washed, as before described, by a rotatory motion of the hand

Specimens of the soil, and of the produce of separate washings are sent,

numbered 1. During the dry season, little or nothing is done in

collecting tin, but preparations only are made by trenching for con-

siderable distances along the brow, or down the slopes of the adjacent

hill, to obtain a fall of water during the rains. Under this the soil

is collected, when the sand and pebbles are washed away, leaving the

tin behind. Some of these trenches were from ten to twelve feet

deep, and one of about three feet deep was nearly 200 yards in

length. The fall so obtained saves the laborious process of washing

with the trough in a stooping position, which is irksome to the men,

but which women and children are said to perform with greater ease.

9. The next day I went again in a Northerly direction five miles, to

visit three other localities, where other parties of Chinamen were

engaged in similar works. At each of these places, there were from

eight to twelve men employed in preparations for work during the

ensuing rains. The surface soil is a rich red mould, the subsoil of

the same grey sand and quartz pebbles as before, with abundance

of tin intermixed, and rests upon granite. |

The three spots visited this day have all the same character; from

the first the separate washings were less productive than from the

other two ; but at these the quantity produced each time surprised me,

and drew forth an exclamation of pleasure from the Chinamen engaged

in collecting it for my inspection. The greatest quantity of clean ore

75) al Visit to the Pakchan River. [ No. 139.

obtained from one trough full of soil was 2078 grs., while the average

was 1235 and 855 grs. The time occupied in each washing is from

five to six minutes.

They stated, that in the rains, one man would earn four rupees worth

of tin per day. These small parties appeared full of energy and de-

termination to make the most of the advantages before them. About

their houses, situated in small clearances in the midst of the jungle,

there was an appearance of comfort and cleanliness not often seen on

this coast, while their good nature and hospitality is unbounded.

10. The prevailing rock around them is granite, which is seen in

situ in several places, cropping out of the soil from the beds of the

stream, and in the cuttings before mentioned, where I observed it was a

good deal decomposed. I do not find on examination, that in any in-

stance the tin exists interspersed in the granite, but have every reason

to confirm the opinion expressed in former reports, of its occurrence

in the fissures and cavities of the rock from which it has been removed

by disintegration of the enclosing substance. None of the Chinamen

have, as far as I could ascertain, penetrated to the principal granite

hills, but are content with what they find in the streams at a distance

from the source whence the tin proceeds. There doubtless it exists in

veins or vugs, or cavities, in abundance. The metal being found so

near the surface of the present water-courses, the causes which have

distributed a rich layer of tin soil in and around them, are assuredly

still in action. Fresh veins or cavities loaded with the crystalized mi-

neral are thus becoming constantly exposed to the decomposing effects

of the weather, and are therefore to be found by mining at very mo-

derate depths. The stream works described will form, perhaps for

long periods, profitable employment to Chinese adventurers, whose sys-

tem of collection is that to which the Siamese and Malays are accus-

tomed. These productive streams are, however, but the index of what

is to be found elsewhere, and if these localities ever attract the Eu-

ropean capitalist, of whose notice I believe them to be well worthy, the

proper sphere for the scientific miner should be in the hills themselves.

There, if a little cautious investigation were previously made by prac-

tised men in search of a spot for mining operations, the use of the

common horse whim, or the most ordinary draining apparatus, would,

in my opinion, in the course of a very short time discover veins, which

1843. ] Visit to the Pakchan River. 531

it would be very profitable to follow out with more complete and

expensive apparatus.

11. After my return from the tin works we left Malewan, and proceed-

ing next day down the river, anchored at the mouth of the Rhenong

river, for the purpose of visiting the Siamese tin works and smelting

establishment on the Southern or Siamese side of the Pakchan. This

tidal creek is nearly dry at low water, but small junks come up with

the flood: it narrows considerably at three miles from its entrance, and is

very circuitous ; after three hours’ pull in a boat in a S. E. direction, we

reached the settlement of Rhenong.

The leading people here are Chinese, who have a high fenced en-

closure about eighty yards square, one side of which is occupied by

the smelting establishment. A few women were employed in sifting

tin ore* through a fine sieve. Only one furnace, or large crucible about

four feet high, of conical form and three feet diameter at top, formed

of baked clay, appeared to be in use, this was well worn, and a new

one was there ready to replace it. One pounding or stamping ma-

chine, with a tilting bar worked by the foot, the Chinese bellows, and

heaps of charcoal, were all the apparatus visible. No tin is collected

except during the rains, and the village did not contain more than

fifty families in all.

The duty said to be paid to Siam by the Chinaman is six tons of

smelted tin per annum, for which he enjoys an entire monopoly. The

collectors of the ore are paid a nominal price of two dollars for eigh-

teen viss of ore; but as the payment is made by small ingots of tin, the

only currency in use, the actual value received by workmen according

to the present selling price of the metal, is eight rupees per hundred

viss of ore: the same quantity being at Mergui worth forty rupees.

It appeared from the information we were able to collect of the re-

ported arrivals of junks at Rhenong for cargoes of tin, that not more

than from sixty to seventy tons are produced per annum. ‘The spot

itself having a bold range of granite hills near, with level rice ground

between it and the stream, has a very pleasing appearance. A few

women were engaged in collecting tin ore in a clear stream running

over granite boulders, within a few minutes walk of the place, and the

* Specimen B.

532 Visit to the Pakchan River. [No. 139.

produce of several separate washings from the trough was taken and

noted, the result of which, compared to those of Malewan, &c. will

be found below.* Their principal stream works are a day’s journey

distant towards the hills, which we could not visit.

12, With the falling tide we rejoined the steamer, and soon after

stood between the islands to the Northward towards Bokpyen, one of

our own settlements, and visited some of the islands on our way. The

most remarkable of these are the bird’s nest rocks, of which we in-

spected two, the Turrets and the Elephants; they consist of fine

picturesque masses of limestone rock, which stand boldly up, and

present a perpendicular wall to the sea, with deep water all round them.

The edible nests of the small Martin, so much prized in China, as

to sell sometimes for more than their weight in silver, are found on

the sides of chimney-like cavities, which extend from the summit

of the rock more than 200 feet above the sea, having a small cavern-

ous opening, with room enough only to admit a boat at low water.

13. Bokpyen, which is marked in Captain Lloyd’s Chart, though not

included in the sketch herewith, is a neat and flourishing village, con-

taining about 98 houses, or 400 inhabitants in all. They are chiefly

of Malay extraction, and occupied in the cultivation of rice, the collec-

tion of rattans, fishing, &c. The Bokpyen river produces tin, and

during the Siamese rule, large tin works are said to have existed. A

channel for running water, the remains of which are now traceable, is

reported to have extended over a considerable distance by aqueducts

and cuttings, which is presumptive evidence of the abundance of tin

in the neighbouring hills. Little or none is collected now ; one man

brought us a very good sample in a bamboo ; from this he said he had

sifted the fine grained tin, which he had either sold or smelted, and,

not knowing what to do with the large pieces, had kept them.t These

were lumps of pure peroxide of tin, measuring from } to 2 of an inch,

without any quartz or earthy matter adhering, and this he called “refuse

tin,” which was of no use to him: a fair example of the ignorance with

which tin working is conducted in these localities.

14. The following is a comparative statement of the produce of

separate washings from a trough full of tin soil, each washing occupying

* Specimen No. 0. t Specimen C,

= : : *

: 2 5 : ; : . = s 5 5

= > & 5 etpprex: mate Secon of ground vhowing the lowesl exsting levels ¥. & a t

RE 3S between PaXchan and the Gulf of Stam distance 32 miles = $ af <i

Sy a The scale Ser heights and actances « the same . ss = RIS ane

> Q Plain of Chimpehan

a :

; oe 3

, cal

: f§

. f<F

| | ~

rise and fall Pa, Jb

fide fet at the:

i Sketch of a route ; S

= i - | I

| across the Isthmus of Kraa. |

| ‘ | A

and of sonve Tin Lecalities near the Southern Boundary i

of the TenaSserim Provinces. H

= = Z.

by Capt” G. B.Tremenheere Meth La

\ 3 Exceutive Engineer

Maalerecio kh tpril L843»

The lene of Coast a take from Capt Lloy dt Survey.

and the Pakehan River from |thal of Capt? R. Ross Come "9 He

‘

‘i Ay ly rm

Dh ema a Se

: } vo}

eae Wet

ee ee er

s. 44 vs z

—

1843.) Visit to the Pakchan River.

933

five minutes in filling from the bed of the stream and cleaning, as

exhibited by the specimens sent and numbered :—

Locality Malewan,

No. 1.

Malewan, No. 2, a

Malewan, No. 3, |

Malewan, No. 4,

¥*

Rehnong, No. 5,

Bokpyen, No. 6,

Weight of sepa-'

‘eachin Grains

rate washings in

Grains Troy. |

326

404

320

827

177

157

163

143

297

448

120

177

472

180

534

1499

1100

2078

1024

1173

1076

503

1142

698

108 1

371

991

653

542

000

373

263

319

227

464

1011

381

Average of | Average of the

Troy.

252

555

1235

699

434

whole in

Grains Troy.

650

699

434

534 Visit to the Pakchan River. [No. 139.

A good specimen collected at Bokpyen, by two men in about twenty

minutes, weighed 2040 grains. The specimens marked by an asterisk

are sent in duplicate with this report.

G. B. TreMenveEERE, Captain,

Mauutmain, 8th April, 1843. Executive Engineer,

Tenasserim Division.

Memoir on the application of Asphaltic Mastic, to Flooring, Roofing,

and Hydraulic works in India. By Captain Goopwyn, Engineers.

With a plate.

[This valuable memoir has already been lithographed, in which form many of our

readers may have perhaps seen it; but its importance in all points of view is so great,

that we have not hesitated to request permission from its talented author to insert it in

the Journal.—Ebs. |

At no period probably did there exist such an union of essential quali-

ties in the means of constructing as at present. Allusion is here made

to the value of the material employed, and the art of working and dis-

posing it, so that in all classes of erections, whether private or public,

there is an addition to personal comfort and convenience, combined

with permanency of structure at an economical original outlay, estima-

ted with reference to the least possible expence in subsequent main-

tenance.

The following memoir, in connection with others having relation to

the improvements of the age, is drawn up with a view of introducing a

most valuable material to general notice, one worthy the patronage of

the Government, as well as the attention of the merchant, the planter,

and all connected with building of every description. A material which

has been extensively used with the most complete success on the con-

tinent for some years, and lately equally so in England. The excellent

qualities and varieties in the mode of its application have received the

approbation of the heads of our Engineer Corps now at home, Ge-

nerals McLeod and Tickell, and Colonels Hutchinson and Colvin, in con-

sequence of whose opinions I brought it to the notice of the Court,

and was by the Directors permitted to bring some to Calcutta to be

1843.] Asphaltic Mastic, to Flooring, Roofing, &c. 535

submitted to experiment. This is sufficient authority for my advo-

cating its adoption, and constitutes a guarantee for its future success

in India. I will here slightly anticipate the subject by noticing the

result of an experiment which I undertook, to prove the efficiency

of the substance to resist great heat, lest any sceptic should stop

short of a full investigation of its merits, under an idea, that its com-

ponent parts being bitumen and pitch, it would not answer in India.

A section of prepared flooring in a wooden frame 12''+6" with a

surface of 3-8” of mastic was placed in a large oven (used for reducing

the asphalte to powder) with a thermometer which directly rose to

230°, and though kept in for six hours, it presented a surface at the end

of that time quite free from grease, proving that the pitch, the propor-

tion of which is small, was not drawn out by the great heat, the ex-

tent of which I could not ascertain, as the thermometer tube broke

shortly after insertion. A very few minutes after being spread in a

fluid state, it again resumes its original density, which is such, that at

100° Fahrenheit, it resists all impressions from ordinary force. How

frail and perishable are the floors and terraces of ordinary construc-

tion? In many situations unable to resist the wear and tear to which

they are exposed from a variety of causes, such as the friction of stores

and other heavy articles in magazines and store rooms, the dragging to

and fro of boxes, cots and musquets in Barracks, &c. &c., whilst public

as well as private property suffers considerably from the facility of

access to white ants and damp through the slightest crevices in floors.

Who is not aware of the rapid increase of the smallest hole in a terrace

floor, and of the difficulty of efficient repair from the want of combina-

tion between the new and old material? It must surely then be no

small matter of consideration, the employment of a material which

offers a remedy for these evils, and affords a means of putting a stop

to the constantly recurring heavy outlay on repairs.

It is well known, that the use of a bituminous cement was common

in ancient structures, and history informs us, that the walls of Babylon,

that wonder of the world, were cemented with hot bitumen.* In the

* The Museum of the Society contains four bricks from Babylon, presented by Mr.

Rich, and marked with the arrow-headed characters. Qn the reverse of these the

bituminous cement is yet partially adhering, and upon examination, its chemical

characters were found closely to correspond with those of Captain Goodwyn’s Asphaltic

_ Mastic.—Eps.

536 Asphaltic Mastic, to Flooring, Roofing, No. 139.

destruction of some remains of fortifications, supposed to be of Roman

erection near Pyrimont about 45 years ago, so great was the tenacity

of the work, that it was not pulled down without the aid of gunpowder,

which circumstance led to an important discovery ; it was observed

that the cement resembled the asphaltic rock of Pyrimont, about five

miles North of Seyssel at the foot of the Eastern side of mount Jura,

on the right bank of the Rhone in the department de L’Ain. Several

applications of the substance were immediately made, and the experi-

ments on its properties as a cement for building masonry and keeping

out damp succeeded entirely, since which, the working of the material -

has become of great importance. In the immediate vicinity of the

asphalte is obtained a peculiar kind of mineral pitch, which mixed

in certain proportions with the asphalte, forms the mastic, the subject

of this memoir. Mr. Claridge, an English gentleman, has taken out

a patent for it in England, and is most successfully bringing it into

general use under the sanction of the Commissioners of woods and

forests.

The surface of the ground in the locality of its discovery is covered

by a molasse, consisting of silicious gravel and bitumen intercepted by

deep ravines. A mass of calcareous asphalte is situated between two

of the ravines, the external appearance of which is whitish, but inter-

nally it is of a deep brown color. The asphalte is equally diffused

throughout the rock, in some places more or less saturated, but in

others the calcareous matter is quite pure,* leading to the conclusion,

that the asphalte is ramified in veins in the mass under the molasse.

The calcareous asphalte is not stratified, fissures are seen intersecting

each other in all directions. Various are the opinions of its formation,

but the following is the most probable,—that it has been generated

by heat naturally acting on the bituminous matter below strata of

carbonate of lime ; some of the bitumen has passed up and mixed with

the lime, by nature adjusted in just such proportions as the lime would

absorb, thus has been effected by a natural force, what by art could

not have been, and it is this which renders this material so far superior

to any manufactured article.

The resinous and sulphuric particles have passed up to the surface

and formed a crust, so that the inflammable qualities, as well as the

* Bulletin de la Societé Geologique de la France, Vol. viii. p. 138.

1843. ] aud Hydraulic works in India. 537

naptha have been destroyed by volcanic agency, and the material is

not liable to ignition. The calcareous asphalte contains from 15 to 18

per cent. of bitumen, the remainder is carbonate of lime. The bitumen

from the results of experiments of a French chemist is found to be a

compound of

Resinous petroliferous matter, So .-- 60 to 70

Carbon, fe f ae aoe »»- 30 to 35

It is from the carbon that the dark color and property of hardening

in the air arises which renders it so useful in the arts. The spaces

below the carbonate of lime are fissures containing the mineral pitch,

which is formed of the heavier particles of bituminous matter and

carbon in another form, probably having experienced greater heat. As

used in England and the continent, the asphalte is reduced to powder

by baking, and being mixed with a proportion of about one-tenth its —

weight of the pitch and a fine grit, is reduced to a semifluid state, and

poured on to the spaces or moulds prepared.

For exportation, however, the substances are formed by the Company

in England into a mastic, and sent to distant parts in blocks of a ewt.

each ; by this means it is rendered useful to those who may not have

had the advantage of witnessing the mode of application in England,

as the mastic has merely to be heated, and laid down in the way which

will be described hereafter. The mastic possesses nearly the hardness

of stone, but preserves a certain elasticity which prevents the surface

from wearing or chipping, and carriage wheels and horses’ hoofs cannot

disturb the evenness and regularity of its surface. Not the least of its

valuable properties as a material for building purposes in India, is the

facility of its removal from place to place; after having been laid down

as a terrace in one building for years, it may be taken up, and re-

quires merely to be reheated to be laid down elsewhere with equal

utility. It is anti-electric, which makes it valuable for roofing pur-

poses, and is not inflammable, the quantity of pitch being so small.

The late fire at Hamburgh is proof of the non-inflammability of the

material, for the roofs of many houses were terraced with it, and

great alarm existed lest these roofs should burn and cause more

devastation ; they fell in solid masses unconsumed, and instead of serv-

| ing as fuel, extinguished in their fall, the flames beneath them. It is

wholly impervious to moisture, and can be extended indefinitely, and

538 Asphaltic Mastic, to Flooring, Roofing, LNo. 139.

and even where joints are necessary they can be so closed as to present

a continuous surface; neither does it impart taste, smell or color, to

any liquids that may come in contact with it when employed to line

tanks, vats, reservoirs, &c. Having thus stated its origin, composi-

tion and essential qualities, I will proceed to the modes of its ap-

plication.

The purposes to which it has been applied in France are so exten-

sive and various, that they first claim attention. The Chevalier de

Pambour states, that the pavements in several crowded thoroughfares

of Paris have been made of this substance for the last six years,* and

are now in excellent order. It has resisted the oscillation on suspension

bridges and the varying temperatures of heat and frost, the asphalte

being on such structures as perfect as the day it was laid down.

For roofing edifices, lining water reservoirs, and paving stables it has

been particularly useful, having been laid down seven years in the

stables of Cavalry Barracks. It has been extensively applied in the

fortifications of Lyons, as stated by M. Gahan, a Captain of Engineers,

also at Lisle and Vinceunes, and the Artillery have covered the roofs

of warehouses several years since in the arsenal at Douai, which have

withstood all weathers. The naval department also have made nu-

merous trials of it in the various buildings at the port of Toulon,

and it is being introduced into the other ports of France. The pave-

ment formed of it resists better than stone the friction of chains in

Dock Yards; and in Jails and Hospitals it has been used not only on

account of its durability, but that it keeps particularly clean, and

ablutions are performed more easily on it. The material is also used

on the “Pont Royal,” and ‘‘ Pont de Carrouse,” on the areas round

public fountains, in the court yards and extensive floors of colleges

and churches.

It has been employed as a cement, and is more particularly valuable

under this head for hydraulic works; several large tanks have been

constructed in Paris with it. The mode adopted has been to cover

the faces of the bricks that were to be exposed to the water with a

very thin coat of asphalte; they were set in fluid mastic instead of

cement, which was also poured into spaces, left for the purpose, of one-

fourth between the inner and outer bricks forming the side walls as

* This was stated in 1840.

1843.] and Hydraulic works in India. 539

the work advanced. The bottom was afterwards covered with three-

eighths of the mastic. Its use as a cement for hydraulic purposes is

not new, for Buffon in his Natural History, article ‘‘ Bitumen,” says,

** J’4i fait enduire il y a trente six ans un assez grand bassin du jardin

‘‘@Vhistoire naturelle qui depuis a toujours tenu parfaitement léau.”

That Buffon did so write is stated in a pamphlet called “ Observations

generales sur les mines bitumineuses du Pare de Pyrimont.” In the

‘« Place de la Concorde,” in the centre of which the Egyptian obelisk is

erected, about 24,000 square yards of most magnificent pavement are

laid down of asphalte in elegant mosaic work, the fluid substance

was spread in moulds of bar iron of the required pattern, which in this

instance is alternate squares of black and white, each square having a

circle of the opposite color to itself, in the centre. At the estate

of the Baron de Montmorenci is a conservatory floored in the most

splendid manner, the substance being formed into patterns of foliage

and scrolls, with a rich Grecian fretwork border. In London it has

been used in several places; the noble piece of pavement at Whitehall

and the carriage drive to the Ordnance Office may be cited as examples.

The roofs and terraces of several noblemen’s houses are covered with it,

and its efficiency universally acknowledged. In the manufacturing towns,

the floors of large workshops and store-rooms are laid with asphalte,

and the terraces of many sheds of railway stations. The whole of the

arches of the Greenwich railway are covered with it, with a view of

preserving that extensive viaduct free from damp. It is used as a

foot pavement in many of the metropolitan parishes and in country

towns also, and one of the principal streets of Liverpool is paved with

it, To such a mass of evidence of the great utility and value of the

material, as it has been applied in Europe, there is to be added the

experiment of its efficacy as lately laid down in Calcutta, the Court of

Directors having permitted the writer of this memoir to bring out a

ton of the mastic for the purpose of testing its fitness for the public

service. Petroleum oil is to be found in the neighbourhood of Rangoon,

and on the Irawadee N. E. of Pegu and elsewhere, which substance,

after the naptha is distilled from it,* will answer as a substitute for

* The price gained for the naptha might cover most of the expence of procuring

the Petroleum. Limestone impregnated with bitumen, dried, ground and mixed with

its own weight of coal tar is an admirable cement, and will form a most desirable

terrace ; its mode of using, the same as asphalte.

540 | Asphaltic Mastic, to Flooring, Roofing, [ No. 139.

the mineral pitch and render the asphalte cheaper to use in India, as

the pitch need not be exported. In case some such expedient should

be resorted to, I will here annex the cost of the separate material,

as well as of the mastic or compound as sold by the Proprietors in

London.

1 Ton of Asphalte powder igs out J. 02 Sa0. 10

Cask, &e. bi a asi adi

Mineral Pitch, (propesith 2 cwt.) ... sy BS

Total,:... £8. 2

The mastic is in blocks of 1 Cwt. each 18 x 6x 4 and £6 10s. per

Ton; with the mastic however a little pitch is necessary to flux the

first quantities when using, as will appear presently.

1 Ton of Asphalte, or .. 20 Cwt.

Fine Grit, ah cos =. 8 dO;

Pitch, ... er cae Jere Gd,

Total 30 Cwt. will cover a space of 400

feet 3/8 thick for flooring. Exported in large quantities the cost of

100 superficial feet would be from 12 to 15 Rupees, exclusive of the

substratum of concrete.

Instructions for use.

The mastic being ductile, great care must be taken to have a good

foundation of concrete, or lime gravel, or broken bricks, with a thin

coat of hydraulic mortar over all, the surface being made level: on this

the mastic in a semifluid state is laid 3/8 in thickness.

Mode of preparing the Mastic for use.

In the absence of a proper cauldron, such as is shewn in Fig A.

a large pitch pot may be used over a strong fire; the blocks are broken

up to the size of 5 or 6 ins. cube, and put into the cauldron with | per

cent. of pitch to flux the lower layer ; more mastic is put in by degrees

when the first quantity is melted, which will flux the rest in succession,

care being taken to stir it the whole time with the instrument shewn at B.

When the Cauldron is full or a sufficient quantity melted, and it has

assumed the consistency of jam, it is fit for use. If the work is ex-

to have been fixed only with respect to existing aurangs: new ones

Cauldron and instruments used in

laying Ayphalte loors

by Capt? Goodwyn BE.

Weed

——S

aa a we my

» oe 2, Oe

se j .

jamal xe Bas

eqger( ae -—e \~

# nS ay

Ri vr.

Le tei Se es Es:

a, SON CS ev

Rilehiids, as a

* Laka e

lea

Ny < 4

x Waa Cy ube

om ae reer eon

™ i

ul 4 *%

Pea

1843.] and Hydraulic works in India. o4l

tensive, a number of cauldrons should be heated at once, as one of the

indicated dimensions will not lay down more than 70 supl. feet.*

In laying it down, a lath of the required thickness of the coating is

placed across the floor or roof prepared as above, which from the wall

or curb, as the case may be, should divide the whole space into com-

partments of about 2/6 wide. It is necessary before laying down the

mass to cut a small channel (if for a floor under the wall, if for a ter-

race close to the curb) of 2 ins. wide and 1 deep, into which hot mastic

should be poured, and taken up again when settled in order to warm,

and enable the whole to bind and adhere at the edges. Into the com-_

partments above-mentioned the mastic is poured with a large ladle, the

bowl of which should be a foot in diameter and 6 inches deep, each

ladleful, as it is poured in, is rubbed from the centre towards the wall

or curb with a wooden float (made of cask staves), and a smoothing rod

of 3 feet long and 2 feet square is applied to level the surface by a man

immediately in rear of the one who uses the float, who also whilst the

substance is still hot sprinkles a powder on the surface through a very

fine sieve, composed of the finest sand and unslaked lime, reduced into

an impalpable powder in equal quantities, which is rubbed in with a flat

board, and gives a white surface to the terrace which does not wear off.

The surplus is carried forward with such a hand brush as the figure

shews, at C as soon as the liquid material is smoothed. Care should

be taken to force the substance well into edges and joints, and in remov-

ing the gauge rod not to lift it, as it may raise the asphalte with it ;

but by a gentle tap to loosen it horizontally from the mass. In laying

down at two different times, when the first layer has had time to harden,

the edge must be warmed with a little hot material laid on for a mi-

nute and removed, the work then to be proceeded with directly. Ifa

roof is covered with wood, coarse canvas should be stretched over it and

nailed, and the mastic laid on that, finishing it off with a fillet, as in D

of the plate. Store rooms and magazine floors should be 3/4 inch thick,

stables 4/8, and carriage drives 1, coverings of arches 3/8.

* The cauldron must not be left standing, as the material will burn.

542

Contributions towards a History of the Development of the Mineral

Resources of India. By S. G. Totzumacue Hearty, Ese.

No. 2. Memoranda relative to the working of Iron in Bengal.

The existence of iron in the districts of Balasore and Beerbhoom,

seems to have been known at the earliest period of British rule in the

country. With regard to Balasore, the following passage occurs in Cap-

tain Alexander Hamilton’s Account of a Voyage to the East Indies in

1708, [vol. 1, p. 395] :—

In two days I travelled from Badruc to Balasore, and saw nothing in the

way but things common and indifferent, the product of the country being

corn, cloth, iron, anise and cummin seeds, oil and bees’ wax. Iron is so

plentiful, that they cast anchors for ships in moulds; but they are not

so good as those made in Europe.

In Beerbhoom, iron manufacture seems to have been of not less anti-

quity. The ore which abounded in the district was dug out and

collected by a set of men, who sold it to the beparries or itinerant

dealers. A trifling contribution was levied on these miners by the Rajah

within certain limits, and by some other landholders in their estates.

The ore was carried by the beparries to established markets called

aurungs, where it was purchased by the smelters, whose furnaces or

saals adjoined the aurung. At these markets the Rajah had officers who

levied a duty from the smelters in proportion to the quantity manu-

factured : part of the levy was made at the kot-saal or roasting furnace,

and part at the khamar-saal, where the iron was finally prepared for use.

The whole of the collections thus made was entered under the head of loha

mahal, and was kept distinct in the Rajah’s accounts from the rent of the

land in which the aurungs lay. The Rajah again paid a certain assess-

ment on his profits to Government, which assessment was also designated

by the term loha mahal. The same item of Government accounts com-

prehended also the payments made by the few detached landholders, to

whom I have before alluded as imposing duties upon the miners in their —

estates. This detail will I think, in conjunction with the narrative

that follows, shew clearly, that the right of ownership of the iron was

1843. Mineral Resources of India. 543

vested in the sovereign authority, the zemindars only claiming pro-

perty in the ore by right of consideration paid into the treasury.

Further, the right to the mineral products of the land was distinctly

separated from the right of cultivation on the surface.

In 1774 a proposal was submitted by Indernarain Sermono to the

Burdwan Council, and by them to the Presidency one. The correspon-

dence is as follows :—

The Burdwan Council to Government.

** We transmit you copy of a proposal, which has been delivered to us

by Indernarain Sermono, for clearing away the jungle, and manufacturing

iron in a mountainous part of the district of Beerbhoom, together with the

sketch which accompanies it of the tract of country, for the lease of which

he has applied. We beg leave to submit it to your consideration, and

have only to observe, that by an inspection of the Mofussil accounts, none

of the places mentioned within the boundary he has described, appear

in the jumma of 1178, and that from the inquiries we have made, we

believe that tract of country to be in the unfruitful condition described

by him.—19¢h September, 1774.

eee

Indernarain Surma’s Proposals.

Jn the province of Beerbhoom, there is a considerable tract of mountain-

ous country overrun with jungles, and which, in its present uncultivated

state, serves no other purpose than that of a harbour of Choars, who live

upon plundering the inhabitants of the cultivated lands. Within this

space, there was formerly a village called Hatgatchya, situated about a

coss south of a hill called Monsa Pahr (both in the Pergunna of

Mallarpore). At first this village was much injured in 1174 and 1175

by the depredations of the Choars ; and in the year of the famine, the whole

of its inhabitants deserted the country around the village. On the north

side three coss, on the west three coss, on the south three-quarter of a coss,

and on the east two coss is an entire jungle, and yields no revenue. Ac-

companying is a sketch of it. This tract of country, in many parts of

which iron ore is to be found, I request the lease of, on the following

terms :— ;

The lease is to be granted tome for 7 or 10 years; for the first year,

on account of the great expense which I shall incur by cutting the jungle

544 Mineral Resources of India. [ No. 139.

and erecting saals (or smelting places), I can pay nothing. For three

following years I will pay 2000 Rs. per annum, and for the remaining

years of the lease, I will pay 5000 Rs. per annum, which shall be in full

of all rents or customs whatever.

I will engage, if business succeeds, to supply Government with what

iron they may want at the bazar price of the time they may demand it.

I will not force any ryots from the Malgoozary lands, nor give protec-

tion to any who may desert with arrears of rent due to the farmers.

The Choars and mountaineers, who at present infest the Malgoozary

lands, and by their violence cause the ryots to desert, will themselves

engage in the working of iron. They gave me assurance of this, when

I was lately in that country. I have travelled over the greater part of the

country described in my sketch; I am confident no part of it is either

included in the jumma of any of the present farmers, or yields any revenue

to Government; but should I be mistaken, and it be hereafter discovered to

contain any jumma lands, I will readily pay the highest rent that has

been received from it since the beginning of 1178.

If the above terms are accepted and a grant given me—should Govern-

ment, at the end of my lease, think proper to take it into their own hands—

in consideration for the expense and trouble I shall have been at, I request

a preference in farming it. In case they should not deem this advisable, I

request to be allowed, for the expense of all the buildings I may have

erected, whatever shall be determined to be their value by an Ameen sent

by Government.

Government to the Burdwan Council.

We approve of the proposals offered you by Indernarain Surma, for

clearing a part of the waste jungle lands of Beerbhoom, and manufacturing

iron ; and authorize you to grant him the necessary deeds accordingly, receiv-

ing from him such writings in return, as may bind him to the performance

of his engagements with Government, and the observance of the conditions

he himself proposes.—23d September, 1774.

Nothing more with reference to this attempt appears on record.

Perhaps the speculation was of too sanguine a complexion, as the high

rents offered lead us to apprehend, and was silently abandoned on

second thoughts by the projector. One thing is, however, proved by

it, and that is the /oha mahal already accruing to Government seems

1843. ] Mineral Resources of India. 545

to have been fixed only with respect to existing aurungs: new ones

might be founded and brought into operation by the enterprize of

individuals on their payment of a consideration to Government. The

farmers of the existing aurungs, among whom the Rajah of Beerbhoom

was the principal one without comparison, do not seem to have been

at all consulted as to the lease. They could not therefore have had

any right to the mineral product beyond what was specifically grant-

ed by Government, for the amount of consideration received. I am

anxious to draw attention to this fact, as this very pergunna of Mul-

larpore became subsequently the scene of a hotly contested law-suit,

involving the tenures of these loha mahals.

The next attempt was more fortunate. It was by Messrs. Motte

and Farquhar. In all similar transactions of that period, one partner

was, for obvious reasons, chosen from among the influential residents

of Calcutta. His watchful presence at the focus of intrigue was

required to defeat the machinations of interested parties, and enable the

others, the working bees, to pursue their speculations in comparative

quietness. To this patron, his clients could with ease afford a share of

the proceeds at a time when the profits of trade were enormous, and he

returned them, what was then indispensable—political protection.

Thomas Motte, the patron of the firm in the present case, was the

Superintendent of Police in the city, and an intimate friend of Warren

Hastings. He had been employed in 1766 by Lord Clive, on a mission

to Sumbhulpore, to open a trade in diamonds with that country ; a previ-

ous attempt by Captain Mallock, under the direction of Henry Vansit-

tart having failed. Motte’s endeavours were equally unsuccessful,—a

result which he attributed to the indolence of the inhabitants, and the

iron rule of the Mahrattas, who at the period held the country as

far as the Soobunreeka. An account, interesting in all its features, of

this expedition drawn up by Motte, appears in the Asiatic Annual

did not seem to take much interest in the iron speculation about to

be narrated: and from some of the partizan pamphlets that were

showered about so thickly during Hastings’ trial, I learn that he must

have died a little before it, broken in spirit and fortune.

John Farquhar is not unfamiliarly known to many of my readers as the

individual who subsequently purchased Fonthill Abbey, from the cele-

546 Mineral Resources of India. [ No. 139.

brated Beckford. His peculiarities, his parsimonious habits, his shrewd-

ness, his eye ever watchful over his interests,’ were sketched with

great felicity in that cleverest of periodicals, Knight’s Quarterly Maga-

zine, in ‘ An unpublished episode in the Life of Vathek.”

Steel through opposing plate the magnet draws,

And steely atoms culls from dust and straws ;

And thus our hero, to his interest true,

Gold through all bars and from each trifle drew.

But the qualities which emphatically make the man, as distinguished

from the merely social man—the bold speculative genius, the independent

character, the untiring perseverance, the readiness to grapple with

obstacles, the skill to overcome them—these do not fall within the pro-

vince of the light littérateur. They are written in an alphabet and

a language of their own, impressed in indelible characters upon the

freedom, the national character, or the commercial prosperity of the

country, where such men have existed. They may be forgotten, or they

may become inappreciable to careless observers in the lapse of years ;

but they continue to exert an influence, not loud but deep, through

time—as surely as are propagated the undulatory impulses

From world to luminous world afar,

though infinite to the failmg sense may seem the spaces between.

Such qualities mingled in the character of John Farquhar : they won for

him prosperity in his lifetime: and respect from those whose respect

compensated for the gibe of the jester.

The Memorial submitted by these gentlemen to the Council of War-

ren Hastings, I subjoin entire :—

How’sxe Sir ann GentLemen,—Having the greatest confidence that any

scheme proposed for the advantage of the Hon’ble Company, or for the

good of this country, will always be received in the most favorable, and

discussed in the most candid manner at your Hon’ble Board, we beg leave

to offer to your consideration the following plan, for casting the H. C.’s

shot and shells in Bengal, and for working a lead mine lately discovered

in Ramghur.

The first part of our plan, you well know, Gentlemen, is no new scheme ;

for it appears by the following quotation from a letter of Lord Clive and

1843.] Mineral Resources of India. 547

the Select Committee in the year 1765, that the casting of shot and shells

in this country had been deemed by the Company an object of importance.

‘‘ The iron-founder whom you sent out in the Kent died on his passage to this

“place; but as the casting of shot and shells in this country is an object

‘“‘of great importance, we strongly recommend that you will supply the

‘‘loss as soon as possible, by sending three or four persons well versed in

“that business, that our whole design may not be frustrated by such

‘‘ an accident in future.” —[ Vo. 86 of Appendix to Report from the Select Com-

mittee of the House of Commons, Vol. 1. ]

In consequence of this application, a Mr. St. Quintin was sent out: but

he likewise died a short time after his arrival.

We suppose that on account of the death of those two founders, and of

the great expense of the cannon foundry, the thoughts of this undertak-

ing have been laid aside: for we conceive that every reason which at

that time made it to be looked upon as an object of importance has ever

since remained equally forcible, and the present aspect of the affairs of

Europe appears to us a very powerful additional one.

. Besides the advantages which the Honorable Company proposed to

themselves by erecting an iron foundry in Bengal, we beg leave to men-

tion some others, which we have reason to imagine were not at that time

thought of. Should iron trucks, lately introduced for garrison gun carri-

ages, be approved of by the Board of Ordnance, the supplying of them

here would certainly be very desirable.

But the greatest object, and which perhaps in time may be esteemed of

considerable importance not only to the Company, but even to the nation,

is the casting of cannon and mortars of a quality, superior to that of the

ordnance of any other state. For amongst the various ores produced in

this country, there is one found in Beerbhoom, and in great abundance in

Ramghur, which yields an iron so extremely soft, as to be fit for few of the

common purposes of life: but this property renders it in an eminent de-

gree superior to all other kinds, for almost every work in cast iron, and

particularly for the fabrication of cannon.

This quality the celebrated M. Reaumur, M. Buffon, and some others of

the most eminent French naturalists and mineralogists, have been long en-

deavouring to give to cast iron, principally with a view of improving the

artillery,* and their labours have been much approved of by the Ministry.

The same thing has been lately attempted in England, but without much

success. The only iron ore that we know of, possessing nearly the same

* Witness two Memoirs by M. Buffon; the one on the Smelting of Iron Ores,’’ the

other entitled, ‘‘ Observations and Experiments made with a view to improve the Art of

_ “casting Iron Cannon, Paris 1775.”

548 Mineral Resources of India. [ No. 139.

property, is one, amidst upwards of 60 different kinds, described by the

Abbé Chappe, the produce of Siberia, and he regrets that the iron of it

is not more known in France.

Now we conceive that by casting that peculiar iron in the form of kent-

ledge, and by exchanging it with that of the Europe ships, such quantities

of it could be sent to England, as would be a valuable addition to the

Honourable Company’s commerce, and the Europe kentledge might be sold

to advantage for the use of country ships: for besides its being as admi-

rably adapted to the fabrication of artillery, it would be of equal value for

several other uses, but particularly for wire-drawing, and we flatter our-

selves that it might be the means of securing to some of the British ma-

nufactures that superiority which they have hitherto Bais over those

of every other nation.

The benefits which would accrue to this country in particular from the

establishment of iron works would undoubtedly be very considerable, for

at present vast numbers of cast iron pots, frying pans, and other utensils

are yearly imported into Bengal from China, and are sold at very high

rates; but by supplying the market with these articles manufactured within

the Company’s possessions, not only considerable sums would be saved,

but a valuable branch would be added to the exports of this settlement.

Cylinders for sugar mills, boilers for sugar works, salt works, saltpetre

works, and for several other purposes are much wanted: and there is no

doubt but they would greatly contribute to the improvement of those

manufactures. Cast-iron rails, pale-gates, and rails for staircases and bal-

conies, would add much to the beauty, as well as to the convenience of

the houses in Bengal. And every merchant will allow, that iron kentledge

for the country ships, especially such as are employed in the cotton trade; is

an object of the greatest importance to the commerce of this port. How

far it would be politic to give such encouragement to the manufacture of

bar iron and steel in the Western Provinces, as would enable them to sup-

ply all Bengal, and consequently to prevent the other European nations

from importing any, you, Gentlemen, are best able to judge. This would

undoubtedly be highly beneficial to the country, both by furnishing the

implements of agriculture readier and at a much cheaper rate than they

can be procured for, at present; and by saving very considerable sums

which now go to Balasore for Mahratta iron and steel, with which last arti-

cle these provinces, you well know, Gentlemen, are very ill supplied. And

certain it is, that this could in no way affect the interest of the mother

country: for it is well known, that instead of being able to exports iron

and steel of the produce of Great Britain, she is obliged to import at least

two-thirds of what is used in her own manufacture. Nor will the increase

1843. ] Mineral Resources of India. 549

of iron works in England ever be judged good policy, as they have alrea-

dy destroyed some of the finest forests of oak, and as the workmen requir-

ed for them can be employed to greater national advantage in the finer

manufactures. We know that the French have, within a few years past,

erected some very fine forges in the Isle of France, whether with the

view of being able to undersell every other nation trading to India, in

the articles of iron and steel, or of supplying the country powers with

artillery in the most secret manner—we cannot pretend to say: but from

the extreme lowness of the price of slaves there, we think it highly

probable, that they will be enabled to do both as soon as the islands are

sufficiently cultivated to produce provisions in plenty for their inhabitants,

especially as it appears from what M. Bougainville (in his Voyage round

the Earth,) says of those works, that their owners are supported by the

French Government.

We shall now, Gentlemen, take the liberty to offer our sentiments with

respect to the utility of working the lead mine in Ramghur. This mine

consists of one small vein, which produces the ore known to mineralogists

by the name of Potter’s lead ore, because instead of being smelted on

account of its metal, it is usually sold with greater advantage to those arti-

ficers for the purpose of glazing their wares. Now as no people make

more use of earthenware than the natives of this country, and none are

worse provided with materials for glazing it, the only means of rendering

it neat or cleanly, or capable of containing fluids for any considerable

time, we presume it would not be very difficult to introduce this improve-

ment into common use. Besides, as all lead ores are known to contain a

certain portion of silver, though generally too small to bear the expense

of extracting it, we might perhaps find this ore worth treating upon that

account, since fuel is remarkably cheap in Ramghur, and since the litharge

into which the lead must be converted in order to obtain its silver, would

answer still better the purpose of the potter than the raw ore.

Another beneficial consequence of working this mine would be, the sup-

plying of the market at Patna with lead ore: for at present considerable

quantities are carried thither, and sold by the name of surma (antimony).

This ore is brought from countries to the westward of any of the Compa-

ny’s possessions, and is used by the country people chiefly for colouring

their eyelids. We have had it very accurately assayed, and can pronounce

with the utmost degree of certainty, that it is a true lead ore, not contain-

ing the smallest particle of antimony.* « .

* I might as well state here, on the strength of repeated analysis, that no small

portion of what is sold at this day in the bazars, under the name of surma, is a

sulphuret of lead without a particle of antimony. ‘l'’o those who physic their own

horses, this hint may not be valueless.—S. G. T. H.

550 Mineral Resources of India. [No. 139.

This undertaking would certainly prove very advantageous to the pro-

vince of Ramghur, by procuring employment for a tribe of people found

there and in the neighbouring provinces called Coles, who at present live

in the jungles almost in the state of nature: yet although totally unac-

quainted with the conveniencies and comforts of a settled and civilized state

of life, they are easily induced to quit their retreats, and are then found to

become tractable and good labourers.

But we find our letter has extended to a length we little thought of: we

shall therefore, Gentlemen, intrude no further upon your time, dedicated

to affairs of so much greater moment, than to propose to you the terms

which we think would enable us to carry our plan into execution. .

After having obtained the best information in our power, we are of opi-

nion that the pergunna called Jerriah, lying between the rivers Dummooda

and Barracar in the province of Pachete, is the fittest situation for the iron

work. The river Dummooda is navigable as high as that place; it abounds

with iron ores, and has the singular advantage of being contiguous to the

coal mines of which Messrs. Sumner and Heatly have a grant.

We propose then :—

I. That a sufficient quantity of land in the pergunna of Jerriah in Pa-

chete, (or in any other province if appearing more advantageously situated

for that purpose,) be assigned to us, for erecting the iron furnace and ware-

houses, and for the habitations of the workmen and labourers, to be held

by the same tenure, by which Messrs. Touchet and Prinsep hold their

lands.

That a like quantity of ground be granted to us for similar purposes,

and on the same condition (if at present paying rent to the Company) at

the lead-mine, but if Jaghire, that we be permitted to buy from the Ja-

ghiredars such lands as may be requisite for the settlement of our people,

and particularly Dungherra valley, without which it would be impossible to

carry on the work, as the Jaghiredars we well know would levy such heavy

contributions on our workmen, were they in their power, as would prevent

them from working under higher wages than we could afford to give :—

II. That we be granted the exclusive privilege of working iron and steel

in the European manner within any part of the Honorable Company’s

possessions which lie on the west side of the meridian of Burdwan, and

of selling the produce of such manufacture, free from duty, in any place

under the presidency of Fort William, for the term of nineteen years.

That we be granted likewise the exclusive right of working the mines of

whatever ores or minerals are not at present wrought by the country peo-

ple within the aforesaid limits for the same number of years. By this ar-

ticle, however, we have no idea of prejudicing the rights of Messrs. Sumner

and Heatly, who, you know, Gentlemen, have the exclusive privilege of

1843.] Mineral Resources of India. 551

working the mines of coal, or of any mineral or metal, iron excepted, with-

in certain districts of Beerbhoom and Pachete :—

Ill. That we enjoy the immediate protection of your Hon’ble Board,

and be in no manner subject to the direction or control of the Burdwan

Council, or of any of the Company’s servants resident in the provinces

within the above-mentioned limits, because should the Hon’ble Company

ever be pleased to allow their officers of revenue the benefit of trade—it is

obvious how much our works would interfere with their interest ; and in

case of disputes happening between the Zemindars or Farmers, and our

Agents, they would sit as judges partly in their own cause. But that

should any disputes arise, they may be determined by arbitration, or if

becoming of a serious nature, by Commissioners sent from the Presidency

—we obliging ourselves to abide by the decision of your Hon’ble Board on

their report, and if found in the wrong, to pay the expense of such inquiry :—

IV. That we be permitted to employ Europeans in our works ; we giving

security, if required, for the good behaviour of those employed in the execu-

tion of that part of our plan which is of a private nature, but that such as

may be required on account of the Hon’ble Company’s work be on the

same footing as the artificers of their contractors, who enjoy the greatest

privileges :—

V. That we be allowed to take into partnership any person or persons

whom we may at any time judge necessary to assist us in conducting our

designs :—

VI. That on our part, we engage to erect furnaces and all other neces-

sary works, and to keep workmen in constant readiness at our own

expense, and that on application being made to us for any number of shot

and shells, we oblige ourselves to begin the casting of them immediately, and

to employ our furnaces for that purpose only, until such number be com-

pleted ; and to deliver them at Fort William at four-fifths the price which

the Hon’ble Company’s shot and shells now stand them when landed at the

same place :—

VIL. That after the expiration of two years from the time of opening

the lead mine, we allow the Company one-twentieth part of the profits

which may accrue to us by the working of it, to be estimated by the pro-

fits of the two first years :—

VIII. That as the exemption from duty of our bar iron may be prejudi-

cial to the interest of the persons who farm the Loha mahals in Beerbhoom,

we engage to take their farms on the terms and conditions by which they

are at present held.

We have now, Gentlemen, done ourselves the honour to lay our design

before you: happy shall we be if it meet with your approbation, as we then

552 Mineral Resources of India. [ No. 139.

hope, and indeed make not the least doubt, that you will give us every en-

couragement and assistance, which may enable us to carry it into execu-

tion. We have the honor to be, &c. &c.

T. Morte,

Calcutta, the 4th Nov. 1777. JOHN Farqunar.

The proposal was the same day sent to Mr. Alexander Higginson

and the Provincial Council of Burdwan, with instructions to report on

the facts stated ; whether the grant solicited would prove of detriment

to the state or to private interests; to detail the statistics of the

pergunna Jerriah, and to give such other information as may bear on

the subject of the proposal.

Two months having elapsed without any answer being returned by

the Burdwan Authorities, their memory was refreshed by a takeed at

the suggestion of Mr. Farquhar, who from this time appears alone in the

transactions connected with this speculation. I annex the reply

complete :—

The Burdwan Council to Government.

Hon’sxe Sir anp Sirs,—We have received your commands of the 6th in-

stant, requiring an immediate reply to your letter of the 6th January last,

respecting the proposals made by Messrs. Motte and Farquhar.

As the information you were pleased to require appeared to us of such

a nature that the event of the proposals depended much upon our answer

to the several points which we were directed to investigate, and as the dis-

tance of the pergunna Jerriah rendered it impracticable for us to ascertain

the necessary facts without a local inquiry, we therefore stated them to Mr.

Hewett at Jellda, who in consequence sent an Ameen named Seebnarain

into the pergunna Jerriah, and who, you will perceive from the enclosed

translation of his letter to Mr. Hewett, could not obtain any account of the

amount of the Jaghire lands in that pergunna, though from the said letter

it is fully evident, that the Zemindar and inhabitants appear to be pleased

with the prospect of having an iron manufactory established in the coun-

try. The annual revenue to Government of the pergunna Jerriah is Rs.

2661. We have directed Mr. Hewett to use his endeavour to obtain fur-

ther information, which should we receive, shall be immediately transmit-

ted to you.

The death of the late Rajah of Beerbhoom we conceive has been the

principal cause of our not having received the information required from

that district. We however expect it daily, and will immediately transmit

the particulars.

1843.) Mineral Resources of India. 558

From the materials and information we have hitherto been able to ob-

tain, we do not deem ourselves competent to give a definitive opinion, but

as we conceive, allowing in general that the introduction of a new manu-

factory into any district must be beneficial to the public as well as to

individuals, that the greatest difficulty Messrs. Motte and Farquhar will

have to struggle with, will arise from the Jaghiredars and other landhold-

ers in Jerriah. We would therefore recommend to those gentlemen to

make themselves acquainted with the difficulties which we apprehend, and

to endeavour to obviate them, before they commence their manufactory,

by reconciling the landholders and other inhabitants of the several

districts in which they propose to be engaged.

Burdwan, the 13th March, 1778.

Report of Seebnarain to Mr. Hewett, referred to in the above.

Five days before my arrival, Rajah Mohunt Sing, with all his family

and servants of every denomination, had gone into the jungles; not one

of them attended me. I sent the perwanna you gave me for the Rajah

by the hand of one of his people to him; upon reading the perwanna, he

said that he was willing to furnish the articles of merchandize, (to wit

iron,) but that he could not produce the Jaghiredars: that he would give

his assistance in every thing which was required of him. This message he

sent by one of his own people. Ifthe Jaghiredars abscond, how is it possi-

ble for me to send you the accounts you require? You will be informed

of every thing by the Moonshee, that not a cowree of money has been

received upon account of the three Turoffs up to the month of Maug.

The people are, through rascality, wandering up and down the country.

Munsab Kell, &c. who went to Burdwan, have been arrived here three days.

The Zemindars and all the people are pleased with the proposals for manu-

_facturing the iron.

A more interesting report was sent in by Mr. Ramus, the Collector of

Ramghur. This gentleman, at his entrance into the service, had been

placed as assistant to Mr. Heatly in these districts. He was well

known to his contemporaries as a devoted sportsman.

The Collector of Ramghur to Government,

Hon’sie Sir anv Sirs,—I have been honoured with your letter of the

6th instant, enclosing a copy of the proposals from Messrs. Motte and

Farquhar, for casting the Hon’ble Company’s shot and shells in Bengal, and

554 Mineral Resources of India LNo. 189.

for working a lead mine lately discoveredin Ramghur. In compliance with

your orders, 1 do myself the honour of giving you every information in my

power on the subject of both.

In the province of Ramghur, and in several contiguous pergunnas, an iron

ore has been discovered these many years past, and worked both by the

natives and by families who have long settled here merely to carry on the

employ. They have ever met with great encouragement, as it has been pro-

ductive of two very good consequences :—an inducement to the Calcutta

merchants to negotiate in these parts; and a duty on its transportation,

in which article the greatest part of the Sayer is comprehended, which

enables the Rajah to make some addition to the Hon’ble Company’s reve-

nue: besides a consideration he annually receives from the heads of the

trade for his permission and protection.

The iron is esteemed a very inferior sort, nor has the undertaking ever

been carried on anywise extensively, owing to the great scarcity of la-

bourers, (the country in general being much in want of ryots,) and their

simple and tedious method of working it.

There is not a doubt from the quality of the ore, that the plan proposed

may be prosecuted with the greatest ease; but not I imagine without being

in some measure prejudicial to the country: as so capital an undertaking

would require more workmen than these provinces could with convenience

spare. Ramghur in particular severely feels that want, for there are many

villages in it, and I may say pergunnas, almost wholly depopulated.

The tribe of people called Coles are the immediate natives of Nagpore, who

seldom leave that country but in small numbers, which even then proves

hurtful to the neighbouring countries, unless shortly restored.

As the Company have never profited by such discovery any further than

by a trifling increase of revenue, nor on the present mode does it promise

any greater; should the proposal of Messrs. Motte and Farquhar appear

to the Hon’ble Board advantageous, the only public detriment will be

their great call for labourers, and the remission which the Rajah would.

apply for, to be made from his settlement, of as much as the duty and

allowance annually amounts to.

With regard to private property, it would uo farther be a prejudice than

by obliging those to discontinue the business, who have for many years

past been concerned in it, and who have made the necessary advances for

a continuation: not that any of the labourers have purchased the spots, or

entered into any agreement with the Rajah for his permission for any

length.

The lead-mine having been so lately made known and worked to so

trifling a degree, it is not in my power to give you any very particular in-

1843. ] Mineral Resources of India. 555

formation concerning it. The vein runs but a short way, but the appear-

ance of the adjoining spots gives every reason to imagine it does not termi-

nate in that one alone. The situation is southerly of Chattra, about 8 coss

in the pergunna of Colrampore : the mine is at a place called Seedipore, the

Jaghire of one of the Rajah’s family, who concludes the mine not to be lead

but Surma ; on which account he has never taken any steps towards work-

ing it.

I should have visited the place immediately I was honoured with your

letter to have more fully informed myself, did not the troubles which pre-

vail in many places here render my presence at Chattra absolutely neces-

sary.

Ramghur, 19th January, 1778.

On the 17th March, the Government wrote to the Burdwan Council

to put Mr. Farquhar in possession of the iron mines of Pachete, and

to grant him such formal authorities as may be requisite: he satisfying

the Zemindars or Jaghiredars for such rights as they may possess. On

Mr. Farquhar’s receiving a notice to the same effect, he addressed Go-

vernment in reply, begging that Beerbhoom might be inserted instead

of Pachete, in the instructions to the Burdwan authorities, as the ores

of Ramghur and Beerbhoom are by much the fittest for cast works:

while those of Pachete on the contrary produce a brittle short iron,

which, though good enough for shot and shells, is by no means proper

for the fabrication of cannon. He also states his reason for specifying

Jerriah, to have been its central situation between Beerbhoom and Ram-

ghur, and concludes with begging permission to observe that—

* Were he allowed to hold the iron farms at the rents which they at

‘“‘ present yield to the Honourable Company, every source of dispute with

“the country people would be obviated, and the peons requisite for the

*‘ collection of the duties would afford sufficient protection to the works

** against the hill people without a guard of Sepoys, which I am informed

** will otherwise be absolutely necessary.”

The Government made the requisite alteration of name, but took no

notice of the concluding hint. Farquhar, however, was not the person

to yield his point so easily; and without stirring from Calcutta, he not

only repeated the application, but rather considerably increased its

extent :—

556 Mineral Resources of India. [ No. 139.

Mr. Farquhar to the Government.

Hown’sie Sir AnD GenTLEMEN,—It is with the greatest reluctance I bring

myself to trouble you with a fresh application, but the many inconveni-

ences I foresee I should have to labour under in executing your orders of

the 20th February, if possessing no influence amongst the miners, oblige

me once more to request that you will be pleased to grant me the farm of

the duties on the Beerbhoom iron. And as this has no connection with

the farms of the land, and yields to Government only 766 Rupees a-year,

I flatter myself that you will not deem my request unreasonable.

I beg, Gentlemen, that you will likewise please to order that I be fur-

nished with a letter of credit on the Burdwan Council, to the amount of

five or six thousand Rupees for carrying on the works.

Calcutta, 28th April, 1778.

The Council ordered the farm of the iron mahals to be made over to

Mr. Farquhar, but considered the advance unnecessary, as their orders

of the 20th February, related to the experimental casting of four guns,

which they now revoked.

Farquhar went down into Beerbhoom, and soon found his shrewd-

ness sufficiently tasked by the natives, with regard to the settlements

he was expected to make with the Zemindars.

Mr. Farquhar to Mr. Marriott and the Council of Burdwan.

GENTLEMEN,—I beg leave to trouble you for a few minutes on the sub-

ject of my farm of the iron mahals of Beerbhoom.

On my arrival here, I found that the rents had been raised the year be-

fore from 766 Rupees to 3,262 Rupees; at the same time it appeared by the

papers of the Aurungs, that the whole collections did not amount nearly

to that sum. I found likewise that the same person held the farm of the

iron mahal and of the Noony pergunnah, and that at the very time when

this increase was made on the mahals, he got an abatement of 4,471 Ru-

pees on the pergunnah, by which he was in fact a gainer of 1,975 Rupees

a-year.

The reason of this voluntary increase on the mahals was not difficult to

discover. By this means the farmer imagined he had secured to himself

the constant possession of them, as the people at the Aurungs were sensi-

ble that the sum collected was much less than this nominal jumma.

The Malgoozaree of Belputtah is estimated at 131 Rupees, on the sup-

position of there being sixteen saals, (furnaees,) but in reality there are

1843. ] Mineral Resources of India. 507

only eleven. Dehra Mourissa, Azimnagur, and Ahmednuggur are valued

at 169 Rupees, where there has not been a single saa/, nor scarcely an in-

habitant since the famine. I would, Gentlemen, send proofs to you of what

I advance, were not one of your members, (Mr. Pye,) perfectly acquainted

with the facts.

I have likewise to observe, that the Governor and Council were pleased

to direct that the farm should be let to me by your Board without menti-

oning a word of the Zemindar, as will appear by the enclosed letter. The

Rajah’s Dewan, however, says, that they are still included ,in his doleputtah,

and of consequence that I must hold them in cutkina of him. I hope there-

fore, Gentlemen, that you will be pleased to order them to be struck out

of the doleputtah, and to direct that the Honourable Company’s Dewan

receive the rents from me at the former jumma.

Beerbhoom, 15th October, 1778.

_ The Burdwan Council examined into these statements, and find-

ing them true, addressed the supreme authority to the effect, that

believing their intention to have been essential assistance to Mr. Far-

quhar, in establishing and prosecuting the business of an iron manufac-

tory at Beerbhoom, they wished to be authorized :—frst, to let the

iron mahals to Mr. Farquhar on a fixed annual jumma of 766 Rupees ;

second, to receive the Jumma from Mr. Farquhar, and to strike off its

amount from the general jumma to be paid by the Zemindars; and

third, to release Mr. Farquhar from all responsibility to the Zemindar

of Beerbhoom. All this confirms the view that the property was

vested in Government, who were free to improve their revenue deriv-

able from it, the leases not being mocurruree, by farming it to the

highest bidder, or to one at least who promised to increase its value.

It was agreed by Government to fix Farquhar’s jumma at the origi-

nal sum, but they did not fail to direct, that the land revenue of the

Noony pergunnah should be raised to its proper assessment.

Relieved from these annoyances, Farquhar seems to have set to work

with some ardour, but in a few months, we find him again importuning

the Government for pecuniary assistance :—

Mr. Farquhar to the Gevernment.

Honoraste Sir anp Gentiuemen,—Although you were pleased to

countermand the directions you had given me last year, to make a trial

558 Mineral Resources of India. [No. 139.

of the country ore for casting iron cannon, I have notwithstanding applied

my whole attention to that object ever since. I had resolved not to trou-

ble your Honorable Board for any pecuniary assistance, till I should be

able to produce a gun as a specimen of my work. But the expense of

cutting down jungle, of erecting a dwelling bungalow, and several neces-

sary buildings for artificers, of preparing materials for forming a dam and

of cutting part of a canal for supplying the bellows-wheel with water, has

amounted to such a sum, that I find myself unable to go on with the work

unless assisted by Government. And I trust, Gentlemen, that you will not

suffer an undertaking to fail which was formerly approved by the Honor-

able Company, and was twice attempted to be carried into execution en-

tirely at their expense.

I have estimated that it will require only fifteen thousand Rupees to

finish the canal sluices, &c. and to erect one furnace capable of casting a

12-Pounder.

Should you be pleased to grant this sum, I make no doubt of your ap-

proving the following proposal. There are at present fifty matchlock-men

maintained at the Company’s expence, chiefly for the protection of the

iron trade. As there is no check on their Sirdar, their number is never com-

plete, nor is their appearance such as to keep the hill people in awe. Should

you think fit, Gentlemen, to put them under my orders, to raise their pay

from 3 to 4 Rupees, and to allow them 50 stand of arms, I would engage

to clothe them uniformly, and to teach them to fire at a mark. They

would then afford sufficient protection not only to the foundry, but to the

adjacent country, which, in case of Capt. Browne’s corps being recalled,

will be much exposed to the incursions of the Choars.

Calcutta, 20th June, 1779. J. Farquuar.

Government simply requested to be informed, in answer to this letter,

the specific engagements into which Farquhar was willing to enter asa

return for the assistance solicited. These, Farquhar lost no time in

supplying :—

Mr. Farquhar to the Government.

Hon’sLe Str anp GenTLEMEN,—As success in casting guns is not abso-

lutely certain, it is notin my power to enter into any agreement respecting

them. But should I fail in bringing them to the requisite degree of per-

— +. ee eee ee ee

1843. ] Mineral Resources of India. 559

fection, I conceive it will still be advantageous to have a foundry always

in readiness for casting shot and shells. Mr. Osborne lately applied to me

for 100 7-inch shells, which he was much in want of, and which it was not:

thought proper to spare from the stores. And some of our officers were

not long ago reduced to the expedient of casting shells of a sort of bell

metal for the reduction of several mud forts in the Doab. Besides, Gentle-

men, I presume it will appear to you an object of some degree of import-

ance to cast shot for the French guns that are already in our possession,

or may be taken in the course of the war, otherwise they must be absolute-

ly useless.

I propose then after sufficient time for finishing the works being

allowed :—

First.—To deliver at the New Fort such shot and shells, as may have

been required, at 15 per cwt. under what they at present stand the

Hon’ble Company when landed at the same place, to the amount of the

sum which your Hon’ble Board may be pleased to indulge me with.

Second.—To enter into an engagement for any number of years either

now or after having made good the above sum to furnish whatever num-

ber of shot and shells may be demanded on the same terms, provided they

be for the use of the Hon’ble Company’s garrisons or armies; but that I

may be allowed to supply country ships, or their captains or owners pro-

ducing a licence signed by the Military Store Keeper, or any other officer

authorized by Government.

Third.—To give security for faithfully fulfilling these articles.

Calcutta, 28th June, 1779. J. Farquuar.

This letter was followed up by the present of a 6lb. shot as a spe-

cimen of his casting. It seems not to have been smooth, which he

accounts for by the small size of the furnace which allowed charcoal

and dross to enter the mould. He states also, that the furnace proposed

to be erected will contain 15 cwt. of metal at a time.

On the receipt of this last shot, Government surrendered at discre-

tion, and the advance of 15,000 Rupees was sanctioned, as well as

the transference of the matchlock guard.

Farquhar now commenced in earnest. In the report on the proposed

construction of the Rajmahl Canal,* furnished to Government, [July,

* If it were permitted to turn from the history of that which has been, to that which

has not been—a parenthetical sigh might here be offered up to the memory of this un-

dertaking ; so ably sketched, and completed in all its details—on paper. ‘* Heu!

_ quanto minus est ctim reliquis versari quam tui meminisse!’? May we hope that cir-

cumstances will draw attention again to it! S.1G. TH.

560 Mineral Resources of India. [No. 139.

1832,] by Colonel Forbes, the following allusions to his labours oc-

CUR Ss

Par. 115. That good building stone may be obtained in the vicinity of the More,

we are aware from the fact, that in a locality adjoining it, the late Mr. Farquhar

constructed a dam, (stated to have been of an excellent quality of this material, ) for

the purpose of turning a stream of water over the wheel of a mill proposed to be

employed by him in rolling out iron prepared on the spot from the ore. This dam

was considered by the late Mr. Cheap, of Surool, to present the best specimen of

masonry at the time (forty years ago,) to be met with in India.

Par. 117. Broken up for its materials, and consequently neglected, it is believed

that at present no part of the dam alluded to, remains. Those who knew Mr.

Farquhar, will however acknowledge, that previous to embarking in such a specula-

tion, no man was more likely to have been cautious in his enquiries, and few better

able to conduct them. .

Par. 118. Certain it is that had the time and talents devoted by Mr. Farquhar

tothe making of gunpowder been continued to his iron works, the artof manufacturing

iron would ere now have been far enough advanced, to have importantly facilitated

the construction of this Canal, and many other works of public utility.

Farquhar was not, however, permitted to proceed in peace. The un-

expected manceuvre of renting the /oha mahal direct from Government,

had completely disconcerted the plans of annoyance already prepared by

the landholders. Continual efforts were made to surprise the autho-

rities into some orders that might afford ground for litigation on the

right to the loha mahal. In the meantime new aurungs were esta-

blished by the Zemindar, who used the uncontrolled power possessed by

landholders over the peasantry of their estates, to ruin Farquhar in

every way. His people were molested, fuel obstructed, miners bribed

away, and perwannas for private furnaces issued.

On the 10th May 1784, a paper of proposals was presented to the

Committee of Revenue, to farm Beerbhoom from Government. It con-

tained the following paragraph :—

‘‘That the farmer be allowed to examine the hustaboed of the loha mahal

which is included in the jumma, and under-farm it to such persons as the

farmer shall like.”’

The proposals were rejected. In August, the Zemindar Zemaun

Khan presented a Wazeeb-ul-urz, in which he treats the loha mahal as

his property as a matter of course.

1843.] Mineral Resources of India. 56]

I request permission to encourage and improve the iron mahal in my

zemindary, the produce of which, provided I am allowed to attend to

the improvement of it without interruption or check, will in a great

measure make up for the want of assets in the malgoozary mahals.

Committee’s Order.—The above iron mahal was granted to Mr. Fargu-

har by the Honorable the Governor General in Council, and must remain

in his possession according to the terms of the grant, as he has hitherto

held it.

In September, Farquhar represented the state of affairs to the Board of

Revenue, and the attempts the Zemindar made to oust him. He pointed

out clearly, that he was only responsible to Government for the loha ma-

hal; but that no official alteration had been made in the Rajah’s sunnud

as directed in October 1778, and the annoyance had been renewed : he

forwarded his sunnuds, such as they were. The Board ‘referred the

matter to Government, and received orders to act vigorously. A per-

wanna was despatched to Beerbhoom, forbidding the Zemindar to inter-

fere with the tron mahal, ordering him to send in a list of the new

furnaces built, and to produce his authority for so doing.

In 1786, new authorities having arisen, ‘ who knew not Joseph,’ the

attack was immediately renewed. The Zemindar, in arrears to Govern-

ment, put down Farquhar as his debtor for the rent due on the loha

mahal at 953 Rupees, and requested the Collector to levy accordingly.

Farquhar, as might be expected, calmly denied any connection whatever

with the Zemindar. The Collector was puzzled; there were records,

it is true, in his office, but to disturb their venerable dust! a reference

for orders was made to the Board. Farquhar’s sunnuds were at that

moment in the records of the Board, never having been returned. A

call was made on him to produce them. He preserved a solemn silence.

The call was repeated; he was deaf. After four letters, he wrote back

to request the return of certam papers deposited with them, which being

done he forwarded them back with a new lifafah as the papers required,

accompanied by a dry apologetic epistle. Here concluded this chapter

of annoyances.

On his appointment to the gunpowder manufactory at Pulta about

1789, he relinquished the iron speculation, to devote the energies of his

mind to the new pursuit by which, to quote Col. Forbes again, ‘he

afterwards amassed so enormous a fortune.” He however preserved

562 Mineral Resources of India. [No. 139.

the farm of the loha mahal to so late a period as 1795. It must then

have reverted to the Zemindar. This personage disposed of parts of

his estate at this time, and the purchasers commenced to levy the

proprietory dues on the iron mines within their lots.

In 1799, the Rajah’s affairs having become inextricably involved, the

whole zemindary was put up to sale, and the lot containing the ldoha

mahal was knocked down to Bustomchurn Hazra. The new owner

immediately examined into all the aurungs of the zemindary, and dis-

allowing the claim made by the private purchasers above alluded to,

sued them for recovery of possession and restitution of mesne profits.

The zillah judge decided in his favor. The decree was affirmed by the

Provincial Court at Moorshedabad, who further added the singular

clause, ‘“‘ that the property of all aurungs, mines, smelting houses, and

other iron works lying within that district was vested in Bustomchurn

Hazra.”’ The decree was confirmed on a further appeal to the Sudder

Dewanny Adalut, who however struck off the clause alluded to above,

as irrelevant to the precise question, and not based on sufficient investi-

gation. And so it certainly was. Every one had been at liberty to dig

out ore from the mines, provided he paid the duty: nor had there been

objections to his building his own smelting houses, &c. with the same

proviso. The Zemindar certainly exercised a right to prevent new

aurungs if he chose, as the supervision of them required a new establish-

ment of officers. But the property of the works was undoubtedly in the

private individuals, who built them in the aurung.

The quarrel was revived between the parties, and the Sudder Dewan-

ny found it necessary to define the exact privileges which the property

of the loha mahal now made perpetual, conveyed to its holder.

The owner of the loha mahal had a right to all the ore of the zemindary: the

sums levieqgon the iron manufactured at the aurungs are viewed as the consideration

-or price taken by him for the ore appropriated by the manufacturers. No ores were

to be manufactured without paying him the established dues. He was entitled to

possession of the aurungs to secure the receipt of these dues. He was entitled to

cause new mines of iron ore to be opened anywhere, on condition of making to the

landholder in whose estate it lay, full and liberal compensation for the value of any

land which may be rendered unfit for cultivation by opening the mine.

He shall not be entitled to establish new aurungs without previously obtaining

the consent of the landholder for the land. He is also prevented from attempting to

1843. ] Mineral Resources of India. 568

restrain the manufacture of iron, and from attempting to exact from those concerned

in it, any dues or payments which have not been customarily rendered.

The landholders on the other hand could not prevent any individual from taking

ore from the established mines, and carrying it to any of the aurungs of the owner

of the mahal, nor could they exact any fines or consideration for the ores so taken.

The decree of which the above is the substance, was passed in July

1811, by Messrs. Harington and Stuart, and completely defines

the rights of the lJoha mahal: It is necessary to state, that the

Collector in disposing of the Joha mahal in 1799, did not specify to

Government whether he had put up the entire mahal, but entered

it as part of the jaedad of a particular district, Dehoche. The

Court therefore referred the matter to the Board, (previous to their

first decree,) enquiring whether they were willing to agitate any

claim on behalf of Government with regard to the property of ore in the

whole district. The intention of the reference was, that the Board

might take some measure to subdivide the mahal, conveying to each

lot the property of iron within its limits. No answer was ever returned

by the Board, and the Court consequently limited the powers of the

holder so specifically as is done above, to prevent the capricious or

selfish crushing of all industry. The tenure exists on these conditions

at the present day.—[Sudder Dewanny Reports, Vol. I. 337 et seq.]

N. B.—During Farquhar’s labours, I find from an old newspaper,

called Hickey’s Gazette, published in Calcutta, that the market price of

Beerbhoom hook iron was 5 Rupees per maund, Balasore hook iron

at 6-8, and English at 10 and 11.

Journal of a Tour through parts of the Panjab and Affghanistan, in

the year 1837. By Agha Abbas of Shiraz, arranged and translated

by Major. R Lexcu, by whom the tour was planned and instruc-

iions furnished. From the Secretariat of the Government of India.

INTRODUCTION.

In the summer of 1837, leaving my late chief (then) Captain Alex-

ander Burnes at Dera Ghazee Khan, and accompanied by my fellow-

traveller Dr. Lord, I paid a visit to Multan, for the purpose of col-

lecting information of a commercial nature.

There Agha Abbas was introduced to me by my servants, as a man

Meeting with Agha professing some knowledge of Farriery. He under-

bhas. took the cure of one of my horses, and on our depar-

ture from Multan, followed me with it to Karabagh, where having no

further occasion for his services, I wished to discharge him. He

however made such offers of unrequitable services, talked in Persian

phrase of “ spilling his blood at my stirrup,” and detailed such a list

of varied accomplishments he was the possessor of, (reading and writing

not included,) that I was induced to keep him on. To one of these

accomplishments he knew I could bear witness, besides the cure of the

horse; this was his causing loud explosions in water, by igniting

a white powder on its surface, with a drop of liquid from a vial, much

to the astonishment of the idlers of Multan.

At different subsequent periods, I gained from him the following ab-

stract of his previous history :—

He was originally an inhabitant of Shiraz, the place of his birth,

and was employed by Prince Hasan Alee Meerza,

governor of Kirman. On the seizure of that prince

by his fee brother Abbas Meerza, Agha Abbas fled, and travelled

vid Bamm, Narmasher, Seistan, Candahar and Cabool to Peshawur,

His previous History.

where he met an old acquaintance, Naib Abdu Samad, who was raising

an infantry regiment for Sirdar Sultan Mahommad Khan, and took

service under him.

He afterwards accompanied the naib on his being obliged preci-

pitately to leave Peshawur, on account of one of Sultan Mahommad

Khan’s brothers conceiving an enmity against him, to Cabool, where

1843. Journal of a Tour, &c. 565

he became adjutant of the regiment Abdu Samad raised for Dost

Mahommad Khan; and as such, was present in the action fought at

Candahar on the 2nd July 1834, with Shah Shuja-ul-Mulk.

On his return to Cabool, he quarrelled with his patron and com-

mandant on the subject of the uniform of the regiment, which he refused

to wear, threw up his appointment in disgust, and retired from the

service.

Quitting Cabool, he proceeded via Peshawur to Attock, where a

display of his “‘patakahs,” or crackers, procured him for a time

employment with Cashmeeree Singh, one of the sons of Maharajah

Runjeet Singh, whom he accompanied to Lahore, from which place he

requested leave to return home to Persia, the value of his-services not

being fully appreciated, and I therefore, according to his account, en-

countered him on his road to Persia via Scinde. 4

From Karabagh we proceeded vid Rawal Pindee to Attock. At

this latter place, I planned and proposed to Agha Abbas this tour,

tea which “oF agreed to attempt. Furnishing him with

minute instructions, a small advance of money, a

Persian writer and a guide, I dismissed him ; and again separated from

Captain Burnes and proceeded up the river Indus to explore the fords.

On my return to Peshawur from this trip, Agha Abbas, to my

a ey astonishment, again presented himself, with a doleful

story of his two companions having deserted him

at Rawal Pindee.

Leaving the choice of fresh men to his own discretion, and making

him a further advance of money, I again dismissed him ; and did not see

or hear of him, until on the completion of his journey, he joined me

at Candahar in the early part of 1838, with the following account of

Costileion of Tour. his labours and adventures, which has been translat-

ed, partly from his original account written by his

companion from his own dictation ; and partly from his answers to ques-

cote ae tions put by myself, on subjects he had at first either

entirely omitted, or only slightly touched on.

N. B.—It must be borne in mind, that as only the four cardinal

Meany, points of the compass are used as bearing: a “‘ North”

bearing has a range from “ North-West” to “North-

Kast,” and in like manner the other three points.

566 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

FORMAL.

On getting my dismissal from Major Leech, an advance of twenty-five

Preparation. Nanakshye rupees, and being furnished by Mr. Lord’s na-

tive doctor with a number of small packages labelled in English, con-

taining the commonest medicines, to enable me to act at times as a

hakeem, I proceeded to organize my party. This consisted of myself, a

Party. Persian writer, two guides, and a’servant ; all habited

and equipped as fakeers.

As some compensation for the disappointment felt by my employer

at finding me at Peshawur, instead of hearing of me well on my journey,

I subjoin the following information, gained during my detention at

that city :—

Number of jarebs in the province of Peshawur according to the

Land estimate of oVision of Sultan Mahmood of Ghuznee 15,76,000

Peshawur. jarebs, at the rate of 3,94,000 jarebs for each of

the following four divisions ; viz.

Ist Division.—Yusafzyes, Bajour, Mandour, Chagharzyes, Bydn.

2nd Division.—Teera, Bangash-i-Bala, Bangash-i-Paeen, Bannoo

Daman, Khost, Murwat.

8rd Division.—Khattak-i- Bala, Khattak-i-Paeen, Wazeeree, Too-

rees, Jajees.

4th Division.—Khaleels, Momands, Daoodzyes, Khalisa- Peele ey

Duabah, Hashnagar, Baghayat-i- Bagram.

The revenue of Peshawur under the Sadozye kings was 9,51,000

Revenue. rupees, 2,40,000 of which was distributed in church lands

to the Mullahs; and the remainder, 7,1 1,000 reached the royal treasury.

Peshawur is said to contain 7,761 houses, of this number 5,566 are

Number of Houses, private dwellings, and 2,195 shops. :

On the 7th of Jamadee-ussanee left Peshawur, and passing the

Barah rivulet, reached Pabbee, a distance of 6 kos.

8th Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled eleven kos to Akorah, passing at

five kos Nosherah, where there is a garrison of one

hundred Sikhs, as well as at a Baolee, (well) on the

road. At Nosherah I witnessed an act of Sikh tyranny: three of the

country people, Mahommadans, had been pressed to

labour the day before, and at night had been shot

on a pretended suspicion of being thieves. Their bodies were hung

Akorah.

Sikh tyranny.

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 567

on a gallows, and a fire had evidently been lit underneath, from the

dreadful manner in which they were scorched.

9th Jamadee-ussanee.—Proceeded to Attock five kos through the

Gidar galee (jackall defile) and across the river Indus; saw the body

of a Khatak, suspended over the gate of the town of Khyrabad, which

Another act of ty- 18 Opposite to that of Attock, and on the right bank, in

apo! company with a dog, and scorched like the body at

Nosherah. He had been killed by a Sikh on some false pretence. I

} also witnessed the wreck of two boats when crossing

Wreck on the Indus. : ‘ ;

the river: they contained a wedding party, who were

conveying a bride to her husband ; four men of the crew alone escaped.

I remained four days at Attock.

13th Jamadee-ussanee.—Reached Haidaro (Hazro,) a distance of

ae Bales eight kos, passing at three kos the village of

Daman, and at three and a half kos, that of Furmul-

liyan. There is a noted robber in these parts, by name Sher Zaman,

who lives in the Gungar hills. He is in rebellion

7 ese aa against the Sikhs, and one of their most deadly

enemies. He seldom plunders a caffila unless he finds a Sikh in it,

a single soul of which caste he never spares.

15th Jamadee-ussanee.—Proceeded four kos to Burhan, crossing the

Haro river. |

16th Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled three kos to Phattargad, a de-

pendency of Hasan Abdal. There are one hundred

Phattargad.

houses on the mound, and fifty below. There are two

Hindoo shops. The inhabitants have large herds and flocks, and are

of the tribe of Gujar. Their supply of water is half kos distant, where

there is a water mill, and forty or fifty trees. The head of the village,

Malik Raheemdad. In the evening I was prevented from sleeping

in the mosque, and had to content myself with the roof of the mill.

hyige I could only account for this inhospitality by sup-

Inhospitality. ; : , ‘

posing, that my wearing my mustachios untrimmed,

betrayed me as a Sheeah. To the west is the district of Futteh Jung.

17th Jamadee-ussanee.—Reached Pindi Nousheree, a distance of

seven kos over a bad road, intercepted by ravines.

There are 150 houses. The inhabitants are chiefly

weavers of coarse cotton and woollen cloths. Their cultivation de-

Nousheree.

568 Journal of a Tour through parts [N o. 139.

pends on the rains. The head of the place is Malik Ghulam Rasool,

by tribe a Katar. The governor, a Sikh, by name Man Singh, had

that day forced the daughter of a Musselman gold-

Sikh tyranny. 4 - i Sere

smith. The inhabitants rose and took to arms, killed

one of Man Singh’s attendants, and severely beat the governor him-

self, forcing him to flee, and then took away their families to the

hills, as did all the neighbouring villagers, coming down at night and

watching their fields and houses, armed. The village was so deserted,

that I did not think it safe to put up in the mosque, but spent the night

with one of these armed parties in a house in the purlieus. I after-

wards heard that the outrage here mentioned was brought to the

knowledge of Runjeet Singh, but I know not whether the aggrieved

obtained redress or not.

18th Jamadee-ussanee.—Made a stage of eight kos, over a road

much broken with ascents and descents, and ravines.

Tahlan. Be osle

Tahlan, a place consisting of seventy houses, and con-

taining two Hindoos shops; fourteen Cashmeer dancing boys had

also taken up their residence here. The name of the head man is

Allanoor, by tribe a Jat. This place is dependent on Rawul Pindee. I

spent the night with the Cashmeerees.

19th Jamadee-ussanee.—Proceeded seven kos over ascents and des-

cents, and through ravines and jungle, in which I lost my road, and

had to wait at a tank, until a herdsman coming to water his cattle,

set me right to Talan, a village on a rising ground,

Talan. , ag :

containing two hundred houses, fifteen Hindoo shops,

and four of shoemakers. The inhabitants are weavers of coarse cotton

and woollen cloths, and pay a revenue of 1000 rupees. There are eight

wells, The name of the head man is Nasarulla. Here I was detained

two nights on account of the indisposition of the Persian writer.

21st Jamadee-ussanee.—Three kos to Chotra, which is a place con-

taining 800 houses of Musselmans, and forty of

Chotra. : , :

Hindoos, situated partly on an eminence, and partly —

on the bank of the river Sawan. There are forty weavers, partly

Cashmeerians and partly natives of Patwar. The

River Sawan. : : :

revenue is 1,200 rupees. The river is very deep,

and not used in cultivation, which is carried on by means of forty

wells. There are two head men named Habo khan, by tribe a Budhar,

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 569

and Shamee Khan, by tribe an Awan. There are no shops; the Hindoos

transact business in their houses. One of my party going to make a

purchase, entered into a quarrel with a Sikh, and came home wounded.

22nd Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled nine kos to Bher, a place con-

taining seventy, houses, but no shops. The road

ae uneven. The name of the head man Habeebulla, by

tribe a Ratyal. Revenue 200 rupees.

23rd Jamadee-ussanee.—Proceeded three kos to Doulatana, a place

containing two hundred houses of Musselmans and

maaibe rs eighty of Hindoos: seven shops and three weavers.

Revenue 600 Rupees. The inhabitants are of the caste Alpyals, and

the head men are Kareemdeen, Nizamodeen, and Walee Mahommed.

24th Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled six kos over bad ravines to

Kamtareela, containing two hundred houses, eight

Kamtareela. 3

Hindoo shops and twenty weavers. The place how-

ever is much dilapidated. Its revenue is 1000 rupees: The cultivation

depends on the rain. There are two dilapidated mosques in the suburbs.

The head man is Hadayatulla, by tribe an Awan. At this place my

fakeer’s habiliments attracted charity.

25th Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled five kos to Peer Janjoot, con-

ib taining two houses of Mullahs, styled ‘‘ Myan,” three

Peer Janjoot.

shops of Hindoos, and twenty houses of weavers,

cotton cleaners, and gardeners. The ‘‘ Myans” farm the place for a

yearly nazarana of two hundread rupees. This is a neat, pleasantly situat-

ed place surrounded by trees, and having a fine tank stocked with fish.

I stopped here another day, and my appearance attracted suspicion

of my being an alchymist : many would-be smatterers in the art came

to prove me, and fortunately, I found them more ignorant on the

subject than myself; as I had not, when first asked, wisely denied all

acquaintance with it. One man more foolish than

Alchemy.

the rest, catching at some dark hint I purposely let

drop to confuse them, followed me a whole stage, intreating me to

impart something of my invaluable secret to him. This I faithfully

promised to do on my return, which I pretended would be very speedy.

27th Jamadee-ussanee.—Proceeded six kos, passing for three kos

over estony pass to Dumbelee, a village situated on

Dumbelee. : Pia

an eminence, and containing five hundred houses,

570 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 189.

and a new bazar of one hundred shops, laid out in two streets, at right

angles to and intersecting each other, the residence of Rajah Fazldad

Khan, who is by tribe a Bagyal. There are eight wells with Persian

wheels, and the revenue is one thousand rupees.

28th Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled five kos to Rotas, the head

dowd man of which place is Fazdlad Khan, by caste a

Bagyal. He formerly furnished a contingent of

500 horse; and enjoyed the whole of Rotas, now under the rule. of

Rajah Gulab Sing. He enjoys 7,000 rupees, 1300 from Dumbelee and

5,700 rupees from other districts, and has no power. He has now retired

to Dumbelee, where he resides. Rotas contains one thousand houses,

and one hundred shops; has twelve gates, three to the East, five to the

West, two to the North and two to the South : four of which alone are

open. The district of Rotas is divided into fourteen tappas, one of

which, Taliyala, under Waleedad Khan, is in jagire to Shah Zadah

Karak Singh; one Shah Jahenee, under Shah Ahmed to Mishur

Jesah, keeper of the royal toshakhanah; and the remaining twelve

are in jagire to Rajah Gulab Singh. The revenue of Rotas was

formerly three lakhs of rupees, now it only amounts to one lakh.

The twelve tappas of Rajah Gulab Singh are as follows: Ist. Tappa

Skakra, under Choudree Ghulam Husen, by caste a

Gujar; 2nd. Tappa Salama, under Abdulla Khan

Gujar ; 3rd. Tappa Doulatalee, under Azeemulla Khan Bagyal; 4th.

Twelve Tappas.

Tappa Sikandar, under Azeemulla and Imam Bakhsh Bagyal; 5th.

Tappa Choutlee, under Walo Khan Malyar; 6th. Tappa Rajoo, under

Choudree Suleman Gujar; 7th. Tappa Sangoee, under Mahdee Khan

Bagyal; 8th, Tappa Tirhala, under Fazaldad Khan Bagyal; 9th.

Tappa Shibalee, under Mado Khan Bagyal ; 10th. Tappa Eesyala, under

Khuda Bakhsh, and Khuda Yar Jat; 11th. Tappa Kunar, under Lal

Beg and Meerza Khan Moghuls; 12th. Tappa Pidree, under Yoosaf

Khan Bagyal.

29th Jamadee-ussanee.—Travelled six kos to Sangoee, passing half

pads way ariver, the remaining half over sand throughculti-

vation. The place contains six hundred houses and

seventeen shops of Hindoos. Here Mishur Jesah has built a fine upper-

storied house for his own accommodation. Outside the village, to the

North, is a fort with four towers, garrisoned by twelve of Rajah Gulab

1843.] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 571

Singh’s sepoys. There are eight wells. The head men are Khuda

Bukhsh and Khuda Yar, by tribe Bagyals. The revenue is two

thousand rupees.

1st Rajab.—Proceeded seven kos over a plain, and through cultiva-

ren. tion to Koohar, a place containing one thousand and

five hundred houses and eighjy shops. Within town

to the South is a small mud fort that commands it, garrisoned by eight

sepoys. There are twenty wells. The head man is Noor Alam Khan,

a Kutubshye Awan. The revenue formerly was 2,500 rupees; it is

now 8,000 rupees.

On arriving I put up in the mosque, where soon after Nati Alam

Khan and his son came to prayers. Observing an excrescence on the

a0 temple of the latter, I offered my services to remove

Prescription.

it. This was done in a few hours after the appli-

cation of a liquid I had with me. For this piece of service, Noor Alam

invited me to his house and entertained me; gave one of my men a

white shalakee, and on my departure, packed up two days’ provisions

for me. I learnt that Noor Alam had once embroiled himself with

the Sikhs, by killing one of the garrison for some act of tyranny

committed.

3rd Rajab.—Travelled ten kos to Kotala, over a hilly road for

en four kos and through a defile. There is a tank on

the billy ground. The road is then sandy, and

abounding in ravines. To the West is the town of Guzerat. There

are eighty four villages dependent on Kotala. The revenue is 5,000

rupees. There are two thousand and five hundred houses. The old

bazar contains two hundred shops; and the new one, which has been

laid out in two lines intersecting each other at right angles, seventy

shops. There are sixty-seven wells for cultivation. The head man is

Abdulla Khan, by cast a Gujar.

4th Rajab.—Proceeded five kos to Rasoolnagar, called by the Sikhs

Ramnagar, crossing the Chenab. The town is sur-

Rasoolnagar. : :

rounded by a mud wall, and has six gates, and a garri-

son of fifty men, whose yearly pay is 300 rupees; but they are only paid

for ten months. The government of the place is entrusted to Jawahar

Singh, who receives on account of pay from the amount of the farm of the

thanadaree and adalat 1,900 rupees; the whole amount being 2,500 ru-

4F¥

572 Journal of a Tour through parts LNo. 139.

pees; he is a native of Ramnagar. The other taxes of the place are col-

lected by Rajah Gulab Singh. The town contains eight thousand houses

chiefly of mud, and six hundred and fifty shops, seventeen mosques,

and fifteen dhurmsalas and thakoor divalas. There were formerly

eighty-four villages dependent on Rasoolnagar, that are now given

away in separate jagires. There are eighty-four wells for cultivation,

which are ali distributed in jagires to Brahmins. The inhabitants are

Musselmans. The revenue formerly was three-lakhs of rupees. The

, _. former chief of this place was Ghulam Kadar Khan,

pe cada by tribe a Chatha. He has now taken up his abode

in Ramkee, and has employment in Runjeet Singh’s gorchars, on a

salary of 400 rupees. When chief, he could collect several thousand

men, and has often opposed Runjeet Singh and his father in the field.

Here my funds ran short, and the Persian writer and cossid be-

came clamorous for pay. Knowing that a man of my employer’s, by

Diversion to Um. 2ame Nursing, was at Umritsir on a tour, having

le similar objects to my own; I set out for that city,

promising to return in nine days. On my arrival at Umritsir, my

) application to Nursing proved unsuccessful; but I fortunately encoun-

tered some Persian and Cabool acquaintances ; one of them, by name

Agha Rajab Alee Khan, lent me 280 rupees, and paid for 45 rupees

worth of pedlery that I bought for my journey, and I set off on

my return, accompanied by my creditor’s uncle, who was to be

repaid at Cabool. On my return to Rasoolnagar, having overstayed '

Disappearance of My time by two days, I found that the Persian

eSB. writer, tired of waiting, had disappeared with my

notes. I lost no time in following him by double marches; on arriv-

ing at Koohar, I found he had left the preceding night ; here I was no

longer able to follow him on foot. Alam Khan lent me a horse and a

guide, for which I presented him with a looking glass. On arriving

at Rotas, I found the Meerza in the mosque. After a deal of coaxing,

I induced him to return with me to Koohar, where J paid all my com-

panions their wages, and got them to accompany me further on my

journey.

21st Rajab.—Started for Khurd Chotala, arriving in three kos at the

river Jelam. The place contains two hundred houses

Khurd Chotala. ; pss , .

and eight wells for cultivation. The inhabitants

1843.] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 573

are Moghuls and Jats; the head man is Akir Khan Moghul. This

stage was five kos. The revenue is 800 rupees including the district

of Jalalpoor.

22nd Rajab.—Proceeded eight kos to Jalalpoor, which is situated

on the side of a hill, below which runs the river.

ag It contains two thousand houses and seventy shops,

and has fifteen wells for cultivation. In the town is a small mud fort

with four bastions, garrisoned by ten men of Rajah Gulab Singh. Re-

venue 16,000 rupees. The head man is Sher Khan, by caste a

Japnjooa.

23rd Rajab.—Travelled ten kos to Chaki Hameed, passing Sherpoor

at three kos. The place contains two hundred houses

Chaki Hameed. REIS

and two shops. There are fifteen wells for cultivation.

The revenue is 1,500 rupees, including the district of Pind Dadan

Khan; the head man is Rajah Futteh Khan, by caste a Jalab. On

arriving at the place, the Rajah was seated in a takya, and conver-

sation ensued, in which he enquired my native town, and on learning

it, invited me to his house, where he entertained me, and produced

spirits in the course of the evening on account of my successfully

prescribing for his son’s and sister’s excrescences; he detained me as

his guest three days.

27th Rajab.—Travelled to Pind Dadan Khan, which consists of

iy a three divisions, distant from each other from two to

three hundred yards; one of which only is properly

called Pind Dadan Khan; it contains three thousand houses and three

bazars of about three hundred shops. There are three gates to the town,

but the surrounding wall is so dilapidated, that there are thorough-

fares in all directions. Outside of the town to the west, is a mud

fort with four bastions, in which there is stabling for thirty of Rajah

Gulab Singh’s horses, and a garrison of thirty sepoys under one

Takurdass. There is also a small iron gun outside the fort. There

were thirty or forty heaps of salt, containing about 5,00,000 maunds,

covered with a coating of mud to render them water proof. There is

a large steel-yard here for weighing the salt, which is allowed to be

sold no where else. The other division or suburb is called Kot-i-

Sultan, containing five hundred houses, and a bazar of

Kot-i-Sultan.

fifty shops. There are two gates, one to the north,

574 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 129.

and the other to the south, and the place is surrounded by gardens. The

name of the other division or suburb is Kot-i-Sahib

Kot-i-Sahib Khan. ; :

Khan, under a man of that name. It contains six

hundred houses, and a bazar of forty shops, but no gates, and there are

thoroughfares on all sides. There are fifty wells for cultivation,

twenty of which alone are in repair. The price of grain, &c. I found

as follows: wheat six seers the rupee, ghee two and a half seers, oil

eight seers, rice sixteen seers, mash one maund, cotton four and a half

seers, barley twenty seers. All the timber brought down by the river

in the flood, is considered government property. The chiefs are Rajah

Zabardast Khan, Sahib Khan and Disher Khan, by tribe Gogids. The

place is bounded on the north by the salt range, on the south by the

river Jelum. The revenue, besides the six, tappas, amounts to 35,000

rupees. The six Tappas are as follow :—

Ist. Tappa-i-Pind Dadan Khan, generally known as Tappa-i-Jalab,

Six Tappas. | under Ahmed Khan. Revenue 20,000 rupees.

2nd. Tappa Ahmadabad, under Zulfkar Khan. Revenue 60,000

rupees.

3rd. Tappa Myanee, wkda Mahammad Khan, by tribe a Jat. Re-

venue 25,000 rupees.

4th. Tappa Pahra, under Noor Khan Moghul now in exile. Revenue

80,000 rupees.

5th. Tappa Barah, under Rahmat Khan. Revenue 16,000 rupees.

6th. Tappa Dannee, under Mahommed Khan, by tribe a Babad.

Revenue 100,000 rupees.

There are in all eight salt mines; four only are worked: the names

of those that are shut are as follow: Sardee, Neelawan,

Durnala, Chotana. The latter is said to contain veins

of copper and lead. The inhabitants of the neighbourhood subsist by

cultivation. The reason of the closing of the four mines is on account

of there not being a sufficient demand for the produce. The rate

at the four mines that are at work is the same. Sepoys of Rajah

Gulab Singh are stationed over the mines, to prevent the smuggling

Salt Mines.

of salt, which, to any extent is punished by confisca-_

Smuggling.

rt tion of property. In consequence of the heavy fines,

the miners themselves live on bread without salt. The government

employ fakeers as spies, to try by begging, to discover the miners,

ad a + Pen ae CARS

1843.] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 575

who use salt in their bread. If the miners are found stealing a seer or

two, they are obliged to extract twelve goonees of salt for one rupee,

each goonee containing two and a half maunds. The government pay

one rupee nominally for sixteen maunds, which quantity weighs

actually twenty maunds.

The hire of carriage to Pind Dadan Khan is 1 rupee per twenty

maunds from all the mines, except the Makraj one,

Hire of Carriage. p ; ; ¢

the hire from which is 1 rupee for sixteen maunds.

The camels on which the salt is carried are all the property of Rajah

Gulab Singh. The merchants, who make wholesale purchases, get

the salt at 14 rupee the maund, others pay 2 rupees. Formerly the

tax on the salt amounted to 4 lakhs of rupees. After the visit of

Captain Wade, the farm rose to 8 and 2 lakhs, afterwards to 12

lakhs, then to 14, at which I found it; as far as

25 lakhs are said to be realized. Rajah Gulab

Singh has farmed the mines from Maharajah Runjeet Singh. The

labourers, who carry the salt out from the mines, are paid 1, 2

and 3 annas the day. Formerly one miner and two labourers got

paid by the day one rupee;—the labourers being mostly males and

females, adult and children, and the miner’s own family. None

but the experienced miners of the place can dig the salt. The

labourers, when the salt is dug, bring it out by the aid of lamps in

baskets, which they carry on their heads. Their clothes are completely

blackened. The miners told me an anecdote, which was this: During

Captain Wade’s visit to the mines, when he was in one of the large

chambers, Rajah Gulab Singh, jealous of a close sur-

vey being made, ordered the miners to throw up

salt from behind the visitor, so as to fall in showers from above about

him, and then to get up a cry that the roof was falling in, so as to

cause his speedy departure. This stratagem succeeded. The galleries

are driven under ground to the length of several hundred yards. The

four mines that are at work are Khur Chotana,

Korah, Kerah, Makraj. The inhabitants of the

neighbourhood of these mines do not cultivate; but depend on

their labour in the mines. The salt of these mines appears perfectly

inexhaustible. Each miner digs from fifteen to twenty maunds a

day.

Salt Farm.

Captain Wade.

Mines at work.

576 Journal of a Tour through parts LNo. 139.

There are one hundred houses in the vicinity of the Chotana mine,

and no cultivation: the head man is Shamo Khan Janjooa.

There is no cultivation at the Korah mine, and the houses are on an

eminence. There is no water nearer than half kos, and that is rain

water. The head man is Faizbakhsh, by tribe a Jalab. To the North is

the Dannee Darra. There are two hundred stone huts in the neigh-

bourhood of the Kerah mine; but no cultivation. They have none but

rain water.

There are two hundred stone huts in the neighbourhood of the

Makraj mine, and no cultivation. There are two running streams,

one fresh and one salt. The head man is Karamdeen, by cast a Gogir.

I went to most of the mines myself. They have all one entrance

each, the galleries run through red earth, and the salt lies in veins

saint. ons Fb ds ho which the miners follow, until exhausted, when they

proceed in a fresh direction ; some of the shafts are

sunk so low, that they have come upon water ; other galleries proceed

so high, that light is let in from the top of the ground. Many acci-

dents, some fatal, occur, by the falling in of the roofs of the cham-

bers.

While I was in one of the mines, a labourer’s arm was broken by the

Pet ees fall of a block of salt, and a general rush, headed of

course by myself, was made for the open air. I saw one

miner, who had lost his right arm by an accident, digging with his left.

The galleries are so dark, narrow, and winding, and so numerous,

that it is impossible to traverse them without a light and guide.

The warmth of the mines is very oppressive, and the reflection of the

aomts 0%, er labourers’ lamps on the crystal roofs of the chamber

has a very beautiful effect. The mines of Neelawan

and Khur Chotata are the finest.

The miners separate the blocks by picking round the two sides

and bottom, and then detach it from the top by heavy blows. ‘The

blocks generally weigh four maunds. The chips are collected by

women and children. The miner’s tool is a pick, of about thirteen

Tools, inches long, having a sharp point at one end, and

the other end about three inches square, which

serves as a hammer. It is furnished with a wooden handle about

a guz long.

1843.] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. | 577,

Rajah Guléb Singh, besides the farm of the salt mines, farms the

Rajah’s Farm. following ferries and districts, for 10 lakhs of rupees.

Ferries—Bawal, Hareea, Bed, Bhera, Khushab, Saeewal, Dhannee,

Ahmadabad, Jalalpoor, Meeanee, Makhad.

The districts are—Jalab, Bhera, Chakar, Bher, Yar, Saeewal, Dhan-

nee, Pathwar, Gandapoorwal, Dalwal.

The village of Dalwal is situated on an eminence; and is the Jagire

of Mishar Beleeram. It contains six hundred houses

Satolt and ten shops. It was formerly included in the

district of Janjooa. The Mishar has built here a fine-upper storied

house for his own accommodation. There are eight wells for culti-

vation. In the road is the village of Badshapoor, the former chief of

which place was Sher Khan.

The village of Sardee is situated on an eminence, and contains one

hundred houses, under a chief, Abdulla Khan, by

tribe an Awan. To the east is the fort of Dharee,

built by Sardar Haree Singh, and used as a state prison. It is built

on an eminence, and is very difficult of approach. Mahmood Khan

Sardee.

Hazarah Wala died a prisoner in this fort, from

State Prisoner. y :

starvation: his sole food for twenty-four hours,

being half pao flour, and the same quantity of salt. From Pind Dadan

Khan to Sardee is about forty-five kos. |

I passed one month in visiting these mines, and spent a good deal

of money in trinkets, distributed to the head men of the

different places. I also practised with success, in my

profession of Hakeem ; sometimes giving medicines, sometimes charms.

Stay.

The village of Kahar is situated in the plain, and contains three

hundred houses, and four shops; also four water

Kahar. , .

mills, a fine stream, numerous trees, and the shrine

of Shekh Buzurg. I have not seen a prettier place in the whole of

Patwar, than this. There is a tank at the shrine, in and round

which are to be seen numerous ducks and peacocks. ‘The head man

is Fatteh Khan, an Awan by tribe. The distance from Sardee to Kahar

is four kos.

29th Shaban.—Proceeded six kos to Bherpoor, a place containing

three hundred houses and no shops. The cultivation de-

Bh 5

aa pends on the rain. The head men are Moghal and Samad,

578 Journal of a Tour through parts LNo. 139.

by tribe Awans. To the East is Kahar, to the West Thalla, to the

North Pind Malik Amanat, and to the South the hills. Revenue 1,200

rupees.

1st Ramzan.—Travelled seven kos to Thalla, the jagire of Thanah

rece Singh Malwee. The Thanedar is Danya Singh. The gar-

rison is composed of forty Sepoys. It contains three thou-

sand houses, one hundred and twenty shops, and thirty wells for

cultivation : thirty-two villages are dependent on this place. The head

men are Haiyat Khan and Mehr Khan, by tribe Awans. To the West

is Thaman, to the North Awankaree, and to the South the hills. The

revenue is 60,000 rupees.

2nd Ramzan.—Proceeded to Thaman, the jagire of Ram Singh

of Bhakapoor, who is by tribe a Brahmin. There

Thaman.

are one thousand houses, fifteen shops, and twenty

wells for cultivation: two kos on the road is the village of Akowar.

The head men are Mahammed Khan and Budha Khan. Three kos fur-

ther on, is the village of Kufree. Thence three kos is the village of

Sankowalee Thence two kos is Thaman. On arriving, I was taken

violently ill. To the West is the river Sawan, to the North the districts

of Gheb and Dhannee, and to the South the road to Baghan [ Kara-

bagh]. The revenue is 24,000 rupees.

3rd Ramzan.—Travelled six kos to Tarapa, on which eight other

villages are dependent. There are four hundred

Tarapa. ; :

houses, on an eminence, on the bank of the river

Sawan. On the road are the villages of Koulee, Battan and Shah

Mahammad Walee under Allaiyar Khan, by tribe a Sapkal. Revenue

14,000 rupees.

4th Ramzan.—Proceeded to Makhad, four kos, over a hilly road and

through ravines, and two kos through a sandy defile,

which is sometimes flooded, and thus impassable

for a time. The road is infested by Khatak robbers, who come from

the other side of the river. There are seven Mouzas, dependent

on Makhad, the revenue of which is 10,000 rupees; and that of the

village, custom-house, &c. the same sums. Of this Abdulla Khan re-

ceives eight hundred as pay. The houses are on an eminence over-

Makhad.

looking the river Indus, and amount to three thousand. There are

two hundred Hindoo’s shops, and three gates to the village.

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 579

On arriving at Makhad, two men of Rajah Suchet Singh’s came to

demand two boats for crossing the troops,—in which, towards evening,

I embarked with them. Gouhar Singh, of Pind Malik Amanat, with

forty sepoys, kept guard on one of the gates of Makhud. The head

man is Abdulla Khan, an Afghan, of the tribe of Saghuree, who can

muster four thousand fighting men.

5th Ramzan.—Proceeded by water to Karabagh, which consists of a

fort and a suburb, situated at the foot of the salt range.

There are three thousand houses and three bazars,

containing one hundred shops. On the hills are two towers, which

command the town, under Allaiyar Khan. The revenue derived from

the salt is appropriated by Rajah Suchet Singh. There are twelve

saltpetre manufactories, the amount of the revenue

from which is 12,000 rupees; which is given in jagire

to Malik Allaiyar Khan, by tribe a Satkal Awan. He could collect one

thousand five hundred fighting men. They are friends with the men of

Teeree and Sagharee, and enemies of the Khataks. To the Kast is Saee-

wal, to the West Eesakhel, to the North Shakar Darra, and to the

South the river Indus. The revenue paid to the Sikhs is 5000 rupees,

ten horses, and twenty camels. Rajah Suchet Sing’s force had proceeded

to Katkee, a fort of Ahmad Khan, situated in a valley.

The Khan, on hearing of the advance of the Sikh

force, fled, and sought refuge in Bannoo Daman. The Rajah, finding

the place vacated, returned, and took possession of the fort of Kesakhel.

I intended proceeding hence by water to Dera Ismail Khan, and

thence to Tak by land; the Meerza became aware of this inten-

tion, and not liking to accompany me, left at night, and proceeded,

I supposed, via Shakar Darra and Cohaut, to his

home at Peshawar. Iwas much annoyed and dis-

tressed at his disappearance, until I was fortunate in procuring another

writer, an Afghan, in whose company I marched, with the Sikh force,

towards Dera Ismail Khan. I remained three days at Karabagh, alias

Baghan. During this time news reached the Rajah, that Alladad Khan,

the son of Sarwar Khan, joined by the Wazeerees, had advanced on

Tak ; and that the Sikh garrison, leaving the fort, prepared for the

attack, which proved successful, and the Sikhs

suffered a signal defeat. The town was taken and

Karabagh.

Saltpetre.

Revenue.

Meerza deserts.

Insurrection.

580 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

plundered, and finally evacuated, as the people of Tak would afford

no assistance to Alladad Khan and his Wazeeree allies. On receiving

the intelligence, Rajah Suchet Singh, instead of proceeding to Bannoo

Daman after Ahmad Khan, turned off to Tak, having sent for the two

guns he had left at Karabagh. On arriving within one march of Tak,

the Rajah received confirmation of Alladad Khan having retired to the

Wazeerees: he therefore fell back on Kesakhel.

9th Ramzan.—Reached Eesakhel, which is the name of a district ;

the village being called Zakokhel. It has a fort and

seventy shops. The tribe could collect three thou-

sand fighting men. The cultivation is carried on from the river. The

chief is Ahmad Khan. To the east is the river Indus, to the west

the Murwats, to the North Karabagh, and to the South Khusoor. They

are friends with the Sawan Wazeerees. The revenue is 30,000 rupees.

10th Ramzan.—Proceeded to Umarkhel on the road past Bandah

Umarkhel. Saiyadan,—a collection of wooden and thatched houses.

At one kos beyond this, the Kuram river falls’ into the Indus. I

Zakokhel.

: forded the former, which in some places is knee, and

Kuram River.

in others waist deep. On the other side of the river is a

quick-sand; on one side are the hills and the road to Kot-i-kafiree,

which is so narrow, that only one horseman can pass ata time. The

Sikh force and guns were at Kot-i-kafiree.

An Afghan chief, by name Shah Walee Khan, a Nyaze, was accom-

Murder ofan ad- panying the Rajah: he was a brave man, and had

narent: performed good service. Suchet Singh however,

got suspicious and afraid of him, and under pretence of getting him

to look out for a gun road, sent him with a party of Sikhs, who, in

compliance with their secret orders, murdered him on the road, as he

was saying prayers, having dismounted for a time for that purpose.

The Rajah then set out for Tak, by the Kuram valley. News was

brought that the Khan had been killed by the Afghan Ghazees, who

were in rebellion against the Sikhs, and prowling about. The Rajah,

in great apparent distress at the intelligence, ordered the body imme-

diately to be sent for, and buried. There are two forts at Kot-i-ka-

hmensasie firee, both in ruins; one below, and one on the

hill: from one kos beyond the hill, Umarkot becomes

visible. The place consists of about a hundred houses, and two Hindoo

Fe eS pe. | See eee ae

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 581

shops, situated beneath a hill. To the West is Dera Ismail Khan, to the

East Eesakhel, to the North hills, and to the South the river Indus.

11th Ramzan.—Proceeded seven kos to Khusoor, a place inhabited

by Afghans, who muster one thousand fighting men,

aeaihen under Hassan Khan, by tribe a Khusoor. There are

five hundred houses, and eight shops. The cultivation depends partly

on the rain, and partly on the river. To the West are the hills, to the

East the river Indus, to the North Eesakhel, and to the South Baloot-

i-Hazrat-i-Shah Eesa. The revenue of Khusoor amounts. to eight

thousand rupees. The inhabitants are friends with the Murwats, and

enemies of the Eesakhel. Two kos from Umarkhel is the shrine of

Shah Baloot, the road to which place is through jun-

faaillid oo gle, abounding with date trees. There is a gun

road along the river. At the shrine there are many fine trees, and a

tank, stocked with duck.

12th Ramzan.—Proceeded to Dera Ismail Khan, which place need

’ not be described by me, as it was visited by Capt.

LS teen Burnes, on his voyage up the Indus. I here met a

servant of his proceeding to Bombay, in charge of a flock of sheep.

13th Ramzan.—Proceeded four kos to Bandah-i-Saiyadan, over

Bandah-i-Saiyadan. good level ground.

14th Ramzan.—Travelled six kos to Kot, over a good level road

Kot. without water.

15th Ramzan.—Proceeded seven kos to Mandye; sometimes over a

Mandye. level road, and at times over rising ground. The

amount of fighting men in the neighbourhood is two thousand, under

Gul Khan and Jahan Khan. There are seven hundred houses and

fifty shops. The revenue is included in Karachee. To the west

are the Suryanees, to the East Dera Ismail Khan, to the North

the Murwats, and to the South the Myankhels. The inhabitants

are Gandapoors, of the tribe Barakhel, who are enemies of the Surya-

nees. On arriving, I introduced myself to Jahan Khan. In the

course of conversation, he expressed his desire to procure some white

‘“‘kushtah” of copper. This I showed him how to make, much to his

delight, and he gave my companions three coarse shalakees, one piece

of karbas, one maund of raisins and jalghozas, and two seers of Canda-

har tobacco; which latter was a most acceptable present.

582 Journal of a Tour through parts [ No. 139.

19th Ramzan.—Travelled six kos to Karachee, a place inhabited by

Barakhels, amounting to six thousand fighting men. The place

Karachee contains one thousand and five hundred houses and two hundred

shops. There is a large grain exchange on Mandye here. There is a

wall one and a half guz and high, round Karachee, through which there

are numerous thoroughfares. There is a large tower in the town. The

cultivation depends on the rain. The inhabitants are at enmity with

the Suryanees, and reciprocal forays are constantly carried on. To

the south toward the hills, are the Shekhans and Zarganees, and two

hundred houses of fakeers, where the cultivation is carried on

with running water. The headmen of Karachee are Alee Khan and

Gul Mahammad Khan. To the east is Dera Ismail Khan, to the south

the Myankhels, to the north Usturana, and to the west the hills. The

revenue under the Sikhs is thirty thousand rupees. During my

stay, the Sikhs wanted to increase it to 50,000

rupees. The above two headmen proceeded to

Increase of Revenue.

Lahore, to Jay a protest before the Maharajah. ‘Two rupees a load is

levied here from each merchant’s camel. I had a letter of intro-

duction to Alee Khan, from his younger brother Jahan Khan of

Mandye. On my arrival at Karachee, Alee Khan came to see me,

and treated me with great respect. After my interview with him

was over, I took up my quarters in the mosque, where I tried to settle

myself to sleep, not feeling inclined to eat from excessive fatigue.

While my companions were satisfying their hunger, and I was

yet awake, a man and woman presented themselves at the mosque

door, wishing to see the fakeer that had arrived. On enquiring the

Untimely visit. cause of this untimely visit, the man inform-

ed me he had .a young wife at home, possessed of a devil, which he

entreated me to cast out. I promised to do all I could in the

morning; they went home, and returned with an entertainment of

bread, ghee and curoot. In the morning, the “ Pesh Nimaz,” or clerk

and the people came to the mosque to prayers ; I was kicked up out of my

sleep, to join them. I arose, and made my ablutions; but not knowing

Pree, the proper positions for the Sunnee ritual, I was very nervous.

I however got through the ceremony, by copying faithfully

the man who stood next me. After prayers, I was taken by my friend

of the preceding night to his house, to cast out the devil. By this

1843.] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 583

time I had become known in the village, and the people came to me

in crowds, especially women, some begging for charms to increase the

attention of their husbands, others for charms to get them husbands ;

upon others I spat, at their request, to cure cutaneous diseases. Towards

evening, they brought me the woman possessed of the devil, whom I pro-

ceeded to cure, {God pardon me, | in the following manner: Wrapping

_ up some of the detonating powder in a paper, I gave

Casting outa Devil. . .

it to my servant to keep; then sending for the wo-

man, and wrapping up in a piece of paper a small quantity of ashes

in the presence of the people assembled, I gave it to my servant to

give her, that she might deposit it in an old grave-yard for the night.

I had of course before given orders to my man, to give the woman the

detonating powder, instead of the ashes. The woman implicitly fol-

lowed the instructions, and next morning returned with the paper,

accompanied as usual, by many people. I then ordered the woman

to place the ashes on a stone, and putting a rod of iron into her hand,

directed her to watch a sign from me for striking the ashes: I then

- commenced vehement incantations, becoming very excited at times,

until at the given signal, the ashes were struck, and a loud report, as

of a matchlock, succeeded, when I ended by exclaiming, ‘‘ I have shot

the devil; now you are cured.” The populace were astounded,

and loaded me with their attentions. I remained three days at Kara-

chee, and on my departure, presented the woman with a looking-glass

I had purchased for two rupees, telling her to look at herself in it, when-

ever the devil felt again inclined to return. To the east of Karachee is

Dera Ismail Khan, to the west the hills, to the north Usturana, and

to the south Tak.

23rd Ramzan.—Proceeded seven kos to Rohree, a place contain-

ing eight hundred houses and three Hindoo shops. The

Rohree. + ; Mla she :

fighting men amount to one thousand. The cultivation is

carried on with running water. To the east is Dera Ismail Khan,

to the west the Hills, to the north Karachee, and to the south

Tak. The headman is Mahammad Raheem Khan, by tribe a Barak-

hel. The inhabitants are enemies of the Suryanees. The houses

are in a fort, and the ruler distributes justice on a low platform

outside. On arriving, he refused me entrance, and I put up at a run..

ning stream near at hand, and having cooked a pillau, invited the

284 Journal of a Tour through parts [ No. 139.

governor to join us: upon this he insisted on my occupying a seat

near him and partook of the fare, and in the evening sent me a

“<lyaf’ or coverlid ; under which, owing to its inhabitants, I got no

rest. '

24th Ramzan.—Proceeded nine kos to Tak. The chief Alladad

Khan, who was then an exile, is by tribe a Doulatkhel. In

Tak. F d : : : 7

his late incursion, he burnt all the neighbouring villages.

At Tak [i-Sarwar Khan] I found the following Sikh force ; viz. Jemedar

Mahommed Hashan, and one hundred sowars, and five zambooraks.

Chet Singh Kumedan with a like detachment. Lena Singh, with one

hundred ghorahchars. Saidar Ram Sing, with a like number, one hun-

dred other ghorahchars, dispersed in small bodies; six hundred infantry

of the regiment of Futteh Singh Aloowala, one gun. Nadir Alee

Khan, Baloch Khan, and Mayan Khan, with forty horse, besides other

footmen.

There is a smaller fort within the fort of Tak, called Narinj Kilah,

within which there are three wells: and inside the outer

Citadel.

fort gate are seven guns and twenty-five zambooraks, all

manned. Guns can be mounted on all the four bastions of the Narinj

Kilah, to receive which, there are ‘‘damdamas.” The breadth of the

wall is four guz. There is an ‘‘alampana” or fausse braie, and a ditch,

nine guz broad. There are two gates to the Narinj, one to the east

near a garden, another to the west. There are seven gates to the

uly, outer fort, called respectively, Nourang, Peer Dastgeer, Haz-

rat Eesa, Sarbanan, Mooree, Panch Tanpak, aud Maranee. The

fort is surrounded by gardens, around which again there is a wall

having three gates. Three sides of the fort are surrounded by broken

inaccessible ground. The only good approach is from the direction

of Dera Ismail Khan. The Doulatkhels amount to two thousand

fighting men, and are enemies of the Wazeerees. In the whole coun-

try of the Doulatkhels, there are two running streams; cne called Tak,

the other Kamal. To the east is Dera Ismail Khan, to the west Da-

raban, to the north the Myanees and Wazeerees, and to the south

the Gandapoors. The road from this to Cabool is almost impassable,

from fear of the Wuzeeree plunderers; the general road taken by the

Luhanee and other merchants, is from Daraban. The

Road to Cabool. Tie 4 : 5 .

cultivation is carried on by running streams. The

1843.] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 585

revenue in the time of Sarwar Khan, was 23,000 rupees. The pro-

duce no doubt amounted to 200,000. It now costs

Value to the S!Khs- the Sikhs more than it is worth.

The fort of Fattehgur is dependent on Tak, and is a very strong

place, situated on an eminence. It belonged to Alladad

rev da Khan, who entrusted the command to Anayatulla Khan,

one of his most trustworthy men. On the Sikhs gaining possession

of Tak, this man surrendered his trust to them, and was again install-

ed in the command. The fort is situated to the west of Tak, at the

entrance of a valley. The inhabitants of the neighbourhood are Mya-

nees. The fort is surrounded by a fausse braye and a ditch, nine guz

wide ; two of the bastions are fitted for bearing guns. There are two

wells inside. The inhabitants do not amount to more than two hun-

dred. To the east is Tak, to the west the Myanees, to the north

the Gandapoors, and to the south the fort of Thattee.

5th Shawal.—Travelled six kos to Mameer, a place containing

bale 6 twenty-five houses, situated at the base of a hill.

The inhabitants are all robbers. It is a dependency

of Tak. These people act as guides to the Myanee and Wazeeree

robbers, who make excursions into the Tak territory, and receive a

share of the plunder. As the main road to Shinkee was impassable,

being infested by thieves, I] determined on going in company with

_ my new Persian writer, a man of Alladad Khan’s, and a guide procured

from Mameer, by a hill bye-road to Bandah-i-Saiyadan, where I arrived

Pe se adan on the 6th Shawal.—There is a shrine here of Shekh

Kalamkar, and the Wazeerees bring offerings of wheat,

and heap it on the ground, and no thief is bold enough to steal any of

it. The Sayad alone, in times of scarcity, when they cannot procure it

elsewhere, make indents on the store. The road is

hilly, and for some distance through a defile. There

are fifty houses of Sayads. On arriving, I put up in the mosque, where

Sacred Granary.

one of the Sayads brought a son of his to be cured of a cataract in the

eye. This I promised to do, if he would allow his son to accompany

me to Shingee, which he did. The length of the stage was seven kos.

7th Shawal.—Proceeded six kos to Chandoulah, over hills through

defiles, and crossing a stream that flows from Kanee-

guram to Tak, at least twenty times. The place is

Chandoulah.

586 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

situated at the entrance of the Wazeeree valley, and contains about

one hundred houses. I took up my quarters in the mosque as usual ; my

writer had an acquaintance here who entertained us. The hills abound

with iron, that the people work and take to Kot-i-Singee.

8th Shawal.—Set out with the intention of proceeding to Aleekhel.

The road was through jungle, defiles, and over hills. On arriving

at a stream I halted, and made preparations for cooking, when a

party of six men, apparently robbers, presented themselves, and par-

Hens ere Rebbe took of the fare, and smoked our chillums. They

then questioned us as to our homes, and the object of

our journey. I replied, that we had come from Mecca, and were pro-

ceeding home to Baghdad. They then asked what we had with us.

I replied we were poor Hajees, and had nothing but a few medicines.

These they requested to see. On my complying with their request, the

English writing on the packets attracted their attention, and demanded

pita what the strange character was. I replied that they

were marks of my own invention, and mere help to my

memory, marking the different medicines. They became suspicious, and

opening my bundle, extracted the articles that pleased them most, such

as penknives and scissors. They then bound us and took us to Khel-i-

Masaood, beating us all the way, and on our arrival, sent for the village

Akund and shewed him the inscriptions. He immediately decided that

we were Feringees, in which opinion the Akhund confirmed them also,

on reading the notes of the road my Persian writer had. We were very

badly treated during our captivity, which lasted twelve days, and were

daily threatened with death. They endeavoured to —

Captivity. ; : ° °

Fa make my companions give evidence against me, by

beating them apart, and promising them freedom if they would confess.

During their punishment, they would allow I was a Feringee, but when

it ceased, declared only I was a fakeer. When we were alone, I warned

my companions not to peach, as we should certainly all be killed. A

man of Kheli Masdood went one day on an errand to Kot-i-Singee, the

head-man of which place was Dilasa Khan, who on enquiring the news,

was informed, that some Feringees had been discovered and confined in

his village, and they were thinking of killing them. Dilasa Khan being

a great friend of the late Mr. Moorcroft, on hearing this, immedi-

Mr. Moorcroft. ately set out, and arrived where we were confined,

in hy

ee |

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 587

and had us released, and our property restored; and taking us with

him seven kos to Kot-i-Singee, entertained us three

Release. ia

days, killing a sheep for us every day. Here we

witnessed a peculiarity in Wazeeree hospitality. The sheep, when

Chae killed, is brought with all its eatable appurtenances

Hospitality. i

and placed before the guest, the villagers assemble

round, and every one helps himself to the pieces he likes, which are

“‘kababed” [the breast always, | and the rest is put in a pot to boil.

It was the 21st Shawal when I arrived at Kot-i-Singee. The num-

ber of fighting men is six thousand, who acknow-

ledge no rule. The headman is Dilasa Khan, by

tribe a Massaoodkhel Singee Wazeeree. To the east is the Ghola-

ree Pass, to the west the hill, to the north Kaneeguram, and to

the south Tak. There are nine blacksmith’s shops, and three of

Hindoos. There is a mud fort, containing four hundred mud houses

and woollen tents. Dilassa Khan entrusted me with a letter to Capt.

Burnes, and furnished me with a guide to Cohaut, who ran away

after having accompanied me three kos. The inhabitants are enemies

of the Tak people. Dilasa Khan is suspected, not without reason,

of being in the pay of the Sikhs. During my stay, he pointed

out an eminence on which Mr. Moorcroft promised to build a

fort for him. The kindness he experienced from the above gentle-

Kot-i-Singhee.

man, would at any time incline him to serve the British Govern-

ment. :

25th Shawal.—Proceeded seven kos to Kot-i-Aleekhel, passing

often through water and jungle, and a Pass, which ex-

tends to Kaneeguram. The Aleekhels muster four

thousand fighting men. ‘To the east is Thattee, to the west Bamroo,

to the north the Ahmadzyes, and to the south the Myanees. I put

up in the mosque very tired; scarcely an hour had elapsed when a man

presented himself, saying his son had a bad ball wound, and wanted

me to attend him. Being tired and wanting a guide, I told him I

had not now the requisite apparatus, but if he would send some men

in charge of his son on with me to the next town, I would try my best.

To this the man would not consent, and took his leave. The road

was very bad, and everywhere were veins of iron, and signs of

where it was being, or had been, worked.

Kot-tAlee Khel.

Iron,

588 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

26th Shawal.—Arrived at Kaneeguram, which is the capital of the

Wuzeeree country. The cultivation is carried on by

Kaneeguram. ? )

running streams. The inhabitants are Sayads, who

are the spiritual fathers of the Wuzeerees. The houses are upper-

storied, and amount to four hundred. There are two large towers for

the protection of the town. There are thirty-two shops, as follow; viz.

sixteen of Hindoos, seven blacksmiths and cutlers, three goldsmiths,

two scabbard makers, and four dyers. The headmen are Durvesh Khan,

Sarwar Khan, Mulook Khan, Abdukahman Khan, Raim Khan, and Noor

Khan. The amount of fighting men is five hundred. The Sayads are far-

mers; the Wazeerees are independent, and are mostly herdsmen. They

are at enmity with the neighbouring tribes, but internally

united. To the east are the Khataks, to the west the

Gholaree Pass, to the north Dour, and to the south Tak. The cul-

tivation is not at all proportionate to the supply of water; the stream

River. that runs to Tak has its rise here. To the west, in the Pass,

is a very lofty and extensive black mountain, called Peer Karal, in

Concord.

Peer karal. which I was informed copper is to be found. Disputes

between the neighbouring chiefs led to the mines of this mineral be-

ing closed. The people also believe in the existence here of stones

impregnated with gold. I much wished to visit this mountain, but

was prevented by the cold, and want of a guide. Throughout the

hills iron abounds, and there must be no less than fifty or sixty manu-

factories. . The price of unwrought iron is 3 rupees Mehrabee the pucka

aianee led. maund. In Tak the Wuzeerees sell the quantity for

4 and 44+ rupees. Merchants purchase it from the

Wuzeerees for 22 and 3 rupees. Beyond the Peer Karal hill, coal is —

Coal. found, which is called ‘“ Sang-i-momyie.” The method of

extracting the iron is as follows: A pit is dug, about three and half

Iron. feet in diameter, and the same in depth, the top of which is

closed with a perforated cover of clay: over this is spread a coat of

charcoal, which is made in great quantities in the neighbouring hills ;

over this the stones containing the iron are heaped, being first broken

small, and over them again charcoal is heaped; round this heap five or

six bellows are applied. The iron falls through the perforated cover

into the pit, from which it is extracted to be wrought before being

sold. The iron in being wrought, loses three-quarters and five-eighths

1843.] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 589

of its weight. This process is alone undertaken by blacksmiths.

The Wazeerees are divided into four classes; viz. Masaoodzyes, Ah-

madzyes, Aleezyes, Bahlolzyes. ‘The headmen of the Ah-

madzyes are Bano Khan, Shekh Bayo Khan, Painda Khan,

Neko Khan, Kazim Khan, and Pasham Khan. The fighting men

amount to four thousand. To the east they have the Khattaks, to

the west the Masaoodzyes, to the north Khost and the Torees, and

to the south Bannoo. The headmen of the Aleezyes are

Mahommed Asan Khan, Durvesh Khan, Sarfraz Khan, Ma-

hommed Khan, Sayad Shah, Mulla Ghaib Khan, Khudadad Khan, Too-

ran Khan, Wilayat Khan, Sarwar Khan, and Hatim Khan. They mus-

ter from four thousand to four thousand and five hundred fighting

men. ‘To the east they have Thattee, to the west Bannoo, to the

north the Ahmadzyes, and to the south the Myanees.

The headmen of the Bahlolzyes are Nasrat Khan, Sair Khan,

Salamat Khan, Deerut Khan, Bazzul Khan, Alee Ma-

hommed Khan, Mulla Nadir Khan, Meer Allam Khan,

Dost Khan and Gul Rez Khan. They mustered three thousand and five

hundred fighting men. ‘To the east they have the Admadzyes, to the

west Kaneeguram, to the north Dour, and to the south Thattee.

29th Shawal.—Proceeded nine kos to Manzakee, over a hilly road,

through a jungle. It is situated between two streams,

Ahmadzyes.

Aleezyes.

Bahlolzyes.

Manzakee. i

and consists of forty houses; beyond the stream to

the south, are other thirty houses. There is a water millin play. The

headman is Mushkeen Khan, by tribe a Shahookhel. Number of

fighting men one hundred. They are at enmity with the people of

Dour. I put up on arriving in a blacksmith’s shop. °

Ist Zeekadah.—Travelled seven kos to Kamsar over a hilly road,

and through a jungle. On descending from one of these hills, I

stopped for a short time on the borders of a stream, with the inten-

tion of taking some refreshment, when I observed a party of four men

advancing towards me; fearing they might be thieves, I had recourse

to my detonating powder, and placing some on a stone at my feet,

awaited their approach, when they drew near, in attempting to rise, I

rested my walking stick on the powder, exclaiming “ Ya Allee mad-

dat,” (help! oh Allee.) The usual explosion ensued, and the

Lhieves.

thieves, for such I still suspect them to have been, ap-

590 Journal of a Tour through paris [No. 139.

proached me with great reverence, and requested that I would bless

them by clapping them on the back. The head man of Kamsar is Noor

Khan. The number of fighting men is eighty. They are at enmity with

the people of Dour. The place is surrounded by hills, and is itself situated

on aneminence. There are three Hindoo shops. On arriving I put

up at the mehman khanah, and introduced myself. They brought a

bed for me, on which I seated myself. They then asked me if I had

dined, I replied that I had now entered their country, (a hint that I

depended on their hospitality,) one of them immediately rose, and

brought some rice and butter milk. While I was dining, a Hindoo pre-

sented himself, and complained that he had a wife, who had presented

him with three children, but was dumb; I suggested, that she must

Bot onus be possessed of a devil. He insisted on my accom-

panying him home. This I did, saying that I would

put a copper pice and a rupee into a vessel of water, and that one

or the other would leap out ; if the former, he must distribute a fowl

and some copper change in charity; if the latter, a sheep. A vessel

being produced, I proceeded, with the aid of my servant, to discolour the

Hiitsca water, in order to conceal the contents which con-

sisted of a steel spring, confined by means of a piece

of rock salt, on which I placed the rupee during my incantations.

The salt of course in time melted, and the spring expanding, jerked

the rupee out of the water. The sheep was accordingly given me to

sacrifice, as well as the charmed rupee; and in return, I gave the dumb

lady a looking glass, in which she was punctually to look at herself,

whenever threatened with a return of the dumb devil, which I assured

them would either quit her after seven days, or seven weeks.

3rd Zeekadah.—Proceeded to the valley of Dour, which is embosomed

aii in hills. The cultivation is carried on by running streams.

There are about one hundred, or one hundred and fifty

different forts and villages in the valley. Three of the forts are

large, the residences of the Malik. They are Thattee, Ismailkhel, and

Hyderkhel. |

The headman of Thattee is Mahommed Khan, by tribe a Khattak. ©

Tee There are six hundred houses, and sixty-five Hindoo shops.

The number of fighting men is one thousand. They are

at enmity with the Wazeerees. To the east are the Hasankhels, to

1843. | of the Panjab and Affghanisian. 291

the west, the Utmanzyes, to the north Khost, and to the south the

Wazeerees.

The headman of the Moosakhels is Alee Khan. The fort of Moosa-

khel and suburb contain seven hundred houses, and one

Se ee hundred Hindoo shops. From Thattee to Moosakhel is

five kos. The number of fighting men is three thousand. They are

at enmity with the Wazeerees. To the east are the Hasankhels, to

the west the Utmanzyes, to the north Khost, and to. the south the

Wazeerees.

The headman of the Hyderkhels is Kamal Khan. The town of

as Hyderkhel contains three hundred houses, and _ thirty-

five Hindoo shops. The country between Moosakhel and

Hyderkhel is particularly fertile and well watered. The distance

is six kos. There are two Sayads here, who are much looked up

to. They are Furmals of Kaneeguram; their names are Jawaher

Shah and Ghareeb Shah. All disputes are settled in their presence,

and they draw no contemptible revenue from the district. In every

field in the valley, there is a tower built for its defence. They

are much divided among themselves. The fighting men

Discord. : ;

amount to two thousand. They are friends with the men

of Khost and Bannoo, and enemies of the Wazeerees.

There is a peculiar tribe in the hills of Dour, that shave one eye-brow,

_ one mustache, and half the beard; and apply anti-

Peculiar Habit. F

mony with the finger above and below the eye,

so as perfectly to disfigure their faces. The men of Dour assemble

once a week, at an entertainment got up by subscription: every

byiiw if) one attended by his catamite boy, and Wuring the

Disgusting Custom. ‘ if J ;

repast, the most disgusting attentions are paid to

them, and most revolting caresses received from them. ‘To the east

are the Hasankhels, to the west the Utmanzyes, to the north Khost,

and to the south the Wazeerees. The people of Dour are perfectly

independent. ‘The distance from Moosakhel is six kos.

20th Zeekadah.—Proceeded eight kos to Usmankhel, which is a

_ Usmankhel. dependency of Khost. The inhabitants who are rob-

bers, live in hair tents, which are thirty in number. They pay no

revenue. They are migratory. The road to this place is difficult and

hilly.

592 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

21st Zeekadah.—Proceeded twelve kos to Khost, having procured

Khost. @ guide over a difficult hilly road. The cultivation is carried

on by running streams; but on account of the unquiet state of the

neighbourhood, half the land is waste. There are three hundred and

fifty houses, and thirty-five shops, The headman is Sahibzadah

Ahmed Shah, [a holy character, ] a descendant of Peer

Dastgeer, Shakar Khan, Nooradeen Khan, Ismail Khan

and Abdulla Khan. The fighting men amount to five thousand. They

are at enmity with the Wazeerees. They are ryots of Dost Mahom-

med Khan of Cabool. To the east are the Wazeerees, to the west

the hills and the Jadrans, to the north the Toorees and the road to

Kuram, and to the south the Thattee hills. The revenue amounts

to 30,000 rupees, of this sum 5,000 rupees are distributed to the

Maliks, the remainder is given in jaghire to Alladad Khan, the son of

Sarwar Khan of Tak, who sought refuge at Cabool, on losing his pos-

sessions; and to whose son, Dost Mahommed gave a

daughter in marriage. I presented the Sahibzadah

with a penknife and a pair of scissors, and he in return furnished me

Holy Character.

Dost Mahommed.

with a guide.

25th Zeekadah.—Return to Usmankhel, and retracing my steps via

Hyderkhel, on the 27th Zeekadah arrived at a town on the boundary

of Bannoo, the headman of which place is Dilasa Khan, surnamed

the Ghazee.

The district of Bannoo is flat, and fertilized by running streams,

partly from one which comes from Dour, and partly from the

Kuram river. The district is highly cultivated. There are

full four hundred, if not five hundred forts and villages in the district.

The district is divided into four tappas, or rather five; viz. Hesakee,

Meeree, Suryanee, Khamsee, and Chandookhel.

The headman of Kesakee is Dakas Khan, and it is again subdivided

into four tappas. The fighting men amount to four thousand.

The revenue amounts to 22,500 rupees. The four tappas

are Longarkhel, under Dakas Khan; Nukradeenkhel, ditto ditto; Sik-

nadarkhel, ditto ditto; and Shamseekhel, under Kalandar Khan, who

resides at Kalandarkhel. Dakas Khan resides at Bazar, which is the

Bazar. capital of Eannoo. It contains five hundred houses, and

eighty Hindoo shops, five dyers, and five blacksmiths. This place is

Bannoo.

Eesakee.

eS a

1843.] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 593

called Bazar, because all the inhabitants of Bannoo come here to

market.

The headman of Meeree is Meer Baz Khan. It is sub-divided

Meeree. into six tappas. The fighting men amount to 3,000, and the

revenue to 30,000 rupees. The six tappas are :—

Kakee, under Shahbaz Khan. ; Obad, ditto ditto ; Hasankhel and

Mamookhel, under Hyder Khan ; Naswarkhel under Ghazee Khan and

Ameer Khan; Sarkee under Meer Baz Khan; and Mandyoo under

Alam Khan.

The headmen of Suryanee is Dilasa Khan Ghazee. It is sub-divided

Suryanee- jnto five tappas. The fighting men amount to three thou-

sand, and the revenue to 25,000 rupees.

The five tappas are :—

Daood Shah, under Dilasa Khan Ghazee; Mandahkhel, under Ba-

zeed Khan and Meer Kalam Khan; Walakdeenkhel, under Zapt Khan ;

Ghazeekhel, under Zahar Khan; and Hek-mis-kee, under Sekandar

Khan,

The headmen of Shamsee are Jangee Khan, Meerash Khan, and

Jafar Khan. The fighting men amount to two thousand,

and the revenue to 22,500 rupees. It is sub-divided into

four and half tappas, as follow :—

Shamsee.

Barkhajaree-Sarkhajaree, under Janghee Khan and Jafar Khan;

Ismailkhel and Meerakhel, under Sirdar Khidr Khan ; Waleekhel and

Sikandarkhel, under Meer Wais Khan ; and Daree-Deeree, under Nam-

war Khan and Gada Khan.

The half tappa Meetakhel and Fattehkhel, under Sirdar Ameer Khan.

The chief of the Chandookhelan is Sirdar Sher Mast Khan, noted

Chandoohkelan. throughout Bannoo for his hospitality. Ahmed Khan,

Refuge, the ex-chief of the Eesakhels, has sought refuge here.

Dakas Khan is, however, the chief of the greatest note in Bannoo.

The number of fighting men is four thousand. This district is much

deserted, on account of the Sikhs levying three-sixteenths of the pro-

duce as revenue.

The cultivation of the district consists of turmeric, sugar-cane,

rice, cotton, wheat, barley, and juwaree

The inhabitants of Bannoo, denominated Bannoowals, are friends

with the people of Dour, and enemies of the Wazeerees. They have

594 Journal of a Tour through parts [ No. 139.

also, to a great extent, feuds among themselves; and are ryots of

Runjeet Singh, but very unsteady ones; and their revenue is gene-

rally collected by large detachments. To the east and north are

the Khattaks, to the west the Wazeerees and Dour, and to the south

the Murwats.

I remained on the boundary of Bannoo two days, and at Chandoo-

khel three days; the distance between the places being five kos.

2nd Zeehijjah.—From Zakookhel Chandookhelan, proceeded eight

kos to Umarkhel, a dependency of Murwat, over a sandy

ania road, with the exception of the two first kos. |The place

contains thirty mat huts; their drinking water is two kos distant.

The cultivation depends on rain. Each house subscribes a vessel for

the mosque and for strangers.

3rd Zeehijjah.—Proceeded to Murwat to the village of Lakkee.

Lakkee. The cultivation depends on the rain. This is the principal

town of Murwat. A small portion of the Kuram river is applied to

cultivation. There are three tribes of Murwats.

Bahram, under Feroz Khan and Muhablat Khan, resident of Ghuznee-

Bahram. khel; amount of fighting men two thousand.

Dreplarah, under Noora Khan and Allaiyar Khan, resident of San-

gookhel and Asakkhel; amount of fighting men two thousand.

Moosakhel, under Hyder Khan, resident of Adamzye, and Cash-

meer Khan, resident of Walee; amount of fighting men one thousand

and five hundred.

The former amount of the revenue of Murwat, in the time of the

Revenue. Sadozyes, was 18,000 rupees, and in the time of the Nawabs

of Dera, 50,000 rupees.

The town of Lakkee is situated in the division of Bahram; but the

Lakkee- whole three divisions dispute about their claims to it. The

Maliks of Lakkee are four in number; viz. Deewana Khan, Gouhar

Khan, Jaban Khan, and Alam Khan. The town of Lakkee is composed

of four hundred houses and twenty shops, three dyers, and two black-

smiths. They are now ryots of Runjeet Singh, but compulsory ones,

and their revenue is only collected by detatchments of Sikh troops.

They are friends of the Bannoowals, and enemies of the Wazeerees.

Proceeded on leaving Lakkee to Lachee Teeree, a dependency of

Lachee Teeree. Cohaut, under the rule of Runjeet Singh, a jaghire

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 595

of Sultain Mahommed Khan Barikzye. There are only four salt mines

Salt mines. in the whole Khattak country: two in the district of La-

chee, called Malgeen and Cheena, and two in that of Teeree; the

salt from the latter is black and mixed with small pebbles. That of

the Lachee mines is of a superior quality. The district of Lachee is

farmed by Saidan Shah, for 22,000 rupees. In the district are in-

cluded the mines, Ismailkhel, Meer Ahmadkhel, and Malgeen. The

pay of Saidan Shah is five thousand rupees, and his jaghire is in Cohaut

in the district of Sher Khan. He has in his employ twenty horse-

men. |

The mines of Chotara are known by the name of Maheekhel and

Karz Kurooz, and are farmed by Shahbaz Khan, Akarkhel.of Teeree,

the capital of the Khattak country.

The price of salt in Teeree and Chotara is twelve ass loads, or eight

Sat bullock loads for one rupee of the Sultan Mahommed Khan’s

coinage; ten pice is levied on every bullock load, and eight pice

on an ass load; one pice the load is levied by the miner.

- One-fourth of the government duties on Lachee salt is given in pay

to Maliks Nadir and Bahadur, who superintend the whole districts of

Khurm and Thattee. In the winter, Afghan merchants export thou-

sands of camel loads of this salt to Cabool, Jelalabad, Peshawur, and

Bajour.

The salt of Chotara is exported only to Bunoo, Khost, Murwat, and

Exportation. the Derajat.

The fighting men of Lachee amount to three thousand. Two kos

Naptha. from Lachee are three hillocks of yellow earth, in which

are flat flakes of stone, which burn. There are also two springs of

naptha.

Teeree, which is the capital of the Khattak country, has a fort with

four bastions, which is situated on an eminence. It was repaired by

Sirdar Attar Singh Aloowalya, who conquered Cohaut. The whole

of the district of Teeree is managed by Shahbaz Khan, son of Sadullah

Khan, Akorkhel, who has farmed it from Sultan Mahommed Khan,

for 30,000 rupees. His own pay being 3,000. He furnishes one

hundred and ten horsemen. There are three tappas dependent on Tee-

_ ree; viz. Darra Barak, Chotara, and Shakar Darra. The fighting men

of Teeree amount to three thousand.

596 Journal of a Tour through parts [ No. 139.

The cultivation depends on the rain, and their drinking water is

from a spring, which becomes brackish soon after issuing from the

Goitre. ground. The men and women here are all afflicted with

the govtre, which they say, arises from the salt quality of the

water.

The people all dress in red. They are gradually, under the rule of

Shahbaz, beginning to reinhabit the suburbs of the repaired fort, called

Narinj, which contains one hundred houses; the other old fort contains

one hundred and fifty.

On arriving at Teeree, I put up in the mosque, when shortly after,

a very good looking woman presented herself, bringing with her bread

and halwah, which she presented to me. Then taking hold of my

skirt, begged me to attend to her petition. This was to give her some

iia charm, to attract the attentions of her husband, which had

for the past six months been divided among his other wives,

to her entire exclusion. I ordered the Persian writer to make out the

necessary charm, and gave it to her, as well as a piece of sugar-candy,

which I charmed by whetting it with my saliva, while I repeated sup-

posed incantations over it. This she was to give her husband to eat.

Whether he was pleased with the perhaps unusual attention and

fondness of manner of his wife, or how it was, 1 know not; but she

Success. returned to me next morning, with a present of a sheep,

much pleased with the effect of my charm.

My fame for charms soon spread, and fearing that I should have

hosts of female applicants, and that some of my charms might not

prove so efficacious as the first, I was glad to take my depar-

ture.

On leaving Teeree, at the distance of three kos at the entranc2

of the Darra-i- Barak, is the ruined fort of Rajnagar, generally known

as Shahbazar. It is of a square construction, situated cn

Rajnagar. 4 aie

"an eminence, and has a very large tank inside. The

position is a very strong one. Coal is found in the Darra-i-Barak

in the bed of the ravine, by digging. It is brought here by

ra floods, and there is no bed of it. To the east of Rajnagar is

the Lachee road and the Darra-i-Barrak, to the west the Darra-i-khat-

tak, to the north the Khattaks, and to the south the Khattaks, Shakar

Darra, and Baghan.

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 597

Leaving Lakkee, I proceeded seven kos to Latamar ; a dependency

Latamar. of Chotara, over a bad road, without water. The headman

is Daraz Khan.

From Latamar I proceeded seven kos to Karak, over hills and

Karak. through defiles; drinking water is procured from a spring,

which turns brackish at three or four paces from where it leaves

the ground. The headmen are Sangee Khan, Danial, and Darab

Khan, This place is pleasantly situated in a valley. On arriving,

I put up as usual at the mosque, when two men, father and son, pre-

sented themselves, and requested my aid in the following matter:—

The son had sold a cow for 20 rupees and given the

money to his mother, who said it was lost, and he

wanted to know, whether his mother, sister, or wife, was the thief.

I enquired if any one else had been in the house. THe replied in the

negative. I enquired of the mother, where she had laid the money?

Conjuring. She replied underneath the clothes. I then proceeded to ar-

range my conjuring apparatus of the bowl of discolored water and steel

spring ; and writing the names of the five members of the family each on

a separate slip of paper, confined each slip to a copper pice, by a layer

of dough, and placed one of the pice on the spring. This in due course

of time, by the process before described, was forcibly ejected from the

bowl. Taking it up, and stripping off the dough, I proceeded to read

the name. Then wisely shaking my head, I said, ‘“‘ Now I know the

thief, who shall be exposed, if the money is not restored before

Theft discovered. Morning.” At midnight, I was gently awoke by the

complainant’s wife, who confessed to the abstraction of the money, and

promised to do any thing, if I would not expose her; at the same time

she counted into my hands the missing 20 rupees. In the morning,

when the husband came to see me, I presented him with the rupees;

saying, I had the greatest trouble in recovering them from the genii

who had taken them away. Some of them were pressed on my accept-

ance, but I refused them, in order to sustain my character; but the

good people would not be content, until they had cooked and packed

up two fowls for my journey, on which I was accompanied for two

Complaint of Theft.

stages by the grateful owner of the rupees.

From Karak I proceeded five kos to Meetakhel, over salt hills.

Meetakhel. The headman is Alladad Khan.

598 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

From Meetakhel I travelled six kos to Zamankhel, over salt hills

Zamankhel. of a red colour. |

Thence I proceeded four kos to Kuharkhel, over salt hills and

Kuharkhel. through a jungle, and the next day six kos to Teeree.

From Teeree I proceeded five kos to Mameekhel, over a high Pass,

Mameekhel. jmpracticable for artillery.

Thence I proceeded seven kos to Seemaree over a hilly tract; one

Seemaree. division of this place, Seemaree-i-Paiyeen, is dependent

on Hangoo. The headman is Mazulla Khan. From this place I had

intended to visit Hangoo; but my funds being expended, and hearing

from Meerza Samad, the son of Meerza Abdu Raheem, who had come

to collect the revenue for his master Sultan Mahommed Khan, that a

Persian acquaintance of mine, by name Agha Mehdee Khan of Ispa-

han was at Cohaut, I determined to proceed to that place, to procure

his assistance. Meerza Samad entertained me with dancing and

wine, the evening I staid with him.

From Seemaree I proceeded six kos to Jabba, which is dependent

Jabba. on Cohaut, over a high Pass, on the top of which is a tank.

The whole of my stay in Lachee and Teeree, amounted to nine

days.

12th Zeehijjah.—Arrived at Cohaut, and proceeded to the house of

Cohaut. my acquaintance, Agha Mehdee. Here the Persian writer

became clamorous for pay. I silenced him, however, with some trou-

ble, by promising to return from Peshawur with the necessary funds,

for which place and purpose I accordingly made my arrangements for

starting.

On arriving at Peshawur, I took possession of the manuscripts I

Digression to Pesha- had sent from Tak by the hands of my cossid,

Ae whom I met here, and lost no time in making search

for a fresh Meerza. I at last procured one, by name Safdar Shah,

through the aid of Captain Burnes’ Cafila Bashee, a resident of Pesha-

wur} who after a great deal of hesitation, lent me some money, and

took the security of Safdar Shah’s father, that he would not desert me.

Returning from Peshawur, I arrived at eight kos at Mitanee; passing

Mitanee. Bara-i-Kalan, and the following Momand villages; viz. Ba-

hadur, Mashookhel, and Ouzye, &c, over ground abounding in ravines

and jungle.

1843.] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 599

From Mitanee I proceeded seven kos to Akhor, and put up with Malik

Akhor. Hakeem Akhorwal, by tribe an Afreedee, and a great robber.

The road was stony and through defile. At the entrance of the defile are

two ruined forts and a large tank. There is a large town here, erected by

the Afreedees. One thousand rupees are yearly levied here on salt.

From Akhor I proceeded to Cohaut over a hilly road, and through

a defile; the neighbourhood abounding with Af-

reedee villages, and put up with Agha Mehdee

in the village of Myankhel, near the shrine of Hajee Bahadur. On

the road passed the village of Zarghoonkhel, where there is a large

tank and four towers, one at each angle of the village, and four kos

further on, passed the village of Torakee, which is situated on an

eminence ; and then the Cohaut kotal or Pass, which is very difficult,

especially of descent. On the top of the Pass is a tower,

nominally for the protection of the road; but it is

garrisoned by twelve men of the Afreedee tribe, who, although en-

tertained and paid by the governor of Cohaut, are often themselves

engaged in plundering merchants and travellers. At the bottom of the

Pass is a second tower, garrisoned by twenty men. At Cohaut I dis-

charged the former Meerza, having paid him up.

Cohaut is divided into three tapppas, as follow: Bazeekhels, Samal-

zyes, and Meeranzyes.

Cohaut itself is included in the territory of the Bazeekhels. The

fort of Cohaut, in which the governor resides, is of a square form having

four bastions, and situated on aneminence There isa second fort, in

which there is a dwelling house and reception room, over which is the

mehman khanna. There is a tower in the fort at the entrance and a

covered well; drinking water is procured from seven springs outside

the fort ; three of the springs gush out from near the Telee’s mosque,

Bazar, and four from the vicinity of the Bazar, by which four mills are

turned. There are fifty shops, four mosques, and two dharmsals.

Cohaut has to the east the Afreedee country, the Torakees and

Soorakees, and Khushalgar, to the west Hangoo, to the north the Pass,

and to the south Lachee and Dour.

The following are the neighbouring dependencies of Cohaut, entered

Neighbouring de- into the daftars as Bangash-i-Paiyeen Jangal, under

Berenice. Shah Zaman and Aslam. The cultivation is car-

Return to Cohaut.

Pass.

600 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

ried on by running water. There are one hundred and fifty houses.

The fighting men amount to one hundred and ten. They are friends

with the Sepas, and enemies of the Khattaks.

Peerkhel, under Maliks Raz and Jafar. There are one hundred

Peerkhel. houses, and eighty fighting men, who are friends of the Sepas,

and enemies of the Khattaks.

Garee Myankhelan, under Malik Nasarulla, contains fifty houses.

Garee Myankhelan. The cultivation is conducted with spring water. In

this division, the shrine of Hajee Bahadur is situated, as well as a large

mosque, and a well with a Persian wheel. The fighting men amount

to one hundred.

Bezadee, under Maliks Arsala and Siffat, contains one hundred

Bezadee. houses, and eighteen shops, and turns out sixty fighting men.

Meer Ahmedkhel, under Malik Mahmood, contains fifty houses, and

turns out thirty fighting men.

Shekhan, under Malik Sheraz, Afreedee, Zarghoonkhel, situated at

Shekhan. the base of a hill, contains eighty houses; and turns out fifty

fighting ten.

Kaghazee and Nasratkhel, under Malik Noor. A number of other

Kaghazee and Nas- Villages have been deserted on account of the ty-

ratkhel. ranny of Sher Alee, the former governor. The cul-

tivation is carried on from the river. The above two khels contain

fifty houses, and turn out eighty fighting men; and are the jaghire of

Ismail Khan, son of Jahandad Khan Popalzye.

Mahommedzye, the jaghire of Agha Mehdee is under Malik Bashar,

Mahommedzye. and contains two hundred and fifty houses, and two

water mills. The number of fighting men is 95.

I paid a visit to the famous koh or hill of Ahad-i-Saboor, so much

Ahad-i-Saboor. talked of by the people of Cohaut. It is situated

on the road to the Samalzyes, and beyond Mahommedzye and Nasrat-

khel. I had heard that there was an old inscription which no one

could read, and went therefore prepared to copy it: also, that there

were the ruins of an old square fort, with the remains of the stable,

harem, and pillars of a throne. I went in company with a_ party

Shah Kotah. from Cohaut to this hill, which is also known as Shah

Kotal. The foot of the hill is covered with jungle. On the side

of the hill is an opening or cave, and on the outside are two sta-

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanisian. 601

lactite looking pillars, the whole place evidently natural. The inscrip-

tion alluded to, was nothing in my opinion but natural crevices and

marks in the rock. On the hill are just perceptible, the remains of

a very old fort. There is also a spring of water, and a large “ peepul”

tree. Adjoining this hill, is the hill of Damchoor, which extends to

the Pass of Cohaut.

Bar is under Shahbaz Khan, and contains sixty houses and several

vineyards. The cultivation is carried on by running water.

Kamar Dand is under Gul Sher Khan, and contains thirty houses.

Kamar Dand. The cultivation depends partly on rain, and partly on

running water. |

Soorgal and Jabba are under Buland and Musaib, Zarghoonkhel

Soorgal. Afreedees. The cultivation is carried on by water from the

Kuram river. The fighting men amount to 50.

Jarma and Shapoor are dependencies of Garee Myankhel, the former

Jarma and Shapoor. jg nearly a waste; and the surrounding jungle is very

dense.

‘Togh is under Mulla Ahmed and Kaim, and contains four hundred

houses. The cultivation is carried on by a large canal from the Kuram

river." The fighting men amount to 160.

Teeree Tang is under Malik Nasro, and contains two hundred

Teeree Tang. houses, and turns out 70 fighting men.

Khurmatoo is under Kuram Sher, and is cultivated from the Kuram

Khurmatoo. river. The fighting men amount to 80.

Thattee and Maramzyes are under Malik Himmat, and contain

Thattee and Maramzyes. one hundred and twenty houses. There is

a great portion of waste land.

Kot-i-kandiyalee is under Maliks Akram and Aizam. It contains

Kot-i-kandiyalee. one hundred houses, and 50 fighting men.

Gandiyabee Killa, known as Zanjeer Kamar, is situated on an emi-

Zanjeer Kamar. nence, and is now in ruins. It is reported to have

been built by the former Hindoo rajas. ‘There are remains of bas-

tions, a stable, and tank. Of the wonderful zanjeer, or chain, from

which the place derived its name, there is of course no vestige.

Siah is under Gul Mahommed. The cultivation is carried on from

Siah. the Kuram river. The number of fighting men is 60.

602 Journal of a Tour through parts [ No, 139.

Tareekhel was formerly a dependency of Cohaut, it is now in-

Tareekhel. dependent. They are neighbours of the Afreedees. The

fighting men amount to 200. ;

Gadakhel is under Shahzadah and Khanawadah. The cultivation

Gadakhal. depends partly on the rain, partly on canals. There

are four hundred and fifty houses. The fighting men amount to 200.

Dhoodah is under Mahboob. The cultivation depends on the rains.

Dhoodah. There are four hundred houses, and 80 fighting men.

Shadeekhel, Kamal, Mandahkhel, Kotree and Muchkee are under

Shadeekhel, &c. &c. Malick Samad, &c. There are four hundred

houses, and the revenue amounts to 6,000 rupees.

The tappa of Bazee is under Naib Gul Maz Khan, whose family for-

Bazee. merly enjoyed the whole of Cohaut. He is by tribe a

Shakookhel. The revenue, including the customs, trades, and weavers

and tax on herds amounts to 41,000 rupees, and the fighting men of

the whole tappa amount to 1200. The people of Bazee are all Mus-

selmen of the Sunnee creed.

The tappa of Samalzye is inhabited by Sheah Musselmans, and is

farmed by Sher Alee Khan, Izzatkhel, father-in-law of Sirdar Sultan

Mahommed Khan. The dependencies of Samalzye are as follow :—

Mouza Aleezye, under Ghulam Khan, is situated in a valley, having

Aleezye- to the north, across the hills, the tribe of Sepa, outside

the fort are two hundred houses. The shrine of Myan Fatteh Shah

is situated in the suburb of Koh. The fighting men amount to 80.

Ustarzye-i-Paieen contains a mud fort. It has two gates, one to

Ustarzye- the east, the other to the west, and two hundred houses.

The fighting men amount to 100 Ustarzye-i-Bala under Meerza, and

contains a mud fort with two gates both to the north. There are

one hundred and fifty houses, and the same number of fighting men.

Kachee Bala-o-Paieen, under Muazim Sher, is divided into four

Kachee. mouzas, each containing a mud fort, and two large towers,

and from four hundred to five hundred houses, as well as vineyards and

pomegranate gardens. The fighting men amount to 200.

Marye Bala-o-Paieen, under Jafar Alee, is situated on an eminence,

Marye. having two hundred houses below, and 150 fighting men. This

place borders on the Teera Pass, at the bottom of which are seven

water-mills. The revenue of the whole tappa amounts to 22,00,

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 603

rupees nominally, the whole sum being seldom realized. Tle people of

Samalzye are noted for bravery ; the cultivation depends chiefly on the

Kuram river.

The tappa of Meeranzye is a dependency of Hangoo, as far as Tal-

Meeranzye- j-Bulandkhel. From Cohaut I proceeded to Ustarzye and

thence to Marye, where I took up my quarters in a mosque, where

a man presented himself, saying, he had two wives, a grown-up son,

and a daughter-in-law ; that he had committed some gold and rupees

Theft. to the keeping of his senior wife, which had been lost, and

requested me, as I was a fakeer, to ascertain who had taken it. I

accompanied him home, where I found all the members of the family

disputing and interchanging high words. I enquired of the master of

the house which wife was youngest. He replied—the one I have just

married, and the management of the house is entirely in the hands of

the boy’s mother. I asked him which he liked best. He replied one

has got old, and the other is pretty and young, what more need I say.

I requested that they should all assemble. On their presenting

Conjuring. themselves, I wrote all their names on separate slips of

paper, and folded them up separately, filling all with ashes ; but one,

which I filled with detonating powder. I then gave a stone into the

hands of the Malik, and ordered him to strike each paper, as I gave

the signal during my incantations. On the explosion from one of

the papers ensuing, I pretended to read the name of the thief, allow-

ing the party the night to consider, before being exposed. Towards

night-fall, having occasion to go out, I was followed by the senior

wife, who taking hold of my skirt, confessed she was the thief; having

Discovery. been driven to the act, in the hope of attaching suspicion to

her rival, and thus, estranging her husband’s affections from her. She

promised to return the articles, provided I would not expose her, and

would do something with her husband, so as to induce him to visit

Stipulation. her once a week. I promised this, and the articles were

brought to me at midnight in the mosque. In the morning I sent for

the husband, and presenting him with the missing property, enjoined

him to treat his first wife with greater consideration. He after some

disputation, agreed to visit her once a month.

My digression from Cohaut to Peshawur, my return to that place,

and my journey to Teera, occupied eighteen days.

604 Journal of a Tour through parts LNo. 139.

Ist Mohurrum.—Proceeded seven kos to Sultanzye in the district

of Teera, passing the Barah river and the Koh-i-Boland

Sultanzyes.

pass, which is difficult even for footmen. The sides of

the hill are covered with jungle, and the cultivation is carried on with

the water of the Barah river. There are three forts here, two belong

to Band Alee Khan, Sultanzye Orakzye. The inhabitants are partly

Sunnee, and partly Sheah Musselmans. The other chief is Alam Khan,

Orakzye. The forts have all four bastions fitted to bear artillery.

The fort in which Alam Khan resides is separate, and has a mehman

khanna above the gateway, a small gun, without shot or ammunition

of any description, is also near the entrance. There are twenty-two

Shaheens mounted on the bastions. The fighting men amount to

Alam khan. six hundred who are independent. Alam Khan being in

the employ of Sirdar Dost Mahommed Khan, generally spends his

time in Basoul, Jelalabad, and Cabool. He has eighty horses of his

own, and receives 24,000 rupees pay. He has a jaghire in Basoul.

In the times of the former Sadozye kings, the Orakzyes received from

22,000 to 25,000 rupees a-year. They are friends with the people of

Jamrood, Barakee, and Alam Guzeer, and enemies of the Abdul

Azeezkhels and Maneekhels. To the east is the Bangash road, to the

west Usmankhels and Istareekhels, to the north hills and the road to

Peshawur, and to the south hills, and beyond them, the Hurbuz and

Maneekhel.

2nd Mohurrum.—Proceeded seven kos to Abdul Azeezkhel. The

Abdul Azeezkhel. cultivation chiefly depends on the rain. There

are five hundred houses. The headman who is also a holy man, is

Maddat Shah. Meer Maddat Shah, he is a peer, or spiritual chief

of the Sheahs of this neighbourhood.

The inhabitants have separate forts, and muster 450 fighting men, a

lawless set. They are friends of the Maneekhels, and enemies of

Mastee and Shekhan.

This year, which was one of scarcity, wheat sold at four and half

akahs the rupee, and juwar at five or six akahs [oue akahs, seven Pesh-

awur seers. |

The inhabitants carry their hatred of the rival sects of Sunnees

Sheeahs. to an inveterate extent, and during the ten first days

of the Mohurrum, their penances are very severe. They fast the

[n4

1843.] ~ of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 605

days, and hold their meetings in the house of Maddat Shah, who has

the most unbounded influence over his disciples, the Maneekhels and

Abdul Azeezkhels.

In these districts, apples, grapes, mulberries, walnuts, pears, pome-

granates ; in short all the Cabool fruits are produced in plenty.

In the hot weather, the situation is peculiarly pleasant. To the east

is Garee Rustam Khan, to the west Mastee and Shekhan, Mullakhel

and Baramadkhel, to the north hills, and beyond them, the Afreedees

and the road to Jelalabad, and to the south the Maneekhels. They

have never paid revenue since the time of the Chaghatye kings.

During my stay with Maddat Shah, I saw none of the assumptions

Maddat Shah. that the Sunnees give him credit for; but his disciples,

certainly, are in some instances, beyond bounds in the homage they

pay him. In their prayers, for instance, they ask forgiveness in his

name and those of his children and forefathers.

During my stay, my Persian Meerza who was a Sayad, made a

mistake, which was nearly proving of serious con-

sequence. He one day seated himself on the vacant

cot of one of Maddat Shah’s sons. I overheard the bye-standers mut-

tering a threat, that if he were not a guest, they would kill him for the

insult. I explained, in extenuation, that my companion was a Sayad, as

well as my host. ‘‘ He may be,” was the reply, “but for all that, he

Awkward mistake.

shan’t presume to sit on that cot.”

The Bangashees perform the pilgrimage to Meshed. I have often

Veneration. met them in Persia, and whenever the name of Maddat

Shah is mentioned, if they are seated, they immediately rise, and

press the forefinger of their right hand, half closed, first to their lips

and then to their foreheads.

Maneekhel is pleasantly situated in a valley. In the summer, this

Maneekhel. place enjoys the best climate in all Teera. The cultiva-

_ tion is carried on by spring and river water. The winter here is very

severe; but the poor people find plenty of firewood near at band.

There are one or two mills on every canal. There are six hundred

houses of stone and mud; and the fighting men amount to 800.

They are enemies of the Sunnees of Mastee and Shekhan. The

Sheahs of the neighbourhood are said to be descended from a con-

-Shamal and Karah. verted Hindoo, named Shamal, and the Sunnees of

606 Journal of a Tour through parts | [No. 129.

one, named Karah. To the east are hills, to the west hills, and beyond

them Bangash, to the north the Abdul Azeezkhels, and to the south

hills, and beyond them Bangash.

Baramadkhel is situated on an eminence, in a valley beyond

Baramadkhel. Maneekhel. The inhabitants are Sheeahs. The cul-

tivation depends on springs and water from the Teera river. There

are one thousand houses of stone and mud, and 600 fighting men.

They are friends with the other Sheeahs, and of course enemies of the

rival Sunnee tribes. The chief men are Ghulam Khan and Meer Ahmed

Khan, Orakzyes. To the east is Karnar, to the west Maneekhel, to the

north hills, and to the south Samal.

Usmankhel and Ferozkhel are inhabited entirely by Sunnees. The

A PREMnON. cultivation depends on the Teerariver. Every village

Ferozkhel. has its separate mud fort. There are five hundred and

forty seven houses. Usmankhel is to the north-east, and Ferozkhel to

the north. There are no regular appointed Maliks. The manwho en-

tertains best is chief for the time. The fighting men amount to 4 or 500.

In every village of Teera there is a Hindoo’s shop, and the Hindoos

of both sexes in this district wear the same clothes as the Musselmans 3

and therefore cannot be distinguished by a stranger at a glance.

The fruits here are very fine in the summer. The inhabitants dress in

loose trousers, confined at the bottom; and in long shirts,

sewn double and treble, reaching to the knee, and some-

times to the ankle. Dark-blue lungees compose their head dress.

The women wear rows of silver coins as buttons on their vests.

Beyond Ferozkhel is Kilah-i-Gehrajgal in the Afreedee country,

situated in a valley, of which the land is of a peculiar red

colour, and through which the Barah river runs as well as

the road to Basoul and Cabool. I was directed by Major Leech to

visit a place called Rajgurh. I never heard of any place nearer ap-

proaching the name than this. To the east of Ferozkhel are the

Zakhakhel Afreedees, to the west the Masteekhels, Shekhans and

Mulllakhels, to the north the road to Cabool, and to the south the Abdul

Azeezkhel. The inhabitants are independent. On arriving near Usman-

khel, I met a young woman proceeding to draw water; she enquired

Dress.

Gehrajgal.

who I was, and received for answer from one of my men,

that I was a fakeer of a saintly character. She invited

Incident.

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 607

‘me to her house, where she presented me with a chillum, some raisins,

and jalghozas, paying me attentions that did not seem to excite the

jealousy of her husband; and at nightfall, brought a cot for me to

sleep on. The unblushing overtures made by this woman in the course

of the evening, and many other incidents on my journey, led me to

pe a AT form a very poor opinion of the simplicity of the

country people of Afghanistan. They seem far to

surpass the towns-people in the looseness of their morals.

Ustarzye borders on the Khyber and Basoul. The inhabitants have

eye all separate forts, amounting to twenty. There were for-

_ merly three thousand houses. At present there are even

more, some at the fort, and some at the top of the table land. The cultiva-

tion depends partly on the rain, and partly on spring water. There is

no fixed Malik. He who entertains most is.the best man, and possesses

greatest influence. The fighting men amount to upwards of 3,000.

They are very independent, and great robbers. They are of the tribe of

Orakzye. They are friends of the Afreedees, and enemies of the Abdul

Azeezkhels and Maneekhels. They are, as might be expected, Sunnee

Musselmans. To the east are the hills and the road to Peshawur, to

the north are the hills, anda to the south are the Abdul Azeezkhels.

Before my arrival at Ustarzye, my fame as a fakeer had preceded

me. Immediately after my arrival a man waited on me, and re-

presented that he had a very beautiful daughter, who regularly every

Sunday and Wednesday went mad, and sometimes struck herself, and

Another devj] SOmetimes her relations; that she was engaged to be

cast out. married, and her intended had become averse to the

match ever since the commencement of these fits ; intreating me to cure

her. I became at a loss what to do, and what puzzled me more, was,

that the day of my arrival was a Saturday and the next day the girl, as

was her wont, had the mad fits ; and I was taken to the house and found

her stretched at full length, heaping abuse on all her relations. I

soon discovered that she was shamming, and commenced operations

accordingly. I drew a line on the ground around her, and wrapped some

brimstone in a rag and gave it to my servant, while I covered my

own head and commenced incantations; telling the servant to light

the.rag, and apply it to her nostrils ; while I ordered the father to hold

her firmly until I told him to release her, warning him, that if he did

608 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

so without my telling him, the devil, of whom his daughter was possess-

ed, would kill her. On the burning brimstone being applied, she begged

to be released in a sensible tone of voice. This I would not allow,

until she spoke in the person of the possessing devil, and promised he

never would return. I explained that it was necessary to give a written

charm to prevent the return of the devil, and explained to the mother,

that I wished to see the girl in private. On her being brought, I

questioned her before the mother about the devil; she replied, that as

long as the fakeer (myself) remained, he (the devil) would not possess

her; but immediately on his (my) departure, he (the devil) would

destroy her. After this, the mother motioned her daughter to depart,

who refused, saying she would stay and wait on me. When we were

eae . alone, the girl told me the truth ; which was, that she had

a lover, and played these tricks that the match with the

young man to whom she was engaged, might be broken off. I promised

to aid her, and told her to get her betrothed to visit me. In the morn-

ing the young man came and asked me to do all I could to cure

his intended of her fits. I explained that if she got cured, the devil

would attack him instead; and proved it by my old apparatus of the

bowl of dirty water and the steel spring, which ejected his name as

the fated one. He was much frightened, and entreated me to point

out aremedy. This I did by assuring him, he could never marry the

‘* possessed,” and live; and that therefore, he had much better take the

other sister, who was also marriageable. This, after sometime was,

with my assistance, arranged. The successful lover, who had hitherto

remained in the back ground, now visited me, bringing with him some

cooked dishes. He afterwards accompanied me one stage as a guide,

and I left Ustarzye with the satisfaction of having caused the hap-

piness of two beings at no one’s expense.

The cultivation of the Masteekhels depends on spring water. Their

| osama habitations are partly below, and partly on a rising

ground. They have all separate forts, amounting to about

twenty. The headman is Jemadar Misree. They amount to three’ thou-

sand fighting men, and are friends of the Shekhans and Mullakhels,

and enemies of Abdul Azeezkhels: and they are always armed night

and day accordingly. This tribe and that of Shekhan

Hospitality.

ey are noted throughout Teera for their hospitality. To

1843. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 609

whole ten the east are the Abdul Azeezkhels and Maneekhels, to the

west the Aleekhels, Sherzyes and Mamoozyes, and to the south the

hills.

Shekhan extends to Naryab. There is no headman. The fighting

_ Shekhan» men amount to three thousand. To the east are Abdul

Azeezkhels, and to the west the Mullakhels and Alee Sherzyes. The

Ismailzyes. Cultivation of the Ismailzyes depends on the Samal canal,

which runs towards Cohaut. It is divided properly into Akhel Rabia-

khel and Ismailzyes. The headman is Sirdar Sayad Shah. They are

friends of the Aleekhels. ‘The fighting men amount to 1,000. To the

east are the Alee Sherzyes, to the west Shekhan, to the north the

Afreedees, and to the south the Tortareens.

The Alee Sherzyes have six mouzas, and seven forts. The culti-

Alee Sherzyes. vation chiefly depends on the rain. The headman is

Mazulla Khan. The fighting men amount to 3,000. To the east

are the Mamoozyes, to the west the Shekhans and Masteekhels, to the

south Bangash, and to the north the Afreedees.

The cultivation of the Mullakhels depends chiefly on the rain.

There are six mouzas dependent. The habitations are in

a valley. The chief man is Mulla Ahmed Orakzye. The

fighting men amount to 700. To the east are the Aleekhels, to the

west Abdul Azeezkhels, to the north the Shekhans, and to the south

Bangash. |

The cultivation of the Mamoozyes depends on the Barah river.

Mamoozyes. There are thirty or forty forts under Mazulla Orakzye.

The fighting men amount to 400. To the east is Chamkanee, to the

west Masteekhels and Shekhans, and to the north the Afreedees.

The Chamkanee Orakzyes inhabit the base of the Seefed-koh

range. Their cultivation depends on the rain. The

fighting men amount to 3,500. The headmen are

Noor Alee and Arsalla. They have internal feuds. To the east is

Teera, to the west are Kuram and Bangash and the Shrine of Lot, to

the north Suefd-koh, and to the south the hills. I remained in Teera

eleven days.

The district of Kuzeer is in ‘ valley beyond the Maneekhel Pass,

the descent into which is very difficult. There is a covered

tank of rain water near the top. The Pass is covered with

Mullakhels.

Chamkanee.

Kuzeer.

610 Journal of a Tour through parts [ No. 139.

trees. The inhabitants are called Bar Mahommedkhels. There are

two forts on the plain, and three on the hill. The cultivation depends

partly on springs, and partly on the rain. The people live in caves.

The:headman is Meer Ahmed Khan. The number of fight-

ing men amount to 400. ‘To the east is Bangash, to the west

the Maneekhel Pass, to the north the hills, and to the south hills,

and beyond them the Bengash country. The inhabitants are partly

Caves.

Sunnees and partly Sheahs. The latter are disciples of Meer Ahmed

nr Shah, who resides among the Abdulla Azeezkhels,

Spiritual Chief. '

and Myan Noor Shah, who resides at Maree, a de-

pendency of Cohaut.

On arriving at Kuzeer I put up in the mosque, when an old man

presented himself, and entreated me to pay a visit to his son, who was ill

at home with dysentery. I assented, and found the young man much

reduced, and a young interesting wife mourning over him. I admi-

nistered some warm tea, with a little ginger to him, which seemed for

a time, much to the delight of his friends, to revive him. His father

accompanied me a stage as a guide.

Buroonee is situated at the foot of a hill; the inhabitants are part-

ly Afreedees, partly Orakzyes. The Afreedees border

on the Khyber. The cultivation depends on the rains.

There is no headman. They are friends of the Ferozkhels. To the

east are the Kukeekhels and Rabiakhel Afreedees, to the west the

Afreedees, to the south the Ustareekhels, and Caree-i-Alam Khan

Buroonee.

Orakzyes. They are independent.

13th Mohurrum.—Proceeded to Hangoo, known as the tappa of

qt aes Meeranzye. The cultivation depends partly on wells,

° partly on running water. There are one hundred and forty

houses, fifteen Hindoo shops, seven dyers and blacksmiths, and twenty-

eight lungee weavers. Azeezulla Khan is hereditary chief of the

Meeranzye tappa, and the authority of his ancestors extended to

Naryab Tal and Bulandkhel; but he is now a fugitive from the

tyranny of Sultan Mahommed Khan.

At present the chief men are Sadulla and Samad Bangashees.

Hangoo is farmed by Naib Darbarza Bangashee, a resident of Togh, for

30,000 rupees. Out of this he draws his own pay, which amounts

to 5,000 rupeees. He has 60 horse and 730 foot ; and he sometimes

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 611

has as many as 110 horse for the revenue collection. Hangoo is divided

into the following mouzas: Raisan Ibrahimzye, Poodokhel,

Bazar, Malkhoora, Ragho, Garee Saiyadha, Togh, Bandah-

i-Shekhan, Bhookhel, Baukhounee, Bagdoo &c. &c. The inhabitants

of Hangoo are nearly all Sheeahs. There are six springs in the

tappa of Meerazye ; three to the north, at the foot of a hill near the

shrine of Meer Shah Tootee and Meer Shah Umar, and three to the

south. In former times, the number of fighting men amounted to

3,000. At present they do not muster 1,000. They are friends of the

Khattaks, and enemies of the men of Naryab, Dar Samand, Tal, and

Bulandkhel. To the east is the road to Cohaut, to the west the road

to Maryab, to the north hills, and beyond them Teera, and to the south

the Khattaks.

The Khattaks, Bangashees, and men of Teera, all wear grass sandals,

Dress. and the women go bare-footed. Hajrab yahood (lapis

judaicus) and shadanij adasee (blood stone) are found here, near the

shrine of Meer Shah Tootee. At this place I broke off another match,

at the earnest entreaty of one of the parties, a pretty young girl, who

declared she would destroy herself if I did not re-

Sppiner marriage jease her from it, and thus her blood would be on

roken off.

my head. In the excess of her gratitude, she tore

her silver necklace off, and pressed it on my acceptance; I however

would receive nothing but a few roasted fowls. |

15th Mohurrum.—Proceeded seven kos to Kahee, which was for-

merly dependent on Hangoo, passing two tanks on the

road, and a jungle of ‘“ mazr” and wild flowers of a

yellow colour. The cultivation depends entirely on the rain, and they

drink nothing but rain water. There are six hundred houses, and

500 fighting men, under Azeezulla Khan. They are friends of the

men of Naryab, &c. and at enmity with the Khattaks. To the east is

the road to Hangoo, to the west Naryab, to the north Teera, and to the

south the Khattaks. The revenue formerly amounted to 240 rupees.

Sometime after my arrival at the mosque a man presented himself,

took hold of the skirts of my garment, and explained, that he was

a “ shikaree,” (slang for a thief,) and that he had been unsuccessful for

sometime past in getting “shikar” (game,) and now

wanted my prayers for his better luck. I complied

Division.

Kahee.

Pray for a Thief.

612 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

with his request, covered my head, and muttered something. He imme-

diately started to put my prayers to the test that very night. He was

unsuccessful, and it came to my ears that he had declared I was a

cheat, and would strip me on my next stage.

I started the next morning, and after proceeding some distance, saw

that my friend of the last evening had kept his promise,

and confronted me with three fellow-thieves. I lost no

time, on his coming in sight, in placing some detonating powder on a

stone; on his commencing to abuse me as a cheat, I rested my walking

stick, in rising, on the powder, saying at the same time, ‘‘ Whatever is

done, is done by the will of God.” The usual explosion ensued, and

- the thief, in repentance, threw himself at my feet.

16th Mohurrum.—Proceeded five kos to Naryab, (known as Badah-

khel), the cultivation of which depends on a running

stream that comes from the direction of Teera. There are

seven hundred houses, and sixty shops. There is here an extensive

sale of horses and mules. The Wuzeeree unbeaten iron

is sold for twenty-eight seers the rupee. It is beaten here

and sold at twelve and fourteen seers. There is a mud fort, having

two gates. A canal runs through the bazar. Near the gates is the

shrine of a descendant of Myan Tahir Shah. The headmen

are Aner Khan and Nijabat, Badahkhel Bangashees. The

fighting men amount to 500. They are friends of the Habiakhels, and

enemies of the men of Zeemukbt. To the east is Kahee, to the west

Dar Samand, to the north Teera, and to the south the Khattaks. The

revenue, if enforced, amounts to from 900 to 2,000 rupees.

17th Mohurrum.—Proceeded five kos by night to Dar Samand,

having procured the company of two Hindoos, who were

furnished with two guards, (Badrakas.) The Persian

writer, who used always to lag behind; on this stage, as there was

danger, to my astonishment I observed running a-

head, with his shoes in his hands; and only overtook

him at the next stage. On inquiring the reason of his unusual activity,

his reply was: “Fear is the brother of Death.” There are two or

three mud forts in Dar Samand. There are two springs, one called

Neelee to the north, and the other Gulab to the south, which springs

from the Gulab hills. It is also called Regee. There are seven hundred

Rencounter,

Maryab.

Mules.

Shrine.

Dar Samand.

Anecdote of Meerza.

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 613

houses. The headmen are Bakar and Turabaz. The number of fighting

men amount to 700. ‘They are friends of the Zeemukhts or Tortta-

reens, and enemies of the Khattaks. To the east is Naryab, to the

- west Tal, to the north the hills, and to the south the Khattaks.

At this place, the Persian Meerza was nearly getting into a scrape,

bat: | from which I was only just in time to extricate him ;

Indiscretion of : :

Meerza. having first recourse to admonishing him. harshly.

He had accepted the invitation of a mistress of one of the houses in the

village to supper, after having written out for her a charm she re-

quested, and I found him making himself quite at home in her house,

and the intimacy gradually growing to an indiscreet extent.

19th Mohurrum.—Proceeded six kos to Tal, known also as Badah-

a khel, which contains a square mud fort, having one of

the bastions full to bear artillery. The cultivation partly

depends on the Kuram river, which takes its rise in the Sufedkoh

aetalo i dhy< mountains, and passes through Kuram, Tal, Cohaut,

Bannoo, and Murwat; and partly on a spring to

the north, called Sangroyah. There are seven hundred houses of Mus-

selmans, thirty five Hindoos, and twelve shops. There is a great

horse and mule market here. There is a very large cave in the

Zeemukht hill, which has never been explored, which has a draught

of air always issuing from it, which makes a noise like the turning

of mill-stones. Near this, there is also an impression on the rock

of the palm of a hand, of which there are so many known in Khora-

san as “ Panjah-i-Shah,” and looked upon as the impression of the

Panjah-i-Shah. hand of Hazrat Aly. There are flint rocks near,

on which are two shrines, one of Peer Shah, the

other of Peer Umar Shah; also an antimony mine of inferior quality,

| which however is exported to Multan. There are two Hindoo

merchants at Tal. JBetter flint is to be procured, of a

black colour, at a kos further off; which however, is difficult of access

on account of the Wuzeeree robbers. The headmen of Tal are Bha-

hawadeen and Duranee, Badahkhel Bangashees. The fighting men

amount to 600. They are friends of the men of Naryab, Kahee, and

Kuram, and enemies of the Khattaks and Zeemukhts. To the east

is the road to Dar Samand, to the west the road to Kuram, to the north

the hills, and to the south the Kuram river. The inhabitants are

Antimony.

614 Journal of a Tour through parts LNo. 139.

almost independent. They formerly paid to Sultan Mahommed Khan

240 rupees a-year. When a force is sent (which seldom is) 2,000

rupees is collected at once. '

20th Mohurrum.—Proceeded six kos, passing the Kuram river

to Bulandkhel, which contains a mud fort, with two

bastions and two gates. The inhabitants are Badahkhel

Bangashees. The cultivation depends on the Kuram river. The houses

amount to three hundred and twenty-five; and the Hindoo shops

to sixty. There are seven dealers in mules, horses, and sheep.

The amount of fighting men is 300. They are friends of the Wu-

zeerees and enemies of the Khattaks, and people of Tal and Khost.

To the east is the road to Khost and Murwat, to the west the road

to the Wazeerees and Kuram, and to the north the hills. They

do not pay revenue unless it is enforced by troops. In the neigh-

bouring hills, are villages of the Wazeerees.

22nd Mohurrum.—Proceeded nine kos to Zeemukht, which is the

name of a tribe of Tortareens, that emigrated from

Herat, and colonized here. The fighting men for-

merly amounted to 3,000 ; they have increased. The cultivation de-

pends partly on the rain, and partly on springs. There are 20 or 30

forts in the valley, belonging to the Zeemukhts, who extend to the border

of Teera. They are friends of the Toorees, and enemies of the men of

Mules. Tal and Bulandkhel. Mules are plentifully produced in this

country. To the east is the road to Naryab, to the west the road to

Kuram, to the north Teera, and to the south the town of Bulyameen.

The road abounds with jungle. At four kos I passed a stream of water.

23rd Mohurrum.—Proceeded to Bulyameen, which is the boundary

Bulyameen. Of Bangash-i-Bala and Bangash-i-Paieen. The latter ex-

tending from Cohaut to Tal. The villages of Makhzye and Bagzye

are included in Bulyameen. There are in all nineteen forts. The culti-

vation depends on a stream from the Sufed-koh. There are one

thousand and nine hundred houses, and a bazar containing twenty

weavers of dark lungees and karbas. There are many mule dealers.

The headman is a fakeer, who in the times of the kings, enjoyed a salary

of 12,000 rupees a-year. The fighting men amount to 1,500. They

are friends of the Toorees, and enemies of the men of Khost. To the

east is Bulandkhel, to the west the road to Cabool, to the north Kuram,

Bulankhel.,

Zeemukht.

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 615

and to the south Khost and the Wuzeerees. The revenue is never

collected but by detachments of troops.

Detail of the villages of Kuram, known as Bangash-i- Bala.

Sadah contains one hundred houses, under Adeen, Abdulla, Aly Sher,

Sadah. and Nazar. The inhabitants are partly Sunnees and partly

Sheeahs. The fighting men amount to 100. ‘They are friends of the

Toorees.

Balkh Shal contains a mud fort, and eighty houses, under Mahom-

med and Kuram Sher. The fighting men amount to 80.

Ibrahimzye, the jaghire of Sayad Ahmed, the son of Maddat Shah,

Ibrahimzye. contains one hundred and twenty houses. The head-

man is Meer Hasan. The fighting men amount to 300. The jaghire

was presented by Sirdar Dost Mabommed Khan, and consists of one-

fifth of the produce.

Shaknee contains a fort on an eminence, and thirty houses under

Dabood. The fighting men amount to 20.

Bat contains two mud forts and forty houses, under Chet, who can

muster 35 fighting men.

Khela contains eighty houses, under Kasim, who can muster 55

men.

Alladad contains eighty houses, under Alladad and Allaiyar, who

musters 55 followers.

Yakoobee contains a mud fort and sixty houses, under Noor Aly,

who musters 44 followers.

Moora-i-Sayadha contains thirty houses, under Shah Abdul Hassan,

who musters 25 followers.

Ameelkot contains eighty houses, under Meer Alee Khan, who

musters 70 followers.

Kuter contains seventy houses, under Ghazee, a Tooree, who

musters 65 followers.

Sultan contains two forts and three hundred and fifty houses, under

Khusro and Ghulam, cousins, who are at enmity. The fighting

men amount to 300.

Agra contains two forts and eighty houses, under Meer Kasam, who

musters 35 followers.

Shiblan contains one fort and one hundred houses on the banks of the

- Kuram river, under Karam Sher, who musters 84 followers.

616 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

Alam Sher contains two mud forts, and two hundred houses, under

ee Jahangeer Khan, who is chief of all the Toorees, and

Bangash-i-Bala. The number of fighting men amounts,

to 150. To the west is Shilozan, to the east the road to Zeemukht,

to the north hills and the valley of Kirman, which contains the shrine

of Fakhr-i-Alam, the father of Maddat Shah, the spiritual chief of the

Bangashees and Toorees, beyond which is the Sufed-koh range, and

to the south Kuram.

Ahmedzye contains ninety-four houses, under Zamasp and Meerza

Gul, who musters 80 followers.

Bilandeekhel contains one fort and two hundred and twenty houses,

under Fatteh Khan, who musters 200 followers.

Aza Khel contains forty-five houses, under Neyamat Khan, who

musters 35 followers.

Tahda contains one hundred and twenty houses, under Jahan Khan,

who musters 100 followers.

Kamshal contains two forts and two hundred and fifty houses,

under Shah Hasan, Gul. Hasan, and Meer Hasan, who musters 260

followers.

Pishra contains forty houses, under Gul Mahommed, who musters

35 followers.

Meerza Khan contains one fort and one hundred houses, under Meer

Mahommed, who musters 80 followers.

Fatteh Khan contains one hundred houses, under Alam Khan and

Nasar Khan, who muster 90 followers.

Kot contain five forts and two hundred houses, under Fatteh Khan,

who musters 180 followers.

Sheraka contains two forts, under Buzurg, who musters 100 fol-

lowers.

Toolak contains one fort and fifty-five houses on an eminence over

the river, under Khoja Baz, who musters 60 followers.

Kharlachee contains one fort and one hundred and five houses, under

Shaheen, who musterss 120 followers.

Lalmee contains one hundred and forty houses round a fort, under

Guldad, who musters 150 followers.

Aleezye contains three hundred houses, under Habeebulla Bangashee,

who musters 280 followers. ;

1843. ] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 617

Kirman is situated partly in, and partly out of a valley, and con-

Kirman. sists of twelve or more forts, under Futulla and Meer, who

muster from 900 to 1000 followers.

Zeeran contains seven or eight forts, each fort having thirty or forty

Zeeran. houses around it, under Mahommed Meerza and Hyder Alee,

who musters 607 followers. :

Koh Badshahkhel contains two small forts. The number of fight-

ing men amounts to 140.

Ghundee contains one fort, and three or four other small ones are

Ghundee. dependent on it, and two hundred and fifty houses, under

Ganjan Khan, who musters 200 followers.

Ahmedkhel contains one fort, and turns out 120 fighting men.

Shilozan is a beautiful district, containing twelve small forts and

Shilozan. ten streams, that all have their rise in the Sufed-koh,

and fertilize the whole of Kuram. Silk is produced here of a very

fine quality, and all the inhabitants engage in the produce. The head-

man is Meerza Hasan, whose sister is the wife of Dost Mahommed

Khan, and mother of Mahommed Afzal Khan. The fighting men

amount to 800, who are all Bangashees.

Paiwar contains six or seven forts, each fort having one hundred

houses, under Noorak and Moosa, who muster 140 followers. The men

of this place act as guides and guards to the Bangashee and Tooree

pilgrims, who, as Sheeahs, could never otherwise pass the country

of their inveterate enemies, the Jajees, who are Sunnees. These men

take them by unfrequented hill roads to Logur, and receive from

each pilgrim in return, 2 or 3 rupees.

Notice of Bangash-i- Bala, known as Kuram.

From the entrance of the Chamkanee valley to Bulyameen, is geo-

graphically included in Bangash-i-Bala, and the Toorees have the

territory.

The whole of Bangash-i-Bala is divided into twenty-nine miskalees,

according to Meerza Hasan, partly as follow :—

618 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

The Darra-i-Chamkanee is situated in the Sufed-koh range. The

fighting men amount to upwards of 3,000. The headmen are Baoo

Khan and Arsalla. It is reckoned, abd ... & Miskalees.

Deda, ... ras rls Te .. I ditto.

Kirman, Js sa w2vdditto.

Bulyameen, ntabiags, re Beis 4 ditto.

Jajees, known as Zarakhel, 14 ditto.

Ghundeekhel, 14 ditto.

Aleezye, 14 ditto.

Ibrahimzye, 4 ditto.

Ahmedzye, ak gas ... 4 ditto.

Balkh, Kamshal, and Nahda, & ne sasrodl 1s Mibto:

The other details I did not succeed in procuring. The district is

under Sirdar Dost Mahommed Khan. Its revenue amounts to about

52,000 rupees, of this the Dastar tax amount to 12,000 rupees. In

former times, the Toorees, who have seized on Bangash, alone used

to furnish 3000 foot and 500 horse, independent of Bangash-i-Bala ;

at present, including the latter, they’ might collect 5,000

foot and 800 horse. They are enemies of the Jajees. They

have much property, and most of them trade.

The coarse rice of Kuram is famous, and the inhabitants chiefly

Contingent.

live on it.

The inhabitants all dress in dark blue, and the only ornaments

worn by the women are rows of small coins called Abbasee Kareem

Khanee, sewn on their vests in rows. The trousers of the men are

made tight below the knee. Their arms consist of selawas and long

matchlocks.

The price of wheat, in plentiful seasons, varies from fifteen to

twenty thattees (one thattee three Peshawur seers) the rupee, and in

seasons of scarcity seven or eight ¢thattees. ‘The Hindoos of Tooree

are only to be distinguished by their language, from the Mahomme-

dans. The people of Bangash-i-Bala burn wood instead of oil.

On arriving at Paiwar, I put up as usual in the mosque, where a

man presented himself, and requested me, as a fakeer, to

tell him, whether the object he had in view would be

accomplished or not. I drew some unmeaning lines on the ground,

Prediction.

1343. ] of the Panjab and Afghanistan. 619

and told him to count them by fours, telling him that if one remained,

his project would succeed; if two, it was doubtful; and if three, it

would fail. He counted, and much to his delight, one remained.

Promising if my prediction came true, he would make me a present of

a mule, he took his leave. Some hours afterwards, I heard that his

project had actually succeeded ; which I learnt, to my astonishment,

was no less a one than eloping with another man’s wife.

Fulfilment. }

I never however saw him or the mule again.

The people of Paiwar are enemies of the Jajees, and friends of the

people of Shilozan. To the west are the Jajees, to the east Shilozan,

to the north Sufed-koh, and to the south Chamkanee. On starting

from Paiwar for the Jajee country, as the Mangal robbers infested the

road, and as there were Kuram and Sheeah merchants in the caffila,

guards were procured to pass us over the Paiwar Pass to Kamshal.

On approaching the Pass, twenty Mangal robbers joined the caffila ;

ae and Meerza Safdar Shah entered into conversation with

them, and gave one a lungee, in which he had tied up

some walnuts and raisins, to carry for him. On crossing the Pass,

these gentlemen walked off, taking the Meerza’s property with them,

who forthwith vowed never again to make acquaintance on the high

road.

29th Mohurrum.—Proceeded from Paiwar seven kos to Maskanee,

which is in the Mangal territory; passing the Paiwar

Maskanee. j

Pass, which abounds with archah trees.

30th Mohurrum.—Proceeded seven kos from Maskanee to Sufed-

koh, where I was stopt by wind and snow, ata fort in a valley, called

Paryan, whence three valleys separate ; one leading to Jajee, the se-

cond to Mangal, and the third to Logur. A short time after putting up

in the mosque, a good looking young lad made his appearance, and

gave me the usual salutation which I acknowledged, then approaching

he took my hand, and with a sigh, said he wished to renounce the

world and turn fakeer too. On enquiry, I found he had no relations

but a widowed mother. I in vain tried to dissuade him, by pointing

out the hardships and dangers of a fakeer’s life. He insisted on

remaining with me, and occupying himself in attending to my wants.

When my companions had all fallen asleep, to my horror I found the

young scoundrel was a hypocrite, and something much worse, from the

620 Journal of a Tour through parts [No. 139.

disgusting nature of the overtures he took that opportunity of making.

The Mangals amount to 3,000, who are all independent.

Notice of the Jajee.country where I arrived on the \st Safar.

The Ahmedkhels are located in a valley, and have five forts, two

Ahmedkhels. hundred houses, and 400 fighting men.

The Tarlakees are also located in a valley, and have three forts

belonging, one to Malik Gul Khan, and the other two to his tribe. The

forts contain eighty houses, and the number of fighting men amounts

to 120.

The Meerankhels have six forts containing thirty houses each, one

belonging to Alee Gul, another to Meerjanee, two

to Sahib Khan, and two to Malik Madak. The

number of fighting men amounts to 300.

‘Meerankhels.

Alishing is situated also in a valley, and contains twenty houses,

and 40 fighting men.

Batela consists of two forts, containing forty houses, and 100 fight-

ing men.

The Loonees have eight forts, containing two hundred houses, and

Loonees. 400 fighting men.

The Ameenkhels have two forts situated on the high road, contain-

ing sixty houses, and 130 fighting men.

Ahmadkhel-consists of one fort, forty houses, and 100 fighting men.

The valley of Dreplara contains two forts, one hundred and twenty

houses, and 400 fighting men.

The Aleekhels have five forts, one belonging to Khanee, one to

Aleekhels. Abdulla, two to Khanzadah, and one to their tribe. There

are altogether two hundred houses, and the number of fighting men

amounts to 600. ;

The Mangals and Jadrans are also situated in a valley, having to

the east Khost and to the west Gurdez. They have in

all 250 forts and 500 black tents. They are per-

fectly independent, and pay revenue to no one. A great quantity

Mangals and Jadrans.

of the hilly lands are laid out in terraces and cultivated.

The Hasankhels have three large and four small forts, containing

gf Ses three hundred houses. The number of fighting men is

1,000. There are many gardens here.

1843.] of the Panjab and Affghanistan. 621

Kochee consists of three forts, containing one hundred and fifty

houses, and numerous gardens, and 400 fighting men.

The fort of Shah Mahommed contains fifty houses, and 200 fighting men.

The fort of Sarwaneekhel contains fifty houses, and 100 fighting

men. The apricot gardens are numerous.

The fort of Malik Myandad, and another of the tribe, contains thirty

houses, and 100 fighting men. There is continually rain at this place.

The fort of Saiyadee contains eighty houses, and 300 fighting men.

Description of the road from Jajee to Khushee, (where I arrived on

the 2nd Safair. ) in, the district of Logur.

Beyond Jajee is the narrow valley of Hazardarakht, which is a

complete jungle of archah and sanobar trees. Beyond this is the valley

of Dreplara, which is six kos long.

Thence is the ascent of Shutar garden, where there is good pasturage.

There is a mine here of a light-green-coloured stone, which is very heavy.

Beyond the Kotal or Pass, are Ghiljies and Ahmedzyes, who are

dependent on Logur, as far as Khushee.

Khushee, where I arrived on the 2nd Safar, is a valley having four

forts, containing two hundred houses, numerous gardens,

and 50 kulbas of cultivated land. The number of fight-

ing men is five hundred. There are two shrines; one known as Khoja

Khushee,

Paniab. Hasan, and the other as Khoja Khidr, where there is. a

Panjah. This place is a jaghire of Nawab Jabar Khan.

Zarghoon Shahr, which I reached on the 3rd Safar, is situated on a

plain having small forts on the skirts of the hills.

There is a shrine of Khoja Sadr-i-Auliya. The

inhabitants are partly Afghans and partly Logurees, (Lahogardees).

Zarghoon Shahr.

There are one hundred houses, three karezes, and three gardens.

The fighting men amount to 420.

From Cohaut to Cabool, via Hangoo, Dar Samand, Tal, Naryab,

Gun road- Kuram, Paiwar, Jajee, and Khushee, there is a gun road.

On arriving at Cabool, which I did on the 4th Safar, I received

Arrival at Cabool. from Captain Burnes 20 rupees for travelling ex-

pences ; remained three days and setting out, joined my employer at

Completion of Tour. Candahar, on the 15th Safar.

622

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

(Wednesday Evening, 5th July 1848. )

The regular monthly meeting was held on Wednesday evening the Sth

July, and by invitation from the Honorable the President, the Society

assembled at Government House, its own premises being under repair.

The Honorable the President was in the chair.

J. W. Funton, Esq. Barrister at Law, was ballotted for and declared

duly elected ; the usual communication was ordered to be made to him.

The following Books presented and purchased were on the table :—

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, on the 5th July, 1843.

The Calcutta Christian Observer, July 1843. New Series, vol. iv. No. 43. Pre-

« sented by the Editor.

The Oriental Christian Spectator. Bombay, June 1843, vol. iv. No. 6. Second Se-

ries. Presented by the Editor.

Jameson’s Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal. Edinburgh, 1842, vol. xxxii. No. 63.

(Purchased to complete the vols.)

Proceedings of the Geological Society of London, vol. iii. part ii. Nos. 89 and 90.

Presented by the Society.

Journal des Savants, Octobre, 1842, Paris. Presented.

The Calcutta Literary Gleaner, July 1848, vol. ii. No. 5. Presented by the Editor.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, February and May. London 1843,

vol. ii. Nos. 68 and 71. Purchased.

Yarrell’s History of British Birds. London 1482, parts 34, 35, 36,

Bellefond’s Memoire sur le Lac Moeris, publié par la Societé Egyptienne. Alexan-

drie, 1843. Presented by C. B. Greenlaw, Esq. on the part of A. S. Walne, Esq.

of the Egyptian Society of Cairo.

Niebuhr’s History of Rome. London, 1842, vol ui. Purchased.

Antiquitates Americane. Edidit Societas Regia Antiquarium Septentrionalium.

Studio et Opera C.C. Rafn. Hafniz, 1837.

Chinese Drawing of the Porcelain Tower at Nankin, with description. Presented by

J. McCann, Esq.

History of Hyder Naik, Nuwab of the Carnatic, published by the Oriental Translation

Society, as translated from an Original MS. of Meer Hussun Ali Khan Krinnani,

by Col. W. Miles. From the Society.

The Secretary reported as follows :—

That the books sanctioned to be sent to Mr. Konig, bookseller of Bonn,

in exchange for the publications forwarded by him, were in course of ship-

ment.

That the collected amount of the subscriptions for the Kit-Cat Por-

traits of the Honorable Sir Edward Ryan, and the Honorable H. T.

Prinsep, Esq. stood as follows ‘—

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 623

Sir Edward Ryan’s, yb: ... 908 Rupees.

Hon’ble H. T. Prinsep’s, .... Ser lROSIMdittios

It was resolved, that the following gentlemen be requested to form a

London Committee for the fulfilments of the Subscribers’ wishes :—

For Sir Edward Ryan’s Portrait :—

The Honorable W. W. Bird.*

Honorable H. T. Prinsep.

W. Prinsep.

For Mr. Prinsep’s Portrait :—

Honourable W. W. Bird.

Sir Edward Ryan.

W. Prinsep, Esq.

It was brought to the notice of the Society, that it would be highly de-

sirable if a set of the Meteorological Registers from the Bombay Observa-

tory could be procured and regularly supplied in future, and an application

to Government for them was sanctioned.

It was also stated, that the Sub-Secretary, Mr. Piddington, had sent to

France to Major Troyer, the following list of incomplete French works now

in the Library, most of which had been presented by the authors, or by the

French Government, and it was hoped Major Troyer would be able to

obtain the completion of the sets as they might appear.

List of the defective Works received from France, for the Library of the Asiatic

Society.

Agassiz, Histoire Naturelle des Poissons d’Eau douce de L’ Europe Centrale. Plan-

ches, ler livraison.

Cuvier Histoire Naturelle des Poissons, up to vol. xvi. 8vo.

Quatremere, Histoire des Mongoles de la Perse, traduite en Francais, tome ler,

royal fol.

Livres des Rois, traduite en Francais, par J. Mohl. tome ler.

Histoire Generale des Huns, tome i. parties ler and 2d, et tome ii.

Histoire des Sultans Mamloks de L’Egypte, par M. Quatremere, tome i. parties

ler et 2d.

Chronique D’Abou-Djafar Mohammed Tabari, par L. Dubeaux, tome ler.

Jacquemont, Voyage dans L’ Inde, 13 livraisons.

Ditto ditto Planches. Botanique ler 4 6, 8, 4 34, 36, 450. Poissons, 13, 15.

Reptiles 9, 10,12. Journal, 1 4 15, 17 419, 21.

Agassiz, Recherches sur les Poissons Fossils, livraisons 1, 2, 4, 8 4 13.

Ditto ditto Planches, 13 livraisons.

_ Vendidad Sadé, par E. Burnouf, Texte Zend, 11 livraisons.

L’ Espagne Artistique et Monumentale, par P. de la Escosura, 1 livraison.

Harivansa, traduit par M, A. Langlois, ler et 3er livraisons.

* On his arrival in England.

624 Asiatic Society. [ No. 139.

Description de L’ Egypte, ou Recueil des Observations et des Recherches, Antiqui-

tés, Description, tome ler.

Ditto ditto.—-Antiquites, Memoires, tome ler.

Ditto ditto.—Planches a ditto, tomes ler 4 Sem

Ditto ditto.—Etat Moderne, tomes ler et 2d.

Ditto ditto.—Planches, id ler et 2d.

Ditto ditto.—Histoire Naturelle.—Planches, tome ler et 2d.

Ditto ditto.—Preface Historique et Avertissement, 1 vol.

The Secretary moved, that he be authorised to forward to Major Troyer,

two complete sets of the Society’s Oriental publications, with a view to obtain

in return from the French Government or others, to which he might judge

it advisable to present them, works published at their expence; one for the

Russian, one for the Dutch, and one for the American National Institute

were also mentioned. This proposal was approved of, and the Secretary

was authorised to carry it into effect.

Read the following extracts from a letter addressed to the Acting Se-

cretary, Mr. Piddington, by Professor Wilson :—

East India House, 29th April, 1843.

My DEAR Sir,—Your communication respecting the missing copies of the Maha-

bharata and Journal had been anticipated by an application from the Societé Asiati-

que, through Capt. Troyer. The books had been lying very quietly in the Library

Store, as we knew not what todo with them. A letter from the Secretary to Govern-

ment, to the Secretary to the Court, had been sent about the time the books were dis-

patched, but it did not specify for whom the books were intended, beyond the request

that they should be sent to Allen and Co. The request was not attended to in the Se-

cretary’s department, nor was the letter communicated to the Library, and the books

might have been here as long as the house stands, had not the application been made;

a little more precision in future in forwarding any thing through the same channel will

be expedient, and a private note to me intimating, that such and such books, &c. have

been forwarded should always be added. Your memorandum specifies 56 copies of

the 4th Vol. and 56 copies of the Index. There were no such things as the latter.

There seems to be some mystery about this Index. I have applied to the Society

already for copies for our Library, but no notice has been taken of the application,

nor have any copies been sent to Allen. He seems to be ill supplied also with the

fourth Volume, being obliged to borrow of us, and we have none to spare. It will

be desirable to send home a few more copies, and to supply the 20 copies of the Index

for this Library, the 56 for France, and an adequate number for Allen.* I take this

opportunity of asking you, if the Society ever received any copies, and what number,

of my Vishnu Purana, Sanscrit Grammar and Ariana Antiqua, and if they did re-

ceive them, I should be much obliged by being informed how they were disposed of.

It is not from any curiosity regarding the Society’s distribution that I wish for this

information, but to guide my own. I have omitted sending copies to some of my -

friends in India, under an impression, that they might receive them from the Society,

and I may have been mistaken. ~ H. H. WIxson.

* See Messrs, Allen’s letter, which acknowledges receipt of these in the case per Ellenborough.

1843. ] _ Asiatic Society. 615*

The following report from the Committee, appointed to conduct the pub-

lication of Sir A. Burnes’ Drawings, was read and approved of—

Memorandum relative to the publication of Sir A. Burnes’ Drawings.

The undersigned, who are the remaining members of the Committee appointed in

1841, for the publication of Sir Alexander Burnes’ Draw-

Original Committee. ings, beg to bring to the notice of the Honorable the Presi-

Mr. H, Torrens. dent and the Committee of Papers of the Asiatic Society.

pepe UNE 1. That the progress of the work is as follows :—

Dr. Pearson. ded leted f peeve ‘

Charles Huffnagle. Drawings completed for publication, merit ol sO RO

H. Piddington, Secretary Under examination, and with Messrs. Ballin’

to the Committee, people or with the Artist, .... eras ee ced beret OO)

Being a total of, 60 0 0

2. The Society’s outlay to this day has been as follows :—

Paid to Artist, erolala ae aie aia axe S006 <lgis aera 850 0 0

For paper, (Messrs. Rushton and Bazar,) .... setae Soo AON OM

Yo Printers and Colourmen, .... BRA Atos ayogons secure. once 0) (0

Total,.... 4,494 0 O

3. Each Plate of 575 impressions, (of which 550 coloured and 28 plain, )

costs as follows ; viz.

Drawing on stone, .... osee sece cece sieiele cose 12

Printing and colouring, cece siete cece eece sese 87

Paper, cose cece eons Sees A608 aiefei 566d 16 0 O

Co’s. Rupees, .... 115 0 0

For 60 Sets is, teint vee ee ches esce Pee 900 Or 70

4. There remains to complete the pub-

Total Cost 60 Sets .. 6,900 lication about, Metre A eels 90 0 0

4 90 ditto; ... 10,350 If all printed, these will cost at the pre-

ceding rates, atest Aoi sletsie i LOsoDU 810) 40

tae, a bees, 14 17,250 5. But though these plates will form a great ornament

to a Volume of Transactions,* they cannot of course be

published without letter-press, which it was proposed should be composed of a digest

of Dr. Lord’s notes, with such additions as may be farther required by the Zoological

Curator to the Society, than whom there is no one more capable of performing the

task creditably to himself and the Society. The work thus completed, would (like

Buchanan’s and Russell’s Fishes, or Russell’s Serpents,) be of standard reference to

the naturalist on the Indus, from Scinde to Attock; a foundation for much more labour

of detail by future observers; and the best proof which the Society can afford of its de-

sire to encourage every branch of the Natural Sciences, and to second, with all its

means, the measures of Government when directed to these important objects.

* With Dr. Cantor’s Chusan Zoology and Botany, they will make by far the most splendid work

on Natural History, which has been published in India.

616* Asiatic Society. [ No. 139.

We beg to suggest, that the Honorable the President and the Committee of Papers

direct official intimation to be given to Mr. Blyth, who is already aware of the design,

that the plates are in a sufficient state of forwardness to warrant the commencement

upon the letter-press, as the prompt preparation of the commentary with Dr. Lord’s

notes for the plates already finished will enable your Committee to recommend the

publication of a Ist part of Burnes’ Collection, forming a portion of the volume of the

Society’s Researches.

The Society will obtain, from the distribution of this splendid work, a means of re-

paying the offerings of other learned bodies, and of greatly extending its European

reputation in the department of Natural History; such being the case, your Commit-

tee submit that urgent reasons are shewn for the speedy preparation of the requisite

accompaniment to the plates.

Your Committee also beg to note, that two vacancies having occurred by the death

and resignation of Members of the Society, it will be expedient to add to their present

number. _ (Signed) H. Torrens.

C. rluFFNAGLE.

H. PippInGTon.

It was stated, that a letter had been addressed to Mr. Blyth, as recom-

mended by the Committee, of which the following is a copy :—

E. Biytu, Ese. Curator Museum Asiatic Society.

Dear Sir,—I am desired by the Hon’ble the President and the Committee of

Papers to remind you, that there are now 30 of Sir A. Burnes’ Drawings of the Zoology

of the Indus finished and in our stores, and 30 more, in course of completion, being

in the hands of the artists.

1. These 60 plates will cost in round numbers about 7,000 Rs., and there are stil

90 more, of which some may be left unpublished; but the whole will, under any

circumstances, involve an expenditure of at least Co’s. Rs. 15,000.

2. The Society, as you are aware, contemplates making these plates part of the forth-

coming volume of their Transactions, and it doubts not, with your known ability,

to produce one of which it may be proud, and which the Naturalist can place side

by side with those of Russell, Buchanan, and Gould ; but while anticipating this, it feels

most anxious, that the Letter Press should be forthwith commenced upon; for it is

aware that it cannot but be ill done if done in haste, and you yourself know how advan-

tageous it is in India, to have full time for corrections and revisions.

3. Iam therefore desired to express to you, the especial wish of the Hon’ble the

President and the Society, that your part of the work should be taken in hand with-

out delay, as they naturally feel, that in so costly an undertaking, nothing should, if

possible, be left to chance or done in haste.

The Society at large would also be much gratified to have your progress in the

work mentioned from time to time in your Monthly Report.

H. Torrens,

Secretary and Vice-President Asiatic Society.

A Portfolio of the finished and coloured Lithographs, with the original

Drawings was upon the table, and greatly admired, as being far superior

to any thing of the kind hitherto produced in India.

———

1843. ] Asiatic Soctety. Gye

The Secretary stated, that in the month of January, the following letter

had been received from Government :—

No. 1256.

To H. Pippineton, Ese. Officiating Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

General Department.

Sir,—I am directed to transmit to you, Extract from a Letter from the Hon’ble the

Court of Directors, No. 24 of 1842, dated 26th October, and copy of the letter from the

Austrian Ambassador therein referred to, respecting the researches of the late Mr.

Csoma DeK@Gros on the origin of the Hungarians, and to request, that copies of the pa-

pers therein alluded to, may be forwarded to this Department, for transmission to His

Excellency. I am, Sir,

Your obedient Servant,

H. V. Bay Ley,

Deputy Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

Fort WILu1AM, the 28th December, 1842.

Extract from Leiter, No. 24 of 1842, from the Honorable the Court of Directors in

the Public Department, dated the 26th October.

We enclose as a number in the packet, the copy of a Letter from the Austrian Am-

bassador, respecting the Researches of the late Mr. Csoma DeK@rds on the origin of

the Hungarians, and we desire, that the papers requested may be forwarded to us for

transmission to His Excellency.

To the Secretary of the Honorable United East India Company.

Sir,—My Government, to whom I transmitted the information which the Honor-

able Court of Directors of the East India Company was so kind as to forward to this

Embassy, concerning the death of Mr. Csoma DeKoOros, has recently expressed the

desire to obtain for the Library of the Transylvanian National Museum, those of the

papers (left by the deceased Traveller to the Asiatic Society in Calcutta,) which

contain Researches on the origin of the Hungarians, and which are therefore of a

particular interest for the above-mentioned Museum.

I have therefore the honor to request you may express to the Honorable Court of

Directors, how much obliged the Transylvanian Authorities should feel, if by their

kind intercession the Asiatic Society at Calcutta, should allow a selection to be made

of those papers which so particularly concern Hungary, or copies duly legalized to be

taken from and forwarded afterwards to this Embassy. I have, &c.

London, October 6th, 1842. (Signed) Nzrumaun.

(True Copies, ) H. V. Bay ey,

Deputy Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

This was sent to the Ecclesiastical Registrar of the Supreme Court for his

information and for a reply, but owing, first to the non-arrival of Mr.

DeCsoma’s effects from Darjeeling, and latterly to the absence of Mr.

Turton from Calcutta, no answer had been obtained from him till now,

- when the following was transmitted :—

618* Asiatic Society. [No. 139.

Estate of Mr. Alexander Csoma DeKoros’ Deed.

To H. Pippineton, Esq. Officiating Secretary to the Bengal Asiatic Society.

Si1r,—With reference to the letter to your address from the Deputy Secretary to the

Government of Bengal, No. 1256, dated 28th December 1842, together with an extract

of one from the Honorable the Court of Directors No. 24 of 1842, dated 26th October

preceding, and copy of the letter from the Austrian Ambassador thereto subjoined,

respecting the estate of the late Mr. Alexander Csoma DeKoOrés, Librarian of the

Bengal Asiatic Society, left by you at my office sometime ago, for the purpose of my

furnishing you with the information therein referred to, I have to apologize for my not

having earlier replied to it, having been left at my office when I was much engaged,

and it subsequently escaped my recollection, from no letter from you accompanying it.*

I now beg to acquaint you, that 1 have since received a communication from the

Government of India in the Foreign Department on the subject through their Attorney,

and I beg to forward here with a copy of my reply thereto, which will put you in

possession of all the information that I possess on the subject, and which I have fur-

nished to the Government. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

Tuos. E. M. Turton,

Registrar and Administrator.

Calcutta, Supreme Court, Regr’s. Office, 3rd July, 1843.

Estate of Mr. Alexander Csoma DeKoros’ Deed.

To T. B. Swinuog, Esa.

Attorney to the East India Company.

Sir,—lI have the honor to acknowledge the receipt to your letter of the 2nd instant,

forwarding to me therewith, copies of one to your address from the Officiating Se-

cretary to the Government of India in the Foreign Department, dated 24th ultimo, and

of an extract from a despatch, from the Honorable the Court of Directors, dated 22nd

March, No. 6 of 1843, regarding the estate of the late Mr. Alexander Csoma

DeKorés, Librarian of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and requesting me to furnish you

with the documents therein referred to, in the manner required.

In reply, I beg to state for the information of the Government of India, that the

event of the death of Mr. DeKorés having been reported to me as Ecclesiastical Re-

gistrar of Her Majesty’s Supreme Court, I applied for and obtained letters of ad-

ministration to his estate as in case of intestacy, and under and by virtue thereof, took

charge of the Government Securities which remained in the hands of the Government

Agent of this Presidency.

Mr. DeKorés having died at Darjeeling, the Superintendent of the station took

charge of his effects, and did, under the direction of the Government, make over the

same to me as administrator to the estate.

In June last year, Mr. Henry Torrens, as Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Ben-

gal, addressed me a letter, handing to me therewith one in original to his address,

from the late Mr. DeKorés, dated Calcutta, 9th February, 1842, and making an en-

quiry whether I, as administrator of Mr. DeK Ordos, with the full consent of the Socie-

* There is some misimpression here on one or the other side, but of no great moment : either a’

letter was sent, or the paper was left by me personally,—H. P,

‘

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 619*

ty, would feel justified to act on the orders of the deceased, by making over the funds

and effects that might come into my possession in my official capacity of administra-

tor of the deceased, to the President and Secretary of the Asiatic Society, under their

indemnity, against the claim of the next of kin of the deceased.

Although I have not yet given any official reply to the above query, yet 1 have

personally explained to Mr. ‘Torrens, that I am not justified in supporting the claim of

the Society under the directions contained in the deceased’s letter, nor am I at liberty

to treat it in any manner as a valid testamentary disposition of the deceased’s property

to the prejudice of his next of kin with reference to the late Act relating to Wills.

The Superintendent of Darjeeling has also lately made over to me on my applica-

tion, the Thibetan Manuscripts collected by the deceased, which I intended to have

made over to the Asiatic Society in deposit, on the-guaranteeing to take due care of

them, and to return them in case the next of kin of the deceased should not assent to

their continuing there, and should require such re-delivery.

I beg to forward herewith, an exemplification of the letters of administration to the

estate, authenticated copies of Mr. Torrens’ correspondence with this office, and of the

letter of Mr. DeKOrés in favor of the Society, together with a copy of the Registrar’s

account current with the estate, made up to the 8th instant, exhibiting a balance on

that day, in its favor of Sa. Rs. 3,000, and Co.’s Rs. 2,000 remaining invested in 5 per

cent. Government Securities, and Co.’s Rs. 21: 13: 5, in cash, and 26 gold Dutch

coins or ducats, and shall be obliged by your forwarding them to the Government for

their transmission to the Honorable the Court of Directors, for the information of the

next of kin of the deceased. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

(Signed) Tuomas E. M. Turton,

Registrar and Administrator.

Calcutta, Supreme Court, Regr’s. Office, 26th June, 1843.

Read an application, transmitted by the Honorable Sir J. P. Grant from

Ramjoy Turlonkar, Pundit ofthe Supreme Court, stating, that as the Society

had obligingly presented to him the first three vols. of the Mahabarata,

he trusted that it would kindly complete its gift by that of the fourth

volume now published. Ordered,—That the fourth volume and a copy of

the Index be sent to the Pundit through Sir J. P. Grant.

Read an application from A. A. Sevestre, Esg., requesting to be allowed

to contribute to the subscription for the Portrait of Mr. H. T. Prinszp,

which was granted.

Read the following letter from Messrs. Allen and Co. :-—

To H. Pippineton, Esa.

Acting Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Calcutta.

London, 29th April, 1843.

Sir,—We have the pleasure to acknowledge the receipt of Mr. Torrens’ letter as

Secretary to the Society, dated 16th February last, acknowledging several of our com-

munications and our account up to the 30th June last. We propose to render the

continuation of the account at the expiration of a year from the date of the last.

620* Asiatic Society. [No. 139.

We beg to call the attention of the Society to the paragraph of the letter of the 16th

February, referring to Arrowsmith’s Map of India, and also to enclose a copy of the

original order for it. By it you will see, we had not the liberty to act for the Society,

and we therefore complied strictly with the order, and forwarded ‘‘ Arrowsmith’s latest

Map of India of the largest size,” which is more than double the size of our Map, and

we concluded was well known to the members of the Society. We need not point out

how much more advantageous it would have been to us to have supplied the Society

with our own publication, but we should not have been justified in doing so, when

‘* Arrowsmith’s’’ was expressly ordered.

It will be evident to the Society, that we are not in fault in sending Arrowsmith’s

Map, and we trust on a reconsideration of the matter, the Society will remove the

Map from Messrs. Thacker and Co., where we are informed it had been sent for sale

on our account. Had we committed an error, we would willingly have borne the loss

of the price of the Map, viz. £18: 10.

The cases of books per the ‘‘ Ellenborough’’ shall have our attention, they have

just been received. ;

The books ordered in your letter of the 3rd February for the Society are not all of

them procurable. No. 1 of Gray’s Spicilegia Zoologica is only just published.

Leach’s Zoological Miscellany cannot be heard of, and we suppose it to be an Ameri-

can publication, it will be obtained if possible. ‘* Andubon’s Ornithology,” &c. is

not yet published. ‘‘ Gray’s Genera of Birds,’’ will be sent with the part of his other

publication, by the next ship, and will be delivered to you by Messrs. Thacker

and Co. Weare, Sir, e

Your most obedient Servants,

W. H. ALLEN & Co.

It was determined that under the circumstances, the Society would receive

the map; and the Honorable the President intimated, that upon his arri-

val in England, he would forward to the Society, a first rate recent map.

The special thanks of the Society were voted for this very liberal offer.

Read the following letter from Captain D. Witttams, Assistant Commis-

sioner, Arracan :—

Ramree, June 12, 1843.

My pEAR Sir,—I beg to return my best thanks for the Birman Code of Law; it

appears to be a collection of cases for easy reference ; the Dammathul is a voluminous

code, and is not to be obtained, I believe, complete in this province. It is arranged

under distinct heads, has every other mark of being a genuine Code of Laws, and

the Mugs have a great partiality and reverence for it. Seldom would they transgress

it even for their advantage: for instance, mortgaged lands are surrendered to emi-

grants in this district after 40 and 50 years’ absence, so sacred do they consider their

law on this head, and they could evade it by coming into our Courts, as we give a

contrary decision, by which they would keep possession: they have no Limitation

Laws in such cases.

I have sent to Chedooba for the coins, and when I have received them, I will have

great pleasure in sending you for presentation to the Asiatic Society two coins.

There are eight in a good state of preservation, and many pieces, four of the former I

1843.] Asiatic Society. 621*

must send to Lieut. Phayre, the Assistant Commissioner at Sandoway, according to

my promise.

Lieut. Phayre is a good Birman scholar, and his information regarding the ** Dum-

“masat’’? would be very valuable to you. He is now compiling a list of Kings of Arracan

of the Mug dynasty, and of Governors of the Province under the Birmese rule, from

a valuable collection of coins in his possession; its perusal will no doubt be enjoyed

by your Society.

I forward to Lieut. Phayre, the copy of the Dummasat and your letter, requesting

he will communicate to you his opinion. Your’s truly,

' D. WiLLIamMs.

Read the following letters from the Secretaries to the Government of

India and Bengal :—

No. 682.

From the Secretary to the Government of India, with the Governor General, to

Secretary to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta.

Foreign Department.

Sir,—Under instructions from the Right Honorable the Governor General, I do

myself the honor of placing at the disposal of the Asiatic Society, the accompanying

Report from Captain Graham, on the Manners, Customs, &c. of the people of Shoa, and

an Historical Account of the Abyssinian Church by the same gentleman.

2. As these documents are originals, I have to request that you will be good enough

to make them over when done with, to the Officiating Secretary at the Presidency

Office, for record. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

J. THoMasoNn,

Allahabad, 13th June, 1843. Secretary to the Government of India,

with the Governor General.

No. 579.

From Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. Torrens, Esa., Secre-

tary to the Asiatic Society.

Sir,—I am directed to transmit the enclosed Report by Capt. G. B. meesse ancetes

Executive Engineer, Tenasserim Provinces, of a Visit to the Packchan River and some

Tin localities in the Southern portion of the Tenasserim Provinces, together with a

Sketch which accompanied it.

2. The Military Board, in forwarding the above Report, have intimated, that the

specimens of Tin therein referred to, will be forwarded by Captain Tremenheere,

when received, to the Curator of the Museum of Economic Geology.

I am, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

Fort William, 5th June, 1843. , A. TURNBULL,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

Mr. Piddington presented a paper for the Journal, being a translation of

(with remarks) M. Stanislas Julien’s remarks on the study of the Chinese

622* Asiatic Society. LNo. 139.

Language. He also exhibited the charts to his Eighth Memoir on the Law

of Storms, (the Madras and Arabian Sea Hurricane of October 1842,) now

in the Press. ,

The Librarian presented the classified catalogue of the European Books

in the Society’s Library, which is now printed, and for distribution to

Members. |

Mr. Buytu presented remarks on the Zoology of the Tenasserim Pro-

vinces, which will be farther alluded to in his report.

Read the report of the Curator Museum Economic Geology for June.

Report of the Curator Museum of Economic Geology for the Month of June.

Geological and Mineralogical.—We have received here, through Messrs. Allan,

Patton and Co. from Major Sleeman, as executor to the estate of the late Dr. Spry,

three mahogany cases, containing a considerable number of Geological and Mineralogi-

cal specimens, with a few corals, &c. some of these are in a state of sad disorder from

being separated from their labels or envelopes, and evidently tossed about in utter

confusion. I shall however be able, I hope, to verify the localities of most of the Geo-

logical specimens. None of these are complete series or collections, (with the excep-

tion of a small set of specimens from the Fort boring,) but a number are rare; many

will fill up blanks in our cabinets, or replace inferior specimens, and are thus most ac-

ceptable to us.

I have now finished collecting from the Hoogly opposite to Calcutta, and from

Burrisal at the other extremity of the Delta, two bottles of water for each month

in the year, to ascertain the quantity of silt brought down by the river. I propose,

with the approbation of the Society, forwarding one set of these to the Geological So-

ciety, with a request, that part of the silt may be sent to Professor Ehrenberg for exa-

mination as to the infusoria which it may contain; a question of very high interest to

us here, as well as to the scientific world at home.

1 mentioned in my preceding Reports, that through Mr. Howe’s kindness, we had

been provided with a large assortment of the shales and mud thrown up by the Vol-

cano of Ramree; these I have divided into eight handsome sets, as follows :—

Memorandum of specimens from the Mud Volcano of Kyook Phyoo, collected imme-

diately after its remarkable eruption of midnight 6th and 7th February, 1843.

A.—A bottle of the mud taken in a boiling state from the crater.

B.—Half calcined mud, taken from the walls of the crater.

N. B.—In some of these specimens, fruits and seeds of the surrounding bushes

are found half burnt, but not destroyed.

C.—Mud from the neighbourhood of the crater, ejected from it in the eruption.

D.—The same with grass, &c. enveloped in it.

E.—Mud indurated to shale, with veins of porcellanous (aluminous ?) earth and

calc spar ejected from the crater.

N. B.—Thin plates of this calc spar found amongst the mud; the largest in

the Museum of the Society being about 6 inches by 4, and evidently detached from

the shale.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 623*

F.—Indurated and laminated shale, sometimes approaching to sandstone, ejected

from the crater, sp. gr. 2.9.

G.—Ked shale indurated to a sandstone, (probably from the heat under pressure, )

ejected from the crater, sp. gr. 2.6.

A single specimen in the cabinet of the Asiatic Society is red at one end, grey at

the other, evidently shewing that they are derived from each other.

H.—Burnt sticks picked up shortly after the eruption about the crater.

Besides keeping our own cabinet well supplied, 1 proposed, with the approbation of

the Society, forwarding these as occasion may offer as follows :—

1. Hon’ble the Court of Directors. 6. University of Christiana.

2. Geological Society. 7. Geological Society of Pennsylvania.

3. Societé Geologique de Paris. 8. Academy of Natural Sciences of

4, Royal Cornish Association. Philadelphia.

5. Sir H. T. De la Beche.

Museum of Economic Geology.—We have received from Lieut. Phayre, Sando-

way, a set of clays from that place, six in number, and specimen of the best Tobacco

soil, as also a porcelain clay from Bassein. His letter is as follows :—

Sandoway, May 5, 1843.

My pear Sir,—I have the pleasure to send youa box, containing specimens of

the clays and earths of this district. All the brick clays are from the immediate vici-

nity of this town. Isend also a specimen of Tobacco soil from the best Tobacco dis-

trict here. I am aware that you have formerly analysed Sandoway Tobacco soils, but

do not know whether those were procured, as this is, from the most famous Tobacco

land or not. There is no pottery of any kind made here, I am sorry to say.

The white clay is said to be that from which the well-known Peguw pottery is made ;

it was brought from Bassein. Will you have the goodness to apply on board the

H.C. S. Amherst for the box to your address. A. P. Puayre.

We have also received from Lieut. H. C. Mayne, Adjutant 4th Nizam’s Horse,

specimens of the salt of the Loonar Lake, with the following letter :—

Mominabad, May 26, 1843.

My pear S1z,—In reply to your letter of March 22nd, I beg leave to forward for

the Museum Economic Geology of India, a specimen of the salt of the Loonar Lake.

You will perceive that the specimen is composed of three distinct species of salt.

Large incrustations of this are left all round the edges of the lake, caused by the quick

evaporation of the water by the sun, and partly from the foam of the wavelets as they

beat on the shore.

The situation of the Lake of Loonar, is about midway in a direct line from Jaulnah

to Hingolee, longitude about 76° 45’, latitude about 20° 1’. Hoping that this may

prove an addition (however small) to the Museum, I shall use my endeavours to

procure for its use, any interesting and curious specimen that may come within my

reach, but not being a scientific character, I may be excused if I ever forward speci-

mens, &c. which the Museum may already possess, or of so common a description, as

not to be worth having. H. C. Mayne,

Lieutenant, Adjutant 4th Nizam’s Horse.

P.S.—I have dispatched the piece of salt by this day’s banghy to your address.”’

624* Asiatic Society. [ No. 139.

It is fortunate that we have in Dr. Voysey’s Notes, a capital account of his visit

to this very curious spot, with a sketch. It is too detailed to insert here, but will form

an early paper in the Journal. Lieut. Mayne, in his chit alludes to common salt, while

Dr. Voysey says, that merely traces of it were found in the water. It is evident from

the specimen on the table, that common salt exists at the bottom of the lake, as well

the carbonate of soda. From what Dr. Voysey says, it would appear that he visited it

when the water was near the highest point, in July, and the fresh water would then

le above that impregnated with saline matters.

Having to callupon Mr. Weaver, the statuary, I requested of him the favor of send-

ing to the Museum any fragment of marbles which he might have. He has sent us

some, and in addition to them, a few very handsome specimens of petrified wood and

tubicole dug up at Sheerness dock yard, which are a very welcome addition to our

Geological and Mineralogical cabinet.

A very pretty collection of mostly South American Birds, the property

of Sr. Apparuti, was exhibited for purchase. No price having been fixed, it

was determined to offer for it the sum of Co.’s Rs. 150, as being one con-

taining specimens, nearly all of which were acquisitions to the Museum.

For all the foregoing presentations and contributions, the thanks of the

Society were ordered.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Report on the Manners, Customs and Superstitions of the people of Shoa,

and on the History of the Abyssinian Church. By Captain Granam,

B. A. from the Secretariat of the Government of India.

From Captain W. C. Harris, Engineers, late on a Mission to the Court

of Shoa, to J. P. Wittovensy, Ese., Secretary to Government of

Bombay, dated 8th May, 1843.

S1z,—I have the honor to forward the accompanying able reports by

Captain Graham, on the Manners, Customs and Superstitions of the

people of Shoa, and on the History of the Abyssinian Church.

2d. These reports complete the information which was required by

the instructions that I had the honor to receive from you.

I have the honor to be, &c.

(Signed) W. C. Harris,

Capt. Engrs. late on a Mission to the Court of Shoa.

Bombay, 8th May, 1843.

Report on the Manners, Customs and Superstitions of Shoa.

The last known tale of a plausible adventurer in this country has

been wrought up with the most meretricious tinsel to serve a specious de-

sign on this country of the Christian savage, but all works, both ancient

and modern, have succeeded in casting a film over the eyes of the de-

luded public, which honesty loudly calls out to withdraw. The king of —

No. 140. New Ssxnizs, No. 56. 4N

626 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

of Shoa indeed forms an exception to most of the sweeping vices which

disgrace the land, and his master of the horse has imitated his laud-

able example ; both have been blessed with natural endowments, which

in a more favored country, would have thriven to maturity, but sad

though the truth may be, after months’ wearisome endurance and patient

research, there is to be found no third individual to add to the limited

number of the praiseworthy.

2d. The nation is priest-ridden and bigotted to a degree. The most

ridiculous doctrines must be believed, and the most severe fasts and pe-

nances must be endured, according to the pleasure and fiat of the

church. Twelve thousand clerical drones, “ Fruges consumere nati,”

fatten in idleness on the labour of the working classes, and even

the sites of their habitations tend to rivet the chain of bondage, which

encircles the neck of the infatuated Abyssinian. On the very sum-

mits of the ranges, stand the churches and the monasteries high over

the vales, and perched among the few remaining groves, dotting

the cool shady peaks, and far elevated in their pride of place, above

the residence of the common herd. The priestly intimation is re-

ceived with more attention, issuing from a temple, shrouded from

human ken in the thick heavy fog, and the thunder of excommunication

is listened to with utter abasement and prostration of spirit, proceeding

from the grand scene of elementary strife, and falling upon the ear of

the awe-stricken serf, amidst the prolonged echoes of the confirming

thunder of heaven.

3rd. The king however, has lately taken upon himself to proclaim

by the voice of the herald, and the beat of the drum, those doctrines

which he conceives to be most conducive to salvation, and by the

summary deposition of the refractory spiritual chiefs, and confiscation of

their property, he bids fair in time to promulgate a most curious

religious code of his own, if not upset by a civil war, which may blaze

out in consequence of his innovations.

4th. The land swarms with monks and anchorites, who are clothed in

yellow dresses, or in the prepared skins of the antelope, and who,

from the licentiousness of their manners, roam through the country

a perfect pest and plague to society. Men become monks at any period

of life. ‘The rich deliver over their property to their children, who are

bound to support them until their death. The poor live upon the

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 627

bounty of the community, and many never enter the huts of the

monastery, but with their wives reside at ease in their own homes,

having joined the order for the mere sake of defrauding their creditors ;

for however deeply involved, the donning of the head dress, and the

monastic habit clears off all former scores, with the ease and rapidity of

the most indulgent court of insolvency.

5th. The skin of the (algeazine ?) is adopted as a dress by all who

cover under the garb of humiliation a deep-rooted pride of their insti-

tution, and together with the unwashed person is meant to commemorate

the legend of their great founder, Istathios, who boasted of no ablution

during a long term of existence, and who miraculously crossed the ,

river Jordan, floating secure upon his greasy skin. The prophet

Samuel is also sometimes referred to, as affording another example

of the advantages of the covering of hide, and the story relates, how

he sailed in company with his disciples for seven days’ journey on

the surface of a great sea, borne in safety upon the leathern robes

which formed the only mortal attire in those ancient days.

6th. Although monasteries are rife over the face of the country,

yet the mountain Azzulo, situated near the river Hawash, is celebrated

as the most sacred seat of monkery. The mountain continually

emits dark smeke, and its only inhabitants are Christian fathers, who

despising the world and its vanities retire thither, unmolested by Galla

or Mahommedan, to spend their days in blissful peace and retire-

ment, universally looked upon and feared as sorcerers; they are said to

live on the most social terms with the lions and wild goats which abound

upon the hill, The reception of youth as novices is by no means

sanctioned by the monopolizing elders, to whom the tale assigns an

exclusive subsistence upon the fruits and herbs and roots, which toge-

ther with a pair of wings, are freely furnished them from heaven; but

none of those who have as yet returned from the pilgrimage are

stated to have brought back their feathered appendages, and the lank

figure and dim eye betoken rather the toil of the weary wayfarer than

the high enjoyment of Elysian feasts.

7th. The small encircling cord of silk round the neck, called the

““Matab,” is the emblem of the debased Christianity which exists

throughout the land, the color is deep blue in reference to the smiling

sky of heaven, and the turban of the priest and the monk is designed

628 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

to commemorate the event of Moses covering his face on the mountain

of fire, when receiving the tablets of the law.

Sth. Uncharitable and uncompromising, the dread anger of the

Church often blazes forth into the furious blast of excommunication,

and the souls of men are consigned to perdition for the most trifling

offence.

9th. The bell, book and candle, can be hired by any disappointed

enemy, and the hooded priest can be purchased to perform the cere-

mony, but the question in some cases is not without difficulty and

danger to the officiating clergy, especially when sacred majesty is

concerned, or where the sturdy sons of Europe come under the ban

of the Shoan Church. The cells of the state prison often enclose

the fanatic priest, whose want only interferes with the royal salva-

tion ; indifferent fare and close confinement ensure an absolution, and

the martyr to religious intolerance is expelled from the country.

10th. The argumentum baculinum is the only other antidote, and

possesses a wonderful effect in stilling the storm, when persuasively ap-

plied to the shoulders of arrogant Church pride.

11th. On the latest occasion of the ceremony being performed upon

the fair sons of the North, the priest was quietly laid hold of, and intro-

duced into the interior of the domicile, where his countenance consider-

ably drooped at the sight of an unwelcome host just arrived with a most

formidable cudgel. ‘‘ My father must have been mistaken,” was the open-

ing address which saluted his astounded ear, whilst the cudgel descend-

ed upon his shoulders with an equally startling salutation. “My father

never could have purposed the excommunication of his dear friend,” fol-

lowed the exordium, and the cudgel again pattered upon the priestly

back ; a most able running commentary was sustained for nearly five mi-

nutes, attended by many playful taps upon the head to quicken the cle-

rical understanding, and on the termination of the conclusive argument,

the priest willingly withdrew his ban, bestowed his entire absolution and

sneaked away to his cell, mentally resolving never again to interfere

with those most incomprehensible Europeans, who displayed so little

terror at being cursed by the Church, and who entertained no respect

whatever for the sacred persons of her ministers.

12th. The Negus, however, is the true God of their adoration, and the

essence of this devotion pervades the band to its very core. The best

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 629

portions of the country pertain to His Majesty ; the lives and property

of the subjects are entirely at his disposal; every act is performed with

some view to forward his pleasure; and all wait on his sovereign for

favor, preferment and place. Mild, however, and just in his disposition, he

is universally beloved in his own dominions in which the oath is by the life

of the king in the land, wise and warlike in his expeditions, he is feared

and respected among all the adjacent tribes ; conducting himself with that

easy freedom which generally distinguishes conscious superiority, his

demeanour is kingly and commanding, and his character for impartial

justice has obtained for him far and wide, the enviable cognomen of

“‘ the fine balance of gold.”

13th. Here the precious metals form the exclusive privilege of royalty.

Personal ornaments and colored raiment are prohibited to the subject by

the severest sumptuary laws, and few, except the highest chiefs and

warriors of the land, are ever honored by an exemption from the rule.

All the appointments in the country are at the king’s disposal. All re-

wards and favors come from the royal hand in years of famine. Food

itself is only to be obtained from the royal store houses, and it is there-

fore by no means surprising, that the population should be mean, cring-

ing and servile; that they should in their aspirations after honor and

place, submit every action of their life to the despot’s will, and in

their present benighted social condition, even bring their wives and

daughters to pander to the despot’s pleasures.

14th. But Sabela Selassee is an unique specimen of absolute power,

and the ircn sceptre falls light from his merciful hand even on the

head of the offender. His virtues are many and conspicuous; his faults

entail harm chiefly upon himself; and the expenditure of the greatest

part of his hours might be held up as a worthy pattern for imitation

for all.

15th. After religiously performing his devotions early in the morning,

he inspects his stables and workshops, bestows charity on the assem-

bled poor, despatches couriers, and gives private audiences of import,

and afterwards reclining upon his throne in state, he listens for hours to

all the appeals from his subjects.

Here access is easy. The king listens to all foreigners and subjects,

' men or women, rich or poor; every one has a right to appear before him,

and boldly to explain the nature of his case, and although established

630 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

custom obliges the subject to prostrate himself, and pays rather adora-

tion than respect, yet every complainant may tell his story without the

least hesitation or timidity. Judgment is always prompt, and generally

correct. At three o’clock His Majesty proceeds to dine alone, and after

the royal appetite is appeased, the doors are thrown open, and the

long table in the great eating hall is crowded with the most dis-

tinguished warriors and guests; harpers and fiddlers perform during

the entertainment, and singers lift up their voices in praise of his

magnificence and liberality; but the king during all this scene of

confusion and turmoil, still continues to peruse letters and issue

instructions until the table has been three times replenished, and

until all of a certain rank have freely partaken of his hospitality. At

5 o’clock, he retires with a few of his choice friends to the private

apartments. Prayers and potent liquors pass away the evening hours,

and the company depart, leaving only the favorite page to convey

to the inmates of the Harem, the royal commands.

Midnight calls his Majesty from his couch to the perusal of psalms

and holy writings; a band of sturdy priests in his immediate vicinity

during the live-long night continually chaunt a noisy chorus of hymns,

to preserve their master from the influence of evil spirits and bad

dreams, and daylight brings a repetition of the busy exercise on

horseback, when business or the fickle sky will permit.

17. The nation displays a strange medley of good and evil, mildness

and cruelty. Superstition, religion and fanaticism in venerating the sove-

reign, and dealing out largess to the poor. They are drunkards and liars

of the first magnitude, and their minds being insensible to the charms

of exalted virtue, they are restrained from evil deeds by no moral influ-

ence whatever. Kind to their animals, slaves and females, they prac-

tice every species of barbarity upon their enemies, and are perfect fanatics

in their religious creeds which are of the most subtle nature. They are

fiercely arrayed against each other in hostile sects, and are only pre-

vented from carrying on war to the knife, by the local difficulties which

separate the parties. Easily irritated, their anger blazes up into a fierce

flame of passion, but like the crackling thorns, it is soon expended ; dull

in comprehending a joke, they delight in the broad antics of the court

buffoon ; and violent and litigious in their private dealings, they are

still not disposed to carry their wrath to extremity, or to allow amongst

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 631

each other the brutal feelings to exercise an entire predominance, res-

trained by the wholesome law of blood for blood, and life for life.

18. The principal men of the country who are not entrusted with go-

vernment, spend their time in utter idleness, lounging about the purlieus

of the court, or gambling for hours at the game of gzbbeta, leaving the

management of their houses to their ‘women, and the direction of their

farms to their servants and slaves. All, however, end their dayat 4 o’clock,

when the king’s table is thrown open to men of rank, and when the king’s

potent hydromel very soom incapacitates them for any further thought or

deed. ‘The most slovenly appearance marks the interior of their houses,

and dirt and filth choke up the surrounding enclosure. The furniture

is confined to a rickety bedstead, a bullock hide, and a small wicker

table; the necessary wood fire in the centre of the solitary apartment

blackens every article within the walls with a thick crust of smoke, pre-

senting a most gloomy vista on entering the doorway, and the universal

objection to the use of water, either as regards their person or clothes,

renders the foul tableau still more disgusting.

19. Water as well as coffee and tobacco are studiously avoided, as

savouring too strongly of Islamism, and the Christian inhabitant contents

himself with rubbing his eyes in the morning with the dry corner of his

dirty robe, and pouring a stream of rancid butter over his matted locks.

The dress of the men, from the king to the peasant, consists in a large

loose robe of thick cotton cloth, enveloping the body in graceful folds ;

but nearly incapacitating the wearer from any great exertion on foot;

frequently disconcerted and falling upon the ground, the wearer is every

moment obliged to tuck up this most troublesome garment, and fold it

anew about his body; a cotton waist cloth of many yards encircles the

loins, and a pair of very wide trowsers hanging barely to the knee, sum

up the ordinary toilet ; although during journeys and expeditions, the

skin of some wild animal fashioned somewhat into the form of a cloak is

worn over the shoulder.

20. All carry a short crooked sword bound tight on the right side,

which requires constant oiling, and some portion of personal:strength to

extract from the sheath; and entertaining a wonderful affection for the

stick, no man ever stirs from the house, either mounted or on foot, with-

out the long thin wand. Too lengthy to be of any use in urging on

his animal, and too thin to support any weight as a staff, the inconveni-

632 Report on Shoa » [No. 140.

ence is endured to keep the hand in constant practice for carrying the

beloved spear. The clergy are more sensible in their predilections,

and their stout staff with an iron crutch as a handle, is a very laudable

instrument indeed, either for support or offence.

21. The men scrupulously denude their cheeks and chins, in the

absence of the razor clipping with a pair of very indifferent scissors all

the hair close to the skin, and thus adding very considerably to the

dirty appearance of their unwashed faces; but the greatest attention

is paid to the management of the hair, with which nature has most

liberally supplied the head, and many hours are daily expended in

dressing the mop into many and quaint fashions. It is sometimes worn

hanging in long clustering ringlets over the cheeks and the neck ;

at other times frizzed into rounded matted protuberances, which are

studded over the greasy block, often fancifully tucked and trimmed

into small rows of minute curls like a judge’s wig, and again boldly

parted into four large compartments like jelly moulds, but always reeking

with rancid butter, and exuding a most disagreeable effluvia.

22. The clergy wear a high white cotton head-dress and black

woollen cloak, with coloured emblems of the faith attached in every

direction for public view. Treated with highest respect and veneration,

they are always addressed as Father, caressed and fed wherever they

choose to turn their footsteps ; all the natives fully believing that the

kissing the hand of one of these dirty shepherds, purifies the body from

every sin.

23. The colour of the Abyssinian race varies from a bright copper

to the deep jet black ; the men are by no means particularly handsome,

but the features of the women are of an inferior and more disagreeable

contour than those of most nations in the world. Small eyes and

flat noses are added to high cheek bones, low foreheads and a broad ex-

panse of countenance, and their attempts are exceedingly ingenious

to render more hideous the uncomely appearance which nature has

thought proper to bestow upon them.

24. ‘The eye-brows are totally depilated, and a deep narrow line

painted in their room with a strong permanent blue dye, bestowing a

more than ordinary look of foolishness, whilst the cheeks of the

high-born dames are plastered to the very eyes with red paint and fat;

the hair is also either cropped, frizzed and besmeared with tallow

ee ee ee eC

1843.] . and the Abyssinian Church. 633

into a most frightful consistency, resembling in appearance and size

an ordinary English bee-hive, or the bare shaven head is encircled by

a narrow dirty fillet; and their feet, naked and exposed to all seasons

and weather, become hard, horny and mis-shapen.

25. Their only dress consists of a large wide sack chemise, bound

round the waist by a thin rag, and a long sheet thrown over the head |

descending to the heels, which like Ruth’s veil is very coarse and strong,

and fully capable of containing six measures of wheat. Their orna-

ments are large black wooden studs in the ear, which on holidays

are replaced by masses of pewter resembling the teething rattles em-

ployed in nurseries; pewter bracelets and anklets, together with a pro-

fusion of blue and gold colored beads are worn by all who can

afford the outlay, and the dirty toilet is not complete without a stream

of rancid butter upon the hair, and the nostrils securely plugged

up with lime peel or sweet herbs, leaving the end of this strange

nosegay dangling over the wide mouth. ‘They soon ripen and grow

old, girls becoming mothers at the early age of twelve; but like the

fruit of the medlar, they are rotten before the summer of life has well

commenced.

26. All classes are most pertinacious beggars, every thing seen is

demanded ; knives, scissors, beads, cloth, looking glasses and dollars ;

the love of acquiring property stifles every sense of shame, and they

feel no compunction in asking for the cloak off your back, or of carrying

it away, even during a heavy storm of rain; they even take a pride

in this national feeling, and say, that an Abyssinian child will stretch

out its hand to receive a present before it be born; and their tradition

hands down as most praiseworthy the conduct of cne of their great

chiefs, who on his death-bed desired his body to be buried in the

track of a caravan, that if possible his spirit in the future state might

be in the way of receiving a toll from the passing merchant.

27. Warm butter mixed with honey and the seeds of the hubbesh,

is given to an infant immediately on its birth, and circumcision

follows on children of both sexes on the seventh day. ‘The operation,

performed generally by an old Galla woman, is exceedingly painful,

and is often followed, especially in females, by the most serious conse-

quences in some districts. A male child is carried in the hands of

men to the Church on the fortieth day, and a female is borne by

634 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

women on the eightieth, when it is christened after the Abyssinian

ritual. The right of bestowing the name upon the boy belongs to

the father, whilst the mother exclusively chooses one for her daughter.

A grand entertainment to the priests finishes the ceremony, and the

bearers of the infant to the church are considered its Godfathers

and Godmothers, and are expected to treat the child with all affection

during the scenes of after-life.

28. Invariably it is carried tied up in a bag at the mother’s back

until it can walk; the cramped confinement seemingly produces no

evil result upon the symmetry of the child, and the extra burden inter-

feres but lightly with the severe labour which in this country is the lot

of the hard-worked female.

29. Education is at a very low ebb indeed, and those children

are alone instructed in the rudiments of learning, who are intended

for the service of the Church, or for the priestly office. The five

churches of Ankobar have each their small quota of scholars, but

the amount altogether does not reach 80 out of a population in the

capital of 8,000; the remainder run loose and disorderly like wild

colts, until the season arrives when they are caught to be employed

in drudgery.

30. After the age of 5 or 6, they are employed as servants, and

set to work in the fields, and to fetch wood and water for the family,

and the greater part at the age of 12 or 14 forsake the paternal

residence to seek a livelihood in the service of the king or the great

men, and as their pittance is but scanty, they can save nought from

their wages, and are thus forced to remain in servitude during the

residue of their existence. The favorite son remains with his father;

begins to have some authority in the management of affairs about the

age of 15; then chooses for himself a wife, and engages in the usual

avocations of tilling the ground, repairing the house, and attending

the king’s military expeditions.

31. A girl is reckoned, according to the value of her property ; and

the heiress of a house, a field, and a bedstead is certain to add a

husband to her list before many suns have shone over her head. In

Shoa, marriage is generally concluded by the parties declaring before

witnesses, that by the life of the king, they intend to live happily together,

and the property of each being produced is carefully valued. A mule

1843. } and the Abyssinian Church. 635

or an ass, a dollar, a shield and some spears on the one side are noted

against the lady’s stock of wheat, cotton and bedstead; the bargain

being struck, the property becomes joint for the time, until some

quarrel ensues, when each taking their own, depart to seek fresh

mates.

32. Men and women eat together at the same table, and most affec-

tionately pick out the choicest morsels from the common dish, and stuff

them into each other’s mouths at arm’s length. ‘The appearance of the

large foolish black face bending over the table, with the wide gaping

mouth to receive the proffered tit-bit of raw flesh, which from its size

requires considerable strength of finger to cram into the open aperture

is sufficiently ludicrous, and brings forcibly to the recollection the nest

of toad-like sparrows in the garden hedge at home gaping to the

wanton whistle of the truant schoolboy. The meals are generally taken

twice during the-day, once at noon and again after sunset.

33. There exist two sorts of marriage, the one before-mentioned, and

another which is celebrated by the Church somewhat in a similar fashi-

on to our own; the parties swearing to take each other for life, in rich-

ness and poverty, sickness or health, which is ratified by partaking to-

gether of the sacrament, and by the usual oath of the country, the

king’s life. The inhabitants of Shoa, however, do not relish this fast

binding, and the ceremony is seldom requested or performed.

34, Favorite slaves and concubines are equally respected as wedded

wives, and there is no difference between legitimate and bastard

children. The example set by the monarch, who in addition to his

lawful spouses, entertains upon his establishment upwards of 500

concubines, is followed by all who can afford the expense ; and the

wandering life of the court renders the system of concubinage more

agreeable, and less expensive, than the continual movement of legal

wives and families.

35. The king dwells only for a time at one palace, and then proceeds

to another at some distance, accompanied by all his chief officers, cour-

tiers, and domestics. Fresh female establishments are invariably enter-

tained at the new station; all conjugal affection is lost sight of, and

these women being in time cast aside in neglect, as well as the for-

-saken wives, proceed in their turn to seduce the young men, and thus

profligacy reigns paramount among all classes of society. There are

636 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

indeed few couples who live any time together without violating the

conjugal bed, the matter not being particularly regarded, and a beating

being the only punishment inflicted upon the offending party.

36. Lost to all sense of shame, many of the libertine inhabitants

keep their wives and concubines under the same roof, the favorite for

the time being having all authority over the rest, who submit in the

meekest manner without repining to the thraldom of the degrading situ-

ation. Nay, they even declare, that it is better to have some one to

talk to, even though she be the supplanter of affection, than to remain

solitary in a lone house by themselves; nor are these grovelling senti-

ments to be much wondered at, when we consider that the jewel,

chastity, is here as pearls before swine, and that the utmost extent of

reparation to be recovered in a court of justice for the most aggra-

vated case of seduction is but five pennies sterling !

37. Morality is indeed at the very lowest ebb, for here there is

neither custom nor inducement to be chaste, and beads, more precious

than gold, bear down every barrier of restraint; honesty and modesty

both yield to the force of temptation, and pride is seldom offended by

living in a state of idle dependence on others. The soft savage requires

but little inducement to follow the bent of her evil passions according to

the dictates of unenlightened nature, and the rules of the loose society

form no obstacle whatever to the entire gratification of her vicious desire.

38. Christian only in name, the nation is plunged in a filthy quag-

mire of bestial indulgence, and is stiff-necked and puffed up with the

most inordinate self-pride. There is little chance of their benighted

minds receiving voluntarily one single ray of good to enlighten their

spiritual darkness. Founding every hope of salvation in the preservation

of weary fasts, in the performance of vain ceremonies, and in the belief of

ridiculous doctrines, they consider that faith in the true word is but an

empty sound, and that kissing the stones of Jerusalem availeth rather

than all the good works which can be compassed during a long life-

time.

39. Death closes the weary scene of barbarous licentiousness, and

is met with the usual stoicism of the savage. On the demise being

fully ascertained, the body is washed with warm water, and wrapped up

in sundry cotton cloths according to the wealth of the family, the amu-

lets and mahtah of the deceased are also immersed in liquid, and being

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 637

restored to the body, all are carefully enclosed within the folds of the

cloth, and secured by several new cords ; then commences the frantic

shrieks of the women, and the cries of the female mourners, which are of

the most melancholy and distressing description, the low moaning dirge

of the old women being interrupted at intervals by the hysterical sob of

the principal sufferer, who is bereft of all she held dear upon earth. For

a time grief is most extravagantly indulged, the cloth is torn in shreds

from the bosom, and the skin plentifully scarified from the temples,

whilst the moaning and wailing continue, and group after group from

the neighbouring houses pour in to add their voices to the dismal coro-

nach, which swells on high from the death hut, and incite by their eja-

culations, fresh bursts of lamentation from the survivors.

40. The corpse is then carried to the grave, which varies in depth

from two to four feet, and is buried with the feet towards the East, that on

the resurrection, the face may be towards the rising sun. A feast to the

relatives concludes the ceremony, and the dirge of mourning gives place

to the notes of the violin, harpers and fiddlers generally accompanying

the funeral procession of all great men, and using their utmost endeavour

to entertain the returning party by their liveliest airs. Should death

occur during the night, the priests are instantly called to the scene, and

by the blazing light of the torch prayers are chaunted until morning

for the soul of the deceased; but on ordinary occasions, the body

is carried to the cemetery half an hour after the departure of the

breath.

41. A small quantity of /oban is often deposited in the grave, together

with the book called sefafa zedick, and the kings alone are honored with

coffins manufactured of wood perforated with many apertures; these

are placed on stone trestles amidst clouds of frankincense, and kept in

this situation until the body becomes dryed up, when the coffin is

removed into the mausoleum, the walls of which are generally bedaubed

with pictures, intended to represent the hunting and military actions of

the royal occupant. |

42. Priests alone possess the right of interment on the eastern side

of the church, four paces from the porch. The aristocracy occupy

the North, and warriors, women and children the South and West.

_ All who die of syphilis, without confession or absolution, are either in-

terred by the wayside, or in unconsecrated ground. Governors, mien

638 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

of rank, and all wealthy commoners who have not, during life, worked

in wood, iron or precious metals, are covered in the grave with the

green branches of juniper; but smiths and artificers being looked upon

as sorcerers, every care is taken to keep them under the ground

when once deposited; great stones being heaped over the body, and

the earth well secured and trampled afterwards under foot.

43. The funeral of an individual of reputed sanctity is attended by

numbers of the priesthood with the great umbrellas of the Church,

wherein the corpse is placed for a time, and surrounded by twelve lighted

tapers betokening purity of life, which when nearly consumed are,

lowered with the bier into the sepulchre. Ecclesiastics occasionally

enjoy the privilege of a last resting place within the precincts of the

sacred edifice ; the pall consisting of a piece of printed Surat chintz is

supported by six bearers, who wave it alternately with a fanning motion’

whilst a numerous train of mourners follow amidst loud wails, with

their hands clasped behind the neck, in token of the triumph obtained

by death over sin.

44. During forty days, requiems are daily chaunted for the soul of

the departed, and charity in proportion to the estate left, is distributed

both on the day of interment and on several succeeding anniversaries.

Oxen and sheep are freely slaughtered at the ¢es-car, or funeral feast, and

all who choose to attend receive their portion in honor of the deceased.

45. Black or yellow garments, or ordinary dresses steeped in mire

are worn indiscriminately as weeds—the period of mourning extending

to one year; and on the death of a friend or relative, male or female,

both sexes scarify the temples by removing a circular piece of skin,

about the size of a sixpence from each, with the nail of the little finger,

which is purposely suffered to grow like an eagle’s talon. This custom,

borrowed like many others from Judaism, is generally practised through-

out the kingdom ; scarcely an individual being free from the disfiguring

scars, although in opposition to a royal interdiction, which was pro-

claimed throughout Shoa, in consequence of an ecclesiastical remon-

strance to the throne, representing the custom to be in direct violation of

the written law: ‘ Thou shalt not cut thy face for the sake of the

dead.”

46. Although three military expeditions are undertaken every year,

the nation is by no means either a martial or a chivalrous one. Few

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 639

individuals are pointed out as being possessed of even common bravery,

and the high honor and esteem in which they are held, evince the ab-

sence of this virtue among the rest. The principle of bullying the

weaker party may be distinctly traced in every form and relation of

life, and much of the mean subserviency and respect of the inferior may

be justly attributed to the well-known consequences of arousing the

dread anger of the superior. }

47. Their system of war is entirely predatory, and consists of suc-

cessively overwhelming with immense masses of men solitary tribes in

the vicinity, taking the unsuspecting foe by surprise ; massacring all the

males of the family ; sweeping off into captivity the maids, widows and

cattle; and utterly burning and devastating fields, houses, and farm

stock : but there is seldom any fighting ; the unfortunate Galla is taken

completely unaware ; those who have swift horses at hand make their

escape to their hiding places, and the unlucky remnant are shot down,

speared and emasculated without mercy: a few only offering any resis-

tance to the numbers who surround the devoted band.

48. A very different scene, however, presents itself when timely

intimation is carried to the tribes of the destination of the locust army

of the Amhara; the women and cattle are sent to the fastnesses, and

the men assemble mounted on their light, active and well broken steeds.

The invaders halt at the sight, for the courage of the Amhara is not

sufficient to carry him into fair fight with an armed foe, and after a lit-

tle skirmishing at a distance, the intruding numbers retire before the

few, until some more favorable opportunity occurs of dealing the death-

blow in the dark.

49. But the Gallas, from their better acquaintance with the locali-

ties of the country, oftentimes make the invader pay dearly for the

spoil, and more especially when entangled in a morass these wild riders

charge splashing through the swamp at full speed, and cut the bewil-

dered Amhara to pieces. Whilst returning from a late successful sur-

prise, His Majesty had the deep mortification on coming up with the

plunder and rear division, to find his advanced guard nearly annihilat-

ed, and the bodies of 800 of his most distinguished warriors lying

trampled in the mud as a bloody memento of the successful rush of the

Pagans, who were lining the tops of the surrounding hills in utter de-

rision of his remaining force. Many of the Galla tribes, also of the Loomi,

640 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

the Aroosi and the Ittoo, still hold their own, and have by repeated de-

feats, taught the Amhara to beware of the close conflict.

50. The spear, the sword, and the buckler, are the national wea-

pons, although the use of fire-arms is partially known and fully appre-

ciated, and the king’s company of fusileers is gradually increasing in

number, to his own advantage, and to the consternation of his enemies ;

but the habitual suspicions of the monarch prevents the native from

being made thoroughly acquainted with the use of the firelock, the arms

being always deposited within the walls of the palace, excepting during

the actual period of the expedition, and ill-judged parsimony works its

usual baneful effects on the minds of the hired soldier, ~~

51. Combining the halberd with the javelin, the spear is used both

for thrusting and throwing, loaded at the butt with a stout ring of iron ;

it is short, light, with a keen long iron head, and well balanced, but bet-

ter adapted for launching as a missive weapon. ‘The Abyssinian, from

constant practice, is well versed in its use, and after poising it for a

time over his head, displays considerable accuracy of aim at any dis-

tance within sixty yards of the mark.

52. It may be generally said, that swords of civilized nations are

straight, whilst those of barbarous people are curved. The Abyssinian

implement, which is frequently represented in old Egyptian paintings, is

very short, hardly two feet in length, very highly recurved, and fa-

shioned out of very bad metal indeed ; altogether it is a most ridiculous

weapon of war, and would prove of but small service, if opposed to

any of the modern inventions. After the fashion of the ancient Persians

and Romans, it is worn on the right side, and is more like a short

reaping sickle with the back sharpened than a sword ; it is chiefly em-

ployed after the spear has finished the work of death, to complete the

work of mutilation of the body.

53. The terrible effect which attended these weapons in ancient

times is not to be witnessed among the dastard sons of Shoa. ‘The

horseman indeed lifteth up both the bright sword and the glittering

spear,” but ‘ there is no multitude slain,” and if beat into ploughshares

and pruning hooks, the metal would prove of much greater service to

the nation in their agricultural pursuits, and of equal avail in braining

a defenceless Galla, their only enemies acquainted with the art of |

war.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 641

54. The buckler, resembling the Roman clypeus is made of a good

tough bull’s hide, or cut from the hardened skin of the wild buffaloe ;

it is of large dimensions and well studded with silver and brass crosses

and ornaments, and being conveniently portable, can be turned with the

greatest ease to ward off the threatened blow of the coming missile.

Anointed and rubbed with oil, as a preservative against cracking

and injury from the weather, this defensive armour is generally stowed

in a cotton bag, and on the return of a triumphant army, is frequently

presented as a votive offering, and hung on the vestibule of a church.

When not worn on the arm, it depends from the high pummel of the

saddle, and “the bull skin border of the bossy shield” protects the

leg from all the crushing and kicking, invariably experienced in the

_ disorderly array of the Amhara rabble.

55. The troops move in masses under their respective governors

and leaders, and take any direction they choose, provided they do

not interfere with His Majesty’s particular route, or go before the

state umbrellas. The king’s concubines and women follow on mules

immediately behind their lord and master, and a band of 30 bearers

of the royal silver shields preserve the faint line in front of the con-

fused mass of succeeding horsemen, who are kept from intruding too

near the sacred person of Majesty, by the strenuous efforts of the

master of the horse and his assistants, who lay about lustily with their

ratans, without much regard to rank or station.

56. The striking of the royal suite of tents, which is pitched enclosed

in a compound of black woollen walls, is the signal for packing up, and

at the beat of the drum and the sound of the horn, the king, bare-headed

as Masinissa of old, issues forth about 9 o’clock, when the mass follow

in his route. On His Majesty’s dismounting to proceed on foot across

the meadows, all follow his example; the march is seldom very lengthy,

and the household ladies’ alighting from their mules is the signal for

the halt ; a general rush at speed takes place from all directions of the

host, for the purpose of securing a good grassy spot for the bivouac,

and fierce wrangling, and often times quarrels and bloodshed ensue,

before the array is quietly located for the night. None have tents

except the king and a few of his great governors, and like the black

woollen awnings of Kedar, they are warm and of a close texture,

and are kept firmly erect by loops fixed to hooked wooden pegs.

642 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

57. His Majesty is welcomed to the capital by a strain of triumph-

ant music from every throat in the army, whilst all the successful war-

riors decked out in their gayest attire, and vaunting trophies dangling

beneath gauntlets and bracelets of silver, careering in front, slowly pro-

gress before the royal person in a mazy labyrinth of reticulated circles.

The air is rent with shrill whoops and yells, which are answered by the

thrilling welcome of the women pealing from the palace and every

part of the town, whilst the thundering war song is shouted from

the dense phalanx closing the procession. _

The priests receive their royal master with a blessing, and the

unceasing clang of big drums, together with frequent discharges of

musketry and artillery, fill up the pageant.

58. From the most remote ages, the glittering bracelet has been

always the badge of bravery. The Amalekite, who slew the warrior

Saul, took the bracelet that was upon his arm and brought it to David.

In some parts of the East they are still used in the investure of gallant

chiefs; and the celebrated armlet of Persia surmounted by the great

diamond ‘the crown of the moon,” is not more valued by its royal

possessor, than the ring of brass which encircles the wrist of the

Amhara. The gauntlet, the spoils of the lion, the armlet and the

agua-dama, each advance the warrior in the scale of honor and credit,

and when the matted locks are crowned by the white feather of the

Hirkom, or the green sprig of wild asparagus, the most frightful

tales of blood proceed in streams from the mouth, and there is no

deed sufficiently daring for the prowess of the braggart. But it is

well known, that many are ornamented who have never proved them-

selves in the field, even according to their own base ideas of fight.

The le is brought to the rescue of the coward reputation, and the

emblems of bravery are often exhibited, on spilling the blood of the

most inferior vermin; but blood is the sacrifice demanded, and it 9

matters little whether it be poured from the veins of the Christian

or the Galla, from the elephant or from the mouse; the war song

is shouted on every available opportunity, even on the accidental des-

truction of a rat, and all would fain appear martial and chivalrous, —

glorying in the name of the “ bravest of the brave.”

59. The principal materials employed in the most ancient crowns

and chaplets were wreaths of flowers and leaves; which were afterwards

1843.] and the Abyssiaian Church. 643

substituted by imitations in metals. The idea of the aqua-dama

might have been taken from the tendrils of a creeper hanging in clusters

from a massive branch of the Weira tree, and the ornament is certainly

deserving of much praise for its singular beauty and fanciful form.

A transverse bar of worked silver worn across the brow over a thick

row of ornamented pendants reaching to the eyes, and branches of

light chains depending at intervals completely round the head, fall

in a glittering mass to the waist, whilst a worked coronet rises high

above the bar, and is profusely cut into open figures and highly wrought

crosses.

60. The gauntlet is generally made of silver, and reaches from the

wrist to the elbow, and the armlet is an unmeaning hollow ring of silver,

resembling in size and clumsiness rather a manacle to secure a wild colt,

than an ornament for a Christian man.

61. The travelling equipment of a man of rank is very simple indeed,

and a few attendants or a sumpter mule suffice to carry all requisites for

the journey. His wants are but few—a loaf of bread and a horn of

mead for his sustenance, and a skin for his bedding; the cotton robe

serves him for covering by day and by night, and he can always find

some shelter at the end of the march, which is little inferior to what

he had been accustomed at home.

62. Ambling along upon his mule gaily bedecked with bells and

brass ornaments, with a running footman on each side, he takes the road

early in the morning, followed by a party of retainers according to his

means. Immediately behind his person, the confidential shield-bearer

takes precedence, his steward rides nearly abreast to hold a share in the

conversation, and the remainder of the train, some with load and on foot,

but all armed with sword and spear follow, as they choose, a noisy mot-

ley group, without order or regularity. They are, however, attached to

their master from long service and kind treatment, and in many ordinary

transactions swear by his name, instead of that of the ruling monarch.

63. A stage of 25 or 32 miles is considered long, and indeed the

high hills to be ascended, and deep valleys to be crossed, render it weari-

some to traverse even that distance; the general pace is the common

step of the mule, about 3 miles an hour, but when the road is level, the

amble is increased to 5, and those on foot are accustomed to keep up with

the mounted party. A saddled horse is often led in the train, a custom

644 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

handed down from the former generation, when the country was not in

such a settled state as it is at present, and when the traveller was obliged

to keep a weary and vigilant iook out for parties of roving Galla, and to

give battle on the moment, if the occasion required ; but Sabila Salassie

has wonderfully improved matters during his long reign, and now, if

provided with the necessary royal permission, an unarmed man can

pass through any part of the hereditary dominions of Shoa, without

scath to limb or property.

64. As the king’s guest, the traveller is im general treated with some

degree of respect, which is, however, entirely owing to the despot’s

wishes, and the fear of consequences unbars the door of the house and

throws open the stores for the consumption of man and beast; but a

churlish reception would most probably await the unfortunate who tra-

velled through the country without the king’s permission ; and a well-

stocked purse, or a well-filled portmanteau, would not invariably produce

a salutary effect, as the savage has always some plan or idea in abey-

ance, to obtain any curious article exposed to his admiring view, with-

out the necessity of imparting aught of value in exchange. Under

every advantage, and attended by the king’s household officers, it is ex-

tremely difficult at times to obtain the most simple and necessary sup-

plies, and force is frequently resorted to, to extract these articles for

which the most liberal payment has been tendered beforehand ; but there

always exists along with the desire to acquire property, an innate dis-

like to part with aught the most triflmg, and even among the higher

classes, the small request of a stick or a spear is peremptorily refused to

parties, who have heretofore loaded the ingrate with the richest imagin-

able presents.

65. A great man on coming to the capital if unprovided with a

house of his own, is certain to find ready accommodation always with the

inmates of any of the lower description of dwellings, who are all willing,

for a trifling consideration, to remove their bullock hides, and allow the

grand visitor the free use of the apartment, such as it is. They will also

cook the victuals of the stranger and his followers, if of the same reli-

gious persuasion as themselves, and remain content with a very small

remuneration indeed.

66. His Majesty, however, in general, has tents pitched for all great

men, and liberally supplies them with food, both at his own table and in

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 645

the presentation of the ‘ Dingo,’ an established allowance granted from

the royal kitchen, bread, mead and pepper, soup daily, and sheep and

bullocks being occasionally distributed to upwards of a thousand people,

who are on the list as masters of Dingo. Every stranger who comes to

the kingdom is amply provided for, and indeed all who make their

necessities or their wishes known on the subject, have no reason what-

ever to complain of any want of liberality on the part of the sovereign of

Shoa. ,

67. From the excess of cultivation on the table land, there are few

wild animals, except hyenas, hares and field rats; the death of an otter

is considered a rare feat of prowess, and badgers are avoided as the

‘devil’s sheep,’ and the few that burrow in the hills are viewed with

very great distrust. Partridges and guinea fowl are hunted down with

dogs placed on successive ranges, who, fresh from the nearest station,

pursue the quarry the moment he finishes his fight, and very soon pick

up the wearied bird. In the low country, the larger animals, elephants,

lions, buffaloes, rhinoceros and many species of antelope exist in consi-

derable numbers, and as each has a relative value in the scale of honor

reckoned according to Galla heads, the brave warriors on the frontier do

contrive, at lengthy intervals between, to compass the death of some.

68. A large body, consisting of several hundreds proceed on horse-

back to the cover, armed with every available weapon, and worry the

animal to death according to the usual approved system of Abyssinian

bullying, riding after him till he is brought to bay, and pouring showers

of bullets and lances from a distance into his carcase on the first conve-

-nient opportunity ; but these hunts are often undertaken without success,

and seldom conclude without many fatal accidents. The valiant

thrower of the first spear is entitled to the honorary reward from the

king at the triumph at entry into the capital, which is attended by the

Same ceremonies and rejoicings as the advent of a successful military

expedition against the heathen Galla. The elephant is reckoned equal

to 40 Galla, the lion to 7, and all the other large animals to 5 Galla,

killed in battle.

69. A good equestrian, and a tolerable marksman, His Majesty is in

the habit of making Saturday excursions attended by many hundred

followers to some favourite retreat, where he remains for hours, shooting

what the country chiefly affords, 7. e. baboons, vultures and wild ducks ;

646 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

but the Amhara has altogether a very indistinct idea of wooderaft. One of

the chiefs burning with the desire to emulate the white men in the dis-

tinction of an elephant, lately proceeded to the jungles with a retinue of

1000 adherents, and a large party of the king’s gun-men ; but after fruit-

lessly spending a month in the covers, he was fain to return without

having destroyed any thing of larger dimensions than a spotted monkey.

Hyenas are suffered to multiply to a great extent in some parts of the

country, owing to the superstition of the natives, who firmly believe

that Jewish sorcerers descend from the mountains during the night, and

transform themselves into the likeness of these foul animals, and that in

consequence, there would be no good result in the pursuit.

70. The bulk of the nation is indeed decidedly agricultural, although

it appears somewhat strange that the minds of the people are not more

disturbed and upset by the continual military expeditions they are

forced to make against the Galla. Probably the selfishness of the des-

pot in appropriating the lion’s share of the spoil has most salutary effect

in checking innate restlessness, and the Abyssinian is taught in a rough

school to understand fully, that there is more profit to be obtained from

holding the plough than from wielding the sword, and it is certainly the

fact, that when the foray is over, the war horse is turned loose in the

meadow, and the partisan willingly applies himself, according to his

means, as usual, to his peaceful avocations among the fields.

71. Mounting on the left side with the assistance of their spear, the

natives when seated do not by any means ride well, though they do not

very often tumble from their horses or mules, owing to the high fortifi-

cations of wood and leather which are built upon the saddle to protect

the rider in front and rear; and although they can carry a horse at speed

over bad ground, their seat is awkward and ungainly, and they have no

idea whatever of easing an animal in his distress. Bitted in the most

cruel and barbarous manner, they bear as heavy as lead upon the bridle

rein, and no horse is ever five minutes in the hands of an Amhara without

having his mouth pulled to pieces, and the blood streaming as the tortured

animal tosses his head in the air for relief. |

72. The sojourner in Abyssinia can easily believe what Bruce relates

concerning his recorded instance of cruelty to animals, for although it

is not fair to brand the nation with a foul stigma resting on a solitary

fact, yet there is no good reason to disbelieve the veracity of the traveller ;

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 647

and other facts have been also witnessed which exceed in horror even

what has been related of the soldiers of Northern Abyssinia. On the

first military expedition to which the British Embassy was invited, on

the evening of the successful foray, the limb of a sheep was most wan-

tonly severed from the live animal with a sword when the wretched

beast refused to proceed further, and the mutilated trunk left bleeding

upon the ground, to be hacked piece-meal alive by any in the rear of the

column of savages who had no store of provender. That the flesh

might have been served up quivering with the life-blood is also ex-

tremely probable, though it might not necessarily have been taken from

the living beast, for the animal is invariably killed at the very door of

the eating house, and it takes but a short time after the breath is out

of the carcase to hand up the raw meat to the feast. Whatever might

have been the custom 80 years ago, now-a-days, the animal is invariably

in the first instance killed after a fashion. :

73. A rush of 10 or 12 men is made on the victim, his legs and horns

are seized as a purchase, he is thrown upon the ground, when the throat

is hacked through with a blunt knife in the name of the Holy Trinity,

and the poor beast is left to struggle and stagger about until the lifeblood

be expended ; then commences an indiscriminate onslaught of knives,

swords and hatchets, without the preliminary operations of skinning and

cleansing. Bigotted to a degree, the animal if killed by the hand of a

Moslem is considered in the highest degree impure, and reckoned on the

list of even lower esteem than the unhallowed flesh of pigs and bears,

geese, and wild fowl.

74. The Abyssinian in general is too well acquainted with the value

of his own live-stock to urge him beyond his powers unmercifully, and

often performs a great portion of the journey on foot rather than

distress the animal to his own loss ; but his treatment of Galla prisoners,

and the almost certain dreadful fate which awaits any old or useless

male who falls into his hands, is a sufficient blot upon the Christian

name, without the addition of any other crime whatever.

75. Here, as elsewhere, eating is one of the most important concerns

of life, and on the days of the great festivals, the palace displays all

the pomp remaining im the land, and the unusual sight of the population

‘somewhat aroused from their customary state of lethargic bestiality ; the

stair cases are lined with groups of priests and monks in their holiday

648 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

suits, and the courts are filled to overflowing with the chiefs and nobles,

who on these gala days cast aside their abhorrence for the use of water,

and appear dressed in clean white robes.

76. The king reclines in state on his best velvet cushions, and the

royal alcove is tricked out with gay gold cloths and massive silver

ornaments ; seated on the ground immediately before the presence, |

are his most devoted and valiant governors, and around his couch —

swarm a group of young pages, the tableau being most probably

taken from the Old Scripture pictures, where cherubs are so profusely

introduced surrounding the principal figure. A long line of attendants

stretching on either side of the throne stand as fixtures against the

walls, each bearing in his right hand a straight silver. sheathed falchion.

The room is of large dimensions, and the height and gloomy ceiling

in some degree compensate for the absence of architectural decorations,

whilst the lofty walls are relieved by a display of all the state shields,

which are profusely studded with silver bosses, crosses, and ornaments,

and depending from each buckler the velvet mantle droops gracefully

by its side, glittering in every hue and color of the rainbow.

77. At an early hour, a horse-shoe table is extended the entire length

of the dwelling, and is so entirely heaped with viands, that not a twig

of the wicker work is visible beneath the load. Piles of wheaten cakes

touching each other, and strewed with fragments of fowls, tower up two

feet above the surface. Bowls of rich curry, decoctions of red pepper,

flanked by bottles of old hydromel, heap the groaning board, and nu-

merous slaves are ranged at intervals with large baskets of delicate

raw flesh, which has been just stripped from the slaughtered bullock.

78. The preparations for the feast are completed by 8 o’clock in the

morning, when the great doors are thrown open, and a burst of wild

music from the king’s band ushers in the company; four hundred sit

down on the floor at a time, ranged in double row besides the table, the

chief men in the front rank, and every justice is done to His Majesty’s —

hospitality. The piles soon sink beneath the active attacks of the

guests, and the rising hum proclaims that the hydromel is of the most

potent quality. Numerous attendants are in waiting to administer to

the wants of the honored guests, by handing with their fingers from the

viands whatever is desired, and a piece of meat if not relished by the

first person into whose hand it “falls, is passed to the next inferior,

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 649

and thus runs its course down to the individual, whose rank meapa-

citates him from rejecting the proffered morsel.

79. During the repast, the fiddlers and harpers who are stationed in

the opening of the horse-shoe, dance and sing to the notes of their in-

struments, and ever and anon the shrill notes of some ‘“ Asmaree”’

stationed in a corner of the hall, rise thundering to the very roof, in

acclamation of the generosity, hospitality, and magnificence of the great

emperor of the Amhara.

80. After the guests are fully satisfied with food, the company rise,

and each being provided with a large horn of mead, lounges against the

walls to complete the inebriation which has been but partially effected

at the table, whilst crowds of well dressed female slaves speedily reple-

nish the diminished structures of food and liquor.

81. The great doors are again thrown open, and a fresh set enter

amidst the increasing din, and the entertainment is continued till late

in the afternoon; etiquette enforcing on these occasions the presence of

the monarch throughout the entire time. Hundreds of bullocks are de-

voured, together with many more measures of wheat than can be well

conceived ; but altogether considerable decorum is preserved, and al-

though the guests reach a maudlin state of drunkenness, yet the presence

of the king is generally respected, and the exuberance of incited mirth

expends itself in harmless praises of the royal host. |

82. Such, however, is not the case at private parties, the crub of er-

straint is allowed to fall loose, the fierce passions gain along with the

liquor the entire ascendency, and guests seldom return to their homes,

without witnessing the broil and the scuffle, the flashing of the swords,

and the dealing of deep cuts and wounds among the drunken combat-

ants.

_ 88. Sunday is the great day for feasting, and is universally believed to

have been designed for the express purpose of eating and stuffing. Men

do not labour in the fields, women abstain from grinding and sewing

cloths; and although other work is carried on as on ordinary week days,

the chief employment for all who can afford it, is to pass the entire

time in eating, drinking, and sleeping.

84. The influence of the evil eye is supposed to have little or no

-ayail within the palace walls, and the great door is suffered to remain

open during the operation of eating; but elsewhere it is scrupulously

650 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

barred and closed, and a fire is invariably lighted before the peasant,

who will on no account appease his hunger, labouring under the strange |

superstition, that otherwise the devils would enter during the dark, and

that there would be no blessing upon the meat.

85. It has been conjectured by Pliny, that the orientals received their

first hints of building from the swallow, and that in imitation of their |

feathered instructor, their first attempts were made in clay. Where the

Abyssinians obtained their ideas on this subject it were hard to tell, but

certainly they have made little progress in architectural design, and

their houses, constructed as in the earliest day, are still mere frame-

works, sparingly daubed over with a thin coat of mud. Here thieves can

easily break through and steal, and the materials are of such a flimsy

nature, that the morning sun oftentime rises a witness to the truth of

the scriptural metaphor: ‘‘ He built his house upon the sand, and it

was swept away by the rising flood.”

86. Of the rudest description, these hovels are composed of mud and

rotten twigs, and perfectly pervious to the inclemencies of the season,

they subject the occupants, from the cold damp air, to all the pains of

rheumatism and catarrh. ‘There are no conveniences in the shape of

glass or other transparent substances, and if the door be closed on the

dense unhealthy fog and the cold bleak wind, all possibility is denied of

admitting light; the thermometer rarely rises above 65 degrees, indica-

ting the necessity for artificial heat, whilst there exists no vent for

the smoke, excepting through the door and the cracked apertures in the

walls. | |

87. In the town, from the want of sewers and drains, the inhabi-

tants are obliged to live like swine in the filth of their own styes,

inhaling all the effluvia of decomposing matter and putrifying water ;

the comfort of space is never consulted, passages and out-houses

are far beyond the intention of the proprietor, and with doors allowing

full ingress to injurious currents of air, with roofs admitting the rain,

and floors covered with unwholesome damp, it is surprising that many

more of the inhabitants are not made martyrs to disease. Some few years

ago, epidemic dysentry made its appearance at Ankobar, and as might

have been expected, rioted to excess in the foul location. One-half of the

population was swept away, and the remnant fled for a time from the

hill, which they declared to be blasted by a curse from heaven.

| 1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 651

88. In the country, there is no attention whatever paid to cleanliness

or comfort. The stagnant dunghill is carried by the descending rain

but a few yards from the walls, and the cattle and poultry are allowed

to share the general apartment ; misery and confinement are strikingly

pourtrayed in the worn-out thatch and the wattle stockade which sur-

rounds the farm steading, whilst the inmates themselves, although

supplied with an ample sufficiency to sustain the mere necessities of

life, exist amid dirt and vermin, without experiencing much comfort

even in the moments of their very highest enjoyment.

89. It is the practice of this uncivilized country to keep the demise of

royalty a profound secret so long as possible, in order to avert the

anarchy and confusion that would not fail to occur during an interreg-

num, when every individual in the kingdom considers himself at full

liberty to act according to the best of his imagination, without fear of

punishment. Whilst there is no king there is no law, is the maxim in

Shoa, and the foulest crimes are committed with the most perfect impu-

nity. On the news of the death of Assfawoosun, the streets of Debra

Sibanoo ran red with blood, and 800 victims were immolated to private

malice and revenge, before the appointment of his successor was pro-

claimed, and justice and order re-established on their seats.

90. At other times also, the great Christian maxim is too apt to be

forgotten. The Abyssinian remembers only that he is savage, and

revenge, as usual, takes up the first position in the mind. Many a dark

deed has been cowardly enacted in the deep forest or in the confused

skirmish, and the Gallas have been oftentimes most wrongfully accused

of foul murder and death, when the victim has fallen under the assas-

sin spear of his false comrade; and indeed the rulers and leaders of

armies are on this account always much disinclined to lead their forces

through difficult woods and defiles, being well aware of the dread effects

of Amhara treachery.

91. It is deeply to be lamented, that any nation whatever should

esteem even the heads of the slain as the great emblem of victory, but

the more atrocious and disgusting barbarity of Abyssinia, the base idea

of which is so revolting to humanity, is the filthiest ceremony that ever

disgraced any styling themselves anation. The frailty of human nature

is indeed discernable in the most legible characters, and he who wit-

nessed the unhallowed proceeding cannot fail to offer up a fervent wish,

652 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

that the time may be hastened when nations shall be knit together in

the bonds of love, and when true Christianity shall reign triumphant in

every heart.

92. On the close of the foray, each follower who has slain a male

creature ;—murdered would be the proper expression, for the grey hairs

of venerable age and the tottering step of smiling infancy prove no safe-

guard to the ruffian monster ;—proceeds to mutilate the body, and carries

off the token of his crime carefully preserved in the bloody folds of his

waist cloth. The disgusting trophy after being prepared over the fire

is hung dangling to the right wrist, and on the following day, each in

his turn presents himself before the approving monarch, who halts at

intervals at the time of march for the purpose of witnessing the foul

exhibition. Group after group, dash in from the flocks, resounding their

war song in chorus, and whilst brandishing their spears and their vile

trophies, the lying murderers shout their prowess aloud :—*“ I have. des-

troyed my enemy in the open plain, I have rushed upon the foe, and

slain him in the wood. I am the king’s great soldier, may Sabela Se-

lassie live for ever.”’ After the savage Christian has fully displayed his

wanton cruelty he sinks prostrate to the ground, and by his mean

grovelling subserviency, fills up the full measure of Abyssinian iniquity.*

93. All proclamations are made after beat of drum by the king’s

heralds on the outside of the palace gateway, the removals and appoint-

ments of governors, the promulgation of religious doctrines, and His

Majesty’s commands on all general subjects ; but the order of assemblage

for the military expeditions issues forth in pithy language from below

a small stunted tree at the foot of the palace hill of Angollala.

94. “The king hath foes and is about to subdue them on a certain day,

who fails to present himself at Zallo, armed and carrying provisions for

the specified time shall be treated as an enemy, and shall forfeit his pro-

perty during a period of seven years.” The penalty, however seldom

requires enforcement, all the Amhara respond to the call with the ut-

* This horrible custom if not borrowed from the Jews, is probably of Galla origin,

and is early mentioned as being practised on the coast of Africa, vide De Bry, 1599,

De Caffrorium militio. ‘‘ Victores, victis cesis et captis pudenda excidunt que exsic-

ata, regi in reliquorum procerum presentis offerunt.’? This is a very ancient Afri-

can custom. It is represented on the walls of the temples and tombs in Egypt. See

the French Institute’s ‘* Description de L’ Egypt.’’—Eps.

)

1843. ] and Abyssinian Church. 653

most alacrity, for the insatiate love of blood and the inherent hatred of

the heathen are sufficient inducements to quit home and family, and

follow to the foray the great crimson umbrellas, in which they place

the most unbounded confidence.

95. Every thing, however minute which is found by a subject, is

carried straightway to His Majesty. The brass bowl of a pipe and a

bottle of lunar caustic which were lost during the expedition were forth-

with brought in by the finders, and restored. On his way to Angollala,

a servant of the Reverend Mr. Kraff was swept away by the torrent in

the Mosaliet river, and a tea kettle which he carried was lost; six

months afterwards the utensil was found by a woman and taken to the

king, who on being asked for it, said, ‘‘ No, it will do for myself.”

96. All presents received by the subject are also immediately carried

to His Majesty for inspection, and it rarely happens that the individual

is suffered to retain any part whatever. Brought before the sovereign

as a peace-offering, the budget is generally received with an “ exogeer

’ and forthwith transferred to the store-

house of finery which has been filling for ages. The more trivial portions

casto,” ‘‘ God give you more,’

of the present may be sometimes granted to the receiver as a wonderful

mark of the monarch’s favour; but in all cases, an equivalent in cattle

or country cloths is afterwards made from the royal stores.

97. On the occasion of any loss by fire or other accidents, the

begging sufferer makes the round of his acquaintance, who each con-

tribute their mite to the subscription, and wonderful scope being given

to imposition, the individual becomes more wealthy than before. Con-

stant application is also made by the domestics of the royal household

to obtain the price of destroyed articles, in order to save them from con-

dign punishment. An offender was detected in bringing the same

broken. decanter three times over, and a shield was never said to have

been broken or a mule lost, but the delinquent did not refer himself to

the embassy for the amount of the fine.

98. Tainted with base servility, the Abyssinians pay the most abject

respect to their superiors, and however aggrieved, are seldom heard to

complain of the governor. The king is held in the highest adora-

tion, and the oath by his life is the most binding in use. If adjured by

this a person can be punished for non-compliance, and the wilful

breaking the obligation renders the perjurers liable to severe penalties.

| 4

654 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

In addressing equals or children, the second person singular is used.

Superiors are entitled to the third person plural, and disputes are easily

excited, especially among the fanatic priesthood, by not paying sufh-

cient attention to this point of etiquette.

99. Respect is here paid by prostration to the earth, and after the

most degrading and humiliating fashion, bowing the face among the

very dust, by uncovering the robe, and exposing the naked person, and

by kissing the nearest inanimate object on entering a house.

100. The most grovelling adoration is paid to the monarch, and to

many of his chiefs. All of whatever rank when they approach the pre-

sence, throw themselves prostrate upon the ground, lie flat on their faces,

and knock their heads three times upon the earth. The inhabitants bend

in the mire at the approach of His Majesty, and the troops of horsemen

as they emerge from their different districts to join the military expedi-

tion before mingling with the general mass, stream at full speed to the

vicinity of the royal umbrellas, and pulling up at a prescribed distance,

spring from their saddles, and all simultaneous leaders and followers

perform the degrading prostration.

101. Every native uncovers his person when in presence of or in

conversation with the king, whilst to equals the corner of the robe is

only removed for a time, and then suffered to resume its fold over the

shoulder. Inferiors are obliged to stand continually unclothed in the

company of their masters, and any small present bestowed upon the

servant, must be received with both hands in a cringing position, whilst

the nearest object, generally the threshold of the door, is kissed in token

of devoted love and affection. Suspicions of treachery and revenge may

have possibly originated this strange custom of uncovering the person,

and the concealment of dangerous weapons is totally debarred, when

the law is enforced of making all strip themselves so often during the

course of the twenty-four hours.

102. Although not particularly addicted to the merry mood in general,

and exceedingly ignorant withal of any thing resembling stage effect,

yet the palace buffoon elicits shouts of laughter by his uncouth antics,

and attempts to personate the character of the adjoining tribes, who are

looked down upon with the utmost sovereign contempt; and on the

days of interview with these wilder savages, who come dancing into the

presence chaunting their war songs, and decked out with feathers and

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 655

warlike implements, the buffoon mixes in the dance and delights the

Amhara spectators by the performance of his caricatured gestures ; but

in this department the country can only boast of the king’s mimic, who

retains his situation without fear of rivalry; here there is no field for

genius, and it would prove a hard task for the jester to devise any thing

more ludicrous or ridiculous than the ungraceful dance of the Amhara,

the impassioned caper of her priests, or the idiotic whirl of her war-

riors.

103. Following the custom of the dark ages, dwarfs are treated with

considerable fear, respect and consideration, and many of the most

learned and praiseworthy in the land are to be found among the small

misshapen race. The king’s father confessor is of the most diminutive

size, though possessed of great good feeling, and forming a striking con-

trast to the generality of hisnation. The chiefs and nobles often choose

their secretaries and household priests with reference to their tiny ap-

pearance, and the wisest man in the capital, whose charms and talis-

mans are considered all powerful, and who knows every plant by heart

from the “‘ cedar of Lebanon to the hyssop that creeps over the garden

walls,” sustains his character for lore, as much by the deformity of his

appearance, as by the brilliancy of his understanding.

104. No petitioner ever enters the presence of his superiors unless

furnished with an offering according to his means, as a bribe to propi-

tiate favor and good-will. Cattle and honey, cloth, wood and money,

and even stones being presented when building materials are scarce.

105. Presents are frequently exchanged among the chiefs and

great men, and every display is attempted on the occasion, the train

of bearers being lengthened out as much as possible by dividing the

articles into the most minute portions, and all are covered with red

cloth ; every thing must also be exposed to the view of the receiver,

wild bulls and unruly he-goats, as large as donkeys, are dragged

into the sitting apartment to the imminent danger and pollution of all

around. Cocks and hens, loaves of half-baked bread, and pots of rancid

butter, must be all closely investigated and personally approved of,

and any deviation from this rule is certain to be visited with the most

dire displeasure.

106. An easy and ingenious method of extortion exists in full force

throughout the land, and all classes are equally amenable to its abuses

656 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

and privileges. Bringing any article whatever, the begging petitioner

hands it over to his superior as a “ mamalecha” or memento, for what-

ever he has the assurance to demand. Servants bring a stick or a bunch

of grass, and ask for swords, clothes, and money ; and chiefs and officers

of the state present to His Majesty a pot of honey or a cotton cloth,

and demand a horse or a mule, or an embroidered garment. If the ma-

malecha be received, the modest request must be acceded to, and indeed

the custom of the country imperatively requires that the extortion

should be invariably complied with.

107. With the first dawn, bands of petitioners station themselves on

the top of the emimences adjacent to the palace, and the cry of “ aliet,”

“‘aliet,” “master,” resounds deep in the still air of the morning; the

door-keepers order them to draw nigh, but well aware of the understand-

ing between these servants and the “ four chairs,” against whose deci-

sion they are appealing, they give no heed to the summons, but lift up

their voices the louder, until the king orders one of his pages to cause

the whole to assemble in the court-yard. At home and abroad, on ex-

cursions and military expeditions, the cry of “‘aliet” salutes the royal

ear from the most strange and unexpected situations, and is in general, ©

promptly attended to; the stick, however, is sometimes applied to the

most importunate, who will not remain content with the promise of a

future consideration of their claims, but every available opportunity is

taken by the king of listening to these endless petitions and appeals.

The halting stones on the green turf are frequently transferred into

seats of justice, judgment is given whilst ambling over the fields on

private excursions, and three-quarters of the entire day, with the excep-

tion of the Sabbath, is devoted to unravelling the knotty points of con-

troversy, or settling the disputes and quarrels of his subjects.

108. In Shoa, the men have the entire responsibility in all the bar-

gains regarding cattle and sheep, farming and warlike implements ; and

the women barter in the minor articles of sustenance, grain and pepper,

salt, ghee and earthenware. And although the man cannot carry the

water or bake bread, he must wash the foul linen belonging to both

sexes, an operation which is performed in the running stream, the

clothes being deposited in a skin together with the seeds of the indote,

and well trampled under foot. It is the province of the men to plough,

sow and reap, split the wood, cut the grass, and repair the house ;

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 657

whilst to the women all the other heavy work is accorded, as fetching

wood, water and grass, making butter and bread, spinning, pounding

and grinding. Markets are held once a week in various parts of the

kingdom, and the weekly supply for household use is then laid in.

Men and women indiscriminately attend, each occupied by their own

peculiar duties; at other times in all the towns and villages of Abys-

sinia, there being neither open shop or bazar, the Owenian system of

barter entirely prevails, and the proprietor of any article who wishes an

exchange perambulates the streets, calling aloud from door to door the

nature of his goods, until he finds some individual willing to’make the

desired barter.

109. Love rules neither camp nor grove in Abyssinia, but base

sensuality is indulged in by the grossest indiscriminate intercourse. A

permanent female is sought for as a household drudge, the child is

delivered over into bondage without any reference to her own wishes,

and remains with her mate only until she can better her miserable con-

dition elsewhere.

Women of rank, however, and more especially those of royal blood,

assume high grounds and pretensions, for the honor has been conferred

by linking with the lot of the subject ; the reins of authority are generally

taken violent possession of, the order and the command issue in the

name of the lady, and the hen-pecked husband on whom the alliance

has been thrust, is obliged in his own establishment, to endure in peace

all the despotism of the palace.

110. In all matters of quarrel and dissension, should either of the

parties desire to be reconciled, the matter cannot be adjusted without

the intervention of a mediator ; a third individual is sought for, who will

undertake the arrangement, and in his hands the affair is entirely plac-

ed. The king himself often accepts the office, and of course is rarely un-

successful in his applications. Inferiors come into the presence of their

offended masters with large stones upon their heads, and prostrate

themselves upon the earth in token of their fault, which, however, is

generally forgiven on the intercession of the mediator. Quarrels be-

tween man and wife, if not allayed with the cudgel, or of that serious

_ hature to cause separation, are settled by arbitration ; the neighbours as-

semble to discuss the matter, a judge is instituted for the occasion, the

parties are mutually examined, and a fine is imposed according to the

4 R

658 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

merits of the case: a string of beads, if the husband be in fault, and a

pair of new breeches should the lady be found napping. A woman

supposed to be unfaithful to the conjugal, ‘ alga,”

her friends with a portion of her property, but one caught in the act of

infidelity can be well beaten, and ejected stark naked from the house;

these extremities are seldom indulged in, and mutual forbearance seems

may be returned to

to reign paramount in Shoa.

111. But this universal loose style of living exercises a most bane-

ful influence on society in general; the mind becomes degraded, whilst

the body is enervated by disease and indulgence; jealousy is rife in

every house, and the children of each separate female on the establish-

ment are bandied against each other in all hatred and animosity, which

is by no means allayed on the death of the parent, or by the posthumous

intimation of his partial and unfair distribution of property.

112. On all occasions of rejoicing and ceremony, whether on the

successful return of the king or ofa private individual, on the sight of a

procession or on the discharge of fire arms, the women with their

characteristic love of noise, burst out into the most thrilling clamour

of welcome. Moving their tongue with more than ordinary volubi-

lity against the roof of the mouth, they produce continuous successions

of shrill notes, which are more agreeable to the listener than to the —

performer. One watchful dame on the outskirts perceives the ap-

proaching cavalcade, and forthwith gives out the clamorous note of

warning ; in a moment the entire mountain side is covered with every

female in the location, yelling in full chorus; the Azllil—Jil progresses

fast and furious, as they bend their bodies nearly double to assist in up-

raising the melody of the tone, the tears stream from their eyes in the

violence of the exertion, and the hills resound far and near with the

gathered volume of the shrill notes.

113. One of the strangest of Shoan customs is the method of saluta-

tion; the most earnest enquiries being invariably made regarding your

own health and that of your house, horse and children, as if the enquir-

ing party was really interested in the result. Even two old women

tottering on the very brink of the grave, and afflicted with every pain —

and sorrow under the sun, meeting in the street, pull up and commence a

string of good wishes, which are reiterated as long as the breath will

come out of their old bodies. How are you? How have you passed

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 659

your time ? Are you well? Are you very well? Are you perfectly well

together with a thousand other pert interrogatives to be made acquaint-

ed with their private condition, and at each response the Deity must be

invoked as to the great happiness and perfect felicity which have been ex-

perienced since last sight. Should the meeting take place twenty times a

day the same ceremony is enforced, and for each progressive state of

morning, noon and eve, there exists a distinct set of phrases, which from

their continual repetition sound grating upon the senses. Passengers

stand in the streets and roar out salutations intended for the inmates

and huts a hundred yards from the hedge. You are startled from your

sleep by a dunning—How are you? from some gentleman passing be-

fore day dawn to his country residence, and your ears are afflicted from

morning sun till evening, by a most teasing and harassing string of

enquiry, from every one who passes himself off as an acquaintance.

114. The buldurba, or introducer, is appointed from amongst the re-

tinue of every one who keeps an establishment, on the first introduction

of the parties. ‘To him, and to him alone can the visitor look for ad-

mittance into the house, and unless he is present, the monarch and the

great man are alike invisible. Court-yards may be thronged with many

attendants, and doors may seem invitingly accessible; but the “open

sesame” is wanting, and the stranger returns to his own abode disgusted

with the insolence as well as inconvenience of the custom. Time, how-

ever, softens down the rigidity of the practice, which is at first so per-

tinaciously observed ; suspicion of evil intention gives way, on better

acquaintance of character, and after a certain probation. There is much

more difficulty experienced in gaining admittance into the lordly Abys-

sinian hut than into the lordly halls of an English nobleman.

115. Suspicion may also be easily traced in the custom of all great

people moving from their domiciles with a long train of armed attend-

ants, as in the height of Highland anarchy. The tail of the McGregor was

seldom of longer dimensions than that of an Abyssinian nobleman. In-

deed he is never allowed to be by himself, whether in the cabinet or in

the field he is invariably surrounded by a numerous band of mean syco-

phantish attendants. The custom of the country enjoins the practice,

the cheap price of provisions enables him to feed a large population and

the lack of all manufactories, supply an unlimited number of idlers, who

are willing to obtain a livelihood in any manner whatever. But the

660 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

nuisance is a crying one to the stranger. No privacy is ever enjoyed.

No retirement is ever suffered. A dozen naked savages are continually by

your side, restrained by no very correct ideas of order or discipline ; the

confused hum and suppressed chattering are by no means of assis-

tance in study or writing, and on the occurrence of meals or of the

visits of illustrious people, the whole establishment tumble in naked

to the waist to satisfy their own inordinate curiosity, and to do honor

to their lord and master.

116. Visits are generally made early in the morning or before noon,

and it is reckoned discreditable to enter a strange house after meals, as —

the object of the untimely advent can only be attributed to a desire of

obtaining the food and refreshment of which the etiquette of the country

enforces presentation. Sneezing is accompanied by an invocation to the -

Trinity, and the bye-standers are expected to exclaim “ moroo,” God bless

- you, and eating is invariably attended by a loud smacking of the lips, which

can be heard at some considerable distance from the entertainment ;

none but beggars eat their food in a quiet and rational manner.

117. There is no sense of decorum evinced in the satisfying of any

desire, however gross, and no shame whatever is felt in exposure to

the gaze of the public. The toilet is unscrupulously performed in front of

the assembled multitude, and his Majesty himself, the most polished

gentleman in the kingdom, blows his nose with his fingers, and wipes

the soiled hand upon the robe of the nearest courtiers, who eagerly

proffer the cloth for his acceptance. More offensive than the Ama-

ponda, who carries his own little cleansing spade tied round his neck,

the first object is seized by an Abyssinian upon entering a strange house,

and ears and nostrils are scraped out with the most savage indifference

to appearance. ll sleep stark naked, stretched upon bullock’s hides,

huddled close together for mutual warmth, each loving batch being

covered with the accumulated pile of individual garment. Should the

master of the house require food during the night, a piece of raw meat

and a horn of beer are brought to him by a male or female attendant,

who, destitute alike of clothes and decorum, stands unconscious of all

shame until the craving of his hunger be satisfied ; and owing to their

foul feeding and their more uncleanly habit of never washing, cutane-

ous eruptions spread like a plague over their unsavoury persons, and few

indeed are free from the disgusting diseases of the beggar.

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 661

118. Their amusements are few indeed. At rare intervals, shooting

vultures and monkeys in the woods, or running down partridges among

the hills with their dogs, throwing the spear on foot at a mark, or

mimicking the art of war on horseback, moving in the uncouth dance,

or singing the war-song in chorus, whilst the games of gibbeta and

shuntridge, and the annual throwing the ball at Christmas, fill up the

scanty list.

119. The spear is generally launched at a short distance, and the

unsuccessful competitors are obliged to lay down with their faces upon

the earth, whilst all the better marksmen trample and triumph over

their prostrate necks ; and in the “ yombeza,” the mounted warriors

with blunt lances choose a spacious plain and perform at speed all

their evolutions of war, attacking and defending, throwing the reed

and receiving upon the shield, and whooping and yelling to proclaim

the victory, the delivery of a sure spear thrust, or the hemming among

their own number, one of the opposite band.

120. The << gibbeta’”’ is a game somewhat resembling back gammon,

but is played with sixty pewter balls, which are stored in 20 holes

over the board ; the distribution of these balls and the judicious heaping

up of the stones according to certain complicated rules, constitute the

science of the game, which is, however, sufficiently intricate to foster a

spirit of betting and gambling, which reigns in full force amongst the

nation.

121. Shuntridge is nearly the Arab game of chess, but the board and

the men are very miserable productions of genius; a few of the moves

are somewhat different, and the game is almost entirely confined to the

court eunuchs, who bask their portly forms in the verandahs of the

palace, and pass away their idle hours in very indifferent play.

122. On the Christmas, an annual contest takes place between the

king’s household followers, the dependents of the purveyor general,

and the Deek Agavari. A cloth ball is struck with a mallet, and a strug-

gle ensues for the possession of the missile; three times the ball is

discharged over the plain, and the party are declared victors who have

thrice caught it in succession. They enjoy the privilege for the day of

abusing the vanquished, the king only excepted; every tongue being

unloosed and the foulest abuse and slander being heaped upon the most

illustrious as well as the holiest personages of the court. The day is

662 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

concluded by a grand entertainment to all, at the cost of the chiefs of

the defeated party.

123. The king’s band is composed of simple reeds of various length

and sizes, the ‘‘ imbeta,” having in the upper part an aperture over.

which the mouth is placed, and the “mihut,’ which is fashioned

somewhat after the form of a trumpet or trombone. Each performer

has but one pipe, and consequently like the Russian, is master of but

one note; there is no particular air or time attended to, each giving out

his breathing very much as he chooses; but the wild music falls soft

upon the ear like the harmonious sound of the Panden pipe blown over

by the breeze.

124. The Abyssinian fiddle, the “‘ musuncho,” is of rude form and fa-

shion; an empty gourd or a hollow square of wood being carved with —

a piece of parchment as a sounding board, and a bit of rough stick insert-

ed in one corner to serve as the neck; there is but one string, and as

the performer is not a Paganini, the inharmonious sounds proceed from

the instrument as if the unhappy spirit of music was confined in the

interior, and uttered harsh screams and moans as the bow proceeded to

inflict fresh tortures upon her agonized sinews. Some continue to per-

petrate a very faint resemblance to tune; but all consider themselves at

perfect liberty to scrape away in the most persevering and soul-sorrowing

fashion, and unlucky indeed is the site of residence if stationed near the

proprietor of a musuncho.

125. The harp, called ‘ buggana,’

wood, leather, and sheep’s entrails, and presents an appearance as if an °

is a most strange fabrication of

old leathern portmanteau had been taken by children as a foundation,

and built up with the rudest materials to represent the lyre in the days of

Tubal ; nor do the notes belie the first appearance of the instrument, or

bestow any credit whatever on the fashion. It has five strings, and is

used only as an accompaniment to the voice, a simple monotonous ca-

dence of the individual notes being the only music produced.

126. The large drum, called “ kubbers,” and the small one “‘ nagga-

rect,” are not thumped so continually as might be expected, they are exclu-

sively reserved for military expeditions, or for doing honor to the happy

return of friends and relations from successful journeys, and it is mdeed

lucky for foreigners, that the nation with their present set of crude

instruments is not infected with a musical mania. The silence of

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 663

night is seldom disturbed by the discordant sound of their barbarous

attempts.

127. A portion of the vocal music is of a more pleasing description,

and some of the airs which the women croon over their work are even soft

and plaintive, There is, however, no great change of note in the strain,

which has generally reference to the particular operation in which they

are employed.

128. The recitative of the war songs is pitched in a high key, and

chaunted by a-single individual at the top of his pipe; and the

thundering chorus, which consists of a few words in deep base, is at in-

tervals poured from every throat in the party, with great effect. The

return of a successful army is indeed a most striking pageant ; the glit-

ter of the silver ornaments, the flashing of gay cloths and housings, and

the shrill chaunt of the fight, closely followed by the pealing bass of

triumph echoing from ten thousand merciless throats, forming altogether

the very embodying of savage exultation.

129. Their church music is most execrable; although seven long

years are passed in its acquisition, and the constant practice of many

hours during the day ought to make them somewhat more perfect.

Howling and screaming, however, are the most appropriate terms to be

employed for this ceremony, and the hoarse cracked voice of the priest,

increasing in fury as he progresses in his task, is in true keeping with

the jingle of the “‘dtsnassil,’* the Abyssinian timbrel, which in its

startling effect, can be compared to nought but the rattle of the

poker upon the tongs.

130. From four in the morning until nine of the Sabbath, this clatter

and ranting is continued for the honor of their religion in all the

churches of the kingdom, besides a full muster of their croaking

choristers on all their numerous holidays and festivals; and the band

of stout priests who nightly mount guard to preserve His Majesty

by their song from the influence of evil demons, have certainly chosen

a cunning path to prevent the advent of, at least, all those spirits who

are gifted with any musical taste.

* This is the ‘‘sistrum”’ which is thought to be included under the Hebrew term

“*Tzitzelem,”’ and is composed of a frame of sonorous metal crossed by bars of the same ;

these bars move freely in the holes through which they are passed, and when the instru-

ment is shaken, the reverted ends striking upon the frame produce the clattering sound.

664 ; Report on Shoa [No. 140.

131. The attending dance of the priesthood is any thing but a

relief to the picture ; the most uncouth attitudes and the most ungrace-

ful positions are selected, whilst the beard and the crutch and the

aged face are but in ill keeping with the mountebank jumps and

capers performed upon the occasion. During the merry-makings in

the palace and in the houses of the chiefs, the dance is also not dis-

tinguished by any less ludicrous effects, the votary seemingly enacting

the part of a gander justly infuriated at the discordant sound of the

music, shaking his wings and hissing in contempt of the fiddler’s

art, whilst he shuffles about in a crouching position, and makes sundry

furious rushings and startings to possess himself of the obnoxious

instrument.

182. The language of savages is generally highly metaphorical,

and they are not satisfied unless action be embodied to the eye by

color and character and form brought more vividly to the mind by

the assistance of allegory, but this nation is equally unsuccessful in

the personification of the spiritual, as in the abstract language of

Theology.

The king and his chief singer form the only exceptions, the court

language being sparingly sprinkled with a few flowery speeches, and

the singer sometimes breaking out into crude allegorical sentences.

“* Why should the Father of song be restrained from dancing before

the fathers of gold,” he exclaimed when capering before the embassy

on the steps of the palace, and the saying was responded to with

shouts from the populace; but the topics of discourse are always

scanty among an uneducated race, and after the daily salutations are

performed, nothing can be more rapidly stupid than the succeeding

conversations of the native of Shoa.

133. Few but the priests and deptras can read or write, and many

among those learned scribes are more indebted to the memory of

their early youth, than to the page held in their hands for the forth-

coming rant.

134. The ancient Ethiopic, which is also called Gees, remained

the language of the empire only until the 14th century of our era, and

in this idiom are written all the annals of her religion. It has now,

however, fallen into disuse, and the people of Tigri alone retain one of —

its dialects. Amhara is generally spoken throughout the country.

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 665

135. The stores of literature being thus bound up in a dead letter,

mistakes and false readings cannot be discovered in the low mumble of

the officiating priest by the bystanders, who are alike ignorant of the

text and the language; nor is the course of study of that extended or

liberal nature to enlarge the mind of the neophyte. To know the

Psalms of David by rote, together with the miracles of the Virgin Mary

and Saint Tsela Huimandt, to elevate the voice into howling song, and

to cut a caper into the air two feet above the surface of the earth, form-

ing the envied accomplishments of the man of education.

136. Parchment is said to have been invented at Pergamos when the

Egyptian monarch prohibited the exportation of papyrus. The Jews

very early availed themselves of the Charta Pergamora to write their

scriptures upon: the roll is still used in their synagogues, and was intro-

duced into Abyssinia on the Hebrew emigration, where it still continues

the only material in the country ; but all the books extant are composed

of many small leaves fastened one upon the other, enclosed between

wooden boards, and carefully deposited in leathern sacks; many are

embellished with glaring colored daubs, and all are looked upon with

the eye of superstitious credulity.

137. The epistolary correspondence* is exceedingly laconic; the

letters are folded up into small rolls, varying in size from one inch to

four, and always enclosed in a coating of wax ; there is neither signature

nor superscription. The king possesses a signet seal, which is however

seldom applied, as the names of all parties are introduced into the body

of the note.

138. The pen is the reed, kulum of the East, without the slit, and

the inkstand is the sharp end of a cow’s horn, which is stuck in the

ground as the scribe squats to his work ; the ink is a foreign importa-

tion from the Somauli coast, and remains an intense black for ages, and

the writer when he wishes to replenish his horn, inserts a few particles

from his pocket, and adding a little liquid, produces a consistency similar

in thickness to that used in printing.

* May this letter of queen Bezabesh come to my friend the English Ambassador.

Are you well? Are you quite well? Are you perfectly well ?

That the soap may not end speedily, you will send it in large quantities, saith

Bezabesh.

666 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

139. But the Abyssinian scribes do not hold the pen of a ready

writer, and the dilatory management of their awkward instrument is at-

tended with gestures and attitudes most distressingly ludicrous, clutch- |

ing the tiny style like a hot apple in the paws of a hungry ape. It is

carried with the most convulsive twitches, and seemingly by some

supernatural force to the mouth of the writer, where the end is seized

between the teeth and masticated, in a sort of mental phrenzy. During

the whole period of this strange operation, the thin strip of dirty vellum

is held at arms-length and viewed askance from every side, with looks

of utter horror and dismay, and when at last the stick descends to dig

its furrow upon the parchment, no terrified school-boy with the birch

of the master hanging over his devoted head, ever took such pains in

pointing the most elaborate pot-hook, as does the Abyssinian scribe in

daubing his strange characters upon the scroll.

140. Like the Chinaman, each individual letter must be looked at

from every point of view, before progressing to the next; every word

must be read again and again by the delighted artist, and the greasy

skin must be many times turned upside down by the grinning penman

proud of his talents, to observe the happy effect of his handy-work.

141. During the intervals of approval, the destructive bites continue

fast and fierce, to the utter demolition of the pencil ; and long before the

termination of the first sentence, European patience is apt to become

utterly exhausted at the scene of awkward, foolish stupidity, and gross

waste of valuable time. Seventeen years have been employed in tran-

scribing a single manuscript, and a common epistle of five lines is the

utmost extent of one entire day’s exertion.

142. The following list gives the names of all the books at present

in existence in Abyssinia. Tradition, however, records the titles of other

works, which were deposited for safety in the islands in the Lake Zoo-ai,

on the great invasion of Gragno, and which are said to exist with many

other precious treasures of Ethiopia even unto this day.

1. All parts of the Old Testament, excepting the Pentateuch and the

Books of the Maccabees.

2. The four Gospels with readings.

3. Chrysostom. Biography and Exposition of the Epistle to the

Hebrews.

4. A dogmatical work of Cyril.

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 667

Qo.

Genset. A book used in funeral solemnities, and ascribed to Atha-

nasius.

. Tethonegest. The code of Laws, said to have fallen from heaven.

. Aclements.

. Retuattaunanot. The Orthodox Faith.

. Siena Aibud. History of the Jews in connection with the History

of other ancient nations.

- Mazopu. Extract from Ancient Philosophy.

- Henosh. The Prophecies of Henosh.

. Gadela Nudual. History of St. Michael.

. Gadela zida Heimanot. Life of the Tecla Heimanot, the Saint.

. Gadola Siena Markoo. Life of another Saint.

. Gadela Gintra Maafao Kedus St. Zl.

. Gadela Lalsbala. Life of a former emperor of Ethiopia.

. Masgaba Haimanot. A dogmatical work.

. Synodos. Canons of the Church, attributed to the Apostles.

. Antiacos. Colloquy between Athanasius land a Nobleman called

Antiakos.

. Mazafa Mister. The principles of several Heretics of old.

. Mazafa Dora.

. Mazafa Timkal. Used in Christening.

. Mazafa Actil. Used in blessing a Marriage.

. Mazafa Keder. Used for instructing Renegades.

. Gusbra Haimanot. Read during Passion Week.

. Bartos.

. Dionasios.

. Teena Tetrak (Amharic.) Explanation of the Creation.

. Tamera a Miriam. Miracles of the Holy Virgin.

. Magara Miriam, Words of ditto ditto.

. Godela Hawarjat. Lives of the Apostles,

. Ardeet. Words said to have been spoken by Christ before his

Ascension.

. Kedasie. Liturgy of the Abyssinian Church.

. Wuddassie Miriam. Praise to the Holy Virgin.

. Arganon.

. Gadela Samactal. Lives of the Martyrs.

. Abushukur. Abyssinian Almanac.

668

Report on Shoa [No. 140.

. Gadela Adam. History of Adam.

. Kidan.

. Egsiabher Neges. _

. Anda Negest. Book for Prognostication : forbidden in Shoa.

. Sadela Medhanalim. Life of the Saviour.

. Amida Mister (Amharic.) The Principal Doctrines of the Christian

Church.

. Temhest. Extracts.

. Kufalik. Words spoken to Moses on Mount Sinai.

. Mazafa Gragore (Amharic.) History of the invader Gragno.

. Serata Breta. Christian Institutions ef the Christian Church.

. Mewaset. Hymns on Mournful occasions.

. Zema Degna. Hymns sung during Fast times.

. Degna, Hymns sung on other occasions.

. Lifafa Zedik. A Book of absurd Contests, much esteemed, and

buried along with the Corpse.

. Ekabari. Book of Prayers.

. Zelota Musa. Prayers of Moses against the influence of Evil

Spirits.

. Melka Michael. Prayers to St. Michael.

. Melka Ijesus. Prayers to Jesus and the Holy Virgin.

. Gadela Araga. Life of an Abyssinian Saint.

. Gadela Kyros. Ditto ditto

. Gadela Johani. Ditto ditto

. Kotat of the 318 Fathers.

. Maala Saalat. Prayers and Hymns for different hours of the

day.

. Wuddassie Amlac. Praise of God.

. Mazafa Tornal. A letter which Christ is said to have written.

. Surguamie Fidel (Amharic.)

. Melka Gabriel. Prayers to St. Gabriel.

. Swaso. Abyssinian Dictionary.

. Germana. Prayers to frighten Evil Spirits.

. Fans Manfasawi.

. Dersana Sanbat. Life of a Saint.

. Tekarie Ijesus. Christ’s prophecy of the consummation of the

World.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 669

70.

71.

72.

73.

74.

76.

a7.

78.

ia:

80.

81.

82.

83.

84.

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

100.

101.

102.

103.

104.

105.

106.

Mazafa Shekeneat.

Tecla Zeon.

Harmanot ab. Doctrines of the Abyssinian Church.

Gadela Antonino. Life of the Monk Antony.

Zelota Musadud. Prayers against Evil Spirits.

Dezsona Gabriel. History of St. Gabriel.

Gadela Georgio. Life of St. George.

Selota Monakosat. Prayers of the Monks.

Felekosus. Book of Monking.

Marishak. Book of Monkery.

Aragawi Manfasawi. Ditto ditto.

Dersana Mahajawi. Life of the Life-giver.

Gadela Saunel. .

Siena Aban.

Gebin Negest.

Geea Moie.

Epiphanius.

Aximarius.

Buni.

Synkesar.

Mazafa Berhanet.

Lowros.

Deduskalea.

Tamera Ijesus,

Ankoritos.

Mazafa Ishai.

Teliksiny.

Mistera Samai.

Georgis Waloea Amid.

Dersana Miriam.

Lik Evangel.

Taretch.

Gadela job.

Thomas Koprianos.

Gadela Keduson.

Gadela Arsemaror.

Raia Miriam.

670 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

107. Gadela Abeb.

108. Gadela Makod Walale.

109. Gadela Guebru Christas.

110. Abicta Natrat.

148. Such is the accumulated literature of ages, and in the mass

there are only four written in the language at present spoken and un-

derstood. His Majesty possesses a large assortment of manuscripts sel-

dom referred to, and indeed with the exception of the Holy Scriptures,

the remnant is but a tissue of absurd Church controversy, and lying

monkish legends.

144. Thirty days constitute a month, to which five days and the fourth

part of a day are added to complete the year; this interpolation is called

“ quagmin,” and is introduced after the month of September, the 9th

day of which, according to our style, commences the Abyssinian year.

The year is also divided into four quarters, each being named after the

Gospel, which ought to be at that season reading in the churches. From

September to November, Luke gives name to the period; from December

to February, John; from March till May, Matthew; and during the re-

maining months, Mark. Events are commonly referred to as having

occurred during the days of Matthew, &c., but they have lost eight years

in their computations of time, and our present Christian era of 1842,

has only reached to 1833 of Abyssinian reckoning.*

145. Superstitious to a degree, the Abyssinian will undertake no ex-

pedition or serious journey without, in the first instance, receiving the

desired omen of approbation from on high, and retracing their steps on

various pretences, they remain in their houses for days until the welcome

sign be witnessed. The sight of a hare is very bad indeed ; an antelope

springing across the road, good; a fox barking on the left hand, destroys

all hope of a happy result; but on the right hand, a prosperous issue

may be expected; but of all the numerous birds of ill fame, is the ‘‘Goo-

rasovula.” (?) Certain death or destruction, or the most dire disaster

are certain to follow his croak, and there is no inhabitant in the king-

dom, who has not some story to confirm the bad character of this evil

bird. The fool-hardy wight, who giveth no heed to the warning note

* Giving the world an existence of 7334 years, they calculate that our Saviour was

born in the year 5,500 after the Creation, and thus account for their deficiency.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 671

being of a certainty either baulked in the object of his journey, robbed,

maltreated, or murdered.

146. Savage man obtaining only through the medium of his own

wishes and imagination a faint idea of the invisible and supreme Power,

seeks for some tangible object of veneration and means of protection,

and the Abyssinian, whose vague religious ideas afford him but small

consolation in the hour of tribulation, and little reliance of security in the

day of danger, reposes the utmost faith in the doctrine of charms,

which present a substance stamped with a mystic and supernatural

character, and capable of being attached to himself individually. The

“< tulsim,” which is a worked zone studded with tiny leathern pockets,

containing sacred charms enclosed in double and treble cases, encircles

the waist of every man, woman and child in the kingdom ; the arms and

neck are also hung in a perfect panoply of amulets against the influence

of every disease, whether experienced or anticipated ; the written talis-

mans of holy monks, mixed with the seed and leaves of potent witch

plants, gathered by the hand of the forest recluse, afford a feeling of

security which is not to be extracted from the leaves of the Gospel; and

no one ever thinks of mounting his mule, without being well stored with

these paper preservatives against the spear of the robber, or the sharp

knife of the Galla.

147. On the first arrival of the Embassy on the frontier, the simple

natives on their knees implored the gift of the anxiously desired charm

against the charge of the dreaded lion, and the king himself, by no

means free from the prevailing superstition, had in his possession two

talismans, which till lately he considered of high dread and import; they

were inscribed on parchment in the French language, one containing a

portion of the Lord’s Prayer, and the other the words, ‘‘ May God open

the eyes of Sabela Selassie to his errors.”

148. Their superstitions are childish as they are numerous. They

believe in the evil eye, in the existence of evil spirits who roam about

the earth and waters, and in every description of omen, and the igno-

rance of many is passing strange, considering St. Michael to be God Al-

mighty ; the Virgin Mary the creatoress of the world ; and Sunday, to have

_ been a saint of great sanctity, far superior to St. George or St. Michael,

which has ensured for him one day in seven to be held holy to his name,

whilst the others have their festivals only once during the month.

672 ) Report on Shoa [No. 140.

149. Eclipses of the sun or moon, as in other savage countries, afford

an ample opportunity for the most abject superstition. They believe the

orb to be dead, and that her demise prognosticates war, famine and pes-

tilence. The whole town is in tumult and uproar, collecting together in

the streets and churches, they cry aloud upon the Saviour of the world to

take pity upon them, to screen them from the wrath of God, and to

cover them with a veil of mercy for the sake of Mary, the mother of our

Lord. The pagan Galla, who are present lifting up their voices, join in the

petition, and from their not comprehending the Amhara tongue, render

the most absurd construction on the prayer; the wailing continues dur-

ing the whole period of obscuration, and when the orb again emerges, a

universal shout of joy is raised, in the full belief that the prayers of the

multitude have awakened her from the sleep of death. Any neglect

on their part, of these accustomed exertions, is certain to be followed by

some great public calamity, and the raining down of fire from heaven.

150. The “ beza,” or sacrifice for the sick, is considered lawful and

efficacious, and is frequently resorted to; the animal which is meant as

the type of the sick man is driven round the bed of the invalid amidst

much noise and singing, and afterwards slaughtered outside the thres- —

hold, and at other times, an egg is turned three times towards the head —

of the patient, and then broken besides the bed.

151. Whilst no religion can be more corrupt than the nominal

Christianity of this unhappy nation, which is a mass of absurdities bor-

rowed from the Jew, the Moslem and the Pagan, nothing can be more

humiliating than the superstition which it encourages. A thread of cotton

yarn is stretched by the hired sorcerer during the night completely round

the house, the extremities are fastened together by means of a link of iron,

well imbued in blood, and the walls are freely sprinkled and bedaubed with

gore,the day dawns upon the incantation which is supposed to be the work

of the devil himself; and of the assembled multitude, who consider that |

some heavy calamity, if not instant death, would follow the act, there is

not one individual sufficiently bold to remove the spell, and thus release

the inmates from its withering effects. On one occasion, when the inha-

bitants of Ankobar were thrown into the greatest consternation by the |

dread appearance of the bloody finger, the Reverend Mr. Kraff tore

away the charm, to the astonishment of all, without any fatal consequence

to himself; but that very night the defeated sorcerer planned an attack

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 673

to rob his premises, which was only defeated by the extra vigilance

preserved in consequence of having exposed the impostor.

152. No Amhara will venture to destroy a serpent save on Saturday

and Sunday, when the sight of one of these reptiles is regarded as a fa-

vyourable omen. In common with the heathen Galla, the Christians of

Shoa make annual votive sacrifices in June to ‘‘ Sar,” the evil spirit,

continuing the practice notwithstanding its being interdicted by royal

proclamation under the penalty of forfeiture of property. Three men and

a woman, who understand how to deal with the evil one having assem-

bled at the place appointed, perform the ceremony in a newly swept

house. The sacrifice consists of a ginger coloured hen, a red she-goat

or a male Adaiel goat with a white collar ; the blood of the victim having

been mixed with grease and butter, is secretly placed during the night

in a narrow street, when all who step or tread thereon, are supposed to

receive the maladies of the invalid, who in return is restored to perfect

health. The king perceived traces of this Pagan ceremony in the streets

of Motatiel during a visit to that village some years ago, and tracing it

to a wealthy individual who had caused the rite to be performed in

order to free himself of syphilis, the honor of true religion was forthwith

vindicated by a speedy transfer to the royal coffers of all the property

of the dabbler in unholy rites.

153. The drum of the water kelpie is heard by the credulous na-

tive in the echo of every roaring waterfall, and the wretch drowning in

the overflowing torrent is dragged under the rushing wave as the high-

ly coveted food of the malicious spirit of the deep. Divers plants and

herbs possess the most baneful properties and qualities, and a bunch of

the Fegain grass, if skilfully cast upon the person of an obnoxious

enemy, produces dire disease, sickness and death.

154. Sorcerers and necromancers attaining the respectable age of

4 and 500 years, exist in numbers in this land, flitting through the air

and riding upon the wings of the wind at pleasure, and unbidden and

invisible guests, eating the best and drinking the choicest liquors on the

festive board. | .

_ 155. “ Thavanan,” the great sorcerer of modern days, is looked upon

with universal dread, and his last public act is still fresh in the memory

of the present generation. He had for a long time indulged his palate,

and enjoyed his place unseen at the king’s own table, but being at

674 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

length informed against by one of his malicious fraternity, he was by

means of a strong spell exposed in the fact, and ordered to instant

death. ‘Grant me but my life,” hé exclaimed, “and I will explain to

your Majesty this grand master-stroke of my powerful art.” The

curiosity of the monarch was excited, and a large vessel of water

which had been requested was set before the magician. Placing his

hand in the liquid, he addressed the king: ‘‘ Oh descendant of the race

of Solomon, the wit of thy illustrious father is dull in comparison with

the wisdom of the meanest disciples of Arobal, I defy thy myrmidons

and thyself,” and cleaving the air as he uttered these words, instantane-

ously disappeared from the gaze of the astounded and crest-fallen court.

156. Arobal Mammoo, the king of the Genis, is supposed to reside

in the depths of the large lake in Mans, called Moofat Wuha. In the

bosom of its placid water his palace is placed, construtted of the usual

fairy materials; coloured cloths abound in every apartment, and his

drums are heard pealing from the centre of the lake, when famine, war

or pestilence is about to visit the land. Any one desirous of studying the

black art after destroying his mahtab, (the badge of Christianity,) and

treating the emblem of faith with certain irreverences, proceeds into the

depths of the waters, is met by the genius, and kindly instructed in the

arts of magic and necromancy ; after a laspe of time he resumes his blue

silk cord and is suffered for a time to exercise his supernatural power

upon earth, but his knowledge gradually decays, it cannot be resumed, —

and the sorcerer again sinks into the uninteresting character of an

Abyssinian Christian, without even the usual conclusion of having lost

his soul, or being in the end carried away in the talons of the foul

fiend.

157. It is fully believed, that one of Arobal’s disciples succeeded

by the power of his medicines in transferring all Asfa Wassun’s con-

cubines to his own harem, and having been seized and remonstrated

with on the gross impropriety of his conduct, he behaved in the most in-

solent manner, and referred the proceeding entirely to the high as-

sistance of his friend, the genius of the lake. In his extremity, he was

deserted by the spirit, and the crim. con. being fully established, he was

put to death by order of the king, and the misguided ladies brought

back in durance vile to the palace ; but his character for subtle medicines

was fully established, as one of the concubines shortly afterwards de-

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 675

prived the monarch of his eye-sight by means of a powerful spell, which

had been imparted by her learned paramour.

158. But the enchanted village of ‘“ Daska Stephanas,” hid from

mortal gaze, and enclosing upon earth all the pleasures of paradise,

forms the never-failing topic of all wonder-loving souls; the poetic fancy

of Abyssinia has been utterly exhausted in depicting this rare scene

of delight.

159. “Its sleep-soothing groves with lawns between, are situated

on the Nile, where released from the loose shackles of all marriages

whatever, beautiful females are plentiful as they are common. Potent

liquors flow on in never-ending streams, and the earth yields her

spontaneous fruits without care or labour. But shrouded in the magic

mist, these Elysian fields open their portals only to mortals of command-

ing form and handsome feature, on whom the glance of favor has been

cast by the fair inmates of the enchanted garden ; human endeavour is of

no avail to unriddle the mystery, and the dread art of the sorcerer and

his most powerful talismans, are alike unavailing to unloose the spell

for the benefit of any of those unfortunates on whom nature has bestow-

ed a tortuous figure, or an ill-starred visage.”’

160. The blacksmith is also endowed with supernatural powers by

the credulous Abyssinians, and is supposed to be able to transform him-

self at pleasure into the likeness of a wolf or hyena; the cunning prac-

tice being in common use amongst the craft of secretly encasing the

whelp of one of these animals in a metal collar, which being retained in

after life, strengthens in the eyes of the uninitiated the fabulous stories

in circulation.

161. The presence of any Christian emblem, badge, or portion of the

Holy Scripture is supposed to neutralize the handicraft of the dreaded

artist. The metal cannot be wielded in sight of the cross, and will by no

means assume the required design, should any scrap of the Bible be

worn on the person of the bye-stander. Whilst fumbling with their

imperfect instruments to transform a bar of iron into the necessary re-

pair of one of the galloper guns, the small draft of air which proceeded

from the tiny bellows, proved insufficient to heat the metal, and the na-

tive artists’ smelters declared aloud, that the phenomenon was conse-

quent on the presence of some holy charm. Badges and emblems,

charms and amulets were incontinently stripped off by all; the labour

676 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

was renewed without any better effect, and the smiths stood aghast at

the enchanted bar which would not become heated.

162. The large forge bellows of the Embassy was produced, and a

sufficient blast being obtained, the assembly were ordered to don all

their paper preservatives and stand round the anvil, the sparks now flew

under the brawny arm of the European, and the job was forthwith complet-

ed, to the utter dismay of the Abyssinian magicians, who came privately

to request, that no further public performance of the sort might hence-

forth take place, as their name and glory would entirely depart from

the land.

163. Sickness and misfortune are attributed to the effects of the evil

eye of the Bondak. Long consultations are held to discover the person

whose sinister look has imparted the calamity, and when the suspicions

have gradually settled into conviction, the most implacable hatred is ever

afterwards entertained towards the dreaded personage, and although

concealed under the guise of indifference, which the savage can so suc-

cessfully assume, yet the opportunity of revenge is never lost sight of,

and the sweet morsel is obtained in some underhand dealing of after-life.

Dedjmateh Harloo, the father of the Dedjmateh-ou-lie, added much to his

notoriety by the extermination of all the Bondaks he could lay hands upon.

Superstition exulted in a reeking hecatomb of human victims, and the love

and veneration of his subjects knew no bounds on his last summary act

of collecting together, and roasting to death 1800 of these miserable

wretches, who were supposed to possess the influence of the evil eye.

164. The Abyssinian contrives to fill up his craving stomach, and in

general possesses a sufficiency of covering to preserve him, after his

fashion, from the inclemency of the weather. The climate is indifferently

good, and the earth yields her treasures without much fatigue or bodily

exertion, but the food is not of the best description, the style of life and

habitation most uncomfortable, and all combine to engender the seeds

of disease and death, and to reduce the limit of existence to less

than three score years and ten.

165. Elephantiasis is known in its most loathsome forms. Ophthalmia

seems to be common, and syphilis is met with in some shape or other

on every second individual. Leprosy is rife among the community, and

the mountainous nature of the country renders the atmosphere suffi-

ciently damp and cold for the location of rheumatism and catarrh ;

1843. | and the Abyssinian Church. 677

altogether the inhabitants are decidedly open to all the ills to which

flesh is certain heir in the most favored part of the globe, and they

do not possess the more civilized means of alleviation.

166. Medicine is yet im its infancy, and charms and amulets, and

sacrifices are resorted to, in the hour of sickness. The potent purgative,

cosso, is applied to on almost every occasion, and its debilitating effects

no doubt lead to shorten life. Paddling about in the mud with naked

feet, and exposing the bare head to the sun, the blast and the tempest

without any reference even to comfort, cannot prove conducive to

health, and residing in frail fragile tenements amidst dirt and vermin,

and surrounded by filth and putrefaction, must have the most injurious

effect upon the constitution. The low regard with which all females are

entertained, debars the enjoyment of conjugal affection. The want of

education denies the profitable and pleasant employment of leisure

time. Coarse fare is the general lot; little amusement or holiday vary

the dull monotony of life, and bullied by the Church, the king, and the

nobles, a short existence is passed in this world in no very great happi-

ness or comfort, and the spirit passes away without any very distinct

idea of what is to happen in the next.

167. Compared with the other nations in Africa, Abyssinia certainly

holds a high station, superior in arts and agriculture, in law, religion

and social condition to all the other benighted swarthy children of the sun,

and the portion of good which does exist, may be justly ascribed to

the remains of the wreck of Christianity, which although stranded

upon a rocky shore, and buffeted by the storms of ages, still continues

to contain a few precious gems amidst the overwhelming mass of

sand and sea spume.

168. But the misery, the filth, and the moral degradation in which she

vegetates, sinks her far below the level of any European nation, and the

parent land remains obscured in the fogs of her original barbarity,

whilst the morning sun of intelligence has in the mean time lightened

upon the social existence of her remote colony:* nay she has even

* Customs rarely alter in a country so entirely isolated as Abyssinia, and where the

influence of new ideas cannot lead to the perfection of the arts and sciences, and many

of the present usages in the land would, in some measure prove what the Ethiopians

affirmed in the time of Diodorus, that Egypt was originally one of her colonies; the

very soil and earth being brought down from their plateaus by the flood of the Nile,

678 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

retrograded from her pristine state, and the great empire of Ethiopia has

long since cracked and fallen to pieces. The shadow ofa mighty name,

the pagans have overrun her fairest provinces. The Christian chiefs

of every district madly strive for superiority, and the great horrors

of war are only averted by the imbecility of the national character,

Still monks and priests and aged men are wantonly put to death.

Houses and villages sacked and destroyed, and the stream of oppression

rises hot and heavy from every quarter of this distracted country. The

property, the liberty, and the reputation of the subject are entirely at

the caprice of the ruler, domestic ties and affection are little known

or understood; small comfort is enjoyed in the transactions of private

life; the debasing effect of extended slavery holds firm footing upon

the mind; superstition shrouds the land in her thick veil; and the day

seems to be yet far distant, when she shall stretch out her hands to

heaven, and be at peace with her Maker.

169. In arts, in industry, and in moral existence, Abyssinian Shoa

remains indeed secluded in a dense cloud of darkness; her agriculture

is the only redeeming feature, but the fertility of the soil is rather

to be praised, than any great advances she has hitherto made in the

science of husbandry.

170. Manufactures are restricted to the supply of the most simple

wants: a coarse cotton cloth to cover nakedness, a skin of leather |

to serve as a bed, a mat basket to contain the most necessary food. The |

gold and silver ornaments are certainly made with some taste, but being |

solely for the benefit of one individual, cannot be thrown into the balance |

of the national account, and the little that is understood extraction of the |

metal from the earth evinces great imperfection of talent.

and there existing at that time a striking resemblance in many of the customs and |

laws of the two nations, each giving the title of Deity to their kings. The funerals in |

either country being performed with equal care and splendour; the writing in usage |

being the same in both countries; and the knowledge of the written character retained |

solely among those belonging to the priesthood. In both countries there are monaste- |

ries and religious colleges organized after a similar fashion, and those who are con- |

secrated to the service of God, are supposed to practice the same rules of abstinence |

and sanctity ; they are dressed alike, and have shaven heads, their kings wear the same

description of robes and ornaments. The hair of the commoners is still dressed after |

the fashion depicted in the ancient Egyptian designs, and the use of sandals fabrica- |

ted of leaves, which is recorded in ancient Egyptian story, is to this day extant im j

Abyssinia.

1843.) and the Abyssinian Church. 679

171. The difficulties and perils of the journey, and the unsettled

state of the country, oblige to travel in caravans, and the slow tramp of

the wearied mule, and the foot-sore slave, render commercial inter-

course dilatory and of rare occurrence. Salt its still the great staple

of importation, together with a few beads and course Arabian manu-

factures, and the return, which is made in grain, cloth and slaves.

is certainly neither to the profit, nor to the increased enlightenment

of the Abyssinian.

172. All the accommodations of life are simple and limited ; the houses

are mere stakes badly plastered with earth, and afford little shelter

from the elements, while the internal arrangements are equally rude

and scanty.

173. The intellectual features present a peculiar deficiency. Few can

read the character, and still fewer understand the meaning of the manu-

script. The educated priests for the most part learn like the parrot, by

rote, and rant at the top of their lungs, passages of which they know

not the sense. ‘The utter ignorance of the laity is truly deplorable : few

can spell out a line during an hour’s severe exertion, and none can

write three words together. Their books are all of a sacred nature,

and being written in an unknown language, are looked upon in the

light of charms, specially if well bound and filled with pictures ; and

although the kiss of debasing superstition be imprinted upon the

colored daub, the intellectual vision remains unlit by the words of the

text.

174. Poetry and painting are in their veriest infancy. Music has been

ushered into existence a deformed monster; and architecture still re-

mains unbegotten in the dark abyss of Abyssinian ignorance.

175. In religion they are debased, superstitious, and bigotted, be-

lieving the most absurd and ridiculous doctrines, and resting their

only hope of salvation on fasts and pilgrimage, on confession and

priestly absolution.

176. In private life their character is equally despicable, and they

have strangely contrived to accumulate all the vices of civilized as well

as of savage life, and have succeeded in retaining but few of the vir-

tuous traits of either. Nay, their very existence is the vegetation of a

noxious weed in the foul kennel ; but the refinements of civilized society

have not as yet supplied the beauties of original simplicity. The box of

| *

680 Report on Shoa [No. 140,

Pandora has indeed been doubly locked after allowing all the scourges”

of mankind to escape with their full muster of attendants, and all the

horrors of savage warfare, of merciless slavery, and of debasing despotism

\ : \

ride triumphant over the land.

177. Cowards, fanatics and liars ; cruel, superstitious and profligate ; |

proud of their deformities, and constant only in their inconstancy, they —

are bullies and beggars of the most transcendant character, whilst their

dirty unclean habits render them a perfect nuisance to all with whom

they come in contact ; glorying in the most savage, revolting and barba-

rous practices, which are hardly credible, except to eye-witnesses, their life

is at complete variance with all the ordinary customs of other people.

Brutalizing, like wild beasts on raw bloody flesh, when others have

adopted the spit and the kitchen fire; wearing no protection on the

head and their feet, when all others having long since proclaimed

the necessity of the covering ; exposing their naked persons as a sign

of respect, contrary to every received law of shame, and existing in all

the filth of unwashed persons and dark unswept hovels, they have

indeed but little cause for the inordinate self-pride in which they

hyperbolically style their petty location the finest of countries, and its

unclean inhabitants, the only true Christians in the world.

History of the Abyssinian Church.—English Missions.

The departure of the Jesuit Patriarch was followed by a fierce perse-

cution of all who were in any degree tainted by the abhorred faith of —

the Romans, and the last legacy of the western priest proved a fatal

gift to the possessor. Suspected individuals wherever found were im-

mediately put to death, and in accordance with the earnest entreaties

of the population, and with the long established usage of Ethiopia, a

new Abuna was appointed from Egypt, to preside over the ancient reli-

gion, now firmly re-established throughout the land.

But the failure of the ambitious designs of the Church of Rome had

in Europe been entirely ascribed to the arrogance and cruelty of the

emissaries employed, which had created so deep and lasting a hatred

among the mass of the inhabitants; and the milder order of French

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 681

Capuchins was accordingly put in requisition to bring about the desired

re-union with the heretic church of Abyssinia. Six chosen men of the

order, fully provided with the firmans of protection from the court of

Constantinople, were first entrusted with the enterprize during the mid-

dle of the seventeenth century, of these four succeeded in penetrating

into the country, but only to suffer the martyrdom of St. Stephen, and

the remaining two, terrified at the fate of their unfortunate brethren, re-

turned without hope of success to their monastery in France.

The zeal of the order nevertheless made one further effort in the

cause, and again three doomed friars landed at Suakem, whence they

despatched a letter to congratulate the Emperor on their safe arrival in

his vicinity. Instead, however, of the anticipated presents, and means

of conveyance to the court, an order for their execution was received

by the governor of the town, and the stuffed heads of the fathers were

forwarded for inspection, that the fair skin and the tonsure of the fo-

reign priest might be fully recognized, and the promised reward be claim-

ed by the inhospitable Pacha of the Coast.

Poucet’s interesting descriptions still remain to commemorate a further

quest which in 1700 was undertaken, in company with a member of the

Society of Jesus; but the partner of his journey died in Nubia, and

many doubts have been reasonably entertained regarding the truth of

the physician’s narrative. Matters are painted with more than tra-

vellers’ license, and the imagination freely drawn upon for facts that

never existed. The close of his career also served to throw a deep

shade of disbelief over the minds of even the most credulous; for after

receiving from the French monarch magnificent presents for the

Emperor and Court of Abyssinia, he crossed the Red Sea, and penetrat-

ing into Persia, died at Ispahan, with the character of being a perfect

impostor.

A last attempt was made a few years subsequently by Pope Clement

XI, and four German Franciscans were despatched in the cause of Rome

to the country of the intractable Abyssinian. The poverty of these

Missionaries, and the humility with which they refused all temporal

wealth, touched the heart of the reigning emperor, and although he

forbade them to preach in public, he pledged himself to protect their

lives and promote the cause of their mission. “ Your workis difficult,”

said the monarch, ‘‘ it demands time, and you must be prudent, and not

: 4u

}

682 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

arouse the prejudices of the people ; God did not create the world in one

moment, but in six days.”

Finding secret admission into the houses of many individuals, the

Jesuits were beginning to gain ground, when the monks and clergy,

who had suffered the most severely during the former struggle, raised

an outcry, that the Europeans were the enemies of the Mother of God,

and had blasphemed her holy name. The tumult became universal,

and a powerful conspiracy was arranged to poison the friars, and

dethrone the emperor. David, a young prince of the imperial family

was called to the throne, and the unfortunate missionaries having been

dragged from their place of concealment, were condemned to forfeit

their lives. 3

On being offered a free pardon if they would abjure the Roman faith,

the last martyrs to the cause indignantly rejected the proposal, and the

young monarch struck with their devotion and endurance under severe

and perilous trial, commanded that they might be banished from the

land ; but the monks preferred stoning them to death, and the event ac-

cordingly took place in the year 1718.

So ended the ardent endeavours to substitute one superstition in the

room of another. Time, and life, and means, had been wantonly expend-

ed, that the triumphant chariot of Rome might grind over the neck of

the Abyssinian ; but the costly sacrifice was impotent, and the ambition

of binding a far country in the fetters of spiritual slavery sunk deserv-

edly to nought.

Another century rolled on before the Christians of the West bestirred

themselves in the cause of enlightenment. The Apostolic Church had

fallen from her high place, and it was reserved for the members of an-

other faith to carry the glad tidings of salvation to the benighted people

of Ethiopia.

The great traveller, Bruce, had now for ever broken the mys-

terious seal of ignorance which had hitherto bound the land as

with an iron zone, and his Abyssinian friend and companion, the

learned Abraham, after ten years of patient industry, had completed |

his pious labours. A translation of the Holy Scriptures was faithfully

rendered into the popular language of the country, and the precious

document was purchased in 1818, by the Bible Society of Great |

Britain.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 688

The Reverend Messrs. Gobat and Kugler first penetrated into north-

ern Abyssinia, and established their residence at Adowa, and the Reverend

Messrs. Kraff and Isenberg, followed in the same path.

The words of the true Gospel were listened to by the natives with

every attention, and amidst a scene of universal corruption, the pure

lives of the preachers were beheld with amazement. But intrigue and

foreign influence produced a revulsion in the mind of Aubie, the tyrant

prince of Tigré, and the order for departure to the coast was enforced

by the governor of the town, who was anxious to possess himself of

property, that could not be removed from his avaricious grasp. Their

names, nevertheless, remain in the land, and to this day the English

missionaries are spoken of with the greatest reverence, as possessing

every quality that was good, mild, and just.

Ardent zeal in the cause of Christianity again induced Messrs. Isen-

berg and Kraff to brave the dangers of an unexplored route through

the fiery desert of the inhospitable Adaiel, and to endure the foul an-

noyance of a savage existence. The kingdom of Shoa now forms

the theatre of their praiseworthy exertions. Dogmatical treatises

have been ably penned in the vernacular language of the country; a

school in the capital extends to the rising generation the means of im-

provement, and the example of a holy life will no doubt produce a

happy effect.

But the uphill task of the missionary is indeed hard, and the wonder

is, that any thing has been accomplished, and not that the harvest is

scanty. Disliked as a stranger of envied accomplishments, despised as

an alien to the land, and hated by the ignorant and bigotted priesthood,

the words of truth fall unheeded from lips the most eloquent, and the

most zealous endeavours prove of little avail. Perfectly satisfied with

his own creed, the Abyssinian finds it easier to kiss the holy book than

to peruse its contents, and to trust to the priestly absolution, instead of

moulding his conduct according to the doctrines of pure faith. The

rude artizan is esteemed of higher importance than the erudite Mis-

sionary, and blinded by the grossest superstition, engulphed in a sink

of bestiality, and wedded to the manners, the customs, and the doctrines

_ which are diametrically opposed to the evidences of the Gospel, it is not

until the arts of civilized society shall have been introduced, and the

neck of the self-sufficient Abyssinian bent under the superiority of the

684 Report on Shoa [No. 146.

stranger, that the barrier can be finally overcome, and one step be

gained towards the restoration of the unhappy country of the true

word of God.

The constitution of the church, the second great power of Shoa, is

simple, and the sway over the public mind seems to be the effect rather

of individual power than of a public body. Few lay men attend a

chapel unless on the festival of their own saint ; but all present offerings

according to their means, and whilst few peruse the Holy Scriptures,

every great man entertains in his house a priest in the capacity of

father Confessor. In every clerical conclave, the king possesses the

supreme voice of authority, and as from him proceeds, in a principal

measure, not only the more temporal comforts of bread, beef and hydro-

mel, but also punishments for real or fancied delinquency ; the despotic

monarch may here be justly regarded as the head of his own Church.

The Abuna or Archbishop is, however, the real spiritual chief of

Ethiopia; consecrated by the Patriarch of Alexandria, and possessing

with rich revenues, the intelligence of other lands: he is universally

feared and respected throughout the empire, and all religious.differences

and dissensions must be carried for his final decision. Princes and

rulers pay implicit deference to his high behest, and seated on the

ground before his episcopal throne, receive, with the utmost respect,

his every wish and advice.

Feuds and quarrels betwixt state and state are satisfactorily arranged

in his presence, and war, tyranny, and violence are controlled by his

commanding voice of mildness and benevolence. But the extent of his

diocese is great, and many local difficulties oppose the pastoral visit

to the extremities of his See.

The wild Galla, the bigot Moslem, and the pestilential morass, in-

tervene in every direction, and the kingdom of Shoa, peculiarly in-

sulated by these obstacles to access, has for ages been deprived of

the advantages accruing from the residence of an Archbishop.

In the hands of the Abuna are vested the exclusive power of consecra-

tion. Bishops, priests, and deacons can from him alone receive holy

office and function; and before assuming the clerical crook and

cloak, the inhabitants of the most remote provinces must invariably

repair to his court to undergo the requisite examination, and receive

the indispensible blessing and authority. He only it is who grants ab-

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 685

solution for heavy offences against either God or man, and the ark of a

church, whether newly constructed or polluted by the unhallowed touch

of a Mahomedan, must be purified by his hands, with the holy merom, be-

fore being entitled to that high adoration which it thenceforward receives.

The second place in spiritual dignity is filled by the Cheggrie, the

head of the monks, seated on the throne of Tekla Haimanot, one of

the first founders of the orders of seclusion. He engrosses the manage-

ment of all the various monastic establishments throughout the empire,

and in his hand remains the charge of existing literature and edu-

cation. Deeply versed in the subtleties of theology, his opinion is held

of the highest import in the never-ceasing disputes upon the uninterest-

ing subjects of false faith, which occupy the mind of the Abyssinian

divine ; but his authority extends only to the simple admittance into the

monkish order, and to granting absolution for the minor offences of

evil thought and prescribed fasts neglected.

The offices of the Comus, or Bishop, who ranks next above the com-

mon priest are few and simple. Without diocese or even authority

over the inferior members of the Church, his peculiar function is to bless

and purify the sacred ark, should it accidentally receive the impure touch

of the deacon or layman, to repeat the prayer of admission, and sign

the cross on the skull cap of the candidate for the monastic seclusion,

and to afford absolution for trivial offences against the conscience.

Ignorant, bigotted, and licentious, the priesthood of Shoa are restrain-

ed under little rule or authority. The beauty of morality influences

not their conduct, and punishable only by the king, or by their own

brethren vice, excepting of the most flagrant nature, and resounding

through the voice of an incignant people, is screened by the fellow-feel-

ing of the sympathizing judges. Their number and cause might effect

high power in the realm, but indolence and dissolute habits counteract

the influence ; and contented with the outward mark of respect from a

besotted multitude, and enjoying a fair proportion of the good things

of this world, they give little heed for the care of souls, either here or

hereafter. 7 .

But in order to obtain the desired and enviable position of eating the

bread of comparative idleness, a sacrifice is indispensible. The priest

is restricted to the possession of one single wife, and on the demise or

infidelity, no second marriage is authorized.

686 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

A small portion of labour must moreover be endured, the psalms of

David must be carefully conned, and the mysteries of Abyssinian song

and dance be fully penetrated before the sacred office can be obtained.

The lessons of early youth are, however, soon forgotten, and the con-

stant repetition of the same words, removes the necessity of retaining the

character. Few in after-years can read, and still fewer respect the vow of

celibacy ; and the morning hours of the Sabbath and of the holidays, em-

ployed in dancing and shouting within the walls of the church, entitle —

the performer to all immunities, and comforts pertaining to holy orders.

Divine service within the precincts of the sacred edifice is limited to

the delivery of a passage of the Gospel rendered into ancient. Greek, a

language long since dead throughout the land. Psalms are bawled at

the extremity of stout lungs amidst capering and clashing of timbrels ;

the miracles of Saint Mary and of St. George are chaunted, and the

worship is invariably concluded by an equitable division of the conse-

crated bread, which remains from the morning communion.

The rite of baptism is performed in an adjacent building, and the

solemnization of matrimony is rarely resorted to in the land; but the

death and the funeral feast are studiously attended, with much advan-

tage to the temporal interests of the church. The choicest food is un-

sparingly dealt out to all, and the bereaved widow is glad to leave the

management of her affairs to the assiduous father confessor. ‘The dy-

ing man bestows a portion of his estate in this world for the bright

hopes which absolution extends in that which is to come, and the holy

sacrament is even administered after the soul has quitted the tenement

of clay, in order that the superstition of grateful relatives may grant a

rich reward for the blessing of the priest, and his undeniable assurance

of exemption from the pains of punishment hereafter.

Deacons are usually chosen from among children of tender age, and

on reaching maturity the life of the adult is not distinguished by the

spotless purity of his duties in the office. The functions of these juvenile

noviciates are light, it is theirs to be present during Divine service in

the capacity of servitors and assistants, to complete the requisite number

at the celebration of the holy communion, and to guard and preserve the

sacred ark in case of accident by fire or water.

This mysterious. casket is an object of all-engrossing adoration, and

in its presence consists the only sanctity of the church. All prostrate

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 687

themselves to the ground, as the box, which resembles the Jewish ark, is

carried in procession through the street, and when replaced in its case

in the holy of holies the air is rent by the attendant priests with shouts

in the temple of the eternal God.

Fasts, penances, and excommunications form the chief props of the

clerical power ; but the repentant sinner can always purchase a substi-

tute to undergo the two former, and the law of the Church is readily

averted by a timely offering. Spiritual offences are indeed of rare oc-

currence, for murder and sacrilege alone give umbrage to the easy con-

science of the Abyssinian, and all other crimes written in the book of

Christian commandment have been well nigh effaced from the surface of

the tables. The nation is by no means religiously inclined, and the

strict observance of weekly fasts, with suitable largesses to the priest

and mendicant, are quite sufficient to ensure the requisite absolution for

every sin committed in the flesh.

The churches are in general very miserable edifices of wattle and mud

plaster, distinguished from the surrounding hovels by a thin coating of

whitewash, which is dashed over the outside, to point with the finger

of pride to the peculiar privilege of the two great powers in the land.

Circular in form, the wretched thatch is surmounted by grasses glitter-

ing with brass and ostrich eggs, whilst the interior decorations are

guided by the same depraved and heathenish taste.

Eight feet in breadth, the first compartment stretches after the

fashion of a corridor, entirely around the building, and being strewed

throughout with green rushes, forms the scene of morning worship.

To the right of the entrance door is the seat of honor for priests and

erudite scribes, and beyond this court, save on certain occasions, the bare

foot of the unlearned layman cannot pass.

The uncleansed walls are festooned with ancient and dingy cobwebs,

no unappropriate drapery to the wretched daubs which serve to cover

the mud, and are designed to represent St. George and his green dra-

gon, the patron saint of the church, the blessed virgin, and a truly

incongruous assemblage of cherubims and fallen angels, with the evil

one himself enveloped in hell’s flames.

A dark inner compartment forms a last separation from the holy of

holies which contains the sacred ark, and is completely shrouded from

sight by the screens of glaring cotton cloth. Timbrels and crutches de-

688 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

pend in picturesque confusion from the bare rafters of the roof ; no ceil-

ing protects the head from the descent of the lizard and spider ; and the

tout ensemble of the Abyssinian church presents the strongest mixture

of slattern finery and of squalid filth.

Certain revenues and estates are set apart for the support of each

clerical establishment, and to ensure the proper distribution, an Alaha,

or chief, is elected by the monarch from either class of society. Whilst

a successful foray is followed by liberal donations from the throne, the _

safe return from a journey is acknowledged by an offering on the part of —

the private individual, and the shade of the venerable juniper trees which

adorn the church yard, is ever crowded with groups of sleek hooded —

priests, who bask in the enjoyment of idle indulgence. :

Loss of office is the great punishment inflicted by the spiritual

court, which is composed of the assembled members of the individual

church, and degradation is followed by the expulsion of the offending |

brother from the community. But the imperial hall of justice is no

unfrequently graced with the presence of the refractory priest, and

fetters in the dungeon, or banishment from the realm, maintain a

wholesome fear of the royal power of investigation in matters eccle-

siastical. ‘

Monks swarm throughout the land, and the huts of the monasteries

are always pleasantly situated in the depths of some shady forest

around the church dedicated to the patron saint. Fields and revenues :

still remain in the possession of these orders, notwithstanding that the

duties for which they were originally assigned, are now seldom perform- —

ed. Education was in former days to be obtained alone from the inmate :

of the monastic abode ; and a life of scanty food, austerity, and severe

fastings was embraced only by the more enthusiastic. But the skin ~

cloak and the dirty head-dress now envelop the listless monk, who satis-

ficd with a dreamy and indolent existence, basks during the day on the

grassy banks of the sparkling rivulet, and prefers a bare sufficiency of |

coarse fare from the hand of royal charity, to the sweeter morsel earned

by the sweat of his brow. |

The monk is admitted to the order of his choice by any officiating

priest. A prayer is repeated, the skull cap blessed with the sign of the

cross, and the ceremony is complete. But a more imposing rite attends |

the oath of celibacy before the Abuna. Priests assemble in numbers

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 689

and fires are lighted around the person of the candidate. His loins are

bound about with the leathern girdle of St. John, and the prayer and

the requiem for the dead rise pealing from the circle. The Glaswa, a

narrow strip of black cloth adorned with colored crosses, is then placed

on the shaven crown and shrouded from view by the enveloping shawl,

and the Archbishop, clad in his robes of state, having repeated the con-

cluding prayer and blessing, signs with his own hand the emblem of

faith over the various parts of the body.

But Abyssinia possesses no idea of the more salutary doctrines of

Christianity. Polluted faith is here reflected in the mirror of her deprav-

ed manners ; and long, severe fastings constitute the essence of her dege-

nerate religion. The idol worship of saints has made rapid progress in

the land, and the ignorance of her clergy is only to be equalled by the

impurity of the lay classes. Their belief in Christianity, if that term

ean be applied, is strange, childish and inconsistent ; and bigoted to the

faith of their ancestors, they abhor and despise all who refuse to sign

this, their absurd confession.

«That God created all religions in the world and that each is perfect

of its kind except that of the Shankala, but that separate places are

‘prepared for each creed in Heaven.

“That the Alexandrian faith is the only true belief.

“That faith together with Baptism, are sufficient for justification,

but that God demands alms and fasting, as amends for sin committed

prior to the performance of the baptismal rite.

“That unchristened children are not saved.

“That the Baptism of water is the true regeneration.

“That invocation ought to be made to the saints, because sinning

mortals are unworthy to appear in the presence of God, and because if

the saints be well loved, they will listen to all prayer.

“That all sins are forgiven from the moment that the kiss of the

pilgrim is imprinted on the stones of Jerusalem, and that kissing the

hand of a priest, purifies the body from all sin.

“That sins must be confessed to the priest, saints invoked, and full

faith reposed in charms and amulets, more especially if written in an

unknown tongue.

“That prayers for the dead are necessary, and absolution indispensa-

ble ; but that the souls of the departed do not immediately enter upon

690 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

a state of happiness, the period being in exact accordance with the alms

and prayers that are expended upon earth.”

All ideas regarding salvation are indeed vague and indefinite, and

vain, foolish doctrines have taken entire possession of the shallow

thoughts of the Abyssinian. Born in falsehood and deceit, cradled in

bloodshed, and nursed in the arms of idleness and debauchery, the

national character is truly painted in the confession of one of her de-

graded Sons: ‘*‘ Whensoever we behold the pleasing ware, we desire to

steal it, and we are never in the company of a man whom we dislike,

that we do not wish to kill him on the spot.” |

Throughout the land the basest superstition reigns triumphant. The

kiss of adoration is imprinted on the external pillar of the Church,

and men proceed on their way in perfect security of the protection of

the patron saint. The unwilling female is driven to the Communion

Table only as a test to suspected infidelity. The preservation of a fast,

and absolution accorded by a licentious mortal, form the first grand

principles of the religion of Shoa, and it would indeed prove a far easier

task to sweep from off the face of the land, the present meretricious —

fabric, and to raise up a new temple in its stead, than to attempt the —

: Ss 5

Herculean labour of cleansing, as it now stands, the impurities of this —

augean stable. :

(Signed) D. C. Grauanm, Captain,

Principal Assistant to the Embassy.

Rites and Practices of the Abyssinian Church, which appear to have been

adopted from the Jews.

A lengthened detail of all the absurd confusion of doctrines which

prevails in the church of Shoa, would prove neither pleasant nor pro- |

fitable to the reader, and may moreover be perused in the learned disser- |

tations of the Jesuits; but those rites and practices which the Abys- |

sinians appear to have adopted from the Jews, are well worthy of

remark, and we here insert them as a sequel to fill up the blank in the |

foregoing sketch of the Church History.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 691

It is a matter of high importance to separate the manners and cus-

toms which a nation has borrowed, from those that she has produced

during the advance of time within her own pale; and from an adequate

knowledge of her self-activity, some idea may be formed of the station

to which Ethiopia may be admitted within the ranks of civilization;

and of the expectations that may reasonably be entertained in how far

her efforts could be rendered subservient towards the improvement of

the moral and political state of benighted Africa.

Surrounded by many hostile tribes, and secluded from enlightened

intercourse since the capture of the Upper Nubia by the Turks, and the

possession of the Red Sea by their numerous fleets, Abyssinia has re-

tained her customs with little alteration since the sixteenth century,

although that slight modification may be observed, which is not uncom-

mon in the general history of mankind. During the fresh cruelty of

the successful invader, national rites and practices are maintained

with more than wonted stedfastness ; but when the first violent assault

of enmity has yielded to a more quiet intercourse, a mutual interchange

is admitted between the contending parties, and thus the Jew, the

Moslem, and the Pagan have each in their turn contributed to the ge-

neral stock of Ethiopia.

Many circumstances, however, have continued to render the Abyssi-

nian nation peculiarly susceptible of Jewish ideas and influence ; and

the abilities of her learned historians have in vain been racked to de-

vise the most becoming legend, by which to account for the introduc-

tion into the empire of such a multiplicity of Hebrews.

In accordance with endeavours of other nations to derive their ances-

try from demi-gods and heroes, the kings of the country boast a direct

descent from the house of Solomon, and flatter themselves in the name

of the wisest man of antiquity.

The high sounding title of king of the Israelites is added to that of

Emperor of Abyssinia, and the motto of the national standard floats on

the breeze—‘ The Lion of the tribe of Judah hath prevailed.”

“ The Queen of Ethiopia” says the tradition, ‘“‘ whose name was Ala-

queda, had heard from the Merchant Tamerin, of the wisdom and the

‘glory of the son of Sirach, and resolving to visit him in his own country,

she proceeded to the land of Israel, with all the rich presents that her

empire could afford.

692 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

«« After a season the royal body returned, and her son Menelech, the

result of her visit to the greatest potentate of the age, was born, and

in due time transmitted to his august sire. The young prince was

duly instructed in all the mysteries of Jewish law and science, and

being anointed king, under the name of David, he was returned to his

own land of Ethiopia, escorted by a large suit of the nobles of Israel,

and a band of her most learned elders, under the direction of Ascarias,

the son of Tradok, the High Priest.

“The gates of the temple of Jerusalem were left unguarded, and the

doors miraculously opened, in order that the holy ark and the tables of the

Law might without difficulty be stolen and carried away. The journey

was prosperously performed, and the Queen Mother, on resigning the

reins of authority to her son, caused a solemn obligation to be sworn ©

by all, that henceforward no female should hold sway in the land,

and that none but the issue of David should sit upon the throne of

Ethiopia.” —

Although this tradition may in itself be considered inconsistent and

improbable, the firm belief in the origin thus traced, will in a great

measure account for the general inclination and consent to receive

Jewish rites and practices, as they were in process of time presented.

The fable of Queen Maqueda was in all probability the invention of

fugitive Jews, who after the destruction of Jerusalem by the Emperor

Titus, emigrated to Ethiopia by way of the Red Sea, who disseminated

the tradition with the design of obtaining the desired permission to

settle in the country, and whose descendants, under the name of Fala-

shas, are still extant among the mountains of Simien and Lasta.

The real queen of Sheba or Saba, known to the Arabs under the

title of Belkis or Nicanta, reigned over a portion of Arabia Felix. Want

of geographical information and inquiry perpetuated the error of anti-

quity, which extended Ethiopia to Arabia; and the Sabacans and Home-

rites, who inhabited the Southern portion of the land, are frequently

confounded with the swarthier sons of Africa. ;

But the queen of the South, who came to hear the wisdom of Solo-

mon, brought along with her the produce of her own country; and

camels and spices, gold and precious stones, pertains not unto Ethiopia.

The first Christian Missionary found the inhabitants of Abyssinia idola-

ters and worshippers of the great serpent Arwe; whereas, according to

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 693

tradition, the Jewish faith had been for ages established firmly in the

empire.

No Hebrew literature remains to support the legend. ‘The Holy

Scriptures were not even translated into the language of the country.

No connexion was in after-times maintained with the land of fellow-

faith, neither was any assistance afforded in the day of her distress,

when Israel suffered under the despoiling hand of the Abyssinian and

the Babylonian, and bent her oppressed neck to the yoke of Egypt and

of Rome. '

The family of Menelech Ibnel Hakim are stated, in the Kebra Negest,

the glory of the kings, to have possessed the throne in uninterrupted

felicity until the year 960, when the massacre of the issue of Solomon

was perpetrated by the woman Essat, and one solitary prince of the

blood royal alone escaped to take refuge in the distant and loyal pro-

vince of Shoa. During the succeeding four hundred years, it is asserted

by the learned historians, that the usurping rulers of the fairer provinces

of the empire were Jews, who exerted their utmost endeavours towards

the propagation of their religious creed, and that when the legitimate

dynasty was again restored under Ican Amlac, the Hebrew prejudices

had taken too deep a root, to be easily eradicated from the mind.

But the names and histories of many of these usurpers still remain

to confute the tale; and although in furtherance of political objects,

privileges might have been granted to the numerous Jews residing in

the country, it does not appear that the party ever gained sufficient pre-

ponderance to place one of their own faith upon the throne, and thus

the origin of the existing rites must take a humbler flight to be in union

with the truth.

Ignorance is indeed too glaring a feature in the character of the na-

tion, and remains a monument of the first conspicuous fruit of her

delight in the confusion of truth and falsehood ; superstition required

the consistence of fable, and learned doctors of the law became robbers

of the temple. The conscience was not galled by the fabrication of ten

thousand miracles, which stain the pages of her Church History, and

the honor of Ethiopia triumphed in an origin, which was ascribed to

base illegitimacy and intrigue.

The ancestors of those Jews who to the present day exist in Abys-

Sinia, arrived long before the nation had embraced the Christian religion,

694 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

and in their attempts to obtain moral influence over their Pagan hosts,

were far from being inactive in their adopted home. The early Chris-

tian church, that of Egypt especially, having embraced many Hebrew

customs, was now introduced into a country, where similar doctrines

and practices were already in use, and hence it arose, that the population

so readily became converts.

In process of time the Jews increased in numbers, and a consequent

augmentation of influence was obtained over the fickle mind of the

Abyssinian. Christianity was wanting from the beginning, and their claim

to the appellation of ‘‘ Habeshi,

a mixed and mixing people, was never

more aptly exemplified than in the strange medley of religion which

resulted in the confusion. A mixture from different nations—as stig-

matized by the original term—they have garbled the faith of all their

ancestors, and there is assuredly no Christian community in the whole

world, which has jumbled together truth and falsehood with such utter

inconsistency as the vain church of Abyssinia.

With the destruction of the race of Solomon, the Jewish party ob-

tained the preponderance, because their assistance was indispensable to

the usurper. Again, on the restoration of the legitimate dynasty, they

were hunted among the mountains as a race accursed, and the feeling

reigned paramount to sweep the wanderers from the face of the land.

But the custom of ages had impressed the Hebrew practices too deeply

to be removed. They were in fact regarded in the light of orthodox

Christian doctrines, and as might have been expected from a wicked,

bigotted, and superstitious people, the severest persecutions were en-

forced against the members of another creed, without the Abyssinians

observing in how far they were themselves tainted with those very prin-

ciples, which in others they considered so justifiable to oppress.

The same restrictions which prohibited the Jews from partaking of

the flesh of certain animals pronounced unclean by the Mosaic law,

still heavily binds the stubborn neck of the Ethiopian. The act

which is deemed disgraceful in the eyes of men is in itself firmly be-

lieved to be a moral transgression, and is visited, as was the case in the

Mosaic institution, by the stern reprimand of the priest. The penance

of severe fasting, or of uneasy repose upon the bare ground is enforced

by the father confessor, to efface the taint of the interdicted animal ;

and prayers must be repeated, and holy water pentifully be springled

1843. | and the Abyssinian Church. 695

over the defiled person of that sinning individual, who shall have dared

to touch the meat of the hare, or the swine, or the aquatic fowl.

«* The children of Israel did not eat of the sinew which shrank, which

is upon the hollow of the thigh.” This nerve is in the Amharic

language termed “‘ Shoolada,” and it is prohibited and held unlawful in

Shoa, more especially to the members of the royal blood considered as

highly unclean; it ranks with the carrion carcase, and the universal

belief prevails, that the touch of the unholy morsel would infallibly be

followed by the loss of the offending teeth, as a direct proof of the just

indignation of Heaven.

The Abyssinian cannot be brought to admit, that every creature of

the universe being alike the work of the Almighty, must necessarily be

clean, and that those which are not noxious to health can therefore be

used for man’s food, if accepted with thanksgiving towards the Crea-

tor. The liberal spirit of Christianity is indeed wonderfully clouded

in darkness, and the stranger who professes its tenets, but withholds

his subscription to the creed of narrow and fanatic ideas, is regarded as

worse than the surrounding heathen, and condemned to eternal perdi-

tion.

The Jewish sabbath is moreover strictly observed throughout the

kingdom. The ox and the ass are at rest; agricultural pursuits are

suspended ; household avocations must be laid aside; and the spirit of

idleness reigns throughout the day.

Abolished by the orders of the great Council of Laodicea, the oriental

churches were, after the observance of centuries, freed from this burden,

and men gladly availed themselves of the ecclesiastical license to work

on the Saturday. Here, however, the ancient usage agreed too well

with the laziness of the people, systematically trained to indolence and

sloth ; and when a few years ago, one daring spirit presumed, in advance

of the age, to burst the fetters of superstition, His Majesty the king of

Shoa, stimulated by the advice of besotted monks, delegated his wardens

throughout the land, and issued a proclamation, that whosoever disturb-

ed the original dreary stillness of the Jewish sabbath, should forfeit his

property to the imperial treasury, and his person to the State dungeon.

Ludoff, the celebrated Strabo of Ethiopia, most accurately remarks,

that there is no nation upon earth which fasts so strictly as the Abyssi-

mians, and that they would rather commit a great crime than touch food

696 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

on the day of abstinence. They not only boast, with the Pharisee, “ I

fast twice a week,” but pride themselves also upon their mortification of

the flesh during half the entire year; whilst the haughty and self-

sufficient monk vaunts his meagre diet as the only means of expiation

from sin and evil desire. :

The Abyssinians, in common with other Christian communities who

rigidly observe the fasts of Wednesday and Friday, advance as an argu-

ment, that the Jews seized our Saviour on the first of those days, and

on the second carried into execution their design of crucifixion; but as

this account differs from the evidence of the Gospel, which shews that

the arrest took place upon Thursday, the observance is most probably an

imitation of the weekly fasts in existence among the Jews.

The fast of the forty days before Easter is preserved with much

greater rigour than any other in Abyssinia, and the reckless individual,

who shall neglect the great toma hodada, cannot possess one sentiment

of true religion in his heart. To the abstinence of this season especially

are attached peculiar virtues, which completely nullify the effect of every

sin that may be committed throughout the residue of the year.

According to the Jewish practice, all culinary utensils must thoroughly

be cleansed and polished, to the end, that no particle of meat or prohibit-

ed food may remain to pollute the pious intention. Journeys and

travels are strictly interdicted, and from Thursday until Easter moon, no

morsel should enter the lip, and the parched throat ought to remain

without moisture.

During the fast of the Holy Virgin, children of tender years are not

even exempted from the penance of sixteen days ; and during the many

and weary weeks of abstinence which roll slowly throughout the entire

year, the Abyssinian priest would grant no dispensation to the famished

mortal, were he to receive an immediate mandate from heaven.

Sabela Selassie arose some years ago, a mighty zealot in the cause,

and perceiving that the custom was beginning to decline, proclaimed,

through the royal heralds, pains and penalties sufficiently severe to

ensure the future strict observance of the fast. The commands of the

defender of the Faith were however in one instance transgressed by a

soldier during a military expedition; but his excuse of fatigue under a

heavy load of the king’s camp equipage was admitted ; and although on

similar occasions a certain license is extended, still the monarch pre-

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 697

serves a strict watch over the maintenance of church discipline, and

delights to perceive the stranger imitating the hypocrisy of his own

example.

All the absurd ideas of the Jewish Rabbins, regarding the dead, have

been received and embraced by the fathers of Abyssinia. They main-

tain that the soul of the departed does not immediately enter into the

kingdom of joy, but is conducted to an earthly paradise situated in

an invisible spot between the heaven and the earth, where it remains

until the resurrection in a state of happiness or torment, according to

_ the alms and prayers bestowed by surviving relatives and friends. Niches

in the same spot are also occupied by the saints, and the inconsistency

of their faith fully appears in the belief, that the intercession of the

Almighty is absolutely necessary of these very saints, who themselves

require mortal mediation to be absolved from their spiritual imperfec-

tions, and to be suffered to rest in peace until the coming of Christ.

But the self-interest of the avaricious priest is wrapped up in the

preservation of this doctrine. The clergy riot in the price of death-bed

confession, and a corner of the church yard is sternly denied to all who

die without the due performance of the rite, or whose relations refuse

the fee and the funeral feast. The payment of half a crown, however,

wafts the soul of a poor man to a place of rest; and the ¢escar or

banquet for the dead, places him in a degree of happiness, according to

the costliness of the entertaimment. The price of eternal bliss is neces-

sarily higher to the rich, but German crowns procure the attendance of

venal priests, who absolve and pray continually day and night, and the

reeking burial feast is frequently devoured in commemoration of the

event. Royalty is taxed at a still more costly rate, and the anniver-

saries of the deaths of the six kings of Shoa are held with great ceremony

in the capital. Once during every twelve months, before the com-

mencement of a splendid feast, their souls are fully absolved from all sin,

and the munificence of their illustrious descendant is ‘still further dis-

played in the long line of beeves, which afterwards winds its way to the

threshold of every church in Ankober.

The Talmud asserts, that those who die piously, remain in a state

of active knowledge of all the occurrences of this world. Philo, the ©

learned Jew of Alexandria, informs us, that the souls of the Patriarchs

pray incessantly for the Jewish nation, and the erudite Rabbins believed

4y¥

698 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

that angels are the governors of all sublunary things, and that a man

in every country has a guardian angel for protection and direction.

The Abyssinians carry this belief even further. ‘They confidently anti-

cipate the intercession of saints and angels in all spiritual and secular

concerns. They invoke and adore them in even a higher degree than

the Creator ; all their churches are dedicated to one in particular, and the

holy ark is regarded as the visible representative of the respective

patron. Without this talot the church is not Christian, and heretics

alone doubt of its wonderful virtues and inherent power. Prayers and

vows are offered to the box, and the kiss of adoration is held sufficient

to bring down the desirable blessing. The ark of St. Michael accom-

panies all military expeditions to ensure success against the Galla, and

that of Tekla Haimanot stands the palladium of the North, to preserve

the empire from the attacks of the Mahomedan prince of Argobba.

Like the Pagans of ancient and modern times, who placed between the

most High God and themselves a species of inferior deity, the Abyssinians

observe this species of idolatary, although the names of their tutelar

spirits have been changed. St. Michael and the Holy Virgin are here

venerated as in no other country of the world ; the former as the mar-

tial leader of all the choirs of angels, the latter as chieftainess of all the

saints, and queen of heaven and of earth. Both are considered as the

great intercessors for mankind, and the prayer arises to their name, and

the honor is ascribed to their memory, which belongeth only to the

one Eternal.

The detrimental influence of this superstition is fully exemplified in

the conduct of the nation. The mediator is ever employed when indi-

vidual courage fails in impudent assurance or insatiable beggary. Time

is uselessly wasted in importunity, which all believe must in the end

prove successful, and the practice of invocation and intercession thus

exerts the most baneful tendency even upon the daily dealing of life.

Like the Jews of old, the Abyssinians weep and lament on all occa-

sions of death, and the shriek ascends to the sky, as if the soul could be

again recalled from the world of spirits. ‘The hired mourner of the

Israelites raised the piteous wail. Here the friends and relatives of the

departed assemble for the same purpose, and the absence of any from

the scene is ascribed to want of love and affection. As with the Jews,

the most inferior garments are employed as the weeds of woe, and the

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 699

skin, torn and scarified from the temples, proclaims the plunge into the

last extremity of grief.

In later days, the extravagance of mourning has been somewhat mo-

derated through the agency of a priest of the church of St. George,

who stood boldly forward to arrest a practice equally at variance with

the sacred books of the country, and with the spirit of the New Testa-

ment. Excommunication thundered her wrath upon all who should

thenceforth indulge in the luxury of woe, and the people trembled

under the ban of the Church. The death of a great governor soon con-

firmed the restriction. Loved and esteemed by all classes, the prohibi-

tion was severely felt. The complaint of lamentation was referred to

the throne, and as the deceased was a man of rank and a royal favorite

with all, the clergy were commanded to grant absolution in this one in-

stance. But Zeddoo, the stout-hearted priest arose and declared, that he

had no respect for persons, and the words of truth must be defended to the

death. The silence of the monarch enforced the ecclesiastical fiat, and to

this day the drum is mute at the funeral wake, and customary praise of

the deceased is heard no more in the public resorts of the capital.

On the annual day of atonement, the Jews were obliged to confess

their sins before a priest. In like manner, the Abyssinians are com-

manded from time to time to perform the ceremony during the great

fast of Hodada more particularly, and on Good Friday, the day of the

Jewish expiation ; and as the slave in token of his freedom and dismissal

received the blow from the Roman proctor, so the penitent on absolu-

tion, receives the stroke over the shoulders from the branch of the woira

tree, as a sign of his deliverance from sin and Satan.

Murder and sacrilege ought to be immediately revealed to the of-

ficiating priest, and a particular confession of all crimes is enjoined once

before death. The father-confessor is bound to the strictest secrecy, and

it is believed, that on this point a dreadful oath is taken before ordina-

tion, when the mysteries of religion are explained by the Aduna, and

especially those which have reference to the preparation of bread for

the Holy Supper. In a smali house styled Bethlehem, which rises im-

mediately behind every church, the mysterious ceremony is performed.

The deacon can alone bake the cake, and the most vigilant guard is

invariably preserved against the approach or intrusion of females, or

other improper visitors during the hours of solemn preparation.

700 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

The Jewish temple consisted of three distinct divisions ; the fore Court, —

the Holy, and the Holy of Holies. To the first, laymen were admitted, ©

to the second only the priest, and to the third the High-priest alone. Al]

entrance was denied to the Pagan, a custom which is still enforced

in Abyssinia, and her churches are in a like manner divided into three

parts.

« Keunic Maalt” is the first enclosure to which all laymen have ac-

cess, and wherein the priests and defteras perform Divine service by

singing, dancing, and drumming. ‘ Mukdas” is the second, a corner of

which is set apart for laymen during the administration of the Holy

Supper, whilst a cloth screens the mysteries of the interior. Here also

hang arranged around the walls, the bones of many deceased worthies

which have been carefully gathered from the newly opened sepulchre,

and are deposited by the hand of the priest in cotton bags. By the

nearest relative the first opportunity is embraced of transporting these |

mouldering emblems of mortality to the sacred resting place of Debra

Lebanos, where the living and the dead are alike blessed with a rich

treasure of righteousness, since the remains of Tekla Haiman, the

| patron saint of Abyssinia, still throw over the scene of his miracles upon

earth, a bright halo of holiness.

“To Kuddist,” the Holy of Holies, none but priests are admitted.

Behind its veil, the Sacrament is consecrated, and the tremendous —

mysteries of the ark are shrouded from the eyes of the uninitiated.

Prayers, vows, and offerings are daily made to this idol sitting in the

centre of the Abyssinian church, and the handiwork of some vain eccle-

siastic is held up to the admiring multitude as the true ark of holiness,

which secreted in a cave during the inroad of the conquering Graigne,

has been discovered by a miraculous dream from heaven. Even unto this

day the spoils of the temple of Jerusalem are supposed to remain a

blessing to the land, and old and young, rich and poor, bow the knees as_ |

to the Omnipotent Creator, before a round wooden box which contains |

nought save the name of the patron saint of the Church.

But among the ignorant mass, the mystery is carefully preser- |

ved. The priest who dared open the lip to his countrymen regarding |

the contents of the casket, would suffer the heavy penalties due to

sacrilege ; and although the gold of the foreigner has penetrated the |

secret of its interior, the dense fog of superstition will long obscure the |

1843. and the Abyssinian Church. 701

disgraceful idolatry from the confined understanding of the bigotted

son of Shoa. ;

Like the Jews, the Abyssinians, although objecting to sculpture, orna-

ment their churches with paintings, and kiss and pay the miserable

daub every religious respect. The vow is offered as of old to the tem-

ple of Jerusalem, and oil and frankincense, shields and spears, cloths

and money, are offered according to the worldly substance of the pious

and superstitious donor.

The sweet singer of Israel danced and jumped before the Lord, and

a vile caricature imitation remains the chief point of Abyssinian

worship. Capering and beating the ground with their feet, whilst

stretching their crutches towards each other with frantic gesticulations,

the performers rather resemble lunatics than holy priests, and the

clash of the-timbrel, the sound of the drum, and the howling of harsh

voices, complete a most strange form of devotion.

Like the Jews, the Abyssinians invariably commence the service with

the Trisagion, and the morning lesson is performed with the same

careless and irreverent demeanor for which the Hebrews were latterly

blamed. ‘The lessons are taken partly from the Scriptures, and partly

from the miracles of the Holy Virgin, and of Tekla Haimanot, the life of

St. George, and other foolish and fabulous works ; but all are in the

ancient Ethiopian language, which to the congregation is a dead letter ;

and the sole edification of a visit to the church is comprised in the kiss

that is imprinted on the portal.

' Pride, hypocrisy, and. contempt of other nations are strangely at

variance with the absurd imitations of customs and manners, which the

Abyssinians have adopted from all. The Jews also hated the Heathen

bitterly, styling them “dogs,” and rejected of God: whilst notwith-

standing their contempt and pride of holiness, they willingly received many

of their superstitious practices. The Abyssinian will not eat with the

Galla or the Mahomedan, lest he should thereby participate in the delusion

of his creed ; and the church and the church-yard are equally closed

against all who commit this deadly sin. But the order of separation

was applicable so long only as the knowledge of the one true God was

restricted to a single nation ; and the prominent principle of Christianity,

‘that the light of the true faith should shine before all men, and be no

longer concealed under a bushel, is here neither understood nor regarded.

702 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

The Abyssinians have also fully adopted the same spirit of merciless

destruction, which impelled the Israelites to destroy their enemies from

the face of the earth; considering themselves the lineal descendants of

those heroes of ancient history, who were arrayed against the enemies

of the Lord, they are actuated by the same motives and feelings which

led the hand of Judah to the massacre. The foe is a Pagan who does

not fast, nor kiss the church, nor wear a watch. All feelings of hu-

manity are thrown to the winds, and a high reward in Heaven awaits

the king and the blood-thirsty soldier for the burning of the hamlet,

the capture of the property, and the murder of the accursed Heathen ;

self-interest rarely interferes in the tragedy of blood, and the captive

is seldom secure even for the sake of the forthcoming ransom, or to

pass the residue of miserable existence, a drudge in the household of

the spoiler. The words of absolution from the mouth of the royal

priest usher in the ruthless slaughter, and the name of the most high

God is wantonly employed to consecrate the ensuing scenes of savage

barbarity.

Abyssinia in her present state, belongs altogether to the ancient

world. The pure principles of Christianity exist not in the land, and

there remains not one solitary hope, that in her degraded condition she

can tend, in any way to lift the curtain of moral darkness which hangs

over the interior of the African continent; nor, redolent of evil prin-

ciples and practice, is it to be desired, that she should be permitted to

exert any important influence over the surrounding tribes.

The instruction gained from her teaching would prove small ae

and the advance would be but trifling, from the state of heathenish

superstition in which all are plunged alike.

The bigotry of ages is confirmed by the self-pride and the excessive

ignorance of the present race ; and on the rising, or on the unborn gene-

ration, rests the sole hope for the moral resurrection of the people.

But years must necessarily elapse before the folly and the falsehood

of the nation can be successfully combated, ere the errors of her impure

creed can be plucked out by the root, and the pure light of Chris-

tianity be introduced even by the most zealous and ardent messenger

of the true Gospel.

(Signed) D. C. Granam, Captain,

Principal Assistant to the Embassy.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. e703

The Abyssinian Church.

Christianity is the national religion over the more elevated portions

of Abyssinia, but the wild Galla has overrun her fairest provinces, and

located himself in her-‘most pleasant places. The bigotted Moslem crowds

thick upon the skirts of her distracted empire, and the tenets she pro-

fesses, are base, foolish, and degrading, engrafted on the superstitions of

the Jew, the Mahomedan and the Pagan; promulgated by men, rude,

| ignorant and uninstructed, and received by a people emerging into the

first stage of civilization. The light of religion must have been feeble

even in the beginning, but as it was imparted, so it still remains. Sects

and parties have arisen, and province has been banded against province

in all the fiery wrath of the zealot ; but lost in the maze of subtle con-

troversy, these internal wars have raged for generations without disturb-

ing the original doctrine, and the same errors of the Church prevail to

this day throughout the land, as when first propounded in the beginning

of the fourth century.

But the nation has not alone been called upon to sustain internal

commotion, together with the fierce assaults of the heathen and of the

fanatic followers of the false prophet. The measure of her oppression was

not filled until the bitter cup had been drained, and deeply drained, of

the converting zeal of European priesthood, until the usual horrors

attendant upon religious war had been painfully undergone, and the

requisite sacrifice of the life-stream of her children had been unsparingly

poured out, when nearest and dearest relatives rallied under opposite

_ standards, and when the same cry of destruction rung from either host—

the glory of the true faith.

The glowing zeal of the Jesuit has seldom been displayed in more

glaring colors, or in more decided defeat, than in the attempts so per-

severingly made by that dread society to draw within the meshes of

her encircling net, the remote church of Ethiopia. And although the

means employed are to be justly condemned, still that ardour must be

the theme of the high praise of all, which impelled old men and young

to dare the difficulties and dangers of a rude uncivilized land, with ex-

posure to the prejudices of a people, as bigotted as themselves in the

cause of their religion, »

But the wily system of establishing rival orders and monasteries, of

mortification, of snapping asunder domestic ties, and of collecting toge-

704 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

ther bands of discontented enthusiasts, well served the interests of the

Catholic faith ; and there were always to be found servants obedient to

bear instructions to the farthest corners of the earth ; men who relin-

quished few comforts or enjoyments on quitting their austere cells, who

were prepared at all hazards and in all manners to carry into execution

the will of their superiors, and who gloried in the prospect either of

erecting an eternal fabric in honor of their faith and their own peculiar —

order, or of obtaining the equally bright crown of martyrdom.

But the custom of ages had struck too deep into the heart of the

Abyssinian.

The power of the officiating clergy was paramount in the land. All

the passions and the prejudices of the multitude were too firmly enlisted

in the cause of ancient belief; and degraded as was the Christianity of

the country, its forms and tenets were not more absurd and not less

pertinaciously supported, than those innovatious of the Roman faith,

which were so fiercely, though so ineffectually attempted.

The soft wily speech and the thunder of excommunication were alike

disregarded. ‘Treachery and force were both tried, and found equally

unavailing. Blood flowed for a season like the swollen torrent, and the

sound of wailing was heard from the palace to the peasant’s hut; but

the storm expended itself and finally passed away, and after the struggle

of a century, the discomfited monks relinquished their attempts upon —

- the church of the monophyzite, without leaving behind one solitary con-

vert to their faith, and bearing along with them the loud maledictions

of the much-injured nation upon the head of the intruding and officious

European. :

- Abyssinia has not, however, always displayed that firmness of purpose,

and that stoutness of heart to do battle for her existing creed. Bowing

her neck in olden time to the yoke of Judaism, she now in many locali-

ties basely truckles, as convenient opportunity offers, to the tenets of

the Islam faith. |

The date of her embracing a portion of the Jewish creed is lost in

the obscurity of ages. Some of her sons, who love even the notoriety of

doubtful fame, glorying in an origin from Menelek, the son of Solomon

and the Queen of Sheba, relate the most ridiculous exploits of these

their venerated ancestors, who crowned a long course of iniquity by

plundering the temple of Jerusalem, and carrying off the spoil and the

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 705

holy books into Ethiopia; whilst others trace the legend of emigration

to the period of the destruction of Jerusalem by the Romans. But

whatever be the true date of their arrival, it is certain that the Hebrews

have exercised a much greater influence upon the affairs of this country

than in any other since the day of their dispersion ; and although the

taint of their religion was abjured by the nation on the Promethean

touch of the true Gospel, the children of Israel, moulding a portion of

their worship on the formula of the Christian faith, and esteemed as

sorcerers and cunning artists in the land, found a safe asylum among

the mountains, and exist to the present day here, as elsewhere, a separate

and peculiar nation,

In the year 330, after the birth of our Saviour, Meropius, a merchant

of Tyre, during a commercial voyage to India, landed on the coast of

Ethiopia, where he was murdered by the barbarians, and his two sons,

Fumentius and Edesius, both devout men, falling into the hands of the

savage inhabitants, were made prisoners, and carried as slaves before the

Emperor. The abilities, the information, and the peaceable demeanor

of the brothers, soon gained not only their release, but high office in the

court, and living in the full confidence of the monarch until his decease,

and subsequently under the protection of the Queen mother, the

good will of the entire nation quickly succeeded. The work of con-

version was commenced, and proceeded with wonderful rapidity and

success; a thriving branch was shortly added to the great Eastern

Church.

Bearing the happy tidings, Frumentius appeared in Alexandria, and

was received with open arms by the Patriareh Athanasius. Loaded with

honors and consecrated the first Bishop of Ethiopia, a relation was

thus happily commenced with Egypt, which has remained firm and

friendly to the present day ; and throughout fifteen centuries has be-

stowed upon a captive priest the high office of Patriarch Abuna of the

Ethiopian church.

On his return to the country of his hopes, Frumentius found that

the spark of life had spread rapidly throughout the gloomy darkness

of the land. Baptism was instituted, Deacons and Presbyters appointed,

churches erected, and a firm foundation laid, whereon to establish the

Christian religion in Abyssinia. Frumentius was deservedly honored

with a favored niche in the annals of her Church History, under the

706 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

title of Salama, which formed the subject of high praise to all the

sacred poets of Ethiopia.

‘© Hail him with the voice of

Joy, sing praise to Salama,

The doors of pity and of mercy

And of pleasant grace; Salute

Those blessed hands, bearing the

Pure torch of the Gospel.

For the splendour of Christ’s Church

Has enlightened our darkness.”’

During the succeeding century, priests and apostles, men of wonderful

sanctity, flocked into the empire from all parts of the East, and miracles

the most stupendous are related in the legends of those days. Mountains

were removed, and the storms of the angry ocean stilled by the mere

application of the staff. ‘The adder and the basilisk glided harmlessly

under foot ; and rivers stayed their roaring torrent, that the sandal of the

holy man should remain unstained by the flood. Aragaine raised the

dead ; the fingers of Likands flamed like tapers of fire ; Samuel rode upon

his lion, and thus the kingdom of Arwe, the old serpent of Ethiopia,

was utterly overthrown, destroyed, and annihilated.

The Abyssinians now rose to the scale of subtle casuists and disput-

ants. Abstruse doctrines were propounded, and speculative theories

largely indulged in, and the sun of existence set upon the generation

ere the knotty poimts had been satisfactorily determined of how long

Adam remained in Paradise before his Fall ? And whether in his present

state he hold dominion over the angels?

In the year 481, the celebrated council of Chalcedom, lighted up the

torch of misunderstanding regarding the two natures of Christ. The

Eastern church split and separated in mortal feud, and the Saracen

pounced upon Egypt, rent and wasted by discord and distraction. The

Abyssinians denouncing the Council as a meeting of fools, concurred in

the opinion of the Alexandrian Patriarch.

The faith of the Monophyzite was declared to be the one only true

and orthodox, and the banished Dioscorus received all the honors of a

martyr.

‘« The Kings of the earth divided the unity of God and man.

Sing praises to the martyr, who laughed their religion to scorn.

He was treated with indignity, they plucked out his flowing beard;

Yea, and tore the teeth from his venerable face. But in heaven a halo of honor

shall encircle Dioscorus.”’

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 707

The successor of St. Mark, however, could barely retain his own ex-

istence in Egypt during the succeeding oppressions and exactions of

the Moslem; and Ethiopia, his remote charge, now nearly isolated from

the remainder of the world, remained for the next ten centuries a

sealed book to European history, preserving her independence from all

foreign yoke, and guarding in safety the flame of that faith which she had

inherited from her fathers.

The reign of the Ascetics succeeded to that of disputation, and men

lacerated their bodies, and lived in holes and caves of the earth like

wild beasts. ‘Tekla Haimanot and Eustathios were the great founders

of monkery in the land. An angel announced the birth of one, and the

other floated over the sea, borne in safety amidst the folds of his leathern

garment. Miracles still continued to be occasionally performed. Sanc-

tity was further enhanced by mortification of the flesh, and austerity of

life was highly praised and followed by the admiring mob.

The original discipline of the anchorite was severe in the extreme.

It was to be continually girt round the loins with heavy chains, and

to remain for days immersed in the cold mountain stream, to recline up-

on the bare earth, and to subsist alone upon a scanty vegetable diet.

Monasteries were at length founded, and fields and revenues set apart

for the convenience of their inmates ; and although a visiting superior

was appointed to check corruption and punish innovation or transgres-

sion, the asperities of the monastic life gradually softened down. The

cheggue preferred the comforts of a settled abode to wearisome tours

and visitations; further immunities were granted to all loving a life of

ease and spiritual license, and the commonwealth deplored the loss of a

great portion of her subjects, who assisted her neither in taxes, nor in

military service.

Ethiopia meanwhile extended her wide empire on every side, and her

religion was imposed upon the conquered territories. From the great

river Gochoh to the frontiers of Nubia, the crutch and the cross per-

vaded the land. Churches were erected on every convenient spot, and

the blue badge of nominal Christianity encircled the necks of an ignorant

multitude. The usual wars and rebellion arose, and schisms and sects

fill up the archives of ten centuries, with all the uninteresting precision

of more civilized countries. But still the Church flourished ; the Patri.

arch was regularly received from Alexandria, a long list of ninety-five

708 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

Abunas flows quietly through the dull pages of Abyssinian record, from

the time of Frumentius the First until the days of the venerable Simeon,

who whilst gallantly defending the faith of his fathers, was barbarously

murdered by the European partizans of the Italian Jesuit. It was not

until the commencement of the sixteenth century, that any further

mention was made of the Abyssinian Church, which during the dark-

ness of the middle ages had fallen into complete oblivion; but rumours

about that period were whispered abroad of a Christian monarch and

a Christian nation established in the centre of Africa, and the happy

news was first brought to the court of Portugal, that a Christian Church

still existed, which had for ages successfully resisted, among the lofty

mountains of Abyssinia, the fierce attacks of the sanguinary Saracen.

In the year 1499, Pedro Cavilham succeeded in reaching Shoa, where

he was received with that favor which novelty usually secures ; and

although the stranger was prevented by the ancient laws of the king-

dom from leaving the land, the quest had been successfully performed ;

the first link re-established of a chain, which had been broken for ages,

and shortly afterwards the glories of Prester John and his Christian court

were fully disclosed to abate the intense anxiety that reigned in the

heart of every inhabitant of the West.

In due time, an Abyssinian ambassador made his appearance in Por-

tugal; unbounded delight was experienced by king Emanuel and his court,

and every honor was lavished upon Matthew, the merchant of Shoa.

All believed that the Abyssinians were devout Catholics, and that a vast

empire, estimated at four times its actual extent, was about to fall

under the dominion of the Roman Church. <A mission on a great scale

was fitted out, the journey was safely accomplished, and excited fancy

rioted for a time in the description of palaces and fountains which never

existed, and pomp, riches, and regal power utterly unknown in the

land.

Missions continued from either court during the succeeding forty

years. An alliance was formed. Men learned in the arts and sciences

were despatched to settle in Abyssinia. Zaga Zaba arrived in Lisbon,

invested with full powers to satisfy the interests of both countries,

temporal as well as spiritual. But the difference of faith was now for

the first time understood. The bitter enmity of the Roman creed stood

prominently to view, and the envoy, after studying the details of the

“

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 709

Catholic doctrine, and refusing to subscribe a similar contract on behalf

of his Church, was unscrupulously put to a violent death in a Portuguese

prison.

The first flattering ideas regarding the religion of the country being

thus found erroneous, the delusion respecting the extent and power of

the mighty empire was next to fall to the ground. The Galla were

now streaming in hordes from the interior, and Graigne, the Mahome-

dan invader, carrying fire and sword with his army throughout the

country. The dying Coptish Patriarch of Abyssinia was prevailed upon

to nominate as his successor John Bermudez, a resident Portuguese,

and the Romish priest, hurried by the king, proceeded to seek immedi-

ate military assistance from the courts of Rome and Lisbon.

Schemes of ambition flitted over the minds of the first conquerors

of India, and an alliance with Ethiopia seemed highly desirable, as a

handle for further acquisition in the East. But dilatory measures de-

layed the arrival of the Portuguese fleet until the sueing monarch had

been gathered to his fathers, and Christopher, the son of the famous

Vasco de Gama anchored in the harbour of Massowah, at a time when the

new emperor Claudius was sorely pressed to sustain himself upon the

throne of his ancestors. The opportunity was not neglected by the

Archbishop to reduce the heretic church to the fold of the Roman see ;

and a series of attempts were commenced, equally to be deplored, from

the mischief which they created, and the unworthy means that were em-

ployed during the struggle.

The signal service rendered by the Portuguese troops during the

ensuing wars, the total route of the Galla and Moslem, with the slaugh-

_ ter of their invading leader in the battle, placed Bermudez in a position

to demand high terms from the re-instated monarch. The conversion

of the emperor to the Roman Catholic faith, and the possession of one-

third of the kingdom were imperiously proposed, and scornfully reject-

ed. Excommunication was threatened by the proud prelate of the

West, and utterly disregarded by king Claudius, who retorted, that the

_ Pope himself was a heretic. Open hostilities broke out, and although

| the superior discipline of the Europeans for a time gave them the ad-

vantage, they were at length separated by a wily stratagem, and hurried

to different quarters of the kingdom, and Bermudez being then seized,

was conveyed in honorable exile to the rugged mountains of Efat.

“10 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

Although much blood and considerable treasure had been thus fruit-

lessly expended, the conversion of Ethiopia was far from being forgotten

in Europe, and the spark of hope was further kept alive by an Abyssinian

priest, who asserted on his arrival in Rome, that the failure of Bermu-

dez had entirely arisen from his own absurd and brutal conduct, and that

the utmost deference would be paid to men of sense and capacity. Igna-

tius Loyola volunteered to repair in person to re-unite Ethiopia and the

Roman Catholic church, but his talents being required for more impor-

tant objects, the Pope refused the desired permission to the great

founder of the Society of Jesus, and thirteen Missionaries from the new

order were chosen instead. Nunez Baretto was elevated to the dignity

of Patriarch, and Andre Oviedo appointed provisional successor.

At that period, the navigation of the Red Sea was rendered dangerous

by numerous Saracen fleets, and the Patriarch deeming it inexpedient to

hazard his own valuable person in the perils of the voyage, reposed

quietly at Goa; whilst a deputation, headed by Gonsalvez Rodrigues, a

priest of the secondary rank, was despatched in advance to ascertain the

capabilities of the route, and the sentiments of the reigning monarch.

The Emperor Claudius little relished the arrival of these monks, and

Rodrigues entirely failed in every attempt at conviction on the points at

issue—that the Pope, as representative of Christ upon earth, was the true

head of all Christians, and that there was no salvation whatever out of the

pale of the Catholic Church; he was dismissed with the reply, that the |

people of Ethiopia would not lightly abandon the faith of their forefathers.

The monk retired to work upon the mind of the monarch by the brilliancy _

of his controversial writing, but a lengthy treatise on the true faith pro- _

duced no happy result, and the envoy, disgusted with his reception, re- :

turned shortly afterwards to Goa.

The spiritual conclave was plunged into consternation by the unhap-

py intelligence, and after much mature deliberation it was resolved, that

the dignity of the Patriarch and of the great king of Portugal could not

be exposed to the consequences attending the ill favor of the Emperor of

Abyssinia, that therefore the prelate should still remain the guest of the

Bishop of Nicaca; whilst the daring and restless Oviedo, with a small

train of attendants, attempted the conquest.

Arriving in safety, the Jesuit experienced a most friendly reception

from the Emperor Claudius, and although the letters of recommendation

}

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 711

from the Pope were received with mistrust and impatience, the habitual

mildness of the monarch restrained him from any overt act of oppression.

Deceived by this calm behaviour during a second audience, the Bishop

was sufficiently fool-hardy to represent, in the most insolent language,

the enormous errors under which the Emperor laboured, and to demand

imperatively, whether or not he intended to submit himself to the autho-

rity of the successor of St. Peter, and thus remove the heavy obligation

under which his empire already groaned? King Claudius replied, that

he was well inclined towards the Portuguese nation ; that he would grant

them lands and settlements in his country ; that permission would not

be withheld to the private exercise of the religion of the West ; but that

as the Abyssinian Church had been for ages united to the charge of the

Patriarch of Alexandyia, a subject of such serious alteration must be

canvassed before a full assembly of divines.

Indignant at what he termed Ethiopian perfidy, but still buoyed up

with the faint hope of realizing his object, Oviedo changed his mode

of attack, and addressed a laboured remonstrance to the monarch,

written in the hypocritical tone of false friendship ; earnestly entreating

him to recall to his remembrance the assistance rendered by Europeans

to his afflicted country, and the many promises made by his sire in the

day of his urgent distress, imploring him at the same time to preserve a

stern vigilance upon the evil influence of the empress, and of the

ministers of state; for in matters of faith, the love of kindred must

give away to the love of Christ, and in similar situations, the nearest

relation often proves the bitterest enemy to the salvation of the

soul.

This insidious reasoning was, however, vainly expended upon the intel-

ligent Claudius, and served but to turn his heart further from the Roman

and his cause. The offer of a public controversy on points of disputed

faith being shortly afterwards accepted, the emperor entered the lists in

presence of the assembled court, and utterly defeated the subtleties of

the Italian priest by his clear knowledge of the Holy Scriptures ;

and thus, notwithstanding the conviction of the Portuguese Missionary,

that by supernatural aid he had triumphantly refuted all the arguments

_ urged by his illustrious antagoinst, it was fully decreed by the Abyssinian

conference, that neither king nor people, owed obligation or obedi-

ence whatsoever to the Church of Rome.

712 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

Still Oviedo was by no means reduced to silence. ‘Treatise after trea-

tise was published on the controversy, to confound the minds of the

Ethiopians. The errors of the Alexandrian faith were fiercely attacked

in every form and fashion, and the superior beauties of the Catholic

religion fully expounded. But no advantage resulted, rejoinders and

confutations followed fast from the insulted clergy, and the Bishop

furious at the thoughts of his futile exertions to gain a footing in the

country, entertaining no hope of making one single convert, whether

among prince or people ; resolved upon a last effort in the struggle, and

on the fifth of February 1559, he issued his spiritual ban over the land,

proclaiming that the entire nation of Abyssinia, high and low, learned

and ignorant, having refused to obey the Church of Rome, practising

the unholy rite of circumcision, objecting to eat the flesh of the hog

and the hare, and indulging in many other flagrant enormities, were

delivered over to the judgment of the spiritual courts, to be punished

in persons and goods, in public and in private, by every means the

faithful could devise.

The folly of issuing this curious rescript without any means of en-

forcement was fully appreciated, and the tyrannical conduct of the

Bishop only served to strengthen the emperor in the bands of his own

faith ; finding, as was observed by an historian of the times, that Popery

and its wiles were the more dangerous and reprehensible, as the veil was

withdrawn from the spirit of her tenets.

There is every reason to believe, that the succeeding invasion of the

Adaiel was procured through the treacherous designs of the Jesuits, but

the event again proved disastrous to their cause. Although the revenge

of the baffled Bishop was allayed in a torrent of blood, yet the death of

the mild, moderate and liberal Claudius, who perished in the field of

battle, shed a baneful influence on the ensuing efforts, and the sceptre

devolved into the hands of his brother Adam, a haughty and vindictive

prince, who is depicted in Portuguese records as cruel and hard of heart,

and utterly insensible to the beauteous mysteries of the Catholic faith.

Swearing vengeance against the Latins, to whose treason he attributed

the murder of his brother and the ruin of his country, the new monarch

seized all the estates which had been granted to the Portuguese for

rendered service; threatened the Bishop and his colleagues with in-

stant death if they presumed to propagate the errors of the Romish

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 7138

Church, and on a humble remonstrance being attempted, in the violence

of his wrath he rushed upon the Missionary with drawn sword, vowing

to immolate him on the spot. The weapon, however, say the holy

fathers, dropped miraculously from his impious hand, and for a season the

last extremity of vengeance was exchanged for a system of vile durance.

Portuguese troops in the mean time arrived from Goa, and the

Bharnegash, the lord of the sea coast, bought over by the gold of India,

and stirred up by the wily emissaries of the viceroy, assembled his forces

in rebellion, and marching with his European allies to the capital, de-

feated and slew the emperor in a pitched battle, and rescued the Jesuit

missionaries from their unpleasant captivity.

Warned by former difficulty and distress, the worthy fathers now

assumed a more modest and humble demeanor, and were allowed to

settle again in their old haunt of Maignagna, where they remained for a

time unmolested by the new emperor, Malac Sarshed, who inherited

all the horror of his father to the Catholic creed, although tempered by

the mildness of his uncle Claudius. But the jealous monks had not

yet relinquished their hope of advancement, and bending to the pressure

of the times, the deep plot was veiled under the garb of passive obedi-

ence. The most pressing solicitations were dispatched to Goa for

assistance, and the dauntless Oviedo pledged himself, with six hundred

staunch Europeans, to convert not only the empire of Abyssinia, but

all the adjacent countries.

The scheme, however, did not suit the politics of the day, and in 1560,

the Bishop received an order from the head of his Society, to repair

forthwith to his more promising charge in Japan; loath to abandon all

his favorite projects of ambition in the country, and utterly reckless of

truth, he addressed the most specious letters to the Pope, holding

| out a certain prospect of prostrating the Church of Ethiopia before the

_ Apostolic throne ; whilst to his immediate superior, he dilated upon the

_ Tichness of the land and the mines of pure gold, which he falsely assert-

_ ed to exist in every province of the kingdom. But his artful motives

| were thoroughly pierced by the more wily successor of St. Peter, and

| vessels soon after arrived on the coast of Africa, to convey the reluctant

fathers to the Monastery of St. Xavier in Goa.

(Signed) D.C. Granam, Captain,

Principal Assistant to the Embassy.

5 ae

714 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

Mistory of the Abyssinian Church.— Continued.

Miserable indeed appeared the chance of conversion, and after a fierce

struggle of thirty years, there remained not one priest of the Romish

faith, to administer the Sacraments to the numerous European settlers

and descendants in the country. Even the Jesuits themselves lost

heart for the time; but the zeal of Philip the Second stirred the dying

embers, and fresh candidates for strife, honor, and martyrdom, were soon

in the field. \

Peter Pero Pays and Antonio de Mantzerado, disguised as Armenian

merchants, first attempted the perilous quest, but being wrecked on the

Arabian coast, they were recognized as Christian ministers, and lan-

euished during seven years in a Moslem dungeon.

Goa next poured forth her priests to the ineffectual contest in seeking

the promised land. Abraham de Georgis was discovered in Turkish garb

on the island of Massowah, and the governor swore by the Holy Pro-

phet, that since the Kafir had donned the attire of the true believer,

he should also adopt the tenets of the true faith, or die the death of a

dog. But the Jesuit clung to his creed and suffered accordingly, and

shortly afterwards Jean Baptiste being detected in the assumed costume

by the Turks of Commera, he also shared the same fate as his imme- —

diate predecessor in the thorny path of martyrdom.

Thus even the road itself seemed to close, and all intercourse was

denied with a country, wherein the presence of Europeans was neither

sought for nor desired ; and which would have been suffered to remain —

unmolested, had not ideas been inflamed by the exaggerated accounts of

its wealth, that still pervaded the imagination of all classes throughout |

the Western world.

Don Alexis de Menezes, the zealous Archbishop of Goa, who had |

already with fire and sword propagated Christianity in all Malabar, now |

entered the lists, and his sagacious and discerning mind selected the |

vicar of St. Anne as a fit tool for the execution of his project. Melchior :

Sylva, a converted Brahmin, might from his colour and language pass

through the Turkish wicket; his zeal was great as that of his superior, :

and the valuable presents whereof he was made the bearer, might prove |

a bait sufficiently tempting to lure the simple Abyssinian into a fresh

connexion.

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 715

The intelligence of his safe arrival, and of the gracious reception of

the presents again roused the ardent spirit of the order of Jesus, and

Peter Pays was quickly ransomed from the Arabs, and despatched with

a full train of priests to Ethiopia, where he arrived in September of

the year 1603.

Superior in every respect to his predecessors, this Missionary instead

of attempting to carry his measures by force and overbearing insolence,

sought the softer path of insinuation ; and whilst his extensive know-

ledge and plausible address proved strong recommendations in his

favor, many circumstances also conspired to forward his views. The

country was in a most unsettled state, and the assistance of a few Por-

tuguese troops could turn the scale of war. The condition of the

Church was low and miserable. Eight years of incessant strife and

distraction had crushed the very name of learning and literature. Few

persons were to be found, who could read, write, or dispute. Ignorant

- and unworthy men filled every sacred office, and the ancient stout defen-

ders of the Alexandrian faith, had been swept away on the battle field.

Amidst wars and rumours of wars, Peter quietly settled with his

followers at Maignagna. Schools were opened, and the wonder ran

through the land, that youths of tender age could refute the most

learned sages of the wilderness of Walpayet. The curiosity of Za

Denghel, the temporary occupant of the throne was excited, and Peter

with his erudite pupils was summoned to the court.

Prompted by the hope of obtaining assistance from Portugal, this

weak prince, under an oath of secrecy, immediately embraced the

religion of his guest. But his time was fully occupied in the more

worldly object of strengthening himself upon a throne, to which he had

been elevated by his evil genius, and the falling away from the faith of

his forefathers being at length whispered abroad, a rebellion broke over

his devoted head.

The approaching storm having been perceived by the monk, he with-

drew from court before the burst of a revolution, which for some time

crushed his every hope of success. The emperor was slain, new aspi-

rants strove for the ascendancy, and war reigned for a season throughout

the entire land. |

Confident in the near approach of the Portuguese troops which had been

requested when Sylva carried to India the tidings of the first conversion ;

716 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

Peter now resolved upon the bold game of espousing the weaker party,

and thus gaining a firmer hold in the event of success. The expected re-

enforcements did not however arrive in time, and the defeat and death of

his protegé was followed by the advancement of the pretender Sunscus

to the throne of the empire.

Notwithstanding his appearance as a declared partizan in the opposing

ranks, Peter’s abilities as an architect now created a fresh diversion in

his favor. The novel idea of a two-storied edifice engrossed the thoughts

of the reigning king, and men flocked from the remotest parts of the

country to gaze upon a fabric of stone, which was considered to be one

of the wonders of the world.

A Missionary possessing the varied abilities and acquirements of Pays,

could not be long in gaining ascendancy over a rude and illiterate mo-

narch, and by address and perseverance, he had soon effected that which

the threats and violence of his predecessors had vainly attempted during

a long course of years. :

Ras Cella Christoo, brother to the emperor, was the first fruit of the

harvest. Partaking of the Holy Supper with the Latins, he publicly em-

braced their religion, and many chiefs and nobles followed his illustrious

example. Crowded assemblies were held, in which the eloquence of the

Jesuit entirely bore done the feeble efforts of the ignorant and unculti-

vated natives. The holiness of life, which was strictly preserved among

the neophytes of the Catholics, added to the impression entertained of

their wisdom, and the introduction of useful arts, raised the glory of the 3

fathers still higher in the land, and the prospect of the aid of disciplined

soldiers from the West overturned the last remaining scruple in the

mind of the monarch.

An edict was published, interdicting all persons from holding office,

who were not well inclined towards the Latin religion, and severe

punishments were threatened for the promulgation of ancient doctrines.

Assistance was solicited from Rome and Lisbon, and the work of Euro-

pean persecution favorably commenced by scourging with whips, all those

stubborn monks who refused to forego their ancient belief.

Abba Simeon, the Abuna, repaired to the court to remonstrate with

the emperor on the scandalous interference with his prerogatives in con-

vening meetings and authorizing debates upon ecclesiastical matters ; but

his pride was timely soothed by the royal assurance, that all had been

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 717

undertaken for the benefit of true religion, and that the subject should be

fully discussed in his own presence. Again the subtleties and dialectics of

the Missionaries prevailed, and the total defeat of the Abuna and his clergy

was followed by a second and more severe ordinance, awarding the penalty

of death to all who should henceforth deny the two natures of Christ.

Wonderful was the sensation created by this severe edict, so diame-

trically at variance with the mild spirit of religion, and with all the

ancient usages of the land. Aware of the feelings of the strong party

at court, as well as of the entire body of the people, the Abuna placard-

ed on the doors of the chapel an excommunication to all who should

accept the religion of the Franks, and the monarch irritated by this

resistance, published a manifesto, that his subjects should forthwith

embrace the Catholic faith.

This served as the signal trumpet for the fight. All classes armed

themselves in defence of their religion, and Aclius, the king’s son-in-

law, placed himself at the head of the malcontents in Tigre.

Not yet thoroughly prepared for the struggle, the emperor found it

convenient for a time to temporize, and requested one further debate,

which was to prove final between the disputants. The mild Abuna

listened to the proposal, and accompanied by a large train of monks

appeared in the royal camp, whilst the Jesuit and his colleagues ad-

vanced into the arena from the opposite side. The controversy was

renewed, and raged fiercely for six days; but disputes in religion cannot

be adjusted by the reasoning of doctors, and the parties withdrew

mutually incensed against each other.

One further effort was made to restore the disturbed harmony. The

empress Hamilmala, and many of the courtiers, with tears implored

the king to desist from his undertaking; and the Patriarch ahd the

clergy throwing themselves prostrate on the earth, embraced his knees,

and entreated him to turn a deaf ear to the poisonous insinuations of the

deceitful Jesuits, and graciously to allow his subjects to remain faithful

to the religion of their forefathers; but the heart of the monarch remain-

ed closed to the prayer. The Abuna quitted the court, plunged in the

deepest distress, and a bloody war ensued, which shook the empire to its

foundation.

When Aclius fully understood the last resolution taken by his father-

in-law to defend the Catholics and their religion, he publicly appealed

718 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

to the people of Tigre, and proclaimed that all who were disposed to

embrace the Jesuitical faith might repair to the deluded emperor ; whilst

those who held to the ancient belief, should forthwith gather under his

standard ; and finding himself shortly afterwards at the head of a large

army, he marched towards the royal camp, resolved to establish the

ancient doctrine of the land, or to perish in the attempt.

The Abuna Simeon, who had attained the venerable age of one

hundred years, joimed the army of the defenders of the Alexandrian

faith, and in giving his Patriarchal blessing assured the soldiery,

that all who should fall in the combat died the death of a martyr, and

would receive their reward in heaven. The desired effect was produced,

and the hearts of the entire force burned with one eager zeal to meet

the accursed enemies of their religion.

On the appearance of the inflamed force, a reconciliation was attempt-

ed, and the daughter of the emperor was made the bearer of terms to

her rebel lord. Her tears and entreaties were however totally disregard-

ed. The impetuous youth prepared for instant attack, and the princess

had barely time to regain her father’s tent, when hostilities were com-

menced.

The soldiers of the viceroy rushed furiously upon the royal encamp-

ment, and Aclius succeeded in forcing his way, at the head of a small

body of troops, to the very pavilion of his father-in-law. But he was

here struck from his horse by a stone, and stumbled upon the ground.

A panic seized the army of the fallen leader, and the rabble casting away

their arms, fled in all directions. |

The aged Abuna found himself alone and deserted in the same spot

which he had occupied during the attack. His years and high clerical

learning disarmed the violence of the Abyssinian soldiery, but a Portu-

guese partizan at length threw himself upon the Patriarch, and regard-

less of his white and venerable hairs, transfixed him with a spear.

A frightful massacre ensued, and the heads of the principal leaders of the

unsuccessful rebellion were exposed on the gates of the capital, as a

bloody warning to the seditious.

Strengthened by this signal victory, other points of the Alexandrian

creed were attacked in succession, and the time of the Jesuits was fully

occupied in the translation into Ethiopic of sundry dogmatical treatises

on subjects of disputed faith. But the barbarism of the language was

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. ‘19

despised by most. The Latin interpolation was abhorred as magic by all,

and a furious paper controversy raged for a time until the Abyssi-

nians becoming scurrilous, the wrath of the monarch was again roused,

and he issued a severe edict, wherein the people were forbidden from

celebrating the Jewish sabbath, which from time immemorial had

hitherto been kept sacred.

The inhabitants of Begemder flew to arms, and people from all parts

of the country groaning under the yoke of foreign oppression, poured in

to join the standard of rebellion, which Joanel had reared on the plains

of his government. A horde of Galla delighting in the confusion, offer-

ed their assistance, and the most haughty conditions were speedily con-

veyed to court from a large assembly in arms.

Again the most earnest entreaties were employed to induce the em-

peror to compromise ; but influenced by the words of the Jesuits, he call-

ed together his principal chieftains, monks, and learned men, and in their

presence solemnly declared, that he would defend the Catholic religion

to the last drop of his blood, adding, that it was the first duty of his sub-

jects to obey their legitimate monarch.

Energetic measures were forthwith agreed upon, and at the head of

a large army, the king proceeded in person to the war. Joanel finding

himself too weak to contend in the plains, withdrew to the inaccessible

mountains, where the blockade of the royal troops soon caused a scarcity

of provisions. His forces gradually deserted, and he himself escaping

to the Galla, was pursued, betrayed, and put to death. f

This reverse sustained by the defenders of the old cause, did not how-

ever intimidate the inhabitants of Damat, a province situated on the

banks of the Nile; for hardly had the emperor reached his capital,

than the population rose en masse, with the determination of dethroning

a monarch, who so basely truckled to foreign yoke, and of driving from

the land the authors of its destruction. An army of fourteen thousand

watriors was speedily organized, and monks and hermits, burning with

zeal in the cause emerged from the cave and from the wilderness, to join

the fast swelling ranks.

Ras Cella Christos marched against the rebels, but desertion consi-

derably thinned his troops, and he confronted the enemy with barely one-

half the numerical strength of their formidable army. Governor of the

province, and greatly beloved by the people, a proposal was tendered to

7920 Repori on Shoa [No. 140.

him, that if he would only lend his assistance in burning the monkish

books, and hanging the worthy fathers themselves upon tall trees, he

might be seated upon the imperial throne of his ancestors. But the

general despising the offer, and resting confidence in the firelocks of the

Portuguese, rushed to the attack. The combat raged fiercely for a time.

Four hundred monks devoting themselves to death, carried destruction

through the royal host ; but the tide of victory set at length in his favor,

and after a fearful carnage on either side, he found himself master of the

field.

Great rejoicings at court followed the news of this success. Peter

declared that heaven, by the extermination of his enemies, had given the

desired sign, that the Roman Catholic should be the religion of the land,

and the emperor, who partly from fear of his subjects, and partly from

dislike to relinquish his supernumerary wives and concubines, had not as

yet publicly professed the Latin religion, now openly embraced the faith,

and confessed his sins to the triumphant Jesuit.

A letter containing the royal sentiments was published for the benefit

of the nation. ‘The king henceforth obeys the Pope of Rome, the

successor of St. Peter, chief of the Apostles, who could neither err in doc-

trine nor in conduct, and all subjects are hereby advised to adopt the

same creed.” And the missionary who now reasonably imagined, that

the work was satisfactorily concluded, wrote to the courts of Rome and

Lisbon, requesting that a Patriarch and twenty ecclesiastics might be

immediately sent to the vineyard, adding, that although the harvest was

plentiful, the labourers were but few.

The happy tidings were received by Philip the Fourth of Spain ; Mutio

Vitelesse, the general of Jesuits offered to proceed in person, but the

Pope refused permission, as had been the case with his predecessor

Loyola, and Alphonse Mendez, a learned doctor of the Society of Jesus,

was inaugurated at Lisbon with all the customary solemnities.

After suffering much difficulty and delay in his passage, the Portuguese

Patriarch at length arrived on the Danakil coast, with a large train of

priests, servants, masons, and musicians. The same greediness and cu-

pidity were experienced amongst the savage Adaiel, that the traveller finds

at the present day : baseness and avarice having stamped their character

for generations ; but the troubles of a weary march were soon forgotten

in the cordial reception which awaited the party at the royal camp, and

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 721

the day was finally fixed when the homage of the king and of the coun-

try should be rendered to the Pepe of Rome.

On the 11th of February 1626, the court and the nobles of the

land were assembled in the open air. ‘Two rich thrones were occupied

by the monarch and his distinguished guest, and a surrounding multi-

tude gazed upon the imposing ceremony in silence. The hour is come,

exclaimed Mendez, when the king shall satisfy the debt of his ancestors,

and submit himself and his people to the only true head of the Church.

A copy of the Gospel was produced, and the monarch falling upon his

knees, took the oath of homage. ‘ We king of the kings of Ethiopia,

believe and confess, that the Pope of Rome is the true successor of the

Apostle St. Peter, and that he holds the same power, dignity and domi-

nion over the whole Christian church. ‘Therefore we promise, offer,

and swear sincere obedience to the holy father, Urban, by God’s grace,

Pope and our Lord, and throw humbly at his feet our person and our

kingdom.” |

As the emperor rose from his position, Ras Cella Christos suddenly

drawing his sword, shouted aloud: ‘‘ What is now done, is done for

ever, and whoso in future disclaims the act, shall taste the sharp edge

of his trusty weapon. I do homage only to true Catholic kings.” The

monks, clergy, and noblemen followed the example of their superiors,

and the assembly was closed by a public edict proclaimed through the

royal herald, that all Abyssinians should, under pain of death, forth-

with embrace the Roman religion.

Palaces and revenues were set apart for the ministers of the new

faith. Seminaries for youth were established throughout the coun-

try, and baptism and ordination progressed in peace. The success

of the Jesuits increased rapidly, and many thousand souls were

enrolled, who had been converted from the delusions of the Alex-

- andrian creed.

The trial of two years failed, however, to convince the nation of

the benefits of the new religion, and the Emperor and Patriarch could

not deceive themselves in the fact, that the cause advanced rather in ap-

pearance than in reality. Missionaries who entered the native churches

were found murdered in their beds, the most disparaging stories were

everywhere circulated regarding the holy fathers, and more particularly

on the representation of Scriptural performances at the Paschal feast,

5 B

722 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

when demons being introduced by Romans upon the stage, the specta- 1

tors rushed simultaneously from the theatre exclaiming, ‘“‘ Alas they ©

have brought with them devils from the infernal regions,” and the tale —

spread like wildfire throughout the land.

Nothing daunted by the unfortunate fate of Aclius and Joanes, Tekla —

Georgis, another son-in-law of the emperor, with a large body of the —

discontented rose to defend the religion of their forefathers. Burning |

the crosses and rosaries together with a Jesuit priest, who fell into their :

hands, the party rapidly increased, and the emperor was compelled to |

march an army to quell the insurrection. The rebels were completely |

routed by Rebaxus, the viceroy of Tigre, and all who fell into his hands, :

men, women and children, were barbarously massacred. Georgis and _

his sister Adera concealed themselves in a cave during three days, but

were at length discovered and brought before the irritated emperor,

and condemned, by the advice of the Jesuits, to be burned to death as a |

heretic. Georgis was allowed by the monarch publicly to solicit the

Patriarch to be admitted into the Roman church, but it being after-

wards considered politic to imagine that his mtentions were insincere, |

the unfortunate prince was hung in front of the palace in presence of

the whole court ; and his devoted sister fifteen days afterwards, suffer- |

ed the same fate upon the same tree; notwithstanding that the most |

strenuous efforts. were made to save her life by the queen, and by all |

classes of society.

To increase the dread effects of his tyranny, the emperor now issu- |

ed a manifesto, that even as he had punished with death the obstinacy of |

his own son-in-law, so he would of a surety not spare any who in

future committed a like transgression. The remarks of the worthy

missionary Antoine regarding this execution, will shew the spirit which |

animated the fathers in their course of persecution, so novel in the |

annals of Abyssinia, and so contrary to the mildness of the Christian |

faith. He who reads with attention the history of Ethiopia will ob- |

serve, that at no previous period was such ardent zeal displayed for the |

_ honor of religion, and a direct miracle indeed must have induced the |

emperor to hang his own son-in-law in the blessed cause. |

Dazzled by the success that had hitherto attended their measures, the |

Patriarch and his colleagues now plunged headlong into proceedings |

which eventually proved disastrous to their cause. Excommunications

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 723

were lightly launched in civil disputes, and the souls of the royal coun-

cillors of the state were committed to the devil for daring to question the

authority of the foreign priest. Conspiracies were hatched against the

imperial person, and the body of a distinguished nonconformist ecclesi-

astic, which had been interred within the walls of the church, was

exhumed by the orders of the Portuguese prelate, and thrown to the

wild beasts ; an action which raised the indignation of the Ethiopians to

the highest pitch against a set of men, who had ever the words of

religion in their mouth; but who, after persecuting the living, denied

even to the dead that repose which neither Pagan. nor Mahomedan

ever disturbed.

The detestation of the fathers and their religion daily waxed stronger

in the hearts of all. Their great patron, Ras Cella Christos, was de-

prived of power and property for seditious attempts, and the bold moun-

taineers of Begemedet at length seized their long spears to uphold the

faith of their ancestors. The viceroy was driven from the province, and

Malcaus, a youth of royal blood appointed defender of the ancient

religion, and leader of the armed host of peasants, who flocked to his

standard from all parts of the country; but especially from Lasta, the

seat of the bravest warriors of the land.

To quell this insurrection, the emperor assembled in Godjam an army

of twenty-five thousand men, and attacked the insurgents among their

strong-holds. His troops were, however, repulsed at all points, with the

loss of many officers and men, and he was reluctantly obliged to retreat

to the plains. Deputies followed from the victorious camp, to suppli-

cate him to take pity upon his subjects, and to dismiss those evil-

minded strangers, who had so long oppressed Abyssinia. The royal

army was in no heart or condition to renew hostilities; rumours went

through the land that angels sent from heaven had proclaimed the res-

toration of the ancient religion, and in the general excitement the king

perceived that his own authority would be fatally compromised, unless

some concessions were made.

But the Patriarch was inflexible, and ietters were at the same time

received from Rome, instigating the emperor to combat stoutly with his

rebellious subjects, and extending to Ethiopia the general absolution

of the great year of Jubilee. The unhappy inhabitants laughed to

scorn the offer of this indulgence, and were utterly unable to compre-

724 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

hend, by what authority the Pope held in his possession the keys of the

kingdom of heaven.

Meanwhile the civil war continued with great expenditure of life, and

alternate success on either side. Enticed on to the plain, the enemy

were generally worsted by the royal troops; but among the recesses of

their native rocks, the mountaineers had always the advantage. No sign

of intended submission could be observed, and the monarch becoming

suspicious of the Jesuits, who were erecting posts and strong-holds under

the guise of churches and residences, lent a favourable ear to the entrea-

ties of his subjects.

A second remonstrance was penned, wherein he forcibly set forth to

the Portuguese Bishop, that the Roman religion had not been introduced

into the country by the miracles or the preaching of the fathers ; but by

royal edict and ordinance, in opposition to the wish of the entire popula-

tion, and that the prelate must devise some milder measure, for the

furtherance of the true faith. |

Foreseeing a heavy storm in abeyance in case of refusal, Mendez re-

luctantly complied with the proposal of a modified church code, under

the restriction, that no public manifesto should announce the change,

which must be gradually and silently introduced.

The ancient liturgy and the ancient holidays were thus restored, and

the celebration of the Jewish sabbath once again permitted.

But the concession was insufficient, and came too late to pacify the

turbulent mountaineers of Lasta, who had been altogether victorious

during the war. They would listen to no modification of their first

demand ; but imperatively insisted upon the complete establishment of

their ancient ecclesiastical institutions, together with the expulsion of the

foreigners from the land.

The liberty and the customs of highlanders are seldom invaded with

success, and a religion detested by the common people, cannot without

much difficulty be introduced by the prince. Weary of so many rebel-

lions, and murders, and excommunications, the king in his advanced

age, began to view with an unfavorable eye the firebrand authors of

these disturbances. Suspecting his brother and the Patriarch of

suspicious views; offended by the contumacy of his subjects, and the

increasing diminution of his own authority ; disgusted with the present

state of affairs, and apprehensive of future events; he now seriously

1843. ] and the Abyssinian Church. 725

bethought himself of restoring the church to its original footing; but

the rebellion must in the first instance be quelled, and having with

this view concluded an alliance with the Galla, he marched towards

Lasta.

Twenty thousand peasants, confident of victory, descending from their

mountains, rushed upon the plain to meet the royal force. The two

armies for a time remained in sight in that still calmness which

precedes an earthquake. At length the Galla cavalry dashing at full

speed on the crowded masses of the enemy, threw them into complete

confusion, a fierce combat lasted until the going down of the sun, and

the field of battle was left covered with eight thousand bodies of the

insurgents.

Throwing themselves prostrate before the triumphant monarch on this

scene of carnage, the vanquished peasants expressed their grief in the

following lively terms: ‘‘ Who are these men,” they asked with groans,

““ whom you now behold bathed in blood. Are they Moslem, or Pagan,

or even the enemies of the kingdom? No, they are Christians—they

are all thy subjects, knit together by the most tender bands of blood,

friendship and affection. ‘Those warriors who now lie lifeless at thy feet,

would under a better government have proved the bulwarks of the throne,

and the terror of those very men by whose hands they have fallen. The

Pagans even blush at thy cruelty, and call thee renegade for having

abandoned the religion of thy fathers. Cease, O emperor, in mercy

cease, to prolong a struggle, which must end in the downfall of the throne,

and the ruin of all religion in the land.”’ ‘The empress also mingled her

tears with the groans of the wounded petitioners, and adjured the king

for the love of God, and in the name of future generations, to take pity

upon his subjects, and desist from performing a sepulchre for himself

and for his family. ‘‘ What have you gained by this battle ?” she exclaim-

ed, “‘you have introduced into the kingdom hordes of Pagan Gallas, who

detest yourself equally as your religion ; but futile will be your attempt

to establish in Ethiopia a form of worship which is unknown to the

greater part of your people, and to the remainder is known only to be

resisted to the last drop of their blood.”

These representations sunk deep into the heart of the emperor, and

_ instead of proceeding in triumph to the capital, he retired to a secluded

spot to give vent to his feelings, and bewail the loss he had created.

726 Report on Shoa [No. 140.

The Galla troops were dismissed, and having collected all the principal

monks and clergy, he announced his resolution of allowing the nation to

return to the faith of their forefathers.

Immediately on this intelligence, the Patriarch hurried with all the

Jesuit fathers to soothe the ruffled mood of the monarch ! ‘“ I had fondly

imagined,” exclaimed Mendez, ‘‘ that we were the victors, but behold

we are the vanquished, and the rebels routed and put to flight, have

obtained all that they desired. Call to mind how many fields thou hast

won with the assistance of God and the Portuguese, and remember that

thou didst embrace the true faith of thine own free will. We have been

sent unto the charge by the Pope of Rome and by the king of Portugal,

—beware of irritating great potentates to just indignation. They be

indeed far off, but God is nigh at hand, and thy apostacy will defile

thy name and that of thy nation, and leave an impenetrable stain

upon the lion of the tribe of Judah which glitters in the standard of

Ethiopia.”

On the conclusion of this harangue all threw themselves at his feet,

entreated an immediate order to execution, rather than a confirmation

from his lips of the rash resolution he had taken.

Retaining a too lively recollection of the streams of blood that had

been poured out upon the plains of Lasta, the emperor quietly allowed

the Jesuits to arise, and unmoved by their earnest prayers and entreaties,

replied shortly,—that his adherence to the Catholic faith had already

caused the slaughter of a greater portion of his subjects, and that he

would have no further dealings whatever with their doctrines.

The film fell from before the eyes of the discomfited monks. The

friends of the Alexandrian faith rallying round the throne, united their

utmost efforts to strengthen the emperor in his resolves, and the rumour

spread abroad, that on the fast of St. John the Baptist, the ancient

religion was to be re-established throughout the land.

Thousands assembled in the capital on that day to assist in the

ceremony, and although temporarily disappointed, the clergy proved

that this act of justice could no longer be safely delayed.

Every art and stratagem was still resorted to by the Patriarch to put

off the evil day, but the emperor roused at length by the harsh and un-

compromising character of the Jesuit, fiercely exclaimed: ‘‘ Has then

the sceptre departed from mine hand for ever?” and the royal trumpets

1843.] and the Abyssinian Church. 797

suddenly sounded through the streets of Gendar, as the herald announc-

ed the following proclamation to the empire.

« Listen and hear, we formerly recommended to you the adoption of the

Roman Catholic creed, on the firm conviction, that it was the only true

one; but numbers of our subjects having sacrificed their lives for the

religion of their ancestors, and we henceforth accord its free exercise

unto all. Let the priests resume possession of their churches, and

worship the God of their forefathers. Farewell and rejoice.”

It is not possible to describe the rapture with which this welcome

edict was received. The praises of the emperor resounded from every

quarter.

The rosaries and the chaplets of the Jesuits were tossed out of

doors and burnt in a heap. Men and women danced for joy in the

streets, and the song of liberation burst from the lips of the disen-

thralled multitude.

‘* The flock of Ethiopia has escaped from the hyenas of the West.

The doctrine of St. Mark is the column of our Church.

Let all rejoice, and sing Hallelujah;

For the sun of our deliverance has lighted up the land.”’ /

Sunscus did not long survive this victory over himself, for a slow

fever carried him off during the month of September of the same year,

and his son Basilides was called to the throne. His first act was the

suppression of a conspiracy raised against him by the Jesuits, who were

in consequence deprived of their arms and munitions of war, and exiled

from Maignagna. ‘The obstinate prelate long refused to submit to this

order, until his effects having been plundered by the banditti, he also,

after destroying the pictures and sacred utensils of the church, withdrew

from the province for ever.

Still the fathers had not relinquished all hope of exciting disorder

in Ethiopia, and finding their profit in the troubled waters. Entering

into a treaty with the rebellious chieftain Johannes Akayus, upon con-

dition of protection, they promised liberal supplies from India, both of

money and Portuguese soldiers; but the emperor being soon made ac-

quainted with the arrangement, expelled and commanded them to

repair forthwith to Massowah.

The banished foreigners lay for some time concealed among the

mountains, awaiting the expected succours from Goa; but the Patriarch

728 Report on Shoa and the Abyssinian Church. [No. 140.

feeling insecure in his hiding place, escaped with great difficulty to the

sea coast, where he was seized by the Turks, and for a season forced to

work like a slave. Before taking leave of Akayus, his consent had been

obtained to the sojourn of four Jesuits until assistance should arrive

from the Portuguese possessions. Five years, however, elapsed with-

out any accomplishment of their hopes, and they were finally delivered

up to the Abyssinian monarch, who exiled them as traitors to the pro-

vince of Lasta, where falling into the grasp of the infuriated populace,

they were hung upon a tall tree to expiate their ambitious zeal.

After much persecution and insults at the hands of the Turks, and ex-

treme suffering from the intolerable heat of the climate, the Patriarch

was ransomed for the sum of four thousand dollars, and landed at Goa,

where he sedulously employed himself in raising troops for the conquest

of Abyssinia. Father Lobo was despatched to Europe in order to de-

mand military assistance, which was never granted, and all the prelate’s

endeavours proving unsuccessful, he was at length reluctantly compelled

to abandon the project in despair.

Thus terminated the labours of a mission, which for craft and cruelty

has been seldom equalled in the annals of time. Whilst Rome must

indeed have been prompted by no ordinary motion, to persevere so per-

tinaciously in a work of conversion through all the horrors of banish-

ment and martyrdom, the unworthy means resorted to by the daunt-

less, but unsuccessful agents employed in the enterprize, have left an

indelible stain upon the page of her history.

(Signed) D. Granam, Captain,

Principal Assistant to the Embassy.

(True Copies.)

Signed) J. P. WiLLovenusy,

Secretary to the Government of Bombay.

729

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

(Wednesday Evening, 4th August, 1843. )

The usual Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s Rooms, on Wed-

nesday evening at 81 rp. m. The Honorable the President in the chair.

The following new members were proposed :—

Major W. Anderson, B. H. A.-—Proposed by H. Torrens, Esq., seconded

by Capt. Broome, B. A.

Dr. Mouat, B. M. S.—Proposed by J. Thomason, Esq., seconded by H.

Torrens, Esq.

Capt. Stephen, B. N. I.—Proposed by J. Thomason, Esq., seconded by

Mr. H. Piddington.

M. Adolphe Delessert, author of “ Souvenirs d’un Voyage dans | Inde” was

introduced to the Society, and upon the motion of Colonel Forbes, second-

ed by Mr. Torrens, was unanimously elected an Associate and Corres-

ponding Member : the usual communication of the rules, &c. was ordered

to be made to him.

The following list of Books presented and purchased was read :—

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, for July, 1843.

Naturalist’s Library—Ichthyology, vol. iv. British Fishes, vol. i. by R. Hamilton. Edinburgh,

1843.— Purchased.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, July 1843, vol. iv. No. 7. Bombay.—Presented by the Editor.

London Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science, 3d Series, vol, 22.

Nos. 143-144, February and March, 1843.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, London, vol. 41. No. 69, March 1843.

Chapitre inconnu du Coran, par M. G. de Tassy. Paris 1842, Pamphlet.—Presented by the Transla-

tor.

Julien, Simple exposé d’un fait honorable, odiensment denaturé dans un libelle récent de M,

Pauthier. Paris, 1842, Pamphlet presented by the Author,

Journal des Savants, for November and December 1842, and Janvier 1843. Paris purchased.

Meteorological Register for Calcutta, for the month of June 1843. Surveyor General’s Office,

Mineral Resources of Southern India, by Lieut. (now Capt.) Newbold, F.R.S. &c.—Presented by the

Author.

Penny Cyclopedia, vol. 1 to 24.

The Secretary called the attention of the Meeting to the absolute neces-

sity for the purchase of books of standard merit, for reference in the various

departments of the natural sciences. He stated, that while the Society’s

splendid and increasing collections in Zoology, Osteology, Paleontology,

Geology, Mineralogy, and their various subordinate branches, were daily

increasing, and likely to increase, the Curators, who were its paid and work-

ing officers in all these and other departments, were obliged to find the ne-

cessary works of reference as they best could, in their own libraries, or in

those of others, and thus much valuable time was lost, and many sources

of information were closed to them from the frequent impossibility of pro-

730 Asiatic Society. [No. 140.

curing rare, or costly, or little known works, and from the want of those

recent ones which afford the knowledge of the current and hourly chang-

ing state of science at home; and that without such works it was most

unfair, as well as impossible, to expect that the duties of the Curators and

the Editorship of the Society’s Journal could be conducted in a manner

fully creditable to the high reputation of the Society. He had therefore

presented this evening the following works for the inspection of the So-

ciety, and for purchase, if these views were approved of :—

Cuvier, Histoire Naturellede Mammiféres, Paris, 1824, 3 vols.

Selby’s British Ornithology, 2 vols.

And he proposed farther, that upon lists being prepared by the Curators,

the purchase of such standard works as they may require be authorised.

Some members expressed a wish, that some of the literary departments

of the Society’s Library should also be better furnished, particularly those

relative to Oriental matters. After some conversation, the purchase of the

Penny Cyclopedia was authorised. Cuvier’s Mammiféres was to remain

till the decision of the Committee of Papers was known, and Selby’s Bri-

tish Ornithology being considered as nearly superseded by later and better

works of reference, was returned to the booksellers. It was farther agreed,

that a memorandum should be circulated to the Committee of Papers on

this subject.

Read the following letter from the Secretary to the Government of Bom-

bay :—

No. 1460 of 1843.

From the Chief Secretary to the Government of Bombay, to H. Torrens, Esa@., Secretary to the

Calcutta Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.

Political Department.

Srr,—I am directed by the Hon’ble the Governor in Council, to acknowledge the receipt of your

letter, dated the 9th ultimo, and to inform you, that the 24 copies of the Vocabulary, by Captain

Eastwick, of the Scindee Language therewith forwarded, have been received by me.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

L. R. RED,

Bombay Castle, 26th June, 1843. Chief Secretary to Government.

No. 1625 of 1843.

From the Chief Secretary to the Government of Bombay, to H. Pipp1neTon, Esa., Sub-Secretary

Asiatic Society at Caicutta.

Political Department. ;

S1r,—I am directed by the Hon’ble the Governor in Council, to acknowledge the receipt of your

letter, dated the 10th of May last, and to acquaint, you for the information of the Committee of the

Asiatic Society, that the packets which accompanied it, have been forwarded to Major Leech and

Captain Eastwick. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

Bombay Castle, 15th July, 1843. L. R. Rerp,

Chief Secretary.

1843. | Asiatic Society. 731

Read the following letter from the Secretary :—

To F. J. Haruipay, Esg. Secretury to Government of Bengal, Asiatic Society’s

Rooms, the 21st June, 1843.

S1R,-—With reference to Mr. Secretary Bushby’s Letter, No. 446, dated the 31st March, 1841,

I have the honor, by direction of the Hon’ble the President and Members of the Committee of Pa-

pers of the Asiatic Society, to submit a statement of Disbursements made by the Society on account

of the Museum Economic Geology from February 1841 to May 1843 both the months inclusive

amounting to Rupees 1,040: 7: 3, of which a considerable proportion is for postage and apparatus for

the laboratory ; and to request that the permission of the Hon’ble the Deputy Governor of Bengal

may be obtained for the Sub-Treasurer to pay the amount to my receipt.

2. I am also desired to request, that His Honor will accord the Society authority to draw from

the General Treasury monthly a sum not exceeding Rupees 64, for Establishment and Contingencies

3 for the Museum Economic Geology, as exhibited in the margin,

Establishment.

; eererice ES i sary for the efficient discharge of the duties of the Museum.

phy Seay, gy

ARE ON aehiare) aie sbis k's 5 3. The utmost care will be taken in conducting the outlay on

which after the experience of two years seems indispensably neces-

roe such a scale of strict economy as to be kept within the Estimate

Contingencies, ,, 35 for Contingencies. Should a surplus exist at the close of the year, it

Cee his, 6s will be duly carried to credit on account of the ensuing twelve

months, and special report made accordingly.

Ihave, &c.

H. ToRRENS,

Vice President and Secretary Asiatic Society.

And the reply thereto, as follows :—

No. 691.

From Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. ToRRENS, Esa., Vice President and

Secretary Asiatic Society, dated Fort William, 3d July, 1843.

S1r,—I am directed by the Hon’ble the Deputy Governor of Bengal to acknowledge the receipt of

your letter, dated the 21st ultimo, submitting a statement of Disbursements made by the Asiatic

Society on account of the Museum Economic Geology, from February 1841 to May 1843, amounting

to Rupees 1,040: 7: 3, and in reply to state, that the necessary instructions for payment of the same

will be issued from the Financial Department to the Sub-Treasurer.

As regards the further request of the Society for authority to draw from the General Treasury a

monthly sum of Rupees 64 for Establishment and Contingencies, for the Museum Economic Geology,

I am desired to say, that a reference on the subject will be made to the Supreme Government.

1 have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

A. TURNBULL,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

Read the following letter from Professor J. Mohl of Paris :—

H. Pippineron, Ese., Acting Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

S1r,—I have received your letter of the 6th of March, by which you inform me, that the Asiatic

Society of Bengal has done me the honor to elect me a Member of the Society, I am very grati-

fied for the great distinction thus conferred upon me, and beg you will have the kindness to lay be-

fore the Council of the Society, the expression of my thanks for it.

I have the honour to be, Sir,

Paris, 20th of May, 1843. Your very obedient Servant,

Junius Mou,

732 Asiatic Society. [No. 140.

And the following extract of a private letter from M. Mohl, addressed to

Mr. Piddington, as Acting Secretary of the Society, in reference to the in-

complete presentation of works in the Society’s Library. (See Proceedings

of July.)

My pear Srr,—Allow me first to thank you for the part you have had the

goodness to take in my election as Foreign Member of your Society ; it is an honour

which I appreciate very highly. I will try to answer on all the points on which you

have written to our friend Troyer.

ist. The debt of the French Government to the Asiatic Society for copies of the

Vedas must by this time be paid. It ought to have been done a long time ago.

2d. The books you want shall be bought and sent very shortly. I see that there

is not money enough at the account of your Society, because the delay of the box

containing the 4th vol. of the Mahabharat has stopt the sale of the book for a

long time, and most people who have bought the ist vol. have got impatient and sent

to London for the last volume. But the books shall be bought notwithstanding.

3d, You have sent a list of books which have arrived incomplete ; I will try to

explain the matter as far as I can.

Agassiz, Hist. Nat. des Poissons ter livraison. I do not think this was sent by our

Society.

Cuvier Hist. des Poissons vol. i.i—xvi. If a further vol. should have appeared,

it shall be sent.

Quatremére Hist. des Mongols, vol. i. Is all that has appeared.

Mohl, Livre des Rois de Firdousi, vol. i. The second vol. has appeared and shall

be sent.

Histoire Generale des Huns, vols. i. andii. Iam sure this was not sent by us.

Quairemére, Histoire des Sultans Mamelouks 1. et 2. Is all that has appeared, but

a new vol. is coming out. It was not sent by us, but most likely by the Translat-

ing Fund in London, whose property it is.

Dubeux, Chronique de Tabari, vol. i. Is all that has appeared, the second vol.

is printing; it is the Translating Fund’s property.

Jucquemont, Voyage dans l’Inde, 13 livrs. here have appeared 45 livrs. till now.

It was most likely sent by the French Minister of Public Instruction, and I will en-

quire why the rest has not yet been sent, and try to get it.

Vendidad Sadi, by Burnouf, nine numbers were sent by us; it is all that appeared,

but the last number is printing, and shall be sent.

L’ Espagne Artistique, 1 livr. was not sent by us.

Harivansa by Langlois, must have been sent by the Translating Fund, whose

property it is.

Description del Egypte. Ihave no idea who has sent this. J asked about six

years ago M. Thiers, then Minister of the Interior, to present a copy of it to your

Society ; it is possible he sent it through the Marine. I will try to get it completed,

but am not sure to be able to doit. I know it is a most complicated business to get

a copy of this work,

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 733

4th. I am afraid a large box of books sent by us must have been lost somewhere,

Mr. Prinsep offered us to take charge of a number of copies of the Asiatic Society’s

books, to be sold in Calcutta, we sent in 1838, a few copies of each; amongst the

rest, 12 copies of Mr. Troyer’s Raja Tarangini, but we never heard of them again,

and I do not find in your lists of books received any mention of them. Mr. Prinsep

had advised me to address the books to the Governor General, as they would be

then free of duty, and as the Governor General in the interval went to Upper India,

it is possible the books may have followed him, and be left or lost somewhere. It

is most likely quite useless to enquire now for them; but if you should believe that

any of them would find buyers, I would be very happy to send another set. You will

find the list on the cover of any number of our Journal.

Read, and approved, the following drafts of letters to Ministers of Fo-

reign Courts, and to the Vice-Chancellors of Universities, to be sent with

the presentations of the Society’s Oriental works, as per resolution of the

last Meeting, (See Proceedings of July,) and it was farther resolved, that

communications should be opened with literary and scientific societies in

Europe and America as occasion might offer.

To His Excellency the Minister of Public Instruction of France.

I have the honour, by direction of the President and Members of the Asiatic Society

of Bengal, to forward to you two complete sets of each of the works noted in the

margin, being standard works in (and upon) the Arabic, Sanscrit and Thibetan lan-

guages, published or deposited for sale with the Society.

The Society requests that you will place these books at the disposal of His Majesty

the King of the French, with the expression of their respectful hope, that they may

prove of sufficient interest to merit a place in the Royal Library, or in one of the Pub-

lic Libraries of His Majesty’s kingdom.

Should any works published, (as so many have munificently been by the French Go-

vernment, ) for the general benefit of science, be now in course of distribution to learned

bodies, Colleges, and Societies in Europe, the Asiatic Society of Bengal would beg

to inscribe its name as that of a constituted body labouring in the cause of general

science, and earnestly desirous of reciprocating the presentation of works, the tendency

of which is its advancement.

France, 2—Holland, 1—Prussia, 1i—Austria, 1—Russia, i—America, 1— Universities of Oxford,

Cambridge Dublin, and Christiana.

To the Very Reverend the Vice Chancellor of the University of Oxford.

Rev. Sir,—I have the honour, by direction of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, to

forward to you for presentation to the University over which you preside, the books

noted in the margin, being standard works in (and upon) the Arabic, Sanscrit, and

Thibetan languages, published by or deposited for sale with the Society.

The Society begs that should any works published for distribution to learned bodies

_by the University, or under its patronage, be now in course ofsuch distribution, its name

may be inscribed as desirous of reciprocating the presentation of works, the tendency

of which may be the advancement of science and literature.

734 Asiatic Society. (No. 140.

No. Il. of Mr. Heatly’s Paper on the Mineral Resources of India, and

a Memoir of Mr. Keir, one of the early speculators in various Indian

products, were presented for the Journal, to the Editors of which they

were referred.

Extract of a letter from Mr. Batten, C. 8. dated Almorah, 17th July, was

read, stating that Capt. Boyes, 6th L. C. (See Proceedings of June p. 521)

had unfortunately only reached Milum in his progress towards the Passes,

having there lost almost all his baggage by a sudden flood.

The following letter, accompanying a note on a Fossil Antelope, from

the Dadoopoor Museum, by Capt. Baker, B. E., was@resented with a very

beautiful drawing, shewing the close relation of the Fossil to the African

Antelope types, Acronotus Caama (the Hartebeeste,) and A. Lunata,

(the Sassaybe,) with its deviation from the Indian Antelopes. ‘This curi-

ous relation excited much interest, and the paper and plate will appear in

an early number of the Journal.

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society.

DEAR S1R,—I have the pleasure to forward a paper for publication in the Journal of our Society,

should you consider it suitable for that purpose. I am about sending the e/éte of my Fossils to Eu-

rope, and will, if I can find time, send you a brief notice of the most remarkable among them.

; Believe me, dear Sir,

Kurnaul, July 21, 1848. Yours sincerely,

W. E. BAKER.

Read the following letter from Captain D. Williams, first Assistant to the

Commissioner, Arracan, accompanying two Gold Coins presented by him to

the Society.

Ramree, Arracan, 5th July, 1843.

DEAR S1R,—I have now the pleasure to send you, for presentation to the Asiatic Society, two of

the gold coins found on Cheduba Island, they are the most perfect of those found.

The Natives who found them tell me, they were dug up out of the sand on the Sea beach, about

100 yards from the Sea, scattered about.

I shall feel obliged if you will let me know what country, &c. these coins belonged to, as I can

gather no information on the subject from the Mugs. Yours truly,

D. WILLIAMS.

The coins have not yet been recognised, and we are inclined to consider

them, if not Siamese or Burmese, of a very early Hindoo type, perhaps

even as far back as the dynasties under which the Hindoos were a

navigating and a colonising people. They are of thin sheet gold, rudely

cut out, 1.4 and 1.3 inches in diameter, but weighing only 76.5 and 77

grains, and stamped on one side only. The central emblem is an elephant

surrounded by monograms or symbols. We shall take an early opportu-

nity of lithographing these curious reliques.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 735

Read a paper ‘“‘ On an improved Sympiesometer,” called “The Tropical

Tempest Sympiesometer,” by Mr. H. Piddington. The instrument was

also exhibited, and the paper referred to the Journal.

Read ‘‘Memorandum on Zoological Desiderata from Arabia,” by E.

Blyth, Esq. the Society’s Curator, intended for transmission to Aden

and other parts in that neighbourhood.

Read the following letter from Major W. Anderson, B. H. A. accompa-

nying 19 bags of specimens therein alluded to :—

To the VicémPresident and Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

My DEAR ToRRENS,—I have the pleasure to send you the various bags of musters. On looking

them over, I fear they are not so valuable as I had hoped, but as they are, I should like a good pro-

fessional report, as to quality, use, and price here, which information from their own country I have

in Persian, and will prepare.

1, Roodung.

2. Pistah.

3. Zureesh.

4, Hanab.

5. Hing.

6. Buz-Gung.

7. Zeeruh Sufueed.

8. Gul Kajuree.

9. Alooee Eeranee.

10. Teerungabeen.

11. Zaj.

12. Keermuz,

13. Sualob Misree.

14. Sulphur from Bagh.

15. Gum used to fix or dry paint.

16. Safflower, I suspect. x

17. Teerungbaeen.

18. Toolez.

19. Zumah Bulooree.

Your’s sincerely,

Ichapoor, 26th July, 1843. Wm. ANDERSON.

A paper on ‘“‘ The Mineral Resources of Southern India,” by Lieut. (now

Capt.) Newbold, M. N. I. was presented by the author.

Read a letter from A. A Sevestre, Esq. giving cover to his subscription

of 50 rupees, towards the Portrait of the Hon’ble Mr. Prinsep.

Report of the Curator of Museum Economic Geology, &c.

Geological and Mineralogical Department.—We have to announce here the contribu-

tion of a very handsome little suite of Geological specimens from Almorah to Mul-

Jarie, sent by our new and zealous member, Capt. Boyes of the 6th Light Cavalry.

These specimens are unfortunately small, but they are accompanied by a capital

736 Asiatic Society. : [No. 140.

Map of the localities, and an accurate catalogue of them, to which illness has pre-

vented me from adding the Mineralogical designations.

Museum of Economic Geology.—I noted in my last Report that we have received

a reference from Government on the subject of the Argentiferous Lead and Anti-

mony Ore of Chota Nagpore, forwarded to Government by Colonel Ouseley ; I now

present, with the correspondence, my Report to Government through our Secretary.

No. 576.

From Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. Torrens, Esa., Secre-

tary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta, dated Fort Willgm, oth June; 1843.

Sir,—I am directed to forward to you, for the purpose of being submitted to your Scciety, the

accompanying copy of a letter from the Agent to the Governor General S. W. Frontier to this De-

partment, and certain Specimens of Argentiferous Galena alluded to in the letter. The Hon’ble

the Deputy Governor of Bengal requests your Society will, in conjunction with Mr. Piddington,

make such further enquiries and experiments as may be necessary, and report the result to this

Department, I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient Servant,

A. TURNBULL,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

No. 24.

From Lieut. Col. J. R. OuseLey, Agent to the Governor General S. W. Frontier, to

T. R. Davipson, Esgq., Secretary to the Government of Bengal, Fort William,

dated 22d May, 1843.

Srr,—Herewith I beg to forward specimen of Argentiferous Galena from a place N. N. West

of this, named Hisato, for the inspection of the Hon’ble the Deputy Governor.

2d. From analysis here by Dr. Macrae, and the examination of it and tests applied by Mr. Pidding-

ton in Calcutta, reported in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, a very large proportion of silver is at-

tainable. It may be considered desirable by the Government to make further inquiry, and if, as an-

ticipated by Mr. Piddington, the results should prove so very profitable, adopt measures for working

the mine, which is within the Zemindary of Ramgurh. The lead ore is abundant.

I have the honor to be, &c.

Chota Nagpore, 22d May, 1843. (Signed) J. R. OUSELEY,

Governor General's Agent.

P.S.—Despatched this day.

1 Specimen of Ore.

1 Ditto ditto.

i Small parcel with Matrix.

(True Copy,)

A. TURNBULL,

Under-Secretary to Government of Bengal.

H. Torrens, Esq., Secretary of the Asiatic Society.

Sir,—In reply to the reference to the Museum of Economic Geology by the

Hon’ble the Deputy Governor in Council, accompanying a specimen of the ore and

matrix forwarded by Major Ouseley from Hisato, 12 miles N. N. W. of Chota Nag-

pore, under date of June, 1843, I have the honor to report as follows :—

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 737

1. My former Report (Journal, vol. xi. p. 892,) to which Major Ouseley’s Let-

ter refers stated, not that ‘‘ a very large proportion of silver was attainable,’ but

simply that the proportion of silver then found ‘‘ would in Europe be thought worth

working.’’.

2. The present specimen is a less favourable one, giving a mere trace of silver, and

this is a just instance of the uncertainty of these small laboratory trials of ores, espe-

cially as far as relates to the value of minute parts. No two experiments agree,

and where the proportion of the valuable ore is a mere fraction, the results are of

course always the more uncertain.

3. The appearance of the matrix, and the presence of the antimony are, as before

remarked, favourable indications; but they are nothing more, and indeed my report

might stop here, and be comprised in this, that the present specimen is an ore of lit-

tle or no value in its present situation, and with present appearances, but offering

indications worth farther investigation.

4. It may however be satisfactory to Government and to Major Ouseley to have

the reasons upon which this view is founded, and I therefore take leave briefly to

state them here, as it is specially within the province of our institution to explain

matters of this nature.

5. In all mining, and indeed in many other countries, it has been well remarked,

that it is not veins and ores that are wanting, but profitable ones. It was the

ignorance or neglect of this great and first principle in mining speculations, which

sacrificed so many millions of English capital in Mexico and South America. The

agents of the Mining Companies could not, or would not, suppose that a Silver mine,

or amine which produced Silver ores could be a losing concern, and they bought up,

at enormous prices, hundreds of spots from which indeed Silver was obtainable,

but not to a profit.

6. In the case before us, we have, at the most, an ore of Lead and Antimony, with

the minute portion or traces of Silver which always accompany these ores, and sup-

posing it to be obtainable in any quantity, and at the cheapest possible price, or

indeed for nothing, we should still require all the expensive resources of the best

European Metallurgy, and establishments with scientific superintendence to render

it a marketable article here. Asa mere ore, it would probably not pay its carriage

to Calcutta and freight to Europe.

7. Inaspot then affording only favorable indications, and where we have assumed

already much that is doubtful, it is clear that the first step is to know-—

I. What the vein really is?

II. What are§the facilities for, and difficulties against working it, and the expence

- attendant on all these and on the necessary superintendence ?

III. What those for transporting the products to a market are ?

I, The vein may be the outcrop of a rich mine, or it may be worthless or unwork-

able, or break off, even for Lead and Antimony, at 10 fathoms deep. It follows that a

- professional and a scientific man should first be sent to the spot with all necessary

means, that a shaft or gallery should be dug, and the ores from it, as far as he can

reach, be examined. ‘This is necessarily and indispensably the first step,

738 Asiatic Society. [No. 140.

II. During this examination, all questions relative to the facilities and difficulties

likely to attend on the working would be inquired into, and in India these are far

more than Europe, as the following enumeration of a few of them will shew: ist,

healthiness or unhealthiness of the site ; 2d, possibility of obtaining workmen ; 3d,

of subsisting them; 4th, of erecting machinery, furnaces, and the like; 5th, fuel ;

6th, drawing or pumping water ; 7th, general cost of bringing the ore to bank (i. e. to

the mouth of the mine ;) 8th, costof preparing, smelting, and produce of the metal at

the furnace.

III. Supposing the metal or ore to be thus obtained at a profitable rate, it has yet

to be taken to a market, and this involves all the questions of road, carriages, ware-

- housing and agency in Calcutta, and perhaps even freight, insurance, duties and sale

charges in England.

From the foregoing then it will be seen, that we can recommend at the most but

a careful examination of the vein as an indispensable preliminary step; but this I

should respectfully beg to do, because the locality being about the lines where the

granite and stratified formations meet is a favourable one ; because the appearance

of the ore is favourable ; and because it is really a question of much interest in a dis-

trict so little known, and so near to Calcutta, to determine what it may really prove

to be, I may mention, finally, that the matrix of the present specimen differs greatly

from the one formerly sent. There may evidently be half a dozen other valuable

mineral substances at this spot or near it, though considered as mere stones by

those unacquainted with them, One of the richest of the silver ores, for instance,

the muriate of silver, (not unfrequently found in company with such as the one

under examination,) would in all probability be thought a worthless stone.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your obedient Servant,

H. Pippineron,

28th July, 1843. Curator Museum of Economic Geology.

P.S. In illustration of the closing remark of this report, that valuable ores of Silver

(as of many other minerals) may easily be passed over as worthless stones, I beg

to quote from Professor Jameson’s Mineralogy, vol. iii. p. 75.

«In some parts of Mexico, however, as we are informed by Mr. Humboldt, the

operations of the miner are directed to a mixture of ochry brown Iron ore and

minutely disseminated native Silver.* This ochreous mixture, which is named Pacos

in Peru, is the object of considerable operations at the mines of Angangneo in the

intendancy of Valladolid, as well as at Yxtapexi in the province of Oaxaca.’’t

I am fortunately enabled to exhibit to the Society from my own collection, about

twenty specimens of silver ores of various kinds, but mostly such as-shew little or no

appearance of metal, and several are the true Pacos from Peru, the inspection of

which will at once convince the most sceptical of this curious fact. Humboldt in-

deed adds, that a very large proportion of the silver of Mexico and South America

* Of muriate of silver also.—H. P.

+ Pacos, according to Klaproth, contains Silver, 14 0

Brown Oxide of Iron, Reena ee osen ved tr ene HAL IO

Silica, sand, water, &c. bee bib aod lees abe TO

1843.] Asiatic Society. 739

is obtained not from rich ores, but from the poor ones approaching to this remarkable

mineral,

Memoranda by the Secretary and President.

I have the honor to lay before the Hon’ble the President, and the Members of the Committee of

Papers, the report of the Curator of our Museum of Economic Geology upon Major Ouseley’s speci-

men of an Ore from Chota Nagpore.

As the considerations contained in this report appear very sound and pertinent, I would submit

whether the Society would not do well in addressing Government to call special attention to them.

How far such considerations might induce high authorities to propose attaching a practical mas-

ter miner to the Department of Economic Geology confided to our Society, I of course cannot

pretend to speculate upon; but it is evident, that unless local experiment be entered upon, the

value of the ore in question as a profitable working ore can hardly be determined.

As Mr, Piddington’s reflections apply equally to all newly discovered Indian mining sites, the

employment of a professional miner on those of which we already know the existence, can alone

lead to practical results.

H. TORRENS,

29th July, 1843, Vice President and Secretary.

A copy of Mr. Piddington’s report should, I think, be forwarded to Government in reply to the

reference made to us on the subject. W. W. B.

At the close of the Meeting, the Hon’ble the President and Members

were invited to view the tablet placed over the Asoka Stone, which we

may state is placed on a stand beneath the pillar destined for the bust of

the lamented James Prinsep. The tablet is one of pure white marble

occupying a frame above, the Stone; and the inscription upon it in letters

of gold is as follows :-—

THIS EDICT OF ASOKA (B. C. 250)

IS HERE PLACED

By tue Asiatic Society oF BENGAL

IN HONOR OF

Tue PuinosoPpHER THE ANTIQUARIAN

AND THE PHILOLOGIST

BY WHOM

ITS CHARACTERS WERE FIRST DECYPHERED

JAMES PRINSEP.

The President and Members expressed their high approbation of this

arrangement, as a just tribute to the memory of their ever-to-be-lamented

Secretary and Associate.

Oriental Publications for Sale, at REDUCED prices, by the Asiatic Society.

Works. Rs. Former

Mahabharata, vol. Ist. pages 831, vol. 2d, pages 868, vol. 3rd, pages Price.

859. vol. 4th, pages 1007. royal 4to. ea bc ts ae 40 48

Large paper do. do. coe aha 3 ee cae 50 61

Index to the 4 vols. of the Mahabharut complete. eae ace Pe 6 0

Harriwansa, 563 -pages, royal 4to. eae Heo eae 5 6

Raja Tarangini, 440 pages, 4to. Bee oe a oe man 5 20

Large paper, do, do. ses Aun see se ove ane 8 12

Naishada, 917 pages, 8vo._... sie ke i sig, out 6 6

Sausruta, Ist vol. 378 pages, 2d vol. 562 pages, 8vo. ne 8 8

Fatawé A'lemgiri, ist vol. 763 pages, 2d vol. 759 pages, 3d vol. 565 pages, 4th 4

759 pages, 5th vol. €97 pages, 6th vol. 667 pages, royal 4to per vol, ae 8 10

Indya, 2d. vol. 690 pages, 3rd vol. 682 pages, 4th vol. 937 pages, 4to. 8 10

Khazanat ul Im, 694 pages, 4to. As on cn 8 10

Jawdme ul Ilm ul Riazi, 168 pages, with 17 nas Ato. LS fo 4 4

Anis ul Musharrahin, 541 pages, 4to, “5 ne na 5 5

Sharaya ool Islam, 631 pages, 4to. 8 15

Tibetan Grammar, 256 pages, 4to. ber aes Sh cn 3 8

Tibetan Dictionary, 373 pages. 4to. ae oe is oe | ae

Asiatic Researches, per vol. ae one oe He 10 12

Burnouf Memoire sur deux inscriptions cunéiformes 4to. 199 Deutace sae 3 0

Burnouf Commantaire sur le Yacna with notes &c. 2 parts pp 945. ... mite - fa 0

s. AS.

Burnouf et Lassen, Essai sur le Pali, ou Langue Sacrée de la presquile au dela

du Gange. Paris, 1826, pages 222, 8vo. one oe ose Ree ees eo

Elémens de la Grammaire Japonaise, par M. M. Rodriguez et Remusat. Paris,

1825, pages 158, 8vo. eee Ses sa eee ee rio 30

Ditto ditto Supplément. Paris, 1826 pages 31. 8vo. a aes ne

Contes Arabes, traduits par J. J. Marcel. Paris, 1835, avec notes, vol. I. pages

484, vol. II. pages 496, vol. III. pages 508, Svo. ae we tina, 0

Brosset, Elémens de la Langue Georgienne. Paris 1837, pages 122, 8vo. Paes 5 0

Klaproth, Vocabulaire et Grammaire de la langue Georgienne. Paris, 1827, pages

232, Ist part, 8vo. a ae aoe or “ch we 4 0

Cronique Georgienne, traduite par M. Brosset, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 370, 8vo. ae nee ace oe ot fen oy 0

Choix de Fables de Vartan, en Arménien et en Francais. Paris, 1825, pages 96,

Svo. onc “cb co aa ate “ne ea hy ek

Elegie sur La Prise D’Edesse, en Arménien. Paris 1828, pages 112, 8vo. pase ae

Chrestomathie Chinoise—Chinese Characters, 1833, pages 183, 4to. ... mes OG

Meng-Tseu, texte Chinoise, pages 161, 8vo._... 4 » of O

Meng-Tseu, traduction Latine, par S. Julien. Lutetie Parisien, 1824, pages

593, 8vo. ios 335 se dhe awe Ren)! Olam)

lassen, Institutiones Linguze Pracritice. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1837, pages 167,

8vo. aa eae coe see ase ass pee SOR

Lassen, Anthologia Sanscritica. Bonne, 1838, pages 371, 8vo. Bap wer | 10

Lassen, Gita Govinda, Sanscrit et Latine. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1836, pages 180,

4to. “on seo aa “ae eee Sau sane atoms

Chezy, Yajnadattabada, ou La Mort D’yadjnadatta, Text, Analysis and Transla~-

tion. Paris, 1826, pages 142, 4to. ae aan ize wer enoh ae

Chezy, La reconnaissance de Sacountala, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 665, 4to. oes ae wes oo ANG teh LOO

Geographie D’ Aboulféda, Texte Arabe. Paris, 1837-40, pages 586, 4to. Pp nite Le,

The Travels of Ibn Batuta, translated from the Arabic Manuscript, by S. Lea.

London 1829, 243 pages, 4to. ... a “or one PPS aud jue U

The Travels of Macarius, translated by F. c. Belfour, London, 1829, pt. J. 114

pages, 4to. “ eae Ae sea co ah ae

Memoir of the Emperor Jehanguire, translated from the Persian Manuscript, by

Major D. Price. London, 1829, 141 pages, 4to. ake aoe an 45)

History of the Afghans, translated from the Persian, by B. Dorn, part I. London, .

1829, 184 pages, 4to. ave eae se Peer cos) | OL

Han-Koong-Tsew, or the Sorrows of Han, a Chinese Tragedy, translated by J.

F. Davis. London, 1829, 28 pages, 4t0. —aee on ih 1 8

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

As-Soyitti’s work on Earthquakes, called ie Khadas $ Cas

sbonwdl 3 J Weis Kashf as-Salsalah ’an wasf Az-zal-

zalah, i. e. removing the noise from the description of the Earth-

quakes, (or clearing up the description of Earthquakes.) Translat-

ed from the Arabic by A. Sprencer, Fisq. B. M. S.

Jelal-ed-din as-Soyiti, an Egyptian polygrapher of some merit, died in a. u. 911.

He wrote this work on the occasion of an earthquake in Egypt, with a view of show-

ing to his countrymen by a number of traditions which have been omitted in this

translation, that earthquakes are ordained by God to punish men for their sins. At the

same time the author wished to console them by showing them from history, that

much more frightful punishments of this kind had taken place than the one under

which they suffered in his time. ‘This translation has been made from an Arabic

MS. of the Royal Library at Paris, (fonds Asselin N. 218)which is neither very correct

nor legible. A better copy is preserved in the library at Gotha. This translation,

was not made with the view that it should ever be published, but it was merely intended

as a sort of a hasty memorandum for the translator, it will therefore probably not stand

the criticism of the philologist, though the student of Natural Philosophy may rely,

that the facts are in general correctly rendered into English.—A. S.

It would appear that this is the original of the Persian work known amongst the na-

tive literati of the Western Provinces, by the name of ‘ Zelzele Namah,’ for which enqui-

ry was made sometime agoby Lieut. Baird Smith. See Proceedings of Nov. 1842, Vol. xi,

p- 1201. Upon our mentioning it to Dr. Sprenger, he expressed this opinion, and has been

kind enough to place this curious little Treatise at our disposal for the Journal.—Eps.

A. H. 94. On the 20th of Adar (March) an earthquake in Syria,

which lasted forty days. Many buildings were destroyed in Antiochia.

98. Again for forty days, during the Khalifat of Omar Ben Abdul-

aziz, in Syria. Y

No. 14]. New Seriegs, No. 57. 5 5

742 As-Soyuti’s work on Earthquakes. [No. 141,

130. There was an earthquake at Damascus, which was so violent,

that the people were obliged to leave the town.

131. Several new shocks in Damascus. |

180. In Egypt a very violent earthquake. The minaret of Alexandria

was destroyed.

187. At Masisa x.o,sol} an earthquake and an inundation.

203. In Khorasan an earthquake which lasted seventy days; the

mosque of Balkh and the fourth part of the town were destroyed.

219. Great darkness from noon until the evening.

220, Antiochia was destroyed by an earthquake, which lasted forty

days, =

224. An earthquake at Fergana, by which 15,000 persons perished.

225. An earthquake at Ahwaz for sixteen days; it was also felt in

Jebal.

233. At Damascus many persons were buried under their houses;

the earthquake extended to Antiochia, Mesopotamia, and Mausil. It is

supposed that 50,000 persons perished.

232. Several earthquakes, more particularly in the Maghrib and in

Syria, where the walls of Damascus and Emessa were destroyed.

It was felt at Antiochia and El-Awassim evolyxi] in Mesopotamia

and Mausil.

233. On Thursday, the 11th of Rabi-al-Akhar, many buildings

were destroyed at Damascus by an earthquake.

234. At Herat, the houses were destroyed.

239. At Tiberias.

240. In the Maghrib, thirteen villages of Kairowan sunk.

242. InShaban avery violent earthquake. At Tunisabout 45,000 persons

were buried under their houses; it extended also over Yemen, Khorasan,

Fars, Syria, Bastam, ellen » Komm rag Kashan, als Rai, Leola}

el-Damaghan, Nishapur, Taberistan and Ispahan. The mountains fell

down, and the earth opened so extensively that men could walk into it; _

and in the village El-sud s5.,S) in Egypt, five stones fell from heaven.

One stone fell on the tent of a Bedouin and set it on fire. The weight

of these stones was ten rotles. In Yemen a hill covered with fields

moved from its place and became the property of another tribe.

245. Earthquakes prevailed over the whole earth, and many towns

and bridges were destroyed.

1843. ] As-Soyiti’s work on Earthquakes. 743

At Antiochia a mountain fell into the sea, with 1005 houses. It

had been covered with about ninety villages. The river disappeared

one farsang’s distance. Dreadful noises were heard at Tinnis.

In Mecea all the springs disappeared. The earthquake extended

over Rakka, Harran, Ras el-’Ain, Emessa, Damascus, Rokha, Tarsus,

Massissa and Adina. On the shores of Syria, in Laodicea, mountains

moved with their inhabitants, and when it had destroyed pep El-son,

it crossed the Euphrates, and was felt in Khorassan.

249. In Dhul Hajj was a very violent earthquake, at Rai the houses

fell down, and the people took flight into the fields.

258. At Wasit about 20,000 persons were buried under their houses,

by an earthquake.

268. At Bagdad an earthquake, followed by torrents of rain and

a thunder-storm.

280. At Ardebil six earthquakes took place in the course of this

year ; 100,000 persons died under the ruins of their houses. One of

these earthquakes was preceded by an eclipse of the moon, darkness

and wind.

288. An earthquake which lasted for some days.

289. In Rejeb at Bagdad, it lasted for some days.

On the day of Arafat which fell in summer, the wind was so cold,

that the people were obliged to dress in furs.

300. A mountain split at Dinawar, and streams of water gushed

out from it, which submerged many villages. A star split into three

pieces, and this was followed by a frightful noise.

331. At Nesa many buildings tumbled down, and many people

perished.

344. An earthquake in Egypt; it lasted three hours, and did great

damage.

345. An earthquake at Hamadan, many lives were lost.

346. An earthquake at Rai and about that town, it lasted 40 days,

then it discontinued for sometime, but it again returned. It extended

to Talikan, and there sunk 150 villages belonging to Rai. At Raia

mountain sunk, and an enormous chasm opened from which water

and smoke gushed out.

347. An earthquake at Komm, Holwan, Kaman and Jebal, many

people perished ; at the same time Bagdad suffered from an earthquake.

744 As- Soyiti’s work on Earthquakes. [No. 141.

During the reign of Kafur the Akhshidian, repeated shocks of earth-

quakes visited Egypt within the space of six months.

362. Several castles in Syria were ruined by an earthquake.

363. At Wasit.

376. Many persons perished under the ruins caused by an earthquake.

393. In Syria, Abasim, and the Greek frontier, many castles were

ruined by an earthquake.

398. In Shaban at Dinawar 10,000 persons perished under the

ruins, besides those swallowed up by the ground. An inundation

took place at Shiraz, and many ships were wrecked at sea.

During the reign of El-Hakim El-Obeidi, who ruled from 386 to 411

in Egypt, several earthquakes took place.

425. Many earthquakes took place in Egypt and Syria, by which

one-third of Ramlah was destroyed. The walls of Jerusalem fell down,

and many villages were swallowed up by the ground.

434. At Tebris, the fortress and the town were nearly destroyed

by an earthquake, and about 40,000 persons perished. Many also pe-

rished at Tadmor and Balbek by the same cause.

438. Khelat. and Diarbekr.

444. An earthquake in Ahwaz, by which much destruction was caused.

450. In the month of Shaban an earthquake at Bagdad, which ex-

tended to Hamadan and Tekrit.

455. Sha’ban ; at Wasit, Antiochia, Laodicea, Sul, Akka and over

all Syria.. The walls of Tripolis were destroyed.

458. Jomadal Akhr in Khorassan, mountains were split, and many

villages sunk under the inhabitants ; some saved themselves by taking

refuge in the open fields. Soyuti gives a copy of the document which

was sent to Bagdad on this occasion. The earthquake is thus describ-

ed :—‘“‘ It caused the mountains to split; it cleft hills, overturned

towns together with their inhabitants, and it levelled them with the

ground in such a way that but few people escaped. Most buildings

lay in ruins, and it is impossible to ascertain the number of those who

perished.”

sy AE g US Lie REET g JL! Lge Ciena

Und M [gi Le po wand ols Lelio! yo Cikcgiwls Lylal

1843. | As-Soytti’s work on Earthquakes. 745

460. Tuesday 11th Jomadalawwal, an earthquake in Palestine:

Ramla was destroyed. It extended to the Hejaz. It reached also

Wadi El-Szafr, Khaiber, Bedr, Yanba, Wadi-kora, Teima and Tabuk,

and it extended as far as Kufa; only two houses of Ramla remained,

25,000 persons perished. ’Aila was destroyed with all its inhabitants,

the earthquake was also felt at Jerusalem. The sea receded from the

coast, but soon returned again into its place. In all these countries

it was felt at the same hour.

462. Tuesday 11th Jomadalawwal at Ramla, and its dependen-

cies, Jerusalem and Egypt. One corner of the principal mosque of

Cairo gave way; it was immediately succeeded by two other earth-

quakes.

464. The earth trembled six times at Bagdad in one earthquake.

478. In Moharrem there was an earthquake at Arjan, under which

many Greeks perished.

479. In Irak, in Mesopotamia and in Syria, many buildings were

destroyed by an earthquake.

484, In Syria and elsewhere, many buildings, ninety villages, and

the walls of Antiochia were destroyed by an earthquake.

508. In Mesopotamia thirteen villages belonging to Roha were des-

troyed, and part of the walls of Harran ; also in Elsun about 100 houses

and one-half of the fortress were destroyed. |

511. In the days of Arafat were many houses destroyed at Bagdad.

513. The 5th of Ramadan Kazwin was destroyed by an earthquake

which returned the following year precisely at the same time.

515. In the Hejaz.

516. At Jannezah part of its wall sunk.

524. Rabi Ist, at Bagdad, many houses were destroyed.

529. At Bagdad several shocks; it began on Thursday the 11th of

Shawal and lasted the whole day, amounting to six shocks until Friday

night. On the 17th, three shocks took place from midnight till day-break.

532. An earthquake in Syria, Mesopotamia and Irak; many per-

sons were buried under the ruins.

533. At Jannezah 130,000 persons lost their lives. Jannezah

sunk, and the spot was covered with black water for the distance of

ten farsangs; also Aleppo suffered eighty shocks in one night. It

was felt over all the world, but strongest in Aleppo.

746 As- Soyute’s work on Earthquakes. [No. 141.

538. On the 14th of Zu-l-ka’de,. which fell on a Tuesday, was a

great earthquake over all the world. 3

544. At Bagdad about ten shocks were felt, and a mountain fell

near Holwan ; the Turkomans suffered greatly.

549. A great fiery wind blew one evening: every body believed

that the last day was come ; this was succeeded by an earthquake ; the

water of the Tigris disappeared for a while, but made again its ap-

pearance.

550. An earthquake at Bagdad.

552. In Syria, the greater part of Aleppo was destroyed ; there

suffered also Hamat, Shaizar, Emessa, Hisn al Akrad (the fort of the

Kurds,) Laodicea, Antiochia. In Shaizar only one woman and a slave

were saved.

In Kafertab not one individual was saved. In Affania the castle was

swallowed up, and many towns of the Franks suffered. ‘The walls of se-

veral towns of Syria were destroyed; the children perished in the

schools, and no one came to ask for them.

551. And the following year several earthquakes took place in Syria.

551. In the night of Rabi 2nd, was a great earthquake. It was

preceded and followed by others. In the night of the 25th, at Aleppo,

Hamat, and many other places, there were about forty shocks. It

was one of the most tremendous earthquakes. On the 29th of the same

month, an earthquake took place towards the end of the day, and

continued during the night.

The first of Ramazan three shocks.

On the ¢hird of the same month three earthquakes ; one at noon,

the others at midnight.

In the middle of Ramazan there was an earthquake at night, and an-

other in the morning, and two during the foilowing night, and another

shock the subsequent day. In the night of the 23d of Ramazan and

in the second of Shawal, new shocks of earthquakes were felt which

were more violent than the preceding ones, there were also earthquakes

on the 7th, 16th and 17th, and in the night of the 22d.

552. In the night of 19th of Safr, a great earthquake took place which

was followed by another shock ; a third one took place in the night of the

20th, and the following day in Syria. In the night of the 25th Jomada

Ist, four shocks. In the night of the 4th of Jomada 2d, several shocks,

1843. | As-Soyuti’s work on Earthquakes. 747

particularly at Aleppo and Emessa, where they were destructive ; also in

Hamat, Kafertab, and Taima. In the 4th of Rajeb at day time at Damascus

it was so violent, that never the like had been seen ; it caused some des-

truction. In the night of Friday the 8th of Rajeb there were three earth-

quakes, which were followed by other earthquakes on Saturday, Sunday

and Monday night, and several shocks after that. It did great damage

in Hamat, Shiraz, and Emessa. In Damascus it did not begin before

Monday the 29th of Rejeb, but caused great consternation. Another

earthquake took place on the 24th of Ramazan, which was terribly felt

at Aleppo, and Hamat (Apamea,) where it continued for sometime with

intermissions. In the night of Saturday the 10th of Shawal and in

the night of the 10th of Dilkada, and on the night of the 23d and 25th

of the same month, people were so frightened by earthquakes, that they

took refuge in the fields.) Apamea was destroyed.

565. An earthquake in Syria, Mesopotamia and almost all the

world ; it destroyed many walls and houses in Syria, more particularly

at Damascus, Emessa, Apamea, Aleppo and Balbek.

574. In Armenia and in the country of Irbil.

575. A great earthquake.

592. Great wind over all the world, and an earthquake in Egypt.

593. A large star was split, and a tremendous noise was caused by

it, which made the earth tremble. This took place on Friday the 9th

of Jomada 2d.

597. In Shawan, there was an earthquake almost over all the world,

more particularly in Upper Egypt, where it caused great destruction ; it

extended over Syria and the sea, Mesopotamia, the Greek Empire and

Trak ; it was particularly destructive in Syria. It was also felt in Ar-

menia, Azerbijan, and it is calculated that through this earthquake

1,100,000 lives were lost. The first shock lasted but a short time, but

after that it continued for several days, and it seems that it came from

Mesopotamia to the sea-coast.

578. In Shaban at Emessa, the castle of the Kurds was destroyed ; it

extended as far as Nablus.

600. An earthquake in Egypt, Mesopotamia, Syria, Mausil, Irak, the

Greek Empire and Cyprus; it extended as far as Sabta in the

Maghrib.

605. An earthquake at Nishapur, which lasted ten days.

748 As-Soyiiti’s work on Earthquakes. (No. 141.

608. In Egypt and Cairo many persons lost their lives, and great

smoke arose west of Damascus.

623. On Monday, on the new moon of the latter Jomada, a noise was

heard about Medina for two days, which was followed by a great

earthquake, which caused great destruction.

657. In Egypt.

661. Mausil.

662. In Egypt.

667. In Sus, by which many castles were destroyed and many lives

lost.

692. In the month of Safr at Ramla, Fakul and El-Kerk three vil-

lages were destroyed.

693. In Egypt.

702. On the 23d Dhilhajj, Thursday, in Egypt and Syria, many

persons were buried under the ruins, and all Alexandria was submerged

under the sea.

722. In Mohurrum at Damascus at night.

729. In Rajeb, at Tripolis and in Syria.

744. In Egypt and Syria.

741. On the 4th of Ramazan, two shocks in one hour at Cairo.

775. A slight earthquake at Cairo.

787. On the 13th of Shaban, slight earthquake at Cairo and Egypt.

788. The 18th Jomada 2nd, a slight earthquake.

791. Sufr at Nishapur, violent wind and earthquake ; many souls

lost.

Nishapur was seven times destroyed by earthquakes, but this time

was the worst.

Aleppo and its dependencies suffered from earthquakes on Jomada

2nd, and Shawan and Jomada Ist ; and besides that several times in the

same year.

809. An earthquake in Antiochia, many lives lost.

811. In Shaban about Aleppo and Tripolis, many lives lost by earth-

quakes

822. At Arzangan WS; and Constantinople.

825. At Cairo.

828. In Shaban, in Egypt, three shocks in one day.

834. In Shaban, at Granada, and in Spain.

1843. | As- Soyuti’s work on Earthquakes. 749

838. In Rabi 2d at Cairo.

841. In Shaban at Cairo, a slight earthquake.

861. At Arzangan, the most part of which was destroyed.

863. At Kerk 100 lives lost by an earthquake.

881. In Egypt a slight earthquake at night.

880. 17th of Mohurrum, at noon, a violent earthquake in Egypt.

888. The 9th of Jomada Ist, on Sunday, a slight earthquake.

889. Rabi Ist, six or more terrible shocks at Aleppo.

896. 12th Jomada 2d, on Sunday, a slight earthquake in Egypt.

905. The night of Friday 27th Dilhajj, a slight earthquake.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh and Soobathoo, for

1819-20-21. By Captain Patrick GERARD.

Clear, = ae Se be AL , 16 days

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. a x Ohi

Rainy and stormy, snow and hail, oe on ae Toma

mhunder, .. «+ eh Ae oe un ue none.

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, ais Ne as 23.740 45°

Minimum, e. és Bi 23.445 31°

Mean, .. site oe ss 23.592 30°

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, -- No. Maximum, .. 45°

Minimum only, .. 23° 1’ Minimum, .. 35)

Mean, sik No. Mean, .. ee So:

Prevailing wind during the month, westerly, but generally very

variable.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for February, 1819.

Clear, “p ate ne ne es 11 days

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. ne até Oirtss

Rainy and stormy, snow and hail, sa ae as yi,

Thunder, .. =e me ee, Be ae at viis

750 Weather at Kotgurh [No. 141.

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. ‘Thermometer.

Maximum, af de .- 23.810 44° 5!

Minimum, ee aS » oe) BBHA5) 39° 1’

Mean, .. =H ais sin @DRST2 41° 8’

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 45° 6! Maximum, .. 47° 8'

Minimum, .. 7° 2 Minimum, .. 37°7’'

Mean, 9s 36° 4’ Mean, «iano,

Prevailing wind during the month easterly, but variable.

A general Statement of the Weather at Soobathoo, for March 1819.

Clear, a a ae : 18 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. Ne he 10

Rainy and stormy, Me

Thunder, ..

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, a We de 26.110 68°

Minimum, oe eee, eet 25.640 62° 7’

Mean, .. ne i a 25.875 65° 3/

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 80° Maximum, oy 73° §'

Minimum, .. 47° Minimu,m us 50°

Mean, if 63°°5'.. Mean, °... ay 61° 7'

Prevailing wind during the month, south-westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Soobathoo, for April 1819.

Clear,

ue oie My Be 15 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, an ui 10 38

Rainy and stormy, Sa

Thunder,

foo. and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 751

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. Me a 26.015 Wh eyee

Minimum, .. a, ae 25.650 6° 5!

Mean, Seats minaret ju oh nly D5 BBO 70° 6'

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 88° Maximum, Avaher ss eats

Minimum, .. 48° Minimum, Secs OL?

Mean, te 68° Mean, Vn AO bg)

Prevailing winds during the month, south-west and south south-

west.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for May 1819.

Clear, Ae “is a ar se i ‘eo 12 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, a: a) Don 5)

Rainy, stormy and hail, i we a 43 14.) 5,

Thunder, ae Se A ae a Hi Sins.

No Barometer up.

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. No. Maximum, «ei 69?

Minimum only, .. 42° Minimum, oo) a:

Mean, .. <i REINO. Mean, .. fear GOP, Ir

Prevailing winds during the month, west and south-south-west.

A general Statement of the Weather at Soobathoo, for June 1819.

lear, .. Se Hes ae de os ate 9 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, Ae ore 1 a ie

Rainy and stormy, te ae Se me te Oh.

Thunder, iW Vs nt 4) Be ie Sy

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, ba = ye 25.980 Ga°

Minimum, 3% a te 25.640 799; &

Mean,.. sti s, 2 25.810 ae 2!

752

Temperature of the air.

Maximum, 93°

Minimum, 65°

Mean, 79°

Weather at Kotgurh

[No. 141.

Temperature of the house.

86°

70°

yo.

Maximum,

Minimum,

Mean,

Prevailing winds during the month, west and south-west, and south

south-west.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for July 1819.

Clear, Bi v6 ee ae i 2 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy. .. he ne MO. oe

Rainy and stormy, Bol Puli oke Su,

Thunder, oe ae O.,

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. ‘Thermometer,

Maximum, 23.730 Foc!

Minimum, ap 23.535 68° 1’

Mean, .. : 23.632 Fie

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. No. Maximum, 74° 9

Minimum only, .. 55°9’ Minimum, 63° 5’

Mean, No. Mean, 69° 2’

Prevailing winds during the month, east and east south-east.

’

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for August 1819.

Clear, oe o “a =i we ‘ 1 day.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. oe von) VA os

Rainy and stormy, 20 ,,

Thunder, Le : Dy

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, 23.765 Ope:

Minimum, 23.500 66° 5'

Mean, 23.632 69° 7'

Temperature of the air.

Maximum, .. No.

Temperature of the house,

Maximum, 73° 7'

1843. | and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 753

Minimum only, .. 57° 1' Minimum, .. 64° 2’

Mean, .. <ouNo: Mean, -- 68°9'

Prevailing winds during the month, easterly.

A general Statement of the Weather, for September 1819.

Absent this month on a tour into the interior, but Thermome-

trical observations were daily taken and recorded at every place

during the journey.

Clear, ve we a6 a a ae 2 days’

Fair, but cloudy and partially aloud. ue op aye Cie

Rainy and stormy. Us ote Ae ays seta wens ts

Thunder, al Wa ae Bae 2s He 4

The prevailing winds during the month, easterly.

A general Statement of the Weather, for October 1819.

Still absent all this month on a tour into the interior.

Clear, ae es : bps a's -- I9 days.

Fair, but cloudy aud partially aloe. Se as pe Gir

Rainy and stormy, snow and hail, ve Si Bt: Gan

Thunder, Bie sis a ae us -. hone.

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for November 1819.

Clear, ae ; ile ay is 23 days’

Fair, but cloudy ha Peli taaat a Ae 4 ,,

Rainy, and stormy and snow, .. uty mel a Seis es

Thunder, ie a As f ors iN l

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, a me zs 23.820 50°

Minimum, aie we pn 23.600 46°

Mean, .. ae a fe 23.610 48°

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, 2a NO: Maximum, ao"

Minimum, te 34° Minimum, ~ vaieaebe

Mean, .. ms No. Mean, .. 2:2 AOR

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

754 Weather at Kotgurh [ No. 141.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for December 1819.

Clear; > “. ae “it oe es ae Se 11 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy. Lg a 13° you

Rainy, stormy and snow, o% ~ ms a Finer

Thunder, an rae Ag hie

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. ve, oe 23.900 48° 5!

Minimum, .. a) a 23.600 aa

Mean, nf se at 23.750 45° 7

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, rile No. Maximum, .. 50°

Minimum, Di OOS’ Minimum, .. A2?.8

Mean, .. Bes No. Mean, «ss pce 46° 4’

Prevailing winds during the month, easterly.

A general Statement of the Weather, for 1819.

Rainy, stormy, Thun-

snow and hail} der

days. days.

Clear. | Fair,

days. | days.

oe Se ee es ee ee

Fanuarys ee ee eke ol CO nia ae 8 | none.

Bebruary,: te sot twee mee ane te bd 8 9 ]

March, emer ioe rust inn wile opi ath OWS hv =) 3

April, Soot eva Dae EM tector ant 10 | 5 4

May, A a! meet) ee 5 14 8

June, cian ie a ad 9 1] 10 8

July, sts atl anata ign 2 10 19 6

August, Wilte hoe ae gi aem. : ] 10 20 5

Septemberecss ls) Saleen ew « 2 6 2, on

October, ull hedeeh MEMEBE AY, Vera: | = dO Ginn 6 none.

November, SPAR heat lt Gates 4 3 1

December, a ee te oT) he 7 |

Potala ee oat. | 2OO 101 125 41

Norsr.—In the absence of the Maximum Temperature of the air for some of the

months, the Mean Temperature of the house will nearly come to the same result as if

the Maximum Temperature of the air had been ascertained and recorded. Indeed in

the course of many years’ observations, the difference between the Mean Temperature

of the air and that of the house, if any thing, is so trifling, that it is hardly deserving

of notice.

1843. ] and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 755

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for January, 1820.

Clear, oe as oe -- 26 days.

Fair, but cloudy oe catia eee att she ae Sis

Rainy and stormy, ae Ae AD <i’ be PA NaN

Thunder, .. im ~ Bis me ve ss 2

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, “i abe a 23°720 O19

Minimum, - 3 ‘s 23°570 41°

Mean, .. on ahs bp 23°645 4l° 5’

_ Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, bt g No. Meximum, .. 34°

Minimum, only .. 30° 5’ Minimum, .. 36°

Mean, ea vo LINO: Mean, .. eeniaoe oy

Prevailing winds during the month, east, south-east and north-east.

A general Statement of the Weather at Koigurh, for February, 1820.

Clear, ais op = a 14 days.

Fair, but cloudy — eachaily aay, ae ae Oy).

Rainy and stormy, snow and hail, ie a : Oe a.

Thunder, ae » Ae ee a yee 2

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. ie fay 23°760 48°

Minimum, .. sits begs 23°400 42° 8’

Mean, st ar Hig 23°580 45° 4!

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. No. Maximum, .. 48° 2!

Minimum, only 27° Minimum, .. 40°

Mean, a No. Mean, ~+ | 44903!

Prevailing wind during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for March 1820.

~ Clear, ve , H 16 days.

Fair, but cloudy ‘iia Sctiall y mee, aes se 6

EP)

756 Weather at Kotgurh [ No. 141.

Rainy and stormy, snow and hail, his af, wy Ow,

Thunder, oe ne aes ue bie ie 4 ty

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, oi ae we, 23°860 54°

Minimum, ae she se 23°600 46°

Mean, .. aL sis ot 23°730 50°

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house,

Maximum, .. No. Maximum, oe S954? 6

Minimum, only .. 37° 5' Minimum, oc (46°

Mean, HSNO. Mean, ee OPIS!

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh for April 1820.

Absent all this month on a tour through the protected hill states,

situate between the rivers Sutluj and Jumna, on the hither or Indian

side of the Himalaya range, but observations were daily taken and

recorded during the journey.

Clear, oe ae = 5 ; 13 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, : a 4 ms;

Rainy, stormy and hail, oe a4 oe 4 Ene

Thunder, Ja bis ‘ Sie a Oi 8

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh for May, 1820.

Clear’ s\¢) af “ft ef aie 2% ss 13 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, ais anise Wee as

Rainy, stormy, and hail, ae sts te ate LOS

Thunder, A Lies a’ se a a se

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, Sie ee a 23800 64°

Minimum, ha e. Bs 93520 65° 9’

Mean, .. oé ae vie 23°660 64° 9'

1843.] and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. | 757

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. No. Maximum, .. 73° 4’

Minimum, only 45° Minimum, .. 58°

Mean, .. No. Mean, sea OOO ge

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for June 1820.

Clear, ae bp oe be aa 7 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy .. es Bre ens

Rainy, stormy and hail, .. 5 nia oe Sie hae eats gs

Thunder, we ais Bie y- ae “A Goa

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. ae Ag: 23°700 75° 4!

Minimum, .. ie 5 23°440 67° 3

Mean, a ae a% 23°570 71° 6

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 87° 4’ Maximum, .. 77° l'

Minimum, .. 54° Minimum, .. 63°

Mean, beugOr yg. Mean, oat AOS

Prevailing winds during the month, partly westerly and partly

easterly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for July 1820.

Clear, a ate ss ae bd on ap none.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, be Li 3 days.

Rainy and stormy, en Be ars ae A IN oh Mune

Thunder, bs He ae ae ae i Qeuo 8

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. oe se 23°730 70° 6'

Minimum, .. es ee 23°440 65°

Mean, 43 ah sik 23°585. 67° 8’

FAG

758 Weather at Kotgurh [No. 141

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 81° 8' Maximum, .. 76°

Minimum, )geueb7°7' Minimum, .. 64° 4’

Mean, me Ost 7 Mean... «2 Oe

Prevailing winds during the month, easterly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for August 1820.

Clear, ae

eh ie she or a Be none.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. 8 days.

Rainy and stormy, 2 ae Sie sie ue 75 a

Thunder, ; oe ae o¥e RS

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. fe out 23°710 69° 7’

Minimum, aie ae ee 23'515 69°

Mean, .. We a A 23°612 69° 3'

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 77° 8’ Maximum, .. 74°

Minimum, ..._ 56° 5’ Minimum, .. 64° 6’

Mean, sinioy oa Mean, 2 OPP Ss

Prevailing winds during the month, easterly,

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for September 1820.

Clear, Se “ae 5

: ae ae es ate 5 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, a wie | es

Rainy and stormy, ae fe Ly i 14),

Thunder, as me a i oie a8 2

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

me 23°705 69° 4’

at 23°505 67°

Mean, A ie oS 23°605 68° 2’

Maximum,

Minimum, .. Ap

1843. | and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 759

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 73° 7’ Maximum, .. 75° 9’

Minimum, .. 60° 7’ Minimum, .. 52°8'

Mean, Pe dai 0 saa Mean, se OSovos

Prevailing winds during the month, easterly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for October 1820.

Clear, oe os ahs ae me . oe 20 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, am we Bie

Rainy and stormy, oe fas i ye ie Ors

Thunder, ae aie ae es se hs Sea

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. a as 23°835 58°

Minimum, .. oF a 23°535 62° 4’

Mean, it =; ae 23°685 60° 2’

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, ... 7)° Maximum, .- 68°92’

Minimum, .. 43°8' Minimum, .. 52°

Mean BAL Ns 7 i i Mean, woh OOK)

Prevailing winds during the month, easterly and westerly.

—

A general Statement of the Weather at Rampoor, for November 1820.

No Barometer mith me.

Clear, ee Be by e's oe Ae Se 18 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, ae es Tens

Rainy and stormy, Sed ae mE sis ahs Brigg

Thunder, a ae fe ne ue ees hot

Temperature of the air. Temperature in a tent.

Maximum, .. 78° 4’ Maximum, .. 79°

Minimum, .. 37°6, Minimum, .. 54°

Mean, Sy a fete Mean, ee, G00"

Prevailing winds during the month at this place, south-west and

south south-west.

760 Weather at Kotgurh [No. 141.

A general Statement of the Weather, at Rampoor for December \820.

Clear, “* : ae oe , at Be 17 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. a: ote Oe

Rainy, stormy and snow, ae Mes ae a3,

Thunder, pi ai a: By: ae at none.

Temperature of the air. Temperature in a tent.

Maximum, sel pea Maximum, .. No.

Minimum, cs EO eaE Minimum, only 39°

Mean, .. afk eae Mean, «ect INO:

Prevailing winds during the month at this place, south-west and

south south-west.

A general Statement of the Weather for 1820.

Rainy and stor-| 4 , 4

1820. Clear | Fair |my, snow and 3.3 =

days. days. |hail days. >

ey ee =, ee ere | ee eee

January, .-- ae eet; 26 3 2 2

February, .. ate wy 14 6 9 2

March, aie ve ciel day | ene 9 4

April, wis fe at bere oir 13 6

May, as ot welt be 8 10 8

June, mi ey 7 9 14 | 6

July ai ie --mone | 3 28 2

August, .. e ...| ditto 8 23 2

September, .. “ : 5 ]1 14 2

October, .-. ae Bates 20 5 6 3

November, .. ° ag metig) ies 7. 5 1

December, -.- a toe bi, | 10 4 none

Tails. eee 149. | BO 137 | 38

Note.—Having been obliged to proceed to and remain at this place on duty,

it may be as well to mention, that Rampoor is a small town and the capital of Bussa-

hir, about 22 miles beyond the military outpost of Kotgurh, situate on the left bank

of the Sutlej, and the winter residence of the Rajah of that state. It is in latitude

31° 27’ and longitude 77° 38’ and its elevation above the level of the sea by Baro-

metrical observation is 3,398 feet.

1843. ] and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 761

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for January 1821.

No Barometer up.

Clear, us ie +e Ae sre 1] days.

Fair, but cloudy and Partially aetds. ae ee | OSes

Rainy, stormy, snow and hail, .. <2 alle ai oe

Thunder, .. ate ae we oe wa a none.

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 52° 2’ Maximum, .. 47° 8’

Minimum, .. 28° 4’ Minimum, .. 36° 8’

Mean; .. 2. 40° 3! Mean, se ates.

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at aor for February 1821.

Clear, - we as aie 11 days.

Fair, but cloudy and Stalls ania) oe si ae 14 ,,

Rainy, stormy and hail, a aA als ili as

Thunder, iN me a a wy we ion ee

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 68° 7’ Maximum, .. 59°

Minimum, .. 29° Minimum, .. 37°

Mean, «- 48°93’ Mean, Soa Ge

Prevailing winds during the month, partly west and partly east.

A general Statement of the Weather at Soobathoo, for March 1821.

Clear, He Avs oe “ie os Ae 18 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially Cate! 2 ae a eeiae

Rainy, stormy and hail, at wis a ai Su pits

Thunder, a ata a are ste a. ce

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, © city, w 26°105. plmer,

Minimum, .. wy es 25°780. 59° 8!

Mean, bis ne ne 25-942. 65° 5’

762 Weather at Kotgurh [No. 141.

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 78° 5’ Maximum, .. 73°

Minimum, .. 48° 3’ Minimum, .. 56°

Mean, A cose Y Mean, .. 64° 5’

Prevailing wind during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Soobathoo, for April 1821.

Clear) \s2 0°. ake oe — oF 4 -. 18 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, as ne US ae

Rainy, stormy and hail, oe ais Ze ath ences Sans

Thunder, Ea Ve os pao ae Se NS ae

Height of the Barometer.

- Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. Re 1p 26-200. 73°

Minimum, .. ve 38 25°850- 67° 8’

Mean, ds she ai 26°025° 70° 4’

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 87°4' Maximum, .. 81° 4’

Minimum, .. 54° 5' Minimum, .. 64° 8’

Mean, oo) 1fOP-9' Mean, «2s Yor

Prevailing winds during the month, west and south-west.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for May 1821.

Clear, > ¢ oe ae . ais -- 15 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, .. nes $e 6

Rainy, stormy and hail, .. oe ws de Pe |

Thunder, .. a 9 ate 2 Ae os JOres

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. se He 23'670. 82° 7’

Minimum, .. oe a 23530. 64° 5’

Mean, ot a8 23:600. 73°C:

1843. | and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 763

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 85° Maximum, .. 82° 7’

Minimum, .. 50° 2’ Minimum, .. 63° 6’

Mean, co 6726 Mean, ben ould

Prevailing winds during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for June 1821.

Clear, .. as oe ae By 18 days.

Fair, but cloudy te Peale cloudy, Eps i 2 eee

Rainy and stormy, oe oe at ae e4 ii;

Thunder, wv: tt A ee a sie Bilas

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. Br oe 23°795. Via

Minimum, .. a seh 23°480. FOS!

Mean, Bi Hp a. 23°637. 73° 6

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 88° 4’ Maximum, .. 81°3'

Minimum, .. 56° Minimum, .. 65° 4’

Mean, POL Mean, Se Omi tee

Prevailing wind during the month, westerly.

A general Statement of the Weather at Koigurh, for July 1821.

- Clear, ee he oon as , none.

Fair, but cloudy aa ge aeudy, Se ae -- 10 days.

Rainy and stormy, ° sis nee au 2 ea area

Thunder, 5 ar at ay oi = By. cist

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .._.. hi: 23°760. ioe

Minimum, .. an ae 23°470. 70°

Mean, za ue oe 23°615. VA betes

764 Weather at Kotgurh [| No. 141.

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, .. 85° 3’ Maximum, .. 81° 5’

Minimum, 59° 4’ Minimum, .. 66°

Mean, wet pears" Mean, os fee

Prevailing winds during the month, west and east-north-east.

——

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for August 182).

Clear, ee Sy none.

Fair, but cloudy ta ne ake Peg hayes El ye

Rainy and stormy, by ‘ oF * ae LO 25

Thunder, : ale Ne oe mis se bei ued: eis

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, .. Ae ay 23695. Ta,

Minimum, Ei 23°530. 66° 2’

Mean, 23°612. 69° 6’

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, 75° Maximum, .. 75° ]'

Minimum, 58° Minimum, .. 62°

66° 6' Mean, «| / (06".

Mean,

Prevailing winds during the month, north-east and east-north-east.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for September 1821.

Clear, a BE es Sc 6 days.

Fair, but cloudy sia suchen ahaa we ws fe see

Rainy and stormy, Ls ste oe we Shaul! SRRIGT Boge

Thunder, .. Pe ca sa $s ile oe Suny

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, 23°875. 69° 6’

Minimum, .. “as teh 23680. 59° 6’

Ps Ig op 64° 6'

Mean, Fs Ae oe

1843. | and Soobathoo, for 1819-20-21. 765

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, ernigOr a. Maximum, .. 75°5!'

Minimum, et ig4Gr. 7 Minimum, .. 485!

Mean, SetO2- DF Mean, Fae Ge

Prevailing winds during the month, west and east-north-east.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for

October 1821.

Clear, ee ne ie a Pe 25 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, ate a ess

Rainy and stormy, ote hs me es ae Sons

Thunder, l

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, age bie as 23930. 63°

Minimum, 5 Be ue 22:650. 55°

Mean, .. te a site 23°790. . 59°

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, Real 7h Maximum, .. 66°7’'

Minimum, atic Minimum, .. dl°

Mean, .. cast: HE Mean, MP Wrastoints

Prevailing winds during the month, west and east-north-east.

A general Statement of the Weather at Kotgurh, for

November 1821.

Clear, or: a - “ : 19 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, ft as Ons:

_ Rainy and stormy, 3 ue e A oF ess

Thunder, ie oy es ihe ais te -. none.

766 Weather at Kotgurh [No. 14].

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, ane 23°860. 58° 6

Minimum, Wes dain veg Le eS OU 49°

Mean, .. se Bey ae 23°730. 53° 8

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, ve 59° 8’ Maximum, .. 59°

Minimum, oe 42° Minimum, .. 48°3/

Mean, at 50° 9' Mean, cee Ne

Prevailing winds during the month, west and south-west.

A general Statement of the Weather at Soobathoo, for

December 1821.

Clear, oe ee 2 ay a ae oe 14 days.

Fair, but cloudy and partially cloudy, Be ae pl

Rainy and stormy, snow and hail, Eo Veen a AG.

Thunder, rp os oe ih De rae hie,

Height of the Barometer.

Inches. Thermometer.

Maximum, ae oe 26:100.' 59° 6'

Minimum, ae aie Ae 25°900. 2°

Mean, .. Si a 26-000. 55° 8

Temperature of the air. Temperature of the house.

Maximum, ate 66° Maximum, 59° 6'

Minimum, 39° 5' Minimum, .. 49°

Mean, ag 52° 7" Mean, 54° 3'

Prevailing winds during the month, west and south-west.

1843. | and Soobathoo for 1819-20-21. 767

A general Statement of the Weather, for \82\.

Clear | Fair | Rainy and

Thunder

wage days. | days. jstormy, snow, days.

and hail days,

PmE ee ea ee EM be 12 8 none.

Meaty ss Ss kar ef TL) D4 3

March, Bern es rea Coca) lobe a” ty tee D 8

April, eM aslo Lee 9 3 |

May, Pe eet ee a eho a kes, (0 10

June, ORR ea sel Be oro 8

July, Pees) one. |,” LO 2]

August, Mite! Mone! |). FD 19

Semeember 2) -- .. «-| 6.) . 8 16 |

Mretmerpeege se wk DB: Mon I 5 Rene

RR ee eth. OO 2 | none.

MeN ews eo wel 4S SUD | 5 |

IA Pha ce) ee el LDS | 102 108 | 38

Note.—It appears necessary here to remark, that during the years 1819-20 and 21,

Simla was no place of resort for invalids and visitors, except for few officers belong-

ing to the Ist Nusseeree Battalion stationed at Soobathoo, and thither they proceeded

for the hottest months, May and June, till the rains had fairly setin. In 1819, a double-

poled tent was pitched by Lieutenant, now Lieutenant Colonel R. Ross, on the north-

west extremity of the ridge, immediately above the small village of Simla, and afterwards

thatched over, having for its walls, spars, grass and mud as a protection from the weather,

and being on the site of the Commander-in-Chief (Sir H. Fane’s,) now Major General

Lumley’s house. In 1822, the first permanant cottage, of the usual materials, stone and

timber, roofed with pine wood shingles, was erected on a rising ground on a small

height on the same ridge by Captain, now Major C. P. Kennedy, the successor of

Lieutenant R. Ross, as Assistant Political Agent for the Protected Hill States, and

although the out-post of Kotgurh is 650 or 700 feet lower in elevation than Simla,

being four long marches beyond it, and further into the interior, and not subject to the

influence of the plains, which Simla is in a more or less degree, yet the temperature at

Kotgurh for the above years will give a very fair notion of that which may be gene-

rally experienced at Simla, as in subsequent years, on comparison, the average

temperature of the former place, proved only to be a trifle lower than that observed

and recorded at the latter.

P. GERARD.

[No. 141.

Meteorological Register kept at Kathmandoo.

768

, 429° 55 ee ae

ne oF g 8 000°

*skep ¢ Uley ese oe eee g 400

“ Fl 9 Gs 400°

662° 9 | 9% 9 050°

ae c'6l ra 9 200°

ees eee @ § 0s0°

280° 91 3 8 200°

ES ao 3 8 200°

se “ns ¢ 9 $L0°

aS 9% j ul 600°

ot 8°% Ct Ot 600°

ee Ké 9 IE FTO"

sm €< € Il 0F0"

eee eee CS 8 OTO°

ors" gt ¥ 8 gto°

eee gt oor Py 200°

eee cee iG ¢ 050°

a c’gt | 9° 6 400°

isi: ut 6 OL 400°

ie oa t ! 280°

a ws A rt OLA

es G6 z OL 9T0°

= CSS | SF 8 610°

- G16 | GP GL £¢0°

3 83 b fas FIO

* S| & Or | ZrO

cx ae ¢ 6 800°

oo a | “pa

= Slee | -yorye | -1eg

: ” E ® 26 | “OUL

SER es eS eal

e ° | er eh 8

5 & Be | jo ocuey

80°96

6L°S6

690°SZ

"W'd'S=E8T"¢

"GG

1SB°Sé

TH6°SZ

OFS'SS

196° SG

60°93

T80°SZ

$80°SS

£L0°S6

* 980'SZ

BtO'SS

FOSS

09 oa

991 'SS

L61'9%

86 ‘Sz

IPSS

$9=900°SZ

900°S6

eoe

L66°06

8L°SS

98°SS

L1°9R

F8°CS

EE Sa

CTG'SG

G6ES°S6

QrGG%

196°S6

¢60°SS

g50°SS

F80°SS

FEO'SS

S0°9S

9F0°SS

FEO SS

TFO°SS

EFG'GE

640°SZ

0°SZ

TEO"SS

eve

L66°%E

$80°SG

G80'SG

660 S3

9GE'SS

BELLS

9€6°SS

066° 9S

(90°SE

690° SS

COL'SS

960°SG

B60°9S

LL0°SG

SOE&S

vat

806°SS

68696

OY SS

160 GG

FLOSS

200°SS

860°96

160°SZ

88096

SESS

6F6'9S

$5296

9669S

SIG SS

LLG

2019S

160°S3

020°SZ

190°96

Gg0°9e

190°96

$90°SS

L40°'9G

L90°SZ |

TL0°SS

190: SB

O91 SZ

S6USS

G0G°SE

60B°9S

GFS°.%

FESS

18092

$Z0'96

SLOSS

‘poyoryje “Toy, WII JeyouL0Ie_g

pe ee es ee ee a ee ee ee ee

"PES younpy f0

yjuou ay) wof ‘NosNIgoYy ‘FR ‘NH wnjdng fig ‘zodany fo hav, ‘oopunwyyoy 30 day sajsibay yvorbojo.10ajayy

@ eee 09 GP

69 02 6g Lv

wan pee eee g'Sb

‘apIsyno 19}9WOWETL T,

$9 eee eee @9

29 eos 9 ras)

9 a $9 +9

99 eee eee $9

‘apISUT JoJOULOULISY,

"PESl Yours |

769

Supplementary Note to Mr. Commissioner Lusaineton’s Report on

the Copper Mines of Kemaon and Ghurwal, Journal, p. 472.

Since the above report was submitted to Government in 1841,

I have had the pleasure of meeting and forming the acquaintance of

Captain Drummond, (late one of the Cabool hostages, ) to whom allusion

is made in the first part of the report, as having suggested the

experimental working of the Pokree mine. Captain Drummond’s

opinion is, I believe, still favourable to further experiments being

made in the Kemaon and Ghurwal mines under European superin-

tendence, and as he has seen and examined all the papers connected

with Mr. Wilkin’s operations, and knows much more of these matters

than I can pretend to do, his opinion is likely to be more correct

than mine.

As connected with Mr. Wilkin, there is one important omission in

my report, which in justice to him I would wish to supply. I allude

to his uniformly kind and conciliating treatment of the Natives, and to

the fact of my never having had a single complaint preferred to me by

any of them, in the least affecting his character, from the time of

his location at Pokree to the date of his departure from the province.

Almora, 29th August, 1843. G. S. LusuincTon.

Note on a Fossil Antelope, from the Dadoopoor Museum. By Capt.

W. E. Baxer, Bengal Engineers.

We have had great pleasure in doing full justice, as far as our humble efforts

could do so, to this highly interesting notice, in procuring the aid of the best artist

in Calcutta, who, our readers may be assured, has given a most exact fac simile of

Captain Baker’s capital pen and ink drawing.—Ebs.

eee

Among the notices of the Sub-Himalayan fossils which have

from time to time appeared in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, but

few have been devoted to the remains of Ruminantia. The Sivathe-

rium indeed was one of the first described, and the Camelidz subse-

quently formed the subject of a paper by Capt. Cautley and Dr.

Falconer ; but the various species of Bos, Cervus, Antelope, &c. which

770 Note on a Fossil Antelope, | [No. 141.

occur in this deposit more frequently perhaps than any other, have

hitherto passed unnoticed.

To supply this deficiency, however, is not my present purpose. I have

neither leisure, nor a sufficiently extensive museum of comparative

Osteology, to attempt the description, or even the classification of our

fossil Ruminants ; but it appeared to me to be a circumstance deserving

the attention of other enquirers, that there is a strong resemblance

between the skulls of some of our Antelopes, and those figured in Capt.

Harris’s splendid work, ‘“ Portraits of Game and Wild Animals in

Southern Africa.” |

The degree of resemblance will be judged from the accompanying

plate, in which Fig. 1 and 2, represent a front and side view of one of

the fossils above alluded to, about one-fourth the natural size. The

face of this fossil is tolerably perfect, excepting the extremities of the ©

intermaxillary bones, but the occipital portion of the head and the tips

of the horns are wanting.

Fig. 3 and 4 are similar views of the skull of an Indian Antelope,

(A. cervicapra,) drawn on the same scale.

Fig. 5 and 6 are outlines of the heads respectively of the Harte-

beest, (Acronotus Caama,) and the ‘Sassaybe,” (Acronotus lunata, )

copied from Capt. Harris’s plate.

The fossil differs from the Indian Antelope, in the greater elongation

of its face, the straightness of its profile, the close juxta-position of

its horns at the base ; the absence or small development of the infra-

orbital sinus, and the small size of the supra-orbital foramina. In all

these respects it resembles one or other of the African genera, from the

descriptions of which, by Capt. Harris, I have extracted the following :—

Acronotus Caama or Hartebeest. ‘‘ Head remarkably heavy, narrow

and long. Horns seated upon the summit of a beetling ridge above

the frontals; very close together, and almost touching at the base.

No suborbital sinus, but a constant mucous discharge of a waxy

nature.”

Acronotus Lunata, or Sassaybe. ‘ Head long, narrow and shape-

less; wearing a bubaline appearance, facial line straight. Eyes

high in the cranium, indistinct lachrymary perforation.”

As far therefore as can be judged from a description which, like the

above, has no particular reference to the Osteology of these animals,

/ \ “J; Oe eee ~ (

er DoD

1aVaAS.

Dub Hima

& N

slope from the

An t ¢

$1l

kof.

i ?

cue me

1843. | JSrom the Dadoopoor Museum. 771

they appear to have a considerable resemblance to our fossil. It would

be highly interesting, should they be hereafter identified, and should it

thus appear that the groups of grotesque Ruminants now apparently

confined to the Prairies of Africa, had once a wider distribution. The

assemblage in one deposit of animals differing so widely in their forms

and habits, and in their adaptations to particular localities, leads

irresistibly to the conclusion, that we have before us the delta of a

large river, which, in one of the past configurations of our globe, must

have collected in its course the various spoils of some extensive con-

tinent. No existing river, excepting perhaps the Nile, could unite in

one vast cemetery the remains of every known order of terrestrial

Mammalia and aquatic reptiles; of the denizens of the forest, the

lake and the mud bank, mingled with those of the wide prairie and

the sandy desert.

A Ninth Memoir on the Law or Storms 1n Inp1a; being the Pooree

and Cuttack Storms of 2nd, and the Gya and Paina Storms of

5th and 6th October, 1842. By Henry Pippineron.

I had at first intended to include these storms in my preceding

Memoir as a second part, but as, when a storm or storms in different

parts of the ocean or onshore can be tolerably well traced, there may

be some advantage, particularly when the tracks approach the Sand-

heads, in keeping the documents apart in different Memoirs and

tracing them upon a separate chart. I have preferred doing so in this

instance, and I have published the Madras storm first, forming the

Eighth Memoir, as being of the two that which was of the highest

interest, though the present are of a prior date.

On the 2nd October, the coast about Pooree and Cuttack was visit-

ed by a severe storm, which was felt as a gale at the Sandheads to

the north, and to about lat. 174 to the southward. In some parts of

its progress it appears to have been excessively severe, and two large

ships, at least the Acasta* and Imaum Shah, if not more, foundered

within these limits; besides many coasting vessels.

* By an advertisement in the papers it would appear, that a ship of about 300 tons

had sunk in eighteen feet water off Juggernath Pagoda about the time of this storm,

which was supposed to be the Acasta from Madras.

172 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

At Calcutta, being at the time very unwell, I could not register any

observation ; but those of the Surveyor General’s Office are given in

their place. It will be seen from the documents and charts, that these

storms are a remarkable instance either of two separate storms of

small extent coming up together, or, which I am inclined to suppose, a

large storm dividing itself into two small ones, and travelling up with

great rapidity towards the coast. The grounds for these views will

be as usual shewn in the summary which follows the documents and

comparative table. The storms at sea were followed on the 5th and

6th of October, by severe inland storms from Gya to Patna, extend-

ing to Benares and other places; but having scarcely any documents

from the stations between Cuttack and Gya, we cannot say with

any certainty, that the two sets of storms were connected.

Abridged Log of the Ship Essex, Captain W. H. Brown, from

Madras to Calcutta, Civil time. Barometer corrected to that at

the Surveyor General’s Office. From the Marine Board.

The Essex left Madras on the 29th September 1842, and reached

lat. (by account) 16°, long. 83° 50’ E. by noon on Ist October, having

had variable winds.

p. m. Cloudy; 6, squally with rain, much lightning to N. W.; 8,

squally, very vivid lightning from N. W.to N. E. Dense black clouds to

northward ; 9, wind W. N. W. wind increasing and cross sea rising ;

10, increasing; midnight hard squalls with high sea from N. N. E.

Barometer falling, double-reefed the topsails, high confused sea run-

ning from N. W., N. W. and N. E. very heavy rain.—8 p. m. Bar.

29.836. Ther. 82.—10 ditto, Bar. 29.766. Ther. 81—Midnight, Bar.

29.586. Ther. 80.

Sunday, 2nd OGctober.—Gale increasing, very heavy rain and hard

squalls, sea very high and confused, wind veering suddenly from

S. W. to N. W. and back again ; 6-30, a very vivid flash of lightning

and sudden awful crash of thunder burst immediately over the mast

heads making the ship tremble; very hard squalls 7-30. At7 a. mM.

Bar. 29.436. Ther. 81.—9 ditto, Bar. 30,29.406, Ther. 82.—Noon,

Bar. 29.406. Ther. 84.—2 p. m. Bar. 29.436, Ther. 83.

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 773

Rain falling in torrents ; 9-30, furled the fore top sail and hove the

ship to, with head to N. N. Westward, wind then settled at West.

Noon no rise in the mercury, secured every thing, and made snug for

bad weather. Latitude account 17° 10’ N., longitude 85° 30' E.; Pp. M.

squalls very heavy, but clouds more broken. It had previously been

very thick and very oppressive, wind W. N. W. At 2, the mercury which

had been stationary since 10 a. m. began torise. At 5 Pp. m. moderating,

squalls less severe, and not continually raining as it had previously

done; made a little sail and bore up to the E. N. Eastward, wind settled

at W. S. W. clearing up. Night fine and starlight, with passing light

squalls, made all sail, sea going down fast.—8 p. m. Bar. 29.836, mid-

night 29.336.

Monday.—Fine weather ; Noon latitude 19° 10’ N., longitude &9°

25'.— Barometer 29.886.

Extract from the Log of the French Ship Lion, Captain E. Bonner.

Reduced to civil time.

The Lion left Karical on the evening of the 30th September, passed

in sight of Pondicherry, and at noon Ist October was in lat. 18° 0' N.,

Jong. 19° 21’ E. of Paris, (80° 41’ Greenwich.) p. m. and to midnight

cloudy, an 8 knot breeze from W. N. W.

2nd Ociober.—W eather and sea increasing, steering 9 knots per hour

to N. E. with winds from 8. W. to W.S. W. Noon latitude 15°9' N.,

longitude 83° 01’. p. m. (85° 21’ Greenwich.) p. m. bad appearances,

shortened sail at midnight; going 7 knots to N. E., wind S. W., less

sea and wind.

3rd October.—Wind to noon 8. S. W. At noon fine weather, very

heavy sea, latitude 17° 203’, longitude E., Paris 85° 21’ (87° 41’

Greenwich). From noon 2nd, a current of 90' to the Eastward.*

Pp. M. fine weather to midnight; out reefs.

4th October.—a. m. squally but fine, a good deal of sea. At 2 past

9, saw a ship which we passed at 10; she had lost her foremast, but

made no signals ; stood on. Noon latitude 20° 23’ N., sounding 80 fa-

thoms, mud.

* This is worth remarking, as probably the effect of the storm wave.

774 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

Dr. CumBERLAND, thé Civil Surgeon of Pooree, has kindly obliged me

with the folloniny very clear account of this Storm, as experienced

at that station :—-

We have lately had a very severe gale at Pooree, the particulars of

which I subjoin. The gale commenced on the night of the Ist instant,

blowing hard from North, with rain. It continued to increase during

the 2nd, occasionally blowing in very heavy gusts, with rain from

North. At 6 p. m. the wind which had blown from due N. shifted

to E. N. E. when there was an abatement in the violence of the

storm. At 63 p.m. it re-commenced with renewed violence, accom-

panied with thunder and lightning. At 8 p. m. blowing very heavily

from S. E. At9 p.m. more moderate, heavy rain. At 10 p. m. furious

gusts from 8. S. E. At 113 p. m. more moderate. At 123, heavy gusts

from South, thunder and lightning, then again more moderate. At

1 a.m. of the 3rd, violent gusts from 5S. after which the gale abated,

leaving a brisk gale from South, and towards evening S. S. W.,

gradually diminishing. The 4th was fine with fresh S. W. breezes.

The height of the thermometer on the 2nd was 78°, lowest 76°.

Quantity of rain from 8 a.m. of the 2nd to 6 a. m. of the 3rd, 5

inches and ten-tenths. The damage occasioned by this gale both at sea

and in shore is immense ; no less than six coasting vessels were wrecked

within a few miles of Pooree, and the ‘‘ Imaum Shah,” 700 tons

burthen, foundered off the coast, only four hands saved out of 100 on

board. The Nacoda told me that he was at anchor somewhere about

the Sandheads when the gale commenced from the Westward;

however there is no reliance to be placed on that. The poor man lost

his wife and family, and I dare say was somewhat bewildered. The

town of Pooree presents a sad scene of devastation, and a great many

people have been killed. To give you an idea of the violence of the

storm I may mention, that it was about one-eighth more violent than

that of April 1840, an account of which both the late Mr. Ewart and

myself forwarded to you.* I have had letters from Cuttack to-day,

dated the 4th. There I am informed on the 2nd, they had a smart

storm, only a few trees blown down, but no material injury done.

Cuttack is 50 miles north of Pooree, so that it appears to have con-

fined its ravages more to the coast. R. B. CUMBERLAND,

Pooree, 5th October, 1842. Civil Assistant Surgeon.

* See Jour. As. Soc, Vol. ix, p. 1021. Third Memoir on Law of Storms in India.

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. WD

Dr. Minto, Civil Assistant Surgeon at Cuttack, obligingly sends me

the following account of the gale as experienced there :—

Being unable to take particular notes of the weather during the

last few days I applied to a friend to favor me with his, and as they

may be useful to you, I transmit a copy.

lst October.—First part heavy rain ; noon N.N. E. and N. E. strong

breeze; 8 Pp. m. increasing breeze North, fresh gale and heavy squalls

of rain.

2nd.—First part North, fresh gale and heavy squalls from North,

N. N. E. and N. E. noon increasing gale, North and N. N. E.; 4. m.

strong gale North, furious squalls from N. and N. E.; midnight a rasp-

ing gale N. and N. N. E; heavy rain.

3 a.M.a lull; 6 a. mM. a strong breeze from E. 5. E. and 8S. E.; in-

creasing breeze and cloudy; latter part moderate breeze and cloudy.

I should say the strength of the gale, which came with heavy squalls

of rain, was from noon until sun-set of the 2nd. From the evening of

the Ist until day-light of the 3rd, three inches of rain fell. There has

little injury been done to property, considering the severity of the

weather, I mean in the immediate neighbourhood of Cuttack.

A. MInrTo,

Assistant Civil Surgeon.

Englishman, 25th October, 1842.

ARRIVAL.

25th October.—Ship Juddah Rohoman, Nacoda, from Muscat 30th

August. 7

REMARKS.

The Juddah Rohoman driven out from the Sandheads on the 30th

September in a severe gale of wind from the Eastward, lost fore and

main-masts by the board, and was obliged to throw a quantity of

cargo overboard, to lighten the ship. On the 2nd of October in com-

pany with a large ship of 600 tons with nothing left but her bow-

sprit, she made various signals, but we could not understand them, in

one hour afterwards no trace of her could be seen, supposed her to

have foundered, it blowing hard at the time and a tremendous sea

running ; this took place in latitude 19° 11’ N., longitude 87° 58’ E.

776 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.. {No. 141.

The Ship Eliza was outward bound, and put to sea from the Sand-

heads at the commencement of the storm. Captain McCarthy has

obligingly communicated the following graphic account of wt to me

through Messrs. Cockerell and Co., of which I have only abridged

those maneuvres and preparations which every seaman under-

stands to be matter of course, which would not be intelligible to

other readers, and which do not serve to throw any light upon

our subject.

Cece eee

Report of Capt. McCarrnuy, Ship Eliza, civil time.

30th September, 1842.—Civil time a. m. Light breeze from the

southward and fine weather; at 3 a. m. hove up and made all sail

down from Saugor Point, set all studding sails; at noon light winds

from N. N. E. to N.N. W. and fine weather. Barometer 29.80. Ther-

mometer 84.0. Steering down Channel, a very heavy rolling hollow swell

and all possible sail set. ‘The heavy head swell continued all the way

down Channel. At 2 hours 50 minutes, Mr. Hand, Pilot, left the ship

about two miles above the outer Floating Light, and went up in the

steamer. Increasing breezes and cloudy, a strong Westerly set,* steering

5S. S. E. 3 E.; at 7 ep. m. the Light Vessel North, wind from N. N. E.

to N. N. W., a heavy dark appearance from the S. E.; from sunset to 9

p. m. light winds from Northward with much, very vivid, lightning to

the 5. E., threatening appearance and incessant lightning; at 11

Barometer 29.78. Smart squall from S. E. with very heavy rain.

The Barometer stationary as. well as the Sympiesometer, heavy rain

continued. At midnight fell calm, with baffling airs from North-

ward and Southward alternately.

lst October.—An increasing breeze from N. N. E., steering S. S. E.

4 E. about five knots; a turbulent cross sea on, but not high. 4 a. m. ©

strong N. N. E. winds with squalls and incessant rain with a cross

sea as above ; at 6 to 7 a.m. hard squalls and drizzling rain, ship pitching

heavily ; at 8 a.m. squalls increased, attended with constant rain and

windy appearance, reduced sail. Barometer 29.78, not fallen any since

* These italics are mine, as this phenomenon is one to which too much attention

cannot be paid.—H. P.

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. RUT

yesterday, and Sympiesometer 29.70. It continued steady from 8 a. m.

to noon ; strong N. N. E. winds with squalls and much rain, a cross

turbulent sea at noon. Barometer fell suddenly to 29.68.; at 3 p.m.

strong breeze from N. N. E. and rain and thick weather, wind falling

light at times and freshening as suddenly again.* Made all preparations

for bad weather, and brought the ship to the wind under double reefed

main topsail and foretopmast staysail ; at sunset strong wind appreach-

ing to a fresh gale, with unsettled thick weather, wind lulling and

freshening at times from North to N. E. with a cross, turbulent, agi-

tated sea and constant rain. Barometer falling a little ; from 6 p. m. to

midnight fresh gales and hard looking weather, no rain; midnight

Barometer 29.50 falling. Sympiesometer 29.42. Close reefed the main

topsail and in forestaysail, hove to under main topsail close reefed,

head E. S. E.

2nd October.—a. M. commences with strong gales, with squalls and

light rain again ; sea high and cross, ship easy, and not moving much,

shipping no water on deck, lurching at times. Barometer fallen at 1 to

29.30. Sympiesometer 29.22. and falling ; blowing a hard gale, pitching

hard, and taking water on deck, increasing gale. Barometer falling fast ;

at 3-30 increased to a violent gale, steady at about N. N. E. with a

high sea from the Southward, making it very cross, shipping a good

deal of water on deck when the ship lurched. Barometer fell very sud-

denly since midnight from 29.30 to 28.30, and Sympiesometer 28.22,

and falling still. Clued up the close reefed maintopsail, and although it

was run up quick, before the men could get it well fast, it blew nearly

to pieces ; the wind increased suddenly toa violent storm, the drift mak-

ing a clean sweep over us for several feet above the deck, the weather

quarter-boat blew up to the rigging, got a rope round her to the rail.

Just about 5-30 a. m. blowing a violent hurricane from about N. N. E.,

ship laying over three planks of her lee deck in the water ; wind most

terrific, the weather quarter-boat broke the davits, blew up about ten

feet up the mizen rigging, and lay across and broke the planks in se-

veral places. Stove all the full water casks that were on deck and hove

them overboard to ease the ship, now laboring very heavy and burying

very much to leeward ; masts bending and buckling with the force of

* This is exactly the rising and falling of the wind described in the Seventh Memoirs,

vol. xi, p. 1000.

778 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [ No. 141.

the wind, ship buried to leeward as high as the rail. At 6 a. m. the fore-

topgallant mast broke off above the cap, and likewise the main and

mizen ; put an extra batten on the after-hatch with long nails, the fore

upper hatchway caulked down, the ship now laying over with her lee

side all buried within two planks of the hatchway ; the upper part of

lee bulwark swept away and upper covering board split, the gun and

carriage washed over the rail, the spars on the booms and longboat all

fast; but the board on the booms adrift the wind having got under

the boat, broke her lashing and blew her to pieces. Barometer still

falling since 6 a. m. ; at present 8 a. m. Barometer 27.92 and Sympie-

someter 27.78. Blowing a terrific hurricane ; ship much over, the lee

side of the quarter deck quite buried, and the covering rail being ap-

parently split, did not know the extent of the damage to leeward, it

being under water ; masts struggling and bending much, the foremast

head gave way and fore-topmast fell over the side with yards, and

our foreyard came down the foremast several feet ; ship not rising at

all, and wishing to wear her to get the lee side up, (hurricane still as

violent,) cut. away the main topmast backstays to ease the ship and

try to righten, her, as the fore topmast going did not appear to do so,

and to save the mainmast, when the main topmast broke some feet

above the cap, yards, &c. going with it over the side; still the ship

lay over with most of the lee side of the deck under water, and not

rising cut away the mizen shrouds to ease the ship, when the mizen

mast went over the side, taking away the binnacles, compasses, boats,

&c. &c. overboard, and carrying away the starboard quarter gallery,

poop rail, and smashing the skylight and every thing on the poop. The

ship rightened a little, broke the steering wheel and wounded a man

on the poop; the sea washed into the starboard after cabin, (the Cap-

tain’s,) and nearly filled it, and from it to the cuddy and other cabins,

and a large quantity of water got down the companion hatch abaft

the cuddy before it could be secured. Since 6h. 30m. a. m. until at

present at 11 a. m., it had blown a terrific hurricane. Barometer sta-

tionary at 27.89, Sympiesometer 27.78; still blowing as furiously as

ever. About a little after 1] a. m. the wind suddenly lulled very

much, got the hands on the poop, got tackles on the tiller, the wheel

being broken, and put it up; after some time the ship wore and clear-

ed the deck of water, the sea knocked her about the stern in wearing,

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 779

brought her to on the starboard tack ; much lightning and dark over-

cast weather; heading up N. W. At a little before noon, the wind

shifted in a flash of lightning suddenly to the S. S. E. from N. N. E.

and blew instantly nearly as violent as it had before done, from N. N.

E. Clapped the hands on the pumps, and kept at them sometime ;

but they were washed away, some rice coming with the water; ship

apparently a list to starboard; dark overcast weather, the drift

washing right over the ship ten feet above the deck ; not able to look

to windward. Cut away the wreck of the mizen mast, it being now to

windward, but not before it had struck the rudder and shook it very

much ; it struck likewise under the counter before the ship was wore

round, and shook the stern frame a good deal ; threw every thing over-

board that was about the decks as well as three provision casks that

had washed out from under the top gallant forecastle where they were

stowed, to prevent them from wounding the people; many having

had their legs cut and other bruises. Two feet and eight inches in the

well, but could not tell precisely, every thing being so wet ; set to work

at the pumps, a quantity of rice coming up with the water; pumps

working well and heaving a large quantity of water ; blowing very vio-

lently from 8. S. E., the lee sea coming nearly up to the pumps at

times ;* secured the foreyard and lashed the yardarm of the mainyard

down to the ring bolts in the stanchion and kept it on end, to keep it

steady ; tried to get something on outside the quarter gallery, as the

cabins were nearly full of water, but could not succeed ; the men were

washed away; blew a violent hurricane until about 4h. 30m. p. m.

black overcast weather and lightning; when the extreme violence of

the hurricane moderated a little; all hands at the pumps, continued at

them until nearly 6 p. m. when the ship sucked. A large quantity of

water in the cuddy and cabins, and some of it getting below as it

washed about ; succeeded in getting the quarter gallery door barricad-

ed with canvass and battens, which kept part of the sea out. At 6

P. M. moderating to a hard gale, and glass rising slowly from 27.92 to

28.30. Sympiesometer 28.22, both rising together. Sympiesometer

moved up first. Succeeded in stopping the water from getting in, got

* The italics are mine, this is partly a confirmation of my remarks on the danger

of the lee sea in the First Memoir, vol. viii. Jour. As. Soc. p. 645.—H. P.

780 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. {No. 141.

the water baled out of the cabin and cuddy, got some more of the wreck

cut away, tiller loosened a little on the rudder head, got quite pitch

dark, sent the men to rest in the cuddy. Barometer 28.50. Ship lay-

ing to, helm down, head E. N. E. to N. E., wind about 8. S. E., cross

turbulent agitated sea on, less water on deck, and violence of the storm

moderating. From 9 to midnight strong gale and overcast weather,

steady atS.S. E. Midnight ditto weather, ship rolling heavy at times,

the Sympiesometer rose to 28.96, the Barometer got broke by striking

against the side in one of the heavy rolls after the violence of the storm

had subsided.

3rd October.—a. m. strong gale from S.S. E. and dark weather, but

clearing away a little ; ship laying to, head to Eastward, very easy and

decks clear of water, great heat coming up from below. Sunrise hard

gale and fair weather with passing clouds, wind S. 8. E., ship laying

to under bare poles, but not to the wind; clearing the wreck. Noon

strong winds and fair weather. Sympiesometer 29.40. Thermometer

82°. Latitude observation 19° 46’, longitude chronometer 88°. Situa-

tion by account at midnight of the Ist, when the violence of the gale

commenced and lasted to 4 a. m on the 2nd October, was latitude

18° 30’ North (about) and longitude 89° 0’ East. p. m. strong winds

from the Southward, and cloudy weather. At 2, Sympiesometer 29.56.

Thermometer 84°. Squalls at intervals and light rain, high sea on from

S. E. Employed clearing wreck and getting the foreyard up, set the lee

part of the mainsail, a few cloths to leeward, the rest being all blown

away, to keep the ship to; the foresail nearly torn to pieces, very high

sea on. Midnight strong southerly winds, passing squalls at times.

Midnight ditto. Finding ourselves at so little distance from the Sand-

heads, and a strong southerly wind blowing and likely to continue,

and not being able yet to keep the ship to the wind, it being S. S. E.

and quite dead foul, we determined to run back, kept away N. E. by

N. under clew of mainsail, going about two knots.

4th October.—a. m. strong breeze from S. S. E. to South, with

passing light squalls, kept the ship N. E. by N. 2 N. to check the

westerly set that always prevails outside at this time. Noon, sea subsid-

ing gradually, moderate breeze and fair weather. Latitude by observa-

tion 20° 12’ North, longitude per chronometer 87° 58’; had a strong

set about W.S. W., and shortly arrived safe at Calcutta.

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 781

Report of the Ship Emerald Isle, Capt. J. Scatses. From the Marine

Board.

On the Ist instant whilst at anchor in the Eastern Channel, the wea-

ther became unsettled with the wind at East, the squalls rising about

S. E., but striking us mostly from about East. About 4 p. m. gale and

sea increasing, slipped and made sail to the southward. During the

night it blew fresh with an increasing sea. About 5 a.m. on the 2nd,

wind about E. S. E., gale increasing with such rapidity, that I was un-

able to shorten sail sufficiently quick, the weather beginning to assume

a most wild and threatening appearance. About 1 p. m. the wind and

sea had increased to that extent, and the ship so uneasy, I thought we

should have been swallowed. Thermometer was then 82° and Sym-

piesometer 28=*, varying not more than a couple of tenths, until about

6 p. m., when it gradually rose, and the breeze had sensibly abated.

The wind had then veered to South, but the hardest part was from the

S. East ; it blew hard in squalls during the night with deluges of rain,

but by daylight had almost subsided. The Sympiesometer then 28.40,

which at Noon rose to 28.50. Thermometer 84°, the wind then

gradually drew round to the S. S. W., when the weather became clear

and tranquil.

J. SCALES,

Commanding Ship Emerald Isle.

Abridged Log of H. C. Steamer Tenasserim from Singapore, bound

* to Calcutta, reduced to civil time.

28th September, 1842.—Noon, latitude 14° 22’ N. longitude 93° 45'

E. Narcondam at lh. 30m. a. m. W. by N. (distance not stated).

Fine westerly breeze. p. m. to midnight, winds variable, N. N. W. to

W. 4 p.m. Preparis E. by N. 3 N. (no distance).

29th September.—Fresh breezes N. W. by W. to W.N. W. No

observations at noon. p.m. the same weather, Lat. account 16° 6’ N..,

longitude 92° 15’ E. 10 a.m. wind North. pv. m. heavy squalls occa-

sionally from N. W. Midnight wind N. W.

30th September.—a. m. strong breeze and thick cloudy weather,

_ With a heavy cross sea, set storm stay sails. No observations. Latitude

* Captain S.’s Barometer was broken.

782 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. — [\No. 141.

account 17° 24’ N., longitude 91° 28’ E. lying to. From 2 pv. m. “ wind

shifted* to a gale from 8. S. W.” Hove to under storm staysails. dh.

30 strong gale, ship labouring much and so till midnight.

lst October.—a. m. wind lulling at intervals, wind (apparently) S. S.

W. till 6 a. m. when wind marked 8.8. E. “ At 93 boreaway N. W.

by N. with a heavy swell.” Noon, latitude observation 18° 2’ N.,

longitude account 90° 15’ E. p.m. wind S. E. fresh breezes and rain

to midnight, when by account it would appear, that she was about in

latitude 19° 334’, longitude 89° 28’ E.

2nd October.—a.m. heavy squalls and rain S. E. 6-30 “ fresh

gale and dark rainy weather with a heavy southerly sea.” 7 P. M.

hove to under storm sails. At 10.15 in 70 fathoms water. Noon

latitude observation 20° 47’ N., longitude 88° 10’ E. vp. m. wind 8. E.,

in 55 fathoms. Brisk gale to midnight, when fine.

3rd October.—a. mM. wind S. E. 4 p.m. in 35 fathoms, and at 5

a.m. 80 fathoms, no ground (being on the Swatch). Noon, latitude 20°

56' N. and squally. At 0.30 P. m. saw the Pilot.

Extract from the Log of the ship Halifax Packet, from Calcutta,

bound to England. Forwarded by the Master Atiendant, Point

de Galle.

30th September, 1842.—At midnight the Pilot left us at the Sand-

heads, all possible sail set, wind N. N. E. steering S. S. E. Latitude at

noon 21° 18' N., longitude 88° 40’ E. Bar. 29.60. Ther. 82°.

lst October.—During the afternoon of this day the wind increased,

double reefed the topsails, the wind veering from N. N. E. to East.

Barometer and Thermometer same as yesterday.

Qnd October.—At 2 a. M. civil time, the Barometer had fallen to

27.90, made all snug, the slings of the foreyard gave way, got the

yard and sail secured across the forecastle, it then blowing a terrific

hurricane. At 4 a. m. the bowsprit gave way, carrying away the

foremast near the deck, the starboard bower anchor stock, starboard

gangway rail, bulwarks, split the covering board, and stove the long

* Wind not marked, but apparently from W. N. W. when the shift took place.

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 7838

boat. At 43 the main topmast went over the side, carrying with it the

main cap and part of the mast head ; cut away as much of the wreck

as possible to save the rudder and ship. The crew, although strong

and numerous, very inefficient. At 5, the typhoon at the highest pos-

sible state of fury, the mizen mast went over the starboard quarter,

carrying with it the boom, gaff, binnacles, compasses, broke the

steering wheel, and started the upper rudder brace, also a sky-light

hatch, signal chest, stancheons and every thing on the poop ; the ship

completely under water, yet leaking but little. About noon the wind

veered to South, and became more moderate. The Barometer getting

rapidly up, but a high sea; the ship rolling fearfully. Barometer at

noon 28.90, at 8 p. M. 29.00’. Lat. 19° 26’ N., long. 88° 30’ E.

3rd October.—On the morning of this day cleared away the wreck,

saw two ships dismasted and stern frame of a third, with the name

in white letters, but could not read them, the sea high and the crew

as much disabled as the ship; every thing full of water. Books, charts,

clothes, nautical instruments and one chronometer all spoiled ; wind

S. S. W. Barometer at 4 a. m. 29.40, at noon 29.50.

4th October.—This day the ship rolling dreadfully, quite under

water ; nothing could be done but keeping her pumped out; found a

great quantity of our bread in a damaged state, wind moderated from

South. Barometer 29.70. Latitude 19° 46’ N., longitude 87° 50’ E.

From Mr. Bonn, Master Attendant at Balasore, I have been favored

as usual with the following able Statements of the Winds and

Weather.

I have the pleasure to forward an account of the breeze here on

the Ist to the 7th October 1842, up to which time the wind was vari-

able, with cloudy weather and rain. The Barometer only fell to 29.52,

thereby indicating rain more than wind, which indeed proved cor-

rect; the sea rose above high water mark, occasioned by the wind to

the Southward, and three Salt Vessels were driven ashore and two

Telingahs, also three Maldive boats foundered below Chooramoon ; the

people of two of them having been saved in their boats, the other

people were supposed to have gone ashore near Hidgelee. No other

784 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

vessels were lost north of Point Palmyras; but to the southward of

the Point numbers were driven ashore and foundered, and many

lives lost. A range of hills (the Neelgherries,) stretches down from

the northward in a line with Chooramoon, which place lies S. S. W.

of Balasore, distant twenty miles. On the N. E. side of this range of

hills the winds were weak, (a top gallant breeze only,) whilst it in-

creased on the S. W. side of Chooramoon, and onwards to Pooree and

the Chilkah Lake, to a complete hurricane, for the coast was strewed

with wrecks, besides several ships being completely dismantled, and

some having foundered.

Ther. | Bar. | Bar. | Bar.

Oct. 1842. D) P. mu. 9 me M.O P. M. 5 Pp. M.

Remarks.

ee ce

en re ee

—~ eee

Ist October,| 83 | 29.80 | 29.71 | 29.67 |N. W. to N. E. rain.

Ond ditto,..| 80 | 29.71 | 29.55| 29.50 | 4 TP gallant breeze N.E.,

squally rain.

3rd ditto,..| 82 | 29.62 | 29.65) 29.64 |S. E. puffy rain, squallydo.

Ath ditto,..| 83 | 29.74} 29.70) 29.70 |S. E. ditto ditto.

5th ditto,..| 84 29.68 | 29.70} 29.69 |S. E. ditto rain.

6th ditto,..| 85 | 29.80 | 29.68} 29.65 |S. E. to S. W. rain slight.

“th ditto,..| 85 | 29.80! 29.80! 29.77 1 S.W. fairer and variable

N. W. and N. E.

The logs of the Pilot and Light Vessels will be found included in

the Tabular statement. The following is the only document which I

have of the state of the weather at Calcutta, which is followed by

such reports from inland stations as have reached me.

785

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.

1843, }

ee = ee CS

“1e9a[O eceseace “|

“1YR1}S-OLUT) | 88" AA NT

“Sulsapuny J, ; ee

yueystq ‘Apno[g aA ‘Ss

“Tye1}S-O[TNUND seecneece "5

“spno[9o pealapeosg eeevseoee “Ss

"I[nuINnyD eoceoee “a S

‘Sururey |" Nt (4514)

*TyeIjS-O1ITY) eoecece "W ‘Nl

a S

e, 5

= 4

“PUT AA

8°08 | G28 | 8°§8

0°64 | 0'¢8 | VES

862 | 0'€8 | 0'%8

O18 | 0°S8 | O°F8

[°G8 | 9°98 | 9'F8

08 | OL8 | [FS

0°9L | O'8L | 8'6L |

0°%8 | S98 | 6'€8

1 o ie) / o

Deuba os)

Boel are i

Sen ee

2 it ©

Ss : 5

e e

=. a

=| 3

le [o} |

-ainjesodua J,

*loyoMOIeg

‘W 0G ‘HG LV GHANaSdO ‘auASSaYg WAWINIW

mat) fe)

‘£pnolo

Sutsapuny,y, ‘Apno[g

"1]81}s-OTNUIND

“1eaTC Ayp[esauer

*TJC1]S-OLIID

}

lapunyy, ‘A[zzug

‘Sullapuny J, ulery

‘AS 94} Jo yoodsy |

sereee em eg! gryy

Terese CONTRO! O'GL

soeeee om eal Q°gy

foe MED 0-62

seeeeeee ogg] Qigy

Nee ceria):

(ysiq) “gy “yT} 0°92

Siete AN 0°92

/ o

o g

co] DM

fab)

g | 58

5° Es

[o)

Lard

fat)

ete

fe)

mee eee en ee

“pulAr

L-6L | G08 | 049° eae

;

O'8ZL | 9°6L | 929° ess

0°08 | SIS | O19" ge

6'6L | O18 | 199° Boa

L'6L | O'18 | $99" @r*

G'6L | B08 | SI9° a

Z'9L | O'6L | 029° Se

0°84 | S08 | 0S9°6z 1 20

/ Oo / oO *soqouy

OF Ge |S eet te

> > 3 S a

@ a 5 ee j=)

Seba | f | 2] &

° = ro) ® oO

el 09 =

dug! cies. (Fgh se

‘ainyeroduia J,

Ol ee

‘aSla NNS LY GeANaSAO ‘AYNLVUAINAT, WOWINIJ

‘ZEST ‘4agonQ fo yjuopy ay2 “of ‘n24nI10) ‘aE syouauay Lohaaung ayz zn yday sajsibay puorboj0.10010

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

786

‘pnuNg|**"* AA

“Traum ** “A'S

eT7nMIND|** +g

*Tyedjs-opnuIND|**"""*"S

“Aqperjszed Apnojo}******"g

“Kpnopg}'*t* +g

“TQUUIN | a Cyst)

‘I[NUIND OMIO| 88° “A

"uoryoart |

“AYS ay} Jo yoodsy

ee a SS

O'III}) 9°78 | 0°06 | 2°98

O'ZIL) 6°08 | 688 | B°S8

O°00I| 618 | €°S8 | 6&8

0601; £68 | 0°68 | 8°98

0'€6 | O48 | 228 | 198

O'LOT| O'€8 | S88 | 6°58

G’°z8 | 0°84 , 0°08 | S'08

O'FOT| O'§8 0°06 | O'Z8

ae) n°) i) 0) / 0

5S io) © )

ia mr ear) =>

Boe 2 eee ee

Leiba

pet ae Te

ae | 8 g

eal vais

nm oO

ee gee, Sie

*ainqyeradure J,

819°6Z

sayouy

*JaJaMIOIV

eee

‘N Op ‘H Z LY GHAUTSAO ‘TUALVAAdIWAT, WAWIXVI,

a ee ee A Se | pees SS

“‘IeIqO eeeeoeeee “M

"Tynan" “A'S “AA

*1IQUal WT @¢ee@eeeee °S

‘tyeajs-opnoTNg)| “*°* °°" “HY CS

“Tye.1}8-o,NUIND

‘ayes |

ysoly pue ‘oururey

"I[NWNYD OLIIQ

ae es Se

“AYS ay} Jo yoodsy

"NOON INHUVddY LV AGVW SNOILVAYASIDO

‘aN (yS1q)

UOTJIALIGY

a ee a | ee et a pS

AW ue jo

"20RJING

Surjerode

[.8)

/ 0

“ITY 243 JO

‘ainjeirsduta J,

989°

€69°

019

699°

162°

g99°

669"

699°6%

‘JayaWOIe

sayouy

‘sasueyy suo

“é

‘YUO | ay1 Jo sheq

‘SERT ‘uaqoj9Q fo yuo ay) wof ‘njjnazvQ ‘20fQ sjosauay sohaaung ay? yo qday sajsibay yvorbojo.10aja jy

787

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.

“HOON Je XUT[RIVY [eJUOZTIOFT s,uoop | fo

1843. ]

1g°0 | 96'0

Lz°0 | G60

80°0 | S0°0

6S°0 | vS°0

Tels VEL

sayouy |Seqouy

sasney ure

"IJLI]S° OLIN

| ave{Q ATpersueny

“IBID Ayjeieuen

"TJ8.1]8-OITQ)

OLN

aa N,

*Apno[g Alaa

"AY 94} Jo yoodsy |

*eo6 mleg

eeae ‘UIE

EE ORs

teen og og

“a (ysrq)

Sus gene

“uorjd01Tg |

a ee

“REGAN

P'08/ 6°78) 88

€°08| S48) SS

G08} 0°E8/6°E8

'%'08| SES) 2°F8

0°18 0°98) 6°¢8

Z'08 0°78) S°E8

¢°9Z| 0°82) 0°08

Z'08 2°S8/0 98

Ve) 70 ;70

oleae ss

Bel ce) ae:

Z| E |e

i g

| G

g. ;

oo |

Rn |

|. |

‘fd

-amnyeraduta J,

i as sg ee

‘LASNOG LY AGVW ‘SNOILVANSSACO

0¢9°

0L9°

68S"

O19"

099°

Gro"

689°

809°62

soyouy

‘Aqpensed Apnojg'

"1}e1]S-OTNUIND,

“ynUNg

“TynNuUIND

“TMU

‘Apno[g

“TQ UIT NT

“Apnojg

*lajomMo1eg

“Ag oy) Jo wedsy

ee AN rts! 068 | L'¢8

“MA “SAA L'IS8| S'88 | 3°68

eeee ee) he fs) o°G8 L't8

vvetee*s/0'gs] 0°88 | 0°98

"ereseeees) gg 0'88 | 0°98

he sees) Org) 0°98 L't8

a (H51q)/ 0°22) 1°64 | 0°18

netere “al g'eg] £88 | #28

= ne) / 0 ne)

lage ee

Pi a) eg [8

ee Bee (ee

S Z

a. 3

“pula sainieiaduteg,

‘IoJaMLOIe |

*sasueyy s,uo0opy |

—$———————

¢¢

"yyMOW 24} Jo she

‘W ‘d p LV GUAUASHO ‘TuNSsSTYg WAWINIT

‘GEST ‘10g079Q fo yjuopy ay, sof ‘n2nIdj)0D ‘2a04IQ s.jouauay sofiaauny ay7 yo yday sazsibay poorbojosoaja py

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. (No. 141.

788

crs

c"e8

O18

CZ°E8

G68

0°18

0°08

NS ee

‘adeyING

eA UBIO

Suryerod

I ‘ '

CLT g¢s C/8: GL'E8 0'¢g G°cg 0c8" 8 sa

0'r8 0't8 998° CER 0'F8 CZ'F8 006° l .

Z'§8 ce"s cor c's ces 0°E8 OSL 9 3s

0'F8 C2'FS eis" 0'FS CZ'F8 0°¢8 96L hetoe = act

S2"68 c@'F8 006" G2°88 08 (68: * . 006: @ te

1°S8 0°S8 OSs" GLE 068 G2'E8 983° | ¢ %

t |

0°18 C!'18 OSL" G'08 G18 0'%8 GLL | b=: =

G2'G8 OFF G28 6% GZ'F8 CZ'G8 GL'b8 GZ8'6% | | ‘po

10 eto *soqouy 10 !o ao *soqouy

° at Se ae es = ° Ot tee! Fo aaa aed Cee

lear) | Lear) > nm ae i © oO | ©

= | = [=) i<j = Es > (o) S =

@ | © B at © @ B ae =

> we & ote > = 3 a =

A g z aS a g n E a

; | S aS a © e

| E A =| | 03 =

i c. Fe g 5

08 : =a

‘ainje1ad ua J, ‘ainyesroduta J, |

“NW ‘d OL LY FZavVN SNOTLVAYASAG “Ae rd 8 LY AGCVW SNOILVAUASAG |

‘hansuadsigg s hundwog 219 ,uofzy] ay] 20 apou aun yasuny sajf{v suorvasasgg¢ ay,

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 789

The following Memorandum is from my friend Wu. Peacock, Esgq.,

who was, at the time of which he writes, on the river in a Boat.

Being about 10 or 12 miles above the mouth of the Bhagruttee (about

latitude 32° 32’ N. longitude) 88° 20’ on the 5th October, I observed in

the evening the wind was from the Eastward. gradually lulling as night

came on. After sunset a very heavy bank of clouds visible all along the

horizon, commencing a little East of North and running round East-

ward to nearly South. During the night of the 5th, the wind sprung

up again, but from the North East ; and it was blowing fresh from that

quarter all the forenoon of the 6th till about 12 or 1 o’clock, when

heavy squalls came up from the South-East, succeeding each other at

intervals of half an hour, and so on till between 3 and 4 p. m. when

the weather cleared a little; but it still blew fresh from South East,

with an occasional shower till evening. I was by that time in a very

sheltered situation, and could not well feel the weather as I did in the

morning of the 6th, and during the middle of the day, all which

time I was knocking about in the open river, and exposed to the full

power of the storm.

Wm. Peacock.

The following note from Purulia, by Capt. Hannyneton, B. N. I.

is the only trace I have of any storm in the line between Cuttack

and Gya.

Purulia, \\th April, 1843.

The fact is, that we had a brisk gale here for one day during the

first week of October, and pretty full memoranda of the Barometrical

changes were noted down by a friend who was then here, and who

instead of at once writing them in the memorandum book, committed

them to a scrap of paper, which has unfortunately been mislaid. I

have searched for it long and in vain. So far as my memory serves,

the gale began here on the night of Sunday the 2nd October, and blew

from North veering to West, in which quarter it moderated, and ceased

in the afternoon of the 8rd. Seeing it was so short, and no notice

being taken of it by you, I supposed that it was of no consequence, and

therefore did not send a report. You will say that nothing of the

on he

790 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. | No. 141.

kind can want some degree of consequence, and that the memoran-

dum should have been sent. Very true; I will behave better next

time. I have much occupation, and do not keep a daily register.

Lieutenant Surrwitu, B. N. I. employed on the Revenue Survey,

has kindly sent me the following Note from Gya.

We had a violent storm at this place (Gya) on the 5th October.

It commenced early in the morning (sun-rise) of the 5th from the

S. E. and blew with a half-gale-like strength till night-fall, when its

strength increased, and it blew furiously till the morning. About

8 a. m. on the 6th, it veered round to the S. W. and blew till 12 noon,

when it faded away, having lasted 30 hours, and doing some damage

by blowing down trees, &c.

The storm from its commencement till close, was accompanied (with

the exception of short intervals) by heavy rain ; heavier than had

occurred during any part or time of the rains.

No lightning or thunder during the day visible or audible; but

during the night, continued peals of thunder followed in quick succes-

sion.

The whole country was flooded from the rain, tanks filled to over-

flowing, and in fact, the storm has proved a blessing to this part of the

world.

‘W.S. SHERWILL.

From Pussewa, near Jounpore, Lat. 25° 40' N., Long. 83° 2' E., I

have from V. TreGesr, Esq. the following account of the Storm.

I send a few notes taken during a severe storm with which we

have unfortunately been visited. I hope you will be able to lay down

its course by the aid of other reports, which I doubt not will be made

to you. Great injury has been done to the cane crop in general, and

my indigo has also suffered greatly.

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 791

Notes during the Storm of the 5th and 6th October 1842. Pussewa, 12 miles E.

of Jounpore.

3 | Time. |Bar. s Wind. Remarks.

Go)

fas =

3rd.| Noon. | 29.5 E Fresh breeze, with occasional light

showers.

» | OP. M. Z Breeze rising.

4th.| Noon. | 29.4 E Strong breeze, with frequent show-

ers; clouds in two strata, lower

one driving very rapidly to W.,

upper moving very slowly in the

~ same direction, occasional breaks

P. M. showing the clear sky.

7” 5. 30. oe : sais Heavy rain and breeze increasing.

5th.; a.m. a E. High wind and showers.

» | Noon. | 29.25 nd Ditto ditto.

P. M.

* 3. 29.1 Very high wind, with rain.

Rs 6. uae ee rae Ditto ditto, and heavy rain.

»» |Midnight.| ... coe N. E. Strong gale, with rain.

A. M.

Gth,. |i 2. 29.0151) eas N. Gale increasing, with violent gusts,

which was the character of the

storm during the past night;

many trees blown down, and in-

numerable branches torn off.

a 7 720 N Violent storm, with rain.

G0. © | 29.05"...

=| Noon. | 29.1 | 76'| N.N. W.

DOTS ses N. W.

» | 2-40. | 29.25] ... | W.N.W

>B) 3. eee ° W.

3) 6. W.

P. M.

SE ee ee Ww

:, g. | 29.3 | 78

A. Me

7th 6. 22h SOU: We,

i, 2. 29.2 | 78 |N. W. by W.

|Gale continuing, but sky clearing,

a few minutes of sunshine. Baro-

meter began to rise.

Boe decreasing.

Ditto.

Ditto, strong breeze only.

. |Light breeze.

Ditto, low clouds driving very fast

to S. E., heavy bank from N. W.

round by N. to S. E,

Heavy rain from N. W.

Clearing up, fresh breeze.

Cloudy, with very light rain.

Clear, with pleasant breeze. _

792 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

E. C. Ravensuaw, Esq., C. S., Commissioner of Revenue for the

Patna District, has obliged me mith the following Notes from that

Station :-—

I observe there has been a heavy gale at Cuttack on the 2d instant,

which extended far into the interior. As it is probably connected

with a violent and continued gale experienced at this station, I en-

close the very imperfect notes made by me while it lasted.

Date. mere Ther. | Rain. Remarks.

Get 3 : eet, 0 0 } Blowing fresh from East.

PRR MNT Mies Hel 84 A i Ditto ditto. 43

2 Ditto, at 6 p. mM. rain commenced, continued

fog and8 83 { pouring all night. Gale increasing.

tions, wind shifted to the Souths; at 5 Pp. M.

to the West, from which quarter until mid-

night it blew furiously, but with little rain.

79 12 Calm. E. C. RavensHaw.

Gale continues, ‘trees blown down in all direc-

3 Ol 29.51 8] 4,50

To Lizut. CuamiEr, of the Ordnance Department, Iam obliged for

the following account of the Storm at Allahabad.

Possibly the following hasty Memo. of a gale of wind we had here

at the beginning of the month may prove useful, asa hint to other in-

formation :—

Mermo.

October \st and 2nd.—Strong Easterly winds and clouds, with oc-

casional showers. |

3rd.— Ditto ditto during the day, increased after sun-set, and dur-

ing the night blew a gale, towards morning (4th) moderated.

4th.—Much the same as yesterday, with occasional heavy gusts and

showers. At 8 Pp. m. increased to a strong gale, wind East andE.N. E.

5th —Eight o’clock a. m. gale from E. and E. N. E. very strong;

11-30, moderated, heavy showers; 4 p. m. strong wind from E.;

7, moderate ; at midnight increased to a strong gale.

6th.— Gale continued from E. and E.N. E. till day-break, when it

decreased and commenced clearing up, the wind changing to N. E.,

N. and finally West, in which quarter it remained nearly steady.

Between the Ist and 6th, 1.74 inches of rain fell.

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 793

THERMOMETER.

October Ist, 10 a. M.,.... loiere Bites aie eee. 86 Fahrenheit.

9 oon, @ooae S@eee @eee eoee 2ee0e0e 29

* AMPS Mi...) < 5:06 pera atelale siciaia Booe) KER Ns

», 2d, Not observed,

Po ereitl wal Ars: Miss siet«'a sieler Balas eiereve Caer i 215) te

», 4th, Not observed.

Pee SEN ee OB, Bhs, \c'~isie eves Sta lats Balas sine tO ue

Le IN OGIR, ii), 'se8 staie goles eters Wate St? OO) ch

99 4a. Me, e@eeee eece eoee @eeee e@eee 80 9?

Sue Gta OA.) Ms «ele Gras Sistas ie ate aisles OS os

an INOON,: 6 se Bvrata sreyere elelaka Beiee eh) a

55 OB ePRT se weiss saute eis aisiete gees 8s

ee 99

Geo. G. CHAMIER, Ist Lieut.

Com. of Ordnance.

The following report from Agra has been sent me by Dr. Balfour,

Surgeon to the Honorable the Governor of the N. W. Provinces.

Sympiesometer and Thermometer for the first 10 days of October 1842, at Agra.

ali s | Ss e | 3

Bie is7 bs s | 3

g eves) & p Be ae era yi

oS |S E4 Eee Eg oe i Remarks.

Poe no | BS 5 as

oo} pa us| Pm J PP

ase 874 29.13 | N.B, | “882 | 28.94) N. E,

2 |Sun| 88 "16 | vble. | 88 | 29.01| N. E. |p. m. cloudy and

slight shower.

oa MW. | 87 iio ent Oe 852 702; Nly. |p. m. fine shower.

4 |T. | 86 12 |N. E.| 8623 | 28.98 |N. Ely.|Cloudy all day, fine

5 | W.| 85 O7.|N.E. | 823 98 | N. E. | rain in afternoon,

6 | T. | 833 10 | Ely. 854 -06 |. Cm. heavy continued

Row Es). 822 “M5° |W. 842 | 29.05| W. rain from 103 to

| 4 p. M., at times

cloudy.

ES. 88 “12. | >We a] 9 84 -00 |N. by E./Shower at 8 pv. m.

9 Sun| 833 ‘ll | Cm 844 OL | N. E.

10 M ee sicle aes sap eae .. |Absent from the

| station.

pe. I. 823 -38 | Cm. 84 28

My bear Str,—The above may be interesting, as 1 see you have had a

gale at Cuttack during the time, for which I give you a copy of my Regis-

ter. Easterly winds, from my experience, are rare here in October, and

rain too is unusual; the jump of the Sympiesometer on the 11th has been

sustained, it never having fallen below 30 (in the morning) since.

J. Batrour.

I now, as in former Memoirs, give a tabular view of the Winds and

_ Weather on different days, including in it the logs of the Pilot and

Light Vessels, and shall then proceed to the concluding summary

of the grounds on which I have laid down the track of the Storms.

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [[No. 141.

794

“*8

_ 1OUL *89°6Z “Te “teyeam Sur G8 j°* 8 "16G°6Z “Wd §

-ua}eaiy} pue sezeeig Ayloyseq Ig |** °*119°6% wooN

‘AuL0}s }USupiw roquiajydag ye} GB j** “*|/G9°6G “Wy gi*° eS ee Sf

8198894 1Y6VT pun 10)'d ‘DO “H

“eas 0} jnd pure poddiys ‘w ‘a ;

p ‘[ouueyy usojseq ioyouy yyit* “eis fei*e os a ee we ee

ZP'6S [06°62 FUSTUPI AT

= Be 66 ie doe)

0} OAOY “W *d g ** *°18/°6Z «= MOON) «= 068s |S «(OS*ST

‘HA °S “S 94} 0} Vas 0} ourpue}g/** °°) 0L'6Z |8466 NV 38 FY SIUpIAL

‘ured Jo sayaur g ‘pz 0} 4STi°" ties Set a eer Bee @

“PIeVMISE RT

pue pxleMyWON oy} 0} Sumoajgi** s7/"* ft ite oe ely is 0'eL

08 -|2° = | 989 66. 4 PTIN

ee O NON) 18 OU L G6 ‘OL

0} spnoj[d essuap ‘eas pasnjuog) Ze |** °°] 988’°G3L 8 | 0S°8 0'9t

*syreule iy ‘sayy| durg ‘sajemoiregq |qsuory’ “yy ye]

"N ‘q ‘oures 04} ryStupryy

‘seq ‘19IAvAY “W'd Q “yseqy

a[e5 aJe1apOM JasUNG "plea

-jseq] Wolj prey SuIMOTG *W

‘dp ‘SUIU) YS] pue Jopuny}y

‘uleL yi ‘stpenbs 29 aZa01q

‘A ‘N duiseatour uooN oy/‘edopT "ATA OH

ee ee °ysey 0} “WT

"N ¢N SUISeOLOUL pUIM “WW ‘d/*°

ee ee ee ysolj Sul

-MO]Q 1YSIUPI], *ouIsva19

-UI pue jseqY wou <]Tenbg)°*

as ss © * snaquaTITOD

ayes yyStupl “sey}eom

Jorg] “Wd ssyyenbs ym

"TN ‘N UWolj Sursvosouy)**

ees ee eo "TION WO

ajeS Yself 0} Suiseatour

‘Wid g AN pue “ad ON

*N uoOoN ‘ured Aavoy*W v/**

‘UMON WOIJ Ysaty SuIMOTG

‘qysiu ye poousuIUI0D arey|**

os ge °° *89Z901 jouy

g pue Apnoid “AM *N “M|"*

ee ee ee “VQ oluprlu

ye oye “| “N *N OFM

“so *mM Aqrenbs pue Apnojo

‘gzae1q SUIseadUL JYSTU

-plUl 0} *W “d ‘alqeiiea *W 4, °

*1oyJe9 AA PUB SPU AA

‘yoyoed xeyey

‘a[s] ple1auiy

ee ee eZI1q

ee ‘yoeyng WW

** = *ga100g TV

— eee

ee ee ‘uol'y

a0 ** fyassiy

“sdiys

“CE8I

390 3SE

u00 N

1O sadv[g joamen | ‘aed

‘GEST ‘4290200 pg pun pe fo susojg ays fo marty Lnjngne,

795

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.

1843.]

‘mmoy iad sjouy 6 0} L°A 'N

ey} 0} Ssuluund ‘Sourreodde peqi** “°}°* **)°" ee °°! 17°¢8 6'C]

9€8°66 “UPTIN

9¢8'64 *P

EB {°° °°! OSh'6Z °N “dG

8 i°° °"| 90766 UOON

7s °°) °°) 90066 = “06

[a4 FP 98E6G. 2 0€°S8 Olt

“aA

‘suotyraedaid anp apeut $ ates Aq’a oN “1 ‘a

e Jo aoueivedde DCE Yee Ye) Te Ora a S/S Ces Te es oe e+] “ST Q] doqoue JV

“MON ON 19807

“‘Buruszeoiy} Aprayyeqis* °ty** ow" 69°62 IOMOT "SW [|

*‘TauuReYyY °S “swy

bI'Wad NN AQ

"Ty “sw 6 Uf

"soy $6 "A

Ea NN 909!7

Suyeo[ yy] LeMo'T

“Suryeut vas Aavoyy|"* °°

*yno 91qeQ

“suly OST *798 Ajsajam “huo ss

pue Jeyjyeom Surusjeoiyy Alo A\*°

rua eee cs **) 16°88 F016

*syIeUley ‘Ioyy, |*dung| ‘sojomoreq jy Suoy}] *N 3eT

a rs |

ee «e “ee “A °S “Mh |

0} ‘AA *S 9Z901q Sulseoiouy

ee ee

eo ‘nOV'T,

_ peau S

WWOUpi, “ouljeiopour

‘d “M 086’ M_N 0} OM

ULlIaA [es Suiseaiouy|°° ee

“M ‘CP8L

a YO PZ

'S **'xassq "0ON

ve ee rong Buregysyy

‘Aypenbs “seq 03° N ‘A

u0oN ‘oUy "A'S *H Wev

ee ee ee *oulua

-7e01Y} 2 Ure yyTM ‘ATpenbs

°S Aq “iT 0} “a "IN °d "yseqq

0} 4 ‘NA PIPPIN “ad ON

01 “A NN Sezeesq 145Vy| “euysiy *A *d ‘O°H

*stjenbs Aavoy pue sozaa1q

Ajaajseqy ‘Auni0js = AT109}eT

qseq 0} "AN A Woy puray| “Use “A *d ‘OH

¥ ‘eas AAvoy pur ured

“oS “A Ola ares e jrey

uoou ry “WystTAep 0} "Sg Aq

“sy wooly jenbs Aavay 0g-T

eo ee “a "NJ ales

Kaeay I stupiyl “prey

Suimolq “FT “N OF ‘A'S

“Hd 8 A'S 8° Sa

‘Wed PUSH OA Na

UOON “H N‘W YQ ‘Uled

Kaeay pue sijenbs prey

Wie Sas nORee ew OF

‘W ‘dP Ye SuIJeea ‘Apnoya ‘CERT

x sozaoiq Apley}ON ‘AvU10}g) “UOdVAg “A "'T'DO'H| 90 351

‘hioaeg "Ad ‘O0'H

‘1osnesg *A ‘d‘'O'H

_ |

‘sdiqg

10 S90R[gG JO ome Ny

‘101189 AA PU SPUT AN ee

eee eee Sa Cerne ee ee

[No. 141.

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.

796

‘a *S wos yred ysopiv Fy

*puUIA Jo 4IYs

ey) YIM Surujyysiry og" 3e

punnyimoy ay2 woLf eas Aavazy,

*Aep sty} Jo yosung 0}

UOON Wolf ales ayy jo yWSuUaN¢

“PET JO_IFTHS

jaye Suruyysit pue sepungy,

ee eee ——

*SYILUII IY

‘rayomosaidudg oy} Aq pawmszyuoo pue ‘pajou Ajyerdads st [ey a[QeyeUIdI SINT, x

Co) see Gh Ge Wd &

O08 i°° **| OP 64 “Nd Pp

$0-1°°= > 1) GR6G uooN

08 ee ee oS'6% "W°vV g°° eolee er}

"s7assad qybrT pun 10)1d °O °H

00°64 “N°d 8g

06°84 Uwoon iC ‘OE'88 ‘9261

‘uo0jh]T *W tv CG

68 $86 | 06°26 “N°VG]

“WwW ‘d I ee ee e

96°82 “Ua Ol

26°86 | 0E°8Z “NW'dg

8L°ZZ | 61°26 “II

8L°£4 | G6°LG ‘8

GG'8G |*08'86 “OEE

e ee ZG 6G OF 6Z “Ww "vy I ee @eeles ee

182 ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee

‘layy,| ‘durs ‘layaMOLeEg “" 'SUO'T *N ‘3e'7

es qnoysnory) UleL

pue pura ‘stjenbs pue ayes

‘T'S JUSIuprur 0} “Ww “d g

“Ss Aq *a ‘S yesuNS “A'S

‘W ‘d 7 4Seq UOON OF ‘WV

8 aS “AOA Na ares

azyelopout yystAep 0} ‘NW *V/**"d

*"TINOG 0}

palaaaA UOON ¢ | “N Jnoge

**/sjsno ut ayes Aavoy ‘Ww cvi|*e

aUvdILINY WOON 0} “W nat FAP

‘Sul

-yeqe'S‘W'dg *Sulsvoiour

Ajpides oye3 “WS a NV Gite

ee ** VU SIUpIUL 0} aes

prey 0} ap] & payesapout

Of? “AS °*S "UN ON

Wolf peytys UOON yNoqY

*QURILLINY IYI} “WV TT

‘TN CN OUROLIINY JUeTOIA

08'S “A *N “N 2[ed juoy

“OIA OEE Ie puR SoTeS Su0sjg|°°

“° “HN IN pue Nn ayes

Ssuidser JYSIUPI “AN

"N pue ‘yn Tyeubs snoring

‘GWON aed AUII0}S "Wd

"AN ON 8° N Sutseasour

UOON "SN O} YON wWoIz

jstjenbs Aavay pue ayes ysorq|**

‘Wwnos ZI A'S'SOl “A'S

eyes Aavay g AN GO}

paylys*W dg “N anp wo

weer ee ee ——

“1919 AA PUR SPULAA

doy ‘A "l'0°H

qeyoeg XBsTeH

‘a|s] pretomg

°° “eZ

* ‘yoe17N9d 1V

* *99100g IV

‘sdiqg

“CPS

‘PO PZ

JO sade[g joomey | ‘ajyeq

797

India.

"MS UN

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Stor

1843. ]

‘ g ‘pg so

‘A “Vg 0} pZjo “mw ‘Vv g ureyy|**

24} 0} OG JO JUalIND pZ Wo1g)**

"premysery |

*sayoul

*ynoysno.iy}

uler pue sienbs ‘eas Aavofy **

poe ee Gaua ie

Suipia ‘ynoysnoiqy eos Aarozy °°

*prey A19A Surpti “suty ‘c7,] pure

CH] Sloyoue OM} YIM UTeSe pue

“SU QTL Ya Suratip yysrpheq):-

RGD ED SSNS OE

‘syoap oy} Surdaams Jsour[e ‘fas

“89 A 94} 19A0 Suryeaiq Ajjuanb

-d1f PUL SUISIA Bas sNOpuataIy|**

*ynoysno.1g}

Jayjyeam yeUstp ‘yas hywajysayy

huo4s vo utet yysty sutssed

qua eos pue sjjenbs Aavazy|*s

*SyIVUlSY

“royL| “dug

988°62

*19}JIWIOIL

ee ee

‘sWJ QZ Joyoue iV

*W SuO'T

“espagsrry

@ee;se ee

9P’6I

‘a Aq *a

SHUIJeO]

***a10Jaq Se

st} [] doyoue iV

: LE PAS

Sy W'd *SselW G “ay

“N IGSIT Suryeopy

ooo,

NC AS

**spurm Apiayjnog Suo.s

WSiuplyy ‘arey pue spur

Suois uoow “ABM Sutiea]o

Ing "W'S '*S aes Suols *W “Vv

os “SUTJLIOPOU “WW “d

‘W'S pue a's 2za0I1q

Suoljs "WV O “[[N] ew YY

‘ayera pour AT19}}e] ‘SuIsva19

“Ul “HS BA Sa 929919

Suoljs*NW *V Q ‘T[N[ BW eV

“MS SW ‘d

g]e9 YSlIq 0} sueqe yng

WoO s}sns yuUaTOTA ‘NW *V [|

‘eas AAvay faug A ‘S°S

eo ee ee ee "OUl A

"S Mogeiysupiy “A'S

ZL FOL A°S “HN “4 Ol

01 § ‘A'S “A uooN *s Aq

“G03 “a prey Sioa SuIMOTg

ee ** «SulUa}vo1y} pue

‘A'S *a pue “sg Aq “of 0

"A prey Surmoyq yyqsrydeq

so “ATS “Gy 03°q STTenbs

AAvoy YIM ‘sees prey e[p

-pIUl SUISBAIOUI YEP *UIet

29 stjenbs paey YIM safes

Ysud “HS °H UA NO

** “ynoySsnory} eyes e& Jey

Surmorq “a “S “a 07 38eq

“A'S'Q Je oueolny e&ypipq

‘qT Nd 9°q ‘Sq Jesung

‘W'd F 0} yseq ‘WV g seq

°°/0) “A CN °@ Je eyes Aavazy

*19Y}VO AA PUR SPUT AA

* fyoeyqN9 IV)

*99100g 1¥

es ‘oz

‘aa100g Vv

ee ‘uoI'T

** “xassq

‘AiaaeQ “A *d ‘0 *H|

‘euysily] "A ‘d “0°H

‘euseW ‘A “d‘O‘'H

‘losnes *A ‘d‘O'H

‘GPS

‘uoseeg ‘A *T'O*H) PO PZ

“sdiys

JO sdoeTg jo ouleNy

‘ayeg

a en ep ee ia ——— uF

| : ee ee ee "mM Ss Ss

‘Wd “SG Aq "AAS WOON “OT

“a alee "SG °W VFO “MS SF

‘s]yenbs piey pue as Kavoyzy ee eo ee eeles oe eels es "NV ud aT °S ‘S'N *v Z 0} JG SIUpI] ‘K19AeD) a | aia = |

ee “Wl °S *S AyLayvey oo

-jnoysnoiy; eas Aavozy ** 88s ttle us ree? sejee ee Seeley ozaaig Suots yysyAeq|‘euysiy ‘A “qd °O°H

aie “Mg ‘gS Ol's

$9Z991q YSel] UaYM “'W "d g

ye payeqe yonut a[es "AAS

ee PUel Ss OF pers pars

Woeag a ‘Ss qo |

"N a WsTkeq “A ‘Ss

“GY 0} "eyes Aaeory Og't| “Cus *A ‘d ‘O°H

wa Ss *sazaaig AjleyyNog

‘0d YON q|suorjsiysiupry “aS “S09

AVI Suq|"s uoon ‘Suryeosq sayqyea A | “osneg *A “dO °H

2 es “VYUStupiuU ye

S9Z991q deIOpOU 0} “HS

‘S Suoljs ‘W "d FP ‘OUy pue

‘a °S *S WOON *Suli1ea]9

WvV.8. He SSO) "as

‘ay qysiphep ye sayes ysaay

‘uoNe}G 0} “G'S “a sajes AuTI0Jg|‘UOIvEg ‘A‘T'A ‘O'H

o? -> ‘vas Aavoy

auy pue spuim Aylayjnog

Suois WYStuptu 0} yINOS

s}sus Aavay yosung *sulieaya

"'S UOON DA “S S & ‘SINT

[No. 141.

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.

eg |? **| cog, ‘wag pue piey SuIMOTG “W*¥ Q

pe tot gerer — noo | ‘T'S ayerapou yysithep

£8 ee ee ZP'6Z STs wie ee ee ee ee af °S 01°] ayes Aava Fy "WN “Vv ‘ado O74 | “| ne) ‘H

"9798894 3Y6VT Pud j0NId ‘OH

“GEST

0S’ 6% OP'6Z°° @eo\,es ev, ,e8 es Ac too ee @o "mM Ss ‘Ss pulm ee ayoeg xejiyey ‘VO pe

$8 | ocrez [°° ee eelee eelse ee seleoean gg O} SUIMEIP ‘aUIA|** °° ‘a[s] preiewq|) Woon

eae | ee reser sag Be. tone *sdiys

2 “SY ALUIO yy ayy, [dug "eg ‘a°suo0TqT) ‘N ‘3eT | “1ayJeO AA PUL SPUTAK 10 sooeyg joomen | “eyed

~ a a sive A Sa a ae ee ae Ee Sa SE a Sa ee Se ae ee en

"BEBE ‘4aquia0aoN Yip

"avd ay} JO O[OUM OU} ‘8Z'G6s 0} ‘OS'6S USIY AIOA seM IOJeWIOIeY InG

S[BALOPUL 4B ULEI JO SIOMOYS JUST] pue ‘spurm *”AQ °C ISI] YIM AYs DUIS oUy f19A0 [TW “UiF

*19}8M Jodaap OJUL PABMSET JY} 0} 109 9M [13 97771] AtdA SulyegR vag “ps

‘S07 oy Ul 1OSsneg 3y} Jo sdurzoyns ay} Aq 993 T[IM NOA se ‘yYStoYy SNHOpUaUIEI] B 0} BSOI VAS OT} GQa 9} YIIM ‘19qG0}0H PZ

°992 24] UO 'S °M Jn0gQD pun ‘poo ay, UO "AA “N*M AY} 07 SJOUY aaLY] JNOQD OF OS]D pasnasouUd Jas ay ‘stjenbs uL

pPssvaioul pura ayy os ‘poouvaApe Aep oy} SY ‘10jIeNb yey} Ul prey SuIMo]q SVM YI JI se *y “Gg BY} WOIJ Ul SuT[[OI [Jams Aavay Suoy e yNq ‘yas Aue JOU SeM JOY} OUT} STUZ TW

*snoroidsns [[e 38 YOO] JOU pIp TayyeaM 9Y} IYSI[ Aep YY cures Aavay A10OA pu SULUIYST ‘Aapuny) YA “| “Ss “Ae [[enbs yreuIs e@ peYy 9M *W Vv [ 4B ‘I9qQ0JDGO 4Sf 94}

799

3 uO ‘ured Jo odeys ay} UI A[UO Jo ‘sn yorel Jou pjnoM 4IJVYy} nq { premyseT oY} 07 OYyJVOM pveq pry Aay} Jey ‘sem UOTuIdo [eSIOAIUN JY} pu ‘IUIT) OT} Je PIvOg UO SIZIIFO

S [VIOAS 0} FI poYTeUleI J 3VY} ‘spnojo oy} ur sourrvedde ue Ie[NSuUIs OS pey iT “WS 0}°N Aq ‘| Jnoqe wor uoZII0Y VjoYM ay} Suole SurujzYysl[ yoays Uryy ul peoids

2 usy) pue (‘Iapuny} jo yodar ou) uns v jo Ysey ay} YT] pouszy SI yt eYY ‘UvaUT T YOrym Aq ‘aourreosdde svjnSuls ysoul ay} pauinsse spno[d asay} JYSIUpIUL SpreMOT,

hey “a °S PUL pleMysea oy} 0} oouvivodde Aurea AAvay pur Apnolo Mois 4 YSU ye YING ‘98zZ001q “| N solu e pEY 2M { UT Jos 07 JNOQe SEM UOOSUOU 93 jt

2 sv ‘souvivodde ouy ev pry Joyjeam oy} ‘toquiajdos Jo 10g ey} UG ‘sapnzI}eY osoy} ul Avadde AT[e19Ued eYY SUSIS [eIDUES 94} JO MOJ TIM papusjzj}e SUM O/S 4SP] OUT,

‘Ss *2UIUL AAD 8927092 ay? : buamozjof ay7 yam au pabrjgo 406nvg °4 “dO °H ‘susnag 2020g youvag °wpy ‘sarsany awos 07 burhjdas uJ “ALON

S : = | re "WNOg 07 °| “gS *g OUT, “A1oseD “A “dO *H|

& } | | ee ae eo Os 'S 0}

s | | "M “S'S sez001q ueseay J | CUystL yy And) oh

| pee eS Ce Oke oN etd ota

= ‘sayjyeom Azey pue ApayjNog y“Aosneg*A g‘O'°H

5 |‘uoowog "A’T'1'0°H

3 eg |*' **| 996, ‘Wa 8 te = pur Aerie

nN CQ™ |S 5 * "1 gq°6z,. — UOON; ‘payyjesun pue sezeeiq “W

% wB i °") BL6o “WV gis ttt 88 tg gg pue Apayjnog sung ‘edop “A “TAO 'H

2 , "9738884 1461] PUD 102d ‘D H |

= | “Atenpess SuTpisqns ‘qynog :

& wy, ‘Ss wm, jos su0g ee @oliee ese ¢e @o ee BC°L8 oL°0% j04 acl °S °S 8Z901 Su0ljs ee @e ee “ezilq

S | eg ape th Ne Nene

s | "NO oped Suidsea yg stupryy

S "A °N pue ‘N sTrenbs sno

‘ | -1anj $A[19qIION 9[ vs Suo014s

S | ‘Ww “dP “ “"N 0} "Bi "N

2 | 'N ‘QWON Sulseoiour ‘w-v\|*s *+ Sy0R1IN9 IV

= | -s a "* *s9700.1q

"MA °S Ysety YM ‘outq|** ** 9a100g IV] -zEgT

"[9889A po | : ‘PO Wp

-1SCUISIP BARS “SU QQ SsuIpunog)** “*\** *e/"° ve sraipere ot eet. eal ** ‘aug ynq Aytenbg|** = ** “UOIT) +00

Pe ec |e ee

SS |

| “sdiyg

ae |

Ss “Bye UIA ay) dug} ‘sojomoiegq |‘q°suoy “nN yey] *Joyjee AA PUL SPULAA 10 sade, jo oweyy

800 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

In reply to some enquiries, Mr. Branch Pilot SHar.ine favours me

with the following Note relative to the Westerly set which prevails

in these Gales.

The reason that the rate of current was left out in the logs, is, that

I thought it would be of no use, but as you wish for it, the set run

to W. N. W. on the flood, and on the ebb to W. S. W. from 3 to 3}

knots.

The “‘ Megna” has no Barometer on board.

SUMMARY.

I now proceed to staie the grounds on which I have laid down the

track assigned to these Storms on the Chart.

On the \st October.—Commencing from the Southward, we find by

our tables that the Lzon in 13° N. had nothing but a strong W. S. W.

monsoon, but the Essex in 16° N., longitude 83° 50’ E. at noon hada

falling Barometer from 29.836 to 29.586 at midnight with the wind

increasing to a N. N. E. gale at that time. At Pooree and Cuttack

the storm commences also “ at night” on the Ist, with strong breeze

from the North, and the Elza standing to sea, was at midnight in 18°

30’* N., longitude 89° 0' E. with her gale commencing also at N. N. E.

Of these data, the Lzon’s breeze was doubtless the monsoon, and the

variable squalls of the Essex from W. S. W. to N. N. E. at midnight,

the first effects of the storms, which as the ship was only 80 miles from

the high land of Vizagapatam and the ranges of hills close to and at

the back of that part, were probably deflected to a N. N. E. instead of

* I take this latitude as set down, but it seems to me at least 20 miles too far to the

Southward, for the £diza on 30th September, at 7 p. m. had the Light Vessel bearing

North, let us say at most 15 miles. She had then to midnight light baffling airs from

North to South alternately, when she could not have made more than 10 miles more

of Southing, or 25 miles from the Light Vessel in all. On the Ist, she had an increasing

breeze of about 5 knots to 3 p. mM. when she hove to, calling this 15 hours’ run and

at 6 knots it is but 90 miles, in all 115 miles. From 3 p. m. to midnight she was hove to,

and allowing her to have made 2 miles per hour of Southing, or say 18 miles, this is

but 133 miles in all, and part of iton aS. 8S. E. course. Now from the outer Light

Vessel in lat. 21° 04! to Lat. 18° 30! there is a difference of 154 miles of latitude; while

as above, we can make at the most but 133. I think this must have been an error

of the copyist, but have taken it as set down, being always unwilling to assume

errors in documents, unless they are evidently against common sense,

me ae ee

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 801

a N. N. W. gale, as the circles of them if extended to her position

would require, as shewn by the arrow-line across the track of the Essex.

Captain McCarthy of the Elzza states, as before said, his gale to have

“begun” at midnight from the N. N. E. in latitude adout 18° 30' N.,

longitude 89° 0’ E., its centre then must have borne about E. S. E. from

him, at what distance we cannot exactly say ; but I have taken it at

100 miles by projecting his subsequent drift, (as marked on the chart,)

to Noon, when he had the centre of the storm passing him, and the

shift of wind to S. S. E., and I have allowed also on the same grounds,

that from midnight Ist October to Noon 2nd, the track of the storm

was due West. This would place the centre of it at Noon on the 2d

in latitude 17° 50’ N., longitude 88° 40’ E.,as I have marked it ; and

this position being about on the meridian of the Light Vessels and

Pilot station, gives them the Easterly winds and weather which they

really had, being on the outskirts of a storm passing their meridian. I

have also, it will be seen, marked the supposed place of the centre of

this storm at midnight between the Ist and 2nd, and I need not I

hope repeat here, that the whole track might have been a curve, or a

succession of curves, for any thing we yet know, and that the strait

lines are merely used to connect conveniently one point with another,

and guide the eye.

But having thus marked the centre of the Eliza’s hurricane at

Noon on the 2nd, and we cannot well be far wrong in this, unless as

before stated, there is any error in her latitude, we find that in the

report from Pooree the Northerly gale which had blown there, increas-

ing in strength from the night of the Ist, shzfted at6 p.m. to E.N. E.,

shewing that @ centre of some rotatory storm had passed close to the

station, or rather that the station was close to the verge of its calm |

space if there was one ; since the gale abated in violence for about half

an hour, and then blew with renewed strength, veering to the S. E.

by & p. m., &e.

Now from the spot where we have marked the centre of the Eliza’s

hurricane to Pooree is a distance of 208 miles, and as the Eliza had

her shift at Noon, and that of Pooree took place at 6 p. m., the interval

of time is only 6 hours, during which, 2f 2¢ was the same storm, it must

therefore have travelled at the rate of 39 miles an hour. This is a

much higher rate than any we have yet found in the Eastern seas,

802 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

or indeed in any part of the world; the highest rate supposed being I

think 24 miles per hour in the Eastern seas, which I have inferred

(6th Memoir, p. 699, vol. xi. of Journal of the Asiatic Society,) may

have been the rate of the Magiczenne and St. Paul’s hurricane in the

China sea, and 30 miles per hour assigned by Mr. Redfield, as that of

the Atlantic storm delineated as Track No. VIII, in his Storm chart of

1835. Both these are much below this rate of 39 miles per hour, but

we have good proof here, that it did occur, for the time must be cor-

rect, and the Eliza’s position cannot be very far wrong, as to distance

from Pooree.

Assuming then this rate for the present as one tolerably well ascer-

tained, the reader will notice, that I have marked on the chart a

track parallel to the former one, which starting from the supposed

place of the centre of the storm at midnight lst to 2d October, gives

another centre at Noon of the 2d, and terminates at Cuttack. This

marks the supposed place of the centre of the Halifax Packet and

Emerald Isie’s storm, which cannot, I take it, have been the same

as that of the Elza.

Before going into the examination of this question, however, I would

request attention to the log and track of the Tenasserim Steamer.

This vessel was steering up from the S. Westward, passing Cape

Negrais at about 120 miles to the Westward, and we find that on the

29th, she had the winds squally and variable from W. N. W. to N.

W., and even North, when in about the latitude of the Cape, and

these N. W. breezes with thick cloudy weather and a heavy cross

sea continued till Noon on the 30th, as 2f she was skirting the S.

Western quadrant of a storm forming between her and the Coast of

" Arracan, a supposition strengthened by the fact, that at Kyook

Phyoo, which is only 190 miles to the N. E. of her track on these days,

the winds were at S. E. as they ought to be if a circular motion

existed or was forming. ‘The weather, however, which was fine at

Kyook Phyoo, was not decidedly a gale with the Tenasserzm till the

20th, so we cannot on.such slender grounds say, that any vortex '

really was formed ; but ¢f there was so, and if it had remained nearly

stationary for the 29th and 30th, the winds and weather experienced

by this vessel were such as it would produce. Is this really an in-

stance of the stationary formation of a storm ?

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 803

About noon on the 30th, we find that the Tenasserzm then in latitude

17° 24’, longitude 91° 28’, had had the weather severe enough from the N.

Westward to be lying to from 2 a. m., and that the wind then shifted

to a gale from the S. S. W., which kept her under storm stay sails for

the rest of the 24 hours. This shift, again, is what should occur, if we

suppose, as before, a vortex forming to the N. E. of her track on the

preceding days, and then suddenly moving on to the W. N. W., its

centre passing near to the Northward of her position, for such condi-

tions could give exactly a shift fom N. W. to 8. 5. W. I have

marked two small circles on the charts to guide the eye in considering

this supposition, which I merely make in the absence of better data to

regulate our views. I need not again repeat that storms must being

somewhere and somehow, and the faintest light thrown on the phe-

nomenon of their beginnings is of importance. *

We may perhaps assume this place close to the Tenasserim at Noon

on the 30th, to have been the centre of the nascent storm on that day,

and that while the vessel was drifting to the Northward with aS. S.

Westerly gale, the storm was passing slowly to the Westward. This

would gradually bring the wind for her to the S. S. E.as she got upon

the N. E. quadrant of the storm, and so she, in effect, had it by 6a m.

the morning of the Ist October, when she bore away to the N. W. by

N., and running always on the N. E. quadrants of the two storms,

had heavy S. Easterly breezes with a heavy Southerly sea to the

Sand-heads. I regret much that this vessel’s log is in some respects

imperfect, and above all, that though a Government Steamer, she

had apparently neither Barometer nor Sympiesometer on board ! for

no observations of either are given. Observations of good instruments

in her position would have been invaluable.

We should not forget to take into account in weighing all this, that

Cape Negrais is a notorious neighbourhood for variable winds and

shifting storms and gales, and that the Tenasserim’s weather may

have been mere local variations of the monsoon, and that thus the

* I have supposed here and in former papers a circular storm forming and then

moving forward, 7. €. remaining stationary, or nearly so, at first. Wedo not know

if the dust-whirlwinds, so common in hot climates, and water spouts are generated by

_ the same causes, and subject to the same laws, but both these phenomena certainly

do what I have here supposed the storm (or storms) to do, that is, many of them are sta-

tionary or nearly so while forming, and then to use Bruce’s words “ stalk forward.’’

804 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

storms may have been generated 24 hours or more after she had

crossed those parts of the Bay where our first circles are struck, and I

have thus left the large one, which depends on the calculations

derived from the Eliza’s log, that the reader may weigh the probabili-

ties between the two suppositions, which are, the one that between the

29th and 2nd of October, or during three days, the storm was forming

and slowly moving on ; and the other, that it formed and moved up as

far between noon of the Ist and noon of the 2nd, as between noon of

the 2nd and the time of the shift at Pooree, or at a rate approaching

to such a velocity ; which would then be the last supposed case of the

storms having really crossed this spot twenty-four or more hours after

the Tenasserim had done so.

We now return to the consideration of the Northernmost of the

two tracks which I have laid down, or that of the Emerald Isle and

Halifax Packet’s storm. |

The Halifax Packet was by her log at noon on the 30th in lat.

21° 18' long. 88° 40’ which I have marked; but there is no datum of

any sort to show where she was at noon on the Ist, and I have thus

Jaid down her place on the 2d only, when the hurricane having dis.

masted her had passed on, leaving the wind at South with her at

noon. .

The wind is not marked during the ten hours from midnight ; viz.

from 2 a. m., when the Barometer had fallen to 27.90, to noon ; but as

it was veering from N.N. E. toa gale at East on the preceding day,

we may take it to have been in its highest fury, veering from E. S. E.

to S. E., and eventually to South, as it passed on; which agrees, as

will be seen with her track, as her position between 2 a. m. and noon

should lie a little to the S. E. of where it is at noon, as she must

have been drifting to the N. West, both with the wind and with the

storm wave.

The Emerald Isle’s log describes a very rapidly approaching storm,

of which, says Capt. Scales, ‘‘ the squalls rose in the S. E. quarter, but

struck us about East.” This is an exact description of a circular storm

travelling upon a track to pass to the Southward of the vessel, and

perhaps, if we may use the expression, ‘‘ throwing off” squalls from its

periphery. By 5 a. m. on the 2d, the wind was about E. S. E.,

‘increasing with fearful rapidity, blowing heaviest from S. E.” which

Ai er Set sS

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 805

in fact was the time at which he was nearest to the centre, and ending,

as it should do, at South when it had passed on. At Cuttack they

had by noon on the 2d an increasing gale North and N. N. E.; by 4

Pp. mM. Strong gale North,* with furious squalls, and this continuing

with little variations till3 a. m. of the 3d, when a lull took place,

followed by a change to ES. E. and 8. E. The strength of the gale,

says Dr. Minto, was from noon till sun-set of the 2d, while it was

moderating with the ships as before remarked.

Having thus described, briefly, the weather experienced on these two

tracks, it may be useful to shew by a comparative table, that they could

not be the same storm ; for at first sight, one is inclined to take them as

such, and the fact of two severe hurricanes at once, of small diameters

travelling with great rapidity on nearly parallel lines is a new acquisi-

tion to our storm knowledge, and will serve perhaps not only in future

to explain many phenomena which are not now well understood, but to

guide the perplexed seaman with comparative safety, as I shall in the

sequel shew. It is evident, however, that our first care is to prove, that

the phenomena about which we reason did really occur. We have

already shewn this, and I think with a tolerable degree of certainty ;

but the negative proof will also greatly assist our views. Not forgetting

my remarks on the L/zza’s position as possibly twenty miles too far to the

South, let us now see how the ships Eliza, Halifax Packet, and

Emerald Isle, were situated during their storms ; what were the winds

and weather they had ; and what were those that they ough! to have had

if they were all in the same storm ; and to the ships we will also add

the winds and weather at Cuttack and Pooree, beginning from mid-

night between the Ist and 2nd October, which is the earliest time at

which it was felt by the Elzza.

The Eliza at this time was about in latitude 18° 30’, longitude

89°, and the storm had then fully begun with her from the N. N. E.

Now if ail the Ships were in one storm,—

Should have had But had it

the wind about about

The Halifax Packet bearing from

the Eliza about N. N. W., distance N. E. by N. E. S. E.

ESEIIOS), 2... 0.4) 0 4 a 0i9 0.4 0 0,0 ee

* While it was veering to South, and at South, with the Emerald Isle and Halifax

Packet, moderating from S. S, E. with the Hliza, and shifting at 6 p. m. at Pooree!

806 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

Should have had But had it

the wind about about

The Emerald Isle bearing from

the Eliza about N. N. W. 130 ha See ON E. by S.

*At Pooree, distance 200 miles,

E. N.'E. from the Eliza, .... ... N.N. E. North.

*At Cuttack, distance 210 miles, ‘

N. E. by E. from the Eliza,...... ¢ N. E. by N. North.

At Noon on the 2d, or 12 hours later, we find that the centre of a

storm had just passed the E/zza, which vessel was then aboat in la-

titude 17° 45’ N., longitude 88° 48’ E. Now at this time, the Eliza

had the wind at S. S. E. blowing a hurricane.

And the other ships, if the storm were the same, should have had

the winds as follows :—

Should have had But had it

the wind about about

Halifax Packet bearing from the

Eliza North a little Westerly, 105 > Due East South.

full hurricane. hurricaneabating.

RIPE, 6c 5 2 ¢ wine ere cure jes eid a waieiene iat ate

Emerald Isle bearing from the East S. E.

Eliza NbW. 145 miles, .......... full hurricane. full hurricane.

At Pooree bearing from the Elzza :

about N. W. _ miles,. N. E. North.

At Cuttack bearing from the Blize

about NWbN.. miles, .......-.. \ Nae NbE.

These two statements will, I think, sufficiently demonstrate, that

the storms were not the same; and it will be seen on examination, that

the supposition of wo storms explains all the anomalies satisfactorily.

A few words more on this subject will, however, I think dissipate

any doubts. I have already remarked, page 801-802, on the rate at

which the Eliza’s storm travelled to Pooree from the undoubted

station of its centre at noon of the 2nd.

Now as the shift of wind from North to E. S. E. took place, as we

have seen, at Pooree at 6 p. m. of the 2nd, we should naturally look to

find that, if the storms were the same, the wind at Cuttack, which is

fifty miles to the North of it, veered also in such a way as to coincide

with this change; or at all events, (asit wason shore,) nearly so. But

we find on the contrary, that this did of take place at all; and that at

* These two stations and the ship Emerald Isle, may be donunaeed as not at this

time within the limits of the storm.

1843. ] Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 807

Cuttack it was 6 hours later, or a. m. of the 3rd that they had a lull

and the wind veering subsequently from N. and N. N. E.at mid-

night of the 2nd, to S. E. at 6 a. m. on the 3rd.

The supposition then here is, that as 39 miles per hour is so very

high a rate of travelling, this Cuttack storm was that of the

Eliza, of which the rate of travelling would then be reduced to 18.3

miles per hour, the distance from the place of the centre of the Elza’s

storm on the 2nd to Cuttack being 220 miles, and the time from Noon

2nd to a. m. 3rd, say 12 hours.

But if we look at the Charts, we shall see that, had it been the case

that this Cuttack storm was the same hurricane, it must have

passed within a short distance of the Emerald Isle, (50 miles, if

we have rightly estimated her position,) and still closer to the Halz-

fax Packet, and that it must have been, taking it to have moved

through equal spaces in equal times, nearest to the Emerald Isle, at

about 7 p. m. of the 2nd, when she should consequently have had the

hurricane in full force. This, however, is mo¢ the case, for by her log it

is plain, that the hardest part of the gale was over by 6 p. m., when the

wind had veered to South ; whereas on our supposition, it would have

been a furious hurricane at S. E., and the same, with a little variation

as to time holds good for the Halifax Packet’s storm. These vessels’ logs

then will not admit of our considering the Cuttack storm as the principal,

or the only one, and there is moreover another obstacle to our so doing ;

viz. that while the Pooree storm, which in fury is described by Dr.

Cumberland, who saw both, as one-eighth more violent than that of

1840,* seems, to use a familiar word, ‘‘ naturally” that of the Eliza ;

that of Cuttack was but a smart gale blowing down a few trees. As

to the diameters of these storms, Mr. Redfield remarks, that his storm

track No. VIII, of 1835, was probably not more than 100 miles in

diameter, and the Coringa hurricane of 1839 certainly contracted to

about 150 miles in diameter, while it increased in fury. It will then

be asked, ‘“‘ As what we are to consider this Cuttack storm ?” I should

say decidedly, that as shewn in my Seventh Memoir, it is another of

those cases in which a violent hurricane coming up from seaward, with

a strong monsoon blowing nearly at right angles to its trackf divides

* See Third Memoir, Vol. ix p. 1021] and 1022, Journal of the Asiatic Society.

t Which we see by.the logs of the Essex and Lion was the case.

808 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in-India. [No. 141.

into smaller storms, and no doubt the various repulsions to which a

storm travelling at this high rate must have been. subjected from the

effects of the high land may have contributed to this effect, and that the

Cuttack storm, like that of Midnapore in 1842, was a separate storm

from that of Pooree, and I have thus marked it—the reader will

judge if with sufficient warrant. The diminution of force may be

accounted for partly, I think, by the vicinity of the Balasore Hills to

Cuttack breaking up by their resistance the Northern half of it,* and

partly from the interference of the two storms as they approached the

Jand. The extreme suddenness of their approach, and severity of their

effects while they lasted, sufficiently account for the dreadful losses

to which I have alluded. It might also be made an additional

argument for the uses of, and attention to Simpiesometers and

Barometers. We have no traces of these storms inland to the

Southward or South Westward in the Goomsoor country, where are

situated the wild tribes of Khoonds, and to the Northward and North

Westward, where the country between Sumbulpore and Balasore is

almost as little known.t For these parts then our knowledge ends

hereabouts.

The next trace we have of any storm inland is at Purulia, and here

again the question arises, if this was either the Cuttack or Pooree

storms, or an independent vortex. The distance from Cuttack to

Purulia is in a direct line, measured on the Post Office map 240 miles,

and the bearing NbE., and from Pooree 290 miles. The change of

wind took place at Pooree, as we have seen, at about 6 p. m. of the 2d,

and at Cuttack about 6 a. m. on the 38d. The abatement of the

Purulia storm took place also in the afternoon at Purulia, so that as

far as we can ascertain from this Memorandum, we may take the

centre of the storm, which if it was a rotatory one, passed to the

Eastward of the station, to have been nearest the station at 10 a. m.

on the 3rd. Now from 6 p. m. of the 2nd to 10 a. m. of the 3rd, is

16 hours of f¢ae between Pooree and Purulia, and from 6 a. m. of the

* See Mr. Bond’s report from Balasore.

t+ The European reader unacquainted with India, will be surprised to hear this of

districts only 200 and 300 miles from the metropolis of British India; but it is a fact

that the very zames of some of the Khoond tribes in Goomsoor have only become known

to us since the war of 1836! and that there are still thereabouts sects and tribes of

which we know indeed the names, but nothing more!

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 809

3rd to 10 a. m. of the same day, is 4 hours of ¢2me between Cuttack

and Purniia. The first interval, of 16 hours, with the distance 290

miles, gives about 19 miles an hour for the rate of travelling ; and the

second interval of 4 hours with 250 miles of distance, gives 62 miles

an hour! It seems then, that as far as time and distance go, taking

into account the retardation which sea storms experience when they

reach the Jand, it is move probable, or rather it is guzle possible, that

the Purulia gale may have been the Pooree hurricane, and that there

is no possibility or probability that the Cuttack storm was so, for we

know of no rate approaching to 62 miles per hour. All this is, however,

but vague and unsatisfactory, but Iam unwilling to leave any thing

unexamined. We have seen so frequently instances of storms either

forcing their way far inland, or being apparently lifted up by high

lands and renewing themselves again at considerable distances, that

we can only venture to state and weigh the probabilities without

pronouncing dogmatically upon the connexion or non-connexion of

the various storms when they appear to have some relationship.

There are, however, two more circumstances to be stated, which must

not be omitted, the one is that the retardation is in favour of the pro-

bability, that the storms were the same; and the other, that we may

easily suppose the Pooree storm to have been turned off to the North-

ward by the ranges of hills behind that station. Mr. Bond’s report

from Balasore it will be seen distinctly points out the spur of the

Balasore Neelghiris at Choramon, as the dividing line between the

heavy storm at Pooree and the breeze at Balasore, Choramon being

about 100 miles N. W. of Pooree and 60 N. W. of Cuttack, with the

great valley of the Mahanuddee river between them ; and vallies seem

certainly to influence in various ways the tracks of storms.

We have next to attend to the reports from the various stations

to the Northward and Westward of Purulia; viz. Gya, Patna, Pus-

sewa and Allahabad, at which it is clear, that they had parts of, and

at Patna the centre of a rotatory storm passing on the 6th and 7th.

The first question which naturally occurs is again the same which

we have already discussed, “ Was this the same storm as that at

Pooree or a different one? I find it difficult to pronounce whether it

Was or was not, from the absence of documents by which it might be

traced between Pooree and Gya. At Purulia indeed, there was cer-

810 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [[No. 141.

tainly as we have seen a storm, and this apparently part of a rotatory

one, and possibly that of Pooree, if it travelled 19 miles an hour. We

have, as before said, no other intervening documents, so we are com-

pelled to suppose either that the Pooree storm was, as clearly shewn in

the case of the Calcutta storm of June,” lifted up by the ranges of hills,

and did not descend again till it reached Puruliaand Gya; or else it was

a new storm, perhaps generated about Purulia, and travelling North and

North-westerly. I have so marked it on the chart, but merely for the

sake of connection, and by no means as affirming what it was; for the

Purulia gale might have been quite an independent one. Beginning

then at Gya, it will be found, that this place bears about N. by W.

from Pooree, distance 390 miles. Now the centre of the Pooree strom

passed that place at 6 p. m. of the 2nd October, and the centre of the

Gya storm we may take to have passed that station at 6 a. m. on the

5th. From 6 p. m. of the 2nd to 6 a. M. of the 5th are 60 hours,

which for a distance of 390 miles, gives 6.5 miles an hour, while the

rate of the Pooree storm we find to have been 36 miles per hour at

sea, and 19 miles on shore, which is a second retardation of rate so

far beyond what we have hitherto seen, that it is much in favour of its

being an independent storm. The track from Pooree to Gya it may

be remarked, is however, analogous to those of the Calcutta storms of

June 1842. Leaving out the strong S. Easterly breeze experienced

by Mr. Peacock on the Bhagiretty, as, at most, a distant effect of some

of these storms, we may commence on the 5th October, where we

find that

From 6 a.m. gale from S. E., fu-

At Gya, there was,...... rious at midnight, and lasting till 8

A. M. on the 6th.

Ad paves 4 Falling Barometer, rain and increas-

‘iikies kes tenuate ok ing gale from the East till midnight.

At Pussewa, latitude 25° Barometer sunk 0.25 from the 3rd

Al’, longitude 83°03’ distant } instant. p. m. high wind East and N.

about 1638’ N. W. by W. of) E. increasing to gale, with violent gusts

Gu ai, a aiose: whose aitebtho ieee edehtionaie at North by daylighft of 6th.

By 8 p. m. on 4th, strong gusts and

; o ¥ showers had increased to a gale East

po te Te ie ayo 2° and E. N. E. At 8 a. m. Sth very

9 a a “ ”~ ** Z strong, moderating and increasing again

at midnight to a strong gale.

* See Seventh Memoir, Jour. As. Soc. Vol. xi, p. 1089.

1843. | Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 811

4 Unusual winds from the Eastward

Bemiat st ; “se** @and Simpiesometer falling.

On THE 67TH OCTOBER.

f At 8 a. m. S. E. gale weering* to

GE ae Spar S. W. and blowing till noon, when it

moderated.

From midnight furious gale, blowing

down trees. Noon Barometer had fallen

from 29.8] on the 4th to 29.51, wind

tee ANTI, oak cui ace ss

shifted to South, time not marked. At

5 p.M. to the West, blowing furiously

. till midnight.

Gale from North, violent gusts to

Noon, when N. N. W. and Barometer

At Pussewa, ........--< beginning to rise, veering to N. W. and

finally to West; but only a strong

breeze by 3 P. M.

Gale continuing from East and E.

N. E. till daylight, when moderating

At Allahabad, -.......+ and veering to N. E. North, and

finally West.

Allowing for the numerous disturbing causes which inland storms

meet with, and for the general nature of the observations, it will be

found that the circles I have marked on the chart shew the variations

which are described in the winds as the storm travelled up to the

North and by East, (the first instance of a storm track, trending to

the East of the meridian,) from the neighbourhood of Gya, and pass-

ing not far from Patna and between it and Pussewa ; though it might

perhaps have been better placed about half way between both? But

the word “ shift,” used in Mr. Ravenshaw’s report from Patna, inclines

me to believe, that the change was, if not a sudden, a very rapid one,

whereas that at Pussewa was evidently a veering from North at

7 a.m. to N.N. W. at Noon, and N. W. at 1 p. m. or 4 points in 6

hours. Beyond Patna we have no farther trace of the storm.

I should thus be inclined to take this storm as quite a separate one.

I have already remarked on and discussed the rates of travelling of

the various storms, and no farther observations occur to me, except to

remark on the very high rates of travelling, which the Eliza’s log and

* “ Veering’’ and not ‘shifting ;’’ and the careful use of these words is important ;

for the sudden shift, particularly with an interval of calm, indicates the passage of the

central portion of a gale; the ‘‘ veering’’ that it has passed near the spot.

812 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No 141,

Pooree report furnish us, which are as yet new in the Eastern Seas,

and the remarkable confirmation of the fact of the dangerous Wes-

terly set of 3 or 4 miles per hour prevailing at the Sand Heads, even

when as in this case, the nearest centre of the nearest storm was at

least 100 miles distant from the Light Vessels !

P.S.—I obtain, just as this sheet goes to press, two more documents.

The abstract of the log of the Ship Seringapatam, Capt. Robertson,

and the notes taken at Purulia, which Capt. Hannyngton had mislaid.

The memorandum from the Seringapatam is as follows; she was

bound to Madras :—

lst October, 1842.—Nautical Time.

Course and Distance | Lat. and Long. Noon | Bar. Ther.

S. S. W. 19° 26' N. 86° 36’ E. | 2960 83°

Wind and weather variable S. W., N. W., and S. E., with thunder

and rain.

Qnd Oct.—S.S. W.180. | 17° 39' 84° 32’ | 29°50 83°

N. W. strong breeze throughout.

This position it will be seen places the Ser?ngapatam on nearly the

same meridian as the Essex, but about 30 miles further to the North-

ward at Noon on the 2nd, and about 15 miles nearer to the track of

the centre of the Pooree hurricane, as I have laid it down. Her

Barometer is accordingly lower, and she had the N. W. breeze, (it

would have been a gale had she been a degree less advanced on her

track,) ‘‘a steady” one throughout, which is what ought to have occur-

red with her.

The following is the tabular statement of the storm at Purulia, as

sent me by Capt. Hannyngton :—

mLucknow

i ee

fg Chart ~

To THE NINTH MEMOIR

aon the <=

toring

Mowfjirpore

in ' oF )

Jaunpore |

j 1 Sa a oe Rungpore .

Allehabad B onares 5-4 ae Fata = ies

—~ \ Bae

The Poo ree Wurricane |

: FN LE a OF 2nd bth October,

S : ~\ 1842

meh hs

~ \

\ Dp % 5

Mis A \ Dy Mieniry Fedding ber

a Jungypore’ ‘Se \ ais

“SS Moorshedabad » | 2

<7, :

2 Whaldar

Burrtsal

| :

oSunhulpore

Nenecie mage

se Sp Midnight (2b 2" 06 TS Gites

Flock, Anais Lith Toye 4 Nave SF Colnntte 2 Fas

813

"PSL ‘4aquaaony YI 9y7 ‘oyning ‘s9NQ S.quDqsisspy podiours gy ‘Uuowsig wooygno jy

‘quojsisspy jndiuisg ‘NOLONANNVY] ‘f° j

te _—S a a a oe re)

: wD

‘Iopuny} pue Suruyysry yyta urer Aavoy ‘sire yysvy] Y Sens | eee — Me “UOONG | 2° = Olgig)

‘sulyeqe pue Suyesopoul ‘ezoorg) =“ thE, | 08 19-66 | 96°83) W'VOT|*"°°* ‘ou

‘dulyeiapour pue dn Surreayo ‘aza01q Yysedyq on % ue 69:66 | F6-86/| ‘WV g [coc f0N7IG

"WV ¢ souls urer Aavay ‘a[yqY @ Suyerepout ‘OIG, “ASA | LL O08 | 09-63 | 26-86 | ‘WV Gg [°° °° ** ‘oI

‘sjsn3

JUSTOIA [BUOIS¥DDO YIM “SsnonuTjUOD s10UI ‘0z}IC *S a s a a "NV G *19q0}QO PAE

“UIeL OpIIIT @ ‘oTes ysorq) — ““ see eed 86-66 | 06-86; Ha 11|°' °° °° “onid

“STINT ayeulay[e Lo ALON ‘Aysn4x) “o'"O'"O GG | 66 6s 66 ‘Wd OI Shoo) SOO” OIG

“4Svy

SUIALIP pue ‘MOT pnog ‘“Sulsvorout ‘ezaeiq Su0149 arf 82 | £08 29°60 | F6-82 | ‘Wa 8 *19q0}9Q PUuz

Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India.

o ice 2

Ler (q)

ee tee te) oe

fog ae est Sore ioe

‘SHUVWAY = a. | ee | ean aORy ‘ayeq

[e) fe} ter tnd = ct

Lear) ———> ct O 9 Oo

Z. Saal os

=) *IoJOWOW AI : S ct

"Aaquofuy anion’ YIGE

‘QNOWLSWUY ‘9 ‘x wenjdng fg ‘gPQ{ ‘42q0]9Q fo pug pun pug ay, fo wsojg ay7 bursnp ‘vynang 30 yday daysibay 709160]0.109}0 yy

1843. ]

814 Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 141.

This document shews that, as I have supposed at p. 810, the Purulia

storm, if it was any part of a circular one, was doubtless an indepen-

dent one, both as regards those to the Southward and to the N. W.

of that station, the little change indicating that it was, if circular,

passing on nearly an East and West track to the South of Purulia.

H. 2.

Notes on a curious species of Tiger or Jaguar, killed near the Snowy

Range, north of Darjeeling. By Lieut. Ticketx, Bengal Native In-

fantry, Assistant Agent to the Governor General, S. W. Frontier.

The animal from which these notes are taken was killed by a Bho-

tia, near the Snowy Range, in the northerly part of Sikkim, and its

skin subsequently purchased by a gentleman who obligingly lent it to

me for the purpose of sketching. The want of a better model to copy

from, has probably rendered my drawing, with regard to outline, faulty

in many points. But careful measurements, protracted on a scale, may

give a tolerable approximation to true proportions and general aspect,

and the markings of the skin are faithfully delineated, as well as the

color of the fur carefully described.

Dimensions of the Skin.

Feet. Inches.

From nose to root of tail, 5 ee 5

Tail, ie ee ate Di 102

Centre of back, between the shoulders to

sole of fore-paw, ... i eke OL

From root of tail to sole of hind paw, .. 2 13

5, nose toeye, .. a 75 80) 44

» eye to ear, - af ‘ia @ 54

» ear to between shoulders, ni 8

Of the breadths of various parts I take no measure, for they are in

places shrunk, and in others pulled out during the operation of flaying.

The head is narrow and nose somewhat elongated, the muzzle approach-

ing the attenuated form in some of the smaller cats, leading into

‘“‘ Viverrina.” Limbs and body bulky and low, and the tail very thick,

long and furry. The hair on other parts is thick and soft, but shorter

Scale of l$ Inches to a foot. ShTickell

; al

— 7

> teyes

i line

Pall

Pie 47

’ \ : [

‘ _

Ae ne 1 es takes aS

Pe Ws ae rs ,

ly o

Wiis? f * ie

A t 7 i

he A

nat .

\ vo

‘ F ae

Oh cig ea het

AN] e Ke ve eur T rate i hts

{ ; ie Cup

_ ek bi Dias “4

le e E * ug FE A

; ik ; re ye Sa

< 2

” b n mt ib So

4 i

‘ 3 ‘

' " My Woe arin . P| : \ Ye

i’ \ vi ‘ y

wl ay { ‘ve

Ore’ . i y ,

; ; cae

3 a

¢ Bat! mat m5

) 1 { ‘i

* rie rs an

hea, ‘f byte f : a

¥ “ f ey i)

Ss i oh me or re 5 :

ey or > eal

Bi i Sie Y os .

1843. | Notes on a curious species of Tiger or Jaguar. 815

than in the Leopard. Claws powerful. Lips, brows, and cheeks near

the corners of the mouth, furnished with whitish vibrisse.

Color.—Pale bistre brown, (a plain dullish clay brown,) fading on

lower parts inside the limbs, and on cheeks and lips to pale rufous tawny.

Centre of head covered with small longitudinal black spots, a few also

about supercilium. Inferiorly and posteally to eye, two narrow stripes

reaching to molar angle, and produced, with broken intervals, by other

broader stripes along the side and front of neck. A black band across

throat, bases of ears black. From behind ears, all along mesial line of

back, a double line of chain-like stripes, more or less interrupted

and more or less parallel. On the nuchal region these diverge and

afford room to an inner, smaller, similar chain. From each side these

chains diverge three large ovate spaces, encircled by broken lines and

patches, well defined posteally, almost obsolete anteally. The loins

and flanks of the belly, instead of these large patches, have similar

but smaller and more numerous ones; some nearly circular, all packed

together so as to leave narrow intervals between them. On the limbs

the markings are more irregular, consisting of zig-zag longitudinal

patches, decreasing to spots on the carpal region. Paws (as nose) plain

dull brown. ‘Tail brown, thickly furred and marked black. Its end

plain brown. The large oval spaces and the smaller ones of the after-

parts of the sides do not reach to the belly, which is marked with

large irregular patches and lines. These marks are all, above and

below, black. And the areas of the large encircled spaces, as also

of the smaller ones, above-mentioned, are shaded with a darker tinge

of brown, and the former are therein studded with black spots, which

give the fur a rich and beautiful appearance.

Although I have not so named it above, I have little doubt that this

animal is the same as the Felis Macrocelis of Temminck, known at

Sumatra by the name of Rimau-dihan, or ‘ Tree Tiger’, and minutely de-

scribed in Jardine’s Naturalist’s Library in the volume on Feline. The

ground-color of the body is there said to be greyish, not the slightest

tinge of which is perceptible in the skin before me. The size of the

present subject is also superior, its total length being six feet and three

and a half inches. Inall other respects the description exactly coincides.

The bulky limbs, stout body and powerful retractile claws of the ani-

mal do not seem to accord well with Sir Stamford Raffles’ description

816 Notes on a curious species of Tiger or Jaguar. [No. 141.

of its innocuous habits, of its feeding almost entirely on birds, (caught

in trees!) and on the poultry of the villagers, and of its becoming

readily and permanently tame after capture.

The Lepchas here call the animal ‘“‘ Pungmar,” and the Bhotias ‘ Zik ;”

their accounts are widely different to the above They describe it

as an uncommonly fierce and wary animal, difficult to approach, and

dangerous to attack, from its invariably turning on the assailant if

wounded. It is a rarer animal than the “ Sejjiak” or Leopard ; but it

is to be found in the vallies lying north of Darjeeling, in dense jungle,

chiefly by the banks of rivers ; the Ranget, Roongnoo, &c. affecting low

places in preference to mountain tops. It approaches the villages of

the Bhotias and Lepchas sometimes, and kills goats, pigs, &c.; of its

predeliction for poultry, nothing is said by them; and of its propen-

sity to climb trees, I could gather nothing satisfactory. The Lepchas

affirm that it has been seen on trees, but that it ascends them in play,

and not to seek food. Indeed the notion of such a large animal catching

birds on trees, appears ridiculous. Altogether the accounts as re-

ceived by me, of the ‘“ Pungmar” tally more with the description (as to

disposition) of Felis Nebulosus, the ‘‘ Rimau Maug” of the Sumatrans,

as cursorily given in the work above referred to.

M. Stanislas Julien on the Study of the Chinese Language. Translated

for the Journal of the Asiatic Society. By Henry Pippineron,

Sub- Secretary, Asiatic Society.

The Asiatic Society has just received from its author M. Stanislas Julien, a work

entitled ‘* Exercises Pratiques d’ Analyse de Syntax et de Lexigraphie Chinoise,’’

of which the subject is a critical examination of thirteen lines of a translation of

a notice in the work of the Chinese traveller and author Hionen-tsang upon India,

by M. Pauthier.

In this translation, M. Stanislas Julien detects njnety-four faults in thirteen lines !

and his criticism is approved by the first Chinese scholars of England, Germany

and Russia. His work is dedicated to his friend, Mr. Morrison. With this controversy

we have nothing further to do than that it may serve to put us a little on our guard as

to what some Chinese translations may be;* but the introduction to M. Julien’s

paper is so remarkable, as containing the opinions of a first rate Chinese scholar and a

* As for instance, some which were copied from the Canton Register into the Calcutta papers

about a year or more ago, in which, in a single proclamation, half a dozen common English, and

I believe some Latin quotations were inserted, and this we were gravely told, was a translation

from a Chinese State Paper.—H.P.

1843. | On the Study of the Chinese Language. 817

man of letters, highly distinguished in other walks, on the study of the Chinese

language, that I have thought it well worth translation; since at the present time,

nothing which can encourage or facilitate the study of this language is indifferent

to us, independent of its high interest in a mere philological point of view. This in-

troduction I find, also appeared with his first controversial paper in the Journal

Asiatique, for May 1841, but it is reprinted with the present pamphlet.

‘The time is now happily far distant since it was generally

believed in Europe, that the study of the Chinese language required,

even in China, the whole life of a man of letters. M. Remusat

has greatly contributed by his works and his teaching to destroy

this prejudice, and if some men of learning yet give credit to it,

it is because they have not taken the trouble to examine the question.

This opinion would indeed be well-founded, if to speak, read, and write

Chinese it were necessary to learn the forty-two thousand characters,

which compose the great Dictionary, published in thirty-two octavo

volumes by the emperor Khang-hi; for certainly not a single Chinese

man of letters would be found capable of such a prodigious effort of me-

mory. But it is as useless for a Chinese, or a European to know, and

to be able to write all the characters of the Khangi-hi-toen-tien,

(Khang-hi’s Digtionary,) as for a foreigner studying our language to be

acquainted with all the words of the French Dictionary of Boiste,

which in mere words is three times as rich. Supposing that the most

complete of our Dictionaries contains, as is said, a hundred and

twenty-four thousand words, we may say without fear of contradiction,

that a foreigner who knows only three or four thousand, would be able

to read the majority of French authors. More than a hundred thou-

sand words, or terms, are relative to sciences, arts and trades, and which

seldom occur in literary works. When the reader meets with them, he

looks for them in a good Dictionary, and continues his reading without

fancying that he does not understand French because he is unacquaint-

ed with some choice scientific or technological terms.

The case is exactly the same with the Chinese Dictionaries. The

Emperor Khang-hi’s would be reduced from forty-two thousand to six

or eight thousand words,* if we were to subtract from it about ten

thousand variations of ancient and obsolete characters, of names of men,

of places, of mountains, and of rivers, and of the terms belonging to

‘sciences and art.

* Several with no meaning, Marshman’s Introductory Remarks, p. 31.

t 1900 characters form the materials of the language, Marshman, p. 37.

818 On the Study of the Chinese Language. [No. 141.

Under the Han dynasty, says the author of the Vocabulary of the

Kings, candidates for the offices of historians of the empire were

required to know at least nine thousand different characters. Now, as

the complete annals of any epoch must comprise, in methodical order,

almost every subject of literature and science, it would appear from this

alone, that the number of characters which the most learned men were

required to know, differs prodigiously from that which many persons

in Kurope suppose necessary for the lowest literary grades.

We may indeed suppose, that these last hardly require more than

five or six thousand words to speak, read, and write Chinese. In

fact, the four classic books do not contain more than two thousand

and four hundred characters ; but nevertheless, a person who has care-

fully studied them, and who is at the same time master of the prin-

ciples of Chinese syntax (construction, ) can understand without assist-

ance almost all books of history, geography, and philosophy. In China

the candidates for the literary rank of Kiu-jin, (Licentiate,) are only

required to have well studied the four classic books, and any one of

the Kings (canonical books,) which they may choose.

From what has been said, the study of the Chinese language does

not require, as far as relates to the necessary words, more trouble than

any foreign language; such as German for instance, which is com-

menced without any fear, and with a certainty of mastering it.* But

the difficulty in the study of Chinese does not consist in the number of

words. It is well known, that this language is a monosyllabic one,

and that its words do not allow of inflexions indicating in substantives

and adjectives genders, numbers and cases, and in verbs, times and

persons. Moreover, the same word sometimes changes its value in

changing its place, and becomes a substantive and adjective ; a passive

active, or neuter verb or adverb. The word chew for example, may

signify good (substantive,) good (adjective,) esteem good (approve, )

and good adverbially taken; when the mechanism of the Chinese

language is understood this word is as explicit in its different positi-

ons as the Latin words bonum, bonus, bonum judicare, bené.

The English language has some similarity to this. Certain sub-

stantives by their position, and by the words which accompany

them, become sometimes adjectives, verbs, and adverbs, without the

* See also Marshman’s Introductory Remarks, p. 3.

1843. | On the Study of the Chinese Language. 819

least difficulty arising thereform to the reader or hearer. Thus the word

cut, is an adjective in “a cut wig,” and a verb in “to cut timber.”

The word present (a gift) is an adjective in “the present season,”

and a verb in “ to present a man.”*

The word head is an adjective in “the head workman,” and a verb

in “ to head the people.”

In Chinese, the word cheow (head,) may become, according to

circumstances, adjective or verb, or an adverb.f The English word

“« nen” is a verb in “ to pen,” (write,) a letter.

The Chinese word pz (pencil) has the same scope; it may signify, ac-

cording to its position, “ pencil,” and “to write with a pencil.”

It follows then, that to understand Chinese, it is not sufficient to be

acquainted with a great number of words. Although the nine thou-

sand words formerly required to become one of the historians of

the empire should be perfectly known by heart, this alone would

not suffice to understand half a page of the easiest Chinese text.

To be able to give to each word the value resulting from its position,

and to catch the varying sense of the prepositions and _ particles,{

which determine the reciprocal relation of words, the language must be

studied systematically ; the student must have analysed, and I might

say dissected, philosophically, the best translated works by the Missiona-

ries, or by the learned of Europe, who have taken them for guides.

He will then be able to distinguish with certainty, the positional values

(valeurs de position,) upon which the knowledge of the Chinese

language mostly depends. In this respect its difficulties are of a

peculiar kind ; but not greater nor more numerous than those of other

languages of the East or of Asia. We have seen many persons,

who after some years of study and application, have been able to read,

translate or analyse with all desirable exactitude, ancient or modern

Chinese works relating to their studies. I may name M. Bazin, senior,

who has given to the learned world a first volume of Chinese Dramas,

completely translated in prose and verse, and who is now about

to publish the complete translation of a celebrated Drama in twenty-

* Our English readers will observe, that M. Julien has here forgotten the pronunciation which

makes a different word of it. He probably alludes here to the mere spelling, which to the eye of a

Chinese, as to that of a child, makes it the same word as the substantive.

+ Examples from Marshman, p, 195.

I Marshman alludes to prepositive characters to mark the cases of nouns, and again, p. 994,

“every termination is supplied by position,”

820 On the Study of the Chinese Language. [No. 141.

four acts.* M. Theodore Pavie, who had studied Sanscrit and Chinese

at the same time, acquired in a few years a remarkable knowledge of

these two languages, and to him we owe a volume of Chinese Novels,

not less distinguished by the elegance of their style, than by the fidelity

of the translation; and M. Biot, junior, whose early studies and

a solid knowledge of the Chinese language, have enabled him to

examine, with much advantage to science, books written in the

ancient dialect, and relative to the history, geography, statistics, or arts

of China. The readers of the Journal Asiatique have often had occa-

sion to appreciate the Memoirs with which he has enriched its pages.

He is now preparing for the press the “Alphabetic Concordance of the

names of Chinese towns of the first, second, and third rank, which

have been changed under different dynasties. This will reflect new

honour on the author, and new light upon our knowledge... I might add

to these names, those of M. Leon Pages, Advocate, who has just con-

cluded a French translation of the four classic books (Kings) with a

running commentary, and of his cousin, M. Edmé Mechain, (grandson

of the astronomer, ) lost to science by an early death when Vice-Consul

at Smyrna. M. Mechain had learnt Chinese when a law student, and

only at his leisure hours, and yet in three years he was able to read with

facility. Son of a Consul General, and pursuing that profession, he —

hoped to become one day French Consul in China, and that his know-

ledge of the languages of the celestial empire might be of use to our

commerce, our arts, and our literature. His name as a Chinese scholar

would be still unknown, were it not that I have felt it a duty to men-

tion here his zeal and his remarkable acquirements in Chinese.

It is thus a well established fact, both from the examples which

I have quoted, and from a sort of public notoriety, that in a few

years a tolerable knowledge of Chinese may be acquired. But there

is one indispensable condition, which is to study with care the laws of

construction, the fixed principles which determine the grammatical

functions of the words and modify their value according to the place

in which they stand in the sentence; the value of the prepositions

which are sometimes significative as in other languages, and sometimes

lose their usual meanings, becoming purely phonetic marks of regimen,

* This Drama, entitled ‘‘ Pi-Pa-ki, or the History of the Lute,” was published in 1841, by

Dupont,

1843. | On the Study of the Chinese Language. 821

as have I believe demonstrated in the dissertation at the close of

my Sinico-Latin edition of the works of the Chinese philosopher

Meng-tseu. If these rules, which are for Sinologists what those of

inflexion are in other languages, and which are their best guides

in interpreting a passage, be neglected, the Chinese language may be

studied for many years without ever acquiring the degree of know-

ledge necessary to become a faithful translator.”

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

(Monday Evening, the 4th September, 1843.)

The regular monthly meeting of the Society was held at the rooms on

Monday the 4th September, at the usual hour. The Honorable the Pre-

sident in the chair.

The following Members proposed at the August meeting were ballotted

for, and declared duly elected. The usual communication was ordered to

be made to them :—

Major W. Anderson, B. H. A.; F. Mouat, Esq. M. D., B. M. S.; and

Capt. Stephen, B. N. I., A. D. C. to the Honorable the Deputy Governor.

And the following new Member was ‘proposed :—

Dr. Sprenger, B. M. S. proposed by the Honorable Sir H. Seton, second-

ed by Mr. H. Piddington. |

The following list of Books, presented and purchased, was read :—

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, on the 4th September, 1843.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, second series. Bombay, August 1843, vol.

iv, No. 8.—Presented by the Editor.

Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. Bombay, April

1843, No. 5.—Presented by the Society.

Journal Asiatique, 3me série, tome vix. Juillet 4 October 1842, Nos, 76 4 78,

Paris.— Presented by the Society.

Jamieson’s Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, Edinburgh, 1843, vol. xxiv,

No. 67.—Presented by the Author.

Proceedings of the Geological Society of London, 1842, vol. iii, part 1i, No. 91.

—Presented by the Society.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for August, Sep-

tember and October 1842, Nos. 17, 18, and 19.—From the Academy, (two

copies. )

London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science,

third series, London, January 1843, vol. xxii. Nos. 141 and 142.

Transactions of the Royal Astronomical Society, London, 1842-43, vols. xii, xiii,

and xiv.—From the Astronomical Society.

822 Asiatic Society. [No. 141.

Early Records in Equity. Calcutta, 1842.—Presented by the Hon’ble Sir H. W.

Seton.

Calendars of the Proceedings in Chancery in the reign of Queen Elizabeth.

—Presented by the Hon’ble Sir H. W. Seton.

Bulletin de la Société de Géographie, 2me série, Paris 1842, tome xvii.

Naturalist’s Library.—Ornithology, vol. xiv, Nectariniade, or Sun-Birds. Edin-

burgh, 1843.—-From the Booksellers.

Pauthier, Réponse a l’ Examen Critique, Paris, 1842.—Presented by the Author.

Pauthier, Examen Méthodique des faits qui concernent Le Thian-Tchu ou

L’Inde, Paris, 1840.—Presented by the Author.

Pauthier, Vindicie Sinice. Dernier Réponse a M.S. Julien, Paris 1842.—-Pre-

sented by the Author.

Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik des Sanskrit, Zend, Griechischen, &c. &c.

Berlin, 1842, Vierte Abtheilung.—Presented by the Author.

The Secretary read the following Memoranda :—

1. It has been suggested by several Members, and the Secretary begs now to men-

tion it, that the works of reference belonging to the Library of Fort William, which

as a temporary arrangement were made over to the Public Library, might more

appropriately be deposited in that of the Society, and this with more advantage

to the public in general,

2. Government having requested a further supply of fifty copies of the Scinde

Vocabulary, these have been sent from’the copies placed for sale with the Book-

sellers. ‘The copies for sale at Bombay have been sent to Messrs. Collett and Co.

3. It has been suggested to Government, that at the present time a reprint of

Lieut. Leech’s Grammar and Praxis, &c. of the Brahoee, Beloochee and Punjabee

languages, which forms about 61 pp. of the 7th vol. of the Journal would be

most useful with reference to our new acquisitions in the West of India. In conse-

quence of this, areprint has been sanctioned, and is now in progress at Bishop’s

College Press.

With reference to the first of these Memoranda, it was ordered, that the Secretary

be requested to inquire into and state to the Committee of Papers, what were the

conditions under which the works in question were deposited in the Public Library,

and to frame thereupon an-application for them in terms of his suggestion.

The Secretary farther reminded the Society, that two works from Messrs.

Ostell, z. e. Cuvier’s Mammiferes, and Swainson’s Illustrations, had remained

for inspection, and that some Nos. of Smith’s Zoology of Southern Africa

had also been sent for inspection by a private individual, who was desirous

of disposing of them. Some conversation took place, when it was agreed

upon, that the purchase of Cuvier should be farther considered, with re-

ference to the possibility of obtaining a copy cheaper from Europe. The

Honorable the President begged to be allowed to present to the Society,

Swainson’s Illustrations, and Dr. Smith’s Zoology of Southern Africa in tes-

timony of his high appreciation of the indefatigable labours of Mr. Blyth

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 823

in the Zoological Department, and his desire to assist and forward them.

The best thanks of the Society were voted for this very liberal donation.

The following note from the Librarian, addressed to the Secretary, was

read :—

To H. Torrens, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society.

S1r,—I have the honour to forward to you the enclosed note of Mr. J. Thomason’s,

who desires me to bring to your notice, that some papers, published by the Royal

Asiatic Society and the Bombay Branch Society are not in our Library.

The papers alluded to, are contained in the Transactions of the R. A. 8, and the

Journal of the B. B. S., and with regard to these publications I beg to state, that we

have received only the first three volumes of the Transactions of the R. A. S.,* and

there are only a few numbers of the above-mentioned Journal in our Library.

As these publications are most intimately connected with the progress of Oriental

learning, I beg leave to propose, that they should be procured for the Library.

23rd August, 1843. Your most obedient servant,

E. Roer.

It was ordered, that the works alluded to be completed for the Library.

Read the following letter, accompanying a valuable donation of rare

Books by the Honorable Sir H. Seton, for which the thanks of the Society

were voted :—

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society.

Sir,—As it appears by the Catalogue lately published, that the Library of the

Society, among the works published by the Record Commission, does not contain

the Calendars of the Proceedings in Chancery in the Reign of Elizabeth, I beg to

_ present it with a copy of them, together with an unpublished Tract relating to

their contents. I have the honor to be, &c.

Calcutta, 24th August, 1843. H. W. Seton.

Read the following letter from the Under-Secretary to the Government

of Bengal, sanctioning an allowance of Co’s. Rupees 64 per mensem, for

the expenses of the Museum of Economic Geology :—

No. 842.

From Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal to H. Torrens, Esq. Vice-President

and Secretury, Asiatic Society.

Sir,—With reference to the second paragraph of my letter, No. 691, of the 3rd

instant, 1 am directed to inform you, that the Honorable the Deputy Governor of

Bengal, with the concurrence of the Government of India, is pleased to sanction the

monthly sum of Co’s, Rs. 64, for establishment and contingencies of the Museum of

Economic Geology. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Fort William, 31st July 1843.° A. Turnesutt,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

* The Transactions of the R. A. S. are now published in the form of a Journal, which the

Library possesses.

824 Asiatic Society. CNo. 141.

Read the following extract of a letter from Dr. Wise, B. M. S. to the

Sub-Secretary, dated Dundee, 29th June, 1843.

I was hurried across Egypt in such a manner as prevented me from delivering the

box of Books in person to Mohammud Alee, which the Asiatic Society, at your kind

suggestion, charged me with. I sentit to the palace of Grand Cairo, and requested the

British Consul and Clot Bey to see that it was delivered in a suitable manner. This

I am sure they did, and to my great regret it was all I could do, as the Padsha was

in Upper Egypt when I was at Cairo. After all the preparations I had made, the

steam boat was not able to land our party at Cosseir on account of the weather,

and. I therefore came to England with the same mail I had come from India with.

Read letter from M. Delessert, returning thanks for the honor confer-

red on him by his election at the August meeting.

Read the following letter from Messrs. W. and H. Allen, the Society’s

Booksellers and Agents in London :—

Henry Pipprineron, Esq.

Str,—We have the pleasure to send you, as Secretary to the Asiatic Society, our

account to this date. We enclose the particulars of £43: 16:4, against the

Society for money paid, and books supplied by us. The account current annexed

herewith gives credit for the publications of the Society sold during the year, which

leaves a balance of £13; 18; 3, due to us.

We have hitherto been instructed to keep the account for the sales of the Journal

separately, and the enclosed statement for the sales amounts to £32: 12: 0.

The two accounts shewn, together, leave a balance of £18 : 18: 9 in favor of the

Society, and we leave you to determine the mode of settlement. We shall be most

happy to honor your draft at 30 days’ sight for either of the balances. If you draw

for £32: 17: 0, then the Society will be indebted to us the balance of the account

current. We have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servants,

London, 30th June, 1843. W. H. Atuen and Co.

Dr. The Asiatic Society Calcutta, in Account with William H. Allen and Co. Cr.

30th June 1843.—To paid sun- 30th June 1842,—By Balance

dry charges on Books re- stated, .. cece £1149

ceived to forward, &c. in- 30th June 1843.—Account sales

cluding £21: 0: 0 paid to as per statement herewith, 28 3 4

the Oriental Fund, as per By Balance,.ccsccseeeee 13 18 3

statement enclosed,.. £ 43 16 4 EEE Mtoe

—— £ 43 16 4

£ 43 16 4

ee E. E.

To Balance, ..-. £1318 3 W. H. Aven ann Co.

London, 30th June, 1843.

1843.)

Dr.

Asiatic Society.

The Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta,

Wm. H. Auten & Co.

Journal, No. 97,

98,

99,

100,

», 101,

102,

103,

104,

105,

106,

107,

108,

109,

110,

111,

112,

113,

114,

115,

116,

117,

118,

119,

120,

121,

122,

123,

124,

125,

126,

127,

128,

” ”

? 9?

Paid Sundry Advertising, Porterage,

Commission 10 per Cent.... sae “on :

London, 30th June, 1843.

rai |ite aes

Ss ee peer Seas

1S "-N/ OO oon

aor) o8 a ee

aaa | 221 v5 >

Or ma i)

eo 11 oe 8

11 te 7

f 14 12

: 12 11

con 10 : 9

eee 13 ° 11

os es ie 2 3 9

on 10 oe 7

cc 11 con &

ee = 1l ° 8

eee 14 11

eee 5 13 : 11

oe . 14 9

eee sec 1G . 12

oO secillnedd “| 12

coo ° 16 11

ooo 15 ry ji

ee SH als ° 11

see oll 1G : 12

aes 17 0 13

on coll 18 cor 12

eco se awe 25 XQ 10

seo e coe 50 *13 10

20 cpall’ ayy 50 | *13 13

tac quel) Sees 50 | *13 14

vee seal ee 50 *13 15

“e calle es 50 | *13 17

on rH edie 50 | *13 16

* oy ree 70 =| *13 36

ae aac est 50 | *13 18

ce Bal ec 50 | *13 18

eee eee eee 30 ¥13 23

Booking, &c. ... *

“

| Sold.

HA HR eB PR ER cr On A en Be Go © 69 09 So TD OO 9

-—

Account

AeOnmRODmonmnuN Nw aE &

mmermwsnwnwestwtdrmooceccenscrececececoececoe

40 3

7 6

£32 17

EK. E

$25

with

Cr.

Ol MEwmecoerawOowDrOOOOSuwrowaNmMuUMInooagor l

eA fee

Wn. H. ALLEN AND Co.

* These figures are the number of copies distributed as per list below.

—_

Wee c lees

” Led

99 3’)

| ee ee el dl

—_

Copy No. 18, to Royal Society,

» No. 18, to Professor Schlegel.

DISTRIBUTED.

Edinburgh,

Each, No. 119 to 128, to Professor Wilson.

Ed. Asiatic Journal,

Royal Society.

Royal Asiatic Society.

Ed. Edinburgh Philosophical Journal.

Royal Institution.

Ed. Philosophical Magazine.

Athenzum, =

Baron Von Hammer Purgstall.

University of Bonn.

Royal Society of Edinburgh.

Ed. Spectator,

Professor Schlegel.

826

Asiatic Society.

The Asiatic Society, Calcutta, in Account with

Wm. H. AuuEn anv Co.

Asiatic Researches, vol. 15, 4to. stitched,

. vol. 16,

Ditto,

«- vol. 18, part 1,

.. vol. 18, part 2,

Ditto, Index to first 18 vols.

Ditto,

Amis ul Musharahin, 4to. stitched,

. vol, 19, part 1,

. vol. 19, part 2,

w- vol, 20, part 1, «.

- vol. 20, part 2, «.

Futawa Alemgiri, vol. 1, royal4to. -.

Ditto,

Inayah, ...

Ditto, ...

Ss Niele) 2:

ree VOLUN,

vol. 4,

ew vol. 5,

ee. Vol. G,

Sells

ae Vole a:

4to.

Jawame ul Ilm ul Riazi, 4to. stitched,..

Kifayah, ...

Ditto,

Mahabharata,

Ditto,

cee VOlega,

eee VOl. 4,

pee WV Olas

sas) VOL. BD:

vee, VOI. GO,

ee VOl, 4,

4to.

royal,

Index to Mahabharata, 4 parts,

-. Part. 4,

Naishadha Charita, 8vo. stitched,

Raja Tarangini, complete in 1

Ditto,

royal 4to. stitched,

Susruta, vol. 2, 8vo. ditto,

Tibetan Dictionary, 4to. ditto,

Boarding 1 Copy of the Asiatig Researches, vol. 16,

coe

vol. }

Paid Entry Duty and Wharf charges on Index to Mahabha-

rata, per Ellenborough,

soe

Paid Sundry, Advertising to this date,

Commission 5 per Cent.

* Asiatic Researches, vol. 19, part 1,

Ditto,

vol, 19,

vol, 20,

vol. 20,

part 2,

part 1,

part 2,

e ey ° S S ° .

SoS) 38 (Se) 3 | SB

a82l og 1e8S) Ss [aS

os GA |O5 wn

| 19 bs 19 ny 24,

wes ee ie 9 1 ¥

ee 7 con 5 2 12

nO 3 8 2 an

ha 24 y 20 1 iy

me ies » 31 *9 =

oy Ge 3 2 38 *3 a

Dit ae ‘ 29 *3 in

El eeealet.. | a7 sage eee

a 3 re 3 ne. me

he Ae 1 1 24

Ge Ne at | vine

% 4 ats 3 1 bas

AS 5 cua 4 1 Hee

i 1 ae De 1 eh

ip 4° e iv 1 a

i] vas 1 AA ee

a ae ve 32 1 aS

cS ae | me a 1 a

as 7 = 6 1 ou

sea 6 See 5 Oe ee

aa 8 eee 6 2 He

aaley otal see 8 3 mae

ag fi 11 3 i

ee 1 eee eve 1 veo

Seana 20 20 ee a

oe as 20 20 ie oon

sang. na 3 | i 17

clo, wee 21 1 20

oan 3 aoe 2 1 1-2

“| 6 ate 5 1 20

nae LEH san 0 180)

eee eee eae see eee 2 5 0

ae A oe ius pee

me cae Ba An val) WARD

[ No. 141.

Cr.

aOoORNK RRO

timed

— fo

—

Sl on © KYPOESCKAHASCHHNKHOCH HH RHPROR

ROH COCR WWI RB ROR OR RE mem OmmeE BOE BRO

Sreoescoococconwnoscsosoocaoossecocoso

35 4

619 0

£28 3 4

) Sent to Royal Library, Berlin, per order

J Professor Wilson, July 3, 1842.

Wm. H. ALLEN AnD Co.

1843.)

Asiatic Society.

Dr. Asiatic Society, Calcutta, to W. H. ALLEN aNnp Co. London. Cr.

1842.

July 6, Per Owen Glendower.—Cuvier and Valenciennes, Histoire des

Poissons, tome 16, 8vo. stitched and Plates, 421 to 455, BP 8)

Journal des Savants, May, Se ese a OmOnnO

Shipping Expences, &c. Sr ee Lee HOnsodO

2 4 0

3» 930, Per Agincourt.—Journal Asiatique, 7 Nos. enclosed, .. Fett O10) GO

Paid Duty on ditto, ct eos see on Wo Bo

Journal des Savants, June, 0 0 0

8vo. Parcel received to forward from Royal Geographical Society, ... os GO) OO

8vo. Parcel ditto from Geographical Society, 500 roo 0) Oo)

Shipping Expences, &c. a aa Pd eG

0 4 0

Aug. 34, Per Prince of Wales.—Journal des Savants, July, ao 0) O° @

8vo. Parcel received from Society of Arts enclosed, oo OG

Shipping Expences, &c. oc cee cco OO Hite Cha

Sept. 30, Per Windsor.—Journal des Savants, August, Va cON0 40

8vo. Parcel received from Paris, and paid duty on the same, eet Ol ae 6

Shipping Expences, &c. oes seo OF EG

0 6 0

Nov. 19, Per Zenobia.—Journal des Savants, September, ase Oe On)

Royal 8vo. Parcel received to forward from Oriental TranslationFd. 0 0 0

8vo. Parcel from Geological Society, on eee Om Own)

Shipping Expences, &c. ove oo et) or

Dec. 23, Per Stag.—Journal des Savants, October, co! Oo O

Niebuhr’s History of Rome, vol. 3, 8vo. calf gilt, aor Ao ak

8vo. Pamphlet from Geological Society enclosed, on = YO

Antiquitates Americane, 1837, C. C. Rafer, imp. Ato, bound, .. 0 0 O

Shipping Expences, &c. ... eee Ee) ici 0)

1843, 15 0

Jan. 25, Per Carnatic._-Received to forward,

Bulletin de la Societé Geographie, vol. 17, 8vo. ae SOMO MEG,

Paid Duty on the same, aesle owe xo WO ok @

8vo. Parcel received from Paris, ae so DLO. @

Paid Duty on ditto, BS) os Be iO SS 0

8vyo. Pamphlet from Geological Society, a0 wee FORROM AO

Jameson’s Journal, No. 67, sesh Ohn09 0

Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, 4to. stitched, fo UO oO

Paid Duty « on ditto, eee ese «we OO 1 6G

Shipping Expences, &c. ... ort eso OME GinLO,

OW ENG

Mar. 23, Per Patriot Queen.—Journal des Savants, November and December

1842, and January 1843, sec OM Ono)

Paid Sub scription on J ournal des Savants, J anuary to Dec. 1843, .. 218 O

Received to forward, Julien Simple Exposé, &c. 8vo.stiteched, .. 0 0 0

Received to forward.

Paid Duty en Julien Simple Exposé, &c. $vo. stitched, each OMe aig.

Tassy, Chapitre Inconnu du Coran, 8vo. stitched, oo) Wd

Shipping Expences, &c. ... aoe oo 6M

Be 8

May 18, Per Seringapatam.—J. E. Gray, Spicolegia Zoologica, part 1, royal

4to, stitched, Owe 6

Leach’s Zoological Miscellany, colored, 3 vols. Royal 8vo. cloth,

lettered, eral) ©)

G. R. Gray’ s List of the Genera of Birds with their Synonymes, 2nd

Edition, 8vo. cloth, Pe 0 @

Bibliotheque de M. Silvestre de Sacy, liv. 1, “8vo. stitched, and de

Delhi a Bombay, par Roberts, and paid Duty on ditto, ob O27 56

Journal Asiatique, January and February, and paid Duty on ditto, 0 1 0

Transactions of the Geological Society, vol. 6, part 2, 4to.stitched,. 0 0 0

Journal des Savants, February and March, ... ore One) 0

Report of the British Association for 1842, 8vo. bound, oo O Mw

Edinburgh Philosophical Journal, No. 68, ... ste On 0 70

Philosophical Magazine, April and May, 200 0) HON OM

Two Royal 8vo. Packets from the London Electrical Society, a a Ol

Saadi, par Garcin de Tassy, 8vo. stitched, ane soe 0) O00

Shipping Expences, &c. ... 510 -- 012 0

- 6 4 6G

Paid Subscription to Rafer’s Antiquitates Americanx, 1837, 4to.

bound, sent per ‘‘ Stag,” 23d December 1842,

Paid Subscription to Oriental Fund, for 1842 and 1843, two years,., ve

June 12, Sundries per Essex.—As per Invoice Stated,” acs seh

”

30, Sundry Postages to this date, one ave

Wm. H. ALLEN AND Co,

Sitcmmesvcne 1 OO

sesscscscee 24 0 0

sooccscone 415 0

ssecorceorse 2 3 10

ere

£4316 4

$28 Asiatic Society. [ No. 141.

And the following draft of reply to them was also read and approved of :—

Messrs. W. H. Auten anv Co., London.

Dear Srrs,—By the July mail, I have the pleasure to acknowledge the receipt of

your letters of the 17th and 30th June last, to the address of Mr. Piddington.

I note that the Marble Bust of the late James Prinsep, Esq. sent to you by Pro-

fessor Wilson, to be forwarded to the Society has been shipped per ship ‘‘ Essex ;’’

on the arrival of the vessel, the Bust will be landed per bill of lading you forward.

The several statements of accounts forwarded with your letter of the 30th June

last, have been found correct and in order; and although the Society is not disposed

at present to disturb the account current closed to the 30th June 1843, by a balance

against the Society of £13: 8:3; yet I am desired to say, that it is susceptible of

readjustment with reference to my letter of the 16th February,* as regards tbe cost

and charges of £18: 10: 0, for a copy of Arrowsmith’s Map of India, forwarded

by you per ship ‘‘ Persian,’’ which has been rejected by the Society as incomplete,

and in consequence useless for the purpose for which the Map was commissioned

from England. You have been already advised, that the Map has been made over

to Messrs. Thacker and Co., to be disposed of on your account.

The property in the Journal from No. 133, is now vested in the Society ; but you

will continue to keep its sale account separate as heretofore, furnishing as usual, your

Account Current distinct from that of the Society’s other transactions with you; my

interest, however ceases from No. 132, and you will therefore render up to that

number a separate account to me.

The sum of £32: 17: 0, being for sale proceeds of the Journal up to No. 128,

transferred to the Society’s general Account Current with you, has been adjusted

here at the exchange of 1s.11d. per Rupee in Co’s Rs. 342: 12: 6, the rate of ex-

change, London on Calcutta, ruling on the 30th June. _I am dear Sirs,

Your faithfully,

Asiatic Society’s Rooms, Calcutta, H. Torrens,

5th September, 1843. Vice President and Secy. As. Socy.

Read the following letter from the Secretary to the Bombay Branch

of the Royal Asiatic Society :—

o the Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.

S1r,—By desire of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, I beg to

enclose bill of lading of a case of Geological Specimens addressed to ‘‘ Curators

of the Museum of Economic Geology of India,’’ shipped on board the ‘‘ Fazal

Rubany,’’? Capt. Stewart. I shall forward a list of the Specimens, together with

such remarks as may be required, with the duplicate of the bill of lading. Freight

has been paid here. T have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Bombay, Asiatic Society’s Rooms, Joun G. Matcoxtmson,

5th August, 1843. Secretary B. B. R. A.S.

* Not yet dispatched with reference to this paragraph.

1843.] Asiatic Society. 829

The Curator stated that the box would be landed in the course of the

following day.

Read the following extract of a letter from Professor Wilson to the

Sub-Secretary, dated 5th May, and brought out by Dr. Sprenger, who

being present, was introduced to the Society by the Honorable the Pre-

sident :—

To H. Pippineton, Esa., Secretary, Asiatic Society.

Dear Srr,—I have requested Dr. Sprenger, who comes out in the Company’s

Medical Service, to take charge of the following Books for the Society :—

Sama Veda, Text.

Ditto, Translation.

Megha Duta, new edition.

Selections from the Mahabharata.

The two former I send on behalf of the Oriental Text Society, and the Orienta

Translation Fund Committee—the two last upon my own. Yours truly,

East India House, 5th May, 1843. H. H. WILson.

Read the following from Prince Ghaulam Mahommed, accompanying a

clay bust made by a native artist :—

E. Buytu, Ese. Curator, Asiatic Society, &c.

Sin,—I beg you will present to the Society, with my best respects, the accom-

panying Bust of their late President, the Honorable H. T. Prinsep, Esq. as a small

token of my esteem of the public worth of the individual whom it represents, and I

trust the Society will do me the honor of accepting it as the offering of their most

sincere well-wisher. I remain, Sir,

Russapuglah, 23rd August, 1843. Your obedient servant,

GHuUALAM MoHUMED, PRINCE.

Read the following letter from the Secretary to the Agricultural and

Horticultural Society of India :—

H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary, Asiatic Society.

Dear S1r,—As I believe, under the present system of publication, there is no

objection to an interchange of the Journal of the Asiatic Society with those of other

bodies, I beg on behalf of the Committee of Papers to state, that the Agricul-

tural Society will be happy to exchange Journals with your Society. The inter-

change can commence with the Journals of the respective Societies from the begin-

ning of the current year, should this proposal be acceded to.

I am, dear Sir,

Your’s faithfully,

Agricultural Society’s Room, James Hume,

Town Hall, August 17, 1843. Honorary Secretary.

5 Q

830 Asiatic Society. [No. 141.

The proposed exchange was agreed upon.

Read the following extract of a letter from Dr. Spilsbury to the Sub-

Secretary, relative to the Mammoth Head brought down by Lieutenant

Hickey :—

My pear Sir,-—I really have been quite horrified at the announcement in the

Journal, (No. 136, or 50 N. S.) received last night of the Head from your zealous con-

tributor. The history of that Head is as follows, and the Society at present have no

more right to it than I have. It was exhumed at Brimhan Ghat, by the late

Capt. M. Smith, then in charge of the Saugor district, (vide Journal, vol. viii.

for 1839, p. 951 and its foot note.) _ He carried it to Saugor where I saw it, and

where he gave it to me ; I then gave it to Cautley (for comparison, as I had sent a

very large one previously to the Society, ) and offered to convey it to Agra, which I

did, and here all trace was lost fora long time. I could get no answer about it from

Dr. Woodburn, the Garrison Surgeon, and it must have lain two years in his com-

pound, not at Kamptee as you state. When H. with his Corps went from Saugor

to Agra, I requested him to make enquiries, and let me know, which he did, stating,

that it was all safe in W’s. compound, of which I informed Cautley, who requested

me when opportunity offered to send it to Calcutta, care of Cantor and Co. When

H. was leaving Agra for Barrackpore, he asked me if he should take this Head

in his boat, and which I gladly availed myself. About thistime Cantor’s house fail-

ed, and there was therefore no use in sending it to them, and it remained with

H. pending Cautley’s hookum. I shall write to Cautley to-morrow, and see what

he says. I hope you duly received my remittance of 20th ultimo.

Benares, 15th August, 1843.

Read the following extract of Letter from Lieutenant Hutton :—

My DEAR S1R,—I have the pleasure to announce the dispatch per Banghy to your address, of a

small packet containing specimens for analysis of the wax or wax-like substance deposited on the

leaves of a tree growing above Rajpore, by the larve or ‘‘ Flata limbata,” an insect closely allied

to F. Nigricornis, a figure of which you will find in Donovan’s Insects of China. The specimens

of wax I should feel obliged by your analysing, and adding the results in a note to my remarks,

There are likewise two specimens of the perfect insect in a little box which can be added to the

Society’s Museum after inspection. Can you tell me whether the Society possess any specimens of

ores and minerals which they would exchange for any duplicates I may have of Minerals, &c. from

Afghanistan and parts of India? Also, whether they have any duplicate insects for exchange? All

of course in good condition. I wish much I could furnish you with the localities from which your

Himalayan collection sent down by me, was presented; but my memoranda were destroyed

during my absence in Afghanistan, and I cannot tell what you have received. Cculd you tell me

what you had received together with the numbering of the specimens, I might perhaps tell, from

my geological report and the aid of my own specimens, where yours are from.

I will in a day or two remit you the amount of my subscription, which is due for two or three

quarters, I fancy. Yours very truly,

J. Huron,

Mussooree, 23rd August, 184%. M.A.S.

1843.) Asiatic Society. 831

Read an application from L. Wray, Esq. requesting the Society’s patron-

age of a work now publishing by him, under the title of ‘‘ The Sugar

Planter’s Companion.” It was considered by most of the members that this

subject was so peculiarly within the province of the Agricultural Society’s

pursuits, that it might be better left wholly to that body.

Read the following letter from Captain Tickell to the Secretary :—

My DEAR ToRRENS,—I have the pleasure to send you a sketch of a curious kind of Tiger, made

from a skin obligingly lent me by Lieutenant Biddulph, one of the residents here. The sketch and

notes thereon I should wish to have published in the Journal, if they be thought worthy. And

when they are done with I beg they may be returned to me, for I have no copy by me for my

own collection. I hope this can be managed without trouble. S. R. TICKELL.

Darjeeling, 11th August, 1843.

P.S.—When opportunity offers, I wish you would express my apologies to Mr. Piddington for

my not having answered his note, about the skulls of the different tribes in my part of India. It

reached me but an hour or two before I started for Darjeeling, and what with sickness and travelling,

I have had no opportunity for replying to him. I doubt whether skulls could be procured in

Singbhoom, as they are there exceedingly jealous about their dead, and burn the bodies to ashes;

bones and all,

A Jithographic proof of the drawing, which had been already prepared

for the Journal, was exhibited, and as the work of a native artist, its ex-

treme fidelity was much admired.

Read the following extract of Letter from Dr. Campbell, Resident at

Darjeeling.

H. Prppineton, Ese. Secretary, Asiatic Society.

T have sent you by to-day’s Banghy, specimens* of the Rock Salt of Eastern Thibet, which is

brought here for sale by the Thibetans through the passes in the snowy range leading into Sikim.

I may forward a note of particulars regarding this article at some future time. When purified by

solution for recrystallisation, it is snowy white, and far superior for the table to the Indian salt.

The price here at present is 5 seers per rupee. Yours truly,

Darjeeling, Tih August, 1843. A. CAMPBELL.

Read the following Letter from Capt. Hannington, addressed to the Sub-

Secretary :—

H. Pippineton, Esa., Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

My pear Sir,—In the Journal of the Asiatic Society, No. 65, for May 1837,

there is anarticle by Mr. H. T. Prinsep, on the mortality among members of the

Civil Service. The table prepared by him, is from its extreme accuracy very valu-

able ; but it would be still more so if brought up to the present time according to the

method he has pointed out. Itis indeed probable, that the register has been kept

up, but I do not know by whom, or where to apply for information respecting it,

I therefore take the liberty to ask your aid in procuring it. I am prosecuting

some inquiries of this nature, and the results if worth any thing, would be much at

* No. 1. The red coloured salt.

», 2. The white crystals found in the former in the proportion of 5 per cent.

», 9%. Bits of minerals found in the salt.

832 Asiatic Society. LNo. 14}.

your service for publication in the Journal. Ifthe Table can be obtained, I would

put it into such form as would render it available for determining the expectation

of life, and the values of annuities.

Knowing your zeal in these matters, I need not apologize for the trouble I am

giving you. Yours very faithfully,

Purulia, 21st August, 1843. J. HANNINGTON.

The Sub-Secretary stated, that he had already addressed Mr. Charles

Prinsep, who had pointed out various sources of probable information ;

others were suggested by the meeting, and amongst them the Honorable

the President mentioned the information procured, and printed by a Com-

mittee of which Major Henderson was Secretary, and himself a member,

of which the object was to found a Life Assurance Society for the benefit

of the Civil Service, which had been printed in the Transactions.

Read the following Letter from B. H. Hodgson, Esq. Resident at Kath-

mandoo, accompanying a Catalogue of Nepal Birds, &c. :—

My DEAR S1R,—I hope you have before this got my six boxes of specimens sent by Steamer,

care of Messrs. Charrier and Co. Patna, also the tin box sent by Dak a few days ago.

The enclosed exhibits the whole arranged in the modern genera, and is by far the vastest Cata-

logue yet produced of Indian Birds. I wish Mr. Blyth to compare it with the specimens and then to

publish it; after which the whole of the specimens and catalogues are to besent home by my Agents,

Colvin and Co., addressed to B. Hodgson, Esq. Longport, Canterbury. I have corrected the

catalogue so far as I have time, and deem it sufficiently correct now to appear, but wish Mr. Blyth’s

prior revision. Yours very truly,

Nepal, 22nd August, 1843, B. H. Hopeson.

Read the following Letter and enclosed Reports from Capt. D. Williams,

Assistant Commissioner at Arracan :—

My DEAR S1r,—The Soogree, or Head Revenue Officer on the island of ‘‘ Reguing”’

or ‘Flat Island’? has just made a report, of which the enclosed is a translation, that

on the 26th, 27th, 28th and 29th of last month, a Volcano broke out in the sea a little

distance South of ‘False Island,’”’ and a new island was formed.

On reference toachart of Arracan, you will see that ‘‘ False Island’? is East of

‘*Flat Island,’’ and the latter is South of ‘‘ Round Island,’’ whence I obtained the

copper ore I lately sent to the Asiatic Society ; the group is situated on the S. E. shore

of the island of Chedooba. I consider the subject of sufficient interest to report on to the

Society, especially as regards its vicinity to the island where the copper ore was found.

Your’s truly,

Ramree, August 9, 1843. D. WILLIAMs.

P.S.—I have sent for specimens of the soil of the new formation.

Translation of a Report from Mungtee of Regwain.

Mungtee, an inhabitant of the Purgunnah of Regwain, represents that on the south

of the island of Joyghoy4-een, which is situated within his jurisdiction, there arose at a

1843.] Asiatic Society. 833

distance of about thirty bamboos a new island, where from the 19th to the 22d Wach-

loo,* of the Mughee year 1205, there appeared of a sudden a fire (supernatural fire.)

Considering this as a subject of importance, the petitioner brings the same to the notice

of Hozoor.

aie Kon s3

2 e a7 © ° e ae

is F aigas 3 Kio ame cde os Seals BAS ps ye,

toe A

e . = 4 eo °

phat pho [Ped xtw Som wyety bd Gao Crusis 6 Gail

e ° aa Ze 17} ry ae

Colyw) 5 ete cawls is! is? Las of xa J als us3 23 6

ured Lge yS sb} (no y gate S Sle carats yy of Lu

® Lyod «S3beo d3 als

in ° ° ; ° ‘a \ g os

oig® BAS 5s 2) y= Jarry Urld yra> J=S “ Kan y3

Tt was proposed and carried unanimously, that the Secretary be request-

ed to draw up for the approval of the Society, a representation to Go-

vernment, setting forth the great scientific and other advantages which

might be derived, were a qualified person deputed to examine and report

upon the singular and highly interesting phenomena adverted to in Capt.

Williams’ communication; inasmuch as some account of the Volcano

would be most eagerly looked for by the scientific world at home, and its

proximity to us would render neglect on the part of the Society most

inexcusable, and indeed disgraceful.

The Curator Museum Economic Geology and of the Geological and

Mineralogical Department, stated, that ill health for the last month had

prevented his drawing up his report; but he begged to read part of it,

being a report on a reference from Government relative to a newly dis-

covered Sulphur bed, at Kurachee in Scinde, as follows :—

No. 32 of 1843.

From Captain J. Prexrpy, Collector and Magistrate, Kurrachee, to Captain C. J.

Brown, Commissioner in Scinde, Hyderabad.

S1r,—I have the honor to report for your information, that [ have discovered an ap-

parently extensive bed or mine of Sulphur in the vicinity of Ghizree Bundur. My

* A certain Mughee month.

834 Asiatic Society. [ No. 14].

attention was first drawn to the spot by the native agent, Nao Mull, who pointed out to

me on the surface of the ground a considerable quantity of sulphureous matter, which

on fire being applied, immediately ignited. I have since had the upper surface of the

earth removed in one or two places, and have by this day’s post transmitted a small

specimen of the Sulphur found within about a foot of the surface. As the mine is

within two hundred yards of the Ghizree Creek, the Sulphur can be transported by

water at a very little expence, and should it prove as productive as I have reason to

expect, it will be a most valuable discovery. A great quantity of Nitre is apparent

on the surface of the ground near the Sulphur mine, and this also might be turned to

account. I have, &c.

Kurrachee Collector’s Office, (Signed) J. Preepy, Capt.

2st June, 1843. Colir. and Magt. Kurrachee.

(True Copy, )

(Signed) C. J. Brown,

Commissioner in Scinde.

To H. Torrens, Esa., Secretary, Asiatic Society.

Srr,—In reply to a reference to the Museum of Economic Geology from Mr. Secretary Thoma-

son, accompanying a small specimen of Sulphur sent from Kurachee, by Captain J. Preedy, I have

the honor to Report as follows: —

1. The specimen in question was unfortunately so very minute in quantity, that nothing but

approximate notions of the real value of the mineral can be formed. The whole weight did not

much exceed 20 grains, of which 10 grains were taken for experiment.

2, Heated in a porcelain capsule, the 10 grains left a residuum of 4 of a fine dark coloured

carbonaceous-looking ash.

3. It was not worth while to examine this small residuum, since if it contains any thing of value,

which is but barely probable, we shall better be able to ascertain it when we obtain larger supplies

of the mineral.

4, Approximately, then we may say, that the specimen contains about six-tenths, or 60 per cent.

of sulphur, probably of tolerable purity, though a larger quantity will be required to decide upon

this point, as alsoif the residuum contains any thing worth looking after. I solicit the attention of

Captain Preedy, to whom I presume a copy of this Report will be sent, to the following remarks

and suggestions.

5. I assume from his account that there is plenty of it, and thus do not advert to the quantity of

the mineral.

A. The question as to the value of sulphur, depends mainly on its purity. The common sul-

phurs, manufactured or produced from copper or iron pyrites, are all contaminated by impurities,

such as arsenic, selenium, and the like, which render them wholly useless in many branches of the

arts, and the high value of the pure Sicilian sulphur, about which it will be remembered we were

two years ago on the point of going to war, depends on its purity. The deposits from which these

are procured are like this which I suppose ours to be, 7. e. alluvial, and have no known and direct

connection with volcanic action.

B. Your beds or layer of sulphur may be some pure and some impure. We should be glad to

be furnished with at least half a pound of each sort as far as you can penetrate, with some of the

earthy matrix in which it lies. Specimens of the minerals (as gypsum, &c.) found with it, and spe-

eimens of the intervening beds, if there are any such. Also of the nitrous efflorescence on the sur-

face.

C, If you can also oblige us with accounts of the surrounding rocks or soil with specimens, it

will add much to the value of the information. In short, a good account of the sulphur field or

ground, with specimens, is a great desideratum.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 835

D. You may in the mean time establish a little sulphur manufactory with only a few common

earthenware pots and water spouts, as follows :—*

Prepare a common water jar by coating it over outside with a little wet mud, to which a small

quantity of lime and cow-dung has been added.

Set this jar sloping in an earthen furnace, with two earthen supports for it, the side to lean on

the front wall and the mouth to be outside, the fire to be putin at the back. Two inches of space

at most, should be left to allow the fire to play a little round the belly of the jar, but remember

that no great heat is required; all that is wanted is to distil over the sulphur at a gentle heat; a

strong heat will both burn it to waste, and by making it grey, lower its price. If your heat is well

managed, you will get pure, bright, sulphur-yellow produce. Fill it with the mineral broken to

lumps not exceeding the size of a walnut.

E. Over the top of the jar, put the head as shewn in the sketch which is only another earthen

pot with an earthenware water spout fixed into it, the end of which is also fixed into a smaller

jar in the bottom of which is a hole of about one inch in diameter. The spout should be supported

by a forked stick.

F, The jar is placed (supported by a bamboo frame,) over a tub of water; the whole of the

joints of the apparatus are to be kept tight by plastering mud and cow-dung, and winding a few

strips of coarse cloth or gunny smeared with it about them.

G. The whole arrangement is, it will be seen, nearly that of the native distillers; but the differ-~

ence when at work is, that the head and pipe are allowed to remain warm, the object being to sub-

lime over the sulphur in vapour from the jar and condense it, when it flows in a melted state

through the hole at the bottom: as very little heat is required, the fire place need not be more

than eight inches below the belly of the jar.

H. In the water a square wooden mould, of say six or eight inches cube, with sides tied together

may be placed. As the melted sulphur flows in, it will fill this and probably adhere, so as to form

a cubic block which is a highly favorable shape for stowage. It should be remarked, that the roll-

shaped sulphur is that of the common impure sulphurs, and this, if ours is pure, would spoil its sale

(say at home?) by giving it a bad look. Ifa mark of any kind be left zn relief on the bottom of the

mould-box, it will appear stamped on the block of sulphur, You may, if your sulphur runs freely,

receive it into an iron or earthen pan with handles, and pour it at once into the mould which

should be wetted.

Ineed not add in conclusion, that I have here described an apparatus of materials to be found

all over India, and as there are potters in every town, they can in a few days make you more con-

venient apparatus ; as for instance, a still-head with a pipe curving downwards. It is probable that

the people, seeing a valuable product obtained so easily by means so quickly within their reach, will

be happy to share the produce with Government, or rent the ground; but it should not be forgotten,

that after chemical purity, cleanliness is of first rate importance to the value of the drug. I shall

be happy to hear of the progress of the experiment, and by the way I may say, that there are even

simpler means of obtaining sulphur than this which I have given; but judging from the minute

sample sent, they would not give c/ean sulphur without care and management, so I do not trouble

your with them.

When you have succeeded in distilling sulphur well with one jar, you may make a double ap-

paratus, by having two on opposite sides over the same fire, and end by having five or six in a row,

as in Europe. Yours truly,

Museum, 22d August, 1843. H. PIDDINGTON.

* A sketch was sent with this Report, but as it only represents the common Sooree’s apparatus,

we have not thought it worth while to give a plate of it. —Eps.

Oriental Publications for Sale, at REDUCED prices, by the Asiatic Society.

Works. Rs. Former

Mahabharata, vol. ist. pages 831, vol. 2d, pages 868, vol. 3rd, pages 859, vol. 4th, Price.

pages 1007, royal 4to. eve rte oon tse ee 40 48

Large paper do. do. =o ac ee aes aca 50 61

Index to the 4 vols. of the Mahabharut ecinisleth He foc ees 6 § 0

Harriwansa, 5c3 pages, royal 4to. 5 i 6

Raja Tarangini, 440 pages, 4to. We bee Ae ae 5 > 20

Large paper, do. do. m5 cos ae ae eve tee 8. &€ 12

Naishada, 917 pages, 8vo. eat 6 § 6

Sausruta, Ist vo). 378 pages, 2d vol. 562 p pages, ab. of 8 8

Fatawé A/lemgiri, 1st vol. 763 pages, 2d vol. 759 pages, 3d vol. 565 pages, 4th vor:

759 pages, 5th vol. €97 pages, 6th vol. 667 pages, royal 4to. per vol. fee 8 10

Inadya, 2d vol. 690 pages, 3rd vol. 682 pages, 4th vol. 937 pages, 4to. fae 8 10

Khazanat ul Ilm, 694 pages, 4to. As “Bs an aes 8 10

Jawdme ul Ilm ul Riazi, 168 pages, with 17 sistas, 4to. eee aes 4 4

Anis ul Musharrahin, 541 pages, 4to. oh ox 5 5

Sharaya-ool-Islam, 631 pages, 4to. oo ee ce ove ose 8 15

Tibetan Grammar, 256 pages, 4to. see 8° 8

Tibetan Dictionary, 373 pages. 4to. oo0 oie cee 10 12

Asiatic Researches, per vol. ae aD “rt nc 10 12

Burnouf Memoire sur deux inscriptions Came tonnen 4to. 199 PP: y ler bs 3 0

Burnouf Commentaire sur le Yacna, with notes &c. 2 parts, pp 945.... nee oS Pe 0

s. As.

Burnouf et Lassen, Essai sur le Pali, ou Langue Sacrée de la presquile au de 1a

du Gange. Paris, 1826, pages 222, 8vo. oc oes cen 0 cO] AO

Elémens de la Grammaire pilin par M.M. Redieien et Remusat. Paris,

1825, pages 158, 8vo. cee “or 3 0

Ditto ditto Supplément. Paris, 1826, } pages 31, s76. coe eee ase

Contes Arabes, traduits par J. J. Marcel. Paris, 1835, avec notes, vol. I. pages

484, vol. II. pages 496, vol. III. pages 508, 8vo. sec ey SSW O

Brosset, Elémens de la Langue Georgienne. Paris 1837; pages 122, iv, son OL O

Klaproth, Vocabulaire et Grammaire de la Hie Georgienne. Paris, 1827, pages

232, Ist part, 8vo. ... ten Sec wan en i 0

Cronique Georgienne, traduite par M. Brosset, “Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 370, 8vo. a aa a oo eet)

Choix de Fables de Vartan, en Arménien et en Francais. Paris, 1825, pages 96,

8yvo. de Heo nee ce ooo oe seen aS

Elegie sur La Prise D’Edesse, en Arménien. Paris 1828, pages 112, 8vo. eo) eae)

Chrestomathie Chinoise—Chinese Characters, 1833, pages 183, 4to. ... eee COO

Meng-Tseu, texte Chinoise, pages 161, 8vo. ... hee ae oO

Meng-Tseu, traduction Latine, par S. Julien. Lutetiz Dasisisiela 1824, pages

593, 8vo. 250 “6 cot reatle AONE

Lassen, Institutiones Lingue Pracritice. Bonne ad Rani 1837, pages 167,

8vg. cee “ne see so ose Poe emit)

Lassen, Anthologia Sanscritica. Bonne, 1838, pages 371, 8vo. “o; oo, b O

Lassen, Gita Govinda, Sanscrit et Latine. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1836, pages 180,

4to. ie oe fe ree 4

Chezy, Vajnadatiapada o ou ts Mort D iudghadntae Text, Analysis ‘aa Transla-

tion. Paris, 1826, pages 142, 4to. S05 ee = eee OmeS

Chezy, La reconnaissance de Sacountala, Text and Translation. Patis) 1830,

pages 665, 4to. an D sae aa - 10 0

Geographie D’ Aboulféda, Texte Ae Paris, 1837- 40, pages 586, 4to. cerierraye

The Travels of Ibn Batuta, translated from the Arabic Manuscript, by S. Lea.

London 1829, 143 pages, 4to. ... asar>) OO

The Traveis of Macarius, translated by F.C. “Belfour, Lagan 1829, pt. I. 114

pages, 4to. “a0 dee ofc eae ssn) y i bree

Memoir of the Emperor Jehanguire, feataisted wom the Persian Manuscript, by

Major D. Price. London, 1829, 141 pages, 4to. one soem! g4 iO

History of the Afghans, translated from the Persian, by B. = part I. London,

1829, 184 pages, 4to. oer Oa eee

Han-Koong-Tsew, or the Sorrows Se Han, a ‘Chingse Tragedy, branilatee by J.

F. Davis. London, 1829, 28 pages, 4to. aioe hp ces eet eS

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Tables of Comparative Philology, shewing specimens of the affinity of

the Greek, Latin and English Languages, with the Sanskrit, Per-

sian, Russian, Gaelic, Welsh, Lithuanian, German, Hebren, and

Anglo-Saxon. By the Rev. James Lone.

The following Comparative Tables of the Indo-European languages

are the result of much labour and research during the last four years.

Having myself, when studying the German, Dutch, Italian, Spanish

and Portuguese languages, experienced the advantages accruing from

giving attention to the affiliation of languages as a guide to the ac-

quisition of them, I hope the same principle may be of use in facilitat-

ing among Europeans, a knowledge of the Sanskrit and Persian, and

also that natives of India might with greater ease familiarise them-

selves with the leading European languages. The Bengali and Hindi

tongues, as derived chiefly from the Sanskrit, must have a number

of words of common origin with the English, which is connected with

the Indo-Germanic languages. Steam is now increasing the intercourse

between nations very rapidly, and binding the whole human race

together as members of one great family, but the diversity of lan-

guages is a mighty antagonistic power. Those tables have been

compiled with the design of rendering philological studies more

interesting, as well as more scientific, and of smoothing the way to

an acquaintance with different languages so necessary in the present

day for religious, literary, and commercial purposes.

The rules I have laid down for my guidance in selecting words

for those Comparative Tables, are,

No. 142. New Serizs, No. 58. SR

838 Tables of Comparative Philology. [No. 142.

1. To insert no word except on the authority of standard Phi-

lological works, as ‘‘ Bopp’s Vergleichende Grammatik,” or Comparative

Grammar of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, Sclavonian, Go-

thic and German languages ; “ Eichhoff’s Parallele des langues de

l’Europe et de l’Inde;” ‘‘ Vans Kennedy’s Researches into the origin

and affinity of the principal languages of Europe and Asia;” ‘ Pri-

chard’s Eastern origin of the Celtic nations ;”

cations.

2. Those words are considered as cognate, which are similar, or

nearly similar in sound and meaning. Though sometimes the significa-

tions be not precisely the same, yet the difference is only such as

might arise from a natural connection of ideas. Thus ‘“ the Sanskrit

kuma, a lake, and Kupa, a wave ; stoma the head and oTopa, the

mouth ; dalam, an army, and bellum, war, are clearly identical terms.”

As no two nations ever had exactly the same alphabetical and gram-

matical systems, it is evident that words in passing from one into the

other, must have undergone some change in their consonants and vowels.

and many other publi-

Sir W. Jones himself, who was a very cautious Etymologist, has ob-

served: ‘‘ We know, a posterior¢, that both fitz and hijo, by the

nature of two several dialects, are derived from /ilius ; that uncle

comes from avus: and stranger from extra; that jour is deducible,

through the Italian, from dies ; and rossignol from luscinia.’ Ety-

mological studies have been fixed on a firm basis by the Germans, and

are conducted on ascertained principles. The great philological law

_by which modern Etymologists are guided, is, that no permutation of

letters is allowed arbitrarily, it must be sanctioned by the usage and

genius of the languages compared. Sir I. Newton, by applying the

principles of the inductive philosophy to the material world, disclosed

the arcana of nature’s laws. Cuvier acted on the same system in his

researches into Comparative Anatomy-; and Bopp has succeeded equally

well by grounding his rules for Comparative Philology on the broad basis

of groups of languages. Who would suppose at first sight, that stranger

is connected Etymologically with the Greek ek ; here is the inductive

process ; with &, && is cognate, then the Latin ex, extra, extraneus, the

old French estranger, modernFrench efranger, and English stranger.

The French eveque and English Bishop have not one letter the same,

yet they are both acknowledged to be derived from the Greek ewtoKo7roc.

1843.] Tables of Comparative Philology. 839

3. I allow in the tables of those languages being cognate which

have, in addition to an analogy in grammatical forms, a large number

of original words expressive of the most natural and simple ideas,

terms for family relations and the objects of visible nature, and verbal

roots of the most frequent occurrence. This excludes all those words

which commercial or literary intercourse might introduce.

4. Words, which in their primary signification denoted the properties

of objects of sense, are applied to express the analogous mental qualities.

Thus the words, a sanguinary man and a man of sanguine temper-

ament are both derived from sanguzs, blood. They are sometimes

restricted in meaning; thus vector in Latin signifies a ruler, but in

England it is limited to a clergyman of a certain official dignity, and

in Scotland to the head-master of a classical school. Corps in Latin,

signifies the body, the English words derived from it are—corpse, a

dead body ; corps—a body of soldiers ;—corporation, a municipal body.

We use vél/ain in the sense of a wicked person, formerly it meant only

a villager. j

The languages of which I have given specimens for comparison in

those tables belong to the Indo-European class, and have been spoken

in a range of country extending from the Indian Ocean to the Atlantic,

and from Ceylon to Iceland. The chief branches, are,

1. The Persian, denoted by (P); its primitive form was the Zend,

the sacred language of the Magi, adopted by Zoroaster, and spoken by

the ancient Persians ; the Pehlvi, a cognate tongue, was spoken by the

Medes and Parthians. Persian is incorporated very largely into Urdu.

2. The Hebrew, denoted by (H); the notion is now exploded that

this was the parent language. Its cognates are Arabic, denoted by

(A), Syriac, Chaldee and Phenician.

3. The German, denoted by (G) ; the Dutch bears a close affinity

with German.

4. The Gaelic, denoted by (Ga) ; it is cognate with the Erse or

Irish.

5. The Welsh, denoted by (W)

6. The Cymraig, denoted by (C); it is cognate with the Welsh,

Cornish, and Armoric, and belongs to the Celtic family.

7. The Russian, denoted by (R) ; it differs little from the Sclavo-

nic, which is the ecclesiastical language of Russia.

840 Tables of Comparative Philology. LNo. 142.

8. The Lithuanian, denoted by (Li); it is of Sclavonian origin,

and is still spoken in Courland and Lithuania. The ancient Prussian

is a dialect of it.

9. The Anglo-Saxon, denoted by (S) ; it was the ancient language

of England, and forms the basis of the English tongue.

10. The Latin, denoted by (L); the French, Spanish, Portuguese,

Italian, and part of the English language are derived from it.

ll. The French, denoted by (F); on account of its general spread,

language is mentioned here. :

12. The Gothic, denoted by (Go). This language was in constant

use for probably 1500 vears, as the tongue of the rude and widely

dispersed tribes that inhabited Thrace and Germany.

13. The Avabic denoted by (A); few words are inserted, as many

were the sameas the Persian.

14. The Greek, expressed by its own character.

15. The English known by being printed in Italics.

16. The Sanskrit.

No word is inserted in those tables which is not cognate with the

Sanskrit, which is used as the common centre for all ; hence many words,

which are cognate with the Sanskrit, but not with either the Latin,

Greek or English, are omitted. The field is wide, every year will

add to the discoveries and improvements made in the science of Com-

parative Philology. The old system of etymological investigation,

which limited the field of observation to one or two languages, is now

abandoned. The discovery of the Sanskrit language has quite altered

the mode and form of etymological researches. These tables collect

in alphabetical order, (so as to facilitate reference,) what is scattered

in many scarce and expensive works. I hope they may tend to

make philological studies an exercise of the reasoning powers, and not

a mere effort of memory. Comparative Philology might form a useful

branch of study in seminaries of learning. It serves to produce a

deep impression on the mind in favour of the great truth,—that man-

kind were originally one. ‘The figures appended to some words indi-

cate the number of words of similar origin in the same language; the

third column gives the meaning of the Sanskrit.

Calcutta, November 1, 1848.

84]

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

119 “A “OTT® “D “770 Sooyo “elle oy ‘ole "7

AIDAIOISULP

quabip

“IUVULOLP

ye e4g ‘Ype vy ‘alan

‘Asasay ‘apie ‘vy ‘olmmey "7 ‘yere “FT

‘/Qipnd ‘olpue “"T “NUIPeAr “77

‘nfam -v7 ‘oye *y

‘sose °4 ‘ILyzn ‘yy ‘seyzsyue ‘27 ‘osua -4y ‘snysnsue “7

"Teaue ‘oy “leu ‘g “lau °aD

‘aadjonue ‘un ‘ox “Ul 7

youduo ‘ureue ‘yy ‘snulue 7 ‘zXhua yy “eue ‘on

“auUaLISIUMO “"e *D “Ue ‘DH ‘SIUULO “7

"ayav “Ya0 **D “yoe °4D

"YRS “q

"eqo ‘y “opleq *4) ‘Teq “op “eqqe 77 “oquie 7

gpasay7a ‘LOY °T oyley +H “AKme “yf “areyye ‘wy

quabip “wun UasIe *'T

‘anudiy ‘a ‘Wey “zy ‘snuny 7 ‘nd 7 ‘oqy “7

‘snuse "7 ‘sXz0 v7

‘SALVNDOQ

‘ysnoue

‘ssourddey

OVI AA

‘uapies

‘Aylsotiadns

‘aye}

‘yeads 0}

*pUuIM SB MOG

‘1eou

‘UeUl

*‘qnoyyiA

‘yyRorq

400} 9y} UO

*19Y}990}

‘ured

“paoy

“yi0q

‘A¥S 0Y}

‘IOATIS

‘yuloue

“1800

‘asneo

‘ONINVS TA

% Wey

°L, eVysily

% unliy

“eulel,V

‘08 'UPV

‘LWA

‘SS pea

‘G9 PA

*G oyu

‘63 TWN

‘L1G UV

‘p uy

‘mepednuy

‘9 BUY

‘eV

‘ol

‘TT euqn

PI eys,V

‘OT wieley

LG GUT

‘ely

‘9 NOT

‘LIUMSNVG

‘OL 9XV

“989190u *So2L010 V7

‘1g aohdy

‘aauds ‘¢ Sonady

“GL PIRV

‘CHL Bay

‘0G “aay

‘SI OV

fe, XA

‘gy, duay

‘P Anza

‘Ig Sonsay

‘A0Q3 LDA

°G ony

‘TT o0oXy

‘TL “hy

6 odny

‘OF Cupry

‘eg sodakdy

‘OF Ob2YY

"9 3'V

“Cn 1417

‘“MATUD

Tables of Comparative Philology.

842

“eu “ay ‘auo ‘ue ‘x ‘UNE ‘DL “VU VT “Bue OL)

‘op “ay ‘489 ‘DY qe tay ‘pe x9) ‘pe “aT ‘pe a!

"YLO ‘Seam VT “YIM *) ‘sur |

‘0uvI7;00 *SNUI[NA “T

‘U1a}8 (9 “OUITe}s ‘0D “UINA\se "7 “BIPIIS “q

‘ataydsougy ‘Mayye “x “eUYye ‘0D

"yon *44 6m93 “Yooy “) ‘X28 “T nane 27 ‘oosne *T

‘Jae “44 “Ie “MO

"Ie ‘Ue yy ‘aia “ezlte ‘on

‘0 ‘wd “qo 'y ‘fo yne “9 “de 27 ‘qe 05 “48 “T

*MOle py

Ue “OD

*snyjueoe °7

‘SNYZSe 2/7

re ‘Dy ‘ajquéy “Iypre "py “WNAIe °T

‘SHLVNDOD

aLlAsSOLYD

‘qu Uns

‘0} 1e0U

‘0} 9AOUL

‘us

-yajdwioo “sneyxe

‘pauntojiod

‘ding 0}

“1eys

“pura

*9} 81905 U00

‘Tjeamun

‘Aulaua

‘yonul

‘qnoyiia “WOdJ

‘“sonbaa

‘asreid

‘UIOy} ®

‘“uoredsuedy

*[l08 af 1}4ay

‘punos

‘payoodsat

‘9A OUL

“ONINVS A

‘e150 V

nNUuy

‘ely

°° SeOV

‘g WeneYypes

“0% SBA

TIN

‘UBIE TY,

‘89 PUI VW

‘yn

‘eyIsnsy

‘ET HV

‘6G NAL)

‘pos edy

“YOR A

‘9 UN

‘BS yeruey

‘eytVy

‘e BIBVAI()

‘APL,V

G Bp, V

‘6E RSV

*‘LIUHSNVG

‘00x

‘Day

‘LadDaU SA0LLY7

‘autewa SSoky

“aaissaoxa SA0nigey

‘ajajdmod ‘sordy

“YJULOU Sn3V VY

‘LT sodsoy

“SL Wry

‘Gg A330

‘EG nBA399VY

‘oud y

“dy

‘OLY

‘m013V

‘Mary

Bg Wganry

‘Lip ukay

‘Qe pdaody

fe sogudy

“EE QV

‘LG M2017

“MAUD

843

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

‘uounjsnb ‘urezsni ‘yy ‘aysoy *4 ‘ojsns “7 “eisney °0H

1@1d *79 ‘aSlads “xO

‘uashxo ‘snzuab “euuls ‘oy ‘ousis “7

"SINGS “OD ‘IMB ff

"SIPUBIS °'7

‘hyduiboab ‘ao vx) ‘Ned xy) ‘IMeS “0D

‘oues “7 ‘1auad “7

Ysteq ‘V4 Smvog ‘ureq “ay

"hydv.sbog ‘mkq "yy “0g "VD suad

‘LOJQULOLO

“09 “uazjoq “Q ‘niltd 7 “oljed “7

‘°2PO

‘ayniabonua ‘ese "FT ‘osa1s °T

‘yeue "77 ‘aaXouue «7 ‘houup

‘yse DO Ssogvdn ‘oyor 4) “eye 0

‘Z19 *X) ‘YOAP

"YWae O44 “ye ‘MD ‘9770.00 ‘snsIn "T

‘SHLVNDOD

“pooj

“plo

“U.10q

‘aprid

‘a[qelouaa

‘yyaea ayy

“sny s,lojyonep

‘paeq |

‘0UBILUS

‘sulyeods

‘SULISIXO

‘AAtoy

‘UIT YStInoU

‘MOIU}

‘asteid

*4SLOUL

‘SULZIOS

*SSoi}SIp

‘10u0Y

I PRCOY

‘1eaq ®

‘ONINVA

‘9 sey

‘93 Bud

‘G6 uer

‘6 VAleg

NInyg

‘b1OD

“Lqyeuey

‘OL WPA

‘T ulMse A

"6E qeug

“eT Bread

‘Ol Hug

6 Ild

“PDI

‘ST BPAY

‘e eyeis VW

‘eXeuy

‘youe “eyoy

‘euly

“eysyry

“LIUMSNVG

*310903 |

‘0% amos J

°06G OMDAAZ F

‘[][ dodan 7

°GG Sad 7

“SP UT

‘Sodg|np 7

“08G molug

‘olkog

‘PL 201g

‘9g dodng

‘QT ‘poof ‘o1omdg

‘LOE YY

‘MEV

‘mody

‘moahy

‘QIQno.t, Snray

‘ovhy

aXdy

‘oosxdy

‘HRaUH

Tables of Comparative Philology.

344

‘IaAaIp ‘yf ‘SltgMap ‘v7 ‘Alae] “yf “Aeyjorq 8, pueqsny

“mag Suag “} “OH “IP ‘O

‘auop ‘Wop "ay ‘Wop "x ‘snulOp "7

POP PUe 'd

“1a} ‘Gg {10} ‘q ‘olyez *Q ‘Ade ‘oD ‘UAISI0p “14

“yong ‘ayoeZ “4 “ell[e} °OD)

yop“ “uNYIEy oH “Bap °9 “Yolep "wy ‘uYeZ *D

‘TaMZ “9 ‘TeMp ay ‘Mep ‘p “ep “BO “Lap VT ‘Teasy "0

nidqep 27 “NII “9 wap ‘avyg

‘sop "7 ‘ump v7 “Yslep “Vy “uspep ‘

ap ‘4 ‘T9p VT “DIP "PD “ep “A

‘naXp 27 ‘Waip “4 ‘areap *VH

9a} ‘aBlaZ “4 “VYle} ‘04 “sa00p “T ‘uas1eZ ‘4D

sauyez 9 ‘udp *9 ‘auInp ‘vy ‘owop "T

“UIOMP "4 6m910Q §00031039 ‘o1aMZ"H

elle} 0) ‘NAap Y ‘tU10} “CE ‘aI 9Z °4) ‘019} °'T ZOXOLER B

‘U9Z “ulead ‘Dy “uay ‘suenb ox) “euled °c: “eueZ “Y

‘onol -q ‘sepuez v7 “eued "7

-ansk ‘ounes ‘oy ‘owes "7

‘SULVNDOD

“peq

‘osnoy

‘ayes

‘teatod.1090

‘1¥0} ®

‘outq

‘ual

‘OMY

‘no

*QAls

‘aAOUL

‘aas

“sIquyxa

‘QuIe}

‘opralp

. {1804

‘O]SVAA

‘I9OU}OU

‘mel

‘punos

‘ONINVG JY

‘el@Aop ‘IAI

‘ost snd

‘uemeyd

‘OT unyq

‘6T Ulqed

‘¢ NISV

‘OL used

‘oe ueysed

‘931 Ma

“cs [8

“TUE pe(y

‘Wd

‘LE usd

‘OS YSIC

‘El wed

‘LI Wd

‘¢ Id

‘ue f

‘TT epueg

nud

*“LIDHSNVG

‘duny

‘saV

“BQ PMOY

‘ol 24077

‘OL Snn3y

‘Og ad vy

‘Gp Marvy

‘BE P-BY

‘ST ony

‘AMY31V7

POG ay

: ‘DIV

“9% mnloxd3y7

*69 ORY

‘PP anny

‘Qe M01VY]

‘key ‘mo3sy

‘ualyep ‘m3

‘uaa T

‘20pDA T

‘mo |

‘MATUL)

Tables of Comparative Philology. 845

1843.]

‘apounda ‘ule ‘Dp

"aso'T

*Y9eId ‘YH

489 “7 “4st 4) “48a ‘ay “eye ~My) “Se ‘gq ‘18a U7

‘astam “4 ‘yopim ‘ay ‘ouyire “wy ‘YpAm 44 ‘seplam 27

‘ope “7 “sa “OD “YW “VO “upa “27

WuLtay “plurere °g ‘Swdie 0 ‘1aUlle ‘ss

“SINI ‘DH “Udaalad *zy

‘tuAMap "27 ‘URI ‘0x) ‘OU ‘Vy ‘yeLmop ay ‘UNaU *y

"yles ‘yy “pues -yxy ‘upas “ay ‘Uaqals ‘4 “ey *g

420 "yy “IZsaZzs ‘VT ‘sos *4) ‘yseys ‘Gg ‘xas °'7

‘oD ‘un °¢ ‘uoe ‘MH ‘UIpO ‘ay ‘seuaam 27 ‘UID “D

“IA ef ‘we |

‘dip ‘vp “ni[qorp ‘y ‘uayen “sD ‘msuade

-anpua ‘onp "7

‘UlesUIp “27 “ayUuep “DO ‘mn3g

"{810p “J “eyez “D ‘snqisip “7

"Wey ‘J

‘yyyeriep 7 ‘ep “yy ‘miap yy ‘pens

‘Yqeip "DH ‘neiep 27

‘SHLVNOOD

‘astead

‘Op

‘Toya

‘auo[e

‘SI

‘MOU

te)

‘y1asap B

‘os

‘Oulu

‘WaAas

‘xis

“2u0

‘ured

‘9A0UI

9} 8] 1Paul

‘19SUY-a10J

‘ador

‘194189

‘a01} B

‘Aemeuni

‘ONINVS JT

‘g ‘eueg

"¢ YsoT

‘sele,ey

TIPLE

‘SV

‘60T BPIA

“TUpy

‘eXuely

6 Wr

‘UBABN

‘0g ueideg

“TT 4yseys

‘CCl PAH

‘dug

‘reAq

“{ Turysad

‘p vuled

‘Lg ewreyD

nig

‘nig

‘LIUMSNVG

‘oS ‘OAD LT

6 ‘AMOODY

7 ‘Sod210 NT

‘9 ‘0L90N n

*E9 110" =

‘G9 ‘Qn

°$S “OY

‘p[ ‘aonlodny

‘9g “unoXda

‘OL “D3Aaty

‘ET “DLL

‘PL “3H

0G "7

‘m.L3207

‘tajua ‘may

DaAkoy

‘SOYALIDYT

‘nrlo37

‘ond3sy

wc ‘Sady

‘90490 Sandy

‘MAGUYH

)

Tables of Comparative Philology.

846

“eryinem ‘05 ‘hbwaua ‘oasin "7 ‘10a “WTO “H)

"IOMS “44 “1Bay °VH)

ool “T

‘sisua “7

"qo “D ‘teqel on

‘Ye oy “AL 27 “YL oH “Wait “7

"hbojouhja ‘soiyja «0093

-5.3adsa 4

‘OhAQuUuey

“pis “9 ‘opla ‘g “eyyire *0x

"U0ISSAS ‘OIPas °T

‘hbojna ‘Ky ‘9

‘Iepes “oO “UINIUe °7

ajv..aajn ‘snon °F

"IN °4) ‘SWMPIO °27

“inal ‘27 ‘ao ‘Uasla xy) “Ysre ‘Ox)

“1989] J ‘DYSa| ay ‘semBug] 7 “WUPLe[ “OH “stay “7

‘tayn “7 ‘wopo.sazay

“IMG "DH ‘1B *Q ‘Ale "OH

*SHLVNDOO

“q10jJ9

‘asoyo

‘os

‘atpoael

ott

‘snyy

‘Aypeod

‘OyeMe

‘10dea

‘snyoy

‘TOOM

‘qyiea oy

“yvas

‘poos

“lei, U9

‘QUIeE

“yeois

‘ssassod

‘syst

*19Y10

‘<uioua

“eos

‘ONINVG JY

‘g eft.

‘OI eq

“UI

‘nyueys

‘T dv

‘G UI

‘69 uledyeg

‘OL Vises

‘g, edseA

‘p euniyg

*g Bud)

‘p Ba]

‘G cues, V

“cog Ng

‘pg euy

‘T PHIN

‘TIEaA

‘Ys, I

‘ey ysoysey

‘p eleyy

‘WV

“LIUMSNVS

‘aohdy

‘mvdy

‘Omiy

‘soXAuy

13.207

1457

EE |

‘mdaky

‘50032077

s ‘aonddny

‘pl ‘andy

6 ‘ody

‘66 “O20

°g ‘aq

‘OL ‘a0031aq

‘IL S907V"

*G Ssaday

‘SOG ‘aaXy

‘S0L01XvY'Y

‘6G ‘s00327

‘1m ‘day

"07

‘MagIy

847

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.)

smqyAy “9 “ayer “7 “elfop yy ‘2vap “apieuy "4D

‘atop “4soziap ‘ay 9sni2 “eseIp 27

‘Y JOp ‘yy ‘selemp 27 “ep -g “Inyi ‘4 ‘sni0op ‘vy

“skip ‘9 ‘IOMP ] “SeUUN YI} “27 “Uvyal ‘04 ‘pez ‘J

-wAp ‘ay Ydwuep “9 ‘snuiny “7 ‘30g “eulnp ‘27

‘auodp ‘auyoIp °4)

"a[oa1O-20UaS)

‘ndan “eloIne “7 ‘7sva “480 “9

‘ayaupos ‘ay ‘a2djuaaouaey ‘jos "7 ‘Ja -e7 “ney “yf

“uouayan | "a}SI0 “44 ‘Yprese “my

"9U10.L9Y

nef ‘9 ‘[eduvao ‘vy ‘ost ‘ay ‘yool -y ‘unsnl «7

“Ab60j00z ‘a0 Miz "ay ‘pez ‘gq ‘sem&s ‘27

‘id 27 ‘laq "4 “Iq ‘OD “Qo *T

‘S€LVNOOQ

TEA

“poplalp

*qSalY}

“UBAIOS

‘apid

‘100p

‘uadieys

‘a xOUIS

‘ayeys

‘punos

‘uid

sey

‘yearq-Aep

‘uns

‘SUTqIIS

‘O10

‘ato

“on

‘alojoq

‘ONINVG JT

‘Of PUL

‘GZ eed

‘TT Ystyy,

‘TT eseq

‘TT Bysiey

‘LZ eeMg

resin

‘EZ seunyd

‘or nud

‘e uelyqd

‘g WRITS

"g TWRS

‘GP Seys()

TPH

‘eyes, V

“eNYS

‘(nx

‘eate’

‘p idy

*LIUMSNVS

*p19AQ

ovVvg

‘5003G

°9 ‘SUG

‘op ‘oddng

‘6g ‘vdng

‘OL ‘mhug

‘Ssonag

‘M39

‘m3aludg

‘A0YH

Saoi fy

‘OOH

“pg “O1VH

‘OL ‘oiXaoyy

°Q ‘smd

‘sohaz

‘on7,

‘MaATIH

—e

ra)

Loed

Tables of Comparative Philology.

848

‘09 ‘oure[d "J “Somyow “al[ey "9

sao wy ‘ueiddlo ‘g “edsojos ‘ay ‘onb “7

‘ualyo “7 ‘Nd ‘wy ‘slued “7 ‘aueuva ‘UND “44

"$91.19JU8SD)

‘hydvsbyoy

‘anbuoo *7 ‘yauoa “eyouod *7

“IB[Y 4) 6409J9 “ave “YT So13sxDYow “OlB[D “7

uisel 27 ‘mX3 ‘raUS1a ‘Mayays “5

M10jS “YF “PRISE “dq “Uparslo “44 “pers “VN ‘018 “7

*aIUaINAW ‘SNALA “TJ

"p1uoy

‘at "9

‘SNOLOYIT

“ON3O

"eMOID "A IMI) 09

“peep ‘spep ‘0H

‘SHLVNDOQ

“19A00

‘punos 0}

‘pue

‘sop

un}

‘Ayipeoy

‘A4d ua

“119 ys

‘astedd

‘ramod

‘puvys

‘uostod

‘yaory

‘os

‘ar yutids

mite:

[18 OAT

Fe]

‘paads

‘sIseq

‘ONINVG J

TOM

‘0G I?

“eup

‘p.uemys

“WBITISB Sy

“pl BAleyy

‘T edunys

“9 eyyueys

‘14s

‘OL PILYS,T

“eqs

G “CYSIA

‘BUBAE

‘TI

6 WAN

‘g Pluey

‘ekeyq

ZI eed

‘61 ML

0g Mey

‘LIUMSNVG

“09 ‘onnlayny

‘OOT ™3yry

‘wy

‘IE ‘amay

‘o ‘a00311090y

‘pp “aoyny

Sad. ‘90a2 yy

‘er UXioy

oe vet

‘s0X oy

“OSs ‘muLoy

2 *Q SS0T

‘ampy

°ONYPT

‘doXy

301010

013 Yue

"OXYXPQ

‘Soda0g

‘m3Q

tc icereg]

849

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

Mays “yny ‘opeyos “aT|nNY *D

"ayeIy 4) ‘SMAIOD °'7

‘snydoo "7

"180 “DO

"azjely x) ‘OlONID “7 “ysn4d “UINII0d “7

“ULYOIY 277 “OYBIY °D ‘OW01D "7 *aL049

*OSOJDULOD ‘SLUL09 °'7

yahag

[feo “My “UaTyay “4 ‘0J99 “7 ‘SoarynX ‘staepo 7

‘SoyoX “3By “O ‘sey °O ‘opnejo “7

‘sneiey 27 ‘(lay °9

IDLY “a ‘Sepelo “7

‘aydoy “4 ‘uvad “ny “ndeo 7

‘MIBALYO “ey “aE “ ‘souurYoRo “7 ‘axyonyy

‘SHLVNDOD

‘pull

“q0oSUl

‘MOJO

‘ade

‘Sse

‘ain puad

‘apoqe

‘punom

‘dwep

‘panos

‘asodaa

‘Sutaamb

‘alla

‘oply

‘aso[oua

“OUIe]

‘19|Ssevul

“Jorge

“Tn ys

‘ysney

*‘Iaps0O

“ONINVAI

“g exreys

‘9 BI

‘e818 yy]

‘9g Ideyy

‘eley yy

“g weysy

‘gy uysy

G WYO

% PUM

‘ysniyy

‘ZT weYys

‘/ seyid ue yy

“‘elByoyoe yf

‘gg dny

‘OM

‘L [OUST

‘ee nang

‘¢ YSIS

‘SI eledey

Nyey

“TM

‘LIUMSNVG

*503YO¥

‘OY

‘gndoy

‘Soguy

Sovyiy

‘manny

£91912 9]

‘mdz yy

AORN

‘mond y

‘onlay

‘SoLunoy

‘SOND YY

‘Og ‘msuady

‘6G ‘OBYVY

‘BH Soyyoy

‘1G Ssoiday

"6S “OO

"pO yoda

‘OL ‘owXdny

‘LE ‘onay3yy

‘MagdUy

[ No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

850

‘arydv.iboyjT

Neslel 27 “NZd9] “ay “eylel ‘0H ‘oFal “7

‘ PYoo] *g “ayo, "BH “Yon|] ‘44 “eustoony “7

‘DD ‘YS “OD “pezel “gq ‘Nz, 27 “gol “A ‘osury °7

alueZly “ay “Yoru "aqyoneay *4) “yoo) ‘sont “7

"90D9) ‘OIQI| °F

“TINY “Y “oypel “O “eryel oD ‘1onboy 7

‘atUeny “ay ‘asnel Hy ‘yrel] “DO ‘nfay 27

"Plo “OD “olseel "7

“ANaNsd ‘stjapnio “7 “fanaa “7

‘TBABUIGO “7 J0ULDO ‘018d “7

*JO0LNHO

‘709 DQ) -mnynX

“LIJIDLDYI ‘mo ondnX

‘uuIN|[D ‘Vx “Yon Ts ay

“ninyoy ‘y ‘yoenb +4 ‘ulynezs *27

“Apautoy

‘apoha Svan “Teles °F

"NZsoy ‘yy ‘nessey ‘277

‘SHLVNDO)

‘poe

‘a1e}qo

“oulys

‘sol

‘998

‘aye

‘yeads

‘Ayonbiy

*qou

‘MOIIOS

‘anda

“ysop

*“qsoU

*9AIN9

‘ferd

‘piey

‘1e9q

‘Jalms

‘QAO

‘aqo|sa

4Iny

‘ONINVG I]

“L, eyysory

G ysery

‘9 Yo]

‘9 UT

§g yoo]

‘1S yqeT

‘g 07

‘GIT

% Yyn'y

‘OL epeu My

*‘p] PAN]

‘g eAatlyy

‘g ekeiny

‘g pny

S ILM

‘p Bley IV yy

‘8% NAYS

‘O] Yeousg

‘eUe ST

“0G BMSO SL

‘PF ysey

*LIUMSNVG

I091V

‘oXny

‘eT ‘s0aXay

Fe oXi3y7

“OL PV

‘LOL OV

‘ohay

‘PB may

‘OS duy

‘S0Quy

‘aod3ady

‘Sn3dy

sau ‘piyoy

‘S0Lay

‘o3yuy

‘aodnXdvy

eee:

‘maxmy

‘Sodomy

‘SOHAL

‘703 yy

‘MQLU)

851

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.5

alUeZSolUl “ay ‘pezime ‘gy ‘nssXwu *O ‘nezsteul ‘27

‘pion ‘MBUL *O S419}]NUI *4y “Alyy *-vy “lepeUul “J

"JayeUr “az | "uUDaUl

‘nuudw «9 ‘niuw *y ‘sum ‘27 ‘sunulwM “9

“TUL °D)

‘yeu “gy ‘snuoeul ‘27 ‘YONeUl y “TOU “My ‘IMVUT “44

‘apanus NOW “ay ‘opsoul °4y ‘dooleUl “7

‘SI2JDULAYIV IY

“sndoul "7

Srzan “yjnous ‘syyneul ‘045 ‘punut *4y

‘Oxc) [LOW ‘UIeMaleU “gy ‘a7ow ‘[eeu 4 “uUN]eU “7

“el [our]

‘agvIUISDUL ‘QoLonn

"YIN “oH ‘puzw ‘spunul ‘oy ‘sUdUI “7

‘vownl ‘apaus ‘ppaus “2D ‘ieul -g “Yieut “DH “Ypout “4

‘pau -y |

‘Sorusy ‘doj ‘nddny 27 ‘nrydny -y

‘SALVNDOQ

‘a[qejoodsar

‘XIU

‘19YIOUL

‘pulul

“0U

“Weald

‘suidp

‘ades @

‘jooyas

“Yst[ooy

‘90U811U9

‘AyI1p

‘asnoy yea1d

“peoy

“Aqa1p

‘p[eioure

*40a][9] UL

‘UOI} VOI X0}UL

*XOA

‘ONINVG JY

ehup yy

“GL easly

“ES WEIN

‘og seuryy

‘T PIN

“6ES UBYP INT

‘G Buel

“9G ltjue]Al

“eyye [Nl

“6 BYYAD IA

‘9g PUD

‘FG Ulle I

‘] ey eye

*T Byeyse yy

Bul] e IAT

‘T Byeyele yi

‘8 RIT

“8g NYpesy

‘day

‘02 dn]

“LIUMSNVG

whe 4110303 fA;

‘oL mKOITA

‘OP Jush yi,

‘PI 9043],

‘OT “IN

‘Co PARI

es maid pA

ete) JILAD TN

WAS Susp vi,

ro | aokdni

iE aoXayy,

‘96 “ON

‘aod vhs pj

°SL DIDLOV IN

‘o aodyny3 IN

“P aogdvdn Iq

‘OS DILUTAL

‘LT °6?IN

‘m3 LAY

‘ugjay

‘MAAN

852

‘oqou ‘yy “ejnqeu “7 ‘jaqau ‘y ‘yWRen Dy [MAU 4

‘tAmou “yy ‘neu -g ‘enu ‘vy ‘ypAmou ‘yy ‘snaou ‘7

ynou *7 ‘nau *y | ‘apewmou yz ‘humouo1sp

‘uayoeu *y ‘tAveu vy “eynNeU “7 ‘7vIIjNvYU ‘B\OU “OH

Neu ‘YJ ‘Jae ‘o |

“el10Ul “7

"esolul "277 “YoeUl “7 “4jaUl °4) ‘saul °0D

‘e10UI °27 ‘elolUl °27 Sndion! “UINAIQUIBUI °7

*[sAUL ‘ay “poows ‘sisi °e77 ‘YINU *O

*eLIOUL “J

“Sopgan “Nuaylul *2T

‘upigvbvus “SNdIseUl “7

“pla “Gg “prue “Zaul “ay “y1UI “) “YALU “Ox

‘hdowyjuosiyy

‘aynue ‘snyny °T

‘810}}9Ul “27 “eB IUI Ox)

"hjoyu na

‘ayou ‘ayoedl *-) S1OUIYOeU “7

‘ULBNOIS DD

"SHLVNIOD

“pnojo

‘Mou

‘ydaaa1d

‘diys

‘aan fat

[903

‘Ysep

‘suo

‘puejsispun

‘Suljuley

‘punos

‘moIsn[ap

‘avian

‘faud

‘ony

‘ainseoul

“J4Ip

‘Aplpensuas

‘QAOUL

‘SUIJULET

‘Joqwoulad

‘DNINVA

‘8G SeuqeN

‘ee CARN

‘Gp VulaN

‘1 nen

“Bul IAT

*G BILYO TA

‘PT esurinl

‘f WeUulleyy

‘Upa

‘aeqyon WW

“T UST

“GT PAPI

“TOMA

S USUI

‘6 DN

‘OT BUN

“LT Pte IN

‘eyorl

“YySoN

“INIA

‘eat

‘LIUMSNVG

“Go “V3G3N

99 903]

‘EG Sonloyy

“OP Samy

‘mad ni

‘Sodm yj

“DIDI

‘Sods ty

“S0QU TA

‘ovidnijy

‘mM 20NUTA

suBdvw

*023 [A

*M3.01]\y

‘main

‘a0d 1314

“93 °°?

‘Le OvIN

°g mhow

‘TI soda

*89 mnova yA,

‘MqgdUy

853

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

“ApwoH

‘ay ‘sytam OD “sNdta “7 ‘yor ° “n2yI0L0d fsiyn °2T

"SoM |

‘IMOIG ‘ay ‘nage ‘g ‘aneiq *9

h60109}80 ‘80 °'7

‘ameU “4H °UleU ‘gq ‘WUT’ “yy ‘nua °y ‘ouleU ‘0D

"s[0 0D ‘710 *D “IIe “alle “My “T10 “4

‘priv ‘SI[IUIIS "7 ‘auevs “yuUIes “45 ‘azpbojowmoy “eules ‘045

‘tA wes *27 | ‘guhpoup

ys -g ‘esa “gy Sm3yXano “e[srut 27

“oA ‘ay ‘UIAM °F SuNSO ‘a7 ‘0190 “7 “Yysey *_ ‘271498 "4D

*pyvo ‘DH ‘autas |

"“O1OYOS “4 ‘says “UdLILys 277

“PARS} “HT ‘S108 "V

*Splalany

‘nsou ‘y ‘odslau ‘zy ‘ema oD Sonu °7

*snind “7

“AUS “a7 “UINAIOU “7 “InUSs °4D

“NyZIU “gy “tapalu *D

‘sou ‘2 “pyoou ‘My ‘za0u a7 “QyoeU “xy ‘xou °7

*SHLVNIOD

‘SUTJIOUI

‘asnoy

“yuor1Ind

‘moiq-aXa

‘au0q

‘suIeU

‘Aqrureyeo

‘dAISUd} Xd

‘Te [LUIS

‘ured

‘pnoyo

“4yslo

*IOZBI

‘punom

*1910M

“pe]

‘M¥]-Ul-JajYonep

‘9AIOU

‘MO[9q

‘44 slU

*ONINVG JT

‘Ol PIL

‘€ B10

‘p 1UIL ()

‘8 niyg

“1G 1YsV

‘8 WEN

‘Th

“Wel V

‘WIeS

‘ABUIP VW

‘BE YS9TT

‘PS ULYSY

‘TT INYS¥

“GT 1USy

‘OT UN

‘6 AWN

‘esnug

‘eseug

“g TeYyDINT

“8G PUSIN,

*LIUNSNVG

‘0B 29xI"O

BLT 50"

‘og “do

‘BS °00d0

‘OT A03L90C)

‘ol pnoag

oO a0t1Cy

‘BT 40YO

Lhe2@

263 UAarg

‘e uyXig

‘OL 7290

rae ‘oda

‘eT ‘Sop

‘Soduyy

*110.233 AT

‘S0any

‘aoda3yy

50.1013 \]

*34N

‘MAIGUH

[ No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

854

‘wajsof ‘nzed “xy ‘assey °4 ‘saded “7

‘nand v7 ‘aunf ‘aryey “9 ‘olted --7

‘M3102 ‘unsued “7

-lopay yy “eond ‘ay ‘wayzvaf “euued 7

‘atuazoed ay ‘ayoeq *4 ‘pezed *q

niearld “a7 ‘Oael “7

auf ‘ornq “7 ‘peznsye *g

‘alOf ‘I0A “4 ‘ead “7

‘syodo.uaut ‘Sokdaw ‘afteq v9 ‘sifid 27 “ysing “9

‘sniid 7 ‘I0A ‘4 “eid ‘27 “eaney 09

“mM ‘fued ‘gq Jang *9 ‘veld -y ‘tyued ‘27 Jury ‘0p

‘duind |

“po0rlad

‘saujdg

"OULIN "7 ‘uod3

"Ie “FT ‘70jU91.L0 ‘S0gdo ‘10110 “7

“ZOZSOM “UT “UeSIM 0D “UOSoOM 79)

“JOQUIL “7

"SHLVNDOD

‘9s00U

‘IQAO 109

‘SSOUISTIG

‘pasula

‘ayeq

‘gg1001qns

‘ung

‘a10Joq

‘Ky10

a10Jaq

‘OA

Fe3]

‘1OJUL

‘peor

‘aye[ndoo

‘asvol0ul

‘90s

‘aryutads

‘yoeoidde

‘90ue1sqns

‘TO]eM

"*DNINVG INT

*g] “eysed

“ele

‘Q] “eueg

‘pp ‘ULneg

‘eI ‘eyoeg

‘Avid

‘g “ysnid

‘Le ‘seing

‘ey ‘eindg

“LS6 “ed

‘OO| ‘ueyoueg

‘pp ‘eljed

‘p “ovey,N

‘g ‘UeMUpy

‘YqeA

‘UPA

‘7 “nYsyT

‘PL USItA

‘og ‘nse A

‘BI ‘seyquiy

‘LIUMSNVG

P10 Seek

“99 ‘mn03 TT

‘POT 2908

‘GO ‘A003LT]

*), ‘99377

*8Q ‘Mnoy TT

‘Og ‘oguo Ty

‘¢ ‘sodnTy]

ies *‘AIYOT]

‘odT]

‘0G *32a37]

‘A0Y 0237]

= 01310

“409

‘M3619

*M391Q

“nn0099

‘SodO

‘odo

*D19NGQ

‘Ssodglg

"MGGUD

859

Tables of Comparative Philology.

‘Bury ‘ ‘osued ‘snjisod “7 ‘nezsed ‘27

‘nzond ‘ay ‘sinsuld *7

-‘nddod “eqqe -Fy ‘sndded °7

‘ulyneld 27 ‘ony °7

‘nized ‘ay Stoney “4D ‘oing “7

‘eid ‘ay ‘oad +7 ‘aed a7 ‘a1ey ‘on

snyy 7 Jvof uayny "4 “e[ny oy ‘snqnd “7

‘tAniod *s7 ‘snuistad 7 ‘seutsd °27

"ILE "4 ‘oad ‘27y ‘aney oy) ‘oid “7

‘lad say ‘aad -7 “avez oy ‘tid 77

raijid “gy ‘oqiq ‘ojod *7

nieped ‘37 ‘m1372

‘anbobopod

‘ped -44 ‘oof ‘ssnj ‘4 ‘snjoj ‘0 ‘seped 27

hfiMad

*SIUILe} ‘OD

‘snpojold 27 “puns 5 “emyyelyy ‘09

‘SaLVNDO’)

‘pulq

‘\eo1s

‘101001010

‘WIIMS

‘ung

‘suissedans

“qindy

“4ST

“Te

‘punod

“yulp

‘YsLinou

‘MOlONAySUL

‘9A0UL

‘jad

‘yor

‘1oluedns

‘reok 4SR{

‘Suisvald

“yey

‘ONINVAIA

% “Used

‘GQ ‘sesnyeg

‘ndeg

‘Uld

G “YSnig

‘O61 “Bed

“eud

*g “eureyjerd

"GGG ‘Hed

‘ST Wd

‘OGE “Med

‘ed

qed

‘ed

‘OT ‘eysoped yy

bE “eped

‘6G “SXPIPUE

“1BjSBld

‘ueypeld

*T ‘naeg

‘euuesel

‘g “eur

*LIUMSNVG

‘moouyy

‘saXvyTy

‘SOLU TT

‘90T "LI

‘vdvTy

‘I0YOTT

‘S01LM0T]

‘SodTT

“SIL 92417

“03Ty

“COL LT

rem | MOODLDTT

“OL OPT]

- LZ. M0301 TJ

‘O6T S97]

‘¢ PYYPL

‘OL nod 1277

‘L Siansad yy

‘Cc 190037]

“LT Sandy]

*aoryy

“MaAGUY)

Tables of Comparative Philology. [No. 142.

856

ANS ‘27 “VLANs °

“aUWIT}S “1D

‘wey ‘g ‘[NUIS 7 “os “ay “JuUIUIeS *4 ‘OS “Mx ‘nS ‘27

“1181S °C) ‘sBlojs ‘27

OD ‘mon3 ‘salias "7

"quanvny

“L0bis ‘ayoal *D) “oastt "7

NMaL “yy

‘gyna x) “eidor ony

Nepal 27 ‘Wiel 4

“ZO °ay “OlSOd “7 “‘asslal “x ‘sezat ‘2/7

nzoki yy ‘ayosnel*) ‘eryni ‘oy ‘oisni 7

‘1OJOYA °F SOP ‘ay ‘Taupad - ‘Olyslad “9 “elpor -oxy

“Mad °F SSood ‘Uns ‘suNI ‘ON ‘ons “7

"LIUhQSIL

‘B1n0q ‘J ‘Sq ‘Q ‘s8ineq -0g “Bang “H

"nIpq -y *

npunq 27 ‘ond -7

‘niujod ‘ay ‘oajd «7 ‘yynf {joa *D “el[ny ‘og

"20d

‘IIUIDL

‘spletq “0D ‘sod v7 ‘ayterq “9

"oldod *7 “e1Irey ‘0

‘SHLVNDOD

‘asieid

“YT

“ULIY

‘ureyo

‘OAOUL

“Ieay

‘punos

‘ysijduo0e

‘gyeredas

‘punos

‘yooads

‘aAOUl

Jeryo

‘UMO}

‘ad pay Mouy

“‘Weols

‘9AOUL

‘yono}

‘apie

‘ONINVG JY

‘T “eulojg

‘Ogg ‘uleg

‘ES “BILIS

‘Niag

G ‘leus

*T “Qyly

2a ‘ACY

‘8 “Upeu

‘OT ‘USIY

‘9 “esey

‘g ‘eueypey

‘e TY

‘nuqelg

Gl TUN

‘ypng

TI ‘Ted

“06 ‘led

‘Pp Yplag

‘9 ‘nyiuig

GS “AN

‘LIUMSNVG

‘QOT mrozg

‘aay

‘OT 503032 -

‘BE vow,

‘maaynz

“Sokig

‘S0ecfiog

‘3g

“6 moolkg

90910 q

‘Og Jot

‘LET Vwedep ‘mag

‘Sago3d Ty

‘soddaqy

‘ampaty

‘aYoly

a3 YL

‘moondTy]

“DIZLDV IT]

‘mdoyy

“MaMa Y)

Tables of Comparative Philology. 857

1843.)

“7 “Miynely ‘27 ‘bouwp ‘oder yy “eiseayy ‘0 “oyely “7

“ules0.1) | NSBll} ‘a ‘00119} °7

MBUBIP ‘DO

"QJIOIA “4D ‘SVWIOMIOY ‘27 ‘141494029 ‘ay

“Slat “OD “eIp ") ‘WIV “Wi ‘sAI} 27

-auaydsoujzo ‘areyds ‘c) “teydis ‘g

‘niednys ay ‘dogs ‘aydoys 4 Sodus “7 ‘ajdoys “4D

‘ouseys “7 ‘Nidays ‘277 “yous ‘axo0}8 °)

‘700)8 “TYNIS “H [IS "y “0S “DH ‘uylso “TENS “H

‘azyids. ‘9

uizpneds ‘27 ‘ossids -7

‘anes 27 “[NeY °O ‘snidls 7 ‘ouuUos “4H

"978 YS “4 ‘snpeys ‘oH ‘uals -y ‘yekes “7

“nots ‘ay ‘nfas -27 ‘aos ‘aes “xy ‘elres og

"aaday

“ayauardy

"SULVNDOD

‘QAO UL

‘Iea]

‘goe|d

‘Ino

a1}

art

‘AS

gus

‘19.00

“UOsOq

‘punois way

“pulq

‘aSBatOUl

‘uns

‘apeys

‘os

‘qoryy

“pexg

‘diystoan

‘Arepunoq

‘usajds

‘ONINVS JA

‘T ‘sery,

EG ‘sel y,

‘Or ‘PU

‘Og ‘anrey

‘OOT ML

‘7 ‘edueing

‘Lg ‘TeMg

‘OT ‘eyqueig

‘Ol ‘seg

‘eT “UeIg

‘eeyyg

‘9 ‘ysedg

‘Avydg

‘eAINg

‘0g “eAeyyO

: ae

‘TT ‘reydg

G ‘elIqeyyig

BI “Aag

‘TI “ewig

*T ‘ueyllg

*LIUMSNVG

‘BLT O%Xd

‘Lg ‘ooondo 7,

“1/4917,

‘5300123 7

‘nid 7

‘Shnduz

‘vdinbz

OT QLED IC

‘hare

aorausye

‘D0VOLS

‘oh hide

‘OD Ue

‘S010 13

‘CP DIM

‘Mazz

‘1 odmuzg

‘OP aod ncjiae

‘oe oopz

bags Bul

PLINER

“Maas

{ No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

858

‘eipAm °a7 Yaa ‘npuem 27 ‘oye ‘oy ‘epun “7

‘eIpn ‘27 ‘19930 - ‘unpn “7

"UID.Lp ‘UYI0I “4 ‘08194 “7

“onp “)

‘guuady “9 ‘nay ‘yy {0Lkd2 ‘ggsauip «x “0101 "7

“ON3L Ceryney ‘OD ‘UIsNIT *4D

‘ade} “yy ‘nredo} -a7 ‘dng ‘ajdey °x

"Yley} ‘oH ‘surety *7 ‘o10} 7

‘1093 Mx) SUKAIIy *4f

"epso} cay ‘uay? “epey ‘27 ‘uuep *D ‘wny “7

"8Z0080} ‘Y “ply “D “Yen, ‘wH “epniyi “oy

“SNpl[Os “7 “[alZ “1D “fala ay “sejazo “27

NZs9} ‘yy ‘UINUSI} “7 ‘nezsey 27 ‘ayoIe} “DN

‘pua] auyap ‘4 ‘opus °T

“elyne} ‘05 ‘osnezZ “oO

nyesdiey *2’7

‘81°27 ‘401 ‘ay ‘Uap “4 ‘euey} ‘04

"wedo} “Dy ‘NYy9} ‘ay ‘NY} “27

‘SALVNDOD

‘IOJUM

“JOM

‘ssvld

‘Aap

‘osuadoul

*qno

‘sutidsyjo

“nq

‘gadasoid

‘aan fat

‘ssoloe ssed

“QTUT]

‘ust

* ayyour

‘a3a,du090

‘Joyuedieo

‘pua}xo

‘Sutadsyjo

‘Suisvald

“WI

‘9A0Ul

*ONINVG [AT

“ep ‘epn

- e10

“pg “CULLy,

“Uyeryd

‘9 “ednuq

mig qn,

@ ‘fay,

ny,

‘g “PL,

% ‘dny,

BENE

‘UVUlIe f,

‘p “ewe y,

‘Bel

SG IBL

‘p ‘ueysyey,

‘TL ‘Wey,

% ‘ny,

‘p ‘euediey,

‘UR J,

‘BL

*LIUMSNVG

“69 Imgx

“el a013

‘S0aX 037

‘m3ahad 7,

‘Sobay,

‘1900 7,

‘soXayz.

‘o3du

SMLUAT

‘M303 7,

‘pn03 7,

3207,

Up2ry,

MOTERER §

“QP AOLN3 TF,

‘603 0023],

‘OoL ION0T,

‘Gl ox03y

‘10 T,

‘oXvy,

‘MaATUO

859

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

*el[UleZ “ay Sawalz ‘27 ‘snuny “7

‘4ajsah “U194895 *) ‘8I\SIS ‘OH ‘oy °-T

"AhIUDUMOLIBYD SA01D “DH “ALY “VT

S08) “4 ‘sunday 7 ‘snzetid ‘ay ‘puastarsy °4) ‘oastay “7

“hydouuopya ‘moonynd

‘nq ‘vy ‘nemdq ‘ay ‘suoj 7 ‘ag “eneq ‘oy

. —huoydna ‘outa "9

-wbnydodowyIuv ‘sisey T

“uleyst[ “gy NSZIq “v7 “ozZ11[q ‘9 “oIsey “TT

‘Sodermmd “elj0q “0 ‘OaAa0y "7

‘niog ‘ay ‘neliq 27 ‘ooaed *7

-40vdadns ‘tedn ‘on ‘aodns “7

“seyyn “27

*sndo} Xo "T

-auabhyy

"qooy *) petpetfon "4

“Siar “Snyes “7 “Nols ay ‘snuns 27

-qau ‘sndo “7

‘ed -y ‘dn ‘ed ‘a7 ‘qo°) Jn ‘oH ‘qns -7

‘SHLVNDOD

“yj1e9

‘Yj1e9

‘KepaaysaAk

‘puey

‘yored

“4991010

‘aq

‘punos

48a

‘ding

‘OuLYs

‘I0119}

‘aa0qe

‘rolaedns

‘y}oU014S

‘ysty

‘YAOJ SuLIq

SQABOM

‘Y}eoueq

‘ONINV IA

‘L, “uoysy

‘eg “rwiyg

“| ‘sed

‘pL “ele yy

‘7 ‘fseryg

‘[ed

‘L612

‘GT ‘ueA

‘6l ‘esoug

% ‘USN d

‘PG “CU

‘gg “euysiyg

‘g ‘edQ

“rT “ysyn

‘99 “ere

‘e fo

‘og ‘steyeyoyo

‘ysng

‘g ‘dea

‘ost ‘eda

‘LIUMSNVS

“PL 4 9X

‘y, mn Dy

‘p 930X

‘OST 9? X

‘mooid

Sm2V1D

‘ua

“LSL “4m

SIL MAD

09 °2X0

“09 OV

“Pg 90m

Sd3sny

‘sodA X

‘300310 X

‘mark x

OPS

‘307

*8g mb

‘ou

"MAGUL

[ No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

860

0D Yn “7

"10100 °'T

‘apo ‘apo °T

"snd ‘a7 ‘sisez ‘27 ‘sues *4) ‘1asue °T

‘BUUIZ “ay “BUIOIZ “27

*SHLVNDO9

‘se

‘yomnb

‘asivid

MBI

“Tnyyinajun

‘yonoy

“aso03

‘stp

‘Soy

‘ay yutids

«qnyAof

poo

“4tq 9, pIiq

“ONINVG I

qex

‘nys,V

‘PI

‘eu, V

‘epeydy

‘seq

“esue ry

‘L “uey yy

*] “Bary

‘TS “HYD

*Q ‘seysli py

Le “eu

% “euleyy

“LIUMSNVE

975

*IANZS

“UO7Zy

‘aon7y

‘aonly375

‘9G On

Auy

‘many

‘Sodioyy

‘ody

‘Sordny

‘ni3sy

‘OP AONYD EX

‘HaaUy

Tables of Comparative Philology. 861

1843.]

“O1IN ‘ay ‘SBIZSNY ‘27

"qe ‘q ‘stuure "7 ‘ama “g “eddn 27 ‘emye ‘oy

"a0dLap ‘S0Lay

2S Smssv “Ye "9 Ye ‘0D

0 wD ‘qo-y ‘de eT ‘fo ‘qu Je 0p

Uap

*pisao ‘aisre 7 ‘3030

"an "yy 651X3 ‘sidue ‘a7 “yun “OD

‘a19QUA ‘sIanI "7 ‘ndaodn

"OULD “BATNA °T

ZKMB “44 “UPYQE “HT ‘Ajeptav ‘emo

‘700lQV

“s3zdp 7Stz4o “41e “xD

"qo ‘yy ‘me *y ‘Ide 27 ‘wn °9 ‘adr

‘jue “7 ‘hpnbyuv *sor2an

‘Jonuun “Yeueys "FT ‘soaq

Tey? “A ‘ey 'D Suyan “yoy

“auX ‘sisez eT ‘sues “9

— yonua quabo ‘mkv

80 "YT “amg ajxD ‘sizse “UT ‘asyoe “4

‘911480 "YT Sun ‘aa0e 77 “YOM “dD ‘aya “KE ‘sye ‘on

“aeqqey | ‘BIma “OD ‘Nd *Z ‘sl’ ‘VD Samin ‘sey "T

"g ‘peyde ‘77 ‘peqed 'g ‘aide y ‘Siagdho “‘siyey ‘0p

‘SHLVNDOD

‘UMep

‘19]OM

“OL yA

‘oy yovordde

‘a} eredas

“Ystinouw

‘dieys

‘oyeus

‘purl apist9y

‘quIOM

‘UOLJIOTJV 9}10X9

‘payoroidaa

‘asneo

‘9A0Ul

‘peap

‘reak

‘asnoy

“98005

‘9A0UL

‘Joo4M

‘as po

‘ase

‘opraoid

‘ONINVG J

‘BP ‘seysl)

‘yed,V

‘Pg “eleyuy

“VY

‘ede

‘OI ‘T?d

‘¢ Seleyy

“e5PN

*eIOMI()

“eal (]

QIsBaYy

‘6g “ey

“0% “WY

‘T Sesequy

‘euvhery

‘ekel,V

‘g] ‘esuepy

‘ty

G “VYySyV

‘CIS

6 niVv

‘OT ‘houdy

‘LIUMSNVG

“eloIny

‘enby

‘unIyUy

‘PV

‘QV

‘OV

‘IV

‘siInsuy

‘SNALY

‘SnA[V

‘OOAY

‘snpolqy

‘sly

‘orquiy

‘snnbuuy

‘snuuy

‘eny

‘asuy

‘OsV

‘SIXV

‘Moly

‘UUNA)

‘gueidyv

‘NILV'T

[No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

862

OYoy WN wWyloyoay “eayey 27 ‘aoyo “TRY “O

‘wpoy ‘soa “seyi[Ay a7 ‘uespny sy “gryaw “YoTey “9D

"uawINde ‘4) ‘seleyney ‘27

“ualq “ff “pfauag ‘ousq “7

*uavwacy

sagiquie “1yd “FT Soi

“S0\320) Quasabiyag ‘sorl3you

sulle ‘9 ‘Mura ‘seue 27 ‘seuel 1D Ssoyyn

“juelie 44 ‘ypisare ‘VD ‘sodakdn

*soUlIe * “pautto

auele “7 ‘oale "7 “UOIeYD “FT

"u9Z0 "FT

‘wey “qd ‘ajquiwmp “peuleyo ‘FT ‘Sod3n

-pddan “eysshul “7 ‘reur “7

‘Sovdds ‘silo 27

2an ‘Ye MDH 4V ‘vy “ue -D ‘pue on

"Yone *D ‘te “*D ‘syoe "VH ‘MBYYNE OD “32k

40194909 ‘m@3ydp ‘mhon3

‘eke py ‘seg ‘Uledie «7 ‘Uasla *Q ‘zIe “on

‘ALDIAD “Upe "Dd *50130

‘Aqenba ‘50m

"SHLVNDO)

‘punowl &

—famorqun

‘do}

‘snonqitA

‘“punos

‘yulip

‘AWG

‘1dYO OY

*IOATIS

‘Inoue

“snp

‘ied

‘anouoy

‘ssouanos

‘Ue

*I9A0

“os[®

‘uaad0s

COR

“paq

‘Aju

*ONINVG [AT

‘en y

‘g “Bexley

‘ol “eUAtYS

‘ee ‘sekundg

‘g “eyyng

‘LG “Weald

‘mele A

‘sekuy

‘eyeley

‘, “UeUIVg

°% “Nuey

‘O} ‘eysuy

a | ‘Wy

‘6 “RIV

[OOM BUI)

GIT ‘UV

6 ‘BN

“Yory

‘sefy

1,V

‘eANLY

‘LIUMSNVG

‘SI[[0D

“xIeD

‘usuINndeD

‘snuog

‘unUuloong

“qt

‘cn | [eq

‘snITV

‘unjuesiy

‘SULLY

‘eualy

‘esuy

‘ouly

‘shiveuly

‘SOLly

‘ayUy

any

‘OvlY

‘SD

‘SIAY

‘snnbap

‘NILWT

Tables of Comparative Philology. 863

1843.]

“uMonasvfajws ‘pneyo 7 Sm3ylin “eilZs 27

‘gue “yy “eWO[OS «ay SwUTeY °4y “snuI[Nd 7

‘auvdd *9 ‘BUlays ox) aypury ‘oulayas ‘4

*X10d0 “J ‘sS010 ‘a01dm?

"9]99 “SlRy °"H $o13yx

"as1IIIUOD “YF ‘a7n.LaILVIUL ‘0901900 “7

‘soo 77 ‘xnanb «7

‘snourbyvo ‘sayXv

yoquiha ‘wnyy *7 ‘Sogn

"pes ‘q ‘sejWlozs ‘27 “jlopuny “4 ‘048-37 “pelo'vy S‘aorny3

‘ayvaxa §m3X Smnk

"Tend “7 odnt2 ‘Suelay ‘FT

‘sndoio ‘7

‘smd X ‘yIOH ‘4 “Y.L00

“Maun “aypvas ‘snpneys 27 ‘iapeyos *4)

UusioX “esVy 27

uRles “Gg “JuUeyO “7 ‘nue “44 ‘UIeUed “Vy

*[elUOWatI0 -7F “BIUOUIII®O °T7

‘19Yo “J SsizidwX ‘snyeas "7 ‘reo *Q ‘selad 27

"9489[90 “J ‘702789]99 *aov10m

"mele “FY ‘shulysapuelo “7

"saytyouos “gy ‘yauo2 ‘uXLow

‘oqlley | "semoiy 27 ‘uIeIy 4° “end “7 ‘m3dy

‘on ‘SIpalzs “27 ‘[eIpiod ‘medn» “Z1ay “gg ‘ay porso ‘wy

‘SHLVNDO)

‘oUey

‘pool

“ULB

ured

‘apoqe

“tel

‘yood

‘Ayroedd

‘ref 107@a

‘pai puny

*409] [00

Jooy

*‘sys1U

“yteq

‘punoa

*ALey

‘suls

‘d01}e}UBOUI

*‘yUa[[I0X9

‘Aydure

‘readdesip

“Toys

‘ayeul

“4189

“ONINVG I

‘OT ‘Prepac

‘e “eulele yy

‘6 ‘epueyD

‘g “Bayly

‘en y

‘G ‘elvoPIP SY

‘] ‘eyeey

‘e ‘eysn[ey

‘ST ‘eyqun y

99 “URES

TYO

*BINYS

-edeysy

HUTS

‘L “peus

‘6p ‘eYyseyy

‘eur

‘UBWIe yy

‘seAoryS

“elu

‘unynyy

‘eyyueys

*LIYASNVS

“Oayeg

‘snuleleg

‘oapueg

‘xnig

mJ iize)

*I9ICD

‘sayneg

‘osl[eg

‘equiAg

‘unyuay

‘OID

‘snig

‘un|nosndain

*xa}109

‘Opwoop

*‘SolIesey

‘ouey

‘UstIIey

‘snieg

‘UINn[DO

‘UelD

‘eqouon

‘Oalg

‘sIpI09

‘NILV'T

Oe we

Tables of Comparative Philology.

864

ON ne

“syey “DO ‘mayox ‘ssn [qos “1 ‘asoja 63

‘oy ‘3p ‘snseo “J Sp20y ‘m320X

Oy “ay Ss0vany “SBlOY 2T ‘epney “9D

‘jassoy “Q) ‘sey ‘0D “pey “Y “soyatom ‘angjay “peed *D

ney ap ‘aTYoy “-D smmy ‘Auopoo “ojoy or) “Ney YT

‘aviy “ay ‘at06 ‘snpnio “7 “Ned *— ‘sefnery °2T

eure “yy ‘JoULvI *sn3dm

Soy *S SuamXow ‘ybnoy

‘ueddho *g) “YS1OZS ‘yy ‘SIZoLey °2’7 ‘stulda "7 ‘uodom

eMolos “yy “e[[90 "J Suyan “109 “VD ‘BATS °277

‘ueie ‘Vex ‘ouRIO “J Saoiapdy» “UITY "OD ‘WIICMY °0)

‘sdioo «g ‘sadsoy "2 ‘asdto9 ‘F100 *-D

“U0MOULULOD ‘U0d “J ‘UBD “Q “09 “DH ‘eS ‘0D

‘geqiey “Pf ‘sepiey “gq ‘sediey “7 ‘S00DL0D™

“uLaosep “Ox "TT Said

“fijaulod ‘stulod "J ‘m3n/ox

‘adnjaura “ex00 "TT SS0yYIam

*9001L40%

-yeeS ‘77 no “g “oes “7 ‘ned ‘J <opeImos ‘ay ‘yny “D

[20 "4 Senay “DULY “149d “OD ‘N90 “) “[!90 “Vx)

-aqtsapao yf ‘Aj2tajaa “Suy3y “NOX “2'T

uatdnd ‘TeYd yf ‘S000X ‘tv9 “Ualey “)

‘gjq1anja “Wessex *g fer3zym “SNsne]d “7

“SALVNDOG

“pay09uu09

‘YstuLUatp

‘ayeys

“‘yod.1098 Ad

*I0JVAII[ND

*SUIZ0O

“Yysop

‘ATTEQ

‘aTey

*19A09

“peoy

‘snyoy

“Us

“0103309

*19}180S

‘o[qealsap

suyuod

‘Q0U8]

‘M00

®I9A00

‘SULAOUL

‘os

‘ronount

‘ONINVG JA]

“eyUstlys

“eysoys

‘eleys

‘epeyy

‘el “UleH

‘eueqeig

‘¢ ‘eAquiyy

‘g “eysyn yy

‘efortys

% ‘TeUs

“GE “SPAS

‘pg “eyqiey

‘wes

‘esedie yy

Ginny

*eule YJ

‘6 ‘Yon y

‘% “Byun yy

‘Gh MeN

TES

‘PT “‘SeIeyo

‘8G “eyo

‘or “Users

*“LIUHSNVG

‘snsne[y

‘snsseg

‘sIneg

‘snpeg

ce)

‘1onig

‘O18

*eXx0()

‘SIMO

‘SATB

‘TONUel)

‘sndio9g

‘ung

‘snseqieg

‘outa

‘outog

‘osulg

‘snjuoy

“BAD

co Le)

IID

‘orIng

‘SIAR

‘NILV'T

865

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

Yap “d “Uyez “D “yurizsap 27 “eisop “y “Yatep ‘vO

‘wpelp “DIWatp y “UNE “4 ‘<m3spdnQ

“ueysep "py ‘uoysep *Fy ‘seznp 27 ‘Snove “YIP ‘O

“MOp "VQ “Wop "Y Smv3Q ‘auop “uOp “y “onlme

‘syp 0). “Sip “J ‘aonjdsyp ‘sip ‘wD ‘mg

“uorsiaip “50190 “SNUPIA “T ‘aplam 4p

"Snosozapue ‘puasny *D “130 ‘Yomsay “2D

"gep “V ‘aep “-f ‘eTiqap “q ‘Azyegap

asiquap] “ep “7 “stunp ‘27 “uep “y ‘Soang ‘stunp 27

IN0Q0 ‘uepuep “7g ‘suep 27 ‘seyiun) -on “UEP +44

"uYyeZ “4 | ‘Olp “q “semalp 27 ‘503g ‘MNIp ‘—O “Ip ‘vO

Zein} °q “lOp “FT ‘m3dus ‘ainep *y “niie} “9 “nang 27

“auInp ‘vy ‘nuuWe) ‘Py

‘udp ‘9 ‘emep ‘Fy ‘uyez -y ‘sy IU, ‘045 ‘nnn

‘Ajisajvap “eveusap ‘37 “01930 “eMsttey ‘0D “oulzap “27

‘m370Q ‘BSe5¥9) “YH ‘oBlez “1D ‘mAM13Q ‘nsskp -44

"S “Wap “y “eUaIp 27 “Song ‘Bei -D “UpAp “44 “eIp “vO

“dap |

“para + ‘sn[npasa 7 71pa.09 ‘medn»

"9)90jN9 “ezoy ‘ay ‘apey “Ney *O *So020»

"JUDTUUIe}190 7 207.199 SSo11dN

"QJOULNSOAIOL T

"™m3Aa0y

‘SHLVNOOD

‘ua}

‘daays

‘[ea10d100

‘asnoy

“Q0IM}

‘oyeredas

‘AVUSIp

‘q[noWgIp

‘QAIB

“y1003

‘poy

“Ploy

‘OuIe}

‘puey iYysta

‘pasta pe

‘Aep

“yaey

“Ulys

‘Je1[eq

‘“MO1IOUI-0}

‘9AOUL

‘ONINVG A

‘GE ‘ueyse

“eid

“ulyad

‘emeyd

‘seysin Cf

‘G CABUPIA

‘gt ‘sefoy,

“eleqind§

‘cg ‘Pd

‘Gp “eyued

‘SOT “Baad

TAG

‘Sy ‘weg

‘L “eurysyeqd

“eIysid

‘GZ “esealqd

‘eypperys

“IY

‘0B ‘PUPPeRAYS

‘G ‘SBMS

‘9 ‘weYyS

“LIUMSNVG

miiCHEY 6G |

‘OlUI0G

‘snsuaqy

‘snulog

‘siq Ve)

‘Oplald

‘snooq

‘STIIQed

“eq

‘suaqy

‘snoqd

*sn.in

‘Oml0(|

*I9JXIC

‘OOSl(T

‘Sol(]

‘Opatlg

‘sng

*snqta9

‘sBlg

‘I0U0N

‘NLLV'T

Tables of Comparative Philology.

866

gna

"snyoj “J SS02ad

‘pepeq "A ‘uapey “) “o1poy “7 ‘ang

“aesuasof ‘Sal0} “7

‘snowouas ‘aiod "FT ‘dud

‘auvfoud ‘aona

-yj29q “pemeq ‘q ‘1230p

U0Lf

cmpneiq ‘g ‘dmsndd ‘yeiq "gy ‘IXpoig *44 ‘AvyO1q °04

“eyyeg BH] anid “wy abyyof‘eyniq ‘OD ‘oes0y °T

‘ung “g ‘snpoy ‘04 “ssny "9D ‘uameld “y SSooyn

‘nioq ‘ay ‘pereq ‘d ‘“Uaieq “xD ‘“teq ‘VD ‘mdz

‘uvaq ‘niad -2T | ‘uvag ‘agouruafja ‘muaq ‘yy °P

quauppunt

‘angpe “Yt wy ‘spueit ‘ox ‘aTuapal “y “Wessa “Q ‘mea

we}2 “9 "a11a “J ‘amdo?3 ‘tt ‘ald “9

‘20M “a7 “Yon ‘Q ‘se ‘vy ‘zn ‘v7 ‘sne *Z) ‘sn ‘0H

"ay 4 ‘“Quarsuns2 “IUIl “27

‘aja ‘9 ‘areypoe ‘My Guay ‘aZiY “9D *50p1?

“s0XA3

“yt on ‘mds “ely “Ueul g ‘THQ “Tur MH “YoL "9

2UdISIUDAT

‘sey “a Wy ‘AL “27 “pun "9g “ek

‘sh yf ‘88 ‘DH ‘jayuasse “yf Guasaud ‘aouassyy

‘SALVNIOD

‘png ese uado

<‘Suryyids

‘spieAjno

‘919A08

‘giduia3

‘aq

‘TOp1og

“194 O1G

“pnq

‘Jayem JO aoaId

*‘189q,

‘Ue UO

“ATTOq

*ye9

‘os

‘ysty

‘os

‘SUIZETG

‘p1OMS

‘T

‘readdesip

‘pue

‘aq

‘ONINVG J

‘6 ‘wenyds

“TE “epouqla

‘stye A

‘p “eysnied

‘urvundke A

‘Weaey gd

*[ “Burd

“11 BU

‘06 “Ted

‘CAB d

‘og “MUG

“BUPA

‘T ‘sepueyd

‘PV

“c “II

‘eyayoy)

a ‘AW’

‘Pr ‘PUPPI

‘G ‘ISV

‘me y

“eyseulA

‘p eV

‘nisy

*LIUMSNVG

‘sniaq

‘opuly

*sllOy

*XO10 7

‘wnue dy

‘suol yy

‘LOyOLT

“WINTON

‘SNIAN

‘O10,7

‘eum

‘snpuny

‘Opal

‘OLE

‘Ou

*snjsiy

*‘sIsuay

‘oon

‘OOSIUBA TL

“VW

‘assay

"NILV'T

Tables of Comparative Philology. 867

1843.)

"Tpos *H

‘hipppasay ‘soduX ‘0198 “7

‘guatsoy ‘m3emddo

‘snynsaly “7

‘adovos.oy Shpunoy ‘ioe “FT ‘eanay 7 Soda

‘[VUIBALY J SonaX “VUlalZ 27

‘auinyxa “BUNS ‘OD ‘innnX “MING *g “OUlalZ *27

‘MaIpuaZzs ‘27 “Ysmpue ‘vy ‘ayney “4D ‘Sepuly ‘oy

502aX

woynjsnb soy 4) ‘mask

‘uel g ‘p27ab ‘safes “7 ‘aipey 9 ‘SIypezZs ‘27 ‘poroyo ‘ay

‘pels ‘gq ‘ajses “7 ‘aungsab

"noaud | “hpavwb iKqnas ay ‘aaeis 7 “elines -09

“9 ‘nus ‘ay ‘nouas 7 ‘nuez-g ‘niuy ‘oy ‘oly 'y Saaoh

‘uy “LUNY "OH ‘nuias 2777 ‘auuez *g ‘50a ‘Utes “YH

-nbdvb ners ‘ay smadud ‘snsk8 °F Saadtd 4 “NAILS 277

°sno7 |

-ayeuyue ‘stu “J Smad

“ITUIAy WY Seorisdc}

‘abnfas ‘siny 7 ‘n8a1q “YT Smgad “NS9q “27

Tey ay ‘apoyo Saoyad

‘snoivfau ‘sey "T ‘mond

‘aqvoogins ‘mhad

‘SHLVNDOQ

HBL

‘ayey

*q0a19 JIIeY

“Wel

“Inoy

‘pjoo

‘yyteo

‘Kep-0}

‘pamod

“480

“poo

‘aye

‘AABOY

‘sou y

‘pulyueul

‘punos

‘9u0s

‘punos

‘peaip

‘sunod

*PIOM

“YSt

‘ONINVATA

“‘eyepa

‘L WA

‘e,Uslipy

“eyela

“R10

‘Lg “euiy

‘og ‘any

‘p “eApy

‘eH

‘9 ‘Hseyy

‘eer

‘op “yeig

6G ‘TANH

‘e ‘nue

“G6 ‘euer

‘W9

‘eyueyd

‘uBlyg

T “PUSTag

G “Vysteg

‘Or “pseug

‘PS ‘seug

*LIUHSNVS

‘snpe Hy

‘sale Fy

*snyliI1o Fy]

*‘snoilpy

‘B10 FT

‘suaA FT

‘snun Fy

‘atpoH

‘eyINny

‘Snqsnx)

NYPL)

*‘O194)

“‘SIABIL)

‘nuas)

‘snuayy

“OlLI@£)

‘SIULY

‘Ow IJ

‘olen yy

‘SNL

‘Wey

‘sno0q

*NILWT

[No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

868

“acmngyte |

‘orstpar "7 “a6190 ‘att J ‘moday ‘aeyle] 27

fayat ‘hjiaay ‘5013y

‘aysny] “-D ‘n4zZS0] “27 ‘oysn] ‘on ‘p76 ‘Moy

‘289 ‘YJ “PPL ‘many

‘MEL gq ‘eddit g ‘atagy «yg ‘addy ‘9 ‘edny 27 dey 9

MINA “Y “wlyel 04 “wownso/a “sohoy

-ankdo

‘assaysnl «7 ‘aoujsne

‘enf 7 “eyont -y “eynf 27 ‘aonl

‘anbiyeday «7 ‘aegvday ‘donut

‘tdunt ‘a7 ‘puosnf +4 ‘seunef -27 “Quenal-y ‘ueand -g

‘ypaoyad * FT

‘ost ‘ay ‘yool ‘x ‘ysnd -g ‘nel+7 ‘[vesuesd ‘vy ‘yn ox)

radak +g “1Kael ay ‘9.42 Seopids

“Sod¢rio

‘eye “H ‘npr gy “wide QD “eIppl oH “IWle 27 ‘Sagi

“D113

‘Iynum yy “4apun 650102 “Iopla*VH ‘repun ‘oy

‘ajOng

‘ajube “euyse ‘vy ‘uso -y uyAi ‘usn 27

‘Aqyuape “Wait 7 SUle4qL “7

‘ouo “yy ‘a “Mx ‘89 x) “BI OK)

‘SALVNDOD

“yono}

“QUST]

“Qysifop

“\sISol

‘yNoul

‘yeods

aule]q

pojdepe

‘dnos

SIOAT]

‘sunod

‘UdA vO

‘utol

‘fauo

‘I9JVM

‘sulos

‘snyy

“Splut

“pIOM

‘aay

“sit

“yt

‘DNINVG IT

‘L ‘ovy

‘LZ ‘nysey

‘S ‘PPIH

‘pT ‘Ipny

‘/ ‘weuedeyT

‘yoo"T

‘G ‘fier

‘e ‘ein

‘elsn A

q1aye

‘UeAn

‘ald

‘op ‘ing

‘6 “eXysiy

‘SI ‘seyquy

| OG

‘¢ ‘IJ

‘Pg “ejuy

‘0g “eyieyy

‘OL ‘usy

‘wepy]

“LIUMSNVG

‘osv'y

‘Slao'y

‘snjery

‘Ope'T

‘UINIge’y

‘ronbo’y

‘osinge

‘snisn¢

‘sng

‘Indo¢

SIUSAD ¢

*‘SIAOr

‘osune

‘ely

‘sliquiy

‘TUniy

“ely

‘eljuy

sinbuy

‘SLUST

‘WPT

‘PI

‘NILV'T

369

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.)

"SNILoul ‘ay ] ‘snug ‘zsAur ‘ay ‘snew ‘yD ‘ysnul ‘g ‘San

‘Sodon ‘Yqreul nH ‘You “Fy ‘mceul *yy “nULeUt “27

") “ezoul ‘yy ‘pepeul "Fy ‘snpouwl “7 ‘van! ‘syyeiIUE “ox

“sseur | TAUBUL “7 ‘UaUIeUL “xy ‘Qozwaue ‘NuUtu *9 ‘URW “Og

“yon ‘sphan | ‘snoippuaut Samia

‘yous “ ‘snuseu v7 ‘aImMeul ‘9 ‘dow ‘vy ‘zonsow ‘37

agoipaut | "eu ° ‘Ua *g ‘OUI YD ‘TaULOUl “9

‘AYeIVU URI ‘Npzaul Ay ‘Sodan ‘a[}1 LU “yD ‘SUN pI Oy

‘aul nosoil ‘“euueUl ‘Oy ‘znUI ‘ay “YSuau "4 ‘UOUT “9D

°Y ‘tae *4y ‘alow ‘ay ‘amu mo) ‘TOU + ‘la1eUl ‘OD

"[BUL “GY “PUaj0AajpUL Wel eu ‘PY ‘|euUr A ‘opyatl ‘Tyeur °)

“SeINUl “27 ‘lo10W “7 ‘odnuUl “7 ‘anne ‘aANeU *

‘as.1oulat “Yossour *) ‘mpid3n

‘MUP ‘AYIaW “) “VYAVUL OD “YLDUL ‘modsrl

NZOIMUE “Yy ‘seMINU 7 ‘aodandan ‘ujauMmuU +9

a[OW “7 ‘Sajoul "7 ‘ajo

‘apnpibuo) ‘uelsudy °S ‘SUuOy (y ‘ssUeT ‘oy ‘Sue, “DO

“quoyel “YT ‘7Wa7n) “IPL “H ‘many

8219] “D) ‘many ‘sno.1aipn) “Z0| “HT

“Uorant[e “7 “UIntANnT[e "7 ‘aay? ‘may

“UTD 7yby ‘zany “Yy Ssonasy “BnYL YY ‘SY!] 0D

"[@00] “yf ‘7vI0] “dZ0] *ay S0X3y ‘yor ‘Q ‘ase sy ‘90DY

‘APAG] FY ‘Moquiy ‘ay ‘aao7 ‘sefiqny v7 “oqaly HD “elqtey on

‘SSALVNIO)

‘asnoul

Peep

*‘painseoul

*pulur

‘opt

‘qeols

‘OUIUL

splun

‘UvUl

‘ue200

‘UIs

x) O90) &)

‘puts

‘U1a0SIp

‘SullIsnt

“1004

‘pa}oau 00

*[89000

*yaods

‘pay [our

‘aulys

‘pltom

‘snodisop

‘DNINVG JAY

“YSN

‘PS “SWANN

‘OL “Il

‘eO] ‘seuet

‘epue fy

“68% ‘uRYely

‘ewe fT

‘gz ‘edgpely

‘eysnue jy

“eaT AL

‘e[R TAL

"G “I IN

“PLN

“YStt IAL

‘eleulre fy

06 “EDI

‘p ‘eusey

‘pnt

‘pet

HLL |

‘6 “eyorT

“Gg “eyorT

“pypqanT

‘LIUMSNVG

‘sn yy

‘SIO INT

“L189 TAT

‘SUOTAT

‘epuoyl

‘snuse st

‘Tana fy

“UNI pe TAT

‘Sell

“ale AT

‘sn[ eI

‘Sl.in AT

‘Oap1oyl

“OIL IAT

‘INUIIN far

‘Soot

‘snsuo'y

‘00je'T

‘opn'T

‘WNIAWT

‘xT

‘sno0'y

OpIqrT

‘NILVT

ay.

_ LNo. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

870

yonul J ‘aynut ‘soxan

“haivynpaue ‘yxeul “9 ‘SZ0Ul ‘ay

‘apuowl “YF Sm2ss0n/

‘uoywppaue “niyshur -ay ‘nfystar v7 ‘opout ‘09 ‘meun

‘ejjnpoul “1AjAU "yy °T SSoyzan “nepneur 27

‘Soann

‘uolyunw “7 7odiniuniu “uoyrunuun ‘niueUl “ay maz

“NUL ‘AZINUW +H ‘NZdAW yy “NZNU 27 “elyeul ‘0D ‘moon

‘agnji] | ‘atngarue “UBOSLUN ‘SY “Yeseul "Pf ‘Sazoul ‘FF ‘mA oi

"azlfIqeInu “7 ‘UownpNeUt “YOUN °F]

‘Labyiy q ‘agobigeyy -

nzoAu v7 ‘aynul "9 ‘vaggnew ‘ossnul “7 ‘mpyan

"UiyluUiue “UBUD ‘MOU “27

‘elem ‘oy ‘pyeul 4) *S0.231/n ‘ssa “Uo

*Yjoeul ‘yd ‘Oselul “ay ‘yjaU*4) ‘p90! “esalul “27 ‘soul ‘0D

*Ajregqarnue ‘syyeseur ‘on ‘pseu *

"UOISMIULULE ‘AS1OW °F ‘INYAIIUI VT

“SOL |

‘pO ‘syjOUSU 0H sSian ‘slow “y ‘nueu ‘27 ‘puow ‘4

‘eon “a7 ‘ayonu ‘4 ‘seseu ‘g ‘assnw ‘27 ‘abpiut ‘nian

quawunuow “inusul “ay Supa ‘auyeul *D ‘maar

‘OABUOISSIW YY “A7essiat “an/lagarl

uoyous “nea “ay “AYNU °4) ‘nyour ‘v7 ‘Sopon

*SHLVNDOQ

‘quinp

‘MOLICUL

‘yusTIeUsLO

‘puayeidur0o

“Ayinbyy

‘quad

‘asoddo

“sno

“‘puelq

‘A[[eooid oad

‘puardy

‘punos

‘Ory

“ysoy

‘Ue UIOM

‘sul; yutids

‘yjuoUr

‘oy1nbsow

‘puejsiapun

*‘ysvo

‘aye}19¥

‘DNINVG IA

‘T SIN IN

‘Sl ‘SBpayt

‘ES ‘pure AT

‘9 ‘UpeTt

‘¢ “PLAT

“6% ‘Ue INT

‘Ue IN

9S “YSN IT

‘ol “east TAL

g ‘Seu

‘CI “CAIN

T ‘nw

‘yee yy

“Yse AL

‘gt “esuPyAl

“STP

‘9 “eIYsItIN

‘TT ‘SPI

‘g “eyeyse Ar

‘ues

‘fp CIIN

‘yyueul

‘LIUNSNVG

‘snynyy

“B[[RpaTAy

‘opunyyy

“10}1p9 TA

‘oopely

9] LUO [AT

“o1un J

‘OTN TAL

‘QA9OSI AT

‘OIN|AT

‘SHUT

‘Olsn JY

‘shoue far

‘O19 TAT

“eSud IT

“1OT[N A

*OISIO JA

‘sisua yi

“eosn [AT

‘oal0 JT

‘OLIN

‘sn}0 JT

‘NILV'J

871

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.)

*fh.vujso ‘so "TT ‘a\sn ‘ay

‘mrl093 SS0aNo “IZB °O) ‘aso

M992Q0 ‘xnalpo 7 ‘snozpo *m3qm

‘UIMO “27 ‘UI0 ‘9g ‘UeN "My ‘sIMe “27 “AUa 510

“uNYyyayse “gq ‘tuayse 7 4se “xg ‘nsso “J ‘fb070aj80 6203200

‘Vy ‘[lo “7 ‘oxo cy ‘slye v7 ‘esne ‘oy ‘asne *y *S5oxx0

"eae ‘DO ‘yyorze | “yuOUIaUIO “YY Sndm ‘ULOopp

eUeU “¢ |

‘mUIe ‘Dy ‘WeU ‘gq ‘oMleU ‘OX “SIU -a7 ‘auTeU ‘4 ‘nr/oao

"4 ‘pest DA) ‘opzoUs ‘a ‘mn2371vAa “UBSAU “GY 65012034

“yy Au] ‘seu “47 ‘Sonul ‘27 ‘sisun ‘0D

“eyoous ‘a “ANUS “ ‘Sona

qwoignuuos ‘yduhu ‘udraa

‘oqau “gy “sod3a “[MIU *Z “Jaqeu ‘g ‘YUTeeu “Ms “Adu “44

‘oou “MH Sule AT ‘la

-wsyodau Nasa ‘yy ‘ayjou “Hy “Mau -y ‘eu ff ‘Sorp3an

‘JDULNIIOU “Qaa ‘s1yyeu 27 “yyoeu *d “pyoou "My ‘sou yf

‘waquiaaou ‘Meu OQ *n3aa3z “lou “yy “Yeu ‘g ‘Und “OD

Sedeylup ‘yaw ‘soo0a ‘Yeyeu "HE 65ax3za “0000U "'T

“yexeu °F | ‘quspu “epesou "gy ‘SIsou "27 ‘aseu “

‘olploulle ‘44 ‘pou ‘suenu ‘FT ‘maza

"AIDIIUNUUD ‘503A

‘SHLVNDOD

‘yi nou

“4VaS

‘IBM

‘daoys

- 9uo0q

‘aha

‘19A00

‘oueu

“sou

‘sn

‘M¥l-Ul-13}YoNep

‘OISALA

‘pnoj9

‘ou

‘uospueis

‘yoru

‘QuIU

‘uoljoNAsSap

‘pamoq

“4UaS

‘ONINVG JA

‘meds, V

‘meues VY

‘Z| ‘weyppny

% AV

‘TS “HUISV

‘OT ‘TUSyV

‘] NU

‘UPN

‘S ‘PIN

‘YeN

“esnus

“BIBAINT

‘8 ‘seyqeNn

a | “BARN

‘piden

‘8G “BIeN

‘OT ‘UBARNT

‘96 “BUSPN

‘0G “PSEN

‘eyeN

‘*euun NT

*LIUMSNVG

‘cuniysoO

‘WnNO

‘UIMIPO

‘SIAO

‘SO

‘sn[nog

‘OulO

“usWION

‘SPIN

‘SON,

‘snin Ny

‘OqNN

‘soqu Ny

‘OAINT

‘sodan

*XON

“WaAONT

‘O0ON

*SISB NT

‘snjnN

‘snioun Ny

‘NILWY

Tables of Comparative Philology.

372

‘nesied ‘27 ‘mooiw ‘osuid 7

‘hanrunsad ‘yoeyyeag ‘VO Sams ‘Yala “OD “NYley ‘eg

-unpiind ‘saytand *7 ‘dau ‘azinqg *9D

-piugnd ‘snd. 7 ‘m3an ‘seynd v7

‘ajod °7 ‘ajuwand “sin ‘and "gq

‘aynduin “apung v7 ‘mpasn

‘ranqind “7 ‘fuznod ‘soymu

‘Aynburdosd ‘miyoad “ay

‘aaurued ‘euniy og ‘seuiied ‘77 ‘oisanyg ‘tXmaad ay

‘Avid ‘mand “eysrey og ‘uayooids “OD ‘seyeXsead ‘27

‘pesiod -g ‘nzsoid ca ‘unjedd “7

-quajod ‘ued ay ‘suey ‘04 ‘sroou ‘png ‘gq ‘syed ‘77

‘auodjsod ‘sind «7 ‘od ‘yy ‘toy ‘My ‘sed v7

‘juayod-inba *my3s

‘uemnoy *¢ ‘Yong vy ‘ssny ‘9 ‘n{nejd v7 ‘only “7

provid

‘uveljsapaad ee ‘eyeid “a7 ‘ajojd “4 ‘ed gy ‘seizozed 27

‘mp.3n ‘4agvd odie

‘elyeq ‘ay ‘doyea “4D “aleye “OH ‘saped gq “repey ‘on

‘sean “FY ‘yonysed a7 mpong) ‘qayINJ “yD “erpoy -0H

‘ainjspod |

pyro v4) “wso-sy ‘winyyse ‘277 ‘YAM *Q “QYSeYy ‘qd M240

‘uejye on | cunydwo ‘urjeydio "gy ‘Soanddo ‘aqie “9

‘SALVNDO)

‘punod

*qs¥oq

‘Ajtand

‘sulLyUlys

‘u0s

‘puejsispun

“SB ULULOSSOTq

‘qe SUIALIIe

‘qsay

‘oan but

‘uorjON.ysap

*19)SBUl

‘19)J8

‘Awe

‘os

‘asvad

“400J

‘93e[d

SIIYICJ

‘ystinou

aN Fol

“priya

‘ONINVA JA

‘PS “USI

‘eg ‘nysed

‘gg ‘Od

‘og ‘Uud

Gg “eryng

‘og “ypng

“Tye[[nYg

‘euedelg

‘emeyield

‘p ‘Yyorig

‘ekeleid

‘PE ‘ed

‘Fy eyoseg

“LY ‘eee

‘e ‘Ud

‘Le “eAlig

‘OOT ‘eped

“pl “eqed

‘Cp ‘Wud

‘og “ysng

‘BUlel Ys V

‘eyqiy

*LIUMSNVG

‘mUnjsig

‘nog

‘sning

‘oving

“19nd

‘aiVjng

‘sn[[ag

‘adoig

‘snullig

‘10d g

‘Un [OIG

‘sti0d

“4s0d

‘OaT[Od

‘oni d

‘a1008[q

‘sad

‘elayed

‘Iajeg

‘wnyseg

‘snavyO

‘snqio

‘NEILV'T

Tables of Comparative Philology. 873

1843.]

‘juayonb ‘yey “ay ‘syoy 27T “soo0x

‘quand ‘yeuyed "FT ‘mn.

‘wounad ‘rig “9 “epiq ‘09

-6nd ‘onbid +7 ‘gan “nieyord y ‘sefnerd 7 ‘putay «9

“snoivu | ead ‘oyynn ‘opted sp

‘ysod ‘nzed ay ‘731 “248aJ 4)

‘jtodute “p.tof sodou ‘acof e1yey 5

‘shQ 'g [id ‘¢ ‘ened -ay “omod -27 “Tay 9 ‘S1voo

‘joyod ‘oyrved *7 ‘mold «ay ‘sejjed ay

‘aid «7 “leyoid °

‘p.todoa) ‘sepied v7T “aapred +9 ‘Sood pu

"JIOLA0Ou

‘Ind -9 ‘ood Soylu “ynjd “9

“anaed “7 ‘Azund ‘sexed py

yind yp gd ‘oznyd “9 ‘Sogac

“‘qunod “944993 *D ‘msnen “eusnd “7 ‘oalneid wT ‘ely 09

‘resed *F7

7urod ‘suied «7 ‘nzsid yy ‘msn3an

| ‘snowoaosid ‘aosstod «y ‘sysy -0n ‘ysif ‘Bskd -2 “yosy +0

‘mao1Lu “neliq 27

‘apnyuard ‘So3yn “S[NJ ‘0D

‘Sodan ‘SM ‘OD ‘aBIoy “yy ‘sndSid “a7 ‘yorq ‘| ‘Saq-0.9

‘SHLVNDOO

‘AUBU MOY

“yoryeyy

a}1004

“BUTI[LY

‘MOAI

“pulq

*I9A0 SSOJO

“prerys

‘M*CIIS

‘ooyona

‘paedoa|

“Bas

‘puod

“4SBo

‘a1ou

THE

‘ssajareo

‘Inojoo

*TOVEM

‘reay

‘yeas

‘MOT

‘ONINVG JA

Hey

‘T ‘Tepeg

‘¢ “Uqeg

‘efttg

% ‘Nl

“yseg

“‘eleg

‘% ‘Byeleyg

‘g “ered

‘L “exld

nye plig

‘L, ‘stayed

| “eyemMy]eg

‘yeqqiig

‘OI ‘Pad

‘eltg

‘qyong

‘g ‘lig

‘QI ‘sedeg

‘eg IY

PT ‘sejng

‘sefivg

*LIUMSNVG

“on?

‘sn[nieg

‘019g

‘eusng

“UAN | Eg

‘sIysog

‘snqilog

‘Sted

“‘ea[eq

‘snoig

‘snpleg

‘snquog

‘sn[eq

‘sled

‘snoyng

‘osung

‘oasIg

‘osulg

“SIs

‘OOART

‘snud[g

‘snaieg

‘NILWT

Tables of Comparative Philology. [No. 142.

874

“eUays ‘77

‘uaya ‘py “Ueas ‘Dy ‘May “yy ‘orwas ‘SBIoUIS Ox) ‘SeUeS “27

‘nunyains

‘ueules “77 ‘uades “g ‘lapeusis “7 ‘Afiubis ‘aonnlo

‘yuidsa “7 ‘geuedg

-ajujdaws ‘adwet J ‘mu3d

-gjvbn..too ‘snoned "7 ‘niynet 27 “oynet “4p

“niepAr “gy ‘Sogod ‘niopnel 27 ‘mod

nos ‘sezai ‘vy “Wassied ‘4 ‘moold

‘ysnt Smad “nior ‘yy ‘nfnest a7 ‘smal "7 “eUUlt ‘0p

‘zoeqni ‘a ‘gow “eidnes ‘Of ‘qeie FT ‘mvud “uaqnel “5D

‘gasodie “yy “esod ‘ay “p19so4 Suod3

0019070. | onpit ‘iodo ‘snyi0 "T ‘a}led “4

‘eyol "7 “101030 ‘poy *9 ‘eyo ‘vy “pets ‘seyel “27

ywbat ‘skai py “Yd ‘¢ ‘yolarl ‘DY “YSIt “vy “eLyer 0H

yl sg “7y bis ‘syyrer “0D “Wat “O

rempad ‘44 Ieyaya ‘7 |

‘o3dn1132 “ata “OD ‘atkyozo *yy “aALyIID “YH “11NI49% °2’T

‘nioy ‘a7 Capngainb ‘1w.212m ‘sulex 27

-uanbunb ayy ‘oy ‘ayuny “9 ‘thyerd “zy ‘Soturisy

“7piw | "NY “dq ‘010%

"09 “D4 “Oy “yy “OM “Ky ‘seMY “OH ‘NY *g “sey VT

*SaLVNDIOD)

‘yuoUIaIIX9

“yUunAYs

‘mydyns

‘UDIS

‘ay eolg

‘9A0Ul

‘ysnod

“Trem

‘yeolq

“aa0ul

‘gan {ut

‘gornt

‘u10}snd

ih)

‘Jopn4

‘ond

‘moj

‘Suidgo|s

‘aay

“yeqn

“qed

‘pue

‘ONINVG IN

*seueg

‘Op ‘euueg

“MBM TOYS

“Buy

‘y ‘tds |

‘% ‘doy

‘eysyny

‘g ‘pny

‘OI ‘PRY

% ‘IY

% ‘ydry

‘66 “CUIEY

‘01 ‘Plea

“CUNY

‘Og “INIBYO

‘BI (9900S

‘ueyoueg

‘pea

‘WL

‘eu

‘LIUMSNVG

‘saldeg

*X9U9G

‘imyding

‘uINUSIC

‘oudg

‘oday

‘osny

‘reol ‘opny

‘opod

‘ony

‘oidey

‘so’

‘SnytYy

‘epauy

‘xoy

‘snjooy

‘ronjen(?)

‘soin()

‘anbuin?)

‘pmo

‘sing

‘andy

‘NILV

875

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

auaaas.iad ‘hpiianas ‘mp03¢f20

‘uoisens ‘7 ‘aponsiad

‘mono ‘UdIINS *4)

-uuvdsap ‘aiodse -y ‘ukdnuo

*JOLANO

‘pwiasa.s “epleys 05 “eynys 277 ‘uapleyos “D *m71Xo

‘nioiys ‘ay ‘efnens ‘09 ‘asseaiys “4 “unjyets “7 ‘mndr0

‘ua.tjs | ‘pob-1uas ‘was «7 Sink

‘ifsqws

-aingams *s ‘ay “Ylas ‘4 “NYVas *oD ‘as “7 ‘snyIs °T

"QD ‘astyyes “QD “nuijos ‘27 ‘niezozsks yy ‘agnyvy

‘doadns ‘veqe ‘gq ‘taqn “9 ‘Sreyn *04y ‘d3ua

‘aylaens “7 ‘Apamns ‘oapens ‘7

‘havuoynjs Nieys ay ‘seuoys ‘277 £a}1"1S “4 ‘Spe}S *O4

‘Sues ‘4 “uomz ‘ay ‘niuds ‘5 ‘seuemz 77 “SMSUS “04

‘sno.iafi.todos*5oana‘oueds yy edals' 09 jelyos'y ‘seudes7

“EMS *4) ‘UBIsaMYo “yy “Nsses ‘27 “eAyeMs OD) ‘Soday3

“OOS ‘ay “oy | ‘snoiis “srynX

"aANRS “VT ‘mono ‘aI1adas Smads

Tres «44 uaduas “yuodses “J ‘mud3

"ap199NS *503 “IOMS ‘ay ‘SeMeS ‘27 ‘SULIS “0D “YOIs “D

NIZIIYS “27 “JOOYS “oZZaIos “HY ‘M7040

niyquns °7 ‘yans ‘ons “7 ‘yos “ay “Jes °4D

‘SHLVNDOD

aed

‘Suiseo|d

‘punos

‘aaisap

“pyatys

‘1e0}

‘peaids

‘radoid

“atl

“ysiag

“aa0qe

“JaOMS

‘goed

‘punos

‘daajs

‘MB[-UL “TOY ef

“auo0ys

‘9AI0S

‘dood

“sty

‘dun

‘suljyutids

‘ONINVG [AT

“LLM

“‘NpPMs

“T] ‘eremg

“¢ “eylidg

G “peu

‘Gg “epusyy

rng

‘g “TMRS

Weg

‘euueg

“UPES

‘g ‘ued

TIPPS

‘Ob SHINS

‘g ‘ueMg

‘e] “eudemg

“eINYSBMS

‘8G “BINS

‘BAG

‘0g “edaeg

“eM

9 paeys

‘euByvag

*LIUMSNVG

‘sniaAeG

‘oapensg

‘snding

‘sadg

‘Tun NIG

‘opulag

‘OUI919

*StUlaG

‘aul

*SIYeS

‘radng

*‘SIABNG

‘ON®IS

‘ouosg

‘oidog

‘19009

*X9[IS

OATAIIG

‘suadiag

‘snng

‘opueog

‘snoong

*NLLVT

[ No. 149.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

876

piday ‘apa iy “th{day “yy “peqer ‘gq “yIe1 “VD smdas

‘Yj0p “DH ‘9109

“loyonoy yy ‘aynz ‘nrey Ay “gy ‘aeyoy oy ‘seunyn 27 £91319

J1902 *m3yD

"ajspyd ‘spos ‘0H ‘snyseod “7 ‘5o10nhv

‘Juayps ‘ayey “FT “sti[les yy “ei[es “0D “imrloyyn

yas “Yy NSIS ‘p “xvas “goasus ‘standas “7 ‘aevs “NSIS “9

‘ajossidsun SSoagiuo ‘seysneds v7

‘agpyjos “uelpes “gy ‘spes ‘on ‘1dyAs ‘ay ‘snyos ‘7-7 “4VeS «xD

‘aqvaoesap “Yyaks"g Nyons'g ‘Soxano ‘snoois’7 ‘neznes v7

‘ayeaoisap] ‘“doys Sones "sy ‘olses "7 “IYoIs “4 “zy bog

Nzes “a7 “Qvas *50Q3 ‘nizpas ‘27 *ZqIS “D £84418 "04)

‘bureds ‘asuiids *5 “mnhiddo ‘nyssoads +277

“apley “Q “ntjod “gy “sujed “7 “niojed 7 ‘apf ‘mnyd

‘joadsua ‘ydebeys ‘FT ‘Souowo ‘sesids v7 ‘oyeds xy

Afigngs “Sn prfors °"7

"240190880 “a1008 “WT Smoono ‘NSS ‘27

*sejoys 27 “plnyos -4y ‘prnys 045 ‘A0YOxo

‘evjruies “awlas *FT ‘Soyorlo

"99.108 ‘A108 “Yf *50d0 Saodupo

“40108 ‘asyujos ‘ay ‘jerey ‘Pp “[erey “Ay ‘S01V lu

‘oul “ates 9 ‘snadys v7 “Ys ‘soadadso

‘SHLVNDOD

“eo

‘ung

‘9A0UL

‘yuaTIs

‘aind

‘9A0UL

any

‘Uo] [OAKS

*‘ssoulrea mM

“EI ‘Aap

“Adsa

‘SU1}90UI

‘peards

‘aaealo

‘aas

“T12p

‘pualiy

‘poxyorm

‘Aqipenba

‘dULUdAd

‘uns

‘pidnys

‘ONINVG IAT

‘pg ‘dey,

‘yeq

‘Toe J,

‘g “eyyuysny,

‘eyppnys

eqs

“ey ses

‘eryds

‘9 “pes

‘eyysnys

‘ZT ‘tyeng

“g ‘sepes

‘yyomnyds

‘{eud

‘g ‘eXysedg

‘OP “eins

“9 “IByES

“g “eueleyys

“OSG “eeuleS

‘9 ‘arekeg

‘eAInG

‘eyquieys

“LIUMSNVG

‘oada,y,

“epo LT

*snjouy,

0908 J,

‘snpng

‘ores

£0996

‘snssidg

‘INJEC

“SINS

‘a11IG

‘sapag

‘osiedg

‘orjodg

‘owedg

‘sny[ny¢

‘snlv0g

‘sn[a0G

‘SITLUIIS

‘UINIaG

‘OS

‘snpidnig

‘NILWT

877

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

“Wey “DH “NysHoI} 27 “stre} Vy “OLIN *D) “S003g “nrlood31

°P ‘SUIYIp “q “euep “\souula} "yy “NUIsUe} ‘277 SUJOUIUep *5

"SUIP] °%0270.t0707 “e[eUI “Ay ‘mpyn. “e[ny} ‘04 “op[np'y

‘S183 “gq “euqoIp ‘oy ‘toned} “xO ‘8948113 “JT moondn+

“A fr.t.tag | "U0UINZ © 12

"OIDU]DJOA ‘SOmIVUL

-anhdo “pibuny

"TUS9} "277 “NuEly “ay “puaz ‘ouyap ‘xD “eluey} “04 Smarzs

uAAl9} “44 £1003 9D Snrid3s ‘wlay,

‘yua[e) “Wy “7107 “|[0% “9 Saoranyn.s

“U0ISNJUOI YAR} "DO S<msuas‘N4 “WF ‘pvap ‘apo} °4 ‘mong

‘poajoad ‘ueoayy *¢ *90X134 ‘yap ‘yy ‘yoep “9

Ay ‘a4 “YS “DO ‘styap 27 ‘mh32 “nypay “2 Suayoep “5

"S0dans

‘IN®} "P “101 "F7 ‘SANs 04 ‘aatys “4 “yque, ‘vg ee “MM

NB} “72D ‘seme} ‘27 ‘SUIOY} OD ‘op ‘DD ‘10M “Ay chore 9)

“09d “GW ‘9 “111 "af Snid's “yas ’*g ‘shi °27 ‘sladoyy 09

‘mpds “Ieyy “VD “ZaIZ9 -ay ‘sory “|Z “YoINp “9 “Yrreyy 09

“IauMOp °4) ‘repuny *g S1eUNny) °S) ‘maor

“218 PY “plea gy “eyyre oD ‘ndmX ‘11 ‘vy ‘reaep +4

"Aut *g ‘aInzzeuey “p ‘Sovan.s ‘you

“07 ‘gy SUBYyoe) *77 SYeuE °y “neUds} ‘7 Saunp *4) ‘tame, 7

‘SHLVNDO)

“qSa1tf}

‘ssouyiep

‘UolaM

10119}

‘prens

‘Oyll

‘aInstao

‘uotsued xo

‘do}

‘pl ‘ounseat pros

‘punom

*I9A00

‘TInq

‘noyy

‘aot

‘sso10e

‘tapuny}

“yqivo

“Ul

‘ONINVG IA

“TT “USLty,

‘ez ‘seuley,

‘TOL

*Q “esely,

% ‘fog,

9 “eA[DL,

‘g weliey,

‘Ty ‘huey

“URULIe fT,

‘BINT

‘OS ‘PUL

“8 “yoea T,

“eIBAN T,

‘WICA T,

‘ogy ‘sedeuy,

‘f ‘nujyiAueys

“GT ‘eaeyq

‘{f ‘nuey,

*LIUMSNVG

“Oa110 J,

‘e1qaud J,

‘OTOL

‘09149 J,

‘1090. J,

“SUB,

‘asIn J,

“u1ej U9, J,

‘SnUuLuLd. J,

‘UNnyUd[e T,

‘opun J,

‘O00,

‘snine J,

‘snn J,

‘Sol,

‘sue. J,

‘naj1U0 J,

‘el19 J,

*‘sInuUa J,

‘NIL

Tables of Comparative Philology. [ No. 142.

878

‘y ‘ooea “T ‘onbea “y SOyLM ‘0H ‘ayolam “9 Snrl0X10

‘bebeq |

"asn “yf ‘asn <mpo

70U2LN *aodao

“oIUM +37 ‘UL 7 SaNYO'D Sasan ‘UB “9 Ue "Y4y “UN ‘OD San

‘ajppunus “npuem 27 ‘oem “04 Sma

‘sInO “J ‘SIL ‘q ‘moovdy ‘Soxdv

‘snoabp..quim ‘aIquio “Wf

"500323 ‘“1aJal ‘ay ‘uaysza “10po “O

“YOM “9 Quabun ‘you ‘aokds

‘§ ‘un ‘2 ‘u0e -My ‘UpoO ‘a ‘auo SaaUIIa *y ‘suTe ‘Oy ‘522

“ue | "eqoryn “ay ‘vappn “a0\na “) “dopao

‘says “ysa “FT ‘U027sngwuod ‘man ‘Smk

"U01jvU0IU2 ‘aUU0} ‘Y '9U01 *D) ‘Soao2

‘a[qnody “7 faqnisy *9 ‘9unzs2p ‘sogjadog

NZ01p ‘v7 ‘ayonip “9 ‘payvouny <mXads

‘apnaqure ‘mads

‘a[quieny “7 ‘wowad ‘orvzd 4

“ADV DL

‘souuny “7 ‘snonjjnun fF

‘aansuo} “J ‘atnsuop Sarsrior ‘amoeazs

‘SHLVNDOD

‘ayeredas

‘910A0s.i0d

fIOJOM

‘400

‘ToyeM

‘1eaq &

‘pnoja

“TIYIOYAA

*410]J9

“peutof

“ATIAq

‘ung

‘punos

‘oanfur

any

‘yeorg

‘3A0Ul

*u10}10q

‘reoidn

*qno

“ONINVA JT

“0G ‘WOLA

9 qe

‘OP “HPA

‘L1% “UV

“ep “epn

*G “eusyly

‘OT ‘wreryqy

‘e1eqe x

‘L “elan

‘[ “emMay

‘ST “Brepy)

‘Gp ‘uenysy)

‘p ‘UBT,

‘AINUYT

“ULLL

‘c “4nd,

‘Wei

“9 “ele y,

‘e]nUIn J,

PUL

‘LIUSHSNVG

‘onoe A

‘101

“eulty)

‘epug

‘snsdy)

“eq ul)

‘191,

‘0as1—)

‘snug

‘sni9})

‘snjs

‘ouo J,

‘oqany,

‘oound J,

‘opniy,

‘OUdL J,

‘sn[@],

‘snj[nun y,

‘oopuo fy,

*NILV]

Tables of Comparative Philology. 879

1843.)

"UOISINAAL “BAIN *OD Soy3

"ayea “5 ‘OUI ‘04 ‘ma3e0 “apna ‘310.1

‘yoleq ‘gq zerea*p ‘aoreq ‘az “aeq °S§ ‘Somdd3

"aqDI0AU2 “NYVZIZSIOM "ay SXIOA “7 SayOsem “5H Sm3Xt

"aagaas *Sor¢) ‘semAs ‘7'7 ‘oaq ‘wy ‘mdq °4

‘JUIUIOITA “YT Spelz gq “opza *l.201¢}

‘eloud "77 ‘aInpiea ‘y ‘S01d0X ‘aunpwaa “eqaay “T

‘TVACS "FT StDas “UdIYam *4y “aval DH “tem ‘OD “BreIM °9

“SBIIM ‘27 ‘1am *C) | TILA ‘a7 §1322 ‘nfam “27

‘Dye “oBeliA wy “opreq “wy ‘si[id 27

“eantq “q “apo "6 “sanpoam g “sIyINe “0H ‘50790 ‘snNpIa “7

‘sopola "Y Sdm101 “Yupzde ‘snppdm °y “eae “ssiam “9

aLlOJOIA “7 “VUITYOIA -7 ‘4.107924

"AANJSAA “9\SOA “A ‘TYSVM ‘O04 “aad 65Up.03 “oie “4D

NOZIOM "a SmQd3 “pea “YyiM ‘CQ “eprlea °0

‘yjoes “DH ‘peq ‘q ‘sefam 27 ‘pulm ‘9 “Susy

‘puim ‘09 “uAMS *—9 | ‘euun *05 ‘inuao

‘Bom ‘GS “pZzom “a7 ‘nzom 27 “eta “7 “ybraar ‘aBam *4y) “m3Xo

"7020 ‘NBA *77

‘yeied ‘77 ‘preg ‘wy “YWeq “yy ‘a7pu2922NA “srsvd Suen

“Teas “a7 “foams “OD “[Yom +H ‘snppea “7 “wat “mya

nitpam 27 ‘opyem “9 “Mom “yy “72a “erpLMm “0H Smys

"SHLVNDOD

‘oplarp

400}

‘1e0q

‘yeods

Oat]

“4SIX9

‘ua018

‘o10Y

‘9ABIM

‘ase][IA

*MOPIAL

‘MOUY

‘payeajap

‘yj0[9

‘SUIUINY

‘pura

‘1ou0y

‘A1U@0

“10

‘goes B

*19A00

‘asooyo

‘ONINVG INT

*T ‘TEA

“ped

‘g ‘eyeIeA

“PS “YORA

“eg ‘alr

‘601 ‘PIA

“0G “eqIeH

“Gg ‘RITA

% ‘Wed

‘G “BABUPIA

“601 ‘PLA

‘9 ‘snqifta

‘QT ‘ease,

“0G “e1Ie A

“eye A

“a ‘Ue

“6 “YRA

“eA

‘eg “elieqg

‘LT ‘TRA

‘ILA

‘LIUMSNVG

“OPA

‘Oper

‘salto A

*xoA

‘OALA

“BLA

“SIPLILA,

“ILA,

‘oalA

“eTILA

“enplA

“aroplA

‘snjorA

‘olsa A,

“0J19 A

‘snqua A

‘10ud A

‘oyvA

‘OA

*s0]8 A

‘Oole A

‘OO

‘NILV]

[ No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

880

"[eULsIA 7 ‘u2bu2a ‘Sveim *Z Saueikm ‘v7

‘ulesn 'D ‘plyoy ‘vy “Veisopemp ‘ay “SizueMz *O

"hjuva ‘azan ‘seusIm 27 ‘uUyeM "D ‘sueMm *0D ‘S52a03

"T ‘Snonpuia \reay ‘vO “eyylrem ‘045 ‘YWIom “9 ‘u23dn

*[9N}ITA | ‘apnjess19ia “sata az SatOoM *) SOIM *0x)

‘n3yn “OUnI/04

ran sea 7 “uaTyoem “4 ‘bua “eypioea "7 ‘m3Xo

“Ajruraea “Sessia °2'T ‘SYIaM ‘OD *So2n0

“"Ye49q ‘A

"aSBAIP ‘7 ‘OISNM “*4Y ‘mnsy ‘azsv44

"S0YN21

‘quellea ‘7 ‘4732404

‘aouasadat “NWI 47 SAlya °9 “ela °0D ‘mpd

*YOsLIOM

‘S ‘ndog clvhSeq “FH ‘osinm “4 ‘sexi 27 ‘hisoyy

*ApsIASIUMS *D SKUIOIM a7 SIYVA “4D S1TBJ“V.D ‘SeULOLM 2-7

‘ayn Sayoem - “eyem oy ‘sadaa °T ‘mamma

‘SB} HT ‘8189 VX) $5022 ‘a7V.tajaaue *XNaIA 7 NYOIaM °a7

"S1eJ “GY “OWA °'T ‘as.cadat “EYE OK)

‘aliodsaa “yf ‘taya}aA *y ‘swadsaa 500303

"ayjawa ‘uinyd *F7 “erulaa *2°7 ‘mans

‘SALVNDO)

“UBUOM

‘YJolyueM}

*SSo]

*yUd][90xa

*[BAtO UL

‘ary

‘os

“TToap

ve)

‘aanfur

Jie

‘10[00

*ydaTas

‘oye

‘4Ud|[90xe

‘QATJOV

‘au0s

‘OSIOA

‘1odea

*JIUIOA

‘ONINVG Ii

“esl A

‘g “‘THHeysur,

“eu,

eAUIA

B ‘YTA

‘P “PXIN

‘Sea

“USLA

G ‘USPA

‘Ee “qsV A

“Ly ‘ese,

‘6p ‘eure A

«re A

‘g “exLIA

% ‘seAle A

% ‘EA

“PI PUA

‘e111 A

‘9 ‘edse A

‘f “eye A

*“LIUMSNVS§

‘OBI

“1VUISL A,

‘snueA

‘snqyItA

‘SLOT A

‘snueo[n A.

‘ose A

‘snorA

‘ose A

‘OSB A

“L ‘sn[njita

‘OLIe A

“103919 A

‘XBI0OA

‘sniaA

‘(tA

‘snqoA

‘snsio A

‘radso A,

*‘Snqruo A

‘NILV]

381

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.)

‘uepueq ‘g ‘uepucg ‘¢ ‘snpued “7

"ellq “g “Iq ‘Y “Spuey vy ‘assteq H ‘Olpoy 7] ‘mQn@ “nog

‘rAjaiq “yf ‘seyyeq “7 ‘oafed “7 ‘Soryvou

‘yoeniqg “My “eamoiq *g ‘saddo

‘rapniq “4 ‘madd “leporq “gy “rayeI} “7 ‘dlsndd

‘sindq ‘J ‘esnesq “9D “oltaing “7 ‘made

preq ‘9 “oatfod “7

rayneq “ “ung “J ‘mgnI¢

‘pans ‘44 “BiIq “DH “Uepplq ‘g “eIplq ‘0x5 ‘oxed *7

‘atjaq “GS ‘reyYeq ‘Gg ‘dasseq *4) ‘s}eq °04D)

‘nBoqn +37 ‘snizpeq ‘27 ‘oosod “7 “soXmsu

‘s ‘ung ‘Q ‘uremdq “y “aapng ‘_ ‘ng “vy ‘nq “4 ‘mad

‘org | edueq “y ‘Ypleq ‘VD ‘msunc ‘PVg 's’

“mayoeq “9

“By[Boeq “OX ‘pezed -g ‘S0Nm3G

‘gave “g) “Y20 “9 “YOR *D S50XD

“iz 9Xao ‘Ka cay 8A 7 Sao

‘AUALLO *S

aye *) ‘eddvy «gq

“IOJULY “ o3saas ‘Vue “27 “Tapue "DH “Soyyn ‘Uel[e ‘ZO

99110 “7

“Blase “27 “O80¥ “G “Sago “XB “D ‘snoe ‘J *Siyn

‘SHLVNDOO

‘pomoq

“quds

‘paaey-Aods

‘moiqada

“190g

‘yeods

‘Aware

‘IaIp[os

‘yeods

*‘JUaT[90xX9

‘Sulssoq

*|SIXo

“oyieq

‘UNS 9}

*“paxjooa

‘ured

“UOJ

‘MOLI

‘Aoyuoul

‘1910

‘MO1

‘plOMS ®B JO odpa

‘ONINVS JA

‘eusnyg

“plug

WHYeq

“DIGG

‘TA BLUg

nig

“¢ ‘ele

‘eeu

G PEA

‘6S “BApeyg

“AT “eysylyg

‘Lot Dud

“ereyseyg

“emyeg

‘g “eysy

‘CAV

“eleus

‘ide y

‘oz Sereyeday

‘Tea, V

“Wysy

‘LIUMSNVS

‘puegq

‘We

“pled

‘MOIG

“Lay OIG

‘ABIT

“Pld

‘kyoog

“pl

‘199g

‘Soq

‘ag

‘meg

“yseq

‘ayed

‘ayoy

‘LOMAW

‘MOLLY

‘ody

‘IYOUY

‘AOULW

‘xy

‘HSITONY

Tables of Comparative Philology. [ No. 142.

882

090 “wy ‘yekSes “Fy ‘Nd “gy ‘Aes “gq “BA2d "7 “YN ‘OH

409 "DD Smgasy ‘210% “VAD “OD ‘ny “esed *7]

‘suWOy “x “euInb 0D ‘marlo»

‘Tosn ‘a7 ‘jens wT ‘jayoes “Fy “Joo “g “o[YOY “gH “oopea “7

-auada0 “g) Sonlmdad

‘uey yy, “WeURd “B.D ‘nud ‘DQ 7uaI0n ‘snyued “'T

‘rakedueyo “qT SOLLDN

-anX

ndioy 27 ‘useqiey *) Smpiudpy ‘odie “7

“uByliq "0D

‘Op “'T ‘ony “oynyq "9

‘d ‘opeaq ‘g ‘sid .q ‘saiq “yf “epoq “27 “soq ‘9 ‘slised “7

epeq | -aselq “g “NSZIIq 27 Smgsyh “05[Ny “7

‘apd “ayoetq “9 ‘eyliq Of ‘osuedy “7

eSNIg oF) ‘ues0g “OD “gaz “NYE "D “moons

niatq “ay ‘nfneyq “27 “¥OId “D “Oleg “J ‘ovXuye|

-onoq “J ‘Y9ng “‘Yoaq ‘OD ‘390q *H Saou

-eq ‘9 “po ‘yy ‘nepeq 27 ‘onyeq "7 ‘aodsxn¢ ‘m3402 |

nppe | cca a

‘naiq ‘q yneiq ‘4D “syyerq “0D “ered “7 ‘ugdou

"SHaLVN90D

‘M00

fasnoy

‘paiq @ se Ato

‘os

*yorlq

‘puns

‘90S

Ee)

‘punos JOULSIpUL

‘e909

‘yeoig

‘IOMOY

‘ured 9ais

‘aulys

“Te

‘puaq

‘yeads

*ye08

‘asoddo

“uaisey

SOJT An

‘ONINVS I

“SIT “oRn

“pe “NY

‘T ny

“eg ‘Wey

‘98 ‘PIP

‘g] Bung

‘suey

‘weyy

“epeae yy

‘AIVUD

‘faeyg

Wn Yg

“UpeA

“‘ysPlug

‘yseryg

‘eg ‘{nyug

“‘UleA

‘eyyng

‘L yped

‘cg ‘eypueg

‘eklieyq

*LIUMSNVG

“M09

a98}}09

“009

‘amon

[B09

‘ainyg

‘uey

‘dwueyp

‘Meg

“IAIeD

*duvg

“MOG

“pee

‘azelg

‘yeoig

‘MOG

“seal

“yong

Bog

‘pulg

‘apug

*HSITONG

583

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

“Sodus

‘qny “gy ‘dooo ‘equiko "7 “qto “2 “any “y ‘Soda

"sesey ‘pT ‘a4nsuad “Sooaky ‘aUuUIs *5

‘onelYy “ SuyuX

‘eyzsn yoy ‘ay ‘snynono “7 ‘yonyons *H *9aMOM

'49Z00¥ “a7 ‘[24908 “4H SSowmy ‘YOO ‘|Z

‘Pues 7] ‘Neouleyo 7 ‘snjewles “7 “faurey “H “soyunioy

‘niedoy ‘a7 ‘niodey ‘v7 ‘ednoo 7 ‘oddey *y ‘msu0%

‘mpiudnx ‘oqiey “49 ‘odreo “7

"alla “WT Smad» ‘“torenb “7 ‘ni ‘9 ‘uayRry *4D

"NIBYLYO ‘gy “apayoly “HM ‘Aouuryoeds 7 ‘mQnXow

"nel[zsey “ay ‘nysoy v7 ‘ayateay “4 “710%

“pL09 “Nj1dy VT “Niory cay “npeo ‘7D ‘eijny *yH ‘oyenb “7

NZO[OYD ‘ay ‘alas ‘7 “72Y9 ‘sey[ezs "7 IVY OH “Njos 7

81190 “Cy ‘AaJOYoR “7

‘mhay “g0a]j09 ‘M{[Iend +7

‘uvuIaMd ‘fg ‘SIWI0D “7 “S0r/00»

euelthd ‘S “sodak

‘arpeo “Gg Searle “yy SxI[ea “7 g7yom

"v9 ‘uerKo *§ “2049 Sm3dmX ‘o1Ind “7

‘yeueyo -g ‘snuUly ‘05 ‘UULY "4 SSaash

“pamaya “pno ‘gy

‘20818 “y olyly D “sNA100 “"T “gndo»

‘SHLVNDOD

‘ung

“a[110q

‘ay elm une

“‘puey

‘ooyona

‘000

‘jauee

‘punod

‘yeom

‘punos

“ysne|

‘ysnoo

“poo

‘onsod

‘19yyes

‘TO Neaq

‘IVY JO Yo]

‘ref tayem

“oo

‘mel

“ye0

‘M010

‘ONINVG fl

wmyy

‘g ‘Idny

‘9 ‘sUBMUCT

‘p “elo

‘gS “ejnyyN yy

‘ejoweiyy

*% ‘deyp

‘diy

‘ny

S UA

‘g “esvy

‘py Way

‘eres

“p “eeu

[eu

*e ‘e[eMloy

‘enn yf

‘eyse[e yy

“PG “AeyD

‘g ‘nuepyy

“el Vle yy

‘LIUMSNVG

‘reyp

‘dng

‘10suag

‘MBIQ

‘ooyong

‘Yoon

‘fauUleg

‘doyp

‘dieg

‘Aig

“ap yponyy

‘ysnog

"an 9

nie)

yea

aiLite)

‘K[aw0D

‘ND

“aatTeyp

‘ALIBO

aly)

“pny

‘MOLD

‘HSITON

| No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

884

"T ‘ukan ‘asea *s ‘oO “a sosne ‘oy ‘sne ‘yD ‘adne “DO

‘sN[N90 | “emoa ‘sg ‘24027000 “es}A0 "Y ‘1Ae°D) 6510 “SIAO "J

‘apua *s ‘slepue 09 ‘apua “9D

‘Pop “H |

‘elyely cay ‘semoy °7 ‘e3B) “7 Sn21322 BI °Y4 “Pei ‘D

‘dap ‘nudoy -y ‘aarp ‘weddip -g ‘ayney *) ‘muag

‘YUpinip vy “enip °¢’

‘ayUlap -vyH fauna "qd SUIIp *¢ ‘eeiqoue} ‘7 ‘a1oUIWIep *4)

"UINIP *27 | "ysnp “HT “1r/07n@

‘mospnize “aleiWop “7 ‘rajd mop “7

4ysnnp ‘vey “snp “9

‘adnp «7

"e559p ‘7D

‘aqiaty *4) “eqatup ‘09 ‘opiday “7 ‘musd2

"reyeyqnp ‘vy “ajqnop *7 ‘sniqnp “7

[ep “ “ul[tep

‘DO “uelep *g ‘ajop “e[AI “2 “Step 27 ‘TED ‘moyg

‘uepAp ‘g ‘pep ‘gy ‘seypor Vy “por "9 ‘syINep “OD ‘mang

"eZ00p ‘ay “193490} “OH “A01q Yop ‘_q ‘NyNp 27 ‘dusvhag

"1eziap ‘ay ‘nysAip ‘27 ‘oneiy “4 “ep -04

“Sogas “essnp 27 “dutep “1 ‘sonag

el[tep oD “nidT[ep 27 “nijarp -y “apleyy “9

‘amep “7 “eulwop “7 ‘dnrny

‘SULVNDOQ

BEY.)

‘daays

‘jeug

‘19YIeJ

‘ap yutids

“OSTAA

‘ssouyiep

“any

‘uorjoa[qns

“ysnp

“1909p

“tun

‘9A0UL

“sKOM OMY

“opralp

TET

‘1ayysnep

‘yuepyuos

‘ayouls

‘MOISIAIP

‘OJIM

‘ONINVS JA

“Or TUSYV

G SIAV

‘Lg ‘ey

“g “eer,

‘diy,

“pl “earyd

‘og ‘seule y,

“yseqd

*% “equa

“e1SD.L

‘eyquieg

‘g] “eypsng

‘ALG T,

‘eypremq

“ez “ied

“pny,

% “LnTynG

“TT ‘qsuyqg

“ZG “eunyqd

‘(eq

‘ued

“LIUMSNVG

‘oA

‘pug

“ped

‘did

“pinig

“WI,

“yseq

quneg

“4qsnq

‘adng

‘snd

AlI(y

“4qnoqg

“(eed

“pracy

‘rayysneg

‘aleq

‘duieg

‘seq

‘ouleq

*HSIIONG

Tables of Comparative Philology. 365

1843.]

“gq ‘uod1is “Gg “uediaIs ‘05 ‘uayiied gq “uajtlels 9 ‘mndd

“tad dis | ‘oneiqasod "yy ‘aAeld “7 “SIABIS “7

‘supled 27 ‘opads ‘oy ‘adyad “5 ‘orenb ‘7 ‘mndX

‘TUBd “44 “NZOYI*y ‘ayes *y ‘olo°T “esues ‘05 ‘my

‘uamn| “7 ‘Suewoys “¢

‘OOSI[S “GY ‘aa7x

‘pels “g orepry 7 “pays “qf “eS “DM “mryX

Yos “9 “edued °05 ‘01D *7 Sm»

"A239 ‘snuiny 7 ‘wey ‘9

“uapuyag “p “uepuy “¢

"JodiA “FT “ually “Dy ‘myyng

‘atueAala ‘ay “aout ‘snuuea ‘7

"W38f “DH “109z °G) ‘mddou

‘a0f “Upay *g

‘ajojd “5 “Ypiny ‘vy “0J "gy ‘mn210d

"BIDS “g “BINJ “0D “SSoymu

“nfneld 7 ‘oamAyd «ay ‘qonig ‘vy ‘ssny “9 S0Lm ya

‘m3yu Uae “y

‘duind ‘¢9 ‘ayeAd ‘ay ‘asund -g ‘ayued 7 ‘Jy 9

"5010103

el oy ‘arel 7 “el 9 ‘ta “ay ‘wah °a ‘wy “Bungs+y

480 “5 ‘soa ‘Vy “1809 “GS “Sm3

‘SHLVNDON

*aZzlas

‘KABoy

‘A[19989 OIISAp

“os

“10nd Uv]

‘paisneyxa

Qyst[ap

‘auos

“YIO4y

“pug

“quds

‘pura

‘pua

‘(8M

00}

‘ysiioyo

‘asun|d

“eot1od

‘OAY

‘arojoq

‘UdAa

‘yeoiqhep

‘ONINVS JA

“EL “Wei

‘ea “BABINVL

“9 ‘Ypliyy

“ex)

“TUB[x)

eAely

‘€ “PRI

“eye

“TI ‘eueyg

‘{ “para

Tt ‘Tedd

‘née A

‘eleg

“ZT ‘ypny

‘OOT ‘Ped

“(Pd

‘end

‘06 ‘Ave

‘OOT ‘ueyoueg

e\seing

‘BAT

‘BP PUS,0

‘LIVMSNVG

‘pnay

“qO00.T

[BOT

“pool

‘9911

‘OAL

‘WALT

“US ATT

“qsUny

‘HSTIONG

[No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

886

“MBIOIIY “GY $710

9909 ney “4H *s02Layo “SIWNd *T

"aja °9 “Ypoe ‘wy ‘snyse “7 “ssloy ‘9 50910

| ‘m3La3y “eYJUIY °O4) “SNYOL “TT

‘oy ‘eseo “7 ‘nippno *Q ‘ureny “zy “ONNY “H °S0gn3y

‘pey ‘qd ‘sny| y1hy ‘GS Stoney “7

‘gnboey ‘yf SSoxw1 WMZe ‘eT “SsOl “ “qse “q “Yo “DH

‘odse "7 ‘mso “fy | ‘oye "7

_ suesalyg 609°’ fom

‘DH ‘aopios “Y Sigdyy ‘SIpslZs “aT “ZIEY “D ‘oyrrey ‘OD

“ay polio | ‘ueqqey ‘g ‘uaqey “9 ‘tooside "7 ‘msn

‘yy “epay “ay “my “opley “pM Ssoayow “e[[90 "7 “yan

“e[8Z |

“4SLI5 ‘§

‘yeals “C' ‘SSOIS “4

“poyo ‘ay ‘assed 9 ‘omyes ‘04n

‘o[t08 “ay ‘jasins “Hy ‘azbunb camadnvXdond ‘sosins “7

-mnaey “y “ney ‘yy ‘nyAzs 27 “oyNys “9 ‘moyly

"4308 ‘9 “pod ‘g ‘snyseo “7 $5139.00»

“ysees “py “uassald “yp “1p0aX

edd ‘seid yy “uRlserd “g “NZAIS “gy “NZIS “2-7 SondA

nrejo]s “ay “nes ‘gq “ens "7 ‘ayay “HY ‘“UINI[oo “7

‘uBIUUaIS *“g SOlUUAS “7

‘SALVNDOD

‘19, Ysne]

‘Apoq

‘SUIZEq

‘yond4s

‘asnoy

‘ured

‘as10y

‘ey

‘aAOUL

‘q1Boq

‘Ule}q0

Tey

‘punois

‘yuoloyyns

‘yeys

‘yeoryy

‘SuLUAING

‘gand

‘ayyutids

‘qeO1}

‘punos daap

‘ONINVG JA

‘g “eseH

‘gg ‘Ipnyy

‘e “eupPl

‘Pg “ee

sf ‘ny

‘T Hepiy

‘0g “emysy

‘T ‘Avy

‘LG ‘PMA

9 ‘dV

6 “PIPUS

‘p “eyyslayyy

“eV

“eyyeyy)

‘9 “ext

‘PL ‘Tease

‘St ‘Upnys

‘seyy)

‘SBIx)

‘TT ‘ere9

‘9 ‘euler

‘LIUNISNVS

‘ssi

‘OPlA

‘eo

an H

“9S10 FT

‘OH

‘1H

“y1va py

“OAC TT

‘eH

“JSIIX)

‘yea

‘aye

‘as10K)

‘AX OTL)

‘poy

“ysnxy

“OZBIL)

‘TINH

qunI4)

‘HSI'TONG

887

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.)

"pesdyy “41 ‘mooazy

‘201 ‘S

TEI “Y GY] “HM “Aada] “7 “eylel oy

NBYSI] ‘VH

‘NZ, ‘ay ‘nz, ‘a7 ‘axoa] “4H Sostel ‘oy Sosul °7 ‘om X23y

“TUIYOTl “27 “Niezsi[ “yy ‘Za] +4 “esnty *04) ‘aso7 ‘mn1V

“nxel “7 ‘mynynX

‘pury ‘srurks a7] “tuny ‘op

"UR}IUS “C VYeU “yy VLU ‘ay “nau “9 “au ‘snpou “7 ‘m3a

“ssny ‘4 ‘nuesnod ‘yf “elyny ‘05 ‘may

‘nidoy say ‘niodney 27 ‘aqoy +5 ‘oideo «7 ‘dva ‘musyo0

[Byes] “Fy ‘ies «7 “esnty ‘oy ‘oopned °7 ‘Sopud

"ueqqes “g “qeys “qd “yseuaggen

“yeyors) ‘77 ‘anol «7 ‘aoool *7 ‘utynf -27 “ozyonl +5 “mX m2

Pe UT.

uA ‘9 ‘Lay Ul yy ‘UL ‘OD ‘Ul’ a3

‘slepiy “7 ‘Sodnyn “myX

‘U94se} “5 “sep -g ‘snpuey ‘oy ‘puey “4

‘uadeb -77 ‘udoy “9 “UINeY 045 ‘nUI00 “TJ ‘uamdoy

"apB “GY Susn “sley 7 ‘spuejey -og “puassey *y “am3.0y¥

‘UeISIEY “Cg “larey 7

SHLVNDOD

*908

‘o} pautol

syst]

“yor

‘uassoy

“al pt

‘pulyuewu

“pug

‘081g ua

‘Opry

‘amnseald

*19} NUE

‘ysney]

“41

“UTYyTA

‘Alrep

“puey

‘u10Y

“J0U9[OIA

‘azias

‘ONINVG JY

“6 “OT

‘eusey

‘nysey

‘9 “yry

‘g “tysary

‘p “esely

‘G6 ‘vues

‘YeN

‘ysny

‘gg ‘day

‘¢ ‘ysne

‘pl ‘der

‘ysyes

“pera

‘IN

T ‘TlH

“LT “eser

‘Ol ‘esuttys

‘b ‘eyieH

ie ‘IH

‘LIVASNVS

‘y00'T

*qoor7]

“qysiry

“sovy

‘ssary

‘AZerT

‘ULy

‘Huy

“SSI

‘doy

‘A0G

‘reqqesr

‘ayor

‘Uy

‘AMAR TL

“‘pueH

‘UO FT

‘aye

‘ALIV FT

‘HSIIONGY

Tables of Comparative Philology. LNo. 142.

888

‘aiquioul “WF *50d3n

‘pseu 5 ‘IAdeUI ‘0x4

*[el1978Ul “7 Sel1eyeU “7

“pean

‘10W "J ‘maindnl

‘IMBUL “ff “dite ‘py ‘eevul +7 “tour ‘vy ‘1ofew “7 ‘oreu gy

‘YVUOW “4 ‘NUOUT ‘27 ‘OVISOIU “yy ‘SUIW “DH Sale

IMUBU "PY “NIUU "27 ‘OeIU ‘yy “UDO *4) S‘mnaroaanl

NIfoU “gy ‘a[Vul “Gg ‘wr vinI/0

*ppaul ‘9 ‘yjoUl “4 ‘Ypour (44 ‘eepbayjow Sagan

‘7 ‘euueul “oy ‘znur ‘ay ‘Yasue *yH ‘seul "7 ‘uou ‘4

-aysout] °37} BUl “4 ‘nr!

‘snsAy 27 “UDI “4 SSomy “a¥27 ‘s¥I9[ ‘0H

‘ae gy ‘ybno? ‘ezny “a “YDMI] °Q Syd] “4 ‘snoey “7

‘edne] ‘Oy ‘one “4

‘aso| ‘4 ‘nzzo[ “y ‘nzne] 27 “elsnel ‘05 ‘oxel °7 ‘mo13y

‘28007 | “MIDYIY

"Uuaanal SULBAI] °

‘UBysN[ ‘q “ISNT °G ‘ISN] *4 ‘oIsn] °Oy S10,@] ’T ‘many

“hyan) “axons ‘9 ‘Sony

‘nfiqn[ v7 ‘elqayy op ‘nyquiy ‘gy ‘awany “g ‘gall “p

“qoyrt “d J "nidny ‘gy ‘udimy ‘sosusy ‘nddny 37

‘SHLVNOOD

“gurol

‘al eulay

‘20UBjSqns

“[10s

‘sulAp

‘19}Vo1s

*yyuOUl

“puluL

‘XIU

a} 8olXOjUL

‘uel

“[00J

‘yreur

*yn0

‘yovoidde

“yno

‘adisap

“eS

‘go081q Wa

‘auny10J

‘aqisap

*qno

“ONINVG IY

‘g ‘UeULIe yy

“e[Ye TAL

G “ele IN

“PIAL

°% “euele yyy

‘ere}jeye yy

“TT ‘ese qa

‘ues

“UAT

‘Gg ‘NYypeyy

“TT “eysnue yy

“29 “PRI

*T “xeT

“IT “gouy

‘day

“6 “ysn']

“TP [eT

‘p ‘eueaey

‘esey

“TU Ys yer]

*L “yquy

‘0g ‘dnq

*\LIUMSNVG

*19q Wd JT

“prell

“LIWOT

“pny

“ULe1.IM fAT

‘aI JT

“yuo yy

‘uvayAy

‘Tea

“peat

“URI

“pe sal

‘ONY

‘aye'y

‘deary

*asoor]

“HOT

‘UaAvary

\sn’T]

“yon’y

‘9A0'T

‘doy

‘HSI'TION

889

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

"Ole "7 fate °S)

"480U °*4) SSona “YI *D ‘peau ‘vy

geu -q ‘sholjaquin “7 “[liquiou +y ‘Soyndro “aqeu “4

[eye “gy | ‘ZU "ay “NU “27 “Tapalu “4

"aqeu “9 ‘oquin ‘9 ‘Soyndro

‘siproume "44 “ojnU "TJ ‘masa ‘moomAN

nu g ‘und ‘g ‘etaAU "y Sana ‘slou ‘vg “NU °oH ‘oun “T

‘aSeou “gy “zou “g ‘sou ‘ay ‘sIsoU ‘17 ‘aseu °4y

‘ou “g ‘ou ‘ay ‘yeu ‘g

*‘yyolu “4 “Yowu “My ‘ou v7] ‘uleu *y ‘ou "7 Sua “eu “YY

“OU "T ‘mpla “snxoU “7 “nssou “op “eMYau ‘0D “YORU “yD

‘sou ‘9 ‘snp | ‘you “7 949 “4D ‘oailU "7 “elseu ‘on

‘Nseu yy “oyoeu “4H ‘syyenbeu ‘oy ‘sedou ‘v7 ‘snpnu *7

‘yosou "gy ‘sindun *7 ‘ueyyeu yg ‘sedeu ‘27 ‘joseu °y) Jado

‘nan “Jaa

*UT[Moseu “7 ‘sn[noseul +7

-uatAU °¢' | ‘TOYIVU “y SUATYDSIVUT “4p

"yf “Ulpew °O “UUes[INU “My ‘afynmM +H ‘efour “7 ‘uyan

“NIfau | : S003

“elolUl “a “OAV *Q “BIOIUT “27 ‘yreur “xD “eyIeUl ‘on

‘uUeIpel “gy SSr2an/ “Neasnu “7 ‘syuNU ‘on ‘punur +5

“SHLVNDOGO

‘Iappna

*qsou

*‘[aAeu

‘MOT

BEELIEN

‘ayeys

‘MOU

‘asou

‘ou

“jou

‘ato

“oulys

‘poyeu

[Trew

‘ay B100Sse

“Ueur

‘os

‘SuIpulis

“VU

‘yynour

“ONINVE [AT

‘ely

% ePIN

“erqqeN

“eUdIN

‘TUq?N

“BJON

‘N

“PSPN

‘18é “IN

‘TT ‘@N

S ‘URN

‘T ‘PEN

“6 ‘eusen

‘LG “eUyeN

“UN

‘T “RIPIN

‘yore [Ay

‘eueleyy

‘T “pase py

‘9s “TNH

‘LIUMSNVG

‘IO

“qSONT

‘(AACN

“Ye N

‘OAC NT

‘PON

‘MONT

“980 NT

‘ION

“YSIN

eon

“poyeN

‘THEN

‘ore TNT

“ale IA

“Qare Ti

THAT

“318 [A]

“YINO JT

‘HSITONG,

[No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

890

‘mooisy ‘nested ‘27 ‘osuid “7

‘sejued 27 ‘puyjd -5 ‘unsued “7 ‘uaron

7 oqid vy ‘nytid 27 ‘msyu

‘snssed 7 ‘sed «yy nd -ay ‘peyd 5 ‘sosny ‘uintyeds "7

‘Led *g “yad ‘9 ] ‘uamed ‘44 ‘oajnd 7

“peeid *g “tondy "7

-rassnod «yf

‘abvyjod *5010.2

‘apnid *¢

nezsead 27 ‘nzsoad ‘37 ‘uaypeads 1 ‘1000Id «yy Sdms0ondd

‘lasuo]d “7 Sarsany LZ

‘snssed ‘7 ‘aossed «Wf ‘mp13.n

"390 “n

‘Souzo SUNYe *Y *101LZ0

exo “§ Sfoo ‘4) “syne ‘09 “eooea “7 “Yse “My “YOK +f

‘yuoy Sajna “D famAayoyo “e[nin *7T

“IVAG ‘FT Saeyn ‘oy ‘aodns 7

‘eliny °'7 61910 ‘9’

"500343 -yepe “py ‘aayye “7 ‘ean vWf ‘1apo “6

"sjne “Fy ‘ZeM ‘Gg SXN¥O “WT

‘un «yy ‘Ageun ‘snun «TJ ‘aoi0

‘O

‘SULVNDOG

ee a i ot i

a a _

‘puis

*0q

dn deay

“peor

‘puey ot}

‘YIM poystyes

‘ead

‘[aSSaA

‘4 UeSO1Ie

‘SULYSE

‘as rourqns

‘dA0UL

‘101184Ss0d

‘unido

‘xo

[MO

‘aA0qe

STOVEM

“19410

‘ar yurids

‘aosaod

‘ONINVG IN

a ee Te Ee

‘pung

‘e] ‘eueg

‘Nd

“6 “UIYIeg

‘ued

“TT “eat

‘T ‘ysng

‘L “eng

“ey YsSUy peg

“‘VUueyyIel dg

Nid

‘sod

“99 “18119,

‘euoyd y

‘% ‘ueysyp

‘enn

“g ‘Ted

‘epn

‘Bley

‘seyuy

‘gg “euere

‘¢ ‘YeH

*LIUSISNVG

‘punog

‘UME

‘atl

“ye

‘Meg

*A01g

“ysng

‘pnoidg

‘aakelg

‘asun|[d

‘Sse

‘19]NO

‘unidQ

‘xO

‘MO

“19AO

‘1910

‘I9YIO

‘aZ0O

‘auO

‘dO

‘HSI'IONG

‘uasas “§ Saonnko ‘unnsis “7 ‘ousis W

"81 ‘YT “0aS “Gg ‘IS "0D

Nias ‘ay ‘aes *— “efies oy ‘snyes “7 ‘seins v7

"mBas “G “UUNS *4)

‘OUIeS ‘OD Snr/n

"ayoes “wp “oes “9

891

‘IOUMOL “YY ‘SuUeUUNI ‘oy “pustult 5 ‘maid

‘aad "xp

‘uokel ‘y ‘snipe "7

‘pesed ‘gq ‘aoral "4 smsXod ‘meyer pg “eylt og

‘hoods “Sol "7

‘yOnow ‘anbnel 7 ‘yner ‘g ‘snonel “7 ‘500000

‘xIped "7 ‘91d

“UaTIN' gy Sopasds |*usar'g "eer Fy ‘ouser 7 UUNUsaL 7

‘Uppnyt ‘OQ “Ypens ‘vy ‘seppni v7 ‘yor “D ‘snssni “7

NUL) “iZozsad ay “apat H “epost ‘oy ‘mond ‘UBpol “Sy

Tang god NMal -y ‘oJNd “DM ‘saiqel *7 “AdAal «7

‘uesel “FT ‘vAnd ‘uased “xD ‘sarqed “7

Tables of Comparative Philology.

seman» ‘satnb ‘og ‘oyomnb 9)

‘suonb ‘oy ‘euad “9 Suaad

‘meyey ‘gy ‘snwyno 7

‘opao "7 “eyyinb ‘ox

1843. ]

‘STLVNDOO

‘USIS

‘ays

‘MOS

Ua]

‘Te UIs

“pually

‘SU1Z00

“ouly

‘Aer

‘ure}qo

‘IOACT

‘ysiey

“1001

‘UddI9A08

‘par

‘yeods

‘asiou

‘uoissed

‘ramod

‘ayeulay

‘pool

‘ARS

‘ONINVA JY

‘euuleg

‘BUBBA

‘UBUIG

‘pcg ‘euleg

“YES

G “eUlYy

% ‘fey

“TYONY

‘sey

‘eg “esey

‘zg, “eysyny

‘Or ‘peu

‘ueley

‘Pp “BILYyoy

% Upey

‘eaRy

‘seley

‘PT “AeUS

‘Tuer

‘e “eulele yy

‘0G “BIey

‘LIWUSNVG

‘UBIS

‘ays

MAG

‘WIeaG

‘ames

‘ayeg

‘uny

‘MOY

‘key

‘pouay

‘Aoey

‘opny

oo"

‘usIay

‘pay

“peoy

‘ACY

‘osey

‘yond

‘uaang)

TMO

“qion®

*HSI'TON

[No. 142.

892

Tables of Comparative Philology.

“ueld10s “g ‘UeSINES “OD “A105

"OaMUIS “GY 65301

nrednys ‘ay ‘nduins ‘7 ‘eydoys “9 ‘ods "J ‘mgji340

“quis *) ‘jaqais “ay “sequieys 77 ‘sadus “7 ‘Sorlaso

‘yors sg ‘yes ‘ay “yoRs ‘D ‘seyes °2’7 ‘snooes “7 ‘udno

“ses “FT | “Aes -p ‘uel[ses g “fogs ‘VO “Any “4

‘dos ‘uedis ‘9 ‘opampro

*YOI9S “Gg “qyNS ‘“¢

*pdvX 03 ‘UBIIOS *"S ‘m1rsndnX

‘qebeys | “Myos “9 ‘dao

"Fy “MSOs “ay “pesnya “qT ‘ones “5 ‘osns “7 ‘niyuns v7

-lgyonz ‘OQ ‘xeyeys ‘q ‘umivyyoes "J ‘dvoXxvo

“sKm yo “4 “Opes y ‘snples v7 ‘slaens “7 ‘ssns “4 ‘Sag

-ayjaas ‘ANANS “yf “SSI9ALOS “1 ‘10pns “7 “5001

‘eules 09 ‘ano ‘ajmues “4 ‘aurWOS 7 ‘snuTuNS “7

Niueys “ay “NUays v7 “UAUYO}S “ ‘mazt0

nipays “wy ‘nfoyjais “2T Smyy3to ‘a[]a18 “OD

‘uoidse ‘J ‘Souoyo ‘sesads v7 ‘uayRds “p ‘o1oads “7

uns ‘¢ ‘Sasdaoy ‘sodas ‘“SBAIIYS “27 “doIayos *D

“sia ‘UAS ‘ay ‘shuns v7 ‘UYOS "DH ‘shuns ‘of

*19}S9M YS | ‘ueyods “9

"c) ‘AVUMYD “- “V1]SOS “A “NSSAS *7'T “ABISTAAS “OL ‘10108 °7]

‘SHLVNDOO

22k WUE ee PPT,

‘sonbi, snouta

‘ured

‘ajosn ua

‘on14sqo

‘et res

“payyofo

‘9A0Ul

“yy04q

‘“oljsneyxe

‘1808S

‘yoy 810s

‘dip

‘1e0ns

‘Ayurep

“4e@aMs

‘afoumM

‘ue01s

‘goed

‘908

‘10Z@1

‘U0s

‘Q010A

*19}SIS

‘ONINVAS IY

‘deing

“LMS

‘ndeug

*% “BYqS

“eYyqurers

‘elfeg

‘PS

‘edng

“epes

Wey

‘INYS 3

‘euByoeg

“BAByTeYS

“0G “Npeargs

‘epaMg

‘euleg

% ‘uel

‘ol ‘erewis

‘g ‘eysedg

‘TT “Bangs 3

‘g ‘nung

“qovA

‘LISeEMG

‘LIUHSNVS

‘dnidgs

“MOLIOG

‘MIUIG

‘dais

*WI9I1S

“yoeg

“leg

‘dnog

‘pes

‘IBIS

‘moog

‘yong

‘IVsNnG

“yaa MS

“yeaMs

‘UNG

cunts

“1181S

‘Adg

‘1e9qS

‘u0g

‘yovadg

‘19}SIS

‘HSITIONG

893

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

ny} ‘0D fan ‘NY VT ‘ao ‘n} ‘d 1 ye) np'd ky “7 ny "DX)

‘Sa1I0} “7 ‘pezie} ‘gq ‘NySyody “27 “ISINp “4 ‘m0032

"0S “FT ‘OS ‘D4 o1 ‘SBP “9D

"100999 “WT “319 “SY UI} “4 SS0p212

‘op ‘ay ‘Meptyerey “gq “Ue1ad} “gy “19U8} "7 Sass

‘§ “Yeaeys ‘Gg ‘Us19}s “) “Uodas *44 ‘OUITES "OX “eIIOIS "7

"8110948 | ‘aways “Sy Sunsn

“WyoXo “te “41 ‘oay[eo “7

-00dan.s ‘SINS ‘OD “IIS *4D

“Soyano “pjarys ‘apeyas *D

‘nfas ‘27 “‘mi3z0 ‘pey ‘pg “ees 4) “OUIS “0

"MaLo “ONES “4p

"Yomy “44 “elUTAS ‘ay “Nes °x ‘sns “7 *5n0

“xtU "7 S314

‘Salus ‘a7 ‘pyovous "My ‘sesaus ‘27 ‘aoUYIS "4H “BA\TVUS “OH

NysNeys “27 “BIyJeys “ox “opeyas ") ‘mne3Ho

‘opgian “NOlUIs “ey ‘a[aluryos *45

-m3pod “eqiies "fF ‘0aqios “7

ueny °*9 ‘aoujos ‘ay “euuNs ‘0D ‘amos “5

‘IOIUaS "7 ‘AIIS “WT

"URTIIAS ‘FS

*SHLVNOOD

‘nou

“qSI1Y}

‘paaojeq

“qnd

*1e}S

‘910 4StOwl

“UL pasioA

‘yoeyy

‘yytoy SuIsUtAq

*pMoO.t0

soy

‘SUIZ00

‘KO14S9p

‘oa TUS

‘syiaids SULYULIp

‘uns

“‘so0dsar

‘puedxa

“ONINVG JT

“TCA T,

“TT “USILy,

‘OP ‘PRL

‘ey Aed

‘Tid

BILAD

‘eulo1g

“elys

“ed

“Brey

‘L TMs

TeA4S

‘eleynyS

‘z, ‘ABUG

G “peyys

*g ‘IMIG

‘deing

‘nung

“6G “WS

‘qnydg

‘LIUSISNVG

“nou

SITY,

‘euL

“489 J,

189 T

“IBIS

*HUI891S

“TAS

19919

‘TUS

“peg

‘MOIS

‘MOS

‘MO0ug

‘QYWBIG

“apIWg

*‘qniys

‘ung

‘Ig

*[[9MS

‘HSITON

[ No. 142.

Tables of Comparative Philology.

894

"Y ‘OTe “yy “VIMTBA “OL “OATOA “7 ‘m3yi3 “[OOMY ‘g

jam 27 ‘nyem] ‘eny ‘yy “pinb*7 ‘sem ‘045 “yeaa “g’

"UBIpPaM "GS Snags

‘[JOMS ‘cg “Nyaa ‘ay “TYOAA “xD ‘oayea “7 ‘AmMYaoO

OIgia “T ‘peyeq ‘g ‘sndo 7 ‘uaqam *5 ‘gaat ‘mnda

"UBSAM “CS “MaSOM °4)

‘Jaqn "J “tapn ‘g ‘snseyn “TT ‘dvgao

reddn *g ‘dn que "5 ‘ipa ‘adjo *aag ‘1aa0 “vg ‘aeyN ‘0

"[oaoy "HT ‘Sita 'T “IA “7 SSoyand

‘TRIA “J “10/3

“OUUeA “7 “SNUUA *'T

Nesulp 27] “elyuey) ‘oH ‘eyuep “D

“Iep -g ‘rep *y ‘o01JeY1 °04

‘snjor "T ‘mhig

"M309 “U0} “CE ‘sNMO} "TT “usp ‘au9} “OD

nie} ‘2 ‘oinep *O ‘sninp “T Nad} *4y “SMSL1} ‘04 “soduug

"Linp “¢ ‘YaInp *4_

“Tep ‘—D ‘allop ‘BH “oMaIp “y ‘“NIy ‘0D ‘Sade

"199M30 ‘19sse} “J ‘mQn2

‘SHLVNDOQ

‘a[aato

“yey

“OF UAL

‘ystiayo

‘OAM

sulpiqe

“ATIAG

‘2A0qe

*9}8}S ULBA

‘yonul

‘pura

‘972 1 pou

‘910

*19A00

‘oun}

‘poxy

‘ssed

‘901}

‘19YIO 9}

‘Moly

‘ONINVS Jil

09)

‘OP ‘PRA

‘eynypeA

‘ee A

‘ol ‘dea

“ese A

‘el “erepn

‘p ‘ed

“eysyeitA

‘9 ‘unyg

APA

‘g “eyeAn

‘ele J,

*g “yoemy,

“eu

‘e ‘eaniud

BEN

‘0B ‘navy,

*B1e1e T,

‘StL

‘LIUMSNVG

{204M

Vey M

“Pam

“TIM

“aAed MA

‘SeM

‘Tappa

‘reddq

“OTTA

‘KIVA

‘uv A

‘sysnoyy,

‘19

‘yonoy,

‘aun J,

‘oni y,

‘ysnoiyy,

‘OL T,

‘1910.

‘SSO,T,

*HSLTONG

Var)

Tables of Comparative Philology.

1843.]

“VIMY “GS “Pyes ‘q ‘8Nj8eo "7 ‘m9n» ‘s}oMY OH) “SSIOA\ +

‘O[IMY “g ‘aToan “gp “BILOM “OD

[eA 7 “[[em “O “ea ‘ay ‘snjom 27 “uIn| [ea 7 ‘dny3

Quumyn ‘SBy[IM “27 ‘sadjna °7

‘ayosea *D Smgixna SSodAa ‘Nysyn 27

"ung ‘Hf “UauyemM ‘4 “UeUaAd “Gy £27370

“seth ‘277 “elem °OX) Salam “D

NYOPOM ‘gz “NYlIM 27 ‘muys “UsZ[eMm “gH “UBITBIA\ “¢

"10M ‘XC : SUprem 27 ‘panes -oy “UINqiaa °7

"URS OLIM °C

‘meres ‘vy ‘ust “gy “Utes “gq ‘aor/d3g

‘OSYOVM *4) “eIsyeaM °09 ‘Oad0A 7 ‘930

‘uezeq “FT ‘agspar ‘aysm °4) ‘OSVA “7 SmnLv

"UBMS ‘9 ‘AUDA “UBM °¢

“opunm ‘ogy ‘apuna "4 ‘mnsno

"mpid3

“eulUlay 77 “elt As “27 SOUTWCAA *4) “Wy “DA “VQUIBA °Ox)

*ysp ‘NZIZSI

“ay ‘oa8e “7 ‘ze *g “eylam °05 ‘neyzsol 2-7 ‘oyostoy 9

nyska ‘27 ‘nppAm -D “Nzta ‘ay “res 0 Smo73 JOM

‘euuld 7 ‘Sumas *¢

“Pui SOPUIM °4) “ePUTA °Ox) ‘B7IIA “7

‘SHLVNDOD

OTM

‘oul

‘19A00

Jom

‘uvalo °

“‘qoopor

‘pugjop

‘oAOUI

‘peal

*‘paxoo.o

“yeoy

‘ay e[NuINIIe

‘oanfut

‘Ap

any

‘rasue

“UeUlOM

“YSIM

05 pay MOuy

‘A[WJIMS SUIOS

‘puno.ins

‘ONINVG JA

‘OF ‘eJaMYS

% ‘BPA

“eT ‘TRA

“exliA

“Ysy

‘a9 A

03 ‘HA

‘g “eae

‘TIBI A

‘eueltiA

‘OT “eulreyy

“ysyeA

“ese A

“eue A

‘ypun,

“ey pods]

“eT “euBA

‘Eg “UST

“eAplA

‘esueylA

eT: ‘pur,

*LIUMSNVG

‘OU M

‘OTT.

TTEAA

FIOM

“USeM

RICE

“IOeM

“HIPM

“PIOM

‘SST AA

‘UI AA

‘XB

‘OSB

‘Ue AA

“punoM

“UTR MA

“UBUlO AA

“YSTMA

‘OST MA

‘SUT

“puaM

‘HSI'ION

hein - 7

er ee

Tables of Comparative Philology.

896

[No. 142.

nn —- ~ ee

Mog ‘a ‘9 ‘ang ‘aay “ol wy “el oy “uh ‘os

reynt] ‘Sosgite ‘Buol “gy ‘yynod

‘OD ‘Ost ‘yf ‘Dols ‘Suny “My ‘nel 44 ‘s0h039 ‘ysnd ‘q “passourey oq 07 34

‘UdYOSIM “4 Se» ong ‘e “UOTOUl

“eoq “HY ‘abphoa “eta "7 ‘ong ‘SeM “¢ SasaM “yD ‘eT “paods

"MUNNoYyea *7 ‘atuezaa “ay ‘MaseM *4) ‘Q[OIyoa

*SHLVNDODH “ONINVG J

‘BAT

‘UBAN

‘og “eASn

‘e “eyse A

‘e] “ed0A

‘F “eueye A

“LIMMSNVG

‘sunox

‘OHOK

“STU AA

‘AU M

‘UOse AN

"HSI'TON

a }

a oe ee Lap pte HM ty”

Dawes

Cr eines tied

Crops Dimopfbe prihe

gine Yee

897

On a new species of Cervus, Cervus Dimorpne’. By B. H.

Hopason, Esq. Resident, Kathmandoo. With a Plate.

In January last, I procured from the Saul forest of the Morung,

a young Stag rising two years, having horns of an unique character,

and a stature and other attributes seeming to place him between the

Axines and Rusans. I considered. this animal to belong to a new

species, but, as he was young and had the horns imperfect, I deter-

mined to wait awhile before noticing him to the Society. The

animal since his arrival has lived and flourished in my stable. He is

now nearly three years old, and his horns are perfect ; but his pelage in

course of moult or change. I will not not, however, longer defer

giving you a summary description and sketch of what I apprehend to

be an undescribed, though large and handsome species of Deer. This

animal, like Cervus Wallichii, and Cervus Elaphoides vel Duvancellii,

possesses a mixed character, so that I hesitate to class it with any

known group at present, and shall merely indicate this attribute by

assigning to it the trivial name of Dimorphé. My specimen has been

reared in confinement: yet it approaches the Rusans in size and

stature, but retains in youth at least a good deal of the graceful

Axine type. Its horns are small, owing to confinement perhaps, and it

is possible that maturer age may develope more snags or antlers. At

present there is but one on each beam, and it has a very forward

direction, as in Elaphus and our Affinis, species to which the present

one is also allied by its short tail and moderate suborbitar sinus.

Cervus Dimorphé, Mihi, new. Deer with moderate pale smooth

horns, Axine in the general style, but more bent in the middle of the

beam, more divergent and possessed of only one basal antler, which is

directed very forward; small, or moderate, and vertical suborbital

sinuses ; interdigital pores ; broad spreading ears and short stag-like tail.

Stature and aspect mediate between the Axines and Rusans. In

youth bright fawn-red, spotted with white; in age nigrescent bay with

blackish neck and belly; a dark list round the muzzle, and white

chin: limbs pale. Habitat the Saul forest.

Nepal, October, 1843.

898

Note on the “ Flata Limbata,” and the White Wax of China. By

Capt. Tuomas Hurron, B. N. I.

This insect occurs abundantly a little above Rajpore, extending

along the jungles at the base of the mountains ; the larva is of a pale

brown, but this colour is completely hidden beneath a coating of pure

white cottony down and powder, with which the whole body is thickly

covered ; from the tail or anal segment of the abdomen springs a thick

tuft or brush of pure white down, which in a state of quiescence,

remains horizontally extended posteriorly, but which the insect has the

power of erecting and spreading out, so as to cover the whole of its

back. These cottony appendages are curled or crisped at the ends,

and when erected have precisely the appearance presented by the cut

and curly ends of a root of celery when prepared for the table. The

larva is furnished, like the perfect insect, with an inflected proboscis ;

the antennz are also similar in both, being composed of three joints,

of which the two basal ones are thick, strong and cylindrical, the

second or middle joint being the longest, and the third or apical joint

is a mere seta or bristle. The eyes of the larva are black, and it is

from beneath them, and a little anteriorly, that the antennez spring.

The hind pair of legs have three short spines, the others are unarmed ;

the foot terminates in a double hook ; and in these respects also the

larva and image correspond, except that the hind legs in the latter

have no spines. The perfect insect is furnished with four wings, the

under pair being pure white, and the upper pair or elytra of a beautiful

apple green, bordered anteriorly with red; the abdomen is powdered

with white cottony down as in the larva, and the last segment is fur-

nished with a thick tuft of the same substance. The larva of this

species is abundant on a certain shrub growing in the jungly tracts a

little above the base of the mountains; they come forth from the ova

in December, clustering round the stems and stalks of the branches

and leaves, and even on the back of the leaves themselves. They

deposit upon the branches a waxy substance of'a pure white colour, in

small grains of various sizes, and sometimes the branch becomes thickly

encrusted with the substance ; it is, however, more especially upon the

leaves of the shrub that the wax accumulates, and this is so thickly laid

on, and becomes so firm from exposure to the atmosphere, that it may

eT eo eras

1843. ] lote on the “ Flata Limbata,” &c. 899

be pared off with a knife in thick scales or shavings, having very much

the appearance of true wax. The taste is sweet, and the scales may,

when fresh, be moulded into balls by the fingers. The reason why it

accumulates so much on the leaves is simply from their catching the

liquid drops which fall from the hundreds of larva clustering around

the stems above.

This wax-like substance appears to be the excrement of the larva,

and as it falls from them it is caught and collected upon the surface

of the leaves, which at first appear to be only slightly sprinkled with

moisture, and have a shining appearance like that caused by certain

species of aphides. The liquid dropped is at first sticky to the touch,

and sweet in taste; the leaves appearing to be thinly bedewed with

honey ; this gradually accumulates, and as it passes from a liquid to a

solid state, appears like a thick coating of wax upon the leaves, but as

it dries by exposure to the sun and atmosphere, it hardens into a snowy

white brittle substance, giving the tree the appearance of being white-

washed, or frosted over with white sugar, like the top of a Twelfth

Night cake. It then cracks and falls in pieces to the ground, where it

soon dissolves from rain and dews, and is lost.

The larva cluster so thickly round the stems of the shrubs which

they frequent, as to give them the appearance of being loaded with

snow, and the moment the tree is shaken, they spring off with a sudden

jerk in all directions ; when in motion, they erect the caudal appendage

or cottony tail.

Some of the mature insects remain on the trees even after the larva

are hatched, and I have taken many both in January and February ;

the green colour of the elytra had, however, given place to a faded

yellow tinge like a withered leaf, and the insects were in a semi-lethar-

gic state. |

The larva appears in December or beginning of January, and gra-

dually increases in size until the period of the rains, that is, until the

middle of June, when they change to the perfect insect, and no more

wax is deposited. ‘Bhis substance increases in quantity as the larva

increases in size, but as it readily dissolves in water, it disappears

entirely as soon as the rains have set in. The larva shews no rudi-

ments of wings until its last moult, in which stage Donovan has figured

the larva of F. nigricornis.

900 Note on the “* Flata Limbata,” [ No. 142.

The last change being completed, the perfect insect now assumes

the place of the larva, and clusters in hundreds around the stems of the

same shrubs that nourished it through its immature stages, and instead

of the snowy aspect which they formerly wore, the twigs are now, as

it were, encircled by small green leaves or fruit.

I have never seen the Flata Limbata in motion unless when disturb-

ed. They appear to pass their lives in a state of inactivity, merely

moving round the stems of the shrubs, and never willingly leaving them

until disturbed, when they spring off with a sudden hop, as the larva

did before them, and like them, although dispersed far and wide,

they gradually make their way back to the twigs of their favorite

bushes.

The eggs are deposited within the twigs of the shrubs, which are

punctured in patches of about one inch in length all round the stem,

which frequently bears four or five of these nests ; the places of deposit

are detected by a slight swelling of the wood.

It is stated in Westwood’s edition of Donovan’s insects of China, that

the wax deposited by the “ Plata nigricornis,” has been supposed to

be the excrement of the insect, but that such is not in reality the case.

I am of opinion, however, that the supposition is correct, and that the

wax-like substance is nothing more than an accumulation of the faces

dropped in a liquid state from the larva, and I am strengthened in this

belief from observing, that a perfect shower of minute liquid drops

descends at intervals from the clusters of larva, and that these drops

after accumulating and partially drying, are converted into the waxy

state from which it is supposed wax candles are made, and which fur-

nishes the famous white wax of the Chinese Empire. It has been

suggested, that the liquid drops are an exudation from the punctured

branches of the tree, but this I think is impossible; because in the first

place, the drops of liquid are so minute and so sticky, that they would

not have weight enough to cause them to detach themselves from the

punctured stems; and secondly, because the larva are so closely

clustered together round the stems, that any juices dropping from the

tree, would never reach the ground, but must inevitably be intercepted

by, and accumulated upon the bodies of the larva, which would thereby

be destroyed. From these observations I am of opinion, that the liquid

is the excrement of the larva, and it appears to differ very little from

ke 7 aa

1843. ] and the White Wax of China. 901

the white powder and anal canopy of white cottony down with which

the insect is loaded.

Kirby and Spence seem to think it very doubtful whether the

Chinese wax is in reality the produce of the “ Plata limbata;” and

remark, that as Sir G. Staunton merely supposes that such is the case,

and as he does not appear to have tried the experiment of dissolving

the wax in oil, there is more reason to believe, that the white wax of

China is the produce of a totally different species. In this opinion I

most fully concur, from the results of experiments made on the wax-

like substance procured from the “ Flata limbata.”

Westwood refers the wax to the “‘ Plata nigricornis” of China, and

states that the F’. limbata inhabits Ceylon. Cramer, who figures both

insects, gives Ceylon as the habitat of F’. limbata, but assigns Africa

as that of #. nigricornis ; the specimen of the latter however, figured

in Donovan’s Insects of China, is said to have been taken from India. It

is probable, therefore, that /. dimbata may occurin Ceylon, India and

China, and that FP. nzgricornis may likewise be found in the two latter

countries, for Chinese forms are exceedingly common in this part of

India, and this season I have captured both the Chinese Atlas Moth

( Saturnia Atlas, ) and two fine specimens of “ Buprestis bicolor,” said

to be an inhabitant of Java.* I have likewise a species of Flata

agreeing in all respects with F. nigricornis, except in wanting the row

of black dots along the posterior margin of the elytra.

The newly-deposited wax of Flata limbata I found to dissolve

readily in water, and when boiled and allowed to cool, a deposit of

clear white crystals was formed in the vessel ; these had no taste, and

felt gritty in the mouth. On trying to dissolve this deposit in warm

or even in boiling oil, no combination of the two took place, nor was

I more successful in my endeavours to dissolve the crude wax in oil;

while the attempt to melt it on the fire without water or oil proved

altogether abortive, the wax merely burning and consuming away till

it became converted into a hard and baked substance. Melted in

water, the mixture assumed a brownish hue with strong aromatic scent.

Thus all my endeavours to convert the substance into wax for econo-

mical purposes, according to the directions given in Westwood’s edition

* Mr. W. H. Benson also possesses a specimen of B. bicolor, taken here some years

since.

902 Note on the “ Flata Limbata,” [ No. 142.

of Donovan’s Insects of China, failed most completely, thereby proving

the doubts of Messrs. Kirby and Spence to be well founded, and clearly

shewing, that the article termed the white wax of China, is not the

produce of the “ Flata limbata.”

Regarding the Chinese wax, Du Halde informs us in his ‘ Histoire —

de la Chine,’ that “Il y en a qui disent que c’est la fiente de ces in-

sectes qui s’attachant a l’arbre forme cette cire, mats ils se trompent.”

(Westwood’s Donovan’s Insects of China, p. 41.) Notwithstanding

this assertion, I am of opinion that if Du Halde refers to F. limbata,

he is himself in error, and that the wax-like substance produced by that

species, which Kirby declares to be the Chinese insect adverted to, is

nothing more, as I have above stated than the feces of the larve. Is

it, however, fully ascertained that the species of insect referred to by

the above named author, is really the F’. limbata, or even the F’. nigri-

cornis, as stated by Donovan? This at least is certain, namely, that if

the wax of the Chinese insect is soluble in warm oil, as Du Halde and

Sir G. Staunton have declared it to be, it cannot possibly be the pro-

duce of the FP. limbata, for I have shewn already by experiments, that

the produce of that species is altogether insoluble in oil.* Besides

this, Du Halde relates that, “after melting and straining the wax, it

is thrown into cold water, where it congeals into smail cakes.” This

too will not hold good with respect to the wax of FP’. iimbata, for after

melting it on the fire and immersing it in cold water, a precipitation of

beautiful small clear crystals is produced, instead of cakes of wax.

Neither will the substance melt on the fire, nor combine with oil, like

true wax, but requires the aid of water to dissolve it.

It is not improbable that Sir George Staunton may have supposed

this species to be the true wax insect, from the mere circumstance of

its producing a wax-like substance on the branches and leaves of the

shrubs on which it feeds, for he does not say positively that he had

ascertained it to be the fact, but merely that the powder was supposed

to form the white wax of the East.

The Abbé Grosier’s account of the wax insect can moreover in no way

be made to apply to the larva either of . nigricornis or FP. limbata ;

for he states, that the tumours on the branches “increase until they

* Unless some peculiar kind of oil may possess the power of dissolving it?

1843. | and the White Wax of China. 903

are as big as a walnut, and that those nests are the abdomens of females,

filled with the eggs which are to give birth to the cocci, which when

hatched, disperse themselves over the leaves and perforate the bark

under which they retire,” and that the wax is afterwards “perceived

rising from the bark round the body of the insect., (vide Kirby and

Spence, vol. 1. p. 327.) Now as already stated above, the eggs of

F’. limbata are deposited in the branches of the tree, the bark of which

is perforated or punctured all round quite closely in longitudinal

rows to the length of about one inch; their presence being indicat-

ed by a very slight intermescence of the wounded parts. When

the larva are hatched they come forth from beneath the bark, and clus-

ter in hundreds around the stems and twigs, living thenceforward

unconcealed, and depositing a liquid shower upon the leaves beneath

their resting places, which as it hardens in the air, assumes a wax-like

appearance, and eventually becomes pure white like hoar frost, when it

cracks and falls to the ground in pieces of various size and thickness,

and is soon incorporated with the dust.

From all these statements, therefore, we arrive at the positive con-

clusion, that as this deposit will neither melt on the fire per se, nor

combine with oil, it cannot be the substance from which the famous

white wax of China is formed; and we are led to perceive from the

difference in the habits of the larva of Flata limbata, and that of the

insect mentioned by the Abbé Grosier, that the wax is rather the pro-

duce of a species of coccus than of the larva of Plata limbata, or even

of the allied F’. nzgricornis.

Specimens of the wax are sent for analysis :—

No. 1. The crude fresh wax as gathered from the leaves.

No. 2. Is the wax after drying from exposure to the air.

No. 3. Is the deposit of crystals on the cooling of No. 1. Dissolved

on the fire with water.

No. 4. Is a specimen of “ Plata limbata.”

Should the wax, after analysis, be found of any use, either medici-

nally or otherwise, it can be collected in considerable quantity from

January till June. Tuomas Hurron, Captain,

Mussooree, 15th August, 1843. Bengal Army.

904

Qualitative Kxamination of the Native Copper found on Round Is-

land in the Cheduba group South East of Ramree, and forwarded

to the Society by Captain CamppeLi, See Proceedings: Asiatic

Society for April 1843. By S. Mornay, Esa. °

H. Torrens, Esq., Secretary of the Asiatic Society of India.

My pear Sir,—I have great pleasure in handing you the result of

the examination I have made, at your suggestion, of the Copper from

Flat Island.

My own business has occupied me so much lately, that I have had

very little spare time to give to the investigation, or I should have

finished it much sooner. Your most obdt. servt.

S. Mornay.

A. qualitative Analysis of Native Copper found on Flat Island, in the

Bay of Bengal.

A piece digested with heat in dilute Sulphuric Acid for several

days, left a grey powder undissolved, (residuum No. 1.) The solution

was pale blue, precipitated with Bi-carbonate of Ammonia, and re-dis-

solved, all the soluble part of the precipitate with Caustic Ammonia.

In the undissolved part found globules of Mercury, separated them

and dissolved the rest in cold Muriatic Acid. The solution was

greenish yellow: neither boiling nor diluting with water made any

alteration. This solution was affected by reagents, as follows :—

Caustic Potash—White, permanent.

Caustic Ammonia— White, ditto.

Carb. of Soda—Snow white.

Hyd. Sulp. of Amm.—Green black.

Ferro-chyaz. of Potash—Dark blue (whole mass coagulated.) In

some experiments this reagent merely

changed the color of the solution to a

dark olive green, owing to the acidity

of the solution.

Tincture of Galls—Brown,

it therefore contained Titanium.

a ee

1843.] Analysis of Native Copper found on Flat Island, Sc. 905

The above-mentioned solution in Caustic Ammonia evaporated to

crystallization, gave beautiful blue crystals; those dissolved in water,

behaved as follows :—

Caustic Potash—Pale blue, permanent.

Ditto Ammonia—Pale blue, flocculent : in excess of Ammonia,

soluble with the beautiful blue color

characteristic of Copper

Carb. of Soda—Pale blue green, permanent.

Bi-carb. of Ammonia—Pale blue: in excess soluble with the same

blue color, as above.

Hyd. Sulp. of Ammonia—Black.

Ferro-chyaz. of Potash—Brick red.

Tincture of Galls—No re-action.

Mur. of Barytes—Dense white.

they were therefore pure Sulphate of Copper.

Residuum No. 1, melted by the blow-pipe, in the oxidizing flame

with Borax and Phosph. of Soda, gave a limpid gloss: but in the

reducing flame, at the moment of cooling it assumed a beautiful garnet

color, which was permanent, till the bead was fused again in the

oxidizing flame, when it became limpid. When much of the oxide

was used, the lead assumed a clear black instead of the garnet

color. aie

In some experiments, the color was dirty brown, but a little tin

added, immediately purified the color.

These two experiments prove the presence of Titanium and a little

Iron.

Residuum No. 1, digested in Muriatic Acid, cold. (At the bottom

of the vessel, appeared small limpid crystalline scales, brilliant as the

diamond.)

The solution behaved as follows :—

Caustic Potash— White, permanent.

Ditto Ammonia—Ditto ditto.

Carb. of Soda—Ditto ditto, (very voluminous. )

Hyd. Sulp. of Ammonia—Black.

Ferro-chyaz. Potash—Emerald green. (In three days turned opa-

que dark blue and deposited.)

Tincture of Galls—Brown.

906 Analysis of Native Copper found on Flat Island, &c. (No. 142.

Titanium again:

The bright scales dissolved in slightly acidulated water :-—

Caustic Potash— White, soluble in excess.

Ditto Ammonia—Ditto, permanent.

Carb. of Soda—ditto ditto, (dense white. )

Hyd. Sulp. of Ammonia—Black.

Ferro-chyaz. Potash— White.

Tincture of Galls—Pale brown.

Sulp. Acid—Dense white.

Nitrate of Silver—Ditto. ditto, flocculent.

they were therefore Muriate of Lead.

In one experiment, another piece of the copper dissolved in Nitric

Acid, left a heavy white residuum, which, digested in concentrated

Sulp. Acid, left another residuum, which last digested in an excess of

Muriatic Acid, boiled and diluted with water, gave a solution which

shewed the presence of Cobalt ; as under :—

Caustic Potash—Brown.

Ditto Ammonia—Blue rose.

Carb. of Soda—Pale rose.

Bi-carb. Ammonia—No re-action till the Acid was neutralized,

when pale rose.

Hyd. Sulp. of Ammonia—Pale dirty yellow.

Ferro-chyaz. of Potast. Emerald green, (next day dark blue de-

posit. )

Tincture of Galls—Brown.

Cobalt with a little Titanium.

Summary.

This Mineral is an alloy of Copper, Titanium, Mercury, Lead, Co-

balt and Iron, in different proportions.*

Remark.

The different pieces vary in their composition.

; S. Mornay.

No. 13, Chowringhee Road, 28th November, 1843.

* There is, in the Philosophical Magazine for June 1843, an account of a Fahlerz

containing Mercury from Hungary, but we have as yet found no traces of Sulphur or

Antimony with our Mineral. ‘I'he specimen which 1 examined, which was one of the

first sent up by Capt. Williams was nearly pure native copper, with a coating of red

oxide and the blue and green carbonates.—H. P.

ener nn

moON Ef.

‘Day

Year. | Month of

Month.

1839 | January 14,

eeer ee Feb. eer veer

heatee hue 3,

SEEMED EMtS lacs tans

1840 | March 4,

1841 Feb. oF

eeiekiere | od Ue

907

Memoranda of Harthquakes and other remarkable occurrences in Upper

Assam, from January 1839 to September 1843. By Capt. Hannay,

Occurrences.| Remarks.

i i i a i

Earthquake |Felt at Suddeeah, direction apparently from

9. M. S. W. to N. E. preceded some days by rain

and heavy snow in the mountains; air very

cold.

seeeseeseee-/Lhis month commenced hot, with dreadful

hail storms, thunder and lightning.

Earthquake |At Suddeeah, apparently from South to North,

SP. M. strong N. E. wind. Burrumpooter high,

wet and disagreeable weather.—N. B. From

March up to this date, the season unusual-

ly rainy. Small-pox very prevalent, lost

| several men and a native officer from this

disease.

Cholera. |Cholera broke out, and continued with more

or less severity at Suddeeah until the end of

November; about 30 men in the corps died

—this disease followed a Detachment which

proceeded on service into the Mishmee Hills

on the 18th October, and spread amongst

the Hill tribes——N. B. Although I now

forget the month, I think there were four

eae of Earthquakes felt at Suddeeah in

Total Sun |When the sun was obscured, the air was un-

Eclipse and | usually cold and disagreeable to the feelings,

Earthquake.| even to nausea. About an hour after the

Eclipse passed off, 2. e€. about 1 Pp. M. a smart

shock of an Earthquake, and about 10

minutes afterwards another; both shocks

appeared to have come from south—these

I telt outside, the sky cloudless, but the

atmosphere hazy.

1840. Passed without any thing else remark-

able ; it was a healthy and seasonable year.

Earthquake. |Felt an Earthquake at Gowhatty on either the

9th or I1th, torgot which. This Earthquake

was different to those above-mentioned; it

was accompanied by a low rumbling noise ;

was sharp and stunning, as if a blow bad been

struck under the jaw; the others alluded

to, appeared, on the contrary to have more

of a trembling or rocking motion,

Gales. Strong gales on the Burrumpooter, both this

month and July, from the N. E.

Meteor. (N. B.—In February 1841 at night, a splendid

Meteor was seen at Seebsagur, and in other

stations in Upper Assam. It passed from

East to West of the heavens, and burst.

with a loud report, the first like the firing

of several large guns, and ending exact]

like musquetry file firing.—Individuals on

the Frontier who had not seen the Meteor,

imagined some of the out-posts had been

- ' attacked.

. 908 Earthquakes &c. in Assam 1839—43. [No, 142.

Day |. enh a

Year. | Month. of Occurrences. ‘Remarks.

: Month.

—— ee a a re en

1842 | January 4, | Earthquake |A smart shock felt at Seebsagur; the weather

73 P.M. gloomy, cold and threatening rain; cannot

speak as to duration ; shock similar in motion

to those already noticed.

1842 | June Galess'tty). chien --|From 3d to 6th, heavy gale of wind from

South-west.

sieieu os |OCtODED 29, Earthquake|A smart shock of an Earthquake; duration ap-

about8 Pp. M.| parently from S. W. to N. E. trembling

motion.

1845")0) Pebss oey 2 a. e+ seeeseee/Air unusually wet; a disagreeable month.

“March hp Comet. (Seen at Sakenah on the evening of the 7th of

this month. Head with a common compass

W. 21° South, and of Tail West 47° South—

rain continued most of this month.

April 4, Meteor. /|From East to West seen at Seebsagur, burst

with two loud reports.

April 6, (Earthquake |After a very hot day and close sultry evening,

8 P.M. a severe shock of an Earthquake at Dibroo-

ghur, lasted several minutes. The motion

however was only trembling, affected those

houses which had posts built up by walls ;

duration appeared to be from West or South-

west.

April 7, |Earthquake. |Slight shock felt at Dibrooghur at midnight.

N. B. Both these Earthquakes felt at Seeb-

sagur, Jeypoor and all over Upper Assam.

y severe

3 several

ng and Durrung ;

but none fatal.

, Nowgo

cases at Seebsagur in June,

During these months, Cholera ver

o May 24, | .e-eeeeee++./From this date to 27th May, gales of wind at

S| Seebsagur from S. W. Some of the squalls

‘s very severe, sky in the day time clear, but

| stiff looking, with some white fleecy clouds ;

5 gale blowing hard on 26th along the line of

* the Naga mountains ]5 miles distant, and

on the Burrumpooter, which rose very high.

1843 | June 15, |Earthquake /At 1] a. m. smart shock of an Harthquake ;

ll P.M. motion, vertical.

.eees.| June | 17, |Earthquake |A verysmart shock; at first slight and followed

8 P.M. by a severer one; motion undulating, and

| from the position of a clock which was

stopped, must have come from S. W. or

West; lasted altogether abouta minute. The

weather rainy, with occasional light squalls

from S. W. These shocks felt at Dibroo,

Jeypoor and Sakenah, that of this date ata

few minutes past 8, reported by the Officer

to have thrown down a portion of the bank

of the Burrumpooter.

August | 28, Meteor. |A meteor of no great magnitude passed to

the North, very vivid lightnings in the

S. W. several flashes appeared as if rising

from the ground like the bursting of a

shell.

Sept. 3, |Earthquake |After as hot and sultry a day, (the 2d) as I ever

22 P.M. felt, the clouds gathered to S. W. indicating’

rain, but passed off without any; night very

close and sultry; awoke by a smart shock

| of an Earthquake; cannot speak as to du-

' ration.

te ee

1843.]

Earthquakes 5c. in Assam 1839—43. 909

Day it : Bay i

Year. | Month. of |Occurrences. | Remarks.

Month.

1843 | Sept. 3, Earthquake |After a very hot day, clouds gathered at S. E.

73 P. Me very close and sultry; squall came on a

little before sunset; vivid lightning all

round the heavens ; previous to squall, mak-

ing an extraordinary noise in the heavens

over head like the falling of heavy rain on

distant jungle, or lke the rushing of wind

through a funnel, with this noise you heard

an occasional growl like distant thunder.

When the rain fell, this noise, which had

continued for sometime ceased—thunder

very high in the heavens, but the lightning

one blaze all round. Whilst at dinner, smart

shock from the South.

Memorandum of various Phenomena in 1843. By the kev. N. Brown,

Missionary Assam.

January 14.—Great gale in England.

February 8.—Earthquake at Antigua.

February 18.—Earthquake at Leipsic.

February 27.—The comet passed its Perihelion.

March 3.—Comet seen at Sea 10° S Lat. 25° W Long.

March 6.—Comet seen at Calcutta.

March 10.—Earthquake in England at | a. o.

April 1.—Earthquake at Bellary at 5 a. m.

April 4.—Meteor at Sibsagur,

April 6.—Earthquake at Sibsagur about 8 o’clock in the evening.

April 7.—Earthquake at Sibsagur at ] a. M.

June 3.—Earthquake at Titalyah.

June 15.—Earthquake at Sibsagur at 11 a. M.

June 16.—Earthquake at Sibsagur at 8 Pp. Mm.

June 17.—Earthquake at Ceylon.

August 23.—Evening, a meteor fell near Sibsagur.

September 3.—Earthquake at Sibsagur at 4 past 2 a. M., another at 3 past 7 P. M.

910

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

(Wednesday Evening, the 4th October, 1848.)

The regular Monthly Meeting was held on Wednesday evening the 4th

October.

The Honourable the President in the chair.

The following new Members were balloted for and proposed :—

Dr. A. Sprenger, B. M. S. was duly elected ; and -——

_ W. Ganthony, Esq. was proposed by the Secretary, and seconded by Mr.

Piddington.

The following list of Books, presented and purchased, was read.

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society on the 4th October, 1843.

The Calcutta Christian Observer, October 1843, new series, vol. iv, No. 46.

Presented by the Editor.

The Calcutta Literary Gleaner, Calcutta, August and September 1843, vol. ii,

Nos.6and7. Presented by the Editor.

Supplement to the Oriental Christian Spectator, 2nd series, Bombay, August

1843, vol. iv, No. 8, Presented by the Editor.

The Monthly Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, Cal-

cutta, 1842-43, vol. ii, Nos. 1 to 7.

Hart’s Report on the Trade and Resources of Kurrachee, Calcutta, 1843. Pre-

sented by Government.

Survey of the Route from Kurrachee to Sehwan, Calcutta, 1843. Ditto.

Report on the Kulleeree Canal, 1840, Ditto.

Collection of Papers regarding the course of the Indus, and especially of its

Eastern Mouth and the Branches falling into the Runn of Cutch, Calcutta,

1843. Ditto.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, London, June 1843, vol. xi,

No. 72.

Yarrell’s History of British Birds, London, June 1843, vol. i, part 37.

Wilson’s Translation of the Megha Duta, or Cloud Messenger, 2nd Edition, Lon-

don, 1843. From the Author, H. H. Wilson, Esq. &c. &c.

Stevenson’s Translation of the Sanhita of the Sama Veda, London, 1842.

Selections from the Mahabharata, edited by F. Johnson, London, 1842.

Sanhita of the Sama Veda, from MSS. prepared for the Press by the Rev. J.

Stevenson, London, 1843, (Sanscrit.)

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 911

Read the following letter from the Secretary of the Royal Asiatic Society

of London :—

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.

Dear Srr,—I have had the pleasure to receive, through Messrs. W. H. Allen

and Co. your letter of the 11th May, enclosing a Bill of Exchange for £21, the

amount of two years’ Subscription of your Society to the Oriental Translation

Fund. As Messrs. Allen and Co. have paid the Subscriptions for 1842 and 1843,

the amount of your Bill shall be duly credited to your Society for the years

1844 and 1845. ;

With thanks for your obliging attention to my request for a remittance,

I have the honor to remain, Dear Sir,

London, 14, Grafton Street, Bond Street, Your’s truly,

11th July, 1843. James Rreynotps,

Secretary.

Read the following letter from the Society’s Booksellers and Agents,

Messrs. Allen and Co. :—

To H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Str,—We have received your letter of the 11th May, informing us of your having

resumed the duties of Secretary to the Asiatic Society, upon which we congratulate

you. By the enclosed letter you will observe, that we have paid £21 to the

Rev. James Reynolds, on account of the Subscription of the Society to the

Oriental Translation Fund for the years 1842 and 1843. We shall be obliged by your

attention to our letters of 29th April, and 17th and 30th June last, addressed to

Mr. Piddington, as Secretary to the Society. Weare, Sir,

Your most obedient Servants,

London, July 31, 1843. Wm. H. Atuen & Co.

Read the following letter from Mr. John Murray, son and successor of

Mr. John Murray, of Albemarle Street, London :—

Sir,—Among the numerous accounts of Books which, in succeeding to the business of my late

father, I have caused to be made out, is that of the Royal Asiatic Society,* and I now forward you

a copy of it from 1834, when it was last settled. The balance due to the Society shall be paid as

you direct, as soon as you furnish me with the authority for so doing, and enable me to obtain a

receipt.

IL have to call your attention to the very slow and partial sale of the Transactions for some

years past, and to suggest that, if you were to place the work in the hands of some publisher more

intimately connected with India, the interests of the Society might be more surely advanced.

I have to request you to take this into consideration, and to authorize me to deliver over the stock

now in my warehouse to such Agent as you may appoint. AsI anticipate removing my ware-

house shortly, it would be very convenient to me to resign this charge, which I feel to have been

an honor.—From some error in our enumeration, we paid the Society for certain copies of Vol.

VII, which we now find are still in our hands, I remain, Sir,

Albemarle Street, August 4. Your obedient Servant,

J. MuRRAY.

* Soin MSS. the common mistake of confounding the Asiatic Society of Bengal, with the Royal

Asiatic Society of London,

912 Astatic Society. [ No. 142.

Dr. The Asiatic Researches in Account with Joan Murray, Cr.

1843, June 30. &.s.d.} 1834,

To Advertising to this date, ... 8 80/April1 5 Vol. I.onhand at this date, remains the same.

9 Copies of Vo. VIII, account- Opiteen vi) Ul ie ra me ee WU MGICtOW., ese

ed fcr last Settlement as sold, MOS Vele ees ere see CETHEOIN) ke

but still on hand at 32, less the PAD ey WALL meee nee AR OLELOm bone

Commission, ... -- 1219 3 + 106° ,,° VIII. ... se pees OTCHO) | oe.

28 Vol. XVII. pt. I to “Messrs. OT Syd DE aaa cece solam Vo2hn oh rt:

Parbury and Co, 19-6 19 10 0 TBE pe LSS so seen Laditton 4822-1 12

15 ditto to Asiatic Society, Cal- ON hy ae oe eee «a Vdiditto® 4382-1112

cutta, 19-6 “er ne seen AAD 2G DA e551 che © sas see LIGItEO, Soy el a2

Balance carried forward, » 16 11 3 SO ar OES a ww 2 Gittoe Say ra &

ON asl PVG eve we | “Qiditiony B2..-3) 4

Doig alco VIL) se oie WGMELOM Toe lil,

D5 i eprag eV ee 9ditto 32-14 8

9 ,,° VIIL. Additional Onvhanidean reese trea ees

aiecg 40 ,, XVIII. pt. I. Received 19-6 \ 39

ditto. 10 ,, XVIII. pt. II. ditto2sold 10-6 1 1

80 10

Commission, ... on 6 00

12 1 0 72 10

1843. }

June 30. Balance carried forward, ... Seep ob oie Ui leas)

Vol. 12] 8vo.

—-— By 293 on hand, last settlement Dec. 1829.

1813, June 30.—To Balance car- 284 on hand, June 30, 1843.

ried forward,... 4 9 6 Dsoldy mis, (Va, 4-19

Commission, ea

4 96

4 96 4 96

bo ao Sere sal 1843. ne

Bq wae SsaesatGun'g June 30. Balance carried forward, a 4 96

are eee Bey (Cire en i s oe Ditto on the 18 vols. as per Acct. above, 16 113

AP Sea) yee A ol, SER ae) Due to the Asiatic Society,... ... 2k 9

mMesadagoee Saat oF

‘ss < Sen oe Op

es Ses alway ot : a

ose Sata

The following letters relative to this matter are here inserted for the

sake of connection :—

To J. MuRRAY, Esa. Albemarle Strect, London.

S1r,—I have the pleasure on behalf of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, to thank you for your com-

munication of the 4th August last, forwarding your Account Current with the Society closed to the

30th June last, exhibiting a balance of £ 21: 0: 9 due to the Society, which sum you are hereby

requested to pay to Messrs. W. H. Allen and Co, of Leaden hall Street, on their receipt.

Messrs. Allen and Co. will also receive from you the stock of Books you have on hand on behalf

of the Society. Lam, &c.

Calcutta, 13th December, 1843. H. TorRNEs,

Messrs. W. ALLEN and Co., London.

Drar Sirs,—I had the pleasure to address you on the 5th September last, to which begging

reference, I now take the opportunity to enclose a Jetter to the address of Mr. J. Murray of

Albemarle Street, requesting him to transfer to you the stock of Books he has on hand belonging to

the Asiatic Society, which up to the 30th June, 1843, was as per Memorandum furnished by

Mr. Murray, and is annexed to this communication for your information and guidance. Mr.

Murray has been also requested to pay to you, on your receipt, the sum of £ 21: 0: 9, being the

balance due to the Society from him. This sum you will place to the credit of the Socicty in Ac-

count Current with yourselves. |

13843.] Asiatic Society. 913

The stock of Books which will be received by you, you will sell as opportunities offer, placing

proceeds to credit of the Asiatic Society, and furnish A. C. in course for information.

Ihave &c.

13th December, 1843. H. ToRRENS.

Read the following letter from Messrs. Allen and Co.

To the Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

The 13th June, 1843.

S1r,—We beg to advise you of our having forwarded a case to the above address, by the ship

Essex, containing a marble bust of the late James Prinsep, Esq. We enclose a Bill of Lading.

The Bust was sent to us by Professor Wilson, with instructions to forward it to the Society by an

early opportunity.

We beg to annex for your information, an account of the shipping and other expences incurred

by us, which sum we have placed to the debit of the Society.

We have the honor to be, Sir,

- Your most obedient Servants,

London, June 17, 1843. Wm. H. ALLEN & Co.

Asiatic Society, Calcutta, London, to Messrs. WM. H. ALLEN and Co, per “ Essex.”

Case containing Marble Bust of J. Prinsep, value £105

forwarded by direction of Professor H. H. Wilson. ... £105 00

Charges.

Entry, Wharfarge, Shipping expences and Bills of Lading, ... 0 14 0

June 12,

1843. Asiatic

Society, Calcutta,

H. Piddington,

Esq. Secre- Freight £1:7:0; Insurance on £110. at 40 per cent £2: 4:0

PADY and policy 10s. 500 ocr coe sae pepe Yad 1X0)

£109 15 0

Read letter from Messrs. Collett and Co. acknowledging receipt of the 49

(not 50 as supposed) copies of the Scinde Vocabulary, sent to them for sale.

Read the following letter from the Secretary to Government of India in

the Foreign Department :—

No. 193.

Office Memorandum.

The Secretary to the Government of India in the Foreign Department has

Collection of Papers regard- the honor of forwarding to the Secretary of the Asiatic

ing the course of the Indus, &c.

Survey of the Route from

Kurrachee to Sehwan, each of the printed papers noted in the margin.

Report on the Tradeand Re-

sources of Kurrachee.

Report on the Kulleeree

Society, for deposit in the Society’s Library, one copy of

Canal.

Fort William, Foreign Department, J. THomason,

The 30th September, 1843. Secretary to the Govt. of India.

The Secretary stated, that it had been brought to his notice by Dr. Roer,

the Librarian, that the present Library rules were by no means sufficient

for the careful and exact custody of the Books, and that some amendments

and additions were imperatively required. Ordered, that the Committee

be requested to revise the Library Regulations.

6 E

914 Asiatic Society. [No 142.

Read the following papers, detailing the progress which had been made

since the Meeting of September, in carrying into effect the Society’s reso-

lution to address Government on the subject of the new Volcanic Island

and Copper Ore deposit near Cheduba.

Memorandum by the Geological and Mineralogical Curator, as requested by the Society.

At the September Meeting of the Society was read the following letter of Captain

D. Williams, Assistant Commissioner, Arracan :—

No. 1824.

My prar Sir,—The Soogree, or head revenue officer on the Island of ‘‘ Regaing,”’

or ‘‘ Flat Island,’’ has just made a report, of which the enclosed is a translation, that

on the 26th, 27th, 28th and 29th of last month, a Volcano broke out in the sea, a

little distance South of ‘‘ False Island,’’ and a new Island was formed.

On reference to a chart of Arracan, you will see that ‘‘ False Island”’ is East of

‘¢ Flat Island,’’ and the latter is South of ‘* Round Island,’’ whence I obtained the

Copper Ore I lately sent to the Asiatic Society ; the groupe is situated on the S. E.

shore of the Island of Chedooba. I consider the subject of sufficient interest to

report on to the Society, especially as regards its vicinity to the Island where the

Copper Ore was found. Yours, &c.

Ramree, August 9, 1843. (Signed) D. WittiaMs.

P, S. I have sent for specimens of the new formation.

2. A notice of the Copper Ore alluded to will be found in our Proceedings for the

month of April, but I may briefly state here, by way of connecting the facts for consi-

deration, that in March Captain Williams sent us up some very pure specimens of

rolled native (virgin) Copper, and a ring manufactured from them by a native artist,

which he stated had been found on Flat Island.

I wrote for more of it, as also for information as to the site, and specimens of the

matrix, &c. before reporting on the subject to Government, and Captain Williams

in reply sent me a quantity of gravel and shells from the sea shore, without a

trace of the ore amongst it,* which the native discoverers had brought to him as a

sample of the bed or place where the ore was found. I thought this very

suspicious, and that it was probable that the natives having found out the value

of the Copper ore, were now concealing the spot from Captain Williams, and

wrote again to him, urging him if possible, to send a person in some degree qua-

lified to give us a plain common-sense account of the place where this rich ore was

obtained, upon which I could found a recommendation to Government, in my report,

to have the place properly examined, as there could be no doubt of the value of the

ore ; but that the quantity and expense of obtaining it were the next and most im-

portant considerations. I also mentioned it to Captain Brown and Mr. Howe, the

. * Some more Copper was also sent separately, and these specimens were of a different kind of

Copper ore from those first sent.— H, P.

1843.] Asiatic Society. 915

Naval Officers at Kyook Phyoo, and to the Commissioner, Captain Bogle. Captain

Williams’ last reply was, that he feared that for the present they had no one who

would be likely to furnish a good account, but mentions Captain Siddons, the local

Engineer Officer, to whom I intended to write, but illness for the last five weeks has

prevented the preparing of my report to Government, and further correspondence on

the subject. |

Capt. Williams’ letter was read at the meeting, but omitted in the Proceedings.—

My pear Sir,—An apology is due from me to you for having neglected to reply

to your letter of May last, (1 believe,) about the Copper Mine on Round Island, of

which I am reminded by your letter, just received, of the 28th ultimo.

I should then have informed you, or | now beg to do, that it is necessary for a

scientific person being sent to examine the spot. There is no such individual in this

province that I am aware of, unless Lieut. Siddons of the Engineers, just arrived,

may be ; this must be done too in the fine season between November and April.

I lately sent up two gold Coins found on Chedooba to the Asiatic Society ; since

then I have had brought in two lumps of iron six inches long by 13 inch broad in

the centre tapering to the ends, found on the same spot with the coins ; the natives

here tell me, they are weapons used by the Eastern pirates, which they hurl like a

javelin at boats in attack, and that some such pirate boat must have been wrecked

on Chedooba where the iron and coins have been found. I do not give sufficient

credence to so improbable a story as to induce me to send up one of the Javelins, but

will keep them for the Asiatic Society’s orders. Yours very truly,

Ramree, July 20, 1843. D. WituraMs.

3. It was proposed and sanctioned at the Meeting, that the Society should respect-

fully represent to Government the importance of dispatching some fully qualified

person to the spot to examine into, and report upon it for general information.

4, The principal grounds upon which we may do so are, as they occur to me, the

following :—

First.—The great, and indeed intense interest which geological phenomena of this

kind invariably excite in Europe, as being connected with, and most strongly illus-

trating many researches and theories relative to the past and future changes of our

globe.

Secondly.—Their interest in a maritime point of view, as connected with the ap-

pearance and disappearance of shoals, &c. in seas extensively navigated.

Thirdly.—The occurrence of the phenomenon so immediately in our own vicinity,

and at a spot with which by means of the H. C. S. Amherst, we have a regular com-

municatior ; so that, to use a homely phrase, ‘‘ we have no excuse’’ for neglecting to

investigate it.

Fourthly. —The great interest attaching to it as occurring so near to the spot of the

recent eruption of the mud volcano of Ramree, and so soon after the great earthquake

at Pulo Nias, on the coast of Sumatra, and its forming the Northern extremity

of the great volcanic band laid down by Von Buch as extending only to Barren

Island.

916 Asiatic Society. [No. 142.

Fifthly.—Its undoubted connection with all the singular phenomena of the up-

heavements going on upon the Island of Cheduba, as by Captain Halstead’s report,

and the rich field which the adjoining coasts and islands probably afford for valuable

geological data, as to the former changes which have taken place both there and

further to the Northward and inland to the Eastward.

Sivthly.—The foregoing considerations are geological ones. The presence of the

rich copper ore. makes it perhaps a matter of financial importance to Government to

trace out if possible whence this is derived. It may bea mere ejection from the

volcanos, as is supposed to occur in Iceland, or it may be that some of the islands or

shoals are masses of copper ore, or that rich deposits of copper exist on the mainland

or on the banks of the Aeng river; and I should mention in reference to this, that,

as shewn to the Society at a recent meeting in the case of silver ores, rich ores of

copper (the grey, black, and tile copper ores) might easily be thought common

stones by those unaccustomed to recognise them.

There are, in short, all the possibilities from zero upwards, in such matters ; and it is

rare indeed that the opportunity occurs of tracing out on the same spot at one and

the same time two questions, the one of abstract and the other of practical science.

Lastly.—I need not remark, that in researches of this kind, mere zeal without

knowledge is a very insufficient qualification, and that it would be most unfortunate

were the Society not to represent to Government in the strongest terms, that the

most fully qualified person that can be found shonld be selected, and this plainly on

financial as well as on scientific grounds.

If Members of the Committee of Papers will kindly add such farther suggestions

as may occur to them, we shall be able thereupon to draft a letter to Government,

setting forth the Society’s views on this question, and respectfully soliciting its adop-

tion of them. H. Prippinecron,

13th September, 1843. Curator Mineralogical and Geological Departments.

Memorandum by the Secretary.

I have to submit to the Hon’ble the President and the Committee of Papers, a note

prepared by the Curator of the Museum of Economic Geology, upon the proposed

recommendation to Government, that a properly qualified person be sent to report

upon the peculiar geological phenomena, which have been recently observed in the

neighbourhood of Chedooba Island, as also upon a discovery of copper ore in the

immediate vicinity of the volcanic influence.

The opinion of the Society has been recorded as to the high expediency of such a

measure, and it now only remains to be decided, whether Government should be

addressed as being requested to despatch a proper person, or whether the Society

should not rather propose to select and despatch such a person, superintending,

controlling, and directing his operations, the general charge being defrayed at the

public cost.

I should be prepared in the event of the latter proposition being entertained, to lay

before the Hon’ble the President, the names of qualified persons, from whom an em-

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 917

ployé might be selected, and have even had a proposition made me by a gentleman of

scientific attainments to be allowed to accompany the person deputed as for his in-

dividual satisfaction, giving the advantage of the result of his observations. This

would give us a double set of notes.

I need not say that we have no officer of the Society available for this scientific

mission, The duties of the Museum imperatively require the constant presence

and steady exertion of our officers, for after years of labor we are only just now

beginning to establish order, and the good work must not be relaxed in.

I have the honor to request orders on the above points. H. Torrens,

Vice President and Secy. As. Socy.

H, Torrens, Esa. Secretary, Asiutic Society of India.

Str,—Having heard that the Society contemplate sending a person to investigate

certain Geognostical phenomena in the Indian seas, I beg leave to offer my humble

services to the Society for that purpose.

In support of my pretensions I hand you with this, copies of three documents,

the originals of which I have by me, ready to produce when called for.

Mr. Marshman’s letter I shew you, merely to prove that I have executed work

of a scientific and laborious character in this country, without any assistance, to the

satisfaction of a man well capable of judging it.

The report of Mr. Robt. Stephenson, the Engineer of the London and Birmingham

Railway, upon the plans and estimates for a Railway in Brazil, shews that he was

satisfied with my work in this peculiar line,—and the document upon which I lay

most stress, is the certificate of the Council of Mines of Saxony; on the face

of which you will see, that I have acquired some knowledge of all the Arts and

Sciences which bear upon Mining, including Geology, Mineralogy, Chemistry,

Metallurgy, Assaying, Surveying, and Mining Engineering: all of which may pro-

bably, more or less, be brought into action, on this occasion.

I beg to assure you, that if the Society should entrust me with this interesting

commission, no exertion shall be spared by me to further the objects of my employ-

ers. Your most obedient Servant,

Calcutta, 25th September, 1843. S. Mornay.

Mr. Mornay’s certificate above alluded to is as follows :—

We, the Council of Mines of the Kingdom of Saxony,

Hereby testify, that Mr. Stephen Mornay from London, was matriculated on

the Mining College of this place, by Royal License, dated 9th October 1829, and

that he attended the following courses of lectures with great industry and very good

success ; viz. Mining ; Geology ; Mineralogy ; Petrefactology ; Natural Philosophy ;

General, Technical, Metallurgical, and Analytical Chemistry ; Metallurgy ; Trans-

cendant Mathematics ; Construction of Mining Machinery ; Architecture and Draw-

ing. And that he proved himself zealous in the attainment of practical knowledge

in Geology and Mining. And that his conduct has always been moral and gentle-

manly.

918 Asiatic Society. - No. P42,

To certify these facts, we have, at his request, drawn up this certificate, sealed

with the seal of the Council of Mines. Signed by us.

LS.

Freyberg, 6th October, 1832. Royal Saxon (Signed) Freyvueer v. Herver.

Council of Mines. (Ditto) H. v. Manpbetsion.

Certificate for S. Mornay, No. 1966. (Ditto) R. E. G. Seonirz.

H. T. Torrens, Esa. Secretary, Asiatic Society of India.

Sir,—In reference to the offer of services contained in my letter to you of the

25th instant, and in regard to the payment of those services, I beg to state that I

readily agree to the terms and conditions proposed by you at the Society’s Rooms

yesterday ; viz.

ist. That I receive Co’s. Rs. 400 (four hundred) per mensem, for whole months,

and Co’s. Rs. 150 (one hundred and fifty) per week for broken periods.

2nd. That I receive Co’s. Rs. 3 (three) per diem, for my travelling expenses,

whenever I am not supplied by the Honourable Company, with the means of con-

veyance, and

3rd. That all contingent expenses be defrayed by the Honorable Company.

I beg to add, that my time is in no way engaged, and that consequently I do not

limit the term of my services to any period, but shall be glad to be employed on any

other service I may be deemed fit for by the Society.

Your most obedient servant,

Calcutta, 28th September, 1843: S. Mornay.

The Secretary and Committee of Papers were requested to address Go-

vernment, proposing that a scientific person be deputed at the public cost to

investigate the Geological and Mineralogical Phoenomena of this quarter.

Read the following letter from Capt. D. Williams, 1st Assistant to the

Commissioner Arracan :—

My pear Str,—I have now the pleasure to send you the two lumps of iron that

were found with the gold coins on Chedooba, and which, the natives say, are

the weapons used by the pirates from the Eastward in their attack on boats.

Lieutenant Phayre, the Senior Assistant of Sandoway, proceeds to Calcutta on leave

on the ‘* Amherst,’ and will probably take charge of these lumps of iron, and if I see

him on his way, I will request him to converse with the natives on the subject. I

shall feel extremely obliged for any information that may be gained respecting the

gold coins ; they are not coins of this country, either under the Mug or Birman

dynasties, as Lieutenant Phayre can prove. Yours sincerely,

Ramree, August 23, 1843. D. WiLiiaMs.

The lumps of iron alluded to were exhibited. They are much corroded,

but their form seems to have been, when perfect, a rough double square

pyramid, of about two or three inches on each side joined at the base, which

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 919

is now about two inches only. They presented externally the usual carbo-

nised appearance and softness of iron which has been much exposed to water,

but were found to be internally sound and metallic.

Read the following letter from Conductor Dawe, relative to the remains

of the Dadoopoor Museum, which have been kindly offered to the Society

by Capt. Baker, B. E.:—

To H. Pippineton, Esa. Sub-Secretary, Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Srr,—I beg to acknowledge the receipt of your note respecting the collection which has been offer-

ed to the Society by Captain Baker, and in reply, I beg to inform you, that I find inthe Museum

three or four fair specimens of Mastodon’s heads; a few large masses of the heads of above with the

upper jaws, and the teeth in good preservation ; several of lower jaws of above, the enamel of the

teeth in good condition ; a few fragments of heads and bones of Hippopotamus and Rhinoceros, and

numerous bones of smalleg animals in a fractured state, but which can be easily joined with our

cement. I can also select a variety of the teeth of deer, horse, bullock and the like. But what

I now particularly write for, is, to get your instructions as to the quantity you would wish me to

send, as I find the cost of each six dozen chest full that has been sent down to Calcutta through

the merchants at Meerut, has been on an average 21 rupees each, including land carriage from this

place to Gurmuckteesur Ghat, (eight stages,) and boat hire thence to Calcutta.

As soon as I receive your reply, I shall have much pleasure in selecting what you may require.

I remain, Sir,

Your obedient servant,

Dadoopoor, Sept. 6, 1843. Wm. Dawe, Condr. Canals West of Jumna.

It was stated that Mr. Dawe had been requested to forward the whole of

these valuable relics.

Read a letter from Capt. Thos. Hutton, B. N. I. accompanying specimens

of the Flata Limbata, with that of its wax, and a paper on this Insect and

the White Wax of China. |

The paper was transferred to the Editors of the Journal for publication.

Read the following letter from Capt. Hannay, B. N. I.: from Seebsagur,

Assam.

My pEAR S1r,—Perhaps the enclosed Memo. from this part of the world may be interesting.

I wish I could speak more correctly as to Earthquakes, for we have I am pretty sure a number of

shocks yearly, commencing about January after our first rain which falls about New Year. After

very sultry and close weather the air becomes very cold, and we could thus almost say, that

atmospheric influence had something to say to our Earthquakes, else we are inthe vicinity of some

Earthquaking power. Most of our shocks do not appear to be felt lower down the valley, but I have

understood that at Tezpoor, shocks are very frequent. No volcanoes in the neighbourhood, but the

line of the Naga Hills (nearer ranges) abound in iron and coal and numerous Petroleum springs,

and in the Singpho country springs of white thinmud. You may depend upon my notes of

all the Earthquakes put down in the Memo. The shocks this year have been nine in number, and

severe compared to those of other years, particularly on 17th June last. It is difficult, however, to

ascertain the duration of the shocks. In 1834, an Earthquake threw down partly the old palace

of Rungpoor, and a part ofthe earth opened near Jorehath, from which issued red sand and water.

The Cholera visited the valley in 1834, 1839, and 1843. Your sincerely,

Seebsagur, 5th September, 1843. W. Hanway.

920 Asiatic Society. LNo. 142.

This peculiarly interest'ng document was transferred to the Journal for

publication, and the Sub-Secretary stated, that he had had a copy prepared

for forwarding to Lieut. Baird Smith, who has so zealously taken up this

branch of research.

Read the following letter from G. Buist, Esq. in charge of the Hon’ble

Company’s Observatory at Bombay :—

H. Torrens, Esa. Secreiary to the Asiatic Society.

Dear $1r,—I duly received, through the Bombay Government, a copy of your application to be

supplied with copy of the Registers of the Bombay Magnetic and Meteorological Observatory at

present temporarily under my charge.

Ishould have complied immediately with your request, and forwarded a monthly number of our

observations so far as they extend, that is, from ist September 1843, without delay, but that as we

were on the eve of completing the year, I have thought it better to defg for a few weeks, when the

volume will be sent to you.

I have taken the liberty of explaining this to you for the information of the Society, lest you

should suppose that the delay had arisen from any neglect or inattention.

I have forwarded by the Ship Samuel Boddington, to the address of Mr. Piddington, a copy of a

chart for the use of the Asiatic Society of the readings of nine Barometers observed simultaneously

for 24 hours, projected on curves—the memoir explanatory of this is now nearly ready, and will

be sent by post.

I shall at all times have the greatest gratification of forwarding for the use of your Society,

any documents connected with the Observatory they may desire to possess.

I have the honor to be, &ce

Bombay, 6th September, 1843. Gro, Burst.

Read a letter from Capt. Thos. Hutton, B. N. I. offering for sale to the

Society, a large collection of above 1600 specimens of Natural History

from Affghanisthan and the Hills. The offer was declined, the Society

already possessing a large proportion of the specimens.

Read extract from a letter from Capt Boileau, Magnetic Observatory,

desiring to know whether the Society would be willing to take up the per

lication of his Hygrometric Tables.

It was resolved, that the Society do so.

Read the following extract of a letter from Lieutenant Colonel Reid,

R. E. Governor of Bermuda, and author of the well known work on the

Law of Storms, addressed to the Sub-Secretary, affording a gratifying

proof of the interest taken in that branch of research at home, and of the

advantage which the early publication of the labours of scientific men

through the Society’s Journal affords them.

My pear Sir,—I have received all your six Memoirs, and I believe all your let-

ters, and I should have answered your last one sooner, but for the importance I attached

to the Memoir on the Storms of the China Seas. I have read it with great attention,

and the more I considered it, the more I saw you had bestowed great pains upon it.

As I went on reading, I drew a diagram on the margin for each storm, such as a sea-

man would have to draw, had he no data but his own observations in the midst of a

a yao a, eee ae re

1843. ] Asiatic Society. | 921

storm. If you could get wood-cuts made at Calcutta, such diagrams would, | think,

improve your papers. .

There can be no doubt, as you shew, that some of the Storms as they pass over the

China Sea, have sometimes a course to the Southward of West. At first I thought

the Storm of each of the ships called Theéis must be but one storm: but after attentive

study, I am more inclined to agree with you and with you; paper, which throughout

bears the impression of attentive consideration. I hope you will be able to go on,

and be supported in your endeavours to develop this great subject as regards the

Indian Seas. I do not doubt that you will be assisted by the Governor of Hong-Kong

and the British Government Agents in China, and shall consider whether any recom-

mendation from me can help to procure such aid for you, not from the intrinsic worth

of any recommendation of mine, but of the value of the subject, and the importance

of it in saving life and property.

Here the Admiral on this station, Sir Charles Adam, is giving us great assistance

by requiring all the squadron under his command to improve the mode of keeping

the log books, and helping in what he can to track the gales. One Storm we have

followed from the West Indies nearly across the American continent, at least to the

mountain ridge beyond Victoria in Mexico.

I do not recollect that I sent you a copy of the enclosed printed note.—‘‘ On sailing

on curved Courses when meeting with revolving winds,’”? which has been printed

three times over. 1 hope soon to receive some other tract from you. Believe me,

Yours, &c.

Government House, Bermuda, 23d June, 1843. (Signed) W. REID.

Read the following Report from the Curator Museum Economic Geology,

for the months of August and September.

During the month of August, illness having prevented my preparing a report, the present one

will comprise both months.

Museum Economic Geology.

Our first contribution here is a truly valuable one from Mr. Homfray, to whom the Journal is in-

debted for a valuable paper on the coal mines of the Damoodah District, in 26 specimens from the

Amanath and others of the Palamow Coal Fields, comprising specimens of the strata (in one

instance to the granite) and of various trap dykes of the greatest geological and mining interest.

Mr. Homfray’s letter is as follows :—

H. Prppineron, Ese,

My prEAR S1R,—I have now the pleasure to forward for the acceptance of the Asiatic Society

for their Museum of Economic Geology, a set of specimens of the strata in the Amanath Coal Field

of Palamow District, as also some others from the Palamow Coal Field, together as per list annexed.

I have also sent some of the principal specimens of the sandstone rock which I have hitherto

met in sinking my deep pit at Salmah, now, August 1843, down as low as 275 feet, having passed

922 Asiatic Society. [No. 142.

through Son veins of inferior and thin Coal and one of Tron stone, and am still going down-

ward, having persevered for many years in sinking this pit, and at an enormous outlay of money

to myself alone.

T send also two pieces of the Basaltic Dykes taken from the place where the two greatest Dykes

of the Coal Field of Damoodah actually cross each other ; thus one is from the Bharah Dyke to

distinguish it from that of Salmah, and this Bharah is evidently the most recent, as it runs through

that of Salmah, and the other piece is from the Salmah Dyke at the same locality. The Ironstone

from beneath the Behareynauth Hill is the same sort as what is now smelted near to Gautcole.

From the Barracar I send a piece of the great fault (Greenstone) which throws up and cuts off

abruptly the vein of Coal, and also a curious sample of the Coal found and cut from the vein close

to the fault. I am, Dear Sir,

Yours faithfully,

Golahdangah, Howrah, 18th August, 1843. J. HomFRAyY,

1. Sandstone, the upper one of the Amanath | 15. Black Shale found to the Westward of the

Coal Field. |\Coyle and towards the Kunkur Run.

2. Shale. 16. Limestone (Lias?) from Rotasghur,

3. Sandstone the second. 17. Black Shale from near Bidgeghir by Kuleas

4. Ditto (hard) from the middle of Coal |Copas village.

vein. 18. Ironstone from Potua Agarinthe Palamow

5. Ditto with pebbles over main Coal. Coal Field.

6. Shale below main Coal. 19. Thin Coal from several veins in the river

7. Sandstone below ditto. near Rotas (Palamow.)

8. Ironstone. 20. Five samples of Sandstone from the Salmah

9, Main Coal. pit, now sinking.

10. Conglomerate Sandstone below the Iron- | 21, Clay slate from ditto.

stone. 22. Basalt from Bharah Dyke, ) at the intersec-

11. Black Shale below ditto. 23. Ditto from Salmah net tion.

12. Syenitic Quartz. below ditto. 24. Ironstone from Behareynaut.

13. Granite below ditto. 25, Coal from the fault in the Barracar Colliery at

14. Found in the pass between Shapore and |the fault.

Choperee. 26. Greenstone from the above fault.

- Our next contribution is from Captain R. Ouseley, Assistant to the Agent of the Governor General,

S. W. Frontier, who forwards with the following letter, specimens of Agalmatolite,

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Caicutta.

Dear Sir,—I have the pleasure to forward by this day’s Dawk Banghy, a small package to

your address, containing three specimens which appear to me to answer the description given in

“© Jameson’s Manual of Mineralogy” of Agalmatolite, or Figure stone.

The two smallest pieces I polished myself by rubbing them on a broad file. I have not yet visited

the spot where it is to be found, but am told that it can be obtained in large quantities, and from

all accounts, slates of considerable size might be gained by skilful workmen, adapted for chimney

pieces, tops of teapoys, &c. &c.

As my duty will probably take me in the direction where the stone is found, I shall endeavor in.

the cold season, to proceed to the spot and examine it myself. I shall feel much obliged if you

would inform me whether this may be considered a discovery of any value, and if you let me

know on what points, and regarding what minerals, &c. you would wish to have information, I

shall at all times have much pleasure in forwarding any I may obtain.

I am, Dear Sir,

Yours very faithfully,

R,. OUSELEY.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 923

In reply to which I wrote as follows :—

My DEAR S1r,—Your specimens duly arrived, and I am glad to say are as you supposed Aga-

matolite; the light greenish-white kind is probably the most valuable, but we should have some

good slabs and blocks sent down to ascertain their value im China, where some of the kinds, and of

the varieties of Jade (Axe-stone often found near these rocks,) are highly prized. You may have

seen in the papers that they are shipping the New Zealand kind, which is like transparent green

marble, to China. Carriage is the great obstacle I fear from your quarter, but however, you may be

able to find out a cheap road. Kindly give us early information as to localities, &c. and as the rock

has an evident tendency to seam and split in rhomboidal fragments, any approaching to crystals

would be a great prize if you can find them.

Your best specimen of lead and antimony ore contains a mere trace of silver, but in my report

which has gone in to Government, I have urged the importance of sending a practical man to the

spot. The report is now printing, and I will send you a slip as soon as 1 get one.

Yours very faithfully,

22nd August, 1843. (Signed) H. Fippineton.

From the Superintending Engineer, S. E. Provinces, Major Fitzgerald, B. E. we have received a

box containing the various specimens of Tin alluded to in Capt. Tremenheere’s report of his visit to

the Pakchan river, which with the former one, will thus be available in the Museum for the inspec-

tion of those who may interest themselves in these matters.

Geological and Mineralogical Department.

Observing in a paper published by Brigadier Twemlow in the Journal, No. 135, p. 229, mention

made of “‘indurated clay with fossils” near Ellichpoor, I wrote to him, requesting the favour of

specimens. He has sent us one which is of much interest, a hornstone prophyry with imbedded

casts of shells from thence, and he promises others as soon as he can obtain them.

My DEAR S1R,—I have the pleasure to acknowledge the receipt of your polite letter of the 12th

instant ; it will give me much pleasure if I can be of any use to the Society, and in attention to

your request, I forward immediately a specimen of the fossil shells alluded to in note E. of my

communication of date 30th August, 1841, to the address of the Secretary, of the Agricultural and

Horticultural Society. I shall be glad if you would at your leisure inform me what the matrix is,

and the name of the larger shell if it can be made out. I found the specimen* in the bed of a nullah

at the south base of the range of hills about six miles N. N. E. of this cantonment ; I will search

for the site whence it was washed. _ Lam, Dear Sir,

Yours truly,

Ellichpoor, July 29, 1843. GEORGE TwWEMtow.

As the consideration of my note on the advantage and utility of deputing a qualified person to

examine the new Volcanic Island in the neigbourhood of Ramree, and the site from whence the

copper ore was obtained, has formed a special matter of discussion, I do not further allude to

it here, as it will be found in the Proceedings. H. Prpptneron,

* With others having the appearance of wood outside, as in the small Specimen sent herewith

This is a fragment of fossil bone.—H. P.

Oriental Publications for Sale, at REDUCED prices, by the Asiatic Society.

Works. Rs. Former

Mahabharata, vol. 1st. pages 831, vol. 2d, pages Bete vol. 3rd, pages 859, vol. 4th, Price.

pages 1007, royal 4to. ... “oe Ree abs ane 40 48

Large paper do. do. ate ace os 50 61

Index to the 4 vols. of the Mahabharut complete. de nos iss 6 0

Harriwansa, 563 pages, royal 4to. Se a 5 6

Raja Tarangini, 440 pages, 4to. en Ae ae coe 5 20

Large paper, do. do. aod see éas see ae 8 12

Naishada, 917 pages, vo... ae : 6 6

Sausruta, Ist vol. 378 pages, 2d vol. 562 pages, 8vo. be 8 8

Fatawé A‘lemgiri, ist vol. 763 pages, 2d vol. 759 pages, 3d vol. B65 pages, 4th vol. :

759 pages, 5th vol. 697 pages, 6th vol. 657 pages, royal 4to. per vol. 8 10

Indya, 2d vol. 690 pages, 3rd vol. 682 pages, 4th vol. 937 pages, 4to. sa 8 10

Khazanat ul Im, 694 pages, 4to. ee nae nee 8 10

Jawadme ul Ilm ul Riazi, 168 pages, with 17 plates, 4to. oe 4 4

Anis ul Musharrahin, 541 pages, 4to. eee : 5 5

Sharaya-ool-Islam, 631 pages, 4to. ous Are 8 15

Tibetan Grammar, 256 pages, 4to. ate oe ae nek 8 8

Tibetan Dictionary, 373 pages. 4to. ies oe ate ene 12

Asiatic Researches, per vol. a its 10 12

Burnouf Memoire sur deux inscriptions cunéiformes, Ato. "199 pp: ... 3 0

Burnouf Commentaire sur le Yacna, with notes &c. 2 parts, pp 945.. 10 ata 0

s. As

Burnouf et Lassen, Essai sur le Pali, ou Langue Sacrée de la presqitile au de 1a

du Gange. Paris, 1826, pages 222, 8vo. aes che seen) oO

Elémens de la Grammaire Japonaise, par M. M. Redtiznes et Remusat. Paris,

1825, pages 158, Svo. eee eee see eee eve 3 0

Ditto ditto Supplément. Paris, 1826, pages 31, 8vo. Ane oc

Contes Arabes, traduits par J. J. Marcel. Paris, 1835, avec notes, ae I. pages

484, vol. II. pages 496, vol. IIT. pages 508, 8vo. es oe 8 O

Brosset, Elémens de la Langue Georgienne. Paris 1837, pages 122, Sve. em

Klaproth, Vocabulaire et Grammaire de la langue Georgienne. Paris, 1827, pages

232, Ist part, Svo. ... “a on eae che mere nay Ova)

Cronique Georgienne, traduite par M. Brosset, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 370, 8vo. 200 Ad oF “os 3.0

Choix de Fables de Vartan, en Arménien et en Francais. Paris, 1825, pages 96,

8vo. oe aa ane aes oa Pee Soot ee ss)

Elegie sur La Prise D’Edesse, en Arménien. Paris 1828, pages 112, 8vo. au, 0

Chrestomathie Chinoise—Chinese Characters, 1833, pages 183, 4to. ... espe 10

Meng-Tseu, texte Chinoise, pages 161, 8vo. «x woe O

Meng-Tseu, traduction Latine, par S. Julien. Lutetize ‘tapi nine 1824, pages

593, 8vo. eco eee ace ooo eee 6 0

Lassen, Institutiones Lingue Pracritice. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1837, pages 167,

8vo. seo coo eee eco eco see eee 6 0

Lassen, Anthologia Sanscritica. Bonne, 1838, pages 371, 8vo. ask «. 4 0

Lassen, Gita Govinda, Sanscrit et Latine. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1836, pages 180,

4to. ons coc ove ces one ese con is)

Chezy, Yajnadattabada, ou La Mort D’yadjnadatta, Text, Analysis and Transla-

tion. Paris, 1826, pages 142, 4to. ase vee ave ee So 2S

Chezy, La reconnaissance de Sacountala, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 665, 4to. 2 a aS . 10 0

Geographie D’Aboulféda, Texte tbs. Paris, 1837- -40, pages 586, 4to. ret el

The Travels of Ibn Batuta, translated from the Arabic Manuscript, by S. Lea.

London 1829, 143 pages, 4to. ... az ee ie O10

The Travels of Macarius, translated by F.C. ‘Belfone: London, 1829, pt. I. 114

pages, 4to. ee ise oe 4.0

Memoir of the Emperor Jehanguire, Haitilaicd tion the Persia Manuscript, Y :

Major D. Price, London, 1829, 141 pages, 4to. ab ane ae te O

History of the Afghans, translated from the Persian, by B. Dorn, part I. TLoudeny

1829, 184 pages, 4to. Seas i one o~ 9 0

Han-Koong-Tsew, or the Sorrows of Han, a Chinese Tragedy translated by J.

F. Davis. London, 1829, 28 pages, 4to. sae Seve bane

Vocabulary of Scinde Language, by Capt. Eastwick neon i ph ant ar

Grammar and Vocabulary of the Baloochi and Punjabee Languages. spate Abeta

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Mr. Blyth’s monthly Report for December Meeting, 1842, with

Addenda subsequently appended.*

Sir,—The following donations have been received since our last

Meeting :—

1, From the Barrackpore establishment.

A fine old male of the Wandaroo Monkey / Macacus Silenus). The

skin has been mounted, and the skeleton also set up.

A recent example of the Rhizomys badius, Hodgson, received from

Arracan. This animal entirely accords with Mr. Hodgson’s descrip-

tion in Cale. Jour. Nat. Hist. No. V, 60: and I have also had both

its skin and skeleton set up.

Also a recent example of what I am assured is the Sikim breed of

long-haired domestic Goat, being (if 1 remember rightly) the same as

that erroneously figured by Mons. F. Cuvier as the Kashmir or Shawl

Goat, and nearly similar to the mixed race produced between the latter

and the Angora Goat. In our present specimen, the hair is excessive-

ly copious, as fine as that of the human head, and straight; being

comparatively short on the fore-quarters, where it does not exceed five

inches in length; on the back ,it averages nine inches; and on the

* The lateness of the appearance of this and subsequent monthly Reports due up to

the present time, is owing to the circumstance of my having been too much occupied

at the time the arrears of the Journal were brought up, to pass them severally under

review prior to their being laid before the public, for the purpose of incorporating

what additional information | had received bearing on the subjects treated of, and which

it was desirable should be brought forward upon the same occasion.—E. B.

No. 143. New Serizs, No. 59. 6G

926 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

sides and rump it exceeds twelve inches, the quantity on these parts

being truly enormous, and hanging in dense flakes more or less mat-

ted, which contain large felted masses of the cast inner poshm, that

it would not be possible to separate as now entangled (though, by at-

tention to combing these animals at the season of shedding the poshm, I

presume this might be removed, and the value of the fine long hair thus

enhanced, while the poshm would also be available for ceconomic pur-

poses). The true Shawl Goat, as is now well known, is not a long-haired

race, but has a rigid tubular coat resembling that of the wild Qgagrus,

or of the true Stags, &c., only of twice the ordinary length, beneath

which is the very abundant supply of poshm, or fine silky wool, of

which the Kashmir stuffs are manufactured ; while the Angora breed is

quite devoid of the poshm, having only silky hairs of one quality,

which hang in elegant ringlets to a remarkable length.

Also a recent Himalayan Chicore ( Perdiz chukar ).

2. From Mr. DeCruz, of the Botanic Garden, an unusually fine

specimen of Paradoxurus typus, which has been mounted.

3. From Dr. McClelland, a recent example of Jerax melanoleucos,

Nobis, ante, p. 179 (bis), from Assam.

4. From Mr. F. Harris, a specimen of an Albatross pertaining to a

species new to the museum, being probably the Diomedea melanophris,

Tem. Col. 456, thus briefly described in Griffith's Work, VIII, 572,

which is the only account I can find of it in the library of the Society.

‘“‘ Beak, wings, tail, and streak through the eye, black; the rest dirty-

white.” The specimen before me is under three feet in length, closed

wing twenty inches, tail nine inches, bill to forehead (in a straight

line) four inches and a half, and middle toe and claw nine inches.

Head, neck, and under-parts, with the rump, white, but little sullied,

and merely a faint trace of a dark streak through the eye: mantle,

wings, and tail, black, tinged with ashy; and some unmoulted brown

coverts on the wings: bill pale yellowish, the extremities of both

mandibles dusky, except the extreme tips, which are whitish; and feet

apparently have been cinereous.*

* Another specimen of this Albatross has lately been presented to the Society by Mr.

R. Macdonald Stephenson: it merely differs in having the beak suffused throughout

with dusky, and the hind-neck with smoky-grey ; being probably a female.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 927

Daption Capensis.

5. From Mr. J. Stalkart, a large living specimen of Varanus bino-

tatus.

6. From M. Claude Queiros, a small specimen of a Flying Fish

( Dactylopterus orientalis ), caught off the Cape.

7. From W. H. Benson, Esq., Moradabad, three species of Shells

transmitted by letter in a quill; viz.

Triarta montana, Benson; four specimens, from the Bhountal Lake,

Kemaon.

Planorbis calathus, Benson; six specimens, Moradabad.

Cyclostoma strangulatum, Hutton ; four specimens, Landour.

8. From R. Ince Esq., Superintendent of Salt Chokees, Zillah

Backergunge, three bottles containing—

Specimens of a Gryllus, very destructive to young vegetables, and

which abounds in the Society’s compound. |

One of an Acanthodis, which 1 have also obtained in the Calcutta

Botanic Garden: and

Two specimens of the small Moonah Worm, which Mr. Ince found

considerable difficulty in procuring. This Worm is of a very different

species from that described in J. A. S. XI, 601; having no mandibles

that should enable it to perforate wood. It measures from three to

four inches in length, and is furnished with a suctorial mouth, the

circular lip of which is studded externally with small cones of a dark

colour, and forms on its upper portion a pair of tubercles having each

four similar cones, between and above which tubercles are four other

cones of the same kind: this lip is surmounted by a mask having three

divisions, the central of which is furnished with a very distinct pair

of eyes situate near the first ring of the body, and laterally to each eye

are placed four small branchial lamine. The rings of the body are

very numerous, and are each furnished with a lateral wide lathina,

bearing three packets of bristles appearing like fins; and on the up-

per side of each lamina is a dark spot. Colour, as appearing in spirits,

light brown.

The Collector sent by the Society to Darjeeling has returned, with

examples of the following species, of which those new to the museum

are marked with an asterisk.

928 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143. +

Mammalia.

Ursus labiatus : a skeleton.

* Talpa cryptura, Nobis: a skin, and a specimen in spirits.

* Sorex aterrimus, Nobis: an adult male, and a young one, both in

spirits. (This and the preceding species will be described in a mo-

nograph of Indian TZalpide ).

Sciurus bicolor, Sparrman.

Sciuropterus Turnbullit (?), Gray, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 67; Mag.

Nat. Hist. n. s., J, 584. From recollection of the British Museum

specimen on which this name was founded, I strongly incline to the

opinion that I have assigned this correctly, but have elsewhere given

a description of some Darjeeling specimens, which are inferior in

dimensions to those ascribed to Sc. Turnbullit by Mr. Gray.

AVES.

Falco tinnunculus.

Accipiter nisosimilis, Tickell, J. A. §. I, 571.

Athene Brodiet; Noctua Brodiei, Burton, P. Z. S. 1835, p. 152;

N. tubiger, Hodgson, As. Res, XIX, 175.

Upupa epops.

Bucco grandis ; three specimens.

Franklinii, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 167.

Picus (Gecinus ) Nipalensis, Hardwicke and Gray; doubtfully cited

P. mentalis, apud Jerdon.

P. (Dendrocopus ) Himalayanus, Jardine and Selby: two males.

Cuculus canorus : young of both sexes.

micropterus, Gould: female. f

+ From the same locality, the Society has lately been presented, by Mrs. Oakes, with

a fine specimen of Sciuropterus caniceps, Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist, 1842,

p- 262; one of Sciurus dokriah, Hodgson, J. A. S. V, 232; and one of Sc. McCiel-

landii, Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 151, to which species must be referred Sic. Pem-

berionii, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 887. This little Himalayan Squirrel is represented on

the Neilgherries by Sc. Delesserti, Is. Geoff., and in the Malay countries by Sc.

insignis, Horsfield, and I believe others. By E. B. Ryan Esq., the Society has been

presented with a Darjeeling specimen (at least the skiv® was purchased there) of

Felis macrocelis, which species has since been sent from Nepal by Mr. Hodgson. Vide

J. A. S. X1, 275. These two specimens vary much in ground-tint, inclining res-

pectively to grey and to fulyous; but their markings are very similar.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 929

* Cuculus poliocephalus, Latham, v. Himalayanus, Vigors and Gould :

female.

Corvus macrerhynchos, Vieillot, v. culminatus, Sykes: sent as the

Raven of Darjeeling.

Crypsirina Sinensis.

* altirostris, Nobis, n. s., adult and young. Described in

the sequel.

Keropia striata ; Garrulus striatus, Vigors.

Garrulax chrysopterus ; Ianthocincla chrysoptera, Gould.

albogularis ; I. albogularis, Gould: Cinclosoma albigula,

Hodgson.

Ixops Nipalensis, Hodgson: Cinclosoma Nipalense, and subsequently

Alcopus (olim Sibia) Nipalensis, of the same naturalist: six specimens.

Heterornis (olim Cutia) Nipalensis, Hodgson: six specimens,

* Pteruthius rufiventer, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 183, two males.

erythropterus ; Lanius erythropterus, Vigors and Gould.

Leiothrix cyanoptera ; vide XI, 184.

strigula.

— castaniceps.

Parus moniticolus, adult and young.

Certhia Himalayana.

Sitta Nipalensis, Hodgson.

* Temnoris (olim Suthora) Nipalensis, Hodgson.

* Prosorinia (olim Cochoa) purpurea, Hodgson.

* Xiphoramphus superciliaris, Nobis, J. A. §. XI, I76.

*Cinclidium frontale, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 181.

| Calliope (2?) cruralis, Nobis, 2. s. Described in the sequel.

Ginicura maculata.

* Zoothera monticola, Vigors and Gould; three adults, and a young

one.

z urdus ( Merula) peciloptera.

T. ( Geocichla) citrina.

T. ( Petrocincla) affinis, Nobis, ante, p. 177 (b2s).

T’. ( Petrocinela) erythrogastra, Vigors and Gould. NV. B. The sexes

of this species differ remarkably in their first or nestling plumage,

the young males having the wings and tail blue, as in the adult males,

while in the females of all ages these are brown; besides which, the

930 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. (No. 143.

mottled clothing plumage of the young males has the same fulvous

ground-colour as the under-parts of the adult females, this being

whitish in the young females, contrasting greatly with the correspond-

ing garb of the other sex.

*Chaitaris (Hodgson) grandis, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 189; two males

and a female.

Ch. sundara, Hodgson.

Saxicola caprata ; female.

* Rhipidura hypoxantha, Nobis, n. s. Described in the Sequel. (Genus

Chelidorhynx, Hodgson. )

Anthus agilis (? ).

Alcurus (Hodgson) striatus ; Tricophorus striatus, Nobis, XI, 184.

Dicrurus macrocircus, Vieillot.

Coccothraustes melanoxanthus, Hodgson.

*Corythus (?,) Sepahi, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 151; a male and a

female. The minute subdivisions among the F’ringillide are almost end-

less, and many grade and pass insensibly into each other: but this gor-

geous species is certainly out of place in the form typified by C. enue-

leator, whilst the other species described by Mr. Hodgson on the same

occasion by the term C. subhemalayanus [which the Society has also

since received from Darjeeling] is a true Corythus in its plumage, but

a Pyrrhula in its beak. The present bird is more allied to some of the

FEirythospize of Bonaparte, but is distinguished from them by its

larger size and more tumid bill. It is occasionally procured by the

Calcutta bird-dealers.

Erythrospiza (2?) rosea.

Corypha (2?) baghaira.

Treron sphenurus.

Columba ( Macropygia) tusalia. Described in the sequel.

REPTILIA.

Three species of Snakes, one of them allied to the European Natrix

torquata : and

Hyla obtusa, Nobis. A Tree Frog distinguished from the common

H. maculata of Bengal by its nearly uniform dark colour and more

obtuse muzzle; the back is also considerably broader, and the loins are

less contracted. The skin of the entire under-parts is perfectly

1843.) Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 931

smooth, instead of being minutely tuberculated as in H. maculata.

The limbs also are proportionately much larger and stronger. Colour

of the specimen preserved in spirits dark livid brown, with a broad

lateral black band commencing at the nostril, continued beyond the

eye, and becoming less distinct after passing the fore-leg; sides of the

abdomen, and the thigh, a little mottled or speckled, and the fore-limbs

and legs obscurely banded with livid black: beneath pale and spotless.

Length from muzzle to vent two inches and one-eighth, and breadth

behind the eyes seven-eighths of an inch, of the loins half an inch;

anterior limb to end of longest toe an inch and a half, and bind limb

ditto four inches and a half: eyes large and prominent.

PIscEs.

Pimelodus nangra, Buch. Hamilton.

Pimelodus ? Young.

Cyprinus cotus, Buch. Ham.

Gobio isurus, McClelland.

Silurus ? Young.

Solea isostoma, McClelland, M.S.

MOo.Luusca.

Three species of Shells, undetermined.

CRUSTACEA.

One large species of Oniscus, which also occurs on the Neilgherries.

ARACHNIDA.

Two or three Spiders, one of large size, which I have somewhere

seen figured, and which is common here during the cool season, and

also inhabits the forests of Malabar.

INSECTA.

A considerable collection, almost entirely consisting of Lepidoptera,

Coleoptera, and a moderate number of Hemiptera. Among the first,

is the celebrated Purple Emperor Butterfly of Europe ( Apatura iris ),

and various other European species, as Doritis Apollo, Rhodocera v.

Gonepteryx rhamni, the cosmopolite Cynthia cardui (which I have

also procured near Calcutta, and have specimens from Afghanistan

932 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

and from Swan River (!), Papilio Machaon (very small, as are all the

Himalayan examples which | have seen), and some of the more rare

Himalayan species, several of which I have made out from the ex-

cellent work of M. Boisduval in the Suites a Buffon.

The new species of birds from Darjeeling are as follow :—

Crypsirina (Vieillot) alttrostris, Nobis: genus Phrenotrix, Hors-

field ; Dendrocitta, Gould. Nearly allied to the Assamese D. frontalis

(McClelland and Horsfield), with which it would appear to form a

particular séction of the group, characterized by having the bill

shorter, but much more compressed and deeper, than in the others ;—

being in fact absolutely that of Glaucopis, so far as I can remember

the latter. Length fifteen inches, of which the tail measures nine

inches and a quarter, the penultimate feather being two inches

shorter, and the outermost six inches and a half shorter; of wing

five inches and one-eighth; of bill to forehead (through the fea-

thers) an inch, and five-eighths of an inch deep; tarse an inch:

claws remarkably long, that of the hind-toe five-eighths of an inch,

measured in a straight line. The head (including the vertex, but

not the occiput) ear-coverts, throat, and fore-neck (to the breast), are

deep black; wings and tail also black, the coverts of the former, ex-

cepting those of the primaries, pure ash-grey; the occiput and re-

mainder of the neck, together with the breast and belly, whit-

ish-grey; the back, scapularies, upper and lower tail-coverts, vent

and flanks, bright ferruginous (as in Cr. vagabunda); tibial feathers

mingled grey and rufous: bill and feet black. Young similar in

markings, but all the colours, excepting the black and ferruginous,

much duller ; the plumage of flimsy texture.

This is the sixth species of its genus now ascertained to inhabit

India or its immediate confines, besides the Phrenotrix temia, Hors-

field, which Dr. Helfer asserts is met with in the Tenasserim provinces.

The others are as follow :—

1. Cr. vagabunda ; Coracias vagabunda, Latham: figured in Gould’s

Century. Everywhere abundant, I believe, throughout India, and in

the Tenasserim provinces.

2. Cr. Sinensis; Corvus Sinensis, Gmelin: figured in Gould’s

Century. A mountain species, common on the Himalaya, and Mr.

Jerdon thinks that he has observed it in open jungle in the Segoor

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 933

Pass of the Neilgherries, and he has seen specimens killed in the

eastern range of ghats of Southern India.

8. Cr. leucogastra; D. leucogasira, Gould, P. Z. S. 1833, p. 57,

and figured in Zrans. Zool. Soc. 1, pl. XII. Mr. Jerdon has only

seen this elegant species in the jungles of Malabar and the Wynaad,

and it would appear to be peculiar to the Indian peninsula.

4. Cr. rufigasitra; D. rufigastra, Gould, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 80.

‘“‘Nearly allied to, but differs from Cr. /eucogastra in its shorter tail,

and in the less extent of the black colouring on the tips of the two

central tail-feathers, in the chestnut-brown colouring of the under

surface, and in the thickened and more robust bill. India.”

5. Cr. frontalis ; D. frontalis, McClelland and Horsfield, P. Z. S.

1839, p. 163. Assam.

6. Cr. altirostris, Nobis, ante. Darjeeling.

Other species of this genus exist, or appear to exist, in — 7. Cr.

rufa; Corvus rufus, Latham, Supp.; la Pie Rousse de la Chine,

Sonnerat ; and figured by Levaillant as /a Pie Rousse, Ois. de ? Afrique,

pl. 59: which was observed in China by Sonnerat, and is said to be

also found in India.—8. Cr. rujfiventris; Pica rufiventris, Vieillot :

Shaw’s Zoology, XIV, 64. Apparently very closely allied to, if not

identical with, Cr. vagabunda; and said to inhabit Eastern Asia.—9,

Cr. leucoptera, Glaucopis leucopterus, Tem., pl. col. 265, (see also

Griffith’s Work, VII, 184, or Shaw’s Zoology, XIV, 73:) from the

Malayan Archipelago.*—10. Cr. temnura; Gl. temnura, 'Tem., ibid.

337: briefly described in Griffith’s work as — “‘ Plumage dusky-black,

shaded with dark grey; tail curiously scalloped, India?”—And 11.

Cr. varians; Corvus varians, Latham, Supp.; Temia, Levaillant ;

Phrenotrixz temia, Horsfield, Lin. Trans. XIII, pt. I, 162, and figured

and further described in his ‘ Zoological Researches in Java.’ Inhabits

the Malay countries, and (apud Helfer) the British Tenasserim pro-

vinces. |

Calliope (? Gould) cruralis, Nobis. Under this generic designa-

tion, | avail myself of Mr. Jerdon’s suggestion to merge the genus

Larvivora, Hodgson, J. A. S. VI, 102, at least as instanced by the

* This I have just received, and find that it is properly referred to a separate genus—

Temnuris, Lesson. Mr. Hodgson’s generic name Temnoris approaches this too nearly.

934 Mr Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [_No. 148.

Phenicura superciliaris, Jerdon ( Supplement to Catalogue), which

quite agrees with Mr. Hodgson’s description of Z. cyana*: and the

present species is only distinguishable from that bird, on its upper

parts, by a very slight and inconspicuous character; whilst the lower,

being concolorous with the former, but paling a little on the belly, af-

fords a very striking contrast with those of C. cyana, wherein they are

wholly bright ferruginous with the exception of the lower tail-coverts :

the tarsi, also, of our present species are considerably longer, as

in my Cinclidium frontale, and of a dark colour: its wings are

shorter and rounder than in the other species of Calliope; and tail

rather shorter and weak. Length five inches and a quarter, of wing

two inches and five-eighths, and tail an inch and three-quarters; bill

to forehead (through the feathers) nearly five-eighths of an inch, and

typically formed; tarse an inch and a quarter. Colour a full deep

cyaneous, or dark greyish-blue, paling on the belly, and relieved by

a white superciliary streak, confined to the bases of the feathers and

yet shewing conspicuously : bill black; and legs (in the dry specimen)

brownish-dusky. This bird is reported to be a pleasing songster.

The genus Calliope would accordingly consist of the following five

species, all natives of India or the Himalaya, being at most winter

visitants in the low country.

1. C. Lathami, Gould, Icones Avium; Motacilla Calliope, Pallas ;

Turdus C., Latham; Accentor (!) C., Temminck. A regular winter

visitant in Bengal, and found likewise in Central India: being met

with (according to the season) over the greater part of Asia, even in

Kamtschatka. It is closely allied to restricted Turdus.

2. C. pectoralis, Gould, [cones Avium. Has a more graduated tail

than in the others, tipped with white, which also extends over the

basal half of the tail-feathers, except the middle pair, and on the ex-

terior web of the outermost pair: general colour dark ashy, the middle

of the belly white, breast and sides of the throat black, the rest of the

throat bright crimson, and a white superciliary streak. Inhabits the

Himalaya.

3. C. cyana ; Larvivora cyana, Hodgson, J. A. 8. VI, 102; Phe-

* The Society has since received a specimen from Mr. Hodgson, shewing the

above identification to be correct.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 935

nicura superciliaris, Jerdon, Supplement. Nepal: also the Neilgher-

ries.

4, C. brunnea ; L. brunnea, Hodgson, zbid ( Non vidi). Nepal.*

5. C. (2?) cruralis, Nobis, ante. Darjeeling.

Rhipidura hypoxantha, Nobis. Length four inches and a half, by

six inches in alar expanse; of wing two inches and one-eighth, and

middle tail-feathers two inches and a quarter ; bill to forehead (through

the feathers) under three-eighths of an inch, being proportionally

much shorter than in its congeners; and tarse half an inch. Colour

of the upper-parts dusky-ash, tinged with green on the head ; lores

black ; a bright yellow eye-streak, continued across the forehead ; and

the under-parts wholly bright yellow: tail conspicuously white-shafted,

with also white interior edges to the feathers for their terminal half:

bill dusky above, the under mandible pale; and legs pale brownish,

darker on the toes. Darjeeling. Specimen preserved in spirits.

The following are the Asiatic species of this genus at present known

to me :—

1. Rh. fuscoventris, Franklin, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 117; Broad-tailed

Flycatcher of Latham; Muscicapa ( Muscylva) albogularis, Lesson,

Zoologie du Voyage de M. Bélanger, p. 264. Common in the vicinity

of Calcutta at all seasons, but rather of local distribution in penin-

sular India.{ The male has a short, but musical, tinkling song.

2. Rh. albofrontata, Franklin, bid. Common in peninsular India,

extending northward to the vicinity of Saharunpore, where the pre-

ceding species is also met with; but it does not appear to occur in

Lower Bengal.

3. Rh. pectoralis, Jerdon, M. S.§ Length about seven inches, of

which the tail measures nearly four inches; closed wing three inches.

Upper-parts brownish-dusky ; the head black, passing into the former :

* Mr. Hodgson says ‘‘sexes alike,’’? or I should have suspected the female of

C. Luthami to be intended.

+ A Nepalese example of this species has just been received from Mr. Hodgson,

who refers it to his genus Larvivora.

+ The Az. fuscoventris mentioned in Mr. Jerdon’s catalogue as having been seen,

but not procured, by him on the Neilgherries, proved to be RA. pectoralis ; but the

other is included in Col. Sykes’s list of the birds of Deccan, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 85.

§ Briefly described in the first No. of Mr. Jerdon’s ‘ Illustrations of Indian Orni-

thology’, which has just appeared.

936 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [(No. 143.

superciliary streak, throat, and belly, white; the under tail-coverts

_ tinged with rufous: sides of the throat and breast, black, the middle

of the latter marked with oval white spots, smaller in front: wings

dusky, the coverts slightly tipped with albescent; and tail the same,

all but its middle feathers, passing gradually into whitish towards their

extremity. Bill black; and legs dusky. The tail is much graduated,

having its outermost feathers two inches shorter than the middle ones.

Inhabits the Neilgherries.

4. Rh. Javanica ; Muscicapa Javanica, Sparrman ; Platyrhynchus

perspicillatus, Vieillot. Malay countries generally.

5. Rh. nigritorquis, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 97. Philippine

Islands: perhaps identical with last.* —

6. Rh. hypoxantha, Nobis, ante. Darjeeling.

Columba ( Macropygia, Swainson,) [tusalia, Hodgson.} Male fif-

teen inches and upwards, of which the tail measures seven inches

and a half, its outermost feathers four inches and a half shorter,

and the rest evenly graduating; wing seven inches and five-eighths,

the third primary rather the longest, and the second a little

exceeding the fourth; bill to feathers scarcely five-eighths of an

inch, and tarse seven-eighths. Colour of the upper-parts dusky-black,

each feather narrowly but conspicuously margined, and more or less

barred, with deep rufous; the forehead and cheeks whitish-grey,

tinged with lilach: throat whitish: crown gradually more ashy; and

occiput, nape, and hind-neck, successively more broadly margined

with brilliantly glossed extremities to the feathers, of a changeable

hue from green to purplish-red, upon a dark ashy ground; sides of

the breast the same, its medial portion more narrowly thus edged:

belly slightly tinged with pale buff, deeper on the lower tail-coverts:

greater wing-feathers wholly dusky; and tail the same, its four medial

feathers somewhat obscurely crossed with numerous rufous bars, the

outermost pair greyish-white for the basal two-thirds of their exterior

web, and the rest of the tail—except the middle feathers—ashy at

* Add Rh. collaris, Lesson, Rev. Zool. par la Soc. Cuv. 1839, p. 104. ‘* Corpore

nigro; collo antice niveo ; superciliis albis ; caud@e pennis aibo marginatis aut ter-

minatis. Hab. Timor.’’ This description does not well distinguish it from Rh. fus-

coventris.

t+ Mr. Hodgson has lately sent a specimen also of this bird, which he separates

from Rhipidura by the name Chelidorynz, an arrangement which | shall now adopt.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 937

base, with a broad subterminal dusky band, and greyish tips succes-

sively paler to the outermost: bill dusky-black (in the dry specimen),

and feet have evidently been coral-red. Female rather smaller, and

similar to the male on its upper-parts, except that the barring on the

tail is more developed, and the forehead and crown are also cross-

ed with narrow rufescent lines, together with the entire under-parts.

Length about fourteen inches, of which the tail measures seven inches

and a quarter, and wings also seven inches and a quarter. Concealing

the head and neck, this species might almost be mistaken for a Cucu-

‘lus; more especially the female. From Darjeeling, where extremely

common.*

[ While the preceding notices were passing through the press, another

interesting collection of Darjeeling specimens has been submitted to

my inspection, and I have been kindly permitted to make a selection

from them. The following appear to be undescribed :—

* Since the above was written, the Society has received a description of this Dove

from Mr. Hodgson (dated May 1, 1843), who applies to it the generic or subgeneric

term Coccyzurus, remarking further on its Cuculine appearance ; but he mentions

having ‘‘ discovered it some years ago, and written a character of it on the back of

the drawing (No. 663), that went to England long ago to be locked up there!”? His

description now sent is as follows :—

** Vinagine. [To this location of it I demur altogether.—E. B.] Genus Coccyzura

(olim Tusalia), Hodgson. Bill long and slender, as in Columba: wings short; the

third quill longest.” Tail as in the Coccyzine, or very long, broad, and graduated

throughout, with broad ends to the feathers. Legs and feet suited for perching

only, and slender: tarse equal to the thumb: toes long and slender, flat-soled, the

inner and hind bordered, and unequal all: nails large, simple. Rump spinous.

«Type. C. tusalia, Hodgson, Head and neck as in the common wild Pigeon,

with golden-green gloss on latter. Above, brown-black, cross-barred with chestnut

(in young?); below, rufescent-luteous with frequent dusky cross-bars. Alars

blackish. Central caudals like back; laterals plumbeous with broad dark bar as in

the wild Pigeon. Legs, orbits, lores, and cere, red: bill black. Length sixteen

inches and a half: bill to gape one inch; tail eight inches and a half: wing seven

inches and a half: tarse to sole fifteen-sixteenths of an inch: central toe and

nail one inch and seven-sixteenths ; hind fifteen-sixteenths of an inch. Solitary, and

a deep forester: not found in the plains.

** Remark.—This form, like Swainson’s Piilinopus and our Dendrotreron [ Col. Hodg-

sonit, Vigors, P, Z, S. 1832, p. 16], serves to connect the Columbine or Insessorial or

typical Pigeons with the Vinagine (or dentirostral?) or tree Pigeons. It has much

the aspect of a Cuckoo, and ‘the tail exactly of the Coccyzine, the bill of Columba

proper, and the feet nearly of Ptilinopus. It represents Geopelia of the Ptylophyring.

or rasorial Pigeons (ground Columbines), and is closely allied to, if not a subgenus of,

Macropygia.”’

938 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. (No. 148.

Sitta formosa, Nobis. This very beautiful bird appears to present

no sufficient distinction upon which it could be separated from the

ordinary Nuthatches, though the style of colouring of its upper-parts

is peculiar, and its size also is comparatively large: the relative length of

its wing-primaries may, however, be different ; but these were in process

of renewal in the specimen before me. Length about seven inches and

a half, of wing four inches, and tail two inches and a quarter; bill to

forehead (through the frontal plumes) seven-eighths of an inch; tarse

three-quarters of an inch; and hind-toe and claw an inch. Colour of

the upper-parts black, beautifully variegated with different shades of

ultramarine-blue ; the scapularies and rump verdigris ; and the wing-

coverts and tertiaries elegantly margined with white at their tips:

under-parts bright rusty-fulvous, somewhat paler on the breast, and

inclining to albescent on the throat: the frontal feathers are tipped

with white, and around the eye also is whitish, continued backward as

an ill-defined supercilium tinged with fulvous posterior to the eye:

crown and back deep black, each feather tipped with brilliant ultra-

marine, forming large and pointed triangular spots; on the back these

incline more to verdigris, and are dilute and whitish over the shoulder :

wing-coverts black, with strongly contrasting terminal white margins

as described, and more or less laterally edged, as are also the large

alars, with bright lavender-blue, which likewise appears within the

white margin of the tertiaries, and tips their inner-webs; middle tail-

feathers lavender-blue, with black mesial line, the rest black edged ex-

ternally with blue, and tipped with duller blue, the outermost having a

large white spot at the extremity of its inner web, and the next a smaller

terminal spot of the same. ‘‘Irides dark: bill blackish, the lower

mandible pale underneath: and legs greenish horny, with yellow soles.”

Kitta venatorius (var.?). Entirely resembles the ordinary K. vena-

fortvus in form and proportions, but the colour beautiful deep sea-green,

the head a more yellowish-green, and a distinct tinge of yellow on

the sides of the forehead, above the broad black streak through the

eyes; wings sanguineous, brightest on the secondaries and outer

margin of the tertiaries, the latter having the subterminal black bands

and verdigris tips strongly defined. ‘Iris hazel; legs, bill, and eye-

lids, vermillion.” The rump of this most beautiful specimen inclines

a little to the usual verdigris-blue of the species, and there is also a

: 1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 939

slight admixture of the same here and there upon the back and espe-

cially on the scapularies. The specimen is a male, and I conceive it

to exhibit merely the thoroughly mature dress of its species. Of

several examples before me in ordinary attire, both adult and young,

not any present a decided admixture of green on the plumage, and

one only (a young bird from Tenasserim) has the wings rusty-sangui-

neous, others exhibiting more or less trace of the same, chiefly on the

interior of the feathers, the rest being dingy greyish. I also observe

that in the golden-winged species of the genus Garrulaz (v. Crate-

ropus), as G. chrysopterus, affinis, &c., the analogous yellow colour

is similarly convertible to dull greyish, which occasionally margins

the feathers, concealing the brighter tint within.

Muscicapula, Nobis. n. g. The members of this group are nearly

allied to Dimorpha (olim Siphya,) Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1839, p. 651,

from which they are chiefly distinguished by their small size and

feeble legs and toes, the latter approaching them nearer to the Fly-

catchers. The brilliant colouring of the first allies it to restricted

Chattaris (olim Niltava), Hodgson, and also to the group exemplified

by Phenicura rubeculoides of Vigors and Gould, which now that I

have three species appertaining to it, I venture to separate from

Chaitaris, to which Mr. Hodgson formerly referred the rubeculoides.

The following four are referrible to the present division :—

]. M. sapphira; Muscicapa sapphira, Tickell, M. S. Length

five inches, of wing two inches and a half, and tail an inch and seven-

eighths ; bill to gape nine-sixteenths of an inch, and tarse five-eighths

of an inch. Colour of the upper-parts rich dark purplish-blue,

inclining to ultramarine on the rump and upper tail-coverts ; fore-

head and crown vivid smalt-blue; the lores black ; fore-neck and

breast rich purple, with a broad median line of deep and bright fer-

ruginous ; flanks greyish, the belly and fore-part of the wings under-

neath, with the axillaries, white; alars and tail black edged with

blue externally. Bill and feet black. Unlike the three following

species, the M. sapphzra has no white at the base of its tail external-

ly. Procured at Darjeeling. ,

2. M. superciliaris ; Muscicapa superciliaris; Jerdon, Madr. Ji.

XI, 16: Dimorpha albogularis, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 190. Himalaya,

and has been obtained also in Central and Southern India.

940 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

3. M. melanoleuca, Nobis, Hodgson. Length four inches and a

half, of wing two inches and a quarter to two and three-eighths,

and tail an inch and seven-eighths; bill to gape nine-sixteenths of

an inch, and tarse half an inch. Colour wholly black and white: the

upper-parts black, with a broad white eye-streak, and broad longi-

tudinal mark of the same upon the wings, commencing on the coverts

of the secondaries and continued along the margin of the tertiaries,

which in some are further edged with white round their tips; under-

parts also white, and basal half or more of the outer tail-feathers.

Bill and feet black. Nepal, Darjeeling.

4. M. rubecula, Nobis; Dimorpha superciliaris, Nobis, J. A. S.

XI, 190, which specific name must now be transferred to the second

species. Nepal, Darjeeling.

Of true Dimorpha, Hodgson, I know of only two species ; viz.

1. D. strophiata, Hodgson, upon which the group was founded:

and

2. D. auricularis ; Chattarts auricularis, Hodgson, M. S: which

has the ccerulean spot on the sides of the neck common to the species of

restricted Chaitaris, but the rest of its plumage is plain dull olive,

rufescent on the wings and tail, and slightly on the rump, the under-

parts paler and inclining to whitish on the belly. Length about five

inches, of wing two inches and a half, and tail two inches; bill to

gape nine-sixteenths of an inch, and tarse five-eighths of an inch.

Inhabits Nepal and Assam.

Very closely allied to these is the Muscicapa leucura, Gm., the

adult male of which is Sazicola rubeculoides of Sykes: but Mr.

Hodgson makes a separate group of it, though it scarcely differs except

in having the first primary less developed and the second more so.

Of true Chaztaris, I know of three species ; viz.

1. Ch. grandis, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 189. Common at Darjeeling.

2. Ch. sundara, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. san p- 651. Also common

at Darjeeling and in Nepal: and

3. Ch. McGregorit; Phonicura ie Burton, P. Z. 8S.

1835, p. 152; Ch. fuligiventer, Hodgson. Himalaya. The following

species I separate by the appellation

Cyornis, Nobis: having the bill less compressed, the tarsi shorter

and together with the toes more feeble, and altogether partaking more

1849.) Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 941

of the Flycatcher form ; they also have not the brilliant ccerulean spot

on the sides of the neck conspicuous in the foregoing group.

1. C. rubeculoides; Pheenicura rubeculoides, Vigors, P. Z. S.

1831, p. 85; Chaitarts brevipes, Hodgson. Himalaya, and visits the

neighbourhood of Calcutta during the cold season, where I have ob-

tained several specimens; but I have never seen it from the Indian

peninsula.

2. C. banyumas ; Muscicapa banyumas, Horsfield; M. caniatrix,

Temminck; /. aurea? Lev.,* which name would hold precedence ;

M. rubecula, Swainson, Nat. Libr., the female. Southern India and

Malay countries.

3. C. Tickellie, Nobis; M. hyacintha, Tem., apud Tickell, J. A. S.

If. 574. Of a more greyish blue than the preceding species on the

upper-parts, brightening on the forehead, shoulders of the wings, and

upper tail-coverts ; throat and breast light ferruginous, the belly albes-

cent, and under tail-coverts pure white; the rufescent medial portion

of the throat much broader than in the preceding species. Length

five inches and three-quarters, of wing two inches and three-quarters,

and tail two inches and a half; bill to gape eleven-sixteenths of an

inch, and tarse five-eighths of an inch. Bill blackish; legs pale.

Inhabits Central India.t

* I have somewhere seen this identified with M. cantatriz.

¢ Add 4. C. unicolor, Nobis. Vide Addenda to Appendix of present Report. I

annex identifications of most of Capt. Tickell’s other species, described in the same

paper.

No. 1, Hyptiopus lophotes ; 2, Circus ceruginosus ; 3, C. melanoleucos, young; 4,

a good species; 50, Ketupa Leschenauliii ; 6, Strix tongimembris (?), Jerdon; 7, Athene

radiatus, (‘Tickell), — erythropterus, Gould,—perlineatus, Hodgson; 8, Nino

scutulatus (Raffles), v. hirsutus (Tem.); 9, Ceblepyris melaschistos; 10, Trico-

phorus virescens, Jerdon, v. Ixos Psidii, apud nos, p. 181* ante; 11, Dicrurus

cerulescens ; 12, Tepkrodornis superciliosus; 13, Brachypus melanocephalus of

Hardwicke and Gray, vide J. A. S. XI, 792; 14, Cometes krishna; 15, Muscicapa

picata; 16, Pericrocotus princeps; 17, Cyornis Tickellia, Nobis, supra; 18, 19,

the names refer to the same, Muscicapa cerulea, ?; 21, Pericroco-

tus peregrinus ; 22, Sazxicola caprata (?); 23, Copsychus saularis; 24, C. mac-

rourus, — Kittacincla of Gould; 25, Cyanecula Suecica ; 26, Calliope Lathami ; 27,

probably Mizornis (Hodgson) chloris, vide XI, 794 ; 28, ?; 29, Prinia macroura ;

30, Sylvia Indica, 3; 32, Thamnobia fulicata; 33, Lora

typhia; 34, Geocichla citrina; 35, a good species ; 36, Oriolus Hodgsonii, Sw.,

young male; 37, Nectarinia Goalpariensis ; 38, Diceum Tickellia@, Nobis; 39,

Chloropsis ceesmarhynchos, vide p. 956; 40, probably Emberiza fucosa, J. A. S.

XI, 601; 41, Spermestes leuconotus ; 42, Parisoma vireoides of Jerdon’s list; 43,

Pyrgita concolor ? ditto; 44, Pyrgita Aavicollis; 45, Picus Goensis, fem.; 46,

Cox

942 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

To these must be approximated Sazicola nigrorufa, Jerdon, Madr.

Jl. 1842, p. 189; vel Muscicapa rufula, de la Fresnaye, Ad. Delessert,

Souvenirs, &c., pt. ii, 29; which probably will be eventually found to

exemplify another of these small natural divisions, intermediate to the

last and to the Stonechats. | aK

I shall now refer to my former paper on a-collection of birds from

the same locality (Vol. XI. p. 160, e¢ seqg.), certain of which, introduc-

ed as new, I have since succeeded in identifying with previous descrip-

tions, and some of my efforts at monographing various groups I can

now render more complete, from having subsequently received acces-

sions, more or less considerable, to the number of their comprised

species.

Vol. XI, p. 160. Falco Aldrovandi, v. severus, Horsfield. The

Darjeeling male appears to have been rightly assigned to this species ;

but the supposed female and young are distinct: and the Neilgherry

small Falcon mentioned in a note to p. 162, proved to be F. ves-

pertinus v. rufipes, vide p. p. 881-2.*

P. 165. Several small Owls are mentioned, of which the Strix scu-

tulata, Raffles, Str. hirsuta, Temminck, Str. lugubris, Tickell, and

it may be added Minox Nipalensis, Hodgson, are one and the same.

P. 166. I have deemed it worth while to publish a figure of the

Yellow-backed Honeyguide (Indicator xanthonotus, Nobis), which

will shew that that species is correctly referred to its genus, of which

it was assuredly little suspected that any representative would inhabit

the Himalaya.

P. 168. Cuculus micropterus. In my description of this Cuckoo (J. A.

S. XI, 903), I considered certain dark ash-coloured specimens to be

merely the old birds of this species, an opinion to which J still adhere.

Mr. Hodgson, however, thinks differently, having lately forwarded si-

milar examples by the designation C. saturatus. One sent as the

P. aurantius; 47, P. Mahrattensis ; 48, Dendrophila frontalis, vy. Sitta corallina,

Hodgson ; 49, Buceros Malabaricus verus; 50, correct; 51, probably a species closely

allied to Bucco viridis, v. caniceps, of which I have information; 52, Trogon Maila-

baricus ? ; 53, Caprimulgus ——? ; 54, Macropteryx longipennis ; 55, Carpophaga

cenea ; 56, Columba meena ; 57, 58, 59, correct; 60, Parra Indica, immature.

* The Falco Aldrovandi has recently been described in McClelland’s Journal, (1843,

page 283,) as F. rufipedoides. F. vespertinus I have lately obtained in this neigh-

bourhood.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 943

young appears to me to be a female in the plumage corresponding to

the hepaticus variety of C. canorus, which is so prevalent also in the

following species. }

Same page. For Cuculus Sonneratii, read C. poliocephalus, Latham,

vide p. 904. Both of these species (i. e. micropterus and policeephalus )

have recently been obtained in southern India by Mr. Jerdon.

Mr. Hodgson has also forwarded an apparently distinct species by

the appellation C. nisicolor, to which I have no hesitation in referring

the young specimen from Macao mentioned in a note to p. 240, ante.

It is closely allied to C. fugax, from which it is chiefly or wholly

distinguished by its much deeper colouring. Mr. Hodgson’s example

would appear to be a remarkably small one, and is probably a female ;

but the difference of size between it and the young specimen from

Macao is not greater than occurs in the respective series of C. cano-

rus and C. micropterus now lying before me. Length about twelve

inches and a half, of wing six inches and five-eighths, and middle tail-

feathers five inches and three-quarters ; bill to gape an inch and three-

sixteenths. Colour of the upper-parts very dark pure ash-colour;

throat and cheeks the same, as in C. fugax: under-parts and tail

also as in the latter species; but the flanks not barred (in the speci-

men): throat below the chin contrasting with the dark ashy above and

laterally, and the central marking of the feathers of the throat deep

ash, like the rest of this colour, it being very dark on those of the fore-

neck. The Macao specimen is moulting its tail-feathers, but has the

wing seven inches and a half Jong, being probably a young male. Cap,

with the throat, ear-coverts, and sides of the neck, very dark ashy,

and several white feathers on the nape, as in some young examples of

C’. fugax ; interscapularies dusky ash, very faintly rufous-barred, im-

parting a shade of that colour to the part ; scapularies, tertiaries, and

wing-coverts, successively more distinctly barred with bright rufous ;

the fore-neck tinged and the plumage of the breast tipped with the

same; and the under-parts longitudinally streaked throughout with

dusky, shewing no trace of bars on the flanks: lower tail-coverts

dull white: bill and feet as in C. fugaz.

Since the Supplement to my Monograph on Cuckoos was published

(p. 240 ante), Mr. Jerdon has favored me with copies of the descrip-

tions of Cuculide in Lesson’s Traiié. The C. fugax is there des-

944 Mr. Biyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

cribed by the specific name tenwirostris, which term is applied by

Gray in Hardwicke’s Illustrations to the female of C. niger. C. flavus

is described from Bengal and Java, the niger being thus regarded

as identical with it (vide p. 241 anée’;) and a variety (?) is mentioned,

only half the size, but presenting no other difference. There is also

described a C. lineatus: “like C. flavus, but larger; above brown-

grey, darkest on wings and back; beneath rufous, barred with black ;

tail brown above, edged with white beneath. East Indian Isles.”*

The C. ( Chrysococcyx ) lucidus, (vide X1, 917,) would appear to be

Himalayan. At least a specimen occurs in a collection formed partly in

the Himalaya, and partly in central India, presented to the Society

by C. Fraser, Esq.; and a member of this group is mentioned in a

catalogue of Nepalese birds forwarded by Mr. Hodgson.

C. ( Chrysococcyx) chalcites ? (XI, 919). A specimen which I pre-

sume to be the adult male of this species, from Macao, considerably

resembles the young of C. lucidus, and may be described as follows.

Length about five inches and three-quarters, of wing three inches and

a half only, and tail two inches and a half; bill to gape three-quarters

of an inch, and tarse exceeding half an inch, being feathered for only

the upper third. Upper-parts metallic green, not very vivid, and much

bronzed: lower-parts white, transversely barred with the colour above :

tail having an obscure subterminal dusky bar, beyond which, on the

extremity of the inner web of each feather save the middle pair, is a

white spot; the rest of the inner webs of the outer tail-feathers are

barred black and white, successively less defined and more tinged with

rufous as they approach the middle pair: bill blackish, with some

yellow at the base of the upper mandible ; and legs also dark.

To return to M. Lesson’s Cuckoos, it appears that Phanicopheus

calorhynchus (J. A. S. XI, 1098,) is identical with Zanclostomus

Javanicus ; and the Piaya erythrorhyncha, Lesson, would seem to be

referrible to the same. Taccocoa Leschenaultit appears to be identical

with Zanclostomus sirkee. The Phanicopheus lucidus, Vigors, Ph.

* Two specimens from Chusan differ only from the Jndian bird in their rather

smaller size, though the beak appears fully as large. Both are in the plumage

which I have described as the second dress of the male C. niger, having the under-

parts rufous from the breast, and one of them retaining some of the barred nestling

feathers upon its wings. Length of the wings (in both) four inches, and of tail four

inches and one-eighth. Of the Bengal bird, I haye recently obtained female speci-

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 945

Crawfurdii, Gray, and Calobates radiceus, Temminck, I have still no

means of referring to.

Of Centropus Phillipensis, M. Lesson mentions a variety (?) from

Sumatra, only half the usual size: body above dull brownish-black ;

wings dirty rufous.* His young or female from Bengal would seem to

be a state of plumage of C. lepidus : “size of a Magpie; plumage brown,

spotted and zoned with blackish brown, streaked with white on the

fore-part of the neck; tail brown above, rayed with whitish.” C. pu-

milus is doubtless C. Bengalensis, Latham, thus described from spe-

cimens in the Paris Museum: ‘ Male size of a Thrush; bill black

with a white spot; tarsi brown; plumage brown-black tinted with

rufous; tail wedged, broad, brown: from Java (!): female—a little larger

mens in the green-glossed dark ashy plumage, with ferruginous under-parts from

the breast, one of them having the latter much brighter than in any male I have yet

seen, the feathers of its breast being also partially tipped with the same; another

female with uniformly dark upper-parts, has the entire under-parts scantily banded

with dull rufous, and traces of the same also on the forehead and above the eyes; a

third female tends towards the hepaticus variety of plumage, having the upper-parts

dark, with rufous bars, which are darker and less conspicuous on the back and scapula-

ries, but vivid and strongly marked on the wing-coverts and tail, the rump dark with

faint traces of rufous, and the entire under-parts pale and weak ferruginous, with nar-

row dusky cross-bars, except on the under tail-coverts and towards the vent ; a fourth

female, in the true hepaticus plumage, with a ferruginous rump, is that described as

exhibiting the mature female livery, in XI, 909, Well may M. Lesson designate

this bird (or an allied smaller species resembling it) a ‘‘ perfect Proteus.”’

* Such a specimen I have now before me from Chusan, of the size and with the

form of beak of C, lepidus, but the colouring of C. Phillipensis, only the rufous is not

so bright, being washed with fuscous especially on the tertiaries, and the stems

of the dorsal feathers are more coarsely spinous and glistening. Length about

fourteen inches, of which the middle tail-feathers measure seven and a half, the

outermost nearly four inches less; wing six inches: bill to gape an inch and one-

eighth, and nine-sixteenths of an inch in greatest vertical depth; tarse an inch

and a half; and long hind-toe and claw an inch and three-fourths. Should this not

be named, I propose to designate it C. dimidiutus. :

C. lepidus extends into Nepal, a specimen frum that country having been forward-

ed by Mr. Hodgson; and an example of the young in first plumage, from the

Malay peninsula, may be described as follows:—Upper-parts light chestnut,

handsomely barred with black, these bars more narrow on the wing-coverts, prima-

ries and secondaries ; tail green-glossed black, with narrow rufous cross-bars; crown

and neck above longitudinally striated, the spinous shafts of the feathers little

developed, and their lateral margins black: under-parts pale fulvescent, with slight

dusky barring on the flanks, and spots of the same on the sides of the neck: bill

pale yellowish-horn, the ridge of the upper mandible reddish-brown. M. Lesson’s

Bengal specimens above noticed would not appear to differ materially.

946 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No 143.

than the male; bill horny: plumage reddish white, rayed with brown ;

wings bright rufous; tail long, much wedged, brown, edged with red-

dish-white: Sumatra.

“‘ Centropus bicolor ; Paris Museum. Bill and tarsi black: plumage

smoky greyish-white, darkest on head, back, and wings, brightest on

throat and breast; belly and anal region tinted with reddish-ochreous :

tail cinnamon-rufous. Celebes, Moluccas.

“©. melanops; Paris Museum. Size of C. Senegalensis: bill and

tarsi black: forehead, cheeks, and around the eyes, intense black ;

throat white; neck and breast ferruginous; abdomen and anal region

dull black; back rust-coloured; wings chocolate; tail bluish-black.

Java.”*

P. 169 et seg. For a more complete monographic notice of the

Indian Drongos, vide p. 799 et seq., also p. 180 (bis) of the present

volume. Mr. Hodgson has, however, sent specimens of Dicrurus bali-

cassius verus, as his annectans; and has also forwarded from Nepal

D. Fingah, macrocircus, and cerulescens.

P. 175. The following is a more complete list of the species of

Pomaitorhinus.

1. P. erythrogenys, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 1387, and figured in

Gould’s Century, pl. LV. Himalaya. |

2. P. montanus, Horsfield, Lin. Trans. XIII, 165, and figured in

the ‘ Zoological Researches in Java’ of that naturalist. Java.

3. P. schisticeps, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 181; P. leucogaster,

Gould, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 187. Himalaya, Assam.

4. P. Horsfieldi, Sykes, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 89. Neilgherries.

5. P. ruficollis, Hodgson, As. Res. X1X, 182. Himalaya.

6. P. trivirgatus, Temminck, Pl. Col. 443; figured also in the

‘Illustrations of Ornithology’ of Sir W. Jardine and Mr. Selby, pl.

LXIX. Australia.

7. P. turdinus, Temminck, Pl. Col. 441. Australia.

8. P. temporalis, Vigors and Horsfield, Zin. Trans. XV, 330.

Australia.

9. P. superciliosus, Vigors and Horsfield, Zb¢d. Australia.

10. P. rubecula, Gould, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 137. Australia.

* For further descriptions of Asiatic Cuculide, vide XI, 897 and 1095, also p. 240,

ante.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 947

11?. P. frivolus ; Turdus frivolus, Latham, Vieillot ; Australia: re-

ferred to this genus by Mr. G. R. Gray, Mag. Nat. Hist. 1843, p. 192.

The Mexican Orpheus longirostris, Swainson, is strangely referred

to Pomatorhinus by M. Temminck in his Planches coloriées, vide

Fauna Americana-borealis, II. 191. Probably one of the subsequently

described Australian species will prove identical with P. frivolus ;

this genus having been originally constituted upon a single species.

In Dr. Horsfield’s catalogue of the Assamese birds procured by Dr.

McClelland, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 166, P. montanus is included, with

the remark that “no essential difference is apparent between a speci-

men of this bird sent from Assam and the specimens obtained in the

Island of Java, from which the original description was made.” <A

drawing, however, in Dr. McClelland’s possession, taken from the only

specimen of this genus which was procured by him, refers distinctly to

P. schisticeps ; a species which undoubtedly is nearly allied to P.

montanus, as is also the P. Horsfieldi, but all three present constant

differential characters, as follow :-—

In P. montanus, the whole back and scapularies, with the nape, are

bright chestnut-rufous ; crown and sides of the head schistaceous; and

a superciliary streak reaching to the occiput, with the entire under-

parts to near the vent, vivid white, the latter flanked with rufous.

In P. schisticeps, the rufous is confined to the immediate border of

the white under-parts ; the neck, back, and scapularies, being wholly

olivaceous: in other respects like the preceding. The young, too,

present no difference of colour, further than that the crown is browner ;

their wings and tail being also shorter, and the clothing plumage flimsy,

at least in part.

In P. Horsfieldi, the rufous is constantly wanting altogether, be-

sides which the white extends but little beyond the breast, which is

flanked with dusky: in other respects it resembles both the others.

The geographic locations of these three species are different ; and the

Himalayan P. schisticeps is the most likely of them to occur in Assam,

Same page. My genus Xiphirhynchus being identical in name with

Mr. Swainson’s Ziphorhynchus, 1 change it to Xiphorhamphus, and

supply a figure of the species upon which it is founded.

P. 177. I also give a representation of Paradoxornis ruficeps ; but

regret to add that the artist (for whom I furnished a rough sketch) has

948 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

made it look rather too large, from the hardness of the back-outline in

particular, the feet are coarse and ill-drawn, and the wing from bend

should be three-eighths of an inch longer, the addition being made in

front. This species occurs at Darjeeling.

P. 178, e¢ seg. Genus Garrulax, Lesson; Crateropus, Swainson ;

Ianthocincla, Gould; Cinclosoma (in part), Vigors, Hodgson. During

the short time that has elapsed since I published a synopsis of the

species of this genus then known to me, the Society’s Museum has

been greatly enriched by a splendid donation from Mr. Hodgson,

which comprised most of the species described by that naturalist, and

brought the number of those contained in the Society’s collection to

fifteen, exclusive of Wipalensis, which Mr. Hodgson has since classed

in his genus Alcopus (olim Sibia), vide J. A. S. VIII, 38, but now

founds upon it his genus Jzops. The Society has since also received

the Neilgherry G. cachinnans from Mr. Jerdon, and a new species

from Capt. Phayre, Commissioner of Arracan. By some oversight, I

omitted on that occasion to include the G. setafer, Hodgson; and now

that this gentleman has supplied the Society with specimens of the

bird so named by him, I find that a Bootan species in the museum

which I had doubtfully identified with it, though nearly allied, is distinct

from it, besides which are other new species comprised in the follow-

ing conspectus of the oriental members of this group, with which I am

at present acquainted. 9

1. G. leucolophos ; Corvus leucolophos, Gmelin: figured in Gould’s

Century, Pl. XVIII. Himalaya. bad

2. G. Belangeri, Lesson, Zoologie du Voyage de M. Bélanger,

p. 258, with coloured figure: Lanthocincla leucolophos ?, Var., Nobis,

J. A. S., X, 924. Common in the Tenasserim provinces, and procured

by M. Bélanger in Pegu.

3. G. rufifrons, Lesson, [bid., with also a coloured figure. Java.

4. G. perspicillatus, G. R. Gray; Turdus perspicillatus, Gmelin,

— Shaw’s Zoology, X. 325: le Merle de la Chine, Buffon. China.*

5. G. auritus; Corvus auritus, Latham; Spreo auritus, Lesson,

Traité} : Crateropus leucogenys, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 180; le petit

* Mr. G. R. Gray appears to consider this as identical with G. Belangeri, but

Shaw’s description of it would hardly seem to apply to the latter.

+ Spreo of Lesson is founded on Turdus bicolor of Gmelin, apud G. R. Gray.

ne _

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 949

Geai de la Chine, Sonnerat. The specimen described by me was

brought, as I have since learned, from China, which is the habitat

assigned to the species. Vide p. 179 (bis) ante, for some particulars

concerning the individual as observed in captivity.

6. G. Reinwardii ; Crateropus Reinwardii, Swainson, Lil. Zool.,

2nd series, II. pl. LXXX. Believed to be Malayan.

7. G. albogularis ; Ianthocincla albogularis, Gould, P. Z. S. 1835,

p. 187: Cinclosoma albigula, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 146. Nepal,

Bootan. .

8. G. gularis, McClelland and Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 159.

Assam. |

9. G. pectoralis, Gould, P. Z. S. 18385, p. 186; Cinel. grisaure,

Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 146. Nepai.

10. G. moniliger ; Cincl. moniliger, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 147.

Not readily distinguishable from the preceding species, but inferior to

it in size, having the wing considerably shorter, the breast-marking

generally less developed, and the tail-feathers less deeply tipped with

white; the ear-coverts also have less white on them, which is con-

fined to their lower and central portion. Nepal, Bootan.

11. G. melanotis, Nobis. Still more nearly allied to G. pectoralis,

but having the ear-coverts wholly black, forming a large and conspi-

cuous patch; whereas in the other they are silvery-white, slightly

surrounded with -black; the lateral tail-feathers are also still more

deeply tipped with white, and the uppermost longest tertiaries have

- a white spot on their inner web. Arracan.

12. G. MeClellandii, Nobis; danthocinela pectoralis, Gould, apud

Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 160. Assam. Neither in Dr. McClel-

land’s description of this bird (doc. cit. ), nor in his coloured drawing

of it, is any notice taken of the bright rufous nape of the three fore-

going species, nor of the white streak edged inferiorly with black over

the eye, nor of the conspicuous whitish ear-coverts of G. pectoralis,

nor of the greyish-white edgings to the outer primaries; the whole of

which are much too obvious to be overlooked in that species. Hence

I feel little doubt that the present is a different bird from either of

its foregoing nearly allied congeners.

13. G. lunaris ; Ianthocinela lunaris, McClelland and Horsfield,

P. Z. S. 1839, p. 160. Assam.

6 Kk

950 | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

14. G. [ruficollis ;| Corvus pubduya, Buchanan Hamilton. Near-

ly allied to the last, which it resembles in the semi-lunar mark on’

the sides of the neck. Length about nine inches and a half. General

colour olivaceous-brown, darkening on the tail, and passing into ash-

colour on the crown and occiput: forehead, ear-coverts (including

the orbital region), throat, and fore-neck, black : a crescent-like mark of

rufous on the sides of the neck, and under tail-coverts the same. Irides

red. Bill black; and legs dusky. Described from a beautiful and

highly finished drawing, sketched evidently from life, among those of

the late Dr. Buchanan Hamilton. Habitat not stated.*

15. G. variegatus ; Cincl. variegatum, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1881, p.

55, and figured in Gould’s Century, Pl. XVI. Nepal. .

16. G. affinis, Hodgson. M. S. Nearly allied both to the last, and

(judging from description) to the next species. Length about ten

inches, of wing four inches, and middle tail-feathers four inches and

three-quarters, the outermost an inch and a half shorter; bill to fore-

head (through the feathers) an inch, and to gape an inch and one

eighth; tarse an inch and a half. General colour rufescent olive-

brown, more or less distinctly mottled on the back with paler tips

to the feathers; the rump dingy greenish, and upper tail-coverts

rufous: sides of the head, lores, cheeks, and ear-coverts, black, oc-:

casionally suffusing the crown; chin the same, and a broad moustachial

spot, with another behind the ears, white: breast rufous-brown, the

feathers laterally edged with grey; belly uniform fainter rufous-brown,

and lower tail-coverts darker: the wings have a jetty-black spot,

formed by the coverts of the primaries; and the winglet, with the ex-

terior margins of the primaries, is pearl-grey; those of the secon-

daries and tertiaries partly are greenish-yellow, much as in G. chry-

sopterus, the remainder of the tertiaries and tips of the secondaries

being slaty-grey; anterior portion of the wing coloured like the back ;

and basal two-thirds of the tail dull greenish-orange, the rest slaty-

grey: bill black, and feet pale brown. Inhabits Nepal.

* This would seem to be the Iunthocincla ruficollis of Jardine and Selby’s 2nd

series of Illustrations, which I have not seen ; to judge from the following diagnosis

sent me by Mr. Jerdon. ‘‘ I. fronte, genis, auriculis, guld, superiore pectoris, nigris ;

captte superiore colli griseis ; lateribus colli crissoque rufis: colore colli maculé curvatd

extendente ad gulam, corpore alisque olivaceo-griseis, remigibus marginibus griseis ; cau-

dé nigrescente. Hab. Himalayas.”’

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 951

17. G. capistratus; Cincl. capistratum, Vigors, P. Z. S. 18381,

p- 55. Himalaya.

18. G. chrysopterus ; Ianth. chrysoptera, poe Pi feo (88o, sp:

48. Bootan, Nepal.

19. G. erythrocephalus ; Cinel. erythrocephalus, Vigors, P. Z. 8S.

1831, p. 171, and figured in Gould’s Century, pl. XVII. Nepal.

20. G. rufogularis; Lanth. rufogularis, Gould, P. Z. S. 1835,

p. 48: Cinel. rufimenta, Hodgson, As. Res. X1X, 148. Nepal.

21. G. ocellatus ; Cinel. ocellatum, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 55,

and figured in Gould’s Century, pl. XV. Nepal.

22. G. squamatus ; Lanth. squamata, Gould, P. Z. S. 1835, p. 48,

and figured in Jardine and Selby’s 2nd series of Ldlustrations: Cinel.

melanura, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 147. Nepal.

23. G. cerulatus ; Cincl. cerulatum, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 147.

Nepal.

24. G. [pheniceus ;* | Crateropus puniceus, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 180.

Bootan, Darjeeling.

25. G. lineatus ; Cinel. ine Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 55.

Nepal ?

26. G. setafer ; Cincl. setaferum, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 148. Nepal.

27. G. imbricatus, Nobis. Length eight inches and a half; of wing

three inches; and middle tail-feathers four inches, the outermost an

inch and a quarter less: bill to forehead (through the feathers) three-

quarters of an inch, and to gape seven-eighths of an inch: tarse an inch

and one-eighth. General colour olive-brown, darker on the crown,

paler and a little inclining to rufous underneath; the rump and flanks

dingy olive-green; and tail slightly rufescent above, its exterior fea-

thers successively more broadly sub-terminated with dull black, having

their extreme ends whitish: plumage of the head, neck, and back,

slightly rigid to the feel, recalling to mind that of a Coucal ( Centro-

pus), which is also the case, in a slighter degree, in the preceding

species, more particularly on its crown: the feathers of the crown and

neck have shining black shafts, and, together with those of the nape,

are slightly margined with dull olive-green; lores albescent, and the

ear-coverts, sides of the neck, and under-parts, are more or less white-

* Mr. Jerdon informs me that this bird is the Xanthocincla phenicea of Gould,

figured in his Icones Avium.

952 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

shafted, chiefly towards the tips of the feathers; primaries inconspi-

cuously margined with grey, and secondaries with yellowish-olive: bill

and feet olive-brown. Inhabits Bootan.

28. G. cachinnans ; Crateropus cachinnans, Jerdon, Madr. Jl. No.

XXV, 255 (1839), and there figured: Cr. Lafresnayii, Ad. Delessert,

Souvenirs d’un Voyage dans Inde, pt. II, 30; and, it would appear,

Cr. Delesserti, de la Fresnaye, Rev. Zool. par la Soc. Cuvierenne.

Neilgherries. |

29. G. Delesserti; Crateropus Delesserti, Jerdon, Madr. Jl. No.

XXV, 256 (1839): Cr. griseiceps, Ad. Delessert, Rev. Zool. par la

Soc. Cuv. 1840, p. 101, and Deless. Souvenirs, &c. pt. II, 29. Neil-

cherries.

30? and 31? In the catalogue of Dr. Royle’s birds procured at Saha-

runpore and the neighbouring districts of the Himalaya, G. leucolophos

is noticed as inhabiting the lower hills, and two other species are

mentioned of which I have seen no description ; viz. melanocephalus,

on the hills, and striatus, met with in the Kheree Pass. Whether these

be distinct from all the foregoing, remains to be ascertained.*

* In a list of specimens now on their way from Mr. Hodgson, I find three species

mentioned, by the names leucopophlus (Quere leucolophos), erythropterus, and

subunicolor ; this last, with setafer and others, constituting Mr. Hodgson’s division

Trochalopteron, the propriety of adopting which name will depend on whether Mr.

Swainson’s Crateropus Reinwardii be considered admissible into the group, in which

case it must bear the appellation Crateropus.

The specimens adverted to have since arrived, but Zr. leucopophlus (?) and

erythropterus are not among them; and of 77. subunicolor, a nestling specimen only

is sent, of a species nearly allied to Tr. erythrocephalus, chrysopterus, and affinis,

especially to the latter, but having a shorter and thicker bill than in that bird. Ina

nestling example of 7'r. chrysopterus before me, the lunate black spots on the breast

of the adult do not exist, beyond a mere trace of them oni the sides of the breast; being

the contrary of what is observable in the Thrush and various other groups, wherein

the young are more mottled than the adults. Length of the immature subunicolor

about nine inches, of the wing three inches and a half, and tail four inches; bill to

gape seven-eighths of an inch, and tarse an inch and three-eighths. General colour

greenish olive-brown, tinged with dusky on the head, and brighter greenish on the

tertiaries and tail, the latter having a slight wash of aureous; exterior tail-feathers

dusky with white tips, the latter successively increasing to the outermost; edges of

primaries bright golden-yellow, as in affinis, but the narrow exterior edge of the outer

primaries greyish beyond their emargination ; lower-parts dull olive-brown: the dorsal

plumage is slightly margined with black, in the adults probably as much so as in

' sguamatus ; and two or three new feathers growing on the breast are whitish towards

the tip with a dusky margin, indicating that the under-parts of the adult would be

thus mottled: bill dusky above, the under mandible yellowish except at tip; and feet

brown. Nepal.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 953

The only additional species which I at present know of, are four

described from Western Africa by Mr. Swainson, and one discovered

in Southern Africa by Dr. A. Smith:* there are doubtless, however,

several more yet to be discovered in this country. Of those here enu-

merated, Nos. 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 25, and 29, are desiderata

in the Society’s Museum; which contains only bad specimens of some

of the others, as 22 and 23. The Cuincl. Nipalense, Hodgson, as

before noticed, has since been referred by that naturalist to his genus

Alcopus (v. Actinodura, Gould); and now ranks as the type of his

genus Jxops.

Leiocincla, Nobis. n. g. Intermediate to Garrulax, Ixops, and

Leiothrix, the very elegant bird upon which I found this generic

designation has the bill shorter than the head, moderately compressed,

somewhat wide at base, the outline of both mandibles accurved, and

the tip of the upper bent over that of the lower mandible, rendering

the slight arcuation of the former more apparent: nostrils basal, their

aperture a narrow slit at the inferior margin of the nasal membrane :

gape furnish with a few long but feeble bristles. Tarse of mean length,

or rather short than otherwise: the toes formed for perching, and

claws of moderate size. Wings having the first primary half the

length of the third, and the fifth, sixth, and seventh, equal and longest.

Tail long and graduated. The plumage very copious, dense and of

silky texture, especially on the crown and occiput, where the feathers

are much lengthened.

L. plumosa, Nobis. Entire length about nine inches, of which

the tail measures five, its outermost feathers two inches less; wings

three inches and three-eighths; bill to forehead, through the reflected

frontal plumes, three-quarters of an inch, and seven-eighths of an

inch to gape; tarse an inch. General colour different shades of soft

brown, passing into rufous and delicate cinerous-lake; the latter pre-

vails on the lengthened feathers of the crown and nape, and upon the

The Turdus canorus, Lin., is referred to Janthocincla by Mr. Strickland, in a list

of Chinese birds published in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for

September 1843. This is the Baniahbou de Bengale of Buffon, who appears, however,

to mix up two different species under this name, from Bengal and China respectively.

I do not recognise the Bengal bird described by him, but may remark that the native

name he cites is commonly applied to the Black-headed Oriole.

* Crat. Swainsonii, A. Smith, may be one, the figure of which I have not seen;

but Cr. Jardinii of the same naturalist would seem to be a Malacocircus.

954 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

ear-coverts; forehead deep reddish-brown, and throat tinged with the

same: back and rump a rich and less rufous brown than the forehead,

the rufous much increasing in intensity on the medial part of the

wings, especially on the basal portion of the primaries and on the

coverts of the secondaries ; the coverts of the primaries and inner webs

of the winglet-feathers are black; primaries having their inner webs

dusky, and the narrow outer webs of the three first albescent-grey

without markings ; the terminal half and successively more of the other

primaries being beautifully barred with black on a pale rufescent-ashy

ground, and the secondaries and tertiaries with narrower black bars on

a more rufous ground, this colour however again weakening on the

exposed tertiaries: tail somewhat dark ruddy-brown, all but its middle

pair of feathers banded with weak dusky, and passing into the latter

towards the tips, which are white, successively decreasing in quantity

to the middle pair; underneath, the transverse bars are only seen

towards the tips of the tail-feathers, becoming there very distinct, and

ending in dusky-black, which contrasts with the white extreme tips.

Under-parts much paler than the back, but softly tinted, and tinged

with the predominating rufous hue. Bill light horny; and legs pale

brown. The colours of this species recall to mind those of the Wax-

wings ( Bombycilla), and are equally delicate. In the barred mark-

ings of its wings, the character of the crest, and other details of

plumage, it manifests considerable affinity for Zxzops Nipalensis ; the

feathers of which are however much less delicate and silky. Inhabits

the vicinity of Darjeeling.

P. 181. My genus Cinclidium proves to be less allied to Pellornium

than I had anticipated ; and I now supply a figure of the species (C.

Srontale, Nobis), upon which it is founded. The bird is reported to

be a fine songster, heard chiefly in the evening.

P. 183. Péeruthius rufiventer, Nobis. I described this species from

a female example, and have now the pleasure of adding a notice of the

plumage of the male. Length eight inches, of wing from bend three

inches and five-eighths, and of tail three inches and a half, its outer-

most feathers an inch and a quarter shorter. Back and upper tail-

coverts wholly deep ferruginous, as also the tips of the secondaries, of

the longest tertiary, and of all the tail-feathers: head and nape, lores,

ear-coverts, and infra-orbital region, deep black, glossed along the

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 955

edges of each feather ; throat, fore-neck, and breast, pure ashy ; and

the rest of the under-parts, from the breast, a pale brownish-carneous,

with a patch of golden-yellow on each side of the breast, bordering the

grey : wings and tail wholly shining black, except the ferruginous tips

before mentioned. The sexual diversity is accordingly considerable,

the female having the upper-parts, wings, and middle tail-feathers, —

green, and only the upper tail-coverts ferruginous, together with

the tips of the tail-feathers; and the sides of the head grey, which

margins also the feathers of the crown. Some nestling feathers inter-

mingled on the crown of one female specimen, show that that part is

also green, having slight black edges, in the young bird.

P. 184. Indian Letotrichane. A Monograph of this group, by Mr.

Hodgson, with additions and annotations by myself, is now awaiting

publication.

Same page. Parus flavocristatus, la Fresnaye, Mag. de Zool. Jan-

vier, 1837, apud Horsfield; /bid, 1838, apud Lesson, Revue Zoologique

par la Societé Cuvierienne, 1839, p. 42: P. sultaneus, Hodgson, Ind.

Rev., April, 1837, p. 81. This, and the Melanochlora Sumatrana,

Lesson, Fev. Zool. &c., loc. cit., appear now to me to be identical,

my description of the latter in XI, 792, referring to the young.

I have now before me four specimens from Nepal and four from

Singapore; and there is no difference in the length of the wings and

tail, in the size of the bill, nor in any other respect that I can per-

ceive, further than that the mode of preparing the Singapore specimens

makes them appear considerably smaller.

Same page. Mr. Hodgson has rightly instituted a genus Alcurus

for the species which I described by the name 7Z’ricophorus striatus.

P. 186. Chloropsis Hardwichii is referred to Chi. curvirostris, Swain-

son, by M. de la Fresnaye, apud M. Adolphe Delessert, Souvenirs, &c.,

pt. II, 28, where a figure is given of it: Chl. auriventris, Mag. de

Zool., Guérin, 1840, p. 17, may be added to the synonyms collated in

loc. cit.

There are five species of this genus now in the Society’s Museum,

one of which appears to have been confounded with Chi. aurifrons ; a

sixth also inhabits India.

1. Chl. curvirostris, Swainson, or perhaps Hardwickiz has still the

priority. This species has always more or less orange-saffron colour

956 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

on the abdominal region, which in old males occupies the entire

under-parts from the breast, with the exception of a little green on

the flanks posteriorly; these have also the tail and greater portion of

the wing dark purple, the tertiaries and adjoining coverts only re-

maining green, and the flexure of the wing verdigris-blue: throat

and fore-neck black, passing into dark glossy purple on the breast: a

large brilliant smalt-blue streak from each corner of the lower

mandible; and the head and neck tinged with yellow. In younger

males, the purple of the wings commences on the smallest coverts,

and there is sometimes an admixture of this hue upon the tail.

Females have less orange-saffron on the abdominal region, which is

more or less patched with this colour, and the throat and breast are

green, with the moustache-streaks less vivid than in the male. Nepal,

Bootan, Assam.

2. Chl. aurifrons ; figured as Chl. Malabaricus in Messrs. Jardine

and Selby’s ‘Illustrations of Ornithology,’ as subsequently corrected

by them in their Monograph of the genus. Has the crown brilliant

orange, or saffron-red, the feathers rigid and glistening ; throat wholly

glistening smalt-blue; fore-neck black, surrounded by a yellow zone;

wing-flexure verdigris-blue; and the rest green. Two specimens

marked as female by Capt. Tickell differ in no respect from the male,

excepting in being rather smaller, with the blue and glistening portion

of the throat-feathers less developed. The young of both sexes have

the forehead merely yellowish ; the fore-neck bluish-green, surrounded

by pale-yellow; the blue of the throat being confined, or nearly so, to a

dull verdigris moustache; and not any of this colour at the base of

the wing. Inhabits Bengal, Nepal, Arracan, and Central India (neigh-

bourhood of Chyebassa).

3. Chl. ceesmarhynchos,* Tickell, J. A. S. I, 579; Chl. aurifrons,

apud Jerdon. Similar to the last species, but having no trace of blue |

on the centre of the throat, which is pure black, separating two well

defined moustachial streaks of brilliant smalt-blue; and there is also

no yellow zone surrounding the black of the fore-neck. Female with

the black of the fore-neck less extended, and surrounded by pale

straw-yellowish ; the same moustachial streaks as in the male, but not

* This name would appear, however, to be merely a misprint for gampsorhynchus

of Jardine and Selby.

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 957

so bright; and no brilliant orange-colour on the forehead: rest as in

Chl. aurifrons. This is decidedly distinct from the preceding species ;

and if, instead of reading ‘‘throat, part of cheek, and forehead, black,”

we insert the word of before “ forehead,” Lt. Tickell’s description per-

fectly applies to the present bird, which has the part in question similar

to that of Chl. aurifrons: he appears to have confounded it, however,

with the latter, which alone is frequently (and, so far as I have seen,

exclusively) sold in cages at Calcutta; and the specimens here described

are likewise from Central India, though Lt. Tickell has sent examples

of the preceding species from Chyebassa.* Peninsula of India.

In the three foregoing species, and I believe also in the next, the bill

is slightly curved, slender, and tapers to a sharp point: whereas the

two last have a very different form of bill, typified by that of Chl.

gampsorhynchus (young male Sonnerati ?), figured by Messrs. Jar-

dine and Selby. The fifth is, however, somewhat intermediate.

4. Chl. Cochinchinensis ; Turdus C., Auct: Melliphaga Javanica,

Horsf. ‘ Male, with chin, throat, and gorge deep black, surrounded

by a greenish yellow band, which extends through the eyes to the fore-

head; maxillary streak, hyacinth-blue. Female, with parts black in

male of a light bluish-green, surrounded (as in male,) with yellowish

band ; maxillary streak light azure.” Jerdon. Bill rather less elongated

than in the last species. Inhabits the peninsula of. India, and the

Indo-Chinese and Malay countries.

5. Chl. Malabaricus. Considerably smaller than the others, the

male having the wings and tail tinged with azure, in addition to

the ordinary verdigris patch at the bend of the wing, which is un-

usually lustrous; head and neck wholly light yellowish, somewhat

rufescent on the latter; throat and fore-neck black, surrounded by a

pure light yellow zone, and a small short moustachial streak of bril-

liaut smalt-blue. Female wholly green, except in having the blue

moustachial streak, which is narrower than in the male; the throat but

slightly flavescent; and there is no verdigris patch at the bend of the

wing.| Young male similar to the female, except that the wings and

* I have recently received Chi. casmarhynchos from Midnapore, so that it may be

presumed to be also occasionally brought alive to Calcutta.

¢ Mr. Eyton states that ‘‘ the female differs from the male in having the markings

less distinct.””’ P. Z. S. 1839, p. 102.

6 L

958 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

tail are slightly (more or less) tinged with azure. Inhabits the Malay

countries ; and is doubtful, at present, as occurring in Malabar.

6. Chl. Sonneratii, J.and 8.; Phyllornis Mullerti, Tem. ; the female

Chi. zosterops of the Monograph by Messrs. Jardine and Selby; and

the young male apparently Chl. gampsorhynchus of the same. Adult

male having the throat, loral region, and intermediate space, intense

black, with a narrow moustachial streak of smalt-blue; the bend of the

wing greenish-verdigris in some, others having little or no trace of

this. Female having the throat and orbits yellow, and a slight blue

moustache. Inhabits Southern India and the Malay countries. Of

seven adult specimens before me, two or three have the bill closely

approximating that represented of Chl. gampsorhynchus.

A seventh inhabits the Malay countries — Chl. cyanopogon ;

Phyllornis ecyanopogon, Tem.: with a short bill, only the chin black,

and a long ceerulean moustache-streak.

P. 187. The bird which I designated Heterophasia cuculopsis is

identical with Mr. Hodgson’s Alcopus (olim Sibia) picoides, J. A. S.

VIII, 38; but as this genus appears to correspond exactly with Actino-

dura, Gould, P. Z. S. 1836, p. 17, I must (provisionally at least) con-

sider them as identical, in which case the following species would be

comprised in it.

1. Act. Egertoni, Gould, P. Z. 8. 1836, p. 18. Nepal.

2. Act. gracilis; Hypsipetes gracilis, McClelland and Horsfield,

P. Z. S. 1839, p. 159, which appears to me clearly referrible to this

genus, from Dr. McClelland’s drawing of it. Assam.

3. Act. picoides; Sibia picoides, Hodgson, J. A. S§. VIII, 38;

Heterophasia cuculopsis, Nobis, Id. X1, 187. Nepal, Bootan.

4. Act. nigriceps ; S. nigriceps, Hodgson, loc. cit. Nepal, Bootan.

Same page. The Accentor to which I applied the name Himalaya-

nus with a mark of doubt, may be now termed A. variegatus ; as the

following species of this genus also occur in the Himalaya.

A. Nipalensis, Hodgson. Allied to A. alpinus, as indeed are both

the others, yet this most so, though intermediate in plumage to that

species and 4. modularis. Length about seven inches, of wing three

inches and three-quarters, and tail two and three-quarters; bill to

gape five-eighths of an inch, and tarse fifteen-sixteenths of an inch.

Newly moulted adults have the upper-parts nearly as in A. modularis,

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 959

but the dark colour predominating, and the striation of the head and

neck obsolete, or very nearly so, these parts, with the ear-coverts

and breast, being of an almost uniform dark brownish-grey; throat

white, spotted with dusky-black, which forms two cross-bars on each

feather, their extreme tips being greyish; belly and flanks bright dark

ferruginous, mingled with the hue of the breast along the middle of

the former; under tail-coverts dusky, tinged with ferruginous, and

laterally margined with white: the feathers of the back are greyish-

brown, with broad dark centres, or they may be described as blackish,

with brown lateral margins, tinged with ferruginous towards and upon

the scapularies: wings dusky-black, the tertiaries broadly margined

_ with ferruginous, the other large alars slightly so, and all having a spot

of this colour at the extremity of their outer edge; wing-coverts having

a white spot at the tip of their exterior webs; and the small feathers

near the bend of the wing coloured like the head: tail brownish- black,

tipped with brown, the terminal spot of the inner web of each feather

successively more albescent to the outermost; upper tail-coverts long,

and brown with a dark central streak: bill dusky, the lower mandible

yellow except at tip; and legs reddish-brown. In worn plumage,

the margins of all the feathers have more or less disappeared, and

what remains of them is faded in hue; the conspicuous white spots on

the wing-coverts, and ferruginous margins of the tertiaries, being com-

pletely abraded, the former leaving a semi-circular sinus, as if artificial-

ly cut away. In this state of plumage, Mr. Hodgson has sent a speci-

men as distinct in species. The young have the clothing plumage

of the usual flimsy texture, the under-parts coloured like the back,

with no ferruginous on the belly; the spots on the wing-coverts are

larger and less purely white; and the ferruginous on the scapularies

and wing-coverts, dingy. Appears to represent A. alpinus on the

Kachar region of Nepal.

A. strophiatus, Hodgson. Size of A. modularis, and readily distin-

guished by its bright ferruginous breast and streak over the eye.

Length about five inches and a half, of wing two inches and a quarter

to two and a half, and tail two inches and one-eighth to two and a

quarter; bill to gape five-eighths of an inch, and tarse thirteen-

sixteenths of an inch. Upper parts much as in A. modularis, but the

colours brighter and more contrasted, and the crown and neck uniform

960. Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [ No. 148.

with the back; a broad eye-streak, the first portion of which is white

to beyond the eye, surmounting a ferruginous streak continued back-

ward to the occiput; a semi-circle of the same surrounds the dusky

ear-coverts, and the entire breast is also ferruginous; throat white,

with dusky spots, forming a line descending from each angle of the

lower mandible; belly and lower tail-coverts white with dusky streaks ;

wing-feathers dusky, margined with ferruginous, with an albescent

spot at the tip of each covert; tail brownish, with dull rufous outer

margins: bill black, and legs reddish-brown. Nepal.

A. variegatus, Nobis, should follow A. Nipalensis in the series

commencing with 4. alpinus; and A. strophiatus should, if I remem-

ber A. montinellus rightly, be placed next to that species.

P. 188. Pitta nuchalis, Nobis, is identical with Hydrornis (olim

Paludicola) Nipalensis, Hodgson, J. A. S. VJ, 103: but it is barely

separable from the great group of Pitta, a monograph of which would

be acceptable at the present time. The following is a slight contri-

bution towards its effectuation.

In India, there appears to be only one species generally distributed,

viz. Pitta brachyura, Auct., figured in Gould’s Century. I kept a

bird of this species for some time alive, but can remark little more

than that it progressed by hopping, and that it is a remarkably silent

species; though I am told that it frequently utters a screeching note

in the wild state. Allied to it is a beautiful. species common in

the Malay countries, for which I have been unable to find a name,

but can scarcely suppose it undescribed ; viz.

P. Malaccensis ? Nobis. Nearly similar to P. brachyura, but consi-

derably larger, and everywhere much brighter-coloured ; the wings much

more largely marked with brilliant smalt-blue instead of verdigris-blue ;

the back a purer dark green ; under-parts brighter fulvous ; and belly

and lower tail-coverts vermillion ; under surface of wings black, without

the white spot at the bend observable in P. brachyura, but the white

patch on the quills much more largely developed, three of the se-

condaries being wholly of this colour.*

P. nigricollis, Nobis. Resembles the P. strepitans, Tem., of Australia,

* Found also, together with P. gigas, in Arracan, from which locality one of se-

veral specimens before me is remarkable for the unusual size of its bill, which

measures an inch and a quarter to forehead and an inch and a half to gape.

”

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 961

except that the under-parts are bright sea-green, and that there is

generally no trace of black on the centre of the crown. Length above

seven inches, the wing four inches and a quarter to four and a half;

bill to gape an inch and one-eighth. Crown dark rufous-brown, with

occasionally some black on its centre; throat, sides of the head, and

neck all round, black; bend of the wing and upper tail-coverts bright

verdigris-blue ; vent and under tail-coverts vermillion; a large white

patch on the primaries; the back a fine glossy dark green, and under-

parts lighter and more bluish green. Inhabits Assam, and the Malay

peninsula.

P. rodogaster, Hodgson. 1 can only describe this from a wretched

bad specimen. Nearly allied to the last, and upper-parts much the

same, but less bright ; the second range of wing-coverts largely tipped

with white: a white transverse band also on the throat, and lower-parts

dull brown, mingled with green, though I can detect no appearance

of moulting. Perhaps only the young of the preceding species. Nepal.

P. gigas, Temminck. The Society possesses a Himalayan example

of what appears to be the young of this species. Length about eight

inches and a half, of wing four inches and three-eighths, and bill to

gape an inch and three-sixteenths. Crown and lower ear-coverts dull

brown, the former black-centred ; lores, upper ear-coverts and beyond

them, and another streak below the ear-coverts, black, occupying only

the tips of the feathers on the latter; throat brown: rest of the upper-

parts uniform bright dark blue; bases of the primaries white under-

neath, and under wing-coverts towards the axillaries the same: breast

and belly light blue, with a slight shade of green on the former and

of lilach on the latter, and all marked with imperfect black bands on

each feather, becoming entire on the sides of the breast and flanks.*

P. coccinea, Eyton, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 104. <A gorgeous species,

scarcely yielding the palm of beauty to the lovely P. cyanura: wings

short, rounded as in that bird, and more bowed or hollowed. Forehead

and over the eyes black; the crown, occiput, and nape, intense car-

mine; rest of the upper-parts fine dark glistening purple, with a

* A specimen from Arracan is perhaps a female : the tail and its coverts are nearly

as bright blue as in the Himalayan specimen, and there is an admixture of this

colour on the interscapularies ; but the rest of the upper-parts, from the red occiput,

are dull greenish ; and the blue of the under-parts is also weaker.

962 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

splendid shine; a longitudinal band on the wing approaching to smalt-

blue; throat rufescent-brown; the fore-neck and breast purplish with

red tips to the feathers, forming spots on the breast; belly, flanks, and

lower tail-coverts, deep red: bill dusky-horn; and legs appear to have

been plumbeous. Length seven inches or more, of wing three inches

and a half, and tail an inch and a half; bill to gape an inch and one-

eighth, and tarse an inch and five-eighths. Malay peninsula.

P. 190. The Dimorpha albogularis, Nobis, should not have been

referred to that genus of Mr. Hodgson, and is identical with Muscz-

capa superciliaris, Jerdon, Madr. Jl. XI, 16. With my D. superci-

liaris* preceding it, and which must now receive another specific

appellation (rubecwla would suit), it might form a particular sub-

genus of Muscicapide. [This I have since termed Muscicapula, as

introduced between brackets at p. 939 ante, where four species are

referred to it, all of which inhabit the vicinity of Darjeeling. |

Same page. Indian Redstarts. To the various species of oriental

Redstarts enumerated, may be added

Phenicura leucoptera, Nobis. Size of Ph. ruticilla, and much

resembling in plumage Ph. Reevesii, but smaller and the wings much

shorter than in the latter species; it 1s also generally similar to Ph.

ruticilla, but. has no white on the forehead, which, with the crown,

neck, and fore-part of the back, are ash-grey; the middle of the back

is black, as are also the lores, ear-coverts, throat and breast; and the

rest of the under-parts, with the rump and tail except the medial

feathers of the latter, are bright ferruginous, the exterior web of the

outermost tail-feather being marked with dusky ; wings dusky, having

a large white patch occupying the base of the secondaries and tertia-

ries; bill and feet black: according to season, the dorsal plumage is

margined with brown edgings, the under-parts more slightly with

greyish, and the wing-coverts with brown. The female I have not

seen. Length about six inches, of wing two inches and three-quarters,

and tail two inches and three-eighths; bill to gape five-eighths of

an inch, and tarse three-quarters of an inch. Inhabits the Malay

peninsula.

* This, however, has been just received from Mr. Hodgson, who refers it to his

Dimorpha, and he had previously sent a third species of the group- Muscicapa su-

perciliosa, Gmelin, must Not be confounded with either of these. —

1843.]° Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 963 |

Ph. Reevesii, Gray. <A description of this species may not be un-

acceptable. It much resembles Ph. rutzcilla except in its larger size,

in having a conspicuous white wing-patch, and less white upon the

forehead. Length six inches and a half, of wing three inches and a

quarter to three and three-eighths, and tail two inches and seven-eighths;

bill to gape eleven-sixteenths of an inch, and tarse seven-eighths of an

inch. The white wing-patch is confined to the exterior margin of

the basal half of the secondaries, whereas in the preceding species it

extends over both webs of each feather. The female is nearly similar

to that of Ph. atrata, but may be distinguished by its more puffy

general appearance, the greyer and non-rufescent hue of its under-

parts, and especially by the different relative length of the primaries,

having the first short one more developed and the second less so, the

difference between these being only an inch, whereas in Ph. aérata it

is an inch and a half or nearly so. Inhabits Nepal and Assam.

P. 191. Phylloscopus (Boié) reguloides ; Phyllopneuste reguloides,

Nobis, passim. This well marked species is not uncommon in the

vicinity of Calcutta during the cool season.* A male measured four

inches and seven-eighths in length, by seven inches and a quarter

across, wing two inches and a half, and tail an inch and seven-eighths ;

a female gave respectively four inches and a half, six inches and seven-

eighths, two and three-sixteenths, and an inch and three-quarters: but

the generality are intermediate. Upper mandible dusky, the lower

yellow; and legs yellowish-brown tinged with plumbeous. The mesial

streak along the crown is broader and more conspicuous than in the

next species, particularly on the occiput where it widens and contrasts

with dusky on each side. It is readily distinguished from the next by

its greater size, brighter colour, the absence of any whitish border to

the tertiaries, and by most of the tail-feathers having their inner web

margined with white; also by the plumbeous tinge of its legs. The

young, as in Ph. trochilus and Ph. rufus, have their under-parts much

brighter yellow than in the adults, during their first winter, and assume

the mature dress early in the new year.

Ph. modestus ; Regulus modestus, Gould: R. inornatus, Nobis, pas-

sim. This species, also, one of the European Aves rarissime, figured by

* Perhaps it also breeds here, like the next ; at least occasionally, as I obtained

one so late as March 15th.

964 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

Mr. Gould from the only specimen then known, which was procured

in Dalmatia, and of which a second individual has since been met with

in England (vide An. Nat. Hist. 11, 310), is by no means rare in the

neighbourhood of Calcutta during the cool season and for some time

afterwards. The mesial streak along the crown is not always well

defined, and it often requires some trouble to make this appear

distinctly in the preserved skins. Scarcely any trace of it exists in

the old stuffed specimen which I styled Regulus inornatus; mistak-

ing the species, as Mr. Gould had previously done, for a member of

that genus: but I have since examined numerous fresh specimens,

and do not in the least now hesitate in assigning it to Phylloscopus

of Boié, or the restricted Sylvia of various modern British Ornitholo-

gists. The average size of a male is four inches long, by six to six and

a quarter across, wing two inches, and tail an inch and a half.

Upper mandible dusky, the lower yellow except at tip; and legs

rather pale brown, without any plumbeous tinge: irides dark. In the

published admeasurements of the British-killed specimen, the length of

the tail is given as but an inch and one-sixteenth, which is the only

dimensional discrepancy noticeable from the specimens before me;

but it is probable that this is a misprint for an inch and seven-

sixteenths, the more especially as. the wings are stated to reach within

three-quarters of an inch of the end of the tail, which is the case with

those obtained here. From the described brightness of the yellow

parts, I am inclined to think that the specimen killed in Northumber-

land was a bird of the year (shot in September), whereas mine are all

adults, having comparatively dull plumage (as in various other species

of Phylloscopus, Ph. sibilatrix constituting an exception). The crown

and upper-parts have, in the worn plumage, but a slight greenish

cast, which increases on the scapularies, and particularly on the lower

part of the back and rump, which are tolerably bright greenish ;

superciliary streak whitish, but very slightly tinged with yellow, and

chiefly so anterior to the eye; adjoining this is au inferior dusky streak

posterior to the eye, and on a level with that organ; mesial line

of the crown generally faint, and often scarcely discernible: the

markings on the wings are nearly those of a Hegulus, presenting

two whitish cross bars slightly tinged in general with greenish-yellow,

the posterior broader and formed by the tips of the greater coverts,

1843. } Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 965

and the anterior by those of the lesser coverts; the tertiaries also are

edged externally with whitish, and the primaries and secondaries more

slightly bordered with the same, or, in some specimens, with olive-

green ; towards the posterior pale cross-band of the wing, however, is

generally (not always) a well defined dark patch, caused by the secon-

daries being there unbordered, and which represents the blackish

patch on the wing of Regulus auricapillus: the tail-feathers are not

internally edged with white as in the preceding species; and the

under-parts are dingy greyish-white, a little tinged with lemon-yellow,

this colour appearing more conspicuously about the ear-coverts. The

affinity which this species bears to the last will help to indicate its

true systematic station, being strictly, as I may repeat, a Phylloscopus,

and not a Regulus. Its habits, too, are solitary, and not gregarious

as in the latter genus: and its song-note may be described as nearly

similar to that of Ph. sibilatriz, but considerably weaker.* .

Six other species of this genus occur in the vicinity of Calcutta.

One I have already described as Ph. fuscatus, (J. A. S. XI, 113), and

of this I have not hitherto obtained a second specimen.t It is at once

distinguished by its comparatively large size, and prevalent brown

colour. Three others of which I have also obtained as yet but one

example of each, may be described as

Ph. nitidus, Nobis. Resembles Ph. sibilatriz, but is smaller in all

its proportions, and has the entire under-parts, with the lower tail-

coverts, tinged with yellow. Bill carneous-dusky, the lower mandible

pale; and feet light brownish, tinged with yellow on the toes. This

* March 7th. A nest of this species has been brought to me, with the pair of birds

attached to it. It is an elegant structure, pendent from a twig of guava, and was

placed at a considerable height from the ground: being of a domed form, with two

apertures, one in front above the middle, having a distinct overhanging canopy, the

other on one side behind, placed rather higher up ; the upper-part is attached through-

out its breadth to the twig. The body of the nest is constructed of a fine and soft

vegetable fibre, like fine tow, closely interlaced to the thickness of half an inch; and

this forms the internal lining: the domed part is much less substantial, though suffi-

ciently strong behind, where the lower part is supported. Outside are affixed a

number of bits of bark, spider-cocoons, and a variety of other substances, recalling to

mind the external lining of the nest of the European Bottletit ( Mecistura caudata ) ;

which latter nest is fully double the size, but its single orifice is scarcely so large.

There were no eggs in this nest, the outer lining of which is not completely finished.

Both birds have their plumage very much worn, especially the male, the mesial

coronal streak of which is only slightly indicated in part.—Z. B.

+ 1 have recently procured others, both of this and of PA. tristis.

966 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

bird is of a much livelier green than any of the others, equally so with

the European Ph. sibilatrix, and it is perhaps the species referred to

sibilatrix in Royle’s list: its under-parts are unsullied pale yellowish,

brightest about the breast; and there is a pale bar crossing the wing,

formed by the tips of the larger coverts of the secondaries. Length of

a male four inches and three-quarters, by seven inches and a half

across ; wing two inches and five-eighths ; tail two inches; bill to gape

five-eighths of an inch; and tarse three-quarters of an inch.

Ph. magnirostris, Nobis. Allied to Ph. trochilus, but distinguished

by its larger size, its considerably larger bill, and more deve-

loped rictorial vibrissz ; also by the less brownish cast of its upper-

parts, in lieu whereof is a slight wash of fuscous, by the cineras-

cent tinge of those below, and the darkish cinerascent hue of the

crown, which contrasts with the more greenish colouring of the

back: the wings, too, have the small first primary more developed,

and the second less so, measuring an inch from the tip of one to that

of the other, whereas in Ph. trochilus this measurement is an inch and

a quarter. Length five inches and three-eighths, by eight inches

across; of wing two inches and three-quarters; and tail two inches

and one-eighth: bill to frontal feathers seven-sixteenths of an inch,

and five-eighths of an inch to gape: tarse three-quarters of an inch.

Bill dusky above, fleshy horn-colour at base of lower mandible; legs

light plumbeous, having a yellowish tinge. The entire upper-parts are

uniform dark olive-green, the medial larger coverts of the wings being

tipped with albescent-greenish; there is a narrow but strongly marked

pale yellowish streak over the eye, and the lower ear-coverts are partly

of the same hue; throat and breast tinged with grey, mingled with

faint yellowish, the rest of the under-parts paler and whitish on the

middle of the belly. The colour of the legs will help to distinguish

it from Ph. trochilus. The shikaree who shot it informed me

that it sung prettily, and on my imitating the well remembered note

of Ph. trochilus, he assured me that the song of this bird was quite

different.

Ph. tristis, Nobis. Closely allied to Ph. rufus, but devoid of any

greenish or yellowish tinge on the plumage, except on the fore-part

of the wing underneath, and faintly margining the quills and tail

externally ; legs and claws black, or rather dull black (much darker

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 967

than in Ph. rufus), except the under-surface of the toes which is yellow ;

bill also blackish, tinged with yellow at base of lower mandible, and the

gape also yellow. Length four inches and a half, by six inches and a

half across ; of wing two inches and one-eighth ; tail an inch and three-

quarters; bill to gape half an inch; and tarse seven-sixteenths of an

inch. General colour greyish-brown, beneath paler and albescent, a

faint rufous tinge on the breast, and no trace of yellowish on the lower

tail-coverts, nor elsewhere than as described.*

Ph. viridanus, Nobis; Phyllopneuste rufa, apud nos, XI, 191. Allied

to Ph. rufus, but of a weaker and much less brownish green above, and

the under-parts much more albescent ; the tarse shorter, but the length of

wings and relative length of primaries the same: the colour of the tarse

is also different, being of a greenish-leaden hue by no means dark.

Length four inches and five-eighths to four and three-quarters, by

seven inches and a quarter across ; of wing two inches and three-eighths,

and tail an inch and seven-eighths to two inches: bill above three-

eighths of an inch from forehead, and nearly five-eighths from gape;

tarse eleven-sixteenths of an inch.{ Irides dusky. Bill dusky horn-

colour above, the under mandible yellowish except towards the tip.

Colour of the upper-parts a light dull olive-green, having a greenish

cast when compared with those of Ph. rufus ; of the under-parts green-

ish-albescent ; and a narrow pale greenish streak over the eye: wings

and tail light dusky, with greenish margins to the tertiaries and tail-

feathers, and a slight whitish bar on the wing formed by the tips of the

larger coverts. The note of this bird is weak, and is expressible by

the sound ¢iss-yip, frequently uttered, but never repeated a number

of times in continuous succession like the much louder ¢szh-tseh of the

* There is the faintest possible greenish tinge on the upper-parts of some that I have

since procured, which colour is most developed on the margins of the secondaries, to-

wards their base.

t Ph. affinis, of a catalogue of birds obtained in the vicinity of Calcutta, published

in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for August and September, 1843.

t This species varies considerably in size. Of two recent examples before me,

one measures five inches and one-eighth by seven and a half; wing two inches and

a half; tail two inches; and tarse three-quarters of an inch: while the other is only

four inches and a half by six and five-eighths; wing two inches and a quarter; tail an

inch and three-quarters; and tarse eleven-sixteenths of an inch. I observe also that

Ph. modestus varies a great deal in size. An unusually large one just obtained measures

four inches and a half by seven inches across; wing two inches and a quarter, tail

an inch and three-quarters ; and tarse eleven-sixteenths of an inch.

968 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

European species. It is very numerous in the vicinity of Calcutta during

the hyemal months, and is likewise common in Nepal.

Ph. lugubris, Nobis. Closely allied to the last, but averaging a

rather larger size, with tarsi measuring fully three-quarters of an inch,

instead of barely eleven-sixteenths of an inch, and they are likewise

slightly darker than in the other. The whole upper-parts are also of

a darker shade, particularly the head which is much darker and tinged

with dusky ; throat, breast, and flanks, dashed with ashy-grey, having

traces of yellowish, and altogether this species is conspicuously of

a darker and more fuscous shade than the preceding one. Its note

again is different, and much louder than that of the last. Also common

near Calcutta during the cold season; and a Madras specimen of the

young has been forwarded by Mr. Jerdon. The young or rather

second plumage of this species is much yellower than the adults, as

in the corresponding garb of Ph. trochilus and Ph. rufus.* |

_. Culicipeta, Nobis, n. g. General structure of Phylloscopus, but

having a narrow Flycatcher’s bill and armature of rictus, the ridge of

the upper mandible angulated, and the breadth of the bill evenly

attenuating. :

C. Burkitt; Sylvia Burkii, Burton, P. Z, S. 1835, p. 153; Muscr-

capa bilineata, Lesson, Rev. Zool. par la Soe. Cuv. 1839, p. 104. Length

four inches and seven-eighths, by six inches and a half in alar expanse ;

* Having lately received British specimens of Ph. trochilus and Ph. rufus, I have

rewritten some of the above descriptions; and a long while subsequently to my first

describing most of the species noticed in the present report, a packet of skins of this

genus was received from Mr. Hodgson, amongst which I think I correctly recognised

the Ph. trochilus and Ph, rufus, but Ph. sibilatrix was not among them, which

species, together with the two preceding British kinds, are mentioned in the catalogue

of Dr. Royle’s birds procured at Saharunpore and its vicinity. Mr. Hodgson sent seven

species of Phylloscopus, including the modestus, to which are to be added my re-

guloides, nitidus, magnirostris, lugubris, tristis, and fuscatus; making thirteen

Indian species, and Dr. Royle’s sibilatrix, if different from my nitidus, should con-

stitute a fourteenth. Mr, H. also sent the European Phyllopneuste hippolais (Sylvia

hippolais of ‘Temminck, or a closely allied species), and the Culicipeta Burkii

above described. Four of these species of Phylloscopus have the central coronal

mark, and the specimen of modestus sent was in new plumage, with a more strongly

marked mesial coronal streak than usual, thus resembling the figure in Gould’s ‘ Birds

of Europe.’ All were temporarily returned, so that 1 have not them now by me for

reference.

In a paper since forwarded by Mr. Hodgson, the species with central coronal streak

are separated from the others; but I much prefer to arrange them as slight divisions

merely of the same genus.

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 969

of closed wing two inches and a quarter, and tail an inch and three-

quarters ; bill to frontal feathers three-eighths of an inch; and tarse

eleven-sixteenths of an inch. General colour bright yellowish olive-

green above, and a full siskin-yellow underneath; over each eye a

broad black streak reaching to the occiput, leaving the middle of the

head greenish, more or less flanked with ashy-grey; tail dusky, its

middle feathers flanked with the hue of the back, and the inner web of

the outermost tail-feather white nearly throughout, as also the terminal

half of that of the next: some have a dull yellow cross-band on the

wing, formed by the tips of the coverts of the secondaries, which in

others is obsolete. Irides dark. Bill dusky above; underneath, with

the legs, pale brownish yellow, more or less bright, and darker on toes.

This pretty little bird is not uncommon in the neighbourhood of

Calcutta during the cold season.

Same page. Genus Cinnyris [or rather Nectarinia, which Mr. G. R.

Gray, and since Sir W. Jardine, have shewn to be the prior appella-

tion. The volume on Sun-birds in the ‘ Naturalist’s Library,’ by the

latter gentleman, has just reached me, and a perusal of it has led me

to rewrite the remarks | had to offer on this group* |. Of the elegant

section with graduated tails, whereof the two middle feathers are pro-

longed considerably beyond the rest, the following Indian species occur.

1. N. Goalpariensis, Jardine; Goalpara Creeper, Latham, Gen.

Hist. 1V, p. 221, pl. XXIV; Certhia Goalpariensis, Royle, Ill. Him.

Bot. &e.: Cinnyris Vigorsii, Sykes, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 99: WN.

Seherie (2), Tickell, J. A. S. 11, 577: C. miles, Hodgson, Ind. Rev.

1837, p. 273: erroneously, it would appear, assigned by me on former

occasions to NV. mysticalis, Tem., vide XI, 107. <A gorgeous little

bird, having the throat, fore-neck and breast, intensely brilliant car-

mine, with a glossy violet stripe on each side, from the corner of the

lower mandible to more than half-way down the neck: ear-coverts,

sides and hind-part of the neck, back, scapularies, and smaller wing-

coverts, a darker sanguineous: forehead and crown of the head, toge-

ther with the upper tail-coverts, dark shining metallic green, more or

less glossed with purple: rump bright yellow: middle tail-feathers ex-

ternally purple towards the base and at the tip, the rest shining bottle-

* In a letter just received from the author, N. calcostetha of his synopsis of the

Nectarinid@ is identified with N. insignis.

970 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

green ; margins of the other tail-feathers similar, to a greater or less

extent: the rest of the wings, with the occiput, dull brownish green ;

and below the breast, the same but lighter: bill horn-colour at base,

the terminal half of the upper mandible, and nearly all the lower, paler ;

legs brown. “ The female and young,” observes Mr. Hodgson, ‘‘ wear a

sombre russet robe instead of the flaming scarlet of the male ; their cap

is not burnished, nor have they the splendid moustache ; and the central

rectrices are neither pointed nor prolonged beyond the series of the

rest.* Length of the male six inches, by six and a half in extent,

and a quarter oz. in weight.” Wing from bend two inches and

three-eighths, and middle tail-feathers three inches: bill from fore-

head three-quarters of an inch, in a straight line; and tarse half

an inch.

This splendid bird appears to be common in the Tenasserim pro-

vinces, and also in Nepal, being much rarer, or perhaps local, in central

and southern India. Col. Sykes, in his catalogue of the birds of. the

Deccan, remarks, that “it inhabits only the lofty trees of the dense woods

of the ghats.” Mr. Jerdon has not been successful in meeting with it;

but Lieut. Tickell procured a single one “near Seheria in Borabhim,

flitting about the low willow-bushes in the dried bed of a stream. — It

has no song, but a shrill chirp.” The description given by that gen-

tleman entirely accords with specimens before me, except that he

assigns four inches as the length, which is probably a misprint for

six inches. Dr. Royle figures it as one of several tropical birds that

visit northern India and the Himalaya during the rains, though at

least one of its companions in the same plate is strictly Sub-Hima-

layan: neither his coloured figure, however, nor that in the ‘ Natur-

alist’s Library,’ makes any approach to the brilliancy of nature.

1. a. N. Latham, Jardine, Nat. Lib., Orn., Vol. XIV, 238-68.

*« We possess a specimen of a Sun-bird from some part of Continental

* Evidently the C. concolor of Col. Sykes’s catalogue, defined as ‘‘C. viridi-

olivacea, alis caudaque saturatioribus, corpore subtus pallidiore. Longitudo cor-

poris, 4 unc.; cauda 1. Irides intensé rufo-brunnee :’’ to which is added — ‘As

four specimens obtained by Col. Sykes were all females, and as they were met with

in the same locality as C. Vigorsii, C. concolor may be the female of that splendid

species; but the difference in the size, form, and aspect of the bird, independently of

colour, is opposed to this’? (certainly not): ‘‘they were never seen together, This

bird has the outline of C. mahrattensis. The specific appellation concolor is given

provisionally.”—P. Z, S. 1832, p. 99.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 971

India,” writes Sir W. Jardine, “‘closely allied to NM. Goalpariensis,

and also to the Certhia Siparaja of Sir Stamford Raffles’s catalogue.

From the Goalpara Sun-bird it differs in a slight general modification

of the tints of the plumage, in the yellow of the ramp being much deeper,

and in the coronal patch, upper tail-coverts, and tail, being steel-blue

instead of metallic green, and in the tail being shorter and more regularly

graduated. Sir Stamford’s bird is from Sumatra ; no mention is made

of the yellow rump, while, in the catalogue appended to that gentle-

man’s memoirs, NV. mysticalis, Tem., from Java, is quoted. A com-

parison of the birds may serve to distinguish them. The entire length

is four inches and two-fifths; that of the bill to the forehead three-

fifths of an inch. [N. Seherie ? Tickell.] Above the forehead to

the line of the eyes is steel-blue, with a play of colour; the upper tail-

coverts and edges of the tail-feathers, except the outer, are of the

same tint, and the tail itself, which is nearly black, has a very strong

gloss of bluish- purple; the back and sides of the neck, cheeks, back, and

lesser wing-coverts, are rich brownish-red: the lower part of the back

and rump are very deep gamboge-yellow, almost Dutch orange, and fol-

lowing the red of the back we have the same lengthened plumes we

saw in the last, of a dark greyish oil-green, and which can completely

cover the yellow patch; the wings are umbre-brown, feathers edged

with a paler tint and oil-green. Underneath, we have the maxillary

stripes running upon the sides of the neck, inside-half of the feathers

black, the exterior rich violet, the chin, fore-part of the neck and

breast, bright scarlet-red; the remaining under-parts dull greyish oil-

green. Bill umbre-brown, slightly paler on the maxilla.

** As stated, we do not know the locality of the specimen we have

described, and in the collection of the Zoological Society there is one

similar, and bearing out the distinctions from N. Goalpariensis we

have pointed out, but the locality of which is also unknown.”

On comparison of this description with several specimens of J.

Goalpariensis, I am constrained to doubt very much the distinctness

of N. Lathami, and would suggest that it is perhaps a female Goalpa-

viensis in masculine attire. ‘There is indeed generally a greater or

less admixture of steel-blue, with the glossy bottle-green of the cap and

sometimes the upper tail-coverts of the latter, and still more upon the

tail itself, as noticed in my description.

972 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

2. N. ignicauda ; Cinnyris ignicauda, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1837,

p. 273: C. rubricaudata, Nobis, mentioned in J. A, §. XI, 192:

N. phenicura, Jardine, Nat. Libr. Mr. Hodgson thus describes this

species, in its post-nuptial garb, certain species of Sun-birds being

well known to assume a dull-coloured plumage after breeding. ‘‘ Above,

olive-green ; beneath, together with the rump, yellow: chin, cheeks,

and front of the neck, blue-grey with a greenish wash; breast dashed

with fiery-red ; caudal plumes and their upper coverts intense igneous-

red; remiges and rectrices, internally, dusky-brown: seven inches

long, whereof the tail is three inches and three-quarters, its two

central plumes passing the rest by an inch and three-quarters: weight

half an oz., or considerably larger than most of the others. The female

is smaller, and has her caudal plumes of the same hue with the body

above, and merely fringed with fiery-red ; but the coverts are igneous,

and the breast is touched with fire, as in the male: the tail wants the

prolonged plumes of the male, as in all the long-tailed species.

*“C. ignicauda is distinguished, specifically, by the comparative

straightness of its bill, which is, indeed, distinctly curved, but less so

than in the allied species; it scarcely reaches the average excess of the

genus, or one-third more than the head.”

A maie and female have recently been sent by Mr. Hodgson, the

medial tail-feathers of the former being no less than five inches in

length. It otherwise agrees with the above description, except that

the olive-green plumage of the upper-parts is not completely put forth,

several brilliant red old feathers being intermixed with it. I have

now no doubt of its identity with my C. rubricaudata, of which I took

the following description from a Darjeeling specimen. Upper-parts

as in NV. Gouldu, except that the tail-coverts are scarlet, and the long

middle tail-feathers crimson, the crown also being violet unmixed

with lake-purple; and under-plumage resembling that of V. Nipalensis,

but having more reddish flame-colour, and less diffused, on the centre

of the breast, while the throat and fore-neck have no greenish gloss,

but are intensely rich dark shining purple along the middle, and bril-

liant violet laterally. No painting could express the splendour of this

magnificent species. The back is of a burnished and richer crimson

than that of N. Goalpariensis, or of N. Gouldii, from both of which

this species differs in possessing none on the smaller coverts of the

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 973

wings, which, with the scapularies, are glossless green, as in V. Nipa-

lensis; from the latter it differs, and resembles NV. Gouldii, in the

crimson of the back extending up the hind-neck to the occiput; there

is a yellow band, as in most of the allied species, across the rump; the

lores and ear-coverts are glossless black, mixed with green on the latter ;

and the greater wing-feathers, and their larger coverts, dusky, edged

with greenish, passing into rufous on one of the secondaries on each

side; the outer tail-feathers have their inner webs dusky, the outer

red, and tips a little greenish: under-parts bright yellow, passing into

greenish on the flanks, vent, and lower tail-coverts, and deeply tinged

with gorgeous flame-colour on the centre of the breast. Bill black,

and but very little curved; legs brown. Length six inches. and one-

eighth, of which the bill measures three-quarters of an inch to fore-

head, and middle tail-feathers three inches and one-eighth ;* the latter

do not taper at the end: wing two inches and a quarter; and tarse

nine-sixteenths of an inch. On the neck are two or three unmoulted

feathers, which are greenish like the scapularies.

Mr. Hodgson’s female is wholly olive-green, paler and yellowish

beneath ; upper tail-coverts and central pectoral spot igneous-red ; and

tail slightly tinged with the same, its form graduated, but the middle

pair of feathers scarcely passing the next.

Sir W. Jardine’s NV. phenicura, from Sylhet, would seem to be

identical, except that the chin and centre of the throat and neck are

described to be deep velvet-black, with two broad maxillary stripes

steel-blue with violet reflections: unfortunately, I have not a specimen

wherewith to compare his description.t What this naturalist, however,

considers to be the female, is evidently the male in corresponding

plumage to that described by Mr. Hodgson.{ It would appear to be a

rare species in Nepal, and is also rare in the vicinity of Darjeeling.

3. NV. labecula; C. labecula, McClelland and Horsfield. P. Z. S.

1839, p. 167. “ Punicea, gula, pectoreque nitidissimis ; capite, plumis

* These middle tail-feathers could not have been full grown : vzde in following note.

¢ In a beautiful collection of Darjeeling specimens just arrived, from which 1 am

kindly permitted to make a selection, there are three beautiful males of this species,

which quite agree with my description, and are also evidently identical with Sir W.

Jardine’s N. phenicura. In ail of these the middle tail-feathers are growing.

{ I perceive that this was subsequently remarked by Sir William in his Synopsis;

or at least that he considered it to be a young male.

6 N

974 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [.No. 143.

scapularibus, caudaque metallicé aureo-viridibus ; alis fuscis viridi

nitentibus ; subtus cana. Body three inches, tail two inches long :”

from Assam. I have seen a drawing of this bird, which pertains to

the present group, and is obviously distinct from all the others here

described.

4. N. Nipalensis ; Cin. Nipalensis, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1837, p.

273. Nearly allied to NV. Gouldi figured in the ‘Century of Hima-

layan Birds,’ but larger, with the dark scale-like feathers of the crown

continued down the back of the neck, and glossed with greenish, some-

times a little bronzed, instead of violet; the same remark applies to the

tail and its coverts, and to the throat ; and there is also no red on the

smaller wing-coverts, while that of the back is darker and quite gloss-

less: middle of the breast tinged with flame-colour, of which there is

seldom more than a faint trace in VV. Gouldiz, and often not any, while

N. ignicauda has much more of it. The present species is remark-

able for the comparative length and looseness of the feathers of its hind-

neck, which have broad scale-like tips that, together with the crown,

occiput, throat, upper tail-coverts, long and tapering middle pair of tail-

feathers, and the outer margins of the other tail-feathers, ‘are brilli-

antly glossy dark steel-green; lores and ear-coverts black, the latter

glossed with purple; scapularies and margins of the wing-feathers

olive-green, as in NV. ignicauda, which the breast and under-parts re-

semble except in having less flame-colour, which is more diffused; yel-

low of the rump brighter than in most of the others: bill black, and

legs dusky-brown. Length five inches and three-quarters, of which the

middle tail-feathers measure two inches and five-eighths, and the bill

from forehead three-quarters of an inch; wing two inches and one-

eighth; and tarse nearly five-eighths of an inch. The female is rather

smaller, and uniform olive-green above, faintly tinged with rufous; -

below paler and yellower: tail shorter, with its middle pair of feathers

scarcely elongated beyond the rest. ‘ The young males,” according to

Mr. Hodgson, “are earthy-brown on all the glossed parts of the

mature males. So also in [N. Goalpariensis], and (as I suspect, ) in

all the gorgeous species.” Habitat Nepal and Sikim: very abundant

about Darjeeling.

5. N. Gouldii; C. Gouldii, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 44; Gould’s

Century, pl. LVI. Rather smaller than any of the preceding, with

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 975

the sides and hind-part of the neck, the back, scapularies, and smaller

wing-coverts, deep crimson, as in NV. Goalpariensis ; crown, ear-

coverts, and throat, rich glossy violet, or purple, according to the

light ; a brilliant shoulder-tuft of the same; and the upper tail-coverts,

lengthened middle pair of tail-feathers, and outer margins of the other

tail-feathers towards their base, also similar; rest of the tail dusky,

the three outermost feathers with albescent tips, as is likewise the case

in NV. Nipalensis, and with the next species; yellow band over the

rump as usual; wings beyond the smaller coverts dusky, margined

with olive-green ; the breast and belly bright yellow, with sometimes

a faint tinge of flame-colour about the middle; bill blackish, and legs

dark brown. Length five inches and a half, of which the bill to fore-

head measures nine-sixteenths of an inch, and the long tail-feathers

three inches ; wing from bend two inches and one-eighth ; and tarse half

an inch. The only female I have seen was deficient in the tail, and

was everywhere dull olive-green, paler on the under-parts, deeper and

slightly aureous on the back, with a somewhat reddish cast on the

margins of the primaries and secondaries. This beautiful species is rare

at Darjeeling, where it is much sought after by collectors, who have cur-

rently styled it the ‘‘ Beauty of the Hills,” a name by which it will be

recognised by many.

6. WN. Horsfieldi ; Cin. Horsfieldi, Nobis, mentioned in J. A. S.

XI, 107. Upper-parts very similar to those of NV. Nipalensis, only

without the red, a slight trace of which, however, appears on the lower

part of the sides of the neck; the scale-like nuchal feathers, also,

are not so broadly glossed as in NV. Nipalensis, and have more of a

purplish shine; the under-parts, too, differ only in having merely the

slightest trace of flame-colour, as in some specimens of N. Gouldiz,

and which as in that species may often be wanting altogether: the

whole back, scapularies, and margins of the wing-feathers, are golden

olive-green, and the yellow on the rump (as in N. Nipalensis) is very

broad and conspicuous; the ear-coverts are glossed with purple, and

the lores and sides of the neck are unglossed black: bill dusky, and

legs brown. Length five inches and a half, the bill to forehead mea-

suring three-quarters of an inch, and the long middle tail-feathers two

inches and a haif; wing from bend two inches and one-eighth; and

tarse exceeding half an inch.

Female unknown. The only specimen

srt SO

976 Mr Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. (No. 143.

observed was contained in a collection partly from the Himalaya and

partly Malavan.*

7. N. saturata ; Cin. saturata, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1837, p. 273:

C. Assamensis, McClelland and Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 167: N.

Hodgsonis, Jardine, Nat. Libr. Size of N. Gouldii, but having a

considerably larger bill, and predominating deep black plumage, which

colour extends over the throat, breast, and fore-part of the belly, the lores,

ear-coverts, and sides of the neck, and on the wings and rump, upon

which last there appears to be more or less trace of the ordinary

yellow band in different specimens, but never much; scapularies and

interscapularies dark sanguineous; crown, occiput, and back of the

neck, brilliant steel-blue approaching to violet, and a streak of the

same down each side of the front of the neck, commencing at the

corner of the lower mandible and gradually widening; upper tail-

coverts, lengthened middle tail-feathers, and margin of the next pair

of tail-feathers towards the base, glossy steel-blue, like the head;

flanks, hind-part of the belly, and lower tail-coverts, dull olive-green ;

rest of the tail black, as is also the bill, and feet brown; the greater

wing-feathers are margined with dark olive. Length six inches, of which

the bill to forehead rather exceeds three-quarters of an inch, and the

tapering middle tail-feathers measure three inches and a quarter; wing

from bend an inch and one-eighth, and tarse posteriorly half an inch.

Extent, according to Mr. Hodgson, seven inches, and weight a quarter

of an ounce. This species inhabits Nepal, the vicinity of Darjeeling,

and Assam. |

Upon the various allied long-tailed Nectarinie inhabiting the Indian

Archipelago, I have no information to contribute. Of those with even

or but slightly rounded tails, there appear to be only two species in

Bengal, which are pretty generally distributed throughout India proper.

N. Zeylonica; Certhia Zeylonica, Linneus: Cin. sola, apud

Jerdon, and of my former reports: C. lepida (?), apud Sykes.

Very abundant in the neighbourhood of Calcutta throughout the year,

* The donor of that collection has just informed me that the specimen in question

formed part of a consignment which he received from the hills, z. e. the Himalaya.

Can it be a variety only of N. Nipalensis ?

t C. lepida of Latham is evidently the Anthreptes Javanica of recent authors ;

while C. lepida of Sparrman is regarded in Griffith’s work as the female of N. sperata.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 977

the male retaining its bright colours at all seasons. The female

is dull-green above, with a slight rufous tinge, and cinnamon-coloured

edgings to the greater wing-feathers ; tail dusky-black, and under-

parts less bright yellow than in the male, having the throat and

fore-neck albescent. The young, in nestling garb, resemble the female,

but have the throat and flanks as yellow as the breast, a streak

over the eye more distinct and yellow, and dark hazel irides. This

appears also to be the commonest species of the genus in peninsular

India, but I have never seen it in collections from the Himalaya, nor is it

included among the Nepalese species by Mr. Hodgson. It has a weak

shrill chant, delivered in the same key as the song of the British

Accentor modularis ; and frequently emits a low weak chirp, that re-

eals to mind the analogous note of a Regulus, or of Certhia familiaris.

The natives here take them with bird-lime, and after plucking out

the wing-primaries to prevent their fluttering, tie them to a stick,

and carry rows of them thus about for sale. These may be kept alive

- for several days on merely sugar and water, and I have heard one

sing that had had no other diet for some days; but raspberry or

other fruit-jam is a better kind of food on which to keep these nectar-

feeding birds. The members of the present genus, however, by no

means confine themselves to a regimen of the kind, and I have taken

so large a spider from the stomach of C. Mahrattensis, as to have

wondered how it could have been swallowed. Mr. Hodgson, indeed,

has even declared that he “ entirely doubts their alleged nectarinean

diet” (Ind. Rev. 1, 273); but this is going rather too far, as the facts

already stated tend sufficiently to shew.

According to Mr. Walter Elliot, the present species “builds a

hanging nest with an entrance near the top, opening downwards” ; and

such is the form of a beautiful fabric before me, which I am assured is

the production of this bird: it is attached, nearly throughout its length,

to a small thorny twig, and is of an elongated pear-shape, composed

chiefly of soft vegetable fibres very densely and neatly interwoven; on

the outside are some coarser strips of grass-leaves, scalings of bark,

&c., but the substance and internal lining are constructed of the

softest fibres only, which are reflected over the lower portion of the

entrance so as to fasten down its rim, imparting thus a neatness of

finish to this part of the structure ; above the floor of the entrance is an

978 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. (No. 148.

overhanging roof or canopy, formed by the lining of the upper third or

more of the nest being made to project semi-circularly over the ori-

fice, and then finished externally like the rest with coarser material,

and some bits of leaves and the like to disguise the nature of the fabric.

N. minima; Cin. minima, Sykes, P. Z. S., 1832, p. 98. A dimi-

nutive species, allied to the last, from the upland forest-jungles of

southern India. The Society is indebted for a specimen to Mr. Jerdon.

N. Mahrattensis ; Certhia Mahratiensis, Latham: Cin. orientalis,

Franklin: C. epauletta, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. I, 272: C. currucaria,

apud Sykes, post-nuptial plumage. Visits the neighbourhood of Calcutta

only in the cold season, when it is not uncommon. Opn its arrival,

both sexes are clad in the plumage referred to N. currucaria by Sykes ;

and before they leave, all have more or less completely assumed

their nuptial dress, which also is alike in both sexes. In Nepal it is

probably a summer visitant only; and it extends westward to the

Indus, and southward to Ceylon, but I have never seen it from the

eastern side of the Bay of Bengal.*

N. lotenia; Certhia lotenia, Lin.: C. polita, Latham, Jerdon: C.

purpurata, Vieillot, Shaw. Allied to the last, but distinguished by its

superior size, its much larger and more curved bill, and brown under-

parts from the breast, also by the admixture of green in its glosses.

* I have lately procured the young of this species, which is dark olive-green above,

and tolerably bright yellow on the under-parts ; wings dusky, with brownish margins

to the tertials; and tail black, its exterior feathers tipped with whitish, and the outer-

most pair largely so, extending far up their outer webs. To this plumage would suc-

ceed the purple breeding dress; and the Czn. strigula, Hodgson (Ind. Rev. 1837, p.

272), would seem to be founded on a specimen which had began to throw out the

purple feathers as ‘‘a long central stripe from chin to breast,’ just as is shewn by

another specimen before me, which however is moulting into the purple garb from the

non-breeding livery of the adult, this last being, 1 apprehend, Mr. Hodgson’s female

strigula. The following is that naturalist’s description. ‘‘ Above dark olive-green,

below bright yellow, shoulders ‘and along central stripe from chin to breast, brilliant

deep blue; alar and caudal plumes dusky or black, the latter tipped and margined

laterally in the extremes, with white; a paler line over the eyes, and darker one

through them: bill dusky; legs black. he female is earthy-brown above, and

greenish-yellow below. She is without gular stripe or shoulder-spot. Size and cha-

racters of [N. Mahrattensis].”’

Since writing the above, I have found a skin referred by Mr. Hodgson to the female

of his striguda, but which has no trace of ‘‘ greenish-yellow’? on the under-parts, these

being uniform dull albescent: so far as I can make out, from the condition of the

specimen, I should judge it to be an old female Mahrattensis in the non-breeding

plumage.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 979

Alleged breeding plumage of the female as unlike that of the male as

in N. Zeylonica, wherein it would differ remarkably from N. Mahrat-

tensis. Inhabits Southern India and Ceylon.

N. jugularis, Vieillot, apud Jardine; or a closely allied species,

perhaps distinguishable upon actual comparison from the Philippine

bird cited. Length about four inches and one-eighth, of wing two

inches and one-sixteenth, and tail an inch and one-eighth; bill to

forehead five-eighths of an inch, and tarse under half an inch. Colour

of the upper-parts dull olive-green, brightening a little on the rump:

beneath moderately bright king’s-yellow ; and the axillary tuft intense

yellow with flame-colour anteriorly : throat and front of the neck very

dark glossy purple, margined laterally and at the gorget with bright

steel-purple, below which is a trace of a narrow cross-band of dark

red. Bill and feet dusky. Female similar, except in wanting the

axillary tuft, and having the throat and fore-neck yellow, like the rest

of the lower-parts ; but one of three specimens (probably an old female,

rather than a male in undress, ) has the middle of the throat and front

‘of the neck dusky, flanked with yellow. All have the tail blackish,

and its outermost feathers tipped with purer white than is usual in

this genus, this successively decreasing in quantity on the two or three

next. Common in the Tenasserim provinces.

Certain species with straighter and less prolonged bills constitute

the division Anthreptes, Swainson. ect. Javanica, Horsfield, is cited

as an example, and it is from this species that the diagnosis is evidently

drawn up; for in the Tenasserim and Malayan species formerly re-

ferred by me to rectirostris, Auct., but which would now appear to be

different, the bill is still shorter and less curved, the upper mandible

is at least as high as broad at base, where its upper ridge is continued

sharp to the forehead. I will designate it ee:

Anthr. phenicotis.* Length four inches and a quarter, of which the

bill to forehead measures half an inch, and the tail an inch and three-

quarters ; wing two inches and one-eighth ; and tarse eleven-sixteenths

of aninch. Upper parts a glossy bronzed green, including the crown

and wing-coverts; upper tail-coverts glossy green without the bronz-

ing; rest of the wings and tail dusky, the feathers of the latter

* [see that Temminck has already applied to it the identical specific name, term-

ing it Nectarinia phenicotis, p. c. 108, f. 1, and 338, f. 2, apud Dict. Class.

980 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [LNo. 143.

margined with shining green, and the secondaries and tertiaries slightly

with faint purple: throat, fore-neck, and breast, a light ferruginous ;

the rest of the under-parts bright yellow: ear-coverts amethystine,

passing into ruby-red on the sides of the neck, and separated from the

hue of the throat by a stripe of glossy purple; bill dull black, and legs

appear to have been greenish. The female has the upper-parts gloss-

less olive-green with a tinge of grey; breast as in the male, but

scarcely so bright; and under-parts dull greenish-yellow ; alars and

caudals margined with aureous-green. The young resemble the female,

except in the more downy texture of their feathers, and the chestnut

colour of the fore-neck and breast is reduced to a slight tinge. Inhabits

the Tenasserim provinces, and appears to be common at Singapore.

In the same range of territory Anthr. Javanica* abounds; and in

the southern portion of it occurs a species which much approaches in

its plumage the Arachnothere. 1 shall term it

Anthr. nuchalis ; the female indicated, but not described, as A.

macularia, J. A. S. XI, 107. Length about five inches and a half, of

wing two inches and five-eighths, and tail an inch and seven-eighths ;

bill to frontal feathers above three-quarters of an inch, and but little

curved; tarse five-eighths of an inch. General colour of the upper-

parts a rich dark olive-green, the tail dusky, its outer feathers succes-

sively more broadly margined with whitish, chiefly on their inner webs ;

the base of the hind-neck, and the upper tail-coverts, (of the male

only,) brilliant steel-blue: under-parts streaky, each feather broadly

marked with dark olive-green along the middle, and laterally margined

with pale sulphur-yellow, brightest on the belly : bill dusky horn-

colour ; and legs leaden-brown. Singapore.

The two species assigned to Anthreptes in Mr. Eyton’s list of a col-

lection from the Malay peninsula, published in P. Z. S. 1889, p. 105,

would seem, from the length of bill, as well as from their size, to be

rather referrible to Arachnothera. This group consists of Sun-birds of

comparatively large size and sombre greenish colouring, with a very long

and but moderately curved bill, and nostrils (apparently) closable at will

by the impending membrane. They appear, like the last, to be peculiar

to tropical Asia and its Archipelago, and are regarded by Mr. Hodgson

as the most highly typical form of the family. Such are—

* Certhia lepida of Latham.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 981

1. A. magna ; Cin. magna, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1837, p. 272: A.

inornata (2), Tem., apud Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 167*. ‘* Length

eight inches by eleven and a quarter, and weight an inch and three-

quarters”: bill to forehead an inch and five-eighths; wing three

inches and a half; tail two inches and one-eighth; and tarse above

three-quarters of an inch. Upper-parts greenish-yellow, each feather

having a central black streak ; lower-parts yellowish-white, similarly

striated : tail with a subterminal black band, and an albescent spot

beyond this on the inner web of its outer feathers: ‘bill dusky ; legs,

feet, and claws, bright orange”, the hind-toe very large and strong.

Inhabits Nepai and Assam.

2. A. (2) flavigastra ; Anthreptes flavigaster, Eyton, P. Z. S. 1839,

p- 105. Size of last, and length of bill the same. ‘‘ Capite, dorso,

pectore colloque cinereo-viridibus ; corpore subtus flavo ; alis, caudé tec-

tricibusque alarum, brunneis ; rostri mandibuld superiore atrd, inferiore

flava ; pedibus brunneis.” Inhabits the Malay peninsula, where termed

Chichap Rimba.

3. A. (2?) modesta ; Anthreptes modesta, Eyton, P. Z. S. 1839, p.

105. Length six inches and a half, of which the bill measures an inch

and a quarter; tarse five-eighths of an inch. “ Vertice, dorso, alis,

cauddque viridi-olivaceis hac singulis pennis mediis brunneis, illdé

prepillatd atro; corpore subtus viridi, singulis pennis in mediis ob-

scuris ; rostro pedibusyue brunnets.” Inhabits the Malay peninsula,

where denominated Chichap Nio.

4. A. chrysogenys, Tem. pl. col. 388, fig. 1; Certhia longirostra, Raf-

fles, Lin. Trans. XIII, 299, but not of Latham and others. Length

about six inches and three-quarters, of which the bill measures an inch

and three-eighths to forehead, and the tail two inches; wing two

inches and three-eighths, and tarse eleven-sixteenths of an inch. Colour

of the upper-parts dull olive-green, the alars and caudals margined with

yellowish: under-parts lighter, slightly washed with yellow, and very

faintly striated ; belly and under tail-coverts moderately bright yellow ;

the tibial feathers brown: cheeks beneath the eye naked of feathers ; a

bright yellow tuft commencing at the gape, and orbital mark of the

same above the eye: bill dusky, the edges of the upper mandible

* Atleast Dre McClelland’s drawing of what I have reason to suspect is the identi-

cal specimen referred to, represents the present species.

6 oO

982 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No 143.

yellowish, as appear also to be the legs and toes. Inhabits the Malay

countries.

5. A. inornata, Tem., pl. col. 84.; Cin. affinis, Horsfield, Lin.

Trans. XIII, 166; C. longirostris, Jerdon, Supplement to Cata-

logue. Length five inches and three-quarters, of which the bill to fore-

head measures sometimes an inch and a half, and tail about the same ;

wing two inches and a half to two and five-eighths, and tarse five-

eighths of an inch. Colour of the upper-parts olive-green more or

less flavescent; the crown darker, with scale-like feathers, merely

green-edged : under-parts dull greenish-albescent, passing into brighter

pale yellow on the belly: tail-feathers slightly tipped with whitish,

chiefly on their inner-webs, forming a spot which is more distinct to

the outermost. Bill dusky above, the lower mandible whitish under-

neath ; and legs plumbeous. Inhabits the Malay countries, spreading

northward to Arracan; and Mr. Jerdon has obtained one specimen of

it in the Mysore district, bordering the Neilgherries.

6. A. longirostra, Tem.; Certhia longirostra, Lath., Ind. Orn. 299 ;

Cin. longirostra, Horsfield: figured in Griffith’s Edition of the Régne

Animal, VII, 392. *‘ Ashen-olive above; alar quills brown, edged with

olive ; caudal blackish, white-tipped; throat and front of neck white ;

rest [of under-parts] clear yellow. Java.”

7. A. latirostris, Nobis. Length six inches, or nearly so; of wing two

inches and seven-eighths; and middle tail-feathers an inch and three-

quarters, the outermost above three-eighths of an inch less: bill to

forehead an inch and a quarter; being shorter and much broader than in

A. inornata, but tapering to its extremity, and also more curved: tarse

five-eighths of an inch. Upper-parts bright yellowish olive-green, the

lower pale ashy-green, and obscurely striated ; lower tail-coverts tipped

with whitish: tail more graduated than usual in this group, with a

subterminal dusky band, all but the medial two pairs of tail-feathers

having a well-defined pure white spot near the extremity of the outer

web, successively larger to the outermost. Bill dusky-brown above,

the lower mandible pale; and feet yellowish. Inhabits the vicinity of

Singapore.

To conclude this notice of Indian Nectarinide, there remains to be

considered the genus Diceum. Of this there are two Indian species

remarkable for the absence of vivid colouring.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 983

D. concolor, Jerdon, Madr. Jl. XI, 227. Length about four inches,

of wing two inches and one-tenth, and tail an inch and one-eighth;

bill to forehead seven-sixteenths of an inch, and tarse half an inch.

Above, brownish-olive; beneath, dull greenish-white: bill and legs

brownish-cinereous: sexes alike. Frequents the highest branches of

lofty trees on the Malabar range and Neilgherries: and

D. Tickellia, Nobis; Nectarinia minima, Tickell, J. A. S. II, 577.

Length three inches to three and one-eighth, by six inches across ;

of wing an inch and three-quarters to one and seven-eighths, and tail

seven-eighths of an inch; bill to forehead three-eighths of an inch;

and tarse seven-sixteenths of an inch. Above ashy-olive, paler beneath ;

wings and tail darker: bill pale flesh-coloured, with dusky tip; and

legs leaden-brown ; irides dark: sexes alike. Habits similar to the last,

emitting frequently a loud chirping for its size. This bird is common

about Calcutta,—Mr. Hodgson has sent it from Nepal, — and Captain

Tickell mentions it to be common in saul-jungle in Borabhim and

Dholbim.*

Among the gay-coloured species, there is at least one in Bengal; viz.

D. erythronotum, Auct. Not rare in the vicinity of Calcutta, and

occurs in Assam and in the Tenasserim provinces; but I am unaware

of its existence in the Indian peninsula. In Tenasserim the D. cantil-

lans is likewise numerous; and further south, in the Malay peninsula,

Mr. Eyton notices, besides D. cantillans, saccharinum. and cruentatum

(Horsf.), a new species described by him as D. ignicapilla in P. Z. S.

1839, p. 105.

Certain species with shorter bills constitute Mr. Hodgson’s division

Myzanthe, of which the Australian D. hirundinaceum is character-

istic. Allied to that species is

M. agnipectus, Hodgson. Length about three inches and a quarter,

of wing an inch and seven-eighths, and tail an inch and one-eighth ;

bill to forehead five-sixteenths of an inch, and tarse three-eighths of

an inch. Colour of the upper-parts black, with a mingled purplish and

green gloss, or, in one Darjeeling specimen before me, they might be

termed glossy dark green; under-parts pale buff, with a vermillion

patch occupying the greater portion of the breast in the male: the

* Mr. Jerdon has also just obtained a specimen in Southern India.

984 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

female is without this, and has the upper-parts glossless olive-green :

beak blackish, the base of the lower mandible white in the female ;

and legs dusky. Inhabits Nepal and Bootan.*

I may notice here a beautiful little Nepal bird lately sent by Mr.

Hodgson, which hardly seems to me to belong strictly to the Nectar?-

nid@, though it is evidently a soft-billed honey-sucker, and I know

not what else to approach it to. Mr. Hodgson styles it

Myzornis pyrrhoura. The bill of the specimen is mutilated of its

extremity, but would appear to have been slightly curved and pointed,

moderately slender, depressed, but the ridge of the upper mandible

distinctly angulated ; nostrils almost closed by an impending scale ;

and the gape furnished with some delicately fine vibrisse of moderate

length: tarse longer than the middle toe with its claw; toes of mean

length, the outer and middle basally connected; claws moderately

curved, that of the hind toe much larger than the others; wings much

graduated, having the 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th primaries subequal, and

the 3rd shorter than the 8th: tail even: plumage soft, dense and copi-

ous, very puffy over the rump, and the feathers of the head scale-like, but

not rigid. Length about four inches and a quarter, of which the bill

probably exceeds half an inch from the forehead, and the tail measures

an inch and a half; wing two inches and three-eighths ; tarse thirteen-

sixteenths of aninch ; and hind-toe and claw nine-sixteenths of an inch.

Colour a fine lively green, becoming bright emerald-green on the

scale-like feathers of the forehead and crown, which have well defined

black centres ; lores deep black, continued to beyond the eyes: under-

parts paler and tinged with verdigris-grey, having a slight rufous cast

on the throat; lower tail-coverts bright yellow: wing-coverts and ter-

tiaries green like the back; primaries black, the first eight having

white tips, and all but the graduated outer primaries having their ex-

terior edge partly white; secondaries margined with rufous and then

with white, except towards their tips, whereon also they have a terminal

white spot; tail dusky, washed with greenish, its feathers having

* In the article Souimanga by M. Drapiez, of the Dict. Class. d’ Hist. Nat., several

species are mentioned which are not enumerated in Sir W. Jardine’s Synopsis of the

Nectarinié ; and some of these are assigned to Bengal, or to India, (the latter a very

vague term as currently employed, being not unfrequently synonymous with what is

aggregately called ‘‘ the East’’). 1 much question, however, if any of these, supposing

them to be really distinct, appertain to India proper.

1843.] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 985

their outer webs dull red to near the tip: bill dusky-horn, and legs

apparently have been yellowish-white. Inhabits Nepal.

To another nectar-feeding family — the Meliphagide, I refer the

genus Zosterops, which is most extensively represented in Australia,

where this family is so largely developed. One Indian species — Z.

Maderaspatanus, would appear to be tolerably common in most parts

of the country, from Nepél to Ceylon, and is numerous also to the east-

ward of the Bay of Bengal, but I have not yet obtained it in the

vicinity of Calcutta. A species from the Mauritius, which I refer to

Motacilla Madagascariensis, Gmelin, has the bill longer and distinctly

incurved, and the tongue long and dichotomously subdivided at its

extremity, so as to form a tolerably large brush, as usual (if not con-

stant), among the Meliphagide. To this family, the genus Chloropsis

(p. 955, e¢ seg., ante,) is generally referred, and Mr. Hodgson inclines

to place with it his Heterornis, (olim Cutia), and even his Izops

(vide p. 948, ante), but Heterornzs at least I prefer to range near the

Timalie.

Returning now, after so long a digression, to the catalogue of Dar-

jeeling birds, I have to rectify, at )

Page 192, Iinota saturata, Nobis. This is identical with Mr.

Hodgson’s Carduelis Nipalensis, As. Res. X1X, 157, but now typify-

ing his division Procarduelis. Of true Carduelis, there are two

species upon the Himalaya allied to the European Goldfinch,—viz.

C. caniceps, Vigors, figured in Gould’s Century; and C. Burtoni,

Gould, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 90; and one belonging to the Siskin group,—

the C. spinoides, Vigors, which is also figured in Gould’s Century.

P. 193. Pica megaloptera, Nobis, was previously described by M.

Adolphe Delessert, in the Revue Zoologique par la Societé Cuvierenne,

1840, p. 400, and again in his Souwvenzrs d’un Voyage dans I’ Inde,

pt. II, 30, by the name P. Bottanensis. The Society has lately

procured a specimen of P. vulgaris shot on the Chilian Andes; and

another common Indian bird from Peru, the /bzs falcinellus. I have

reason to believe that Pica Bottanensis is the species of Magpie so

abundant in Afghanistan: but a specimen brought from Chusan by

Dr. Cantor was veritable P. vulgaris.

P. 194. Ampeliceps coronatus. This bird has lost the corneous

sheathing of its bill, but the bone was blackened, and the deception is

986 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

by no means obvious: sides of the face naked ; and I now think the

bird may be safely ranged in Gracula, v. Eulabes, Cuvier, vide p.

178 (bis), ante.

After the foregoing corrections and emendations, my paper on Dar-

jeeling birds still contains fifteen presumed new Species, of which thir-

teen have been received from that locality ; viz. Indicator xanthonotus,

Bucco Franklintt, Xiphoramphus (olim Xiphirhynchus,) supercile-

aris, Paradoxornis ruficeps, Cinclidium frontale, Pteruthius rufiven-

ter, Alcurus (olim Tricophorus) striatus, Accentor variegatus (olim

Himalayanus?), Turdus mollissimus, Chaitarts grandis, Muscica-

pula rubecula ( Dimorpha superciliaris, passim), Phylloscopus regu-

loides, and Linota fusca: of the remaining two, the Gracula ? (olim

Ampeliceps) coronatus is most probably from Tenasserim; and

Timixos meruloides is perhaps Australian. Mr. Hodgson has subse-

quently sent specimens from Nepal of Bucco Franklinit, Pteruthius

rufiventer, Alcurus striatus, Turdus molissimus, Muscicapula rube-

cula, and has informed me of the occurrence there of Phylloscopus

reguloides. I remain, Sir,

Your’s obediently,

Ep. Biyru.

Appendiz.—I have such a multitude of new species of Birds to

describe, and there are so many more groups of them which I think

I can elucidate, at least as regards their Indian species, that, notwith-

standing the great length of the foregoing Report, I shall take the

present opportunity to relieve myself of some portion of this constantly

increasing cumulus. ®

Genus Buceros. The various descriptions of Hornbilli to which I

have access are, for the most part, highly unsatisfactory and perplexing,

for which reason I shall contribute my mite towards the elucidation of

the species of this group. Those of India are as follow :—

l. B. cavatus, Shaw, apud Gould, in Century (not a good figure) ;

also apud Jerdon, Madr. Jl. Vol. XI, 37, where the following is

correctly described from Mr. Elliot’s notes: B. homraz, Hodgson, As.

Res. XVIII, pt. II, p. 169 et. seg. ; with coloured figure and views of

the casque at different ages: Dr. Horsfield, however, in his catalogue

of Dr. McClelland’s Assamese birds (P. Z. S. 1839, p. 164), notices

that the Calao a casque concave of Levaillant, according to Shaw’s

)

1842.) Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 987

description and specific character, differs in various particulars from

the present species, and mentions that there are specimens of the

Jatter from Sumatra in the Hon’ble Company’s museum. It is also

found in suitable districts throughout India (though not, that I am

aware of, in Bengal), is frequent in the Tenasserim provinces, and the

Society possess specimens from Assam and Arracan. It does not appear

to be subject to any variation of plumage, either sexual or according

to age; but there are some differences in the colouring of the bill and

casque of the sexes, as noticed by Messrs. Hodgson and Elliot, and

also of the irides, which in the adult males are intense crimson, and

in the females and young hoary. |

Not having Levaillant’s plates to refer to, " have no means of

forming an opinion respecting his Calao a casque concave, further

than can be derived from the conflicting descriptions of Shaw and

others, though founded on those plates ; but as his Rhinoceros Horn-

bill is erroneously represented to have the tail black with a white tip,

instead of white with a black cross-band as in the Homrai, I conclude

that his plates of the present species are equally untrustworthy,

and feel justified in following Gould and others in retaining the name

cavatus for Mr. Hodgson’s Homrai, which, together with B. rhinoceros

as above indicated, is the only species of its respective subtype that

appears to have been verified up to the present time.

The following details shew the confusion that has arisen from

Levaillant’s figures, which were doubtless made up from imperfect

and perhaps faultily restored specimens. Stephens, in his continuation

of Shaw’s Zoology (XIV, pt. I, 80), unites the B. bicornis and B.

cavaius of Shaw, assigning Sumatra as the habitat, wherein I pre-

sume that he follows Temminck. In Griffith’s edition of the Régne

Animal (VII, 417), and also in the second (French) edition of that

work by its illustrious author (I, 446), the B. b¢cornis, Levaillant,

pl. VII, is stated to be the adult female, of which B. cavatus, id. 1V, is

the middle-aged male ; to which is added that plates III and V repre-

sent ‘altered individuals.” The uselessly brief description annexed

in Griffith’s work is as follows: — ‘‘ Black with white patch on second

quills ; protuberance forming a double horn: Philippine Islands.”

And there is a figure of the bill and casque, assigned to bicornzs, in

Griffith’s work, Vol. VII, plate to p. 435, which might pass for

983 =Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. (No. 143.

the Homrai, but has the lateral edges of the casque prolonged in front

to an extent which 1 have never seen an approach to on the part of the

Indian species, wherein they are usually, if not always, truncated,

though it is posssible that they might so grow out in captive indivi-

duals. Mons. Drapiez, in the Dict. Class. d’ Hist. Nat. (Art. Calao),

suggests that B. cavatus, Cuv. and Lev., may perhaps be no other

than B. cristatus, Vieillot, figured in the supplementary plates to

that work, No. XXIII; but this is quite out of the question, and

I shall revert to the consideration of the latter species presently.

M. Drapiez, however, describes B. bicornis, Lev., P]. VII and VIII,

as a distinct species, differing altogether from cristatus and decidedly

from the Homrai, stating, that the under-parts and lateral caudal

feathers are white, and omitting all mention of any white, or rather

fulvous-white, on the hind-head and neck. Inhabits the Philippines and

China. Shaw, also, describes the B. bscornis, Lev., Pl. VII, and VIII,

to have the upper part of the breast, belly, thighs, and vent-feathers, .

white; but the tail to be crossed in the middle, except on the two

middle feathers, with a white bar: and he asserts it to be a native of

India and the Indian isles; though most assuredly there is no species

exhibiting such a coloration in India proper. His B. cavatus, Lev.,

III, 1V, V, and VI, is stated to have the face and chin black, and the

neck pale ochre-coloured, — so far as in the Homrai; but the whole

remainder of the plumage black (very doubtful, certainly as regards

the tail), and he adds a description which obviously refers to the young

of some other species, as applicable to the immature state of this one.

He also considers B. hydrocorax to be the young cavatus, in which

opinion, however, he is not followed by Stephens.

Lastly, Shaw gives, as a variety of his B. bicornis, the species

described by Cameli in the Philosophical Transactions, Vol. XXIII,

(1702-3), p. 1894; but there is a widely different species (from the

Homrai at least) in the Society’s museum, which satisfactorily accords

with the description by Cameli, and is clearly identical with Vieillot’s

cristatus as figured in the supplementary volume of plates to the

Dict. Class.; apparently differing only from that figure in having the

thighs ferruginous, and the primaries, together with their coverts and

the winglet, fulvous-white,—at least on one side, the other having

only the three first primaries, and some of their coverts, of that colour,

1843.] Mr. Biyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 989

the rest being blackish. Cameli’s specimen is described to have had

the primaries fulvous. This is accordingly a somewhat variable species,

subject to have the wings more or less fulvous or fulvous.white, in-

stead of brown-black: aw reste, the Society’s specimen has the upper-

parts of a dusky, greenish olive-brown; the face to beyond the

eyes, and the crown immediately behind the casque, black; belly

also black; the remainder of the head and the entire neck deep

ferruginous; thighs pale ferruginous; and tail wholly fulvous-white:

bill and casque dull coral-red, the terminal half of the former dark

and livid, and a slight admixture of this upon the casque. Length

nearly three feet, of wing sixteen inches, and tail thirteen inches ;

bill to gape six inches, and casque five inches, the latter produced

backward far over the crown; the shape of it is inflated, and flattened

above, narrowing to a point anteriorly, which however does not pro-

trude forward, the greatest breadth being nearly two inches, and there

are no transverse grooves either upon the casque or on the bill itself.

The figure cited of this species is rude (the feet not being repre-

sented as syndactyle), but decisive as regards the specific characters ;

the upper-parts being coloured brownish-black, the beily black as in

the Scciety’s specimen, and the thighs and vent of the same fulvous-

white as the primaries of the latter. But the description in the Dict.

Class. varies in several particulars, representing the upper-parts to be

black, but the under-parts with the tail-feathers, fulvous-white ; upper

mandible yellow, red at its point, and surmounted by a casque rounded

laterally, much produced backward, and creusé en gouttiere ouverte

par devant; hence the suggestion of M. Drapiez that this species may

be B. cavatus, but there is no tendency to such a structure apparent

in the Society’s specimen, which however may be from comparative

youth. The total length is given as three feet (French), and that of the

bill seven inches. The females and young are stated to be wholly

black, which is improbable as concerns the tail.

The same sexual disparity of plumage occurs in several allied

species, whereof the males only are more or less marked with rufous ;

and both sexes are characterized by having a naked and brightly

coloured, inflatable, gular skin. At the head of these may be placed—

2. B. Nipalensis, Hodgson, As. Res. XVUI, pt. I, 178, — the female,

with a coloured figure of this sex: the male having the plumage of

the entire head, neck, and breast, bright ferruginous, and that of the

990 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

thighs, belly, and vent, ferruginous-bay.* The Society possess fine

specimens of both sexes of this large species from the Munneepore

hills, and Dr. Pearson has a male from the vicinity of Darjeeling,

where others have been met with. It has merely a slight bulge in

place of a casque, and the upper mandible only is marked with a

series of broad transverse grooves, six or eight in number, which

appear, with the entire corneous substance of the beak, to be pushed

forward from behind, by a constant increment at the base of the beak,

and to be successively worn away anteriorly; the same is very ob-

vious in various other species of Hornbill, and the inference deducible

from this fact is, that the beak-sheath of birds generally, like their claws,

and other modifications of cuticle, continue to grow at base and to be

worn away at the extremity, as familiarly exemplified (at least as

regards the growing) by the human hair and nails, and in a more

or less obvious degree by all analogous productions.

Next follow several species very closely allied together, the males

either resembling in plumage the B. cassidiz figured in Griffith’s work

(Vol. VII, pl. to p. 434), or having the head and neck uniformly

bright rufous, as in the Calao de Waygiou (B. rujficollis, Vieillot),

figured in one of the plates to Labillardiére’s Voyage, and also the

B. cristatus (ante) ; approaching in this to B. Nipalensis : the females

of all (so far as known) have the head and neck black ; and excepting

B. cristatus and apparently some immediate congeners to that species,

the casque is transversely plaited, and the same naked, inflatable,

coloured gular skin exists as in Bb. Nipalensis. Such are—

B. pucoran (?_), Raffles, obscurely indicated in Lin. Trans. XIII, pt.

II, p. 293; this being doubtless either the present or the next species,

but most probably the present one; and the gular skin is stated to be

yellow: B. ruficollis, apud nos, ante, p. 176. Male having the medial

part of the crown and the whole occiput and nape dark rufous bay, or

deep maronne, and the sides of the head and neck, with the front of the

latter, glistening yellowish-white,—precisely asin the figure cited of B.

cassidiz, only that the maronne colour is more developed on the occiput

and nape than is at least represented in that figure, and forms the usual

crest in this genus: all the other parts are greenish-glossed black, except

the tail which is buffy-white. Bill yellowish-white, the basal por-

* The same sexual diversity of colouring obtains in the nestling plumage.

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 991

tion of both mandibles dark reddish-brown laterally, with a series

of narrow, transverse, whitish ridges, nearly similar to those of B.

cassidix ; the casque is scarcely elevated above the outline of the rest

of the upper mandible, but is broad and flat above, having a series

of narrow transverse whitish plaits, the intervals between which

are nearly filled up with a brownish substance, so that the profile

is almost even, and towards the front is worn quite so. As compared

with Labillardiére’s figure of B. rwjicollis, the casque of the present

species is less elevated, the plaits are much narrower and closer, and

do not reach so far as half way along the mandible; the ridges on

the sides of the bill itself afford another distinction from both that

species and the next, and approximate the present one to B. cassidiz.

Length above three feet, of the wing nineteen inches, and tail ten

inches and a half; bill to gape seven inches and a half, and with

casque three inches high, the latter nearly two inches broad. Inhabits

Sylhet and the Tenasserim provinces.

B. plicatus (2), Shaw; B. subrujicollis, Nobis, ante, p. 177. En-

tirely resembles the last species in its plumage, having the sides of the

head and neck (in the male) more or less deeply tinged with golden-saf-

fron: but the size is much inferior, though the wings and tail being pro-

portionally longer, the difference in actual admeasurements is not great,

though that of the weight would be considerable; the casque is also

much more elevate and highly convex, instead of being flattened

above; the plaits on it more resembling those of B. rzjicollis, except

that they are considerably more raised than in that species, though

far less so than in cassidiz, and the foremost incline close over the bill

as in 7ujficollis; there are also, as in rujficollis, no lateral transverse

ridges at the basal part of the mandibles, which is a further distinction

from cassidiz and (presumed) pucoran. Length about thirty-two in-

ches, of wing sixteen and a half, and tail nine and a half; bill to gape

six and a half, and with its casque nearly three inches high, of which

the latter occupies a full inch; it is also broad behind, becoming gra-

dually narrower to the front, whereas that of pucoran (?) is much

more uniform in its breadth throughout. Likewise an inhabitant of

the Tenasserim provinces, where apparently very common.

This would seem to be the B. plicatus of Shaw, said to inhabit

Ceylon, which I much doubt; and I certainly do not believe that it

992 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

would ever have a black tail with white outer feathers, as Shaw

mentions to be the case sometimes (this being characteristic of B.

Malabaricus, the young of which Cingalese species was probably here

confounded with the present one). Stephens annexes, as synonyms

of B. plicatus, the B. undulatus, Shaw, and B. Javanicus, Shaw.

The latter is described to have the head “ pale rufous,” whilst in seven

male specimens of the present species before me, the head is invariably

very dark rufous-bay, or deep maronne: B. undulatus, also from

Java, is described to have, “at the lower part of the neck, between the

shoulders, a moderately large patch of red-brown, adding a consider-

able ornament to the plumage of that part”; the present bird has

nothing of the kind: the female Javanicus is stated to be ‘‘some-

what smaller, and destitute of the reddish-brown patch between the

shoulders.” |

This may also, rather than the preceding species, be the Sumatran

pucoran of Raffles, which is stated to have a yellow gular skin: that

of undulatus, together with the orbits and the space immediately

between them and the upper mandible, is described as bluish; that of

Javanicus as yellowish-white. The two species here described are

undoubtedly the two allied Tenasserim races mentioned by Mr. Barb

(J. A. S., X, 922), as differing only in the colour of the naked skin of

the throat and around the eyes, which in one is of a beautiful blue,

and in the other an equally rich yellow: it is impossible to form any

decided opinion from the dry specimens ; but it would seem from them

that the larger or pucoran (apud nos) is the yellow-throated species,

and the smaller or plicatus the blue-throated.

In Griffith’s work (VII, 418), B. Javanicus is placed among the

species without a casque; and I have no confidence in the synonyms

attached, particularly as the Calao de Waygiou, or B. rujicollis, Vieillot,

is included among them. There are evidently several allied species

which require further investigation, unless they have been subse-

quently elucidated, which is most probable.

In a series of nine specimens before me of B. plicatus, the curious

fact of the successive advance forward of the ridges of the casque, in

consequence of the growth from behind, is particularly manifest. In

none of these specimens does the number of transverse ridges exceed

seven, and it is obviously apparent, upon inspection of the series of

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 993

specimens, that these ridges are thus pushed forward till they finally

scale off anteriorly, while others are continually in process of formation

behind ; also that in young birds they are individually much larger and

thinner in substance, becoming narrower and closer by degrees. I re-

member making an analogous observation in the instance of the very

remarkable long-legged Abyssinian Hornbill (or 46ba Guméa of Bruce,

sub-genus Bucorvus of Lesson), the casque of which forms a hollow tube,

open in front in the adult, and which continually advances forward, the

extremity shredding off, from time to time, in form of a ring. We

have seen that the transversely grooved plating on the sides of the base

of the upper mandible of B. Nipalensis, and necessarily of cassidix

and what other species possess an analogous structure, is constantly

renewéd behind and worn away in front in like manner.

I now return to the ordinary Hornbills without a gular bag, and of

which the sexes are similar in plumage, as exemplified by B. cavatus,

rhinoceros, Malabaricus, &c. It is among these that the casque

attains its maximum dimensions, being generally not large in the

preceding group. I have already remarked that Levaillant’s figure of

B. rhinoceros, which is copied by Shaw, represents the tail to be

black with a white tip, and the rest of the plumage to be wholly

black ; whereas the considerable number of specimens which have

passed under my observation have invariably had the thighs, vent,

and lower tail-coverts, white, and the tail white with a black cross-

band as in B. cavatus: a circumstance which tends exceedingly to

diminish our faith in the alleged colouring of B. cavatus, as distinct

from the Indian Homrai. Sir Stamford Raffles rightly remarks that

the female of B. rhznoceros is smaller, with the horn more recurved ;

and that the iris is white, while that of the male is red: this corres-

ponds with Mr. Hodgson’s observation of the diversity of colour of the

irides in the sexes of B. cavatus, and which probably obtains likewise

in Malabaricus and some others. |

The two next have been much confounded, for which reason I shall

describe them fully.

3. B. Malabaricus (verus), Latham ; B. monoceros, Shaw, and

probably also B. violaceus, Shaw: Beegma Dunnase of Lieut. White,

As. Res. 1V, 119. Black with white under-parts from the breast, also

the tips of the primaries and secondaries, and the entire three outer

994 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

tail-feathers on each side, with more or less of the next pair: bill and

part of the casque yellowish-white, having a flesh-coloured spot at the

base of the lower mandible, spreading on the throat, which is bare of

feathers except along its middle; contiguous to this, the base of both

mandibles is black, extending obliquely downward and forward from

before the eye, also the hind-margin of the casque (in the male only),

and a large patch of the same occupies the anterior three-fourths of

the casque in old specimens, but never reaches downward to the

upper mandible (as in the next species): casque very large, and

exceedingly compressed laterally, protruding far backward over the

crown, and its ridge terminating in an acute angle anteriorly, being

prolonged considerably beyond the junction of the casque with the

upper mandible. Female similar but rather smaller, the bill and

casque proportionally not so large, there is no black on the hind-edge

of the latter, and the irides are also probably not crimson as in the

male. The young have at first no black on the incipient casque,

which appears and increases in quantity with the growth of the

latter. Entire length of an adult male nearly three feet, of which

the tail measures nearly fourteen inches, and the bill from gape seven

inches, being with the casque four inches high; closed wing thirteen

inches, and alar expanse three feet and a quarter. Inhabits the

peninsula of India, being replaced to the eastward by the next species.

Raffles, indeed, inciudes it in his catalogue of Sumatran birds; but

B. albirostris has been so frequently confounded with it, that the

Jatter is perhaps here meant, the more especially as Dr. Horsfield

includes B. albirosiris in his catalogue of the birds of Java: possibly,

however, both of these notices refer to the B. bicolor of Eyton, which

I will describe presently.

B. violaceus of Shaw is stated to resemble Malabaricus in size and

plumage, except that its glosses are brighter and more iridescent, and

that “the base of both mandibles, as well as that of the casque, is

ornamented with a band of crimson, which at the base of the lower

mandible extends to some distance beneath the eyes, and is crossed by

two narrow black bars.” Described and figured by Levaillant from

a living specimen, said to have been brought from Ceylon; and a

figure of the bill and casque is given in Griffith’s work (VII, plate

to p. 435, being doubtless copied from Levaillant), wherein the

- / =n

1843.] | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 995

casque is represented as essentially similar to that of Malabaricus of

corresponding age, but the black is not continued forward to its tip,

and there is a white or pale line throughout the length of the

easque near its ridge, which is not mentioned to occur by Shaw;

Capt. Tickell, however, in his description of Malabaricus (J. A. S.

II, 579,) mentions “ a broad lateral irregular line of yellow, occupying

nearly the whole length of the casque ;” but this does not occur in the

specimens which he has presented to the Society, unless the lower

border of the casque be intended, which is not probable; and he does

not mention any crimson at the base of the bill, but only the flesh-

coloured base of the lower mandible and adjoining black, as usual.

At most, I conceive that B. violaceus is but an occasional variety of

B. Malabaricus, and which needs verification.

4. B. albirostris, Shaw; B. leucogaster, Nobis, J. A. S. X, 922, —

the young: generally placed as a synonym of Malabaricus, which

species it represents in Bengal, Nepal, Assam, and the Tenasserim

provinces, and according to Dr. Horsfield it likewise occurs in Java.

Its size, however, is much inferior, and the four pairs of lateral tail-

feathers are only tipped with white: the casque, also, is much less

compressed, in fact considerably bulged or inflated, and the black

patch upon it is much smaller, appearing only on the extreme tip of

the ridge, but spreading downward and backward over part of the

middle of the upper mandible, which latter it never reaches in Vala-

baricus ; the cutting edges of both mandibles are also more or less

black in albirosfris. Length of wings and of tail ten or eleven inches

only. The finest head before me measures six inches and a half from

point of upper mandible to gape, the bill and casque being above three

inches and three-quarters high, of which the latter is half; length of

casque seven inches, the hind portion protruded far backward over

the crown, and the anterior part gradually narrowed, and terminating

in a less acute angle (as viewed laterally) than in adult Malabaricus.

Throat but partially feathered as in that species, and the same fleshy

spot at the extreme base of the lower mandible.

Allied to these are some species in the Malay countries, as apparent.

ly the B. Malayanus of Raffles, and the following :—

B. bicolor, Eyton, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 104. Wholly black, except the

terminal three inches and a half of all but the middle pair of tail-

996 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

feathers, which are white: the beak and its casque are spotless yellow-

ish-white, excepting the base of the former and hindmost part of the

latter, which are black: head crested, as usual. The casque is allied

in form to those of the two preceding species, but especially to that of

B. albirostris, being less inflated than in the latter, and much less

compressed than that of B. Malabaricus ; moreover, its front does not

project forward as in the last mentioned species. Length about two

feet and three-quarters, of which the middle pair of tail-feathers

rather exceed fourteen inches, these being two inches longer than the

next pair, and the rest graduating but slightly ; wing twelve inches

and a half; bill to gape five inches and a half, and casque rather ex-

ceeding five inches. The young, according to Mr. Eyton, have the

incipient casque black. Originally described from the Malay penin-

sula, but the Society’s specimen is probably from the Moluccas.

5. B. Ginginianus, Shaw: Putteal Dunnase of Lieut. White, As.

Res. 1V, 121 : common Grey Hornbill of India generally. A small spe-

cies, with a low and compressed casque, the ridge prolonged anteriorly

to a very acute angle, and the hind part concealed by the feathers of —

the forehead, and not extended backward over the crown. General

colour grey, paler below, and from the breast gradually albescent ; ear-

coverts darker, and a light streak over the eye; primaries and second-_

aries dusky, the latter margined with grey, and all tipped with white ;

tail also black near the end, and tipped with white. Bill and casque

dusky, the tips and ridges of both mandibles whitish.

In the colouring of the tail of this little species may be discerned a

slight approach to the extraordinary Helmeted Hornbill ( B. galeatus )

of the Moluccas, wherein the middle pair of tail-feathers, which in

the present species and some others exhibit a marked tendency to be

prolonged considerably beyond the rest (as in Prionites, Crypsirina,

&ec.), attain an extraordinary developement; and it is remarkable

that in B. galeatus the portion of them chiefly from the tips of the next

pair to the subterminal dark band are generally much nibbled away

by the bird, except when quite newly put forth, and to such an ex-

tent in the Scciety’s adult specimen, which has one of its long middle

tail-feathers new and the other old, that, in the latter, the barb is

pretty well bitten away, as so usual in Prionites. This latter singular

genus, which presents the nearest approach to the Hornbills in the

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 997

New World, (very much more than the Toucans, which are far more

closely related to the Barbets,) is provided with an efficient serrature

to both mandibles, by means of which the species nibble away the

web of their middle tail-feathers at that part so closely, that it some-

times requires a magnifier to perceive that the truncation is artificial ;

still it does not appear that this can be cited among the tokens of

affinity which connect Buceros and Prionites, for in other birds

having the same form of tail, which exhibit no particular affinity for

these Syndactyli, as Crypstrina for instance, the same nibbling of

that part is frequently apparent.

Having mentioned B. galeatus, I am induced to add, that observa-

tion of the habits of this species, more than of any other, is likely to

acquaint us with the intent of that rostral appendage for which most

of the members of this genus are so remarkable. J. galeaius has a

short and nearly straight, and thus powerful, beak, and its casque has

a mass of solid bone anteriorly, to which no other species appears to

offer the slightest approach: now this must be for work of some kind,

requiring extraordinary protection for the forehead ; and other species

‘constantly wear the casque away in front, by some means: moreover,

in seeming reference to the liability of the excrescence to detach

particles from above, the eyes of these birds are protected by very

stout lashes, as is also the case with the Cvrotophage of tropical

America, which have likewise a rostral protuberance very similar to

that of several of the smaller Hornbills; but the lashes are equally

found in those Hornbills which have the appendage small or altogether

wanting, as well as in the Coucals (Centropus) and various other

Cuculide additional to Crotophaga: the presence of eye-lashes is,

however, very rare in the class of Birds, the only other groups which

I remember as possessing them being the Rapfores generally (which

have slight lashes), the Cursores or Ostrich group, and that extremely

remarkable and isolated American bird the Hoazin ( Opisthocomus ),

which can be approximated to nothing else.

Another peculiarity of the Helmeted Hornbill is its naked neck and

interscapulary region, which, added to its short beak, and solid-fronted

casque, and the extraordinary length of its middle tail-feathers, seems

to indicate this bird as a subgeneric form of Buceros, quite as distinct in

the Bucorvus of Lesson founded on the long-legged Abyssinian species.

6 Q

998 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

The only remaining Indian Hornbill is

6. B. Gingalensis, Shaw ; B. Bengalensis, Gray, in Griffith’s work,

though extremely doubtful as even occurring in Bengal. Size of B.

Ginginianus, the beak large but without a casque (vide figure in

Griffith’s work, VII, pl. to p. 435): “the colour of the upper part of

the head and the back is blackish brown, with a cast of bluish-grey,

the smaller coverts edged with black, marking out that part of the

plumage into so many scale-like divisions: the face and under-parts

are greyish-white, deeper on the belly and thighs: the two middle

tail-feathers are bluish-grey, and the rest somewhat deeply tipped

with white.” Originally described from Ceylon, and also frequents

lofty jungle on the Malabar coast. The Society possess no speci-

men.

Halcyon Smyrnensis, var.? albogularis, Nobis. Differs from H.

Smyrnensis in having the white of the under-parts confined to the

throat, and the black wing-patch extends over the entire coverts,

excepting those of the primaries and the winglet, and also replaces the

rufous on the shoulder of the wing. Habitat uncertain. Among a

great number of Indian specimens of 1. Smyrnensis, I have found no

variation whatever, the plumage being exactly as described by Mr.

Strickland in An. and Mag. Nat. Hist., August, 1842, p. 443, this

description having been drawn up from a Syrian specimen: and I

may remark that the young bird, in its first plumage, is marked and

coloured precisely as in the adult, only its hues are not so bright, and

the bill is dusky above with a yellow tip.

Picus, subgenus Gecinus, Boié; the Green Woodpecker group,

exemplified by P. vérédis and P. canus of Europe, specimens of both

of which are in the Society’s museum, the latter species received from

Norway. This subgeneric form, peculiar to the old continent, has

numerous representatives in India and the neighbouring countries.

Two species are figured in Gould’s Century of Himalayan birds,

but in disadvantageous contrast to the later figures by that natural-

ist; and there are others nearly allied and hitherto confounded with

them.

1. P. squamatus, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 8; Gould’s Century, pl.

XLVIII: P. dimidiatus (?), apud Hardwicke and Gray, not of

Temminck and Wagler. Length thirteen inches and upwards, of

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 999

wing six inches and a quarter, and middle tail-feathers five and_

a quarter; bill to forehead an inch and three-quarters. Upper-

parts rather dull green, the rump and upper tail-coverts much brighter

yellowish-green: throat, fore-neck, and breast, greyish, without any

markings; the breast slightly tinged with grey in some, and always

the sides of the neck, passing into the hue of the nape: under-parts

from the breast white, each feather subterminally margined with

dusky-black, and a few having also a slight line of the same on part

of the shaft; the under tail-coverts doubly marked with arrow-head

bars: primaries dusky, with a series of white spots barring their outer

webs, and the margin of their inner webs towards the base; the rest

of the large wing-feathers barred throughout the margin of their inner

webs, as seen conspicuously on the under surface of the wing: each fea-

ther of the tail is also conspicuously barred throughout on both webs: the

outer margins of the secondaries and tertiaries, together with their larger

coverts, are obscurely barred with a lighter colour; and the primary

coverts and the winglet are marked like the primaries. ‘The male has

the forehead and crown crimson, and the occiput inclining to scarlet ;

which parts are in the female black, the feathers laterally margined with

light grey, as is also a streak from the corners of the mouth in both

sexes, which is bordered above by a white one continued from the

nostrils, and this again surmounted by a black one between the bill

and eye; there is also a white streak over the eye: bill yellowish, the

base of the upper mandible dusky. The young have a mottled appear-

ance, the margins only of the feathers of the upper-parts being green,

bordering a dusky tint; the barring of the tertiaries is more developed ;

and the breast and lower-part of the fore-neck are marked nearly like

the belly, whereon the black portion of each feather is much broad-

ened internally, contracting the pale medial space within: the crimson

tips of the coronal feathers of the young male are much less developed

than in the adult, and there is scarcely a trace of red upon those of

the occiput: bill chiefly blackish. Gould’s figure of this species is much

over-coloured, representing a green breast, instead of greyish with at

most a very faint tinge of green; and the wings should be much more

sombre olivaceous-green ; the abdominal markings are likewise badly

represented. Hardwicke’s figure assigned to P. dimidiatus by Gray,

would appear also to be a bad representation of the present. species,

1000 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. _[No. 148.

with the barred appearance on the secondaries and tertiaries much

exaggerated. The P. sguamatus appears to be peculiar to the Hima-

laya.

The following two species appear to be confounded under P. sqgua-

matus in Mr. Jerdon’s list :—

2. P. striolatus, Nobis. Smaller and brighter-coloured than the

preceding, with the throat, neck, and breast, marked nearly like the

belly, and the caudal bars almost obsolete, except on the middle

pair and exterior web of the outermost pair of feathers in some speci-

mens. Length about eleven inches, the wing five inches, and middle

tail-feathers four inches ; bill to forehead an inch and a quarter. Head

and upper-parts like those of P. sguamaius, but the colours brighter ;

the dark streak from the corners of the mouth inconspicuous, from the

black being reduced to a narrow medial line on each feather; and

there is no black mark occupying the upper half of the loral feathers :

the entire under-parts are whitish, not suffused..with green as in the

next species, but streaked with dusky green, more or less dark on the

breast, and always greenish-black on the belly ; upon the throat and

fore-neck the feathers have each a mesial dark line, more or less de-

fined, which on those of the breast and sometimes above it widens,

and is divided to near the tip of the feather by a central whitish

streak, which latter also widens on the belly till the feathers of that

part present much the same appearance as those of P. squamatus,

only that a mesial dark line within the white is a great deal more

prevalent, and the general aspect of the markings is somewhat less

clearly defined than in that species: the sides of the neck are greenish

and more obscurely streaked, and the nape and interscapularies are in

some specimens indistinctly marked like the feathers of the breast:

bill yellowish, the ridge of the upper and tips of both mandibles

dusky. Female analogous to that of the preceding species. The

Society possess specimens from the Himalaya and Central India, and

have received this together with the last species from Mr. Hodgson,

who failed to discriminate them.*

3. P. viridanus, Nobis. Size about that of the last species, and

much resembling it, but the neck, breast, and under-parts very deeply

tinged with green, having a strong fulvous cast, and the tail longer,

* More recently, however, Mr. Hodgson has distinguished these two species.

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 1001

and spotted instead of barred with fulvous white, which in some spe-

cimens is obsolete on all but its middle pair of feathers. Length

about twelve inches, of wing five inches and a half, and tail four

and a half; bill to forehead an inch and three-eighths. Head as in

P. squamatus, the ear-coverts grey, and streak from the corners

of the lower mandible as in P. striolatus, or broad and consisting

of white feathers having a black central line, which in P. strzolatus is

less strongly defined, and the streak is in that species so nearly similar

to the striated adjoining plumage as to be little conspicuous: throat

greenish, contrasting with the streak from the corners of the mouth ;

and the neck green deeply tinged with buff all round, having only

indistinct strie in front; breast the same, the markings becoming

more defined, and on the belly they are strongly defined ; the ground-

hue of the breast is deeply suffused with fulvous-green, having a dark

green double streak on each feather uniting at the tip, and a narrow

medial line upon the shaft, the lateral edges of the feathers inclining

to be albescent; on the belly the ground-hue is whiter, and the

marking of the feathers is nearly as in the foregoing species, but with

sap-green, instead of black as in P. squamatus, and greenish-dusky as

in P. striolatus: on the sides of the breast, or rather of the fore-part

of the abdomen, the feathers have a broad dark green streak on their

outer web, away from the shaft, and a narrow one on their inner web

adjoining the shaft, besides which the lateral edge of the inner web is

also dark green ; the corresponding feathers of P. striolatus have the

whitish part much broader, and containing a broad mesial streak of

greenish-black, which again has a central white mark in some: the

upper-parts resemble those of P. strzolatus in brightness of colouring ;

and the middle tail-feathers are marked with dingy pale spots along

the exterior of both webs, more or less trace of which exists also on

the outer webs of the other tail-feathers: bill black, the lower man-

dible bright yellow except at tip. The female I have not seen. A male

in its first plumage has all the colours duller, and the markings of the

breast and under-parts very indistinct. The Society’s specimens are i

from Arracan, except the young one which was obtained further South,

being the so-termed P. sguamatus of Vol. X, p. 923. Mr. Jerdon,

however, clearly enough indicates this species in the description of his

P. squamatus of Southern India.

1002. Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. _[No. 143.

4. P. occipitalis, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 8; Gould’s Century,

pt. XLVII: P. darbatus, Hardwicke and Gray, apparently a bad

representation of the female: P. afinis (?), Raffles, Lin.- Trans.

XIII, pt. II, 288, which name would hold precedence. Length

about twelve inches and a half, or perhaps thirteen inches in the

recent specimen, of wing six inches, and middle tail-feathers four

and a half; bill to forehead an inch and five-eighths. General

colour green, but much less vivid than represented in Gould’s figure,

the rump brighter and more yellowish green as usual, though in

one of eight specimens before me the hue of the rump is all but

uniform with that of the rest of the upper plumage, and the same

specimen has also the tail quite plain, whereas in all the rest the

middle tail-feathers are barred (in general conspicuously) with dingy

greenish, and occasionally the other tail-feathers obscurely so, espe-

cially the outermost: the under-parts likewise vary, being in some

nearly as bright green as the upper, and in others pale dusky-ash,

with sometimes a few green and partially green feathers intermixed :

throat pale ; the sides of the head grey; a black streak from the

corners of the mouth, the feathers of which are laterally edged with

grey in the female; and crown of the male crimson, the occipital

region black continued to the nape,—the crown of the female being

black with grey lateral edges to the feathers, and the occiput pure

black as in the male: primaries and their coverts barred with a series

of white spots on their outer webs, and wings underneath marked as

usual in the group: bill wholly dusky black. Inhabits the Himalaya,

and also the Tenasserim provinces ; likewise Sumatra, if this be the

P. affiinis of Raffles, described as follows :—

“This species is about ten or eleven inches in length, dusky-green

above, with a shade of yellow on the lower part of the back ;

cinereous o7 slightly ferruginous below, mixed mith brown on the

abdomen. Quill-feathers brown spotted with white. Tail-feathers

brown, pointed as usual in this genus ; the two uppermost with a few

light-coloured spots along their inner margin. A gray patch encircles

the eyes, bounded below by a black stripe mixed with white spots,

which runs from behind the lower mandible. In the male the crown

of the head is red, often variegated with black, each feather being

black at the base and red at the tip; in the female it is entirely black.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 1008

The bill and feet are blackish-blue.” I have italicized the few par-

ticulars wherein it would appear to differ from the species above de-

scribed, and considering its alleged inferiority of size, I think that it

will not improbably prove distinct.

The two next species resemble in having a nuchal crest of brilliant

yellow silky feathers, much asin P. ( Brachylophus) mentalis, which

is also a green-bodied species, though pertaining to a different sub-

group of Woodpeckers; and the first of them has also the primaries

barred with ferruginous and black, nearly as in P. mentalis, and

also much resembling the general colouring of P. pyrrhotis, Hodgson,

J. A. S. VI, 108, which latter species, so far as I can judge from a

young specimen, would seem to be best ranged in Gecznus (the sub-

genus under consideration) : in other respects, the two following Wood-

peckers do not appear to be particularly allied, further than that in

both the rump is nearly or quite of a uniform green with the back.

5. P. flavinucha, Gould, P. Z. S. 1833, p. 120; P. flavigula,

Hodgson, J. A. S. VI, 106, which see for description. It appears to

be not uncommon in Nepal, and also in Arracan.

6. P. Nipalensis, Hardwicke and Gray, Jil. Ind. Zool., badly

figured ; P. mentalis apud Jerdon, Madr. Jl. Vol. XI, 214, but not

P. (Brachylophus) mentalis of Temminck. Much smaller and less

robustly formed than the preceding species. Length about nine inches

and a half, the wing five and a quarter, and middle tail-feathers

four and a half; bill to forehead about an inch. Colour of the upper-

parts bright green, the throat whitish, with dusky tips to the feathers,

which latter become so much developed on those of the foreneck and

breast, that these parts appear wholly dusky, having sometimes a

slight ashy, and sometimes a greenish, cast; belly and flanks dingy

whitish, with dusky cross-bars: lores whitish, surmounted by black,

over which (in the male) commences a crimson streak meeting its

opposite on the forehead, and continued backward to the occiput, this

crimson being confined to the occiput in the female; the white of the

lores is continued as a streak to the lowermost ear-coverts, and the

male has an admixture of crimson on the moustachial plumes: the

large wing-feathers are bright ruddy on their outer webs (anterior to

the emargination of the primaries), which are margined with green,

slightly on the primaries and deeply on the secondaries and ter-

1004 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

tiaries; underneath, the wings are dusky, barred with greenish-

white: tail blackish, its middle pair of feathers margined with ruddy-

green: bill dusky, laterally marked with yellowish except at tip;

“legs sap-green; irides reddish-brown” (Jerdon). Common on the

Himalaya, and occurs rarely in other parts of India, including the

vicinity of Calcutta.

Mr, Jerdon suggests that the P. chlorolophus of Vieillot may be

the young bird. In the Dict. Class., I find a P. chloropus, Vieillot,

from Bengal, described, which is most probably a variety only of

the present species, in which case the name would take precedence.

It sufficiently agrees in general respects, except that the supercilium

and a subocular line are stated to be pointed with yellow, instead of

crimson, the primaries are said to be externally spotted with yellowish-

white, and the throat and fore-part of the neck to be greenish, which

last is fully applicable to many specimens.

In Proc. Zool. Soc., for 1841,.p. 31, Mr. Strickland indicates

three groups of Woodpeckers included under Brachylophus of

Swainson ; viz. the green Woodpeckers ( Gecinus, Boié),—the crimson-

winged species (miniatus, puniceus, and mentalis), to which he

proposes to restrict Mr. Swainson’s term Brachylophus,—and the short-

thumbed species, exemplified by the commonest of Indian Wood-

peckers (P. aurantius, Lin., v. Bengalensis, Gm., v. nuchalis,

Wagler, v. hemipodius, Swainson), which group he characterizes by

the appellation Brachypternus. This last division, however, still does

not appear to me to be rightly constituted, but comprises two very

distinct forms, namely, that of the rudimental-thumbed P. auraniius,

which I think should be placed with those Indian species ( Chrysono-

tus, Swainson, comprising P. tiga, Shoret, and Grantia,) wherein

the thumb entirely disappears, and in this case the name Brachypter-

mus would be no longer applicable; the other group having a well

developed fourth toe, and being altogether much more powerfully

formed, and highly typical or characteristic of the Woodpecker struc-

ture. To this last, which may be designated Chrysocolaptes, apper-

tain P. strictus, Horsfield, (v. sultaneus, Hodgson),* P. hematribon,

* This is generally, I believe, now considered to be P. Goensis, though the des-

cription of the latter by Daubenton and others certainly does not apply.—Referring to

Dr. Horsfield’s catalogue of Javanese birds prefixed to his Volume of Researches, I

observe that he there refers his P. strictus to P. Goensis.

1843. | Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 1005

Wagler, and also I believe certain other species, together with the

following :—

P. (Chrysocolaptes) melanoius, Nobis. Length above a foot, of

which the tail exceeds three inches and a half; wing six inches; beak

to forehead an inch and seven-eighths ; long hind-toe and claw an inch

and a half; short hind-toe and claw three-quarters of an inch. Crown

and occiput of male splendid carmine, less crimson than in P. sérictus,

but otherwise nearly similar, only not converging to a peak behind ;

forehead mingled black and white ; a white streak commences behind

the eye, and is continued to the nape, the entire hind-part of the neck

being wholly white, much more broadly so than in P. strictus, and

extending down upon the interscapularies ; the rest of the back, rump,

tail, and scapularies, are brownish-black, having a slight aureous cast

on the last; wings bright golden-yellow, less vivid on the volar fea-

thers and their larger coverts; the bend of the wing, with the wing-

let, and the coverts of the primaries, dull blackish; primaries dusky,

having distantly placed large round whitish spots on their inner webs,

and dull similar spots on the outer webs of those contiguous to the

secondaries; there is a broad black streak down the sides of the neck

from the eye; and the under-parts are handsomely streaked, com-

mencing with three black stripes on the throat upon a white ground ; on

the breast the feathers are white with black lateral edges, which last

gradually almost disappear on the belly: bill blackish ; feet apparently

have been lead-coloured; and the irides are marked to have been

‘brilliant pink-red.” This beautiful bird was obtained near Midna-

pore.

I have other Woodpeckers to describe, but they require some further

elucidation at present; and of allied forms, Mr. Hodgson has recently

sent the Picumnus innominatus, Burton, P. Z. S. 1835, p. 154, vel

Piculus (olim Vivia) Nipalensis, Hodgson, J. A. S. VI, 107, which

is perfectly true to the generic type of Pzcumnus minutus, Tem., of the

West Indies and Guiana; and the Comeris (olim Sasia) ochracea,

Hodgson, J. A. S. V, 778, which I suspect will come under the

Microcolaptes of Temminck, founded on his Picumnus abnormis.

The Sasta ochracea, Hodgson, was obtained by Dr. McClelland in

Assam.

[ The following I have just received from Darjeeling.

1006 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 148.

Picus (Dendrocopus, Sw.) cathpharius,* Hodgson. Length about

seven inches and a half, of wing four inches, and middle tail-fea-

thers two and a half; bill to forehead seven-eighths of an inch.

Colouring as in P. Himalayanus (XI, 165), except that the under

tail-coverts are not red, and the crimson of the occiput extends behind

the ear-coverts to the black streak below them, tending to be conti-

nued into a gorget on the breast, where the feathers have a crimson

tinge: the bill also is proportionally much smaller than in that species,

and of a white colour ; and the tail is less rigid and pointed: — the

general form being that of the European P. minor. Upper-parts

black, with a white wing-patch, and series of white spots on both

webs of the large alars: lower-parts fulvescent-brown, the feathers

below the fore-neck having mesial black streaks; there is a black

stripe from the lower mandible along the sides of the neck, and above

it a whitish stripe through the eyes to the ear-coverts inclusive, com-

mencing on the sides of the forehead; the two outer tail-feathers are

barred with whitish, and the next one spotted with the same on its

outer web only ; and the occiput of the male is crimson as described,

extending laterally behind the ear-coverts. A Nepalese female in

nestling dress (sent by Mr. Hodgson) is rather smaller, with no red

on the occiput, but traces of it on the breast as in the adult male ;

and the outer tail-feathers have the pale bars broader than the black

ones, being the reverse of what is seen in the adult: bill chiefly

dusky. |

( To be continued. )

Addenda.—As the remainder of the foregoing Appendix will appear

in a subsequent number, I shall introduce here a few notices referred

to in a note to p. 941, ante.

Rhizomys from Arracan, p. 925. I have just seen two specimens

of the true Rh. badius, Hodgson, from Darjeeling; and the species

is distinct from the Arracan one, although Mr. Hodgson’s description

of Rh. badius will apply to either of them. The Nepalese species is

in colour wholly slaty-grey, having the fur of the upper-parts tipped

with dark rufous-brown, but shewing only a slight trace of this hue on

the under-parts, which are glistening dark cinerascent; the brown

* A latinization of different native names, or rather modifications of the same name,

for Woodpeckers in general.

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 1007

tips of the dorsal fur are also somewhat glistening; and the feet are

dark. The other I now designate

Rh, castaneus, Nobis. Size and structure of the preceding, but the

entire colour very much lighter, and the fur considerably less dense:

base of the piles pale dusky-ash tipped with vivid light chesnut-bay,

which is denser and consequently appears brighter on the cheeks and

sides of the head: under-parts merely paler than the upper, the faint

ashy hue of the bases of the piles inconspicuous: feet semi-nude and

flesh-coloured ; the claws pale: and towards the cleft of the upper lip

albescent. Inhabits Arracan.

Note to p. 928. Among some Darjeeling mammailia lately collected

by Capt. Charleton, is a beautiful specimen of the Felis marmoraia,

Martin, P. Z. S. 1836, p. 107; which, like the #. macrocelis (to

which it is allied), was originally described from a Sumatran example.

It is the species referred to F. Diardi in the volume on Feline in the

‘ Naturalist’s Library.’

Note to p. 933. Mr. Hodgson now suggests the name Hemirhynchus

in lieu of Zemnoris.

P. 938. Capt. Charleton also possesses a specimen of Sitta formosa,

Nobis, the wing-primaries of whith agree in relative proportion with

those of other Nuthatches: and he has several examples of the green

Kitta according precisely with that described, which, as Mr. Hodgson

informs me, are merely in the ordinary plumage newly put forth, the

colour changing to blue after a certain amount of exposure.

The same collection has also yielded a fourth species of my genus

Cyornis, as alluded to in a note to p. 941 ; viz.

C. unicolor, Nobis. Differs from the three others, in having no

ferruginous on the under-parts ; whilst the upper are of a lighter blue

than in C. rubeculoides and C. banyumas, and of a much brighter and

less greyish blue than those of C. Tickellie: lower-parts paler and

tinged with verdigris, being still lighter on the belly. The only spe-

cimen examined was killed while moulting, and retains many of its

mottled nestling feathers, especially upon the head and throat, also

the wing-coverts, and an intermixture of them on the bright blue

dorsal plumage: these nestling feathers are pale fulvous-brown with

narrow black margins on the clothing plumage, the wing-coverts are

dusky with pale fulyescent tips, and the large alars are tinged with

1008 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. (No. 148.

cyaneous, the tertiaries having small fulvescent tips like the wing-

coverts. Length about six inches and three-quarters, of wing three

and one-eighth, and tail two and three-quarters; bill to gape thirteen-

sixteenths of an inch, and tarse five-eighths of an inch. Occurs at

Darjeeling.

P. 942, note to preceding page. No. 51 of the birds of Capt.

Tickell’s list.—Since this was printed, Mr. Jerdon has written me word,

among other matters, — “I have also another Barbet sent from the

west coast, very like viridis, but distinct, and evidently the Bucco

lineatus of Tickell’s list.”

Note to p. 952. Mr. Hodgson informs me that the word leucopophlus

alluded to, was, as I suggested, a copyist’s mistake for leucolophos ;

and I perceive that there is an ‘“‘ Janthocincla leucocephala, Gould,”

mentioned in a list of Bengal birds published in the ‘ Annals and

Magazine of Natural History’ for June, 1842, p. 477, which I also

suspect is intended for leucolophos.

P. 961. Pitta gigas, apud nos. In a very interesting collection just

received from Arracan, there are two fine specimens of this Pvéta,

which I now think must be distinct from P. gigas, in which case the

species might be termed P. cyanea. These birds have the crown

brown, with a black medial stripe, the occiput bright red, and throat

whitish, having a black stripe on each side; the rest of the upper-parts

are entirely of a fine blue, and the lower pale blue, sullied with green

on the breast, and mottled with black as described. Length about

nine inches.

P. 966 Phylloscopus magnirostris, Nobis. The same collection has

yielded a second specimen of this new species.

P. 969 et seq. Nectarinia, Diceum, &c. Three species of this group

are also sent, of which two appear to be new; viz.

Nectarinia Phayrei, Nobis. This beautiful species pertains to the

group exemplified by the Indian N. Zeylonica and N. minima, and

nearly agrees with Sir W. Jardine’s description of N. Hasseltii, Tem.,

in the Nat. Libr., but has the “ mantle,” or at least the interscapulary

region, deep black. Length about three inches and three-quarters,

of wing an inch and seven-eighths, and tail an inch and a quarter; bill

to forehead half an inch. Crown brilliant golden-green, the feathers

of soft and disunited texture; cheeks, sides and back of the neck, inter-

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 1009

scapularies, and wings, deep black ; tail also black, richly glossed with

purple; scapularies, rump, and upper tail-coverts, brilliant steel-blue ;

throat and fore-neck splendid amethystine-purple; breast, and flanks

anteriorly, rich dark red; posteriorly, with the vent and under tail-

coverts, dull greyish-black: bill and feet black. Inhabits Arracan,

and is dedicated to its discoverer Capt. Phayre, the present Senior

Assistant to the Commissioner of that province, to whom the Society

is indebted for numerous zoological contributions of much interest.

Diceum chrysochlore, Nobis. <A thick-billed species, devoid of

shewy colouring. Length about four inches, of wing two inches and

one-eighth, and tait an inch and a quarter; bill to forehead three-

eighths of an inch. Upper-parts uniform vivid, but glossless, golden-

green, including the tertiaries, the margins of the secondaries, and

their coverts; the rest of the wing, and the tail, dusky black, the latter

margined towards its base with the colour of the upper-parts, and the

primaries slightly with yellowish-white: entire under-parts slightly

yellowish-white, except the lower tail-coverts which are bright yellow;

the breast and flanks being streaked with dusky, and a line of the same

proceeds from each corner of the lower mandible: inside of the wings

chiefly white: bill and feet blackish. Inhabits Arracan. The third

species sent is D. erythronotum.

The discovery of D. chrysochlore enables me, I think, to classify a

very curious little bird, (the affinities of which have long puzzled me,)

from Nepal, but which I have not now by me for comparison, as Mr.

Hodgson took the specimen away with him. The following is, how-

ever, the description which I took of it :—

Pachyglossa, Hodgson, n. g. Bill rather short, and very Swallow-

like as viewed from above, but less depressed, with the ridge of the

upper mandible obtusely angulated, and the terminal half much com-

pressed from the inflection of its tomize; nearly conical as viewed

laterally, the outline of the upper mandible curved, and its tip over-

hanging that of the lower mandible; the outline of the lower mandible

is almost straight. Nostrils nearly closed by impending membrane,

the aperture forming a narrow slit (in the dry specimen). Gape

unarmed. ‘The wings are large, having no rudimental first quill, but

the three first primaries are subequal, the third rather the longest, and

the fourth is a little shorter than the first ; they extend to three-fourths

1010 Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. [No. 143.

of the length of the tail, which latter is rather short. ‘Tarse short, but

nearly equal to the middle toe with its claw: the toes formed for

perching, the inner shorter than the outer toe ; and claws rather short,

moderately curved, and much compressed.

P. melanozantha, Hodgson. Length about four inches and a half, of

wing two and seven-eighths, and tail an inch and a half; bill to

frontal plumes five-sixteenths of an inch, and tarse half an inch. Upper-

parts dusky-Ginereous, tinged with dull olive-green on the head, and

partially elsewhere; upper tail-coverts of the latter hue: lower parts

paler, the throat white, passing down the centre of the fore-neck and

breast; belly and lower tail coverts bright yellow; axillaries, and

much of the inside of the wings, white; the outermost tail-feather

has a large subterminal white spot on its inner web, and the next a

similar but smaller spot: bill blackish, except the base of the lower

mandible, which is yellow; and feet apparently have been greenish.

Inhabits Nepal.

One or more of the following species will most probably be found

to range in, or near, the present genus. 1, Pipra squalida, Burton,

P. Z. S. 1836, p. 1138; — 2, Parisoma vireoides, Jerdon, vel Frin-

gilla agilis of Tickell’s list, which I expect to receive in a few days ;

and 3, Pardalotus pipra of Lesson’s Manuel, from the Himalaya, the

description of which I have not seen, and which may prove identical

either with Pipra squalida, which also is from the Himalaya, or with

Mr. Hodgson’s bird here described.*

Among other interesting species forwarded in the present collection

from Arracan, I may just notice Semnopithecus obscurus of Reid,

which is known to be common in the vicinity of Singapore, and should

therefore be the Tenasserim S. maurus of Helfer; — Tupaia Java-

nica,t fine specimens (the genus Gymnura having been previously met

with in the same province); — the Preus canente, Lesson, which

* Upon consideration, the hard-billed Diceum group, comprising Myzanthe and

Pachyglossa (?,), appears very distinct from the soft-billed Nectarinia group, com-

prehending Aruchnothera and Anthreptes, which latter subgenus might, I think, be

very properly abandoned, as founded on insufficient characters.

¢ Mr. Hodgson, to whom I exhibited a specimen of this animal, had never met with

the genus in Nepal, nor was it known to his experienced shikaree, to whom I also

shewed it; but Capt. Tickell assures me, that he distinctly recognises the genus as

inhabiting Central India!

pre

sae

ahye Jue

VED L

+ SEN OULO YUM.

eye

ae ot aller anid

ick Bore ‘thm alipiag

Wirebeict tot My reeleeen “st hciath Bae

vere potpeaay ahateldinet, five" : . ida: ieeutivene al

op Mx Sealget, tot donne Te RING a asp eectitaine. sik ANGE prise ae

Slow. geri . te apt, aye ne tesaggints, te thy ce uenl aAriinetioy: Wi

ated WY { Dany: Viewed ‘tng al wae cls vs SR ebhie| silcsani

wae os daa Passi’?

oe, y

Stag yPhPPIW Ute

DLAG PRED Uy

° RADIUM DY DP “P71 of LL Ye

S$ 5 “B® : Phys

IHOVTUS, VU

LTO

SE ys

bens,

,, :

- 3

*DLAS JOA THO AF

GV DPUBAL LU

CDEIIUWD

pew aT

masa

Sovne

1843. ] Mr. Blyth’s Report for December Meeting, 1842. 1011

ranges, with P. cordatus, Jerdon, (a species which the Society has

received from Tenasserim as well as from Southern India), and with

the Malayan P. concretus, Tem., in the subgenus Hemicircus, Swainson ;

—a new Partridge (P. Phayrei, Nobis), closely resembling in plumage

the Pintado Partridge of the Mauritius (Francolinus perlatus), but

of a less robust form, and the male armed with well developed spurs, —

two fine new Herons, one of them, however, perhaps the Ardea arde-

siaca of Wagler, &c. In previous collections, Capt. Phayre has also

enriched the Society’s museum with a new Manis, and various other

interesting species.

Plates. 1 annex figures of Indicator xanthonotus, Xiphorhamphus

superciliaris, Paradoxornis ruficeps (vide p. 947, ante), and Cineli-

dium frontale.

Note on the Flata limbata, p. 898 et seq., ante.

In a recent communication to Mr. Blyth, Capt. Hutton remarks, of

this insect, that—‘‘ This year has shewn me that I committed an error

in saying that the larve come forth in December or January,—as I

have now found them in crowds so early as the middle of November,

and, from their size and the quantity of wax then deposited, they must

have been hatched so early as the beginning of October. The so-called

wax, is apparently a species of manna, and it certainly has much the

taste of it. I want to ascertain, therefore, if it might not be useful in

medicine.”

In p. 898, 1. 20, for “ image,” red emago.—kK. B.

1012

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, 13th November, 1843.

The usual Monthly Meeting was held on Wednesday evening, the 13th November.

The Honorable the President in the chair.

The Bust of Mr. James Prinsep, by Chantry, (finished by Mr. Weekes, ) having

arrived on the Esser, was exhibited, and both asa work of art and a most faithful

and spirited likeness, it excited the highest admiration.

R. Ganthony, Esq. was balloted for, and declared duly elected.

The following new Members were proposed by the Secretary, and seconded by the

Sub- Secretary.

Lieut. Hickey, 1st B. N. I., and Willis Earle, Esq.

Rev. J. Long, was proposed as an Associate Member by the Honorable the Presi-

dent, and seconded by the Secretary.

The following list of Books, presented and purchased, was read :—

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, on the 1st November, 1843.

The Calcutta Literary Gleaner, October 1843, vol. ii, No. 8.—Presented by the

Editor.

The Monthly Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, vol. i.

and vol. ii, to No. 8.—Presented by the Society.

The Oriental Christian Spectator. Bombay. September and October 1843, 2nd

series, vol. iv, Nos. 9 and 10.—Presented by the Editor.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, March and

April 1843, vol. 1, Nos. 24 and 20.

The Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, 1842, vol. xii, pt. il.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History. London, August and September

1843, vol. xii, Nos. 75 and 76.

Quarterly Journal of Meteorology and Physical Science, Edited by J. W. G. Gutch.

London, April 1843, vol. i, No. 6.—Presented by the Editor.

Proceedings of the London Electrical Society, Session 1842-3, vol. i, pts. vii and

viii—Presented by the Society.

The Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, by Professor Jameson, ie 1843,

vol. xxxiv, No. 68.—Presented by the Author.

The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Macnzine and Journal of

Science, 3d series. London, 1843, vol. xxii, Nos. 145 and 146.

Transactions of the Geological Society of London, 2d series. London, 1842, vol. vi,

pt. ii.—Presented by the Geological Society.

Journal Asiatique, ou Recueil de Mémoires, 4me. series. Paris, Janvier et Février

1843, tome i, Nos. 1 and 2.

Journal des Savans. Paris, Février et Mars, 1843.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 1013

Delessert, Souvenirs d’un Voyage dans L’Inde, exécuté de 1834 4 1839. Paris,

1843.—Presented by the Author.

Batten’s Report on the Settlement of the District of Gurhwal, in the province of

Kumaon. Agra, 1843.

Leach’s Zoological Miscellany. London, 1814-1817, 8vo. 3 vols. —Purchased.

Gray’s List of the Genera of Birds. London, 1841.—Ditto.

Gray’s Spicilegia Zoologica, pt. i.—Ditto.

Meteorological Register kept at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, for the

month of September 1843.—From Government.

The Grahlaghava, a Treatise on Astronomy, with a Commentary, by Mallari. Edited

by L. Wilkinson. Calcutta, 1843. (Sanscrit.)—Presented by the Rev. J. J. Moore,

Secretary Agra School Book Society.

The Gunitadhia, or a Treatise on Astronomy, with a Commentary entitled the

Mitacshara, forming the 3d portion of the Siddhanta Shiromuni, by Bhashkara

Acharya. Edited by L. Wilkinson. Calcutta, 1842, (Sanscrit.)—Ditto.

The Goladhia: a Treatise on Astronomy, with a Commentary, entitled the Mitacshara,

forming the fourth and last Chapter of the Siddhanta Shiromuni, by Bhaskara

Acharya. Edited by L. Wilkinson. Calcutta, 1842. (Sanscrit.)—Ditto.

Saadi, Auteur des Premiéres Poésies Hindoustani, par M. G.de Tassy. Paris,

1843.—Presented by the Author.

Bibliotheque de M. Le Baron S. de Sacy, | liv. Paris, 1842.—Presented by

R. Merlin, Esq.

The Vendidad Sadé, by the Jate Framji Aspandiarji and other Dasturs. (Zend).

1842, 8vo. 2 vols.—Presented by the Bombay Branch Royal Asiatic Society.

Chart of the Comparative Readings of Eight Barometers, 1843.—Presented by Mr.

Buist, in charge Bombay Observatory.

A Petition from the Widow of the late Mr. Bouchez, was presented. Referred

to the Committee of Papers for report in the first instance.

The following Memorandum by the Secretary was read :—

Memorandum by the Secretary.

I have, with much regret, to report the death of the aged, and highly respected Pun-

dit Kamalakanta Vidhyalanka, the friend and fellow labourer of James Prinsep.

With him has expired the accurate knowledge of the ancient Pali and Sanscrit forms

of writing ; for although we now possess a key to these ancient characters, no Pundit

has exercised himself in the act of decyphering to the extent to which has Kamala-

kanta. Like all learned persons of his class, he carefully avoided the communication

of his peculiar knowledge, and latterly, having as he thought little chance of being

contradicted, the old man became exceedingly dogmatical and opiniative. As I was

totally destitute of that critical ingenuity and wonderful acumen which supplied in

our lamented friend, James Prinsep, the want of philological accuracy, and as I had

not command of the time which he could devote to the careful and patient investiga-

tion of the readings of ancient inscriptions, 1 soon abandoned the attempt to avail my-

self of Kamalakanta’s services in this department. His appointment about the Soci-

ety was that of Sauscrit Librarian.

1014 Asiatic Society. [ No. 148.

He has left two wives, a married and one unmarried daughter, and a son now

being educated at the Sanscrit College. His only other relative is a nephew, who has

been latterly doing the old man’s duties in the Library. He is an intelligent and ac-

tive person, and is quite competent to conduct the duties of Sanscrit Librarian. I do

not know the degree of his proficiency in Sanscrit, but he seems capable of answering

all references respecting books made by parties who attend the Library. The libra-

rian’s Salary is Rs. 30a month. I would for efficiency’s sake have recommended our

securing the services of a young Pundit, named Sarodha Purshad, who also assisted

’ James Prinsep, and has been of much help to me. He is a man of real ability and

learning; but as I can always command his services, (he being employed in my office);

as Dr. Roer’s proficiency in Sanscrit is now acknowledged ; and as the Society owes a

debt of gratitude to Kamalakanta, and of respect to him as the colloborator of James

Prinsep, 1 would propose to offer his nephew 20 Rs. a month as Librarian, reserving

the other ten for a purpose I shall have in a short time the honourof subjecting to

consideration.

I have also to report the demise of Mr. M. Bouchez, our head Taxidermist ; regard-

ing this appointment, I shall have the honour of reporting hereafter. I am now with

Messrs. Piddington and Blyth engaged in arranging for a proper successor to the duty.

H. Torrens,

October 11, 1843. V. P. and Sec. As. Soc.

The appointment of Rasmohun Nayvagish, the nephew of Kamalakanta Pundit,

as Native Librarian and Pundit was duly sanctioned.

The following letter from Lady Rodd, accompanying a beautiful Sévres Porcelain

Medallion of Major Rennell, was read :—

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Lady Rodd presents her compliments to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of

Calcutta, and requests he will do her the favor to present to the Society in her name,

the accompanying Medallion of her revered father, the late Major Rennell; her Lady-

ship had it executed at Sévres, during her late visit to Paris, by desire of the French

Institute, and she feels anxious to send a copy to India, where Major Rennell’s fame

has ever been dulv appreciated.

Wimpole Street, l7th August, 1843.

Read the following Letter to Government, in reference to the Volcanic Island off

Cheduba, as ordered at the Meeting of October, with its reply :—

The Secretary to the Government of India, Home Department.

Sir,—By desire of the Hon’ble the President and Members of the Asiatic Society,

I have the honor to request that you will be pleased to submit to Government their

respectful request, that a scientific person qualified in all respects for the task be deput-

ed at the public expence, and under the superintendence and directions of the Society, to

examine and report upon the new Volcanic Island, which has appeared off False

Island, near the S. E. end of Cheduba, and on the site of the valuable Copper Ore

forwarded to the Society by Capt. D. Williams, from Flat Island, close to the same

spot,

1843. | Asiatic Society. 1015

2. The reasons which, upon mature consideration, have induced the Society to

submit to Government its opinion of the propriety of this measure, are briefly the

following :—

I. The extreme interest with which phenomena of this kind are regarded by the

learned in Europe, on account of their close connection with many questions both of

speculative and even of practical science.

Il. Their importance in a maritime point of view, as connected with the appearance

and disappearance of shoals in many seas.

III. The occurrence of the phenomenon, so to say, at our own doors; whence it

would be hardly creditable to the British name, were not the fullest investigation of it

to take place, and be given to the world. It is barely necessary to allude to the high

approbation which will on the other hand be accorded to the Government of India, if

this is fully, efficiently, and creditably done, so as to satisfy the just expectations of the

scientific world in Europe.

IV. Many other scientific, geological, and even national considerations might be

adduced here, which the Society doubts not will readily suggest themselves upon

mature consideration; but passing over these, it would farther advert to the financial

and commercial interest attached to the discovery of a rich ore of Copper in this

hitherto unknown locality, when its proximity to the mountains of the Aeng Pass, and

other considerations are borne in mind; and (though fully aware that such views and

the hopes derived from them are often fallacious, ) it is evident that these are neither

few nor unimportant.

V. The Society would moreover respectfully submit, that in the establishment of a

Museum, (that of Economic Geology,) for the express purpose of aiding in every way

the developement of the mineral resources of India, the Honorable the Court of Di-

rectors would almost seem to have anticipated that cases like the present would arise,

and to have virtually expressed its desire that no such opening for the advancement of

general knowledge, or the pussible advantage of the state should be left unexplored :

and this the more especially, when it occurs so near to the metropolis.

VI. The Society feels that the institution of the Museum of Economic Geology

entrusted to their charge, under the immediate Superintendence of an Officer under

their orders, but whose salary is at the public charge, entitles the Government to iden-

tify itself, when occasion offers, with those who voluntarily seek in these times the

general advancement of science, and the benefit of India; and the Society would there-

fore, from a feeling of duty, abstain from any other course than that of informing the

Supreme authority, that an opportunity existed for the practical exercise of means

tending to elucidate questions of much interest and importance.

3. Impressed with these considerations, and with many more which the Society will

not for brevity’s sake, or cannot from its position, intrude upon the attention of

Government, it has carefully made such preliminary enquiry as might obviate loss of

time should the present recommendation be adopted; and the results of these is, that

the services of Mr. Stephen Mornay, a gentleman who has received a regular scientific,

geognostical, and practical Mining education, who holds a diploma from the Royal

Mining College of Saxony, with other credentials of the most satisfactory kind, and

who is also well known in Calcutta as a person of an enterprising, persevering, and

energetic character, are available on a salary of Co’s. Rs. 400 per mensem for whole

months, or 150 Co’s. Rs, per week for broken periods, and 3 Rs. per diem for his tra-

1016 Asiatic Society. [No. 143.

velling expences when not furnished with a conveyance by Government, by which

also all contingent charges, such as the costs of surveying, those of examining mineral

sites, or such as might perhaps prove to be such, collecting and conveying specimens,

&c» &c. are fo be defrayed. The Society would also solicit permission for an indent

on the Magazine and Surveyor General’s Office, for tools and scientific instruments,

&c. under its inspection, and responsibility for their safe custody and due return.

Mr. Mornay’s time to be at the disposal of Government under the Society’s directions,

for any period long or short, as may be found necessary.

It presumes that this will not be thought more than a fair remuneration for the

services of a gentleman of scientific attainments on a duty which must involve much

personal labour and some discomfort, and which demands acquirements not commonly

to be met with in India.

4. In conclusion, the Society would earnestly and respectfully urge upon the

attention of Government, that opportunities combining as this does the augmentation of

general knowledge and the chances of immediate benefit, and both in the same locality,

but rarely indeed occur; and it is thus the more anxious that this investigation which

it trusts cannot fail to redound to the credit of its promoters, should not be neglected.

H. Torrens,

11th October, 1843. Vice President and Secretary Asiatic Society.

No. 298.

From T. R. Davipson, Esa. Officiating Secretary to the Government of India,

to H. Torrens, Esa. Vice President and Secretary to the Asiatic Society, dated

the 21st October, 1843.

Home Department.

Srr,—I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 11th instant,

written by desire of the President and Members of the Asiatic Society, requesting

that a scientific person may be sent at the public expense to examine a Volcanic

Island, which is stated to have appeared off False Island near the S. E. end of Cheduba,

and explaining the reasons which have induced the Society to make this request.

2nd. The Governor General in Council considers, that there should be a Nautical

Survey in the first instance of this Island; its locality and extent should be accurately

ascertained, before its internal formation and character are scientifically examined.

3rd. His Lordship in Council will request the Hon’ble the Deputy Governor of

Bengal to authorize an arrangement by which a Nautical Survey may be effected,

and when that object has been attained, and the result reported, the adoption of fur-

ther measures, with a view to the promotion of Science, will be taken into consideration.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your obedient servant,

Council Chamber, the 21st October, 1843. ~ T. R. Davipson,

Offg. Secy. to the Govt. of India.

And the following from Captain Williams was also read : —

No, 1898.

Letter of Assistant Commissioner Capt. D. Williams, of 9th August 1843, with

report of the native Soogree, (officer,) accompanying it.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 1017

My peEaAR Sir,—The Soogree of Flat Island has at last been able to come to the

Sudder station. He reports to me the sudden disappearance of the Island thrown

up by a volcano, a few days after its appearance. It was impossible to go to it to

obtain any of its formation. This is much to be regretted, as I see by your letter of

the 7th instant, just received, that you attach importance to the subject of the

volcano.

Iam encouraged by your letter to submit specimens of cloth manufactured at this

place; it so resembles the Scotch ‘‘ Shepherd’s Plaid,’ that I have had pantaloons

made of it for wear. I should think it better adapted than the plaid, being not so

warm for this country, yet warmer than jean or drill.

Dr. Andrews has sent specimens of this cloth for the inspection of Messrs. Ranken

and Co. the tailors. It is made of double thread, and would be of a finer texture and

stronger, if we had fresh English thread to make it with.

I also enclose for inspection a petrification of the Bela flower, (country Jessamine,

or “ Jasmimum Sambac,) that the natives find here, though very seldom. The petrifica-

tion occurs on the shrub. I had a much finer specimen that was stolen from me a few

days ago; the natives set them in gold rings; this is evidently the bud of the flower, and

is petrified when in the calix. Yours faithfully,

Ramree, Arracan, 25th September, 1843. . D. WILLIAMS.

P. S.—I forwarded to vou by Lieut. Phayre, who has left us for Calcutta, the lumps

of iron that were found with the gold coins on Chedooba.

It was resolved, that as the Survey by the Ganges Steamer would not afford time

for the researches contemplated by the Society, the Curator of the Geological and

Mineralogical Department be requested to draw up such instructions, as may enable

Captain Russell and his officers to collect usefully what information they can in the

progress of their duties.

The Secretary presented specimens of the Type for the Tarik-i-Nadiree, of which

work he stated he had so far advanced the labour of collation, that the printing of it

might now commence.

Read the following Letter from Secretary to the Government of India :—

No. 40, of 1843.

From J. THomason, Esa. Secretary to the Government of India, to the Secretary to

the Asiatic Society, dated:Fort William, the 30th September, 1843.

Foreign Dept. Secret.

Sir,—At the desire of the Governor General in Council, I have the honor to trans-

mit to you for the use of the Asiatic Society, and for such notice in the Journal of its

proceedings as may be considered necessary, the accompanying copy of Notes of a

Tour taken through parts of Beloochistan in 1838-39, by Hajee Abdool Nabee, trans-

lated and arranged by Major Robert Leech, C. B. Bombay Engineers.

‘I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Fort William, the 30th Sept. 1843. J. THOMASON,

Secy. to the Govt. of India.

1018 Asiatic Society. LNo. 143.

Also the following from the Secretary to the Government of Bengal :—

No. 2291.

_ From Under Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to the Secretary to the Asiatic

Society, dated Fort William, 2nd October, 1843.

Marine.

Sir,—I am directed to transmit to you copies of the Meteorological Registers kept

at Penang, for the months of April, May, June and July last. Lam, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Crcit BEADON,

Under Secy. to the Govt. of Bengal.

The following Letter from Captain Jacob, Bombay Army, was read :—

My DEAR Sir,—l perceive by a letter from Mr. Piddington to the Bombay Asiatic

Society, published in its last No., that your Museum of Economic Geology is desirous

of information as to ores, mines, &c. on our side of India; I enclose therefore a report on

the iron of the Guzerat Peninsula, published I believe by the Committee of the London

Society, which devotes itself to inquiry into and improvement of our Indian resources, to

whom it was sent from Bombay, but what became of the specimens that accompanied

it, given to our Bombay Geological Society, I know not; if these are desiderates, I

can easily supply a fresh collection on my return.

From my long silence, | fear you will have thought me very ungrateful for your

Journal duly received. Last month I sent you a budget on the Girnar Inscriptions,

which I trust has reached; intense official occupation, (in Kattywar we have two men

to look after twenty-two thousand square miles,) and severe illness, have stood in the

way of my usefulness; the first cause has ceased, but the other remains.

Yours, my dear Sir, very truly,

Ootacamund, 11th November, 1843. E. Jacoss.

Read the following from Captain Hannyngton, Purulia, addressed to the Sub-

Secretary. '

My pear Sir,—I am extremely obliged to you for the trouble you have taken

about the Mortality Table, and also for the perusal of Major Henderson’s valuable

Paper, which I return by this day’s post.

If you can procure, and will publish, Mr. Prinsep’s Table, the purpose for which I

wanted it will be fully served.

I send you a Memorandum, which I have drawn up respecting Mortality among the

Military. There are a few Tables to which I have prefixed a few explanatory remarks.

I have abstained from any practical deductions, as they would hardly fall in with the

scientific nature of your Journal, in which perhaps you may think fit to publish them.

Should the Paper as it is, be thought unsuitable, you may reject it without ceremony.

I am, my dear Sir,

Purulia, October 5, 1843. Yours very truly,

J. HANNYNGTON.

Captain Hannyngton’s very valuable Tables will be printed in the Journal, and in

an early number.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 1019S

Read the following Letter from our new and zealous associate Dr. Sprenger :—

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Dear S1r,—The Asiatic Society is in possession of two copies of Abdur-Razzak’s

Dictionary of Suffitic terms, which being rather scarce, and the completest work of the -

kind, might deserve to be published; and if the Society should deem it worthy of

being edited, I should with great pleasure undertake the task. I am fully aware of the

objections which can be raised against the work. Sufiism is not much studied, neither

here nor in any other part of India, and the merit of the work is perhaps not so great

as it might be expected. With reference to the first objection we may answer, that it

is a duty for us, as we are nearer the source, to furnish European scholars who have

done so much for India, with materials: and Tholuck’s work De Sufiismo ; Garcin de

Tassy’s most elegant book, entitled Les Oiseaux et les Heures, ‘‘ Gehmdlder’s’? Speci-

men de Philososophia Arabum, Rosenzweig’s magnificent edition of part of ‘‘ Jelaled-din

Rum,” and Ruckert’s highly poetical version of other portions of the Mesnewi, are not

only proofs that Sufiism is studied in Europe, but that they find very great difficulties

in explaining technical expressions, most of which they might find without loss of time

in Abdur-Razzak’s Dictionary. As to the merit of the work, I may repeat what I have

already stated: a Dictionary of Sufitic terms is very desirable, and this is the best book

known on the subject, it is therefore the more desirable that it should be edited, as no

European collection of MSS. is, to my knowledge, in possession of a similar work.

The work itself is very small, and would hardly fill one hundred pages, if the Arabic

text alone was printed, which | should think best todo. The expense would therefore

be very trifling. I am, dear Sir,

Your’s most respectfully,

A. SPRENGER.

The work upon this recommendation was ordered to be printed forthwith under Dr.

Sprenger’s kind superintendence, and the best thanks of the Society were accorded to

him for his suggestion. .

Caicutta, 1st November, 1843.

Read a letter from Mr. J. T. D, Cameron, accompanying the Model to which it refers.

To H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

S1r,—I have the honor to forward per bearer, a specimen of the Ferry Boats com-

monly used in Ceylon.

The European residents of the Island call them Out-riggers, from the outer work

attached to the boat, which is intended to balance it. The craft used by the native

fishermen are much larger, but similarly built.

Should you think the specimen deserving of a place in the Museum of this city,

I beg to say it is entirely at your service. Iam, Sir, yours obediently,

La Martiniere, 24th October, 1843. J.T. D. CAMERON,

From the Rev. J. J. Moore, Secretary Agra School-Book Society.

No. 114.

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Sir,—lI beg to present, for the acceptance of the Society, copies of two celebrated

Sanscrit works on Astronomy, published under the patronage of the Agra School Book

1020 Asiatic Society. LNo. 143.

Society; and since the death of the late Resident of Sehore, completed under my su-

pervision. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Agra, 12th October, 1843. J. J. Moore,

Secy. Agra School Book Society.

The type and general execution of these Books were considered as most creditable

to the Agra School- Book Society’s Press and to the Editors.

Read the following letters from the Bombay Branch Asiatic Society :—

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.

Srr,—Under the instructions of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, I

have transmitted for the Library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, by Capt. Noakes of

the Ship Samuel Boddington, a lithographed copy, in 2 vols. of the Vendidad, in the

Zend language, but Gujarathi character, with a Gujarathi translation, paraphrase, and

comment, by Aspandiarji Framji and other learned Dasttrs of the Kadmi sect of

Parsees. Of this work the Society has had 205 copies lithographed at an expense of

upwards of Rupees 1,000, with the object of preserving a work now become rare in

manuscript, and of distributing it amongst the principal libraries of Europe and Asia.

I shall be happy to receive an acknowledgment of the receipt of the work. The

Society have also directed the Jzashné and Visparad, which compose the doctrinal

standards of the Parsi faith, and the larger liturgy in use among the Zoroastrians,

to be printed, which will be forwarded as soon as ready.

_ The MSS. from which these works are copied, are in possession of the Rey. Dr.

John Wilson, late President and present Honorary President of the Society.

I have honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Bombay Asiatic Society's Rooms, 7th Sept. 1843. Joun G. Ma.tcoimson,

Secretary B. B. R.A. S.

To H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Sir,—I am directed by the Bombay Branch Royal Asiatic Society, to request that

you will have the goodness to order the following works to be sent to Messrs. Thacker

and Co., for transmission to the Library of our Bombay Society, along with some works

ordered from them. I have requested Messrs. Thacker and Co. to pay yourself, or the

Treasurer of the Asiatic Society, the price of these works, as advertised on the cover

of the Journal of your Society.

The Mahabarata in Sanscrit, 4 vols. (large paper. )

Harriwansa, (royal 4to.)

Raja Tarangini, (large paper.)

Naishadha, (4to. ) I have the honor to be, Sir,

Raghavansa. Your most obedient servant,

Bombay Asiatic Society’s Rooms, Joun G. Matcotmson,

6th September, 1843. Bombay B. R. A. 8.

The present of the rare work alluded in the first letter was duly appreciated by the

Members, and in reference to the order contained in the last letter, the Secretary

stated, that he had taken upon himself, pending the approbation of the Society, to

present to the B. B. A. S, the works desired by them, which was fully approved of.

1843. | Asiatic Society. {021

Read the following Letter from Moulmein :—

H. Torrens, Esq. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Srr,—I am desired by the Committee to apprise you of the formation of an Horti-

cultural and Agricultural Society at this station, connected with which will be a

Museum of the Natural History of these provinces, so soon as the funds of the Society

will admit of the erection of a building for the reception of specimens; in the mean-

time, they are anxious, as a commencement, to open a correspondence with your Soci-

ety, and trust it will be reciprocated. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Yours very obediently,

Moulmain, 12th October, 1843. G. R. Gorpon,

Hony. Secy.

The Secretary was requested to state that the Society would have much pleasure

in forwarding the views of that at Moulmein in every possible way.

Read Letter from the Hon’ble Company’s Astronomer at Madras.

From Tl. G. Taytor, Esa. F. R. S.andF. R.A.S. Hon'ble Company’s Astronomer,

to H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

S1r,— With reference to an application lately made by your Society to the Governor

General of India to be supplied with the Meteorological Observations made at the

Madras Observatory, at the Tidal Stations, and at the Magnetic Observatories, I am

desired by the Most Noble the Governor in Council at this Presidency, to place myself

in communication with you upon this subject, and to furnish the Asiatic Society with

whatever observations you may desire ; to this end I have the honor to state,

Ist. That the Meteorological Observations made at the Madras Observatory, from

their commencement in 1795 up to the end of 1822, are printed in a work entitled ‘‘ Madras

Observatory Papers,’’ copy of which it appears has been furnished to the Asiatic Society.

2d. The Meteorological Observations made at this Observatory since 1822, and up to

the end of the present year, are now in the course of publication, and a copy will be

forwarded to the Asiatic Society on its completion.

3d. The Meteorological Observations at the Magnetic Observatories being made at

odd hours and minutes of Gottingen mean time, and bearing reference to certain cor-

rections which may be necessary to the Magnetic Observations, rather than to any

Meteorological enquiry, are not as a whole of that strict character, to entitle them to

the name of a Meteorological Register; selections from these, however, with certain

explanations and corrections, will eventually be published.

4th. With regard to the Meteorological Observations made at the Tidal Stations, it

is proposed that their publication shall be undertaken as soon as two complete years’

Observations at each station has been obtained, when the Observations will altogether

be discontinued.

Sth. Since the whole of the Meteorological Observations asked for by your Society

will in all probability be in print in the course of a twelve month, I have delayed for

the present forwarding any manuscript copy; In case however any more immediate

information should be desired, I shall be prepared without delay to forward your wishes.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

i Madras Observatory, 26th September, 1843. T. G. TayLor,

Hon’ ble Company’s Astronomer.

1022 Asiatic Society. [ No. 143.

Read Letter from Colonel Spiers, Resident at Gwalior, &c. &c.

To H. Pippineton, Esq. Sub-Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Dear S1x,—When on futlough, I picked up a few geological specimens of various

kinds, chiefly limestone from Stirlingshire, Scotland, a few specimens of copper ore

from Ireland, and lead from Lanarkshire, with some of various kinds, probably not mark -

ed, at least not to be trusted; in all perhaps 50 specimens. If you think they would be

of any use in the Museum of Geology, I shall be happy to send them down by some boat.

I happen also to have 5 or 6 coins, one of Sigismund III, one James VI, one Clot

1602, 1 ditto 1582, one Hamburgh, and one ditto James 1570. If you think these would

be valued, I will be happy to send them also. Your obedient servant,

Cawnpore, 23d September, 1843. A. SPEIRS.

Read the following Letter to the Secretary from Captain Eastwick :-—

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.

My pear Si1r,—I received a day or two ago, your kind note regarding the publi-

cation of my Sinde Vocabulary, and am much gratified by the flattering manner in

which my endeavours have been mentioned. I returned to England in June, on sick

certificate. With respect to the 25 copies of the Vocabulary reserved for me, I should

be highly obliged, if you would order them to be transmitted to Messrs. Forbes and Co.

of Bombay, who are my Agents in India, and who will take care of them for me.

I am, dear Sir,

Yours truly,

Frankfort sur Maine, August 17, 1843. E. B. Eastwick.

The Secretary stated, that Captain Eastwick’s copies had been sent to Bombay

through the Government, but that Messrs. Forbes would be written to, in order

that they might claim the packet if not already delivered to them.

‘Read the following Note from Dewan Ramcomul Sen, who had kindly under-

taken to examine the Sanscrit paper on Eclipses, presented at a former meeting of

by the Rev. J. Pratt :—

The bad state of my health has hitherto prevented my writing to you about the

accompanying paper, which I have now the pleasure to return. It is styled ‘‘ Grahuno

Mala,’’ or Garland of Eclipses, and has been prepared I believe by some Astronomer

of Nepaul. It professes to give an account of Sun and Moon Eclipses for six years ;

viz. from the year 1759 to 1766 of the Sak era. It does not, however, shew any cal-

culation or data by which the problems are solved. Following is a Table of the

Eclipses :—

Sak, die (or Sumbul 1894,)—1 Moon Eclipse.

GU el siatelelarsisiaie ie isiemie o 47 1 Ditto ditto.

99 8 a ee eres erceeeccee 1 Ditto ditto.

TO] ins sincaap o Ml scecieoee, nk Witte ditto,

Se LiMLUha ete ig ins» & Sin eoose L SUD ditto.

LVOD,” welatemiae eee ee coeeee 1 Moon ditto.

VAG4s 6 asin An eain'sieaied jie ce, 10) Sun. ditto:

UTGD; wade Vaden sse see cw) 4 Wittov ditto.

1766, <ciewes aera aie weeee | Ditto ditto.

of A kalglente aistaNdiain' -- ee 1 Ditto ditto.

1843.] Asiatic Society. 1023

Year, month, age of the Moon, the day of the week, the hour it began, the position

occupied, and its duration, are stated.

29th October, 1843.

The paper was not considered as worth printing, as being for so very short a

period, and the number of cuts considerable.

Read the following Letter from Major Hough, accompanying the Life Preserver

to which it refers :—

To H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Sir,—I do myself the honor to transmit, for submission to the Asiatic Society of

Bengal, a ‘‘ Cloth Life Preserver,’’ which is so portable and cheap, as to render it very

useful to all individuals, whether on board of Ship, or on board of Boats in any river.

J have the honor to be, Sir,

Your obedient servant,

Calcutta, 24th Oct. 1843. W. Hougu, Major.

P. S.—A description of the ‘‘ Life Preserver’’ is annexed to this letter :—

Description of the ‘* Cloth Life Preserver.”’

It is made like a Jacket without sleeves, composed of two pieces of cloth sewn to-

gether, so as to form the front and back. There being two cloths to each, the space

between the two is easily inflated by means of the wooden tube placed in the front,

by blowing into it. It can only be inflated when the cloth is wet. The tapes, above

and below, which pass through the loops, are meant to fasten the Life Preserver round

the neck and waist. When inflated, it-will float any man—for, in proportion to the

bulk of a man’s body, must the size of the Life Preserver be increased. It is in use in

the British Army at Home, and its cost is about one shilling. A cork, or piece of

wood, and a piece of string, or tape, should be attached to the tube, as a stopper; to

prevent the egress of air, or of the ingress of water.

The Americans have rendered all kinds of furniture ‘‘ Life Preservers’’ on board of

Steamers ; but, I do not find any so personally useful as that I submit, since the user

can swim with it to land, &c. It is also available to travellers generally, having to

cross rivers, &c., being portable. It is superior to the ‘‘ Chinese Bamboo Life Pre-

server,’’ and is better and cheaper than the ‘‘ Air-tight Hats and Caps,’’ which cost

16 to 14 Rs. and are too costly for the Private Soldier, or those in the lower ranks of

the people. It can be renewed, at pleasure, while there may be difficulty in procur-

ing an adequate supply of Hats and Caps; and even Bamboos may not always be

procurable. ‘The ‘‘ Cloth Life Preserver’’ is admirably adapted for ‘‘ Regimental

Swimming Parades ;’’ and may, annually, save the lives of many men, women, and

children, both European and Native.

Read the following Letter accompanying the valuable paper to which it refers :—

H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

My pEar Sik,—I have the pleasure to send you asketch of Aracanese History.

You will be able to judge whether it is of sufficient interest to lay before the Society,

a point which from my Aracan bias I feel uncertain about. Yours very truly,

A. P. PHAYRE.

1024 Asiatic Society. [ No. 148.

This most interesting communication was handed to the Editors, for early inser-

tion in the Journal.

The Secretary also presented on the part of the Rev. J. Long, who was present, a

valuable Essay, entitled ‘‘ Tables of Comparative Philology, shewing specimens of the

affinity ofthe Greek, Latin, and English with the Sanskrit, Persian, Russian, Gaelic,

Welsh, Lithuanian, German, Hebrew, and Anglo-Saxon,’”’ which, as it was desirable

to secure the Author’s supervision, was also ordered for early publication, the sub-

ject being one of intense interest to Indian and general Philologists, and one that

requires a rare combination of learning, talent, and industry, to undertake.

Read the following Letter from G. Buist, Esq. The Barometrical Chart to which

it refers, was exhibited, and much admired :—

My pear Sir,—A thousand thanks for your attention in forwarding me the Barome-

ter Returns for the May Storm. I do not know that I shall have any more occasion to

trouble you on this subject for the present, but should I require to do so, I shall avail

myself of your kind offer of services.

I have this day shipped on board the Samual Boddington, three copies of a Dia-

gram illustrative of the readings of nine Barometers, being up together for 24 hours,

and read half hourly. One of these is for the Asiatic Society, the others for yourself,

or any one else who may care about them. The Society’s is the only one which is

coloured, and put on a roller: the most simple operation of this sort is so expensively,

so tardily, and so badly done at Bombay, that I have left them plain ; so that should

you think it worth while, they may be filled up to your fancy at Calcutta.

I am anxious to see your Memoir :—it is published I observe, but has not yet

reached Bombay,

I forgot to mention, that a short Memoir, referring to the Barometric experiment,

appears in the next number of the Bombay Asiatic Transactions, of which I shall send

you a copy, so soon as it is printed. Yours truly,

Bombay, September 6th, 1843. GeorGE Buist.

P. S.—In case the Maps should not be sent to you, perhaps you will take the

trouble of sending for them to the office of Messrs. Gisborne and Co. on the Samued

Boddington’s arrival.

Report of the Curator Museum Economic Geology for the month of October.

Museum Economic Geology.—We have to acknowledge in this month from the

Bombay Branch Royal Asiatic Society, a box of Geological and Mineralogical Speci-

mens, 35 in number, all of much interest and utility, and for the most part so far new

to our Collections, that we only possessed small specimens of some of them. Another

box has beer announced by the Society. As the Catalogue is brief, it may be inserted

here with the letter.

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Sirz,—With reference to my letter of the 5th ultimo, I have now the pleasure to

enclose a list of the Geological and Mineralogical specimens forwarded for the

Museum by the Fazal Rubany. These specimens-are necessarily miscellaneous, as

1843.] Asiatic Society. 1025

they consist of duplicates put aside for your Society, in the course of the new arrange-

ment, now in progress, of our Collection. Still some of them will, 1 think, be of in-

terest, if not in the higher and scientific department of your Collection, at least in that

of Economic Geology. The specimens of the Bombay Basalt, I request may be

presented in my own name, and if more specimens of the Minerals they contain are

required, I shall endeavour to procure them.

Another case will be dispatched in a few weeks. I have the honor to be, Sir,

f Your most obedient servant,

Bombay Asiatic Society Rooms, Joun G. Matcotmson,

22nd Sept. 1843. Secretary B. B. R.A. S,

List of Specimens forwarded.

No. 1 to 6. Specimens of iron ore from Malwan, in the Collectorate of Rutna-

gherry. See Journal of the Bombay Branch Royal Asiatic Society,

No. III, and Geological Transactions, Vol. V, page 548. The rock

in which this fine ore is found, is stated to be sandstone, I think

by mistake.

— 7 ,, 9 Building stone from the ruins of Mandoo, the Ancient capital of

Malwa. The fine reddish sandstone abounds with minute corals,

and I have also found in it marine shells. Many of the finest

buildings are composed of this.

_ », 10. Selenite. Persian Gulf? .

_— ,, ll. Lithographic limestone (so called) ; southern Mahratta country. See

Capt. Jervis’ and Capt. Newbold’s Papers in Journal of Asiatic

Society of Bengal, Dr. T. Christie, in Edinburgh Journal of

Science, and Geological Transactions, Vol. V, plate 46.

— ,, 12. Argillaceous limestone. South Mahratta country.

_ », 13- Common ditto, (Kullajee,) ditto.

—_ », 14. Cale spar in argillaceous limestone, ditto.

— » 15. Limestone, ditto,

— 16 ,, 17. Diamond sandstone, near Belgaum, ditto. It is not known that dia-

monds are found in this rock. It is so called from its relations and

mineralogical characters being that of the diamond matrix.

— », 18. Diamond sandstone. Kowlgere, Dharwar S. M. country,

— », 19. Laterite, ditto. i

— 20 ,, 21. Gypsum from Persian Gulf. This was imported in some quantity

intended to be used as stucco.

— 22 ,, 25. Rock of which the Maldive Islands are formed, collected by Capt.

Moresby, I. N. See Darwin on Coral Reefs. The complete col-

lection in the Bombay Museum is perhaps unequalled.

— ,, 26. Iron stone from Segoor, 15 miles north of Dharwar, South Mahratta

country.

— ,, 27. Iron ore used at the native foundries, Mahableshwur hills.

— », 28. Painted plaster of the baths of Aurungzeebe’s palace, Aurungabad,

by J. G. Malcolmson, Esq.

— 29 ,, 30. Granite from bed of Nerbudda near Mhysur. See Major Stirling’s

letter, Bombay Geographical Society’s Journal. This granite rises

in the middle of the basalt, and is cut by basaltic dykes.

1026 Asiatic Society. [ No. 143.

No. to 31. Basalt, Mazagon Quarry, Bombay. Occurs in columns and balls.

Is extensively used in the erection of the ship-building slips and

wharfs in Bombay and Colabah. This specimen contains Laumo-

nite and Prehnite. Presented by J. G. Malcolmson, Esq.

_ », 32. Ditto ditto, with Laumonite and Calcspar.

— 33 ,, 34. Ditto ditto, with Apophyllite.

_ », 380. Basalt, from the hot springs of Rajapoor, Southern Concan. This

specimen was coated with coating resembling Pyrites, probably

from Hydro-Sulphureous water on the iron of the basalt.

Joun G. Matcotmson,

Secretary, B. B. R. A. S.

Mr. Pyle of Futtegurh, to whom I addressed one of our circulars, sends us a box of

specimens of a peculiarly interesting kind, being mostly the products of his own

manufacture from materials near that station.

No. 76.

H. PippineTon, Esa. Calcutta.

Sir,—I beg to apologize for not having answered your letter earlier. I have now

the pleasure of sending the following products of Upper India by the hands of Mr. E.

Fricker, who has engaged to deliver them over to you.

Pottery.—No. 1. A specimen of Earth, for making superior ware when mixed with

No. 2. Of which a specimen is also sent.

No. 3. Stone-ware Bottles made at Futtegurh, of the above Earth.

Crucibles.—The Earth marked No- 1, when properly manipulated is capable of

forming Crucibles, which will withstand the most intense heat of a bellows furnace.

Fire Bricks.—No. 4, Fire Bricks made at Futtegurh.

No. 5. Soda Sub Carb. made at Futtegurh.

No. 6. The Earth from which the Soda is made.

No. 7. Dark green Glass from river sand and the above Soda, with certain additions.

No. 8. Light green Glass made from the above Soda, with certain additions.

No. 9. Citrate of Lime for the manufacture of Citric Acid.

Your obedient servant,

Futiegurh, 14th September, 1843. Joun E. Py e.

Our indefatigable correspondent, Captain Shortrede, sends us a specimen of a

supposed Lithographic Stone, of which his account is as follows :—

To H. Pippineton, Esa. Curator Museum Economic Geology, Calcutta.

S1r,—I have the honor to inform you, that I have despatched to your address for the

Museum of Economic Geology, by the Steamer Luckia, a package containing a slab of

Stone from the neighbourhood of Rewa, which I apprehend may be found useful for

Lithographic purposes.

I have sent two pieces ; the smaller of which may serve as a hand specimen, and the

larger for Lithographic experiment.

There are some quartzy veins which probably may render this particular slab of no

great value, but if the stone be otherwise fit for Lithography, it seems desirable to

bring it to notice.

1843. | Asiatic Society. 1027

The locality from which this stone was brought isa hill at the small village Boorhwa,

two miles S. E. from Raipoor, about twelve miles from Rewa on the road towards

Mirzapoor.

On the top of the hill are the ruins of a temple of Devi, and a large pile of un-

dressed stones, which seem as if they had been intended for the foundation of a flight

of steps. They are laid without mortar, and the work has never been completed. ‘The

present slab was found lying loose at the bottom. The whole pile is of the same sort

of stone, but a few slabs of sandstone have been used in building the temple. I did

not ascertain the particular spot from which the pile has been quarried, but I believe

it to be in the immediate neighbourhood, if not on the hill itself. This might easily

enough be ascertained, should it appear that the enquiry would be worth the labor.

Some of these stones may be used as whetstones, and though not very good ones, they

seem quite as good as many that are supplied from the public stores.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Allahabad, 10th October, 1843. RoBERT SHORTREDE, Capt. lst Asst. G. T. S.

Of these two stones, I regret to say, that the larger appears quite unfit for Litho-

graphy, being nothing more than a common fine grained (coarse grained for lithogra-

phic purposes) sandstone. The small slab was sent to Messrs. Black, as it promised

better, and their answer is as follows :—

H. Pippineton, Esa.

Sir,—I have pleasure in sending a few impressions, and the stone you sent me the

other day; 1 have not troubled Mr. Bennett. The stone I find is rather too soft, and

I fear will not give very clear impressions; but if a somewhat larger piece could be

obtained, I would try how many fair proofs could possibly be taken from it.

Your obedient servant,

Asiatic Lithographic Press, 3\st Oct. 1843. T. Biack.

Mr. Thomas Hugon, of the Salt Department, has presented a very beautiful litho-

graphed section of the Boring of the Artesian Well of Grenelle near Paris, 1680

French feet deep, and I may mention here, that we fortunately possess a series of the

Fort Borings to the depth of 172 feet.

Geological and Mineralogical Department.—Mr. Dodd, Assistant Assay Master,

has obliged us with a few well chosen Geological specimens from the neighbourhood

of Agra, of much interest in themselves, and of special utility to us in filling in our

Cabinets of Comparative series.

From M. Gros of Bourbon, we have received a few specimens of Lavas, and Lava

with Leucite, from the Volcano of that Island, which will be a valuable addition to our

Volcanic series.

For all the foregoing Communications, the thanks of the Society were duly ordered.

Oriental Publications for Sale, at RuDUCED prices, by the Asiatic Society.

Works.

Mahdbharata, vol. Ast. pages $31, vol. 2d, pages 868, vol. 3rd, pages ae vol. 4th,

pages 1007, royal 4to. ... on ne aie SC see

Large paper do. do. Bas =59 eee

Index to the 4 vols. of the Mahabharut complete. ae nee Be

Harriwansa, 563 pages, royal 4to. ace as ocr soe

Raja Tarangini, 440 pages, 4to. oe a ae “ ace

Large paper, do. do. eee Rea mee ate ae oa

Naishada, 917 pages, 8vo. ... “ot ros pe

Sausruta, Ist vol. 378 pages, 2d vol. 562 pages, Bvo.

Fatawé A'lemgiri, ist vol. 763 pages, 2d vol. 759 pages, 3a vol. 565 pages, 4th vol.

759 pages, 5th vol.€97 pages, 6th vol. 657 pages, royal 4to. per vol. as,

Inaya, 2d vol. 690 pages, 3rd vol. 682 pages, 4th vol. 937 PARC, 4to. one

Khazanat ul Ilm, 694 pages, 4to. ue ae a

Jawdme ul Ilm ul Riazi, 168 pages, with 17 plates, 4to, wa as

Anis ul Musharrahin, 541 pages, 4to. a cee ane

Sharaya-ool-Islam, 631 pages, 4to. ... att aa ct ove

Tibetan Grammar, 256 pages, 4to. tae a otc vee

Tibetan Dictionary, 373 pages. 4to. ue ho eee

Asiatic Researches, per vol. on eve soe

Burnouf Memoire sur deux inscriptions cunéiformes, 4to. ‘199 pp...» oo

Burnouf Commentaire sur le Yacna, with notes &c. 2 parts, pp 945.... see

Rs.

COOKERMAREKO ECgoaouna

Burnouf et Lassen, Essai sur le Pali, ou Langue Sacrée de la presquile au de la

eco

eoe

du Gange. Paris, 1826, pages 222, 8vo. oan Ss cee

Elémens de la Grammaire Japonaise, par M. M. Rodriguez et Remusat. Paris,

1825, pages 158, 8vo. sae sot eee coe

Ditto ditto Supplément, Paris, 1826, pages 31, 8vo. on cae

Contes Arabes, traduits par J. J. Marcel. Paris, 1835, avec notes, vol. I. pages

484, vol. II. pages 496, vol. III. pages 508, 8vo. ae “Ee

Brosset, Elémens de la Langue Georgienne. Paris 1837, pages 122, 8vo.

coe

Klaproth, Vocabulaire et Grammaire de la langue Georgienne. Paris, 1827, pages

232, Ist part, 8vo. ox oes “0 we “00 ae

Cronique Georgienne, traduite par M. Brosset, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 370, 8vo. 333 ses bas a ie ei

Choix de Fables de Vartan, en Arménien et en Francais. Paris, 1825, pages 96,

8vo. ats 505 ore aaa on nee

Elegie sur La Prise D’Edesse, en Arménien. Paris 1828, pages 112, 8vo. bee

Chrestomathie Chinoise—Chinese Characters, 1833, pages 183, 4to. ... cat

Meng-Tseu, texte Chinoise, pages 161, 8vo. eee eee one

Méng-Tseu, traduction Latine, par S. Julien. Lutetiz Parisiorum, 1824, pages

593, 8vo. “00 ane ove ose ae me

Lassen, Institutiones Lingue Pracritice. Bonne ad Broun) 1837, pages 167,

8y0. see ees sc se ses vee

Lassen, Anthologia Sanscritica. Bonne, 1838, p pages 371, 8vo. See eee

Lassen, Gita Govinda, Sanscrit et Latine. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1836, pages 180,

4to, soe csc ea so ene eos one

Chezy, Yajnadattabada, ou La Mort D’yadjnadatta, Text, Analysis and Transla-

tion. Paris, 1826, pages 142, 4to. ee xe cH eae

Chezy, La reconnaissance de Sacountala, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

pages 665, 4to. awe cor ses ses Se

Geographie D’ Aboulféda, Texte Arabe. Paris, 1837- 40, pages 586, 4to. mae

The Travels of Ibn Batuta, translated from the Arabic Manuscript, by S. Lea.

London 1829, 143 pages, 4to. ... ae abs nies

The Travels of Macarius, translated by F.C. “Belfour. London, 1829, pt. I. 114

pages, 4to. eae “on S05 ape Han aoe

Memoir of the Emperor Jehanguire, translated from the Persian Manuscript, by

Major D. Price. London, 1829, 141 pages, 4to. at eae oF

History of the Afghans, translated from the Persian, by B. Dorn, part I. London,

1829, 184 pages, 4to. ene eee co

Han-Koong-Tsew, or the Sorrows of Han, a Ohinsés Tragedy, translated by J.

F, Davis. Loneon, 1829, 28 pages, 4to. at ae aah

Vocabulary of Scinde Language, by Capt. Eastwick Lasent ase or

Grammar and Vocabulary of the Baloochi and Punjabee Languages. wes

Former

Price.

Rs. As.

3 0

Bt)

)

4 0

3 0

1 8

2 0

5 0

3 0

6 0

4 0

2 8

3 8

10 0

Ry)

6 0

4 0

5:0

aes

1 0

1 8

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. By Lieut. R. Batrp Smiru,

Bengal Engineers.

Part 11.—Historical Summary of Indian Earthquakes, with some

Remarks on the general distribution of Subterranean Disturbing

Forces throughout India and its Frontier Countries.

The following summary is offered, not as a perfect Register of the

Earthquakes that have occurred in India and its adjoining countries

during past times, but rather as a first step towards the formation of

such a Register, which from its nature, must necessarily be a work

requiring much time and much research. The requisite materials are

scattered in detached notices throughout numerous works, to a limited

number only of which, circumstances admit of my having access. I

cannot therefore but feel conscious of the imperfections of this first

effort to trace the history of Indian Earthquakes, and I would solicit

the assistance of those who feel an interest in the subject, in so far as

to furnish me with accounts of Karthquakes I may have omitted to

notice, or with references to the sources whence such accounts are to be

obtained. Materials thus furnished by the combined efforts of many

would accumulate, and in process of time it might be hoped, that from

them a complete historical summary of our Earthquakes may be pre-

pared.

While as a matter of curiosity, it would be interesting to trace the

occurrence of Karthquake shocks in this country, to the earliest prac-

ticable periods, I feel very doubtful whether the results obtained, would

be of scientific importance sufficient to afford any adequate: compensa-

tion for the time and labour that must be expended upon the work.

Native authorities must be almost exclusively depended upon, and ac-

counts of events of this class furnished by such authorities are invaria-

bly, in so far as I am yet acquainted with them, of a very unsatisfactory

character: confined usually to a mere record of their occurrence, or if

extending beyond this, to a detail, in exaggerated terms, of the des-

truction in life and property caused by them. It is not until European

intelligence has been brought to bear upon the phenomena of HKarth-

quakes in India, that the records become of scientific value, and it is

to these records, (unfortunately much more limited than is desirable, )

that any interest the following summary may be found to possess, is

chiefly attributable. Imperfect, however, as notices of shocks by

native authors certainly are, I am very anxious to procure as many of

No. 144. New Senizs, No. 60. 6u

1030 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

them as possible, and any furnished me will be thankfully acknow-

ledged.

Two methods of arrangement for the materials of this summary

present themselves; first, the Earthquakes may be recorded in simple

chronological order, without reference to any other circumstance than

their succession in time: or second, neglecting their chronological

order, they may be formed into groups according to the localities

whence they have emanated. ‘The latter appears to me, for several

reasons, the preferable of the two: it is more methodical, it affords a

species of natural arrangement for the shocks, and it indicates the

general distribution of the forces to which the shocks are due. The

Earthquakes herein described have therefore been arranged according

to the localities from which they have proceeded, as indicated by the

best information obtained.

1, Earthquakes of the Central Himalayan Tract.*

* The information relative to the occurrence of Earthquakes North of the Himalayas

which I have been able to collect is so limited, that 1 have not thought it worthy of

being included in the body of this Memoir. I am desirous, however, of placing it

upon record, and I do so in the form of a note.

On the night of the 22nd January 1832, a destructive Earthquake occurred in the

valley of the Oxus, extending thence across the Hindoo Khoosh to Moultan and La-

horee The late Sir A. Burnes thus alludes to its effect, in Buduckshan (Travels in

Bokhara, &c. vol. III. p. 176,) ‘‘This country also suffered from an Earthquake in

January 1832, which destroyed many villages, and a great part of the population. The

roads in many parts of the country were blocked up by the falling of stones, and the

river of Budukhshan was hemmed in for five days by a hill that tumbled in upon it,

This great convulsion of nature occurred at midnight, and scarcely a family in the

country but deplored the loss of some of its members. It was felt at Moultan and

Lahore, but the centre of its violence appears to have been the valley of the Oxus.’’

The following extract of a letter from the same officer, dated Lahore, 23rd January

1832, published in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, vol. I. p. 34, gives an account

of the shock as felt at that city, with some other interesting details connected with

the Earthquakes of those parts of India generally :—

‘*As you will have perceived by the date of my letter, I have crossed the frontier,

and am now at Lahore. An event occurred here last night, which I am sure will

prove of interest to you—a severe shock of an Earthquake. ‘here were two distinct

vibrations, the last continuing,for about ten seconds with alarming viclence. It oc-

curred eventually at 11 p. m. after we had retired to bed and were asleep. The

door of my apartment and all the furniture were shaking with a rattling noise, when

I awoke and ran into the open air. The house in which we are lodged is a most

substantial dwelling of two stories, built of brick and chunam, being the garden house

of M. Allard, and yet it was shaken most violently.

‘*T am informed by the Chevalier, that Earthquakes are of frequent occurrence in

this city, especially in winter, but he does not remember so violent a vibration as that

I have just mentioned. ‘The shock was from East to West, or rather from South-east

to North-west. The lofty minarets of this city afford however convincing proof, that

there can have been no very violent commotion of nature within these 200 years.

‘The Earthquakes of Cashmere are frequent, and the natives inform me, that the shocks

are more severe nearer the mountains.

‘**T should mention that the atmosphere had indicated nothing unusual before the

Earthquake, nor did the Barometer undergo any variation before or afterit. The

‘Thermometer stood at 37°; for the last ten days it has been 4° below the freezing point

every morning at sun-rise, a much greater depression than I had expected in the

Punjaub, where it rose to 102° daily when I was here last July.”’

This Earthquake appears to have been felt throughout Yarkand, Kokan, and other parts

of Chinese ‘lartary, as it is stated by W. H. Wathen, Esq. in a Memoir on Kokan,

published in 1834, and founded on information furnished by Usbek pilgrims, that a

few years previous, dreadful Earthquakes had devastated the whole of that territory.

The following extract from a Memoir on Chinese Tartary, by the same gentleman,

i ee ie

1843.) Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1031

Eafthquakes of 1803.—This is the first Earthquake emanating

from the central portion of the Himalaya range, of which any authen-

tic information has been obtained. Its destructive effects were chiefly

experienced in the mountain provinces of Sirmoor, Gurwhal and Ku-

maon, although its influence is said to have extended throughout the

whole of the plains of Hindostan, from the Himalayas to Bengal.

The following details connected with it, are given in the ‘‘ Gleanings

of Science,” vol. II, p. 50, by a writer, who though signing only his

initials, may readily be identified with Colonel Hodgson, late Surveyor

General of India, from whose accounts of his journeys in the Hima-

layas nearly all my information relative to this Earthquake has been

obtained.

‘“‘T will in a general way notice among many other peculiarities of

the mountains, some of the most remarkable. And first, of the Earth-

quakes which are more frequent in their occurrence, and more destruc-

tive in their effects than in the plains. You may have heard of the

Earthquake of 1803, which was considered violent in this country, and

many buildings were damaged over the whole extent from Bengal

to the Punjaub: but in the mountains its effects were terrible, and a

great part of the population perished; whole villages having been

buried by the fall of cliffs, and sliding down of the faces of the hills.

The scenes of that havoc have often been pointed out to me; the

imagination can hardly form an idea of a more terrible event than

such a catastrophe. What can be the reason of those more violent

shocks in the mountains than in the plains? We saw no volcanoes,

nor heard of any, and I believe there are none; thunder and lightning

(Journal Asiatic Society, vol. 1V, p. 659,) indicates the volcanic nature of the loca-

lities under notice :—

“* Volcanoes—S al- Ammoniac.— At a distance of ten days journey from Auksti, (which

lies North-east from Yarkand, about 20 days Caravan travelling,) are two very high

ranges of mountains, between which there is a valley, the surface of which to a consider-

able depth, is covered with Sal-Ammoniac. There is a dreadful heat at this place,

occasioned by a volcano which, by the people of the country, is called ‘‘ God’s Fire.’’

The heat prevents them from approaching it in the summer; during the eruption the

Sal-Ammoniac is said to be thrown out, and showered over the valley like mist, to the

distance of one kos: it afterwards hardens, and becomes during the winter crystallised

like ice. People go there at that season, cut it into convenient pieces, and carry it

away. It is said that near old or Koneh Turfan also, is a mountain out of which

flames of fire are seen to issue.

** Harthquakes—Cholera.—The natives state, that about three years ago (1832-33)

there were constant Earthquakes in the province, and that Cholera committed great

ravages at Yarkand. In Badakhshan, the Earthquakes destroyed a great number of

houses and people.”’ ,

Similar indications of volcanic action are continued throughout the territory of

Iskardoh, where hot springs are numerous, the temperature of some of which is so high,

that when a drop of the water is placed on the skin, it immediately raises a blister.

(J. A. S. vol. IV, p. 594.)

Throughout the whole of Thibet copious hot springs occur, some of very high tem-

perature, but I have not obtained any information relative to the occurrence of Earth-

quakes in that country. M. Alexander Csoma de Korés, in his Geographical notice of

‘Lhibet, (J. A.S. vol. I, p. 126,) mentions that between U and T's’ang in ‘Thibet Proper,

there are hot springs used in curing cutaneous diseases and the gout. But such hot

springs are numerous in the mountains lying East from the Ma-p’han Lake: especi-

ally at one place there is a hole out of which continually issues vapour, and at certain

intervals, hot water is ejected with great noise, to the height of twelve feet.

1032 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

are much less frequent in the upper mountains than in the plains, and

I do not recollect any, except once on the way to Jumaotree, at a place

near the bed of the river, and not more than 8,000 feet above the level

of the sea.”

Colonel Hodgson, in his Survey of the Rivers Ganges and Jumna,

(Asiatic Researches, vol. XIV, p. 139,) under date the 13th of April,

1817, from Thano to Catnaur, farther remarks :—

*‘ After passing the worst part (of the route between the two above-

mentioned places, ) descended to Oj’ha Ghur, a hamlet of three huts only,

at the foot of steep and lofty cliffs, the rocks hurled from which by the

Earthquake of 1803, buried a small fort and village, which once stood

here ; dreadful mementous are seen in the mountains of that catastrophe.

Under Oj’ha Ghur, a stream falls into the Jumna, and several cataracts

are seen falling among the surrounding precipices. There are some hot

springs at the bed of the Jumna, which is 400 feet below the hamlet.

Latitude observed 30° 54! 47".”

The city of Sreenuggur, the capital of the mountain province of

Gurhwal, suffered severely from the same shock. James Fraser, Esq. in

his Tour in the Himalayas (p. 369,) thus alludes to the circumstance :—

‘“‘Sreenuggur, the chief town or capital of Gurhwal, is situated

on the South bank of the Alacnanda, about twenty miles above

its junction with the Bhagiruttee at Deopragur, where a strip of level

ground stretches along for three or four miles, forming the valley

known by the same name as the town. It was once comparatively

populous and prosperous, forming as it did, not only the residence

of the court, but a considerable entrepot for the produce of the various

countries in and on either side of the snowy mountains, which exchange

commodities by the Nitteemana and other Passes.

‘“¢ When Colonel Hardwicke visited this place in 1796, it was perhaps

not in its prime, but contained (as he computed) 700 or 800 houses and

a good bazar. When Messrs. Webb and Raper, in 1808, passed

through it on their way to Buddreenauth, it had sunk deeply in

importance, and was to all appearance rapidly advancing to decay. It

had not only to contend with the common enemies of the country, but

also with natural causes no less ruinous. An Earthquake had occurred

in 1803, which had done considerable injury: many houses were

ruined, and the Rajah’s palace was particularly shattered ; and the en-

croachments of the river Alacnanda yearly destroy a portion of that

which yet stands, threatening in time to sap the foundations of all.”

Buddreenauth, the celebrated resort of Hindoo pilgrims, situated

near the sources of the Alacnanda River, one of the tributaries of the

Ganges, did not escape the destructive effects of the Earthquake of

1803. After describing the principal temple at this holy spot, Cap-

tains Webb and Raper continue thus :—

‘The era of its foundation is too remote to have reached us, even

by tradition; but it is considered the work of some superior being.

This specimen of divine architecture, however, was too weak to resist

the shock of the Earthquake, which left it in so tottering a condition,

ma Nee

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1033

that human efforts were judged expedient to preserve it from ruin: and

the repairs which it has lately undergone, have completely modernised

its external appearance. The body of it is constructed of large flat

stones, over which is a coat of fine white plaster, which adds to the

neatness, but has destroyed all outward pretensions to antiquity.”

Several hot springs in the vicinity of this temple are then described.

One is received in a large cistern, which is called the Tapta-cund, and

forms a warm bath for the pilgrims, supplied by a hot spring issuing from

the mountain through a subterraneous passage. The water of the

Tapta-cund is as hot as a person can bear, and from it issues a thick

smoke or steam, strongly tainted with a sulphureous smell. A little

to the left of it, is Surya-cund, another hot spring, and besides these,

are many more, all of which are turned to due account by the Brahmins

of the Temple.

The large town of Barahal on the Bhagiruttee river, also a favourite

resort for pilgrims, is the only other place in this neighbourhood which

is specifically mentioned as having been injured by the Earthquake

under notice. Alli its temples were more or less shattered, and many

of its houses ruined, so that when visited by Mr. Fraser in 1815, it

presented a miserable spectacle of dilapidation and filth. Before this

catastrophe, it is said to have had fifty or sixty shops with a well fre-

quented bazaar and numerous shrines and temples; after it, a few mud

huts with the ruin of former buildings alone remained. Whether

since the period of Mr. Fraser’s visit it has recovered any portion of its

former prosperity I am not aware, but it is still largely frequented by

pilgrims, and abounds in Bramins and Fakeers.

I have not been able to obtain any specific information relative to

the ravages of the Earthquake in Kumaon, beyond the fact, that they

were not less severe there than in Gurhwal, involving the destruction

of life and property to a great extent.

The information obtained is not sufficiently precise to warrant any

attempt being made to define the extreme limits of the shock of 18038,

nor to trace it to any special spot as its focus of emanation. Accord-

ing to Captain Hodgson’s statement, it injured buildings throughout

the whole plains of Hindoostan, and if so, it must have been one of the

severest shocks ever experienced in this country. Its fearfully in-

creased intensity in the mountains, shews very distinctly that it was

in them it had its source, and I have therefore had no hesitation in

assigning it to the Central Himalayan tract. It can only however be

thus referred in general terms, since to do more would require details

much more minute and specific than, from the nature of the case, it is

practicable to collect. This remark, I may here state, applies gene-

rally to the arrangements employed throughout this summary. The

precise spots from which Earthquake waves diverge, have been fixed in

some cases, particularly in Scotland, but to do this has required the

employment of careful and constant observation, aided by registering

- instruments. The same effort cannot be made in India until the same

materials have been collected, and all I have attempted is therefore

1034 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

only to assign Earthquakes generally to those tracts from which,

according to the best information procured, they seem to have pro-

ceeded.

Earthquake of 1809.—The only reference to this Earthquake which

I have been able to find, is contained in the following Extract from a

paper by H. Falconer, Esq. on the great Cataclysm of the Indus in 1841,

(J. A. S. vol. X, p. 618). Having suggested the possibility of the bed

of the river having been blocked up at a point high in its course, by

mouutain masses precipitated by an Earthquake, he adds, ‘“ An event

of this sort is not improbable, for we know that in 1809, an Earthquake

of such force took place in Gurhwal, that the Bishnoo-Gunga river,

one of the great branches of the Ganges, was blocked up below Gosee-

nauth by a landslip, and the water rose to 40 feet above its usual

level.” I had hoped to have been furnished by Dr. Falconer with a

reference to the source whence this information was derived, but cir-

cumstances unfortunately arose which prevented his turning his atten-

tion to the subject, and I was accordingly disappointed in my hopes.

Earthquake of the 26th May, 1817.—This Earthquake was experi-

enced at Gungoutri, the source of the river Ganges, by Captains

Hodgson and Herbert, during their Survey of the Himalayas. The

former in his Journal, (Asiatic Researches, vol. XIV, p. 98,) thus graphi-

cally describes the effects of the shock: ‘‘ At night having prepared

the instruments to take the immersion of one of Jupiter’s satellites, we

laid down to rest, but between 10 and 11 o’clock were awakened by

the rocking of the ground, and on running out, soon saw the effects of

an Earthquake, and the dreadful situation in which we were pitched

in the midst of masses of rock, some of them more than 100 feet in

diameter, and which had fallen from the cliffs above us, probably

brought down by some former Earthquake.

‘‘The scene around us, shewn in all its dangers by the bright moon

light, was indeed very awful. On the second shock, rocks were hurl-

ed in every direction from the peaks around to the bed of the river,

with a hideous noise not to be described, and never to be forgotten:

after the crash caused by the falls near us had ceased, we could still

hear the terrible sounds of heavy falls in the more distant recesses of the

mountains. We looked up with dismay at the cliffs overhead, expect-

ing that the next shock would detach some ruins from them: had they

fallen we could not have escaped, as the fragments from the summit

would have flown over our heads, and we should have been buried by

those from the middle.

‘“‘ Providentially there were no more shocks that night. This Earth-

quake was smartly felt in all parts of the mountains, as well as in the

plains of the North West Provinces of Hindoostan.” On measuring

the height of the cliff under which he was when the shock was felt,

Captain Hodgson found it to be 2,745 feet.

In his Journal under date the 30th May, Captain Hodgson remarks :

“6. Road most difficult, over masses of rock which have. fallen from

above into the stream. This station is full of peril, being a very

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1035

recent slip of the whole face of the mountain to the left. The broken

summits cannot be less than 4,000 feet high: blocks threaten to fall,

and are now indeed continually coming down: I have not seen so

dangerous a slip. The ruin extends about half a mile: every person

made the greatest haste to get past this horrid place. The fracture

of the rocks is so fresh, that I suspect this havoc must have been caused

by the Earthquake of the 26th, for we heard a great crash in this

direction.”

The whole of the gigantic accumulations of snow and ice at the

debouche of the Ganges were found by Captain Hodgson shattered and

riven in every direction, and so fresh were the fractures, that he attri-

buted them almost entirely to the Earthquake. These beds were not

less than 300 feet in thickness, formed of solid frozen snow, and ex-

tending for 4 or 5 miles, as far indeed as the bounding mountains

permitted.

In the letter previously quoted, Capt. Hodgson states, ‘‘ The Earth-

quake at Gungoutri was by far the most alarming phenomenon of na-

ture I ever witnessed, and the frequent, almost daily, recurrence of the

shocks, though slight, made us uneasy, as it shewed that there was

some active agent at work perhaps under our feet, which might at any

instant bring down the cliffs beneath which we scrambled along on our

hands.”

The range of this shock appears to have been the same as that of

1803, and its intensity could scarcely have been much inferior. No

accounts, however, of any destructive effects on the towns in the Hima-

layas, have come under my notice, although from the vicinity -of

some of them to Gungoutri, they could hardly have escaped the effects

both of the vibrations and the land-slips caused by them. The dis-

lodgement of a mass of rock 4,000 feet in height and half a mile in

length, gives an appalling idea of the intensity of the disturbing force,

while it proves how very probable it is, that many of those sudden

depressions and elevations of rivers having their sources in mountains

liable to such convulsions, are caused by land-slips of this nature.

Captain Hodgson alludes to numerous other enormous slips observed

after the Earthquake, and to many he assigns the same origin as to that

above-mentioned, while others appeared older, and due either to previ-

ous convulsions or to the disintegrating effects of atmospheric agents.

Earthquakes of the 27th and 28th May, 1817.—These two shocks

are recorded in the same Journal from which the preceding details have

been taken. ‘They were both slight in comparison with that of 26th, but

still sufficiently severe to cause considerable anxiety to the travellers, and

to make them anxious to remove as soon as possible from the spot.

During the same month in which the preceding three shocks occur-

red, it is stated by Captain Hodgson, that no less than forty others were

felt in the districts of Kamaon, of variable intensity, but none very severe,

with the exception of that of the 26th.

From the year 1817 to 1831, a blank in the record of central Hima-

layan Earthquakes occurs, and if during that time any have been

10386 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144.

noticed, I have not been fortunate enough to discover them. From

1831 to 1885, a register of the shocks felt at Lohooghat in Kamaon is

given in Dr. McClelland’s Geological and Statistical Account of that

district. Judging from the direction of the larger portion of these

shocks, there can be little doubt of their having emanated from the

centre of the Himalayan chain, and to this source they are attributed

by Dr. McClelland. A few are doubtful, but in default of better

evidence, I have included these among the Earthquakes of the central

Himalayan region.

Earthquake of the 25th December, 1831.—This shock occurred at

9pr.Mm. Its duration was about seven seconds, and its direction on a

North-west and South-east line. The motion of the earth was undu-

latory, and the intensity appears to have been slight.

Earthquake of the 2nd July, 1832.—The period of this shock was

ll p. m. ‘* During twelve seconds,” Dr. McClelland states, ‘‘ the earth

shook, or rather trembled, and afforded a noise which it is difficult to

describe, but which may be compared to the sound of a heavy but tran-

sient rush of water. The moise preceded and succeeded the motion about

three seconds.”

Earthquake of the \8th August, 1832.—Time of shock 7 a.m. The

earth trembled for about the space of five seconds: no peculiar con-

comitant circumstances were observed, except that the weather at the

time was hot and sultry.

Earthquake of the 23rd September, 1832.—Time of shock 10 Pp. Mm.

The circumstances of this shock were in all respects similar to those of

the Earthquake of the 2nd July 1832.

Earthquake of the 30th May, 1833.—The earth was found to shake

rather violently for about twelve seconds at 12 p.m. It was attended

with a noise like that already described.

Earthquake of 4th January, 1835.—About 7 a. M. a slight shock

was felt which lasted from fifteen to twenty seconds, but the motion

of the Earth was very gentle, and seemed to be on a line between

North and South, accompanied by a noise as usual.

Earthquake of the \4th January, 1835.—About 13 a. mM. a shock

which seemed to be in the direction of North-west, and more violent

than the one on the 4th took place, accompanied by a noise like dis-

tant thunder. The motion was tremulous: and in crossing the strata,

it seemed to affect one at a time.

At this point Dr. McClelland’s register terminates, and no further

shocks, to the best of my knowledge, are recorded until the year 1842,

when a few of those noted in my register for that year, may be assigned

to the tract now under examination. As all the circumstances ac-

companying these shocks are stated in detail in the register, it will be

necessary for me to do little more here than simply to state their dates.

Earthquake of the 5th March, 1842.—Although no information re-

lative to this Earthquake has been obtained from any point farther in

the interior of the Himalayas than Simlah, it appears probable from

its direction, that it emanated from the central tract, and to this I have

1843.] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1037

referred it. The intensity of the shock was much greater at Umpoo-

sie than at any place to the Westward, and it may thence be inferred,

that, as its direction was from Northward to Southward, it originated

in the upper portion of Gurhwal, a locality from which so many of the

Earthquakes just recorded have emanated.

Earthquake of the 7th September, 1842.—This Earthquake was

very slight and unimportant, except from the circumstance of its

having been accompanied by an electric shock. There is nothing in

the information furnished regarding it to enable us to form any

decided opinion as to its place of emanation, and it is only on the

ground of a slight probability that I refer it to the Central Himalayan

tract.

From the preceding details it appears, that including the Kamaon

shocks of May 1817, fifty-five Earthquakes have been experienced in the

interior of the Himalayas since 1803, by far the larger portion of which,

may without doubt be assigned to the action of disturbing forces, seated

under the main axis of this great mountain range. The unrecorded

shocks bear in all probability a large proportion to those recorded, and

the preceding statement therefore affords but an inadequate representa-

tion of the activity of the forces to which the shocks are due. __ Before

leaving this part of the subject, I may very briefly allude to the physi-

cal constitution of the central range of the Himalayas. By the uni-

form testimony of observers who have penetrated to the Snowy Range,

it appears that the mountain masses there are composed of primary

Rocks, that granite, gneiss and mica slate are chiefly developed, that

trap dykes, having a direction parallel to that of the main chain

itself have been found, and that signs of very powerful disruptive action

are continually apparent. These facts are all characters of the loca-

lities from which Earthquake shocks have been found to emanate in

other parts of the world, and are consistent with what, a priori, we

would be led to anticipate, whether we suppose Earthquakes to origi-

nate in the movements of a central fluid nucleus, or in the action of

more limited and local forces of chemical or mechanical origin, it is

natural to infer that their effects will be more perceptible in localities

where the solid crust of the earth is fissured and disturbed, and where

many ‘‘lines of least resistance”, so to speak, are furnished, than in

others where the strata are more continuous and, unbroken. Hence it

has been found that in South America, in Italy, and in Scotland,

Karthquake tracts are characterised by marks of violent disruptive

action, and indications of the existence of subterranean volcanic forces

invariably to be discovered. There is yet another point of analogy

between the Earthquake Tract of the central Himalayas, and such

tracts in other countries, in the extraordinary prevalence throughout

the former of hot springs of very high temperature. Some of thes

I will now mention; commencing with the most celebrated, those

of Jumnoutri at the source of the River Jumna, 10,849 feet above the

level of the Sea. Captain Hodgson, thus describes these springs un-

der date 21st April 1817, (Asiatic Researches. vol. XIV. p. 147.)

6 x

1038 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

‘* At Jumnoutri the snow which covers and conceals the stream is

about 60 yards wide, and is bounded to the right and left by several

precipices of granite: it is 40 feet 54 inches thick, and has fallen from

the heights above. The snow is very solid and hard frozen, but we

found means to descend through it to the Jumna by an exceedingly

steep and narrow dark hole made by the steam (of the springs,) and

witnessed a very extraordinary scene, for which I was indebted to the

earliness of the season, and unusual quantity of snow which has fallen

this year. When I got footing at the stream, (here only a large pace

wide,) it was some time before I could discern anything, on account

of the darkness of the place, made more so by the thick steam: but

having some white lights with me I fired them, and by their glare was

able to see and admire the curious domes of snow overhead: these are

caused by the hot steam melting the snow over it. Some of these ex-

cavations are very spacious, resembling vaulted roofs of marble; and

the snow as it melts falls in showers, like heavy rain, to the stream,

which appears to owe its origin to these supplies. Having only a

short scaled thermometer with me, I could not ascertain the precise

heat of the spring, but it was too hot to bear the finger in for more

than two seconds, and must be near the boiling point.” In a subse-

quent paper, Captain Hodgson states the temperature of one spring to

have been 194.°7 which, for the height of Jumnoutri, is very nearly the

boiling point of water. ‘‘ The range of springs,” he continues, “is very

extensive, but I could not visit them all, as the rest are in dark recesses

and snow caverns. The water of them rises with great ebullition

through crevices of the granite rock, and deposits a ferruginous sedi-

ment, of which I collected some: it is tasteless, and I did not perceive

any peculiar smell. Hot springs are frequent in the Himalaya, per-

haps they may be a provision of nature, to ensure a supply of water to

the heads of the River in the winter season, when the sun can have

little or no power in melting the snows in those deep defiles.” Con-

stant references are made in Captain Hodgson’s Journal to the frequent

recurrence of hot springs of considerable extent and high temperature

as spots in the upper portion of the course of the Jumna, and they

seem indeed to be distributed in remarkable profusion.

In like manner, while exploring the course of the Ganges, Captain

Hodgson found hot springs of high temperature, although apparently not

so abundantly distributed as on the Jumna. Again to the Eastward at

Kedarnath and Buddreenath, numerous springs occur, while in Kuma-

on they are equally abundant. At the two first mentioned spots tra-

vellers have noticed various subterranean noises, as if gaseous matter

was escaping with violence. We are not acquainted with the physical

geography of the central Range of the Himalayas in prolongation to

the Eastward, but it is probable that the phenomena would there be

observed. To the westward again Mr. Moorcroft, Lieuts. Broome and

Cunningham have found many hot springs in the upper portions of the

courses of the Rivers of the Punjaub, so that their occurrence through-

out a large portion of the Himalayan chain is established by direct ob-

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1039

servation, while it may with considerable confidence be inferred, that

in the unexplored intermediate portions, they would also be discovered.*

A disposition exists to attribute these springs to mere local chemical

action, but their universal distribution over so wide a range, taken in

connection with the fact, that from this range Earthquakes, sometimes

of great violence, are repeatedly emanating, has led me to believe that

the two classes of phenomena are intimately connected : in other words,

that they are joint effects of the same cause. The hot springs I be-

lieve, owe their high temperature to internal chemical action exten-

sively distributed, and the Earthquakes are due to the convulsive efforts

of the elastic matter generated by this action, in escaping from the

interior of the earth. To attempt to define the nature of this action,

while we are wholly ignorant of the chemical composition of the

springs would be vain; but I cannot resist the conviction, that the pre-

sence of these hot springs and the occurrence of Karthquake shocks

are due to one and the same origin. It was, at one time, supposed,

that an active volcanic vent had been discovered in the central Hima-

layan range, but this is now known to have been erroneous, and the

only proofs of volcanic action, consist in the occurrence of Karthquakes,

the abundant distribution of springs of high temperature, the presence

of Trap Dykes, and indications of powerful disruptive action in the

strata.

2. Earthquakes of the Lateral Himalayan Tract.

Under this Tract are included the Earthquakes that have been

felt throughout the valleys along the Southern Face of the Himalayan

range, situated at heights varying from 6,000 to 2,000 feet above the

level of the sea. It is proposed to commence with the most Westerly

of these, relative to which any authentic information has as yet been

obtained, namely that of Cabool ; and having narrated the history of the

Earthquakes of that valley, to proceed in a regular manner to the

Kastward. Earthquakes of considerable severity have, I believe, been

* The following extract fromaletter from A. Campbell, Esq., Political Superin-

tendent of Darjeeling, furnishes some notices of hot and mineral springs in the extreme

Eastern portion of the Himaiayas.

“3rd Hot and mineral springs.—On the west bank of the Mechi River within the

hills, at about six miles above Mechi Gola, there is a mineral spring which runs into

the Mechi. I have visited it. The water is quite clear as it issues from the rock, but

on the small flat space below there is a reddish deposit, carbonate of iron, I believe.

This water has medical virtues ascribed to it. It is heated and used as a bath for

rheumatism, cutaneous diseases, &c. Iron ore abounds in the neighbourhood of

this spring. It is called ‘‘ Menchoo’’ by the Lepchas, which means ‘‘ medicated

water.”’

‘** There is a hot spring on the east bank of the great Runjeet River, one day’s journey

from the monastery of Pemlong. It is called ‘* Puklong Sachoo’’ (Sachoo means hot

spring.) The waterhas a disagreeable smell, and deposits a whitish substance which

is used in medicine.

** There is another hot spring called ‘‘ Phoog Sachoo,”’ also on the east bank of the

great Runjeet, one day’s journey to the East of Rinchungpoong. Its deposit is also

whitish and its water fetid. I have not visited the two latter nor do [ know how far

they are apart. They are both in Sikkim, and about three days journey from Dar-

jeeling.”’

Dated October 7th, 1842,

1040 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

occasionally experienced to the Westward of Cabool, and especially

felt at Herat, but I regret to say I have not succeeded in procuring any

information connected with them, beyond the mere fact of their occur-

rence. Details of Earthquakes at Herat are given, I understand, in the

Zil-Zillee- Nahmah, a native work on the subject, and as I hope shortly

to receive a copy of this book, most kindly procured for me from Cash-

mere by George Clerk, Esq. Envoy to the court of Lahore, I may be

able at a future time to give some account of them.

A. Earthquakes of the Valley of Cabool.

The earliest notice of an Earthquake in the valley of Cabool which

I have found, is of that which occurred in the year 1505, during the

reign of the Emperor Baber. Lieut. Burnes, (the late Sir Alexander

Burnes,) thus alludes to this event in a paper on the Reg-Rewan, a

singular phenomenon of sound near Cabool, published in vol. VII, Jour.

As. Soc. p. 325, ‘Convulsions of nature are, however, exceedingly

common in this part of the world. Baber mentions one to have occur-

red in his time, and in this very plain, so that ‘‘in some places the

ground was elevated to the height of an elephant above its old level,

and in others as much depressed.” The same event is thus adverted

to in Daw’s translation of Ferishta’s History of Hindoostan. ‘In the

year 911 H. (A. D. 1505,) Cabulistan was thrown into great conster-

nation by dreadful Earthquakes, which laid most of the cities in ruins.

Baber endeavoured to alleviate this public calamity in such a manner

that by his unwearied care, and extensive benevolence, he gained the

love and fidelity of all his new subjects.”

The Earthquake of 1505, must have been one of great violence,

judging from the alterations of the levels of the ground mentioned by

Baber, and the extensive destruction of the cities alluded to by Fe-

rishta. Perhaps in both some allowance must be made for oriental

exaggeration, but Baber was so remarkable for his minute observations

on all natural phenomena which interested him, that less allowance is

called for in his case, than in others. From its effects the shock ap-

pears to have been felt over nearly the whole of Affghanistan, and the

parts which suffered so severely were probably Cabool, Candahar,

Ghuzni, and Jellalabad, with others of less note.

A long interval of upwards of three centuries, now occurs during

which time I have found no reference to Earthquake shocks in the

Cabool valley. That they continued frequently to be felt, I have no

doubt, as the inhabitants had become so far familiarised with their

phenomena, as to have terms in their language for the varieties of

shocks. ‘‘ A passing shake with a rumbling noise,” remarks Sir A.

Burnes, in the paper previously quoted, “is called ‘ Goozur,’ to dis-

tinguish it from Zil-Zillee, or Earthquake, which the inhabitants deno-

minate a motion that is tremulous.” And from time immemorial it

has been found necessary to construct the larger number of the houses

at Cabool, of wood, to enable them to resist better, the constantly re-

curring shocks. In the year 1808, Mr. Elphinstone (Journey to the

Court of Cabool, vol. ii, p. 173,) ‘ Most of the buildings of Cabool are

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1041

of wood, a material recommended by its power of resisting the frequent

Earthquakes with which this place is visited. It is not improbable

that the Zil-Zillee-Namah, may furnish some materials for filling up

this long interval, but from this little more I fear can be expected than

a mere narrative of the effects of shocks, since more intelligence than

its author could have possessed is necessary to distinguish the pheno-

mena, which point to the causes of these convulsions.

It is not until the year 1829, that we have any specific notice of

another Earthquake in the Cabool valley. This notice is a very brief

one by Sir A. Burnes. About six years previous to his visit to Cabool

in 1836-37, a very severe Earthquake had been felt at that place, and

he adds, that shocks happen so frequently as twice and thrice a month.

On one night, the 14th December 1837, he mentions that no less than

three shocks were experienced.

In 1836, Mr. Vigne mentions* several shocks of Earthquakes were

experienced by him at Cabool, all however slight, and he adds that the

average number of shocks during the year is about twelve. Mr. Masson

alsot records the occurrence of several during his residence at the

capital of Affghanistan. The notices of both of those travellers are

however very meagre, and the shocks seem to have been so frequent,

as to deprive them of interest in their eyes.

The preceding form all the information I have been able to collect

relative to the Earthquakes of the Cabool valley. The details are, it

will be observed, of a very limited character, and establish only the

general fact, of disturbing forces being continually in operation be-

neath this valley, with the additional circumstance of considerable

alteration of levels having been the effect of one of the shocks, that

namely of 1505. It is impossible to say whether or not all the shocks

are local, and due to forces acting immediately under the valley of Ca-

bool. The whole of the tract around is said to exhibit indications of

volcanic action, and it is probable therefore, that many of the numerous

shocks may be secondary ones, having originated either to the East-

ward or Westward. I am indebted to Captain Hutton, Bengal Army,

for the following remarks on this point, which shew the general preva-

lence of volcanic action throughout the country around Cabool, although

nothing is said relative to such action within the valley itself. Captain

Hutton thus writes: ‘It was reported by some intelligent men whom I

met with at Candahar, that a voleano exists in the Huzzareh mountains

(to the westward of Cabool,) but that few are living (1840) who re-

member to have seen it active. The appearances of a volcanic mountain,

the effects, &c. were so well described, that I can hardly think they

were deceiving me. All Affghanistan gives indication of violent volcanic

action, and the country from the Kojuck range to beyond the Hel-

mund, may be termed a volcanic district, the mountains being usually

accompanied along the base by a low range of basaltic or other trap

rocks.”

* Vigne’s Travels, p. 812. + Masson’s Travels, vol. III. p. 8.

1042 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

B. Earthquakes of the Valley of Jellalabad.

In the Register of Earthquakes for 1842, I have stated the grounds on

which I consider the valley of Jellalabad to be the seat of Earthquak-

ing forces. It is well known that the areas over which the causes of

such forces (of whatever nature we may consider these) extend, is

frequently very great; and that a connection may exist between the

forces that disturb the Cabool and Jellalabad valleys, is more than

probable. But, from the information as yet obtained, it is justly to

be inferred that these forces act independently, and I have therefore

placed the two valleys as distinct portions of the lateral Himalayan

tract.

Our information relative to the Earthquakes of the Jellalabad valley |

is all subsequent to the year 1842. Since the publication of the Re-

gister for that year, I have obtained some farther information relative

to the Earthquakes of this locality, which I purpose giving here.

Earthquake of 19th February, 1842.—The following extract from

Lady Sale’s Journal of the imprisonment, gives details of the shock as

experienced at the fort of Buddeabad, in the valley of Lughman :—

** At noon I was on the top of the house, when an awful Earthquake

took place * * * *. For some time I balanced myself as well as I could,

till I felt the roof was giving way. I fortunately succeeded in remov-

ing from my position before the roof of our room fell in with a dread-

ful crash * * * * * *, When the earthquake first commenced in the

hills in the upper part of the valley, its progress was clearly defined

coming down the valley, and throwing up dust like the action of explod-

ing a mine. Our walls and gateways and corner towers, are all

much shaken, or actually thrown down. We had at least twenty-five

shocks before dark, and about fifteen more during the night, which we

spent in the court yard. * * * * Our fort is the best of forty that have

suffered in this valley, and many are entirely thrown down. In one a

tower fell and crushed five women and a man, others have not a wall

remaining.”

Lieut. Vincent Eyre thus describes the same event. (Military Opera-

tions at Cabool, p. 262.)

“ February 19th. On the 6th we had a heavy fall of rain, since

which the weather had become exceedingly close. This morning it

was observed that an unusual degreee of heat and stillness pervaded

the air. Whether these were premonitory symptoms of what was

to happen it is impossible to determine: but at 11 a. mM. (?) we were

suddenly alarmed by a violent rocking of the earth which momentarily

increased to such a degree, that we could with difficulty maintain our

balance. Large masses of the lofty walls that encompassed us fell in

on all sides with a thundering crash. A loud subterraneous rumbling

was heard as of a boiling sea of liquid lava, and wave after wave

seemed to lift up the ground on which we stood, causing every build-

ing to rock to and fro like a floating vessel. After the scenes of

horror we had recently witnessed, it seemed as if the hour of retribu-

tion had arrived, and that heaven designed to destroy the blood-stained

1843.] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 10438

earth at one fell swoop. The dwelling in which we lodged was ter-

ribly shaken, and the room inhabited by Lady Sale fell in, her lady-

ship, who happened to be standing on the roof, having barely time to

escape. Most providentially all the ladies with their children made a

timely rush into the open air at the commencement of the Earthquake,

and entirely escaped injury. General Elphinstone being bed-ridden,

was for several moments in a precarious position, from which he was

rescued by the intrepidity of his servant, Moore, a private of H. M. 44th,

who rushed into his room, and carried him forth in his arms. * * * * *,

The quaking continued for several minutes with unabated violence, and

a slight tremor of the earth was perceptible throughout the remainder

of the day. The Affghans were for the time-being overwhelmed with

terror: for though slight shocks of Earthquake are of common occur-

rence in every year during the cold season, none so fearful as this had

visited the country within the memory of the present generation. We

shortly learned that our fort had been singularly favoured ; almost every

other in the valley having been laid low, and many inhabitants destroy-

ed in the ruins. The town of Turghurree especially seems to have

suffered severely, scarcely a house being left standing, and hundreds

of people having been killed in the fall.

“‘ Shocks of Earthquakes continued to occur every hour: some of

which were rather severe.”

Lady Sale records farther shocks on the following days :—

22nd February.—We had Earthquakes day and night; less severe

but equally frequent. * * * * * *

23rd February.—This has been a very close and gloomy day: Earth-

quakes frequent, and some very sharp ones.

24th February.—Very few shocks and those gentle ones; but all last

night and great part of to-day, particularly late in the evening, there

was a tremulous motion as if a ship had been heavily struck by a sea,

generally feeling as if on the larboard quarter, and accompanied by a

sound of water breaking against a vessel. At other times we have just

the undulatory motion of a snake in the water: but the most uncom-

mon sensation we have experienced has been that of a heavy ball

rolling over our heads, as if on the roof of our individual room, ac-

companied by the sound of distant thunder.

Lieut. Eyre’s narrative furnishes me with materials for continuing the

list of shocks.

March 3 —Under this date Lieut. Eyre remarks, that severe shocks

of Earthquake continued every day.

April 20.—There was a severe shock of an Karthquake again to-day.

These shocks have always appeared to me to be in some way connected

with heavy rain before-hand.

June 4.—A shock of an Earthquake felt to-day.

June 10.—A smart shock of Earthquake felt during the night.

June 29.—A shock of Earthquake.

Unfortunately no detailed Register of the numerous Earthquakes ex-

perienced at Jellalabad during the same time as the preceding has, to

1044 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

my knowledge, been kept. Shocks continued, however, to be experi-

enced in that valley up to a period later than recorded in any of the

Journals of the British prisoners in Affghanistan which I have yet seen.

Two are noticed in the Register for 1842: namely, the Earthquake of

the 21st July 1842, and that of the 25th of October of the same year,

and with the latter, our information relative to the Earthquakes of the

valley of Jellalabad terminates.

There are some very interesting points connected with the Earth-

quakes of this tract to be discussed, but I reserve all comment upon

them until I enter upon the third part of this memoir. |

C. Earthquakes of the Valley of Cashmere.

From remote antiquity, Earthquakes are known to have been experi-

enced throughout the valley of Cashmere, but so far as I yet know, the

dates of these have not been recorded, nor have any of their phenomena

been described. The shocks, however, have never been of great violence,

although it has been found necessary to provide against their effects by

employing wood largely in building.* In describing the Juma Musjid, or

* Since the above was written, I have been favoured with a sight of a copy of

Vigne’s Travels in Cashmere, by Dr. Jameson, in which some detailed information

relative to Earthquakes in the valley is to be found. It is too late now to include

this in the body of the memoir, and [{ am therefore obliged to give it in this form.

‘On the night of the 26th June 1828,’’ Mr. Vigne remarks, (vol. i, 281,) ‘‘at half

past ten, a very severe shock was felt, which shook down a great many houses and

killed a great number of people: perhaps 1,000 persons were killed and 1,200 houses

shaken down: although being built with a wooden frame-work, the houses are less

able to fall than an edifice of brick or stone. The earth opened in several places

about the city: and fcetid water, rather warm, rose rapidly from the clefts and then

subsided. These clefts being in the soil, soon closed again, and left scarcely any

traces. Isaw the remains of one fifteen yards long and two wide: but it was filled up

or nearly so. Huge rocks and stones came rattling down from the mountains. On

that night only one shock took place: but just before sun-rise there was another, ac-

companied by a terrific and lengthened explosion, louder than a cannon. On that day

there were twenty such shocks, each with a similar explosion.

‘‘ The inhabitants were of course in the open country. The river sometimes appeared

to stand still, and then to rush forward. For the remaining six days of Zillheja, and

the whole of the two next months of Moharrem and Safur, there were never less than

100, and sometimes 200 or more shocks in the day, each accompanied by an explosion :

but it was remarked, that when the explosion was loudest, the shock was the less. On

the sixth day (after the great shock?) there was one very bad shock, and on the

fifteenth, at three o’clock, was the worst, and there were three out of the whole number

that were very loud.

** At the end of the two above-mentioned months, the number decreased to ten or fif-

teen in the 24 hours, the noise became less, and the Earthquakes gradually ceased. About

this time the cholera made its appearance. A census of the dead was taken at first, but it

was discontinued when it was found that many thousands had died in twenty-one days.

“In Cashmere there had been no great Karthquake before, within the memory of

any living person, excepting one about 50 years ago, which was rather severe, and

lasted at intervals for a week. An Earthquake is mentioned in Prinsep’s Tables, as

having taken place in a. p. 1552. Shocks are now common, and the houses are built

with a wooden frame-work so as to resist them. ‘hey are still more common I should

say at Kabool, where I have felt three or four in four months: but they are usually too

slight to do harm.”’

The following is Mr. Vigne’s account of the ‘‘ burning ground”’ alluded to above.

«The most singular place in Cashmere is Sahoyum, the ‘‘ burning ground”’ mention-

ed by Abul Fuzl, in the Ayin Akberi. It lies near the village of Nichi-Hama, in

the pergunnah of Muchipoora, at the north-west end of the valley where the plain is

about 6100 feet in height. About thirty-six years ago, an intense heat was found to

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1045

great mosque in the city of Cashmere. Mr. Moorcroft, (Vol. II, p. 121,)

states, “that the structure consists in great part of wood, and the three

hundred and eighty pillars which ornament the temple are composed of

square blocks of deodar, built up like brick-work in alternate beaders

and stretchers, as the form of bond is technically called.” “‘ The pecu-

liarity of their structure,” Mr. Moorcroft remarks, “‘ was no doubt sug-

gested by the occurrence of Earthquakes, which are frequent in Cash-

mere, though not very violent. Certain it is, that although the roof

and walls have been rent and shattered in various places, not one of

the pillars appears to have been seriously injured, or to have deviated

from its original perpendicular.” ‘The traditions of the country

assert,” says Mr. Moorcroft in describing the valley of Cashmere, (Vol.

II. p. 109,) “that the whole of Cashmere, intending thereby the prin-

cipal line of valley, was originally one large lake, and the aspect of the

province confirms the truth of the legend, the subsidence of the waters

being distinctly defined by horizontal lines on the face of the moun-

tains: it is also not at all unlikely to have been the scene of some

great convulsion of nature, as indications of volcanic action are not

unfrequent: hot springs are numerous: at particular seasons the

ground in various places is sensibly hotter than the atmosphere, and

Earthquakes are of common occurrence.” Whether recent travellers

who have explored the valley of Cashmere have collected any farther

evidence as to the former condition of the province, I am unfortunate-

ly unable to say, as I have not yet been able to consult their works.

That indications of active volcanic action are numerous and remark-

able, I learn from Dr. Falconer, the latest of the Cashmerian tra-

vellers. He informs me that a singular “field of fire” exists in the

valley, of considerable dimensions, and through crevices in which

flames continually issue. The outlines of this volcanic tract are dis-

tinctly defined, and the action appears to be strictly local, the soil

is completely burnt, and in some spots I believe, petrified. The igneous

action has continued now for upwards of two centuries, as the exis-

tence of this remarkable spot is certified by Abul Fazil, the learned

minister of the Emperor Akber.* Mr. Moorcroft in his travels, (Vol. II.

issue from the spot which is about an acre in size, and in which there are three places

more particularly burned. A similar phenomenon had been observed about thirteen

years before. The soil, which is a mixture of clay with a little sand, has been fused by

the heat from below. One bank is twenty feet above the other. It burned in the time

of Atar Mahommed Khan, the Patan Governor, for the space of one month. A white

smoke was occasionally seen to issue from the soil, but no fire or sulphureous smell was

perceivable, and no fissures opened inthe ground. The Pundits hastily assembled from

all quarters, scraped away the earth, and placed there their brass cooking pots, with

rice and water in them. ‘The rice was cooked in half an hour, and then scattered

around for the birds to feed on, the Pundits meanwhile offering up their prayers.

No Earthquake took place at the time: no noises were heard, nor did any heat or

smoke appear there when the great Earthquake took place in 1828.

‘*] should think that few would withhold their belief in the fact of volcanic action

now being at work under the valley of Cashmere, after listening to an account of this

Earthquake.’’ Vol. I. p. 280.

* For the above particulars, [ am indebted to Dr. Falconer. They were given

verbally, and are quoted from memory, so that they are rather indefinite; but as Dr.

Falconer’s own account of the phenomenon may be expected ere long, it will be in my

power to correct and enlarge the above notice.

1046 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

p. 277,) mentions a hill within three days’ journey of the city of Cash-

mere, from which loud explosions are heard at intervals, accompanied

by the escape of gaseous matter, with force sufficient to tear off the

doors and windows of buildings situated upon it. There was nothing

on the hill resembling a crater, but the inhabitants on the spot asserted

a distinct recollection of the explosions.

About the years 1831-32, a series of Earthquakes occurred in Cash-

mere, which continued for six months without interruption. These I

am informed were chiefly confined to the valley, and scarcely, if at all,

experienced beyond it, thus proving the local action of the forces to

which they were due. In a letter formerly noted from the late Sir

A. Burnes to J. Prinsep, Esq. dated 23rd January (?) 1832, it is stated,

‘* The Earthquakes of Cashmere are frequent, and the natives inform

me, that the shocks are more severe nearer the mountains.”

That the valley of Cashmere is a focal Earthquake tract, or in other

words, that disturbing forces giving rise to Earthquake shocks, are in

active operation beneath its surface, ard that these forces act indepen-

dently, and without connection with those of other focal tracts in the

Himalayas, are points I think very clearly established by the preceding

details. Unfortunately, the nature of the information obtained does not

warrant deductions of a more special character, but those actually made,

are not devoid of interest, as illustrating the general distribution of ac-

tive volcanic forces throughout the lateral region of the great moun-

tain range of India.

D. Earthquakes of the Valley of Nepaut.

Traditional accounts of Earthquakes in the valley of Nepaul exist ;

and in the historical records preserved by the Brahmins of that country,

a shock of great severity, by which the cities of Mangah, Patan and

innumerable towns were utterly destroyed, and thousands of their inha-

bitants were killed, is said to have occurred about six centuries ago;

but it is not until the year 1833, that we have any detailed accounts of

such convulsions. On the 26th of August of that year, a most destructive

Earthquake occurred, of which ample details have been furnished by

Archibald Campbell, Esq., then Assistant to the Resident at the Court

of Nepaul, and accounts of the progress and effects of the shock beyond

the valley have been collected and recorded by James Prinsep, Esq.

I propose combining the detached narratives of these two gentlemen,

so as to form a general account of the course and effects of the

shock.

Earthquake of the 26th August, 1833.—The first shock of this

Earthquake was experienced at Katmandu, the modern capital of Ne-

paul, about 6. p.m. It extended throughout the valley and neigh-

bouring hills, being felt Westward in the valley of Nayakot and Dany

Byas: eastward at Panouti, Baneppa, Dulkele and Pholam Chok; and

southward at Chitlong, Chisagarby, Etounda and Bissoulea. The

shock lasted about 40 seconds, and during its continuance, there was a

distinctly audible noise as of ordnance passing rapidly over a draw-

bridge. This rumbling noise came from the Eastward, and Dr. Camp-

1643. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1047

bell says, “I felt it was travelling with the speed of lightning towards

the West, and just under my feet: the houses shook most violently, and

trees, shrubs, and the smallest plants were set in motion, not shaking,

but waving to and fro from their very roots.” No injury to life or

property was done by this first shock, either in Nepaul or in its course

to Calcutta, where it appears to have been experienced at about 6h.

28m., Katmandu time. The motion of the earth was undulatory, as

of a large raft floating on the ocean, and the direction of the swell

was from North-east towards South-west.

At 10h. 45m., by a good going clock, a second shock occurred, of

the same intensity, equal duration, and like character with the preced-

ing. This also was experienced at Calcutta.

The great shock was felt at Katmandu at about 5 minutes to 12

p. M., Calcutta time. It commenced very gradually by a gentle motion

of the earth, accompanied by a slight rumbling noise: soon however

it increased to a fearful degree, the earth heaved as a ship at sea, the

trees waved from their roots, and houses moved to and fro from the

perpendicular. Horses and other cattle terrified, broke loose from

their stalls, and it was difficult to walk without staggering as a lands-

man does on ship-board. Dr. Campbell, as an eye-witness, thus des-

cribes the scene: ‘The earth heaved most fearfully, and when the

shock was at its worst, we heard the clashing of falling tiles and bricks

in every direction: and to add to the impressiveness of the scene, a

general shout rose from the people in all directions. The murmur of

human prayers was carried audibly from the city to our grounds, (a

mile,) and nothing could be more imposing and vast than the whole

scene. In a dead calm, the noise of an hundred cannon burst forth:

full grown trees bended in all directions, and houses reeled about like

drunken men. In our grounds no lives were lost; but in Katmandu

19 persons were buried under the ruins of their own houses, and in

the towns of Bhatgaon and Patan, many more.” Dr. Campbell’s esti-

mate of the duration of this great shock, varies in his letters and

memorandum published in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, (Vol. IT.

p. 439-564). In the former the duration is said to have been one

minute, in the latter, three minutes at its fullest force. During the

following hour, from 12 to 1 a. M., there were six distinct and strong

shocks, the ground in the intervals being scarcely, if at all steady,

and from midnight of the 26th to the morning of the 27th, twenty

shocks are said to have been felt, while during the whole of the 27th

and 28th, the earth was in a constant state of ‘“ tremblement.”

The comparative intensity of the shock at different points in its

course, can only be estimated, in the absence of proper instruments, by

its destructive effects on buildings when exposed to its influence. Dr.

Campbell has furnished me with materials, which in this point of view

are valuable, by having collected accounts in detail of injuries sustained

by the various towns throughout the valley of Nepaul, arranging these

with reference to their bearing from Katmandu as a central point.

This Table I here transcribe :—

1048

Memoir on Indian Earthquakes.

[No. 144.

Table shewing the number of Lives lost and Buildings destroyed by the

Earthquake of the 26th August, 1833.

Places.

° | Killed.

British Residency grounds,

City of Katmandu,

South of the Capital.

Patan,

Sano Gaon,

Harra Siddhi,

Teshu Gaon,

Selli Gaon,

Pagah,

Kuhnah,

Baghmati, ..

Phurphing,

Chappa Gaon,

Peang,

ee e

Taibu,

Bara Gaon,

Bali,

Pahon,

Sasanelly, ..

aw, s.2\5 =%

Sano, wa ae

Hills about Sasanelly,

East of Katmandu in the

Valley.

Deo- Patan,

Handi Gaon,

Nag Desa,..

Bareh,

‘Tenir,

Gou Karan,

Chaneu,

Sankhu,

ee e

Bhat Gaon,

East of Katmandu beyond

the Valley, butin the im-

mediate neighbourhood.

Sangu,

Baneppa, ..

Nala Gaon,

Panoutiy a a.

Dulkele, .. Ae ata

Carried over,

ne | Wounded.

iw)

coooroooooas

oococccocoocou

oooTtoo

SCooaceo Ss

j=)

SCouUrPoOW

scoooce Ss

Temples and other Buildings.

_—_—_ oO

—Two pillars built by the minister, each

‘upwards of 100 feet high: the large temple

of Jagarnath built by Rau Bahadur, after

seven years’ labour: and about a dozen

temples destroyed.

'—The modern built garden houses of seve-

ral members of the minister’s family have

‘been rendered untenantable: one of them,

‘a handsome and ornamental edifice, has

come to the ground.

'—A crack in the ground, 20 feet in length,

\was observed at this village on the morning

of the 27th, the entire number of houses

in it was 206, more than a third of the

whole were destroyed, and about 100 men (?)

have been much damaged.

—The injury sustained here is proportion-

ally greater than at any other part not to

the East of Katmandu.

\—At the eastern extremity of Deo-Patan is

the temple of Paspanath, containing Pus-

puti Jee, the patron deity of the Brahmini-

cal inhabitants of Nepaul. The building

escaped unhurt, to the great joy of the rulers

and people of the land, who attribute the

circumstance solely to the interference of

the blind goddess in behalf of their fa-

vourite god, rather than to the stout deposi-

tion of brick and mortar.

—A fine old temple destroyed.

—A handsome temple of Mahadeo, situated

on a hill above Sankhu, is reduced nearly

to ruins.

—The total number of houses in Bhatgaon

is reckoned by Mr. Hodgson at 4700, 3-4ths

of the town is said to be destroyed: 2000 is

the average of many accounts; six or eight

fine temples destroyed, and a statue of Raja

Kiunjit Mall, one of the Newar princes of

the Bhatgaon division of the valley.

—Six persons were killed under the ruins

of one house in this village: their remains

‘were found where they had gone to sleep.

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1049

Sluis

Places. iesh ere Temples and other Buildings.

Mm) EB io

Brought over, ../840 /172 |3,577

Phulam Chok, °.. ..| 60 | 0} 300 |—A fine temple destroyed here.

North-East of the Valley,

and more remote.

Dhulaka, .. a sioilieal ous! kale .. |—In this direction the Earthquake was

Mundun Pahar, .. suche alas -. |much more severely felt. Kuti, a town on

Kan Sing Chok, .. a oneten tt cee .. {the Bhote frontier, on the road to Lassa, is

Kapa, we ae plate veh ales .. |said to have been nearly all destroyed: it

Kuti, se si Sa aell acie .. |contains about 600 houses ; 50 of which only

Listi Gaon, 8 ievaltt as .. |remain. At Listigaon, also on the Bhote

frontier, a large portion of a hill came

down, and an iron bridge was destroyed.

Lhipa, the country resi- —At Kan Sing Chok, in the same direction,

dence of Colonel Runbir vulgar report says, that for four or five days

Sinh, 20 miles from Kat- before the Earthquake took place, noises

mandu on the Lapa road, similar to the firing of cannon were heard as

by the Kuti Pass, is seri- if under ground, and in this neighbourhood

ously injured. Many small the high road to Lassa, is said to be in many

houses attached were des- places blocked up by the fallen earth from

troyed and several lives the mountains.

lost.

West of Katmandu. |

Swambunath, be Biehl are ON ene 8 3 |—One small temple destroyed and the large

Hat Chok, pik emit 0 3 jone injured. The form of the large one

Narod Devi, Mii ..| O ) 1 |must have preserved it. It is the chief

Changu Narayan, cea lan Onan) 2 |Buddhist temple in the valley, built in the

fashion of that religion, an immense circular

mound of brickwork, surmounted by a four-

Goorkha Cantonment or sided spire or jweet. and

Campoo, va 0! 0 4 ae house of a Captain much injured

ere.

Kertipur, .. ws ..| 0} O| 14 |—Contains 532 houses, and is built along

Thankote, .. re ..| O| O| 23 |the ridge and brow of a hill 300 feet higher

than the surrounding part of the vallev.

West of the Valley. Its tenements are old and frail. To ac-

Demy Byas and neigh- count for its escape the inhabitants say,

bouring Hills, .. ..| 10 | 0 | 40 |‘‘ That some nights previous to the Earth-

Tewanpur,.. i LORIN RG, 10 |quake and on the memorable night itself, a

Nayakoth, .. a Hep ig s(9) 0 3 |large tiger or leopard paraded several streets

of the town, witnout molesting any of the

North of Katmandu. | inhabitants. ‘Vhis forbearance was recipro-

Dhurmtuli, as Ss mar a lbw) 2 |cal for the ‘guardian angel’ was allowed

Huken Gaon, kA Ae ied) adine, (| ] |to continue his protecting visits: the admir-

Toka Gaon, si 0 oO 15 jing crowd, firm in the belief of correct

Burha-tul Kanth,.. Ge 0 2 |vision, hailed him as Ramji, another incar-

Chapaly, ve 0] 0 7 \nation of the ‘ great preserver.’ ””

Dharmpur, oe, lod al Pe BM i 4

South of the Valley.

Chitlone, .. 4 re i Ua Je i I

Chisagarhy, ae SO HO 0 |—The fort here much injured: a large por-

. tion of the breastwork facing the South has

fallen in, and the wallin many other places,

although not fallen, is seriously injured.

Mukwanpur, 43 0} O | 0 |—The fort here has also suffered, but in a

pau alls PRE A much less degree than the one at Chisa-

Total, + .. 414 '172 14,040! pany.

1050 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144,

The preceding details establish very distinctly, that toward the

North and East of the valley, the disturbing force was much more

violent in its action than toward the South and West. In the former

direction therefore we are to look for the focus of the shock, and it

seems probable, from all the facts recorded, that this was situated

among the hills which bound the valley of Nepaul on the North-east-

ward. As Dr. Campbell’s views on this point coincide with my own,

I will take advantage of his remarks upon it: ‘“ It would appear,” he

says, ‘that the most extreme violence of the shock, so far as its occur-

rence is as yet known, was expended within a tract of country extend-

ing from this side of the great Himalayan range on the North, to the

course of the Ganges on the South, and from the Arun river (in the

Nepaul hills) on the East to the Western branches of the Trisal Ganga

on the West, comprising a space of about 200 miles from North to

South, and 150 from East to West. In this space, the valley of

Nepaul, though not geographically the central point, is most assuredly the

portion that has suffered the greatest violence of the calamity,” and may

therefore be fairly considered as the spot whence the shock emanated.

The intensity of the shock to the North-east of Nepaul, and the

direction of its motion, had led Mr. Prinsep, in his notice of the Earth-

quake, to anticipate intelligence of some fearful catastrophe in the

vicinity of Lassa, in Thibet. By a most fortunate coincidence, Dr.

Campbell was enabled to collect some information which elucidated

this point in an interesting manner. In the notice of the Earthquake

by the Secretary to the Asiatic Society, in the Journal for August

(1833,) Dr. Campbell remarks: ‘he expressed a belief that the greatest

intensity of the shock would be found to have occurred beyond the

Himalayas, in the direction of Lassa:” and judging by the direction

from which the shock was felt to have proceeded, and its intensity in

the valley of Nepaul, such was the probability, though other has turned

out to be the fact, and that upon good authority.

The recent return from Pekin of an Embassy from Nace to the

Court of the Celestial Emperor, has furnished authentic information on

this subject, which might otherwise have been long wanting: and the

whole tenor of it shews, that the great Himalayan range itself, and the

country on this (the South) side of it, was alone the theatre of the

Earthquake’s presence, and that it was not even in the slightest degree

felt beyond a very short distance on the Thibetan side of these huge

mountains. The embassy was at Lassa on the 26th August, when and

where the shock was not experienced. At Digarchi, in the following

month, it first received accounts of its occurrence from Nepaul : to the

inhabitants of that place the circumstance was however only from

reports brought from this side of the mountains: along the road from

Digarchi the answer to all enquiries was the same, “no Earthquake on

the 26th August,” and not until its arrival at Tingri, was it found that

the shock had been felt. Tingri is a small Chinese post, immediately

beyond the great Himalaya, and the first stage on the table-land (as it

is called) of Thibet, going hence to Lassa (by the Kuti or Eastern

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1051

Pass from the valley of Nepaul.) From Tingri to Kirung, a distance

of 8 or 10 marches, the route is nearly due West, running along and

through the Northern side of the Himalaya; and throughout this tract,

though but thinly inhabited, authentic reports of the occurrence of-the

shock were received. By Kirung (the Eastern Pass from the valley

into Bhote) the mission penetrated the great range, and at each stage

(four in number through the Pass) intelligence of the occurrence was

communicated by the few individuals who inhabit that wild and sterile

region. But such information was not required, as its effects were

sufficiently manifest: in the village of Kirung, itself, supposed to

consist of 400 houses, 60 were fairly demolished, and many more

seriously injured: two men had been killed under the ruins of their

houses, and about a dozen wounded. From the exit of the Pass to

Katmandu there are no towns along the route, and scarcely any

villages : but at many places, insulated houses of the mountaineers had

been thrown down, and the precipitous banks of hills and mountains

had been thrown into the subjacent valleys.

Tingri, therefore, in latitude 28° may be fixed upon as the extreme

Northern limit of the influence of the shock, and I now proceed to

trace its progress in other directions. Before, however, quitting the

valley of Nepaul, I may mention as an interesting fact, that torrents

of rain fell immediately after the HKarthquake, washing down many of

the walls which had previously been only shaken.

In tracing the course of the Earthquake to the westward of Nepaul,

the diminution of its intensity is remarkably exhibited. At Gorkha,

Dr. Campbell mentions, that only two houses were destroyed ; at Palpa

farther to the Westward, none; and at Doti on the borders of Kemaon,

the shock was felt, but by no means severely. At Lohooghat in

Kemaon, Dr. McClelland states, that it was scarcely felt at all, so

slightly indeed, that he himself was unconscious of its occurrence,

although it was perceived by a friend on whose authority he registered

it. In the mountains, therefore, the influence of the Earthquake ap-

pears, in so far as shewn by the information recorded, to have extend-

ed from the meridian of Lohooghat, about 80° E. to that of Tingri,

about 87° E. or over about 7° of longitude. In the plains, however, it

extended considerably farther both to Kast and Westward. In the

latter direction, the extreme point appears from the published accounts

to have been Delhi, in longitude 77° 16’ E., or nearly 3° farther to the

West than Lohooghat. Toward the Kast, the boundary was the

meridian of Chittagong, 91° 42’ EK. in the Plains, or nearly 5° to the

Eastward of Tingri, which so far as we know, formed the corresponding

limit in the mountains. The Southern line appears to have been

nearly the parallel of 22° N. latitude. Thus then the entire range of

the Earthquake of August 1833, was from between 28° and 29° to 22°

North latitude, and from about 77° to 92° East longitude, embracing

accordingly 7° of latitude and 15° of longitude; a superficial extent,

upwards of four times that of the British Isles, and about twice and a

half that of the kingdom of France!

1052 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. _LNo. 144.

The following summary by James Prinsep, Esq. may appropriately

conclude the detail of the Earthquake under review.

“The direction of the vibration was from North-west to South-

west: there were three principal shocks; the first about half-past six

Pp. M.; the second at half-past eleven ; and the third, or most severe

shock, at about five minutes to twelve, Calcutta time. In the places

where it was most felt, slight and continued vibrations seem to have

been experienced for the whole of the day following. As the time of

the second vibration was accurately noted in Calcutta by the stopping

of an astronomical clock, we may assume it as the best point of com-

parison with the times noted at other distant points. Applying the

difference of longitude, a few of them may be thus classed :—

Observed Time. Diff. Long. Cal. Time. Effects.

Katmandu, Nepal, second shock, 10h. 40* +. 12m. = 10h. 57m. Vor severe, with

oud noise.

Rungpur, ditto, .. -» 11 20 — 2 =11 18 Many houses injured,

loud noise.

Monghyr, ditto, .. -» ll 27 4+ 7 =I11 34 Woe chat noise

eard.

Arrah, ditto, .. eo 1} 15 ~ 14 =11 29 Walls injured, loud

noise.

Under Rotas Hills ditto, .. -o 11 10 +20 =11 30

Goruckpur, ditto, S. -- ll 20 419 =I11 39 Walls cracked &c.&c.

Allahabad, ditto, .. -o ll O + 28 =11 28 Hollow sound from

4 the river.

Bankura, Sato, 26 ee 11 30 4 =11 34 Nonesuchsince 1814.

Calcutta, ditto, .: ee = 11 3448 No injury done.

At Monghyr, Rungpur, Mozuffurpur, Mallai, and other places with-

in direct line of influence, many houses were destroyed or injured, and

the alarm was great.

As all comment on the phenomena of this shock is reserved to a

future period, I need only now state, that I am not aware of any Earth-

quakes having occurred in Nepaul since 1833. I ought however

before this to have mentioned that in 1829, daily shocks continued to

recur for 40 days, although none were equal in intensity to that of the

26th August, 1833. The following Register of the shocks that followed

the great one of the 26th was kept at Katmandu by Captain Robinson.

Regarding them Dr. Campbell remarks: ‘“‘ Many of them have been

severe, and throughout the whole course of these visitations, there

have been two distinct varieties observed in the character of the shocks,

all those at the commencement were of the undulatory or swinging

kind: the others wanted the swell, and were a violent up and down

shaking, with little lateral motion. The first may be called the hori-

zontal, the latter the vertical variety. The former alone have been

destructive to property, while the latter, from the greater noise by

which they are accompanied, and the more rapid oscillations of the

ground, are perhaps the more terrifying.

* Time marked by a good going clock, which was stopped by the third shock. Its

pendulum vibrated from North to South.

1843.] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1053

to 26th November, 1833, inclusive.

Date. Time. Remarks.

ee ee | i es

1833.

Aug. 26th One at 5h. 55m. p. m.'All of the undulating kind, as well as nine

Another at 10h. 50m.,| others that occurred during the same night.

10h. 58m. p. M. was the

time the great one com-

menced, and its duration

was 3m.

», 2/th/4h. 53m. a. Mm. |

oh. 20m. a. M. |¢ Also undulatory.

5h. 26m. a. M.

99 2 e ° e

: i pote @ us | t Also undulatory.

», 90th) Fourshocks: one at9 a. M.

», lst |Two during the night. Slight.

Sept. Ist to

llth |Ten shocks. Slight.

Oct. 4th |7h.30m. a.m. asmartone,|This was a severe one, and of the vertical kind:

Im. duration. it was felt at Allahabad and Goruckhpur: also

| at Calcutta.

18th \4h. 55m. p. m. Severe and Same character as last one: was felt slightly at

ushered in with a loud; Allahabad: also at Calcutta.

noise.

», 26th 10h. 37m. a. M. Slight.

Nov. 8th 3h. 55m. a. mM. Slight.

», 16th At midnight severe.

26th 1lh. 45m. p. mM. Severe. {This was of the up-and-down kind, lasted a

In all 39 shocks have been| minute, occurred at the full moon when the

| noted, many slight ones} whole people of Nepaul were praying at Pas-

| have occurred besides. punath ; excited a great commotion, and was

the only instance where the prophecies of the

| Brahmins were realised, although a hundred

lucky moments had been determined on for

the last three months for the occurrence of

shocks.

I have examined such Meteorological Registers of 1833, as I have

been able to procure, with the view of ascertaining whether any indi-

cations of atmospheric disturbances accompanying the Earthquake

were to be detected, but without success. Such a Register for Nepaul.

I have not however been able to procure, and I regret it, since it was

there, as the seat of the EKarthquaking force, that the disturbances

might have been most confidently anticipated. Although torrents of

rain fell in the valley, the Rain Guage at Calcutta on the same day is

recorded as empty.

With the physical structure of the valley of Nepaul I am not ac-

quainted, nor have I found any trust-worthy account of its geology, or

that of the adjoining mountains. Colonel Kirkpatrick, in his Work on

Nepaul, states, (p. 177), ‘“‘ With regard to volcanoes, although I met

with no traces of any in our route, yet it is certain that there are some

eruptions to the Westward; but whether these arise merely from

bituminous or other inflammable substances, or are actually volcanic,

6 Z

1054 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

I am unable to determine.” These may possibly be the mere local

action, but they are interesting as maintaining, the analogy between

Nepaul and the other valleys of the lateral Himalayan Tract, where

like phenomena have been found to prevail. Perhaps they may be

similar in character to the burning ground of Cashmere.

E.. Earthquakes of the Valley of Assam.

Although Earthquakes would seem to be by no means unusual oc-

currences in the valley of Assam, it is not until the year 1842 that any

have been actually recorded; or if otherwise, notices of them have

hitherto escaped me. Two shocks which may be traced to the valley,

are noted in my Register for 1842, the first on the 23rd, the second

on the 29th October, and these form the only primary shocks observed,

the others by which the valley was affected during that year being

evidently secondary ones, emanating from other points.

The indications of powerful volcanic action throughout Assam are

numerous. The Kasyd Hills on the South-west, present some of the

most remarkable phenomena of upheavement to be found perhaps in

the world: coal is found elevated to a height of 4,300 feet above the

level of the sea, on the summit of a mountain at Chirra Poonjee, accom-

panied by a series of rocks precisely similar to those associated with

the coal at the base of the same hill; at the same place, a fossil Beach

was discovered by Dr. McClelland, the precise height of which I do

not at this moment recollect, but think it was about 1,500, or 2,000

feet ; igneous rocks are so largely distributed in such positions, as to

indicate their having been the causes of the upheavements in question.

In the Naga Hills on the South and South-east, hot springs occur,

the temperature of one of which was found to be 1103° by Lieutenant

Bigge, (J. A. S. Vol. X. p. 132); throughout the valley similar springs

with others of petroleum and naptha are numerous, all indicating a

tract where volcanic forces are now in operation, and whence Earth-

quakes may consequently be expected to emanate. I am not acquaint-

ed with the physical structure of the Singhpo and Mishmee Hills on

the Eastward, but I have little doubt similar volcanic indications would

be found there as elsewhere, as from this quarter it is the impression

throughout the province, shocks most commonly proceed.* .

The record of the Earthquakes of the lateral Himalayan Tract is

now completed, and in order to exhibit a general view of the whole, I

have compiled the following Table :—

* I regret much that the following details of Earthquakes in Assam, should not have

reached me-in time to be included in the body of this memoir. 1 am indebted for

them to Major Jenkins, Governor General’s Agent in Assam, Mr. Masters, and to Mr.

Piddington, by whom a copy of Capt. Hannay’s memorandum was forwarded to me.

I have combined the whole of the materials received, and formed from them a general

list of Assam Earthquakes, omitting those however of 1843, as the Register for that

year is not yet prepared.

The earliest is recorded by Capt. Hannay as having occurred on the 14th January

1839. It was felt at Suddeah, and its direction was, so far as could be ascertained, from

S. W. to N.E. Some days of heavy rain in the valley, and snow in the mountains,

preceded it.

3d June, 1839.—An Earthquake experienced at Suddeah on this date, apparently

from South to North. Severe storms with a N. E. wind. Burrampooter high, and he

weather

1843.]

Memoir on Indian Earthquakes.

1055

Tabular view of the Earthquakes of the lateral Himalayan Tract.

Focal Districts.

A. Valley of Cabool.

B. Valley of Jellalabad.

From February to June

1842, not less than 200

shocks in all, must have

been experienced through-

out the valley, in which

Earthquakes have long

been common occurrences,

especially during the cold

weather.

C. Valley of Cashmere.

During the Earthquake

of 1828, if all the shocks

are taken intoaccount their

number must have exceed-

ed 10,000! !

D. Valley of Nepaul.

N.B.—The minor shocks

of the lateral Himalayan

T'racts have been continu-

ed for so many ages, that

auy attempt to approxi-

mate to their total number

would be useless: yet the

number of distinct shocks

indicated in the above

Table cannot be estimated

at less than about 12 or

15,000!

Number of

Earthquakes

Date of

Earthquake.

—_———

Remarks.

A. D. 1505,/Very severe, affected the whole of Aff-

»g0 1829,

», 1836,

l4th Dec. 37,

19th Feb. 42,

22d Feb. 42,

23d Ditto,

th Ditto,

3rd Mar. 42,

20th Ap. 42,

4th June 42,

10th Ditto,

29th Ditto,

A. D. 1552,

ghanistan.

Severe.

Several shocks experienced by Mr. Vigne,

all slight.

l'hree shocks noted by Sir A. Burnes,

slight.

Very severe, affected the whole line

of the valley of the Cabool River, the

plains of the Punjaub, and a portion of

the N. W. Provinces of India.

Shocks all night and day with little in-

termission.

Ditto ditto, some severe.

A few shocks, gentle. Earth in a tremu-

lous state.

Several shocks, smart.

Severe, preceded by heavy rain and high

temperature.

Slight.

Smart.

Slight.

1780, |Severe.

Very severe for two months, afterwards

shocks to the amount of nearly 200

daily were experienced. The cessation

of shocks followed by Cholera.

,, 1831-32, |? Shocks said to have continued for six

months. Recorded by Sir A. Burnes

from native information. This cessation

is probably the same as the preceding,

a mistake as to time having been made.

A. D. 1830,|? Very severe. Recorded in the Sacred

59°

Books of the Nepaulese Brahmins.

1829.|Smart shocks daily for 40 days.

26th Aug. 33/Very severe. Afiected a large portion

to November

1833.

of the Himalayas and the Plains of

India from Delhi to the Bay of Bengal.

From Aug. |Thirty-six shocks from 27th August to

26th November.

weather wet and disagreeable. Capt. Hannay remarks, that from March to June, the

season was unusually rainy, and that although he does not distinctly recollect the

periods, four shocks of Earthquake were felt at Suddeah in 1839.

14th January, 1840.—At 6 a.M. on this day, two shocks were experienced by Mr.

Masters at Nazera (?) in Upper Assam.

3d February, 1840.—Another felt by the same observer, at the same place.

4th March 1840.

1056 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144.

3.—Earthquakes of the Tract of the Solimaun Mountains.

This tract cannot yet be considered as well established, since I

have found but one Earthquake that can be referred to it, and this

not with perfect confidence. The shock occurred in 1831, and was

very severe.* It extended from Peshawur to Dhera Ghazee Khan,

but the point of greatest force was in the vicinity of the village of

Derabund, on the Eastern slope or side of the Solimaun range. Near

this spot itis said, that water appeared from crevices formed in the plan:

men and camels were unable to stand from the violence of the undula-

tions, and fragments of rock fell in many places among the mountains.

Very little information connected with the physical structure of the

Solimaun range has come under my notice, and I am unable to say

whether the usual indications of volcanic action exist there or not.

Mr. Vigne mentions, (Travels in Affghanistan, p. 61,) his having procur-

ed from the interior of the mountains, specimens of a substance which

on analysis appeared to be naptha with bituminous matter in solution.

It oozes through the ground in various parts, and as it is a very com-

mon product of volcanic regions, it may indicate in the present case,

volcanic action in some portions at least of the Solimaun mountains.

4.— Earthquakes of the Tract of the Aravulli Mountains.

It is only to the Northern portion of the Aravulli range, extending

from the latitude of Agra to that of Delhi, that Earthquakes can yet

be traced. The earliest of which I have discovered any notice is that

of the 15th July 1505, experienced at Agra, and recorded in Dow’s

Ferishta, (Vol. II, p. 75). With indications of oriental exaggeration

it is there stated, that ‘“‘the mountains shook on their broad bases, and

every lofty building was levelled with the ground, some thousands

being buried in the ruins.” Making due allowance for the tendencies

of native historians in general, and of Ferishta in particular, this shock

still appears to have been a severe one, and it is remarkable, that it was

4th March, 1840.—A shock was felt this day by Capt. Hannay, shortly after a total

Eclipse of the sun. He remarks, when the sun was obscured the air was unusually

cold and disagreeable to the feelings, even to nausea: about an hour after the Eclipse

passed away, 7. e. about | p. m., a smart shock of an Warthquake, and about ten

minutes afterwards another: both shocks appeared to have come from the South.

The sky was cloudless, but the atmosphere hazy.

9th February, 1841.—An Earthquake at Gowhatty this day (or on the Ilth). Capt.

Hannay states, that it was different to those previously mentioned. It was accom-

panied by a low rumbling noise, was sharp and stunning, as if a blow had been struck

under you: the others alluded to, appear to have more of a trembling or rocking

motion.

12th October, 1841.—A slight shock recorded by Mr. Masters at Nazera. ‘Time 6

A. Me

4th January, 1842.—A smart shock felt on this day at 73 Pp. M., at Sibsagur. The

weather gloomy, cold and threatening rain. Capt. Hannay is unable to specify the

direction, but the motion was of the undulatory character.

4th February 1842.—At 8 a. M., a shock experienced at Nazera by Mr. Masters.

The other shocks of 1842 are duly noted in the Register for that year. ‘Those for

1843 shall be given in due time.

Any remarks on these shocks will be given more appropriately hereafter, and I may

now only express my obligations to the gentlemen who have so kindly forwarded their

notes to me.

* Vigne’s Travels in Affghanistan, vol. i, p. 58.

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1025*

during this same year that the Earthquaking forces were so fatally

active throughout Affghanistan, as described in a former page.

The next Earthquake in order of time, which is referrible to the

Aravulli tract is that of Judy, (day not ascertained,) 1720, experienced

at Delhi. It occurred in the reign of Mahommed Shah, and during

the troubles that prevailed while the two Sezad brothers, Abdullah

Khan and Hosein Ali Khan, usurped the functions of the imperial

Government. It is referred to only incidentally by Mr. Elphinstone

in his History of India, (Vol. II, p. 586), while narrating the defeat,

on several occasions, of the imperial troops by those of Asof Jah, the

founder of the sovereignty of the Nizams of the Deccan. ‘ These

events,” Mr. Elphinstone remarks, ‘‘ threw the Sezads into consternation,

and though secretly agreeable to the emperor and many of the nobility,

filled the minds of reflecting men with dismal forebodings of the ruin of

the Empire. This gloom was rendered deeper among a superstitious

people by a violent Earthquake which occurred about this time, and

seemed to threaten the existence of the capital: and in these depress-

ing circumstances, the brothers betrayed those signs of irresolution

which are often the fore-runners of great calamities.” There is now

pointed out in Delhi a mosque, one of the minars of which, (still un-

repaired, ) is traditionally said to have been thrown down by an Earth-

quake which occurred in the early part of last century, possibly by

that now under notice. Mr. Elphinstone also mentions, that the

beautiful column, called the Cuttub Minar, situated about 12 miles

from modern Delhi, lost its upper portion from the effects of an Earth-

quake, but no clue to the date of this accident is given. (Elphin. Hist.

Vol. II, p. 9).

An interval of upwards of a century now intervenes ere another

Earthquake in this tract is recorded; and relative to those which

follow, the general remark may be made, that their intensity is very

much inferior to those just noticed. They are far too slight to have

even produced any effect on buildings of masonry, and have been almost

universally nothing more than slight undulations of the earth, accom-

panied by noises. ‘They could produce neither the moral nor physical

effects attributed to the shocks of 1505 and 1720, and it would there-

fore appear, that since the last mentioned date, the disturbing forces

have materially decreased in violence.

Earthquake of the 24th October, 1831.—This Earthquake was ex-

perienced near Delhi, and is described in the following letter published

in the “ Gleanings of Science,” (Vol. III. p. 388,):—

To the Editor of the “ Gleanings of Science.”

Near Delhi, 24th October, 1831.

Str,—I beg leave to send you a short account of a smart shock of

Earthquake which occurred in my neighbourhood on the 24th October

at half-past noon. Iam encamped in North latitude 28° 34’ and longi-

- tude 78° 04’ 26” Kast from Greenwich. The wind was West from which

quarter it had been blowing steadily for some days, but just previous

1026* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

to the Earthquake, was in strong gusts. The horizon was hazy, but

there were no clouds, and no noise was heard: the motion was appa-

rently perpendicular, and if any thing from the North to the South.

It continued for a full minute, and was the most severe many persons

say, they ever felt. Books moved from their places on the table, the

tent was literally shaken, and the mangoe trees appeared as violently

agitated as if a branch had been seized and shaken for the purpose of

throwing off the fruit : a palanquin in the tent moved, and it was with

difficulty we could stand on the ground. My bearer actually laid hold

of the kandt of the tent, and every one became sick, as if he had been

at sea: but the most extraordinary circumstance is, that though the

Earthquake was equally strong and perceptibly felt to the Southward,

none of my parties who were detached to the Northward three or four

miles felt it. The shock was so strong and continued, that I sent to a

village, distant about a quarter of a mile, to know if any accident had

happened, and was informed, that although the people were much

alarmed, no damage was sustained. * *** * **¥* *,

P.S.—Since writing the above, I have heard that at a large village

called Khanpur, three miles South-west of this, the people ran out of

their houses for fear of their tumbling down, and some stones fell from

the Northern gate.

The observer in this case was situated considerably to the Westward

of Delhi, and judging from the circumstances detailed, near to the

Northern limit of the shock. Southward from the position the in-

tensity was greater, but the Southern limit is undefined. From

other evidence I have stated my conviction to be, that the local Delhi

shocks have their focus in the Aravulli mountains, about twenty or

thirty miles South-west of that city, and the details connected with

the present shock, lead me to believe it emanated from the same

locality. The line of greatest intensity would then be to the South-

ward of the observer, as it actually was, and although the direc-

tion of the motion seemed to be from North to South, while it ought,

on the above supposition, to be from South-west to North-east, yet as

the observer writes with hesitation on this point, he may very possibly

have been mistaken. My own opinion certainly is, that the Earthquake

of the 24th October 1831, emanated from the Aravulli range, and was

a primary, although a local, and by no means, a widely extended shock.

For upwards of ten years another blank occurs, during which, no

Earthquakes of the Aravulli tract are recorded. During the year

1842, no less than eight were experienced, as noted in Part I of this

Memoir, so that the disturbing forces must have been unusually active

in that year, unless their previous inactivity may be due only to our

want of information on the subject, a circumstance by no means im-

probable. As I have noted all details relative to the shocks of 1842

in the Register, I need only recapitulate their dates here, combining

with them, the others of the tract, so as to give the whole at one

view :—

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1027*

Tabular view of the Earthquakes of the Aravulli Tract.

Date of

Earthquake. Remarks.

Focal Tract.

Number of

Earthquakes.

ee ee ee eee eee

Aravulli Moun-| 1 | 15th July, 1505,|Very severe. Experienced at Agra.

tains,fromabout 2! Ditto,.... 1720,)Very severe. Experienced at Delhi.

27° to about 3 | 24th Oct. 1831,;Smart.

282° North la- 4 | 4th Jan... 1842,|Slight.

titude. 5 | Ditto, .. ,, |Ditto.

6 | 4th July, ,,? |Ditto.

7 | 25th Ditto, ,, |Ditto.

8 | 26th Sept. ,, | Ditto.

9 | 27th Ditto, ,, | Ditto.

' 10 | 6th Nov. = ,,_ ‘| Ditto.

I have already mentioned in Part I, that indications of active vol-

canic forces are found in that portion of the Aravulli Hills now under

notice; but our information relative to the general structure of the

range is as yet very meagre, so much so, as not to warrant me in dwel-

ling on the subject, and I therefore pass on to narrate the Earthquakes

of the next tract.

5.—Harthquakes of the Delta of the Indus.

From the numerous volcanic phenomena presented throughout the

tracts of country bordering on, and forming the Delta of the Indus, the

frequent occurrence of Earthquake shocks might have been anticipated,

but it is not until the year 1819 that any have been recorded, so far

as I have yet ascertained. The various circumstances attending the

great shock of the 16th June 1819, have already -been ably brought

before the scientific public by different authors, and a careful analysis

of the whole has been made by Mr. Lyell in his ‘‘ Principles of Geo-

logy, Chapter XIV.” Since it is my object to present in this memoir

a complete view of Indian Earthquakes, in so far as existing informa-

tion will permit, it is necessary that I should repeat the accounts

already given, and it is my intention to do so, in as full detail as the

various published notices will admit of.

We have no accounts of the effects of this Earthquake at any point

farther Westward than in the province of-Cutch, although from its

violence, it is probable, that it extended to Sinde and Mekran. Com-

mencing however with Cutch, its course will be traced Eastward, and

its effects at various spots detailed.

Cutch.—The greatest force of the Earthquake under notice, appears

certainly to have been exerted within the province of Cutch. Nearly

every town and fort in it were seriously injured, many levelled with

the ground, and among their ruins numerous lives were lost. The first

and greatest shock occurred at a few minutes before 7 Pp. M. on the

16th June, but shocks of inferior violence continued until the 20th,

when the volcano called Denodur, situated thirty miles North-west

1028* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

from Bhooj, the capital of Cutch, burst into action, and the movements

of the earth immediately stopped.

The effects of the shock in the Western portion of the province were

remarkable and severe. An extensive subsidence of the Delta of the

Indus took place, which is thus described by Mr. Lyell, on the autho-

rity of Captain Macmurdo: ‘“‘ Although the ruin of towns was great,

the face of nature in the inland country was, not visibly altered. In the

hills, some large masses only of rock and soil were detached from the

precipices: but the Eastern and almost deserted channel of the Indus,

which bounds the province of Cutch, (on the Westward,) was greatly

changed. The estuary or inlet of the sea was before the Earthquake,

fordable at Luckput, being only about a foot deep when the tide was

at ebb, and at flood tide never more than six feet; but it was deepened

at the fort of Luckput after the shock to more than eighteen feet at low

water. On sounding other parts of the channel it was found, that

where previously the depth of water at flood never exceeded one or two

feet, it had become from four to ten feet deep. By these and other

remarkable changes of level, a part of the inland navigation of that

country, which had been closed for centuries, became again practi-

cable.” In describing the effects of the shock in this neighbourhood,

Captain Burnes remarks : (Travels, Vol. I. p. 311.) ‘ Wells and rivulets

without number changed from fresh to salt water: but these were

trifling alterations compared with those which took place in the Eas-

tern branch of the Indus and the adjacent country. At sun-set, the

shock was felt at Sindree, the station at which the Cutch government

levied their customs, situated on the high road from Cutch to Sinde, and

on the banks of what had once been the Eastern branch of the Indus.

The little brick fort of 150 feet square, which had been built there for

the protection of merchandise, was overwhelmed by an inundating

torrent of water from the ocean, which spread on every side, and in the

course of a few hours converted the tract, which before had been hard

and dry, into an inland lake, which extended sixteen miles on either

side of Sindree. The houses within the walls filled with water, and

eight years afterwards, I found fish in the pools of water among them.

The only dry spot was where the bricks had fallen upon one another.

One of the four towers only remained, and the Custom House Officers

had saved their lives by ascending it, and were eventually transported

to dry land by boats on the following day.”

‘“‘ But it was soon discovered,” Captain Burnes continues, “ that this

was not the only alteration in this memorable convulsion of nature: as

the inhabitants of Sindree observed at a distance of five miles North-

ward, a mound of earth or sand, in a place where the soil was previously

low and level. It extended East and West for a considerable distance,

and passed immediately across the channel of the Indus, separating as

it were for ever, the Phurraun river from the sea. The natives called

this mound by the name of ‘“ Ullah Bund,” or the Mound of God, in

allusion to its not being like the other dams of the Indus, a work of

man, but a dam thrown up by nature.”

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1029*

This remarkable bund was cut through by a great inundation of the

Indus, and from the section thus exposed, it was found to be composed

of clay and shells. ‘‘ To the eye,” Captain Burnes remarks, “it did

not appear more elevated in one place than another, and could be

traced East and West as far as it could reach: the natives assigned to

it a total length of 50 miles. It must not, however, be supposed to be

a narrow strip like an artificial dam, as it extends inland to Raomoka

Bazaar, perhaps to a breadth of sixteen miles, and appeared to be a

great upheaving of nature. Its surface was covered with saline soil,

and. I have already stated, that it consisted of clay, sand and shells.”

Thus at the Western extremity of Cutch, the effect of the Earth-

quake of 1819 was to produce simultaneously an elevation of a tract

of country, fifty miles in length, sixteen miles in breadth, and ten feet

in height, and a depression of another tract extending over about 2,000

square miles, which latter became an inland lake or lagoon. The

depth of the channel of the river was variously affected, at some spots

becoming greater, at others less, but all indicating material changes of

level throughout the tract.

Runn of Cutch.—This remarkable tract of country extends from

the Indus to the Western confines of Gujerat, having a total superficial

extent of about 7,000 square miles. During the Earthquake, numer-

ous jets of black muddy water were thrown out from fissures through-

out this region, and cones of sand, six and eight feet high, similar in

character to those observed during the Chilian and Italian Harth-

quakes, were thrown up. It is traditionally reported, that the

Runn of Cutch was formerly an inland sea, freely accessible from

the main ocean; that an extensive commerce was carried on along

its shores; and that many towns, now far inland, formed its har-

bours. Nerona, a village about twenty miles N. N. W. from Bhooj

and Chanu westward of Nerona, are both said to have been sea-ports.

The people of Puchum, the largest island in the Runn, have traditions

of boats having been wrecked on the hills of the island, and they point

out several considerable harbours, called Dorut, Doh, or Dohee and

Phungwuro, to the westward of Puchum. On the Sinde, or western

side of the Runn, like traditions prevail. In farther confirmation of

these traditionary accounts, it was observed, that during the shock of

1819, numerous pieces of iron and ship nails were thrown up with the

black muddy water near Phungwuro, and like materials have subse-

quently been discovered in digging tanks in the neighbourhood. The

traditions of the inhabitants of Cutch indicate the cause of this change

of sea to land to have been some great natural convulsion, and they

have, as is usual among a superstitious people, connected the occur-

rence with a mythological legend. A Hindoo saint, by name Dhoorum-

nath, a Jogee, (Burnes’ Travels, Vol. I. p. 319), underwent penance by

standing on his head for twelve years on the summit of Denodur, one

of the highest hills in Cutch, overlooking the Runn. At the close of

his penance God appeared to him, the hill on which he stood split in

two, and the present Runn dried up, the ships and boats then navigating

Cae

1030* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. (No. 144.

its waters were overturned, its harbours destroyed, and the existing

waste of land substituted for the pre-existing waters. It is thus

that barbarous nations preserve the memories of great physical events,

while they are incompetent to form any written record of their

occurrence; and in such traditions, although interwoven with cir-

cumstances sometimes impossible, sometimes absurd, there is usually

a substratum of actual truth. In the present case, ‘ considering

the frequent occurrence of Earthquakes in Cutch, the volcanic ap-

pearance of the hills and lava which covers the face of the country,”

there can be but little doubt, that a great alteration of level took

place throughout the Runn, in consequence of some great convulsion,

the existence of which is indicated only by the legends above referred

to.

Bhooj.—Lat. 23° 15' N., long. 62° 59 E. At Bhooj, the capital

of Cutch, the destructive effects of the Earthquake of 1819, were very

great. They are thus described by Prof. Jameson, (History of India,

Cab. Library, Vol. III. p. 270.) <‘‘ The first and greatest shock took

place on the 16th June 1819, a few minutes before 7 Pp. m. The

wretched inhabitants of Bhooj were seen flying in all directions to es-

cape from their falling habitations. A heavy appalling noise, the

violent undulatory motion of the ground, the crash of the buildings, and

the dismay and terror which appeared in every countenance, produced

a fearful sensation beyond description. The shock lasted from two to

three minutes, in which short period, the city of Bhoo} was almost

levelled to the ground. The walls, from the sandy nature of the stone,

were crumbled into dust; nearly all the towers and gateways were

demolished ; and the houses left standing were so shattered, as to be

uninhabitable. It was calculated that nearly 2,000 persons perished at

Bhooj alone.” ‘In the British camp, which was pitched in a plain

between the fort and city of Bhooj, the general feeling was an unplea-

sant giddiness of the head and sickness of stomach, from the heaving

of the ground; and during the time the shock lasted, some sat down

instinctively, and others threw themselves on the ground. Those who

were on horseback, were obliged to dismount; the earth shook so vio-

lently, that the horses could with difficulty keep their feet; and the

riders, when on the ground, were scarcely able to stand.”

Ahmedabad.—Lat. 23° 1' N., long. 72° 42‘ E. At this city, the

chief town of Gujerat, the shock was very severely felt. The following

description of its effects is given in the work above quoted: ‘This

city is justly celebrated for its beautiful buildings ef stone and other

materials, and for the famous shaking minarets which were admired by

every stranger. Alas! the devastation caused by this commotion of

the earth is truly lamentable. The proud spires of the great mosque

erected by Sultan Ahmed, which have stood nearly 450 years, have

tumbled to the ground within a few yards of the spot where they once

reared their heads. Another mosque of elegant structure which lies to

the left of the road leading to Shahee Bagh, has shared the same fate.

The magnificent towers, which formed the grand entrance into the

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 103 1*

citadel have been much shaken, and cracked in several places. The

fort and town of Jelelsheer are reduced to ruins. Many of the people

killed were already out of doors, which is usually considered a situa-

tion of comparative safety. A marriage was about to be celebrated in

a rich man’s family, and the castes had assembled from various different

quarters: the shock occurred when they were feasting in the streets,

and upwards of 500 of the party were killed among the ruins of the

falling houses.” ‘‘ All the disagreeable sensations were experienced

of being tossed in a ship at sea in a swell, and the rocking was so great,

that every moment we expected the earth to open under our feet.”

Surat.—Lat. 21° 11’ N., long. 73° 7’ E. The Earthquake at Surat

is thus described by an eye-witness: “‘ The vibration of the couch on

which I was lying was so great, that I was glad to get off it; the house

was considerably agitated, the furniture all in motion; a small table close

to me kept striking the wall, and the lamps swung violently. I ran

down-stairs, and got out of my house as fast as possible. On getting

outside I found a number of people collected, gazing with astonishment

at my house, which stands alone, and was so violently agitated, that I

expected it to fall down. The earth was convulsed under our feet.”

Baroach.—Lat. 21° 46’ N., long. 73° 14’ E. At this place the

violence of the shock was very considerable. ‘‘ Such of the houses as

are elevated,” says an observer who was on the spot, “and at all loose-

ly built, creaked like the mast and rigging of a ship in a gale: vene-

tians and window frames rattling violently and the buildings threaten-

ing immediately to fall: a considerable lateral motion was impressed

on every thing that admitted of it. After this, more violent concussion

had lasted a minute or upwards, it was succeeded by an oscillatory

motion, of a more equable character, which continued for more than

a minute and a half, making the whole period of the convulsion nearer

three than two and a half minutes.”*

* I am indebted to H. Piddington, Esq. for the following additional details of the

great Earthquake of June 1819. In common with other interesting communications

previously alluded to, it arrived too late to be inserted in the body of my paper, and I

am accordingly constrained to give it in this form :—

Extract from the Asiatic Journal, Vol. IX, 1820, p. 164.

Observations made at Porebunder, (lat. 21° 39’ N., long. 69° 45/ E.) Since the

17th of June 1819, regarding the Earthquake.

It is necessary to state that these notes of the subsequent phenomena, were com-

municated in a letter to a literary friend in India, which will account for the familiar

style of the remarks and the local allusions.

18th June.—Thermometer at 2 ep. m. 90°; wind light at S. W. Large electric

clouds approaching from all quarters: vegetation much advanced. Neither shock nor

tremors in the Earth, but in the person, agiddy and slight sickish or faint feel with

pains in the knees, and an inclination to lie down on the earth rather than sit or stand,

and cannot apply myself to any thing. These feelings appear to be general.

19¢h.—Thermometer at 2 p. M. 90°, cloudy ; wind light S. W. by S. A tremor in

the Earth at midnight, but of too short duration to allow of quitting the bed. The

same unpleasant personal feelings all day and night as on the 18th: feel relieved by

lying down, particularly on the earth.

20th.—Thermometer at 2 p. mM. 90°; wind S. W. A sensible tremor at noon: repeat-

ed at 50 minutes afterwards. ‘The same disagreeable feel as on the 18th.

21st.—Thermometer at 2 ep. m. 90°; slight breeze atS. W. by S._ Felt a continued

tremor of the earth at midnight while in bed: removed from bed and slept in the open

air, lest other shocks should bring down a shaken house. ;

2nd.

1032* Memoir on Indian Larthquakes. (No. 144,

The extreme eastern limit of the Earthquake of 1819, appears to

have been Poonah, where its force was only very feebly experienced.

The tract affected therefore extends, so far as existing information

shows, from about the meridian of 69° to that of 74° East longitude,

and from about 18° to 24° North latitude. These limits are, how-

ever, by no means well ascertained, especially to the westward of

Cutch, and also to the northward; our information from both of these

directions being deficient.

22nd.—Thermometer at 2 Pp. m. 88°; wind West. Weather changed to a gloomy,

cloudy appearance, with indications of rain. Less tremor of the earth, but a conscious-

ness that [ am rather in a long rocking motion than standing firm; when I walk I do

not think I go strait. ‘The same unpleasant sensation as on the 18th, though in a less

degree: from this and the change in the weather, entertain hopes that the tremors are

ceasing, and that we shall soon be quit of our alarms and unpleasant feelings.

23rd.—Thermometer at 2 p. mM. 82°; wind S.S. W. Our first rains set in strongly

at 12 last night, with the change of the moon: there were three tremors of the earth, but

to-day our personal disagreeable sensations have abated, and we trust and hope that

with the change of season, all physical effects of the Earthquake are leaving us for

ever.

24th.—Thermometer at 2 Pp. M. 82°; wind high S.S. W. Rough monsoon weather ;

much rain. Notwithstanding our hopes of yesterday, we were again alarmed last,

night between 12 and 1 o’clock, not by a tremor but by a shock, which awakening us,

caused us to jump out of our beds and run into the open air, where we remained an

hour. The shock lasted about two seconds. Immediately after it, observed a long

narrow black cloud, running west and east, or quite the reverse way to what I am

accustomed to see a line of cloud extend: it appeared stationary for half an hour,

during which period there were constant tremors in the earth. Some houses in the

town were thrown down. Our knees ached for half an hour after the shock: but on

the whole we are much relieved from the disagreeable sensations of lassitude, giddiness

and faintishness which we have constantly experienced since the great shock of the

16th. I attribute the sickish feel to the rocking motion we were constantly subject to.

We were confident that the earth was in a long rocking or rolling motion, though we

could not observe it.

20th.—Thermometer at 2 p. m. 82°; wind light at S. S. W.no rain. There was

neither shock nor tremor last night. I never experienced so charming a star-light

night. I was up at 12, expecting a shock, and found the heavens so clear, and the stars

so numerous and bright, that I was inclined to imagine, the Earthquake had swept the

atmosphere of all its impurities. At present we are quite free from our late unpleasant

feelings, and as the springs will be over to-day, so do I trust will all future shocks and

tremors of the earth. At 2p. M. heard at a consideravle distance, in an easterly direc-

tion, about eight distinct sounds, like the discharge of cannon. I expect to hear of the

bursting of one or more volcanoes in that direction. This being the end of the springs,

though I know not that they influence Earthquakes, yet 1 think it probable they do,

and hence imagine that the disorder in the bowels of the Earth, arriving with the

springs, at a crisis, will cease with the discharge it has found for its foul air, and that

now, you as well as ourselves, will be left at rest and hear no more of Earthquakes.

But a remark or two before 1 bid adieu. Certainly the commencement of the late

phenomena had no connection with the springs, neither has that of a fever in the

human frame, yet its crisis is always affected and frequently determined by them (?).

1 allude to the effects of the springs on fevers, beneath the tropic in particular, where

the sameness of the atmosphere, causes them to act with greater influence on all

physical matter than beneath more variable latitudes. The late phenomena has

brought to my recollection, my having observed to an Officer of the Marine about the

beginning of March last, that ‘‘there was a cloud in the North-east, which ap-

peared uncommonly charged with electric matter.’’ Its direction was nearly opposite

to the one from which I heard the sound that preceded the great shock of the loth. I

have observed that previous to the approach of the S. W. monsoon, the electric clouds

first appear in the N. E.on the opposite direction to that of the monsoon. LEarth-

quakes are said almost always to be preceded by great droughts, but not so with that of

the 16th. It was preceded by the usual hot season, but not by any uncommon drought.

You will recollect, that in 1812 we had an uncommon drought in this country, so that

many thousand of the inhabitants died for want of food, and the cattle for grass ; but it

was

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1083*

Indications of active volcanic action are very numerous throughout

the Delta of the Indus, and indeed along the entire range of the coast

of the Arabian Gulf. Hot springs are numerous among the moun-

tains which fringe the Delta, and to the eastward volcanic phenomena

are remarkably developed. I am indebted to an interesting paper on

the country between Kurachee and Hinglaj, by Captain Hart, 2nd

Bombay Grenadiers, for the following account of a singular series of

mud volcanoes in a low range of hills to the eastward of the greater

Hara mountains: ‘Six miles beyond the Phor river,” Captain Hart

remarks, ‘“‘we came to the Tilookpoore wells, at present covered with

an extensive marsh of fresh water formed by the late rain. One coss

from them, in a westerly direction, three hills of extremely light colour-

ed earth rise abruptly from the plain. That in the centre is about

four hundred feet in length, of a conical form, with the apex flattened

and discoloured : its southern and western farces rather precipitous, and

with a more gradual slope on the others. It is connected with a

was not followed by an Earthquake! I have observed that the tremors and shocks

have invariably been most constant and strong at 10 a. m. at noon, and at midnight.

‘There has been no occurrence worthy of observation since the 25th, and as this is now

the 30th, my conjecture of the former date has been so far correct, that the principal

effects of the Earthquake did subside with the springs. The sensations felt since the

25th have been so slight, that were it not for their being somewhat generally acknow-

ledged, they might be taken for the effects of the imagination.”’

The personal sensations alluded to above as felt before and during the Earthquake

shocks, are identical in character with those invariably experienced by the writer be-

fore and during a thunder-storm. The same lassitude, feeling of sickness, and oppres-

sion are felt by me when the air is unusually charged with electric matter. I note the

circumstance, because it is one of several, which indicate a connection between Earth-

quakes and the electric condition of the atmosphere.

The following observations would lead to a material extension of the extreme limits)

of the shock of June, 1819, since they prove that its influence extended even beyond

the Ganges, affecting the whole of the country between that River and the Indus :—

Extract from the Asiatic Journal, Vol. 1X. p. 184.

Muttra.—June 19th 1819. We had a smart shock of Earthquake here on the even-

ing of the 16th, between 7 and 8 o’clock, which lasted I should imagine about 30 or

40 seconds.

Chunar and Mirzapore.—About 8 o’clock in the evening of the 16th June, the

shock of an Earthquake was experienced at these places. At Chunar the motion

was accompanied by a noise in the atmosphere, which resembled that occasioned by

the rapid flight of birds.

Mynpooree.—June 20. On the evening of the 16th, we had a slight shock of an

Earthquake: the undulating motion continued little more than a minute, and seemed

to come from the West. it was felt very nearly at the same time at Futteyghur,

and at one of my police chokees across the Jumna.

Jounpoor.—A strong shock of an Earthquake was felt here on the night of the

16th of June, at a quarter past eight o’clock: there were three distinct vibrations

from West to East, with the usual accompaniments of rattling wall-shades, swinging

punkahs, which appeared to me about 25 seconds: the intervals were very distinct.

It was not accompanied by the rumbling noise I have usually heard on such occasions,

and which I have hitherto imagined to be the earth’s vibration. Both the noise and

motion must be separate effects of some unknown cause. The rains have not yet

commenced and the weather has been unusually hot.

Sultanpore, Oude.—June 17. A severe and awful shock of an Earthquake was felt

at this station last night at 17 minutes past eight, which lasted some time, and occa-

sioned very considerable alarm. ‘The bungalows actually rocked, particularly the

Mess one of the Ist Bat. 19th Regt., in which the officers were at dinner at the time,

_ and the huts of the soldiers were a good deal damaged. The heat for the last two or

three days has been excessive, and not a drop of rain has yet fallen.

1034* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

smaller one of the same form, but of not more than half its size, by a

sort of causeway, some fifty paces in length. The third bears the

appearance of a cone, having been depressed and broken, and covers

a greater extent of ground than the others. All three towards their

bases are indented by numerous cavities which reach far into the in-

terior: their sides are streaked with channels, as if water had flowed

from them. On ascending the summit of the highest one, I observed

a basin of liquid mud, abont one hundred paces in circumference,

occupying its entire crest. Near the southern edge, at intervals of a

quarter of a minute, a few small bubbles appeared on the surface:

that part of the mass was then gently heaved up, and:-a jet of liquid

mud, about a foot in diameter, rose to that height, accompanied by a

slight bubbling noise. Another heave followed, and three jets rose;

but the third time only two. They were not of a magnitude sufficient

to disturb the whole surface, the mud of which at a distance from

the eruption was of a thicker consistency than where it took place.

The pathway round the edge was slippery and unsafe, from its being

quite saturated with moisture, which gives the top a dark coloured

appearance; on the southern side a channel, a few feet in breadth,

was quite wet from the eruption having recently flowed down. I

was told that every Monday, the jets rose with greater rapidity than

at other times, and then only did any of the mass ooze out of the

basin. The entire coating of the hill appears to be composed of this

mud, baked by the sun to hardness. No stones are to be found on

it, but near the base, I picked up a few pieces of quartz. Crossing

the ridge which connects this hill with the least of the three, I climb-

ed up its rather steep side. In height or compass it is not half the

height of its neighbour, and its basin, which is full of the same liquid

mud, cannot be more than five and twenty paces in diameter: the

edge is so narrow and broken, that I did not attempt to walk round it.

One jet only rose on its surface, but not more than an inch in height

or breadth: but a very small portion of the mass was disturbed by its

action, and although the plain below bore evident marks of having

been once deluged to a short distance by its stream, no eruption had

apparently taken place for some years. At times, the surface of this

pool sinks almost to the level of the surface of the plain, at others it

rises so as to overflow its basin: but generally, it remains in the quies-

cent state, in which I saw it: two years previous, it was many feet

below the crest of the basin. On my way to the third hill, I passed

ovér a flat of a few hundred yards, which divides it from the other

two. The sides are much more furrowed by fissures than theirs are,

although their depth is less: and its crest is more extended and irre-

gular. On reaching the summit, a large circular cavity, some fifty

yards in diameter is seen, in which are two distinct pools of unequal

size, divided by a mound of earth, one containing the liquid mud,

the other clear water. The surface of the former was slightly agitated

by about a dozen small jets which bubbled up at intervals, but in the

latter, only one was occasionally visible. A space of a few yards ex-

Se ce eee

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1035*

tended on three sides from the outer crust to the edge of the cavity,

which was about 50 feet above the level of the pools: their sides are

scarped and uneven. On descending the northern face, I remarked

a small stream of clear water flowing from one of the fissures into the

plain, which had evidently only been running a few hours: the mud

water of all the pools is salt. A fourth pool situated close to the great

range of Haras, and distant from the rest upward of six miles, was

pointed out as having a similar cavity to this one. Its colour is the

same, and although the surface is more rounded, its summit appears

broken. I regretted not having an opportunity of visiting it. The

name given to these singular productions of nature is the ‘ Koops, or

Basin of Raj Ram Chunder.” They are said to be altogether eighteen

in number, seven in this neighbourhood, and eleven between Kedje

and Gimmadel in Muckran. Four were pointed out to me, and I was

told the other three were hid among the mountains. Some persons

with my party had seen one of those in Muckran, and had heard from

the Beerooes who shewed them the road, that many others were

spread over the country: he described it as throwing up jets similar

to the large hill here. By the Hindoos, they are looked upon as the

habitation of a deity ; but the Mahommedans state, that they are affected

by the tide, (the sea is not more than a mile distant from the large

one,) but this I had reason to doubt, as of the many persons I ques-

tioned who had visited them at all times, not one remembered to have

seen the pools quiescent, although several had been on the large hill

when the mud was trickling over the side of the basin. To endea-

vour to ascertain this fact, I placed several dry clods of earth in the

bed of the channel on a Saturday, as I expected to return by the same

route on the following week. A range of low hills of irregular form

lie to the westward of, and almost close to, the Chunder Koops. I had

not time to examine them, but from their appearance, I judged they

contained sulphur, and on questioning some of those with me who

crossed them, they said the taste of the earth was like that near the

hot springs of Sehwan where it is known toabound. A Hoomrea who

was present, mentioned, that about six coss off, there was another hill

called by the name of the “ Sulphur Mountain.”

Describing the valley of the Aghor or Hingool river, Captain Hart

remarks: ‘ The faces of the rocks towards the stream are broken and

craggy. That on the left bank is higher, and more scarped than its

opposite neighbour. Beyond them in the distance is seen a range of

light coloured sand-hills, to all appearance nothing but a mass’ of

conical-shaped peaks, and towering far above them, are the blue moun-

tains of Hinglaj, precipitous and wild.” ‘‘ On ascending the left bank

of the river, after passing between the peaks of the mountains, which

seem as if they had been severed by some convulsion of nature, a full

view is obtained of the sand-hills. They appear to consist of one irre-

gular range, cut in two by the river, extending southward to near the

sea, and northwards far into the mountains. They are from three to

four hundred feet in height, covered from base to summit with num-

1036* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

berless small conical-shaped, ribbed peaks, like that of the Chunder

Koops, and their surface appears to have been baked to hardness by

the sun.” In this range of hills it is highly probable, that numerous

mud volcanoes, similar to those already described by Captain Hart,

would be found, and the entire tract is evidently the seat of active

volcanic forces. The result of Captain Hart’s experiment on the

activity of the Chunder Koops is thus described: ‘‘ On our way back,

nine days after first seeing them, I again visited the Chunder Koops.

The appearance of the one that was fallen in, was as sand in a muddy

pool, and the water instead of being clear as before, was quite dis-

coloured: the stream also had ceased flowing for some time, as the

plains bore no marks of moisture. On reaching the summit of the

larger one, it was very evident that an eruption had taken place the

day before (Monday,) for the channel on the western side was quite

filled with slime, which had oozed down the side of the hill, and ran

some thirty yards into the plain below. The dry clods I had placed

when before here were covered, and it was not safe to cross where the

mud had found an issue, whereas my whole party had when with me,

walked round the edge of the basin. The jets rose as usual. So

tenacious is the mud of this one, that even cocoa-nuts which the

Hindoos throw on it do not sink, but in the others it is more liquid.

No alteration had taken place in the appearance of the small Koop.”

From these interesting details, and from the fact that throughout the

tract of country on both sides of the Indus near the sea, hot springs

are disseminated ; it appears that the usual characteristics of localities

subject to Earthquake shocks are found in that now under notice. It

is to be regretted that our information relative to the actual occurrence

of Earthquakes here is so very limited ; but the inhabitants of the coun-

try are unsuited for retaining and transmitting such observations, since

even the great shock of 1819 was, as Captain Burnes informs us, early

forgotten, and had intelligent European observers not been on the spot

shortly afterwards, the event would probably never have been heard of,

and the many interesting phenomena their labours have served to

eliminate, would have been lost to science. .

Captain Burnes informs us, that it is the general belief among the

inhabitants of the province, that “the sea is receding from the south-

ern shores of Cutch,” or more correctly, as the sea-level continues

unaltered, that there is now taking place a very slow and insensible

elevation of the coast of Cutch, similar most probably in its nature to

that in progress on the coasts of Sweden, the reality of which has

been satisfactorily established by Mr. Lyell. This elevation would

seem to be much more extensive than Captain Burnes was aware of,

since, if native traditions are to be depended upon, a like process has

taken place in the province of Lus,* on the same coast of the Arabian

Gulf, but much farther to the westward: in the same tract of country

indeed in which the mud volcanoes formerly described are said to

* Lieutenant Carless, J. N. Memoir on Lus, As. Soc. Jour, Vol. VIII, p. 154.

1843. ] Memotr on Indian Earthquakes. 1037*

occur. No definitive information on this very interesting point has

yet, however, been obtained, but the establishment of proper marks to

which future reference could be made, would be an object worthy of

the attention of the Officers just deputed to the survey of Sinde ; for on

the coast of Sinde as well as on that of Cutch and Lus, if the move-

ment be a real one, indications of its existence would in time be

furnished.

During the year 1842, an Earthquake was experienced at Baroda,

but no account of its course was, so far as | am aware, made public.

I have already expressed my regret at this, as the shock may possibly

have emanated from the tract under notice, but as this cannot now be

ascertained, it is unnecessary to allude farther to it.

6.—Earthquakes of the Tract of the Vindhyan Mountains.

The Vindbyan mountains extend in an almost unbroken chain from the

Gulf of Cambay to the valley of the Ganges, thus traversing the entire

peninsula of India at its base, and forming the connecting line of the

mountain ranges of northern and southern Hindoostan. It is proba-

ble indeed, that at one period the Vindhyas crossed the Gangetic valley,

and being connected with what are now called the Garrow Mountains,

abutted ultimately on the Himalayas. Throughout the whole of this ex-

tensive range, indications of volcanic action are developed in a most re-

markable manner. This action, speaking comparatively with what it has

been at a former epoch, may now be described as almost extinct ; but

there are still occasional proofs furnished of the forces once developed

on so large a scale being yet in existence, although with much reduced

intensity. The development of trap rocks in the central portion of

the Vindhyas is the most remarkable feature in their physical struc-

ture ; the details of this have so frequently been given already, that it is

unnecessary for me to do more than merely to allude to them here.

Hot springs are also most abundant, and have been described by vari-

ous observers, as extending from the valley of the Nerbudda to that of

the Ganges. That Earthquakes should occasionally be experienced

within a region so abundant in marks of igneous action was to be anti-

cipated, and it is only remarkable, that the number recorded should be

so few, and their intensity so feeble.

The earliest historical notice we have of a convulsion of this class is

that relating to the destruction of the city of Oojein, (lat. 23° 11’ N.,

long. 75° 35’ E.) by a shower of volcanic ashes, in the time of Rajah

Vikramaditya, 56 B. c. Sixty other towns are said to have been

involved in the same catastrophe, but it must be admitted that the

tradition on which this statement is based is apocryphal, being unsup-

ported by any physical evidence of volcanic action within the historical

period in the vicinity of the place, so far as its examination has been

carried. It seems, however, scarcely possible, that a volcano capable of

ejecting a shower of ashes on so enormous a scale could have wholly

escaped research, and in the present state of our information, the des-

-truction of Oojein from igneous action must be held doubtful. Captain

7 Be

1038* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

Dangerfield states, that in the neighbouring Vindhyas, and in the wild

tract of Rajpeeply, (Malcolm’s Central India, Vol. II, p. 325), some

hills are said to have hollows in their summits resembling extinct cra-

ters, but as he had never seen them, he could not hazard an opinion

as to their true nature. In Malwa, where igneous rocks are almost

universal, Earthquakes are said to be frequent, but no special instances

are mentioned.

It is not until the year 1842, that the dates of any Earthquakes

emanating from the Vindhyas have been ascertained. The Earthquakes

of the 21st and 23rd of May 1842, by which many places in the vici-

nity of the Rajmahal hills, the eastern termination of the Vindhyas,

were smartly affected, are decidedly referable to the tract now under

notice. The direction of the shocks as noted in my Register, and their

comparative intensity at different points varying in their distance from

the hills establish the point. Since the publication of the Register for

1842, I have received a few farther details connected with the above

mentioned Earthquakes which I may give here. For these I am in-

debted to the ever-active kindness of Mr. Piddington, Sub-Secre-

tary, Asiatic Society, who forwarded to me the proof sheets of his

Seventh Memoir on Storms, in which the details in question were given.

This is only one of the many similar acts of kind assistance I have’

received from this gentleman, and my best acknowledgments are due

to him.

Gya.—Lat. 24° 49' N., long. 85° E, Relative to the Earthquake

of the 2lst May, W. St. Quintin, Esq. C. S. writes as follows :—

21s¢ May.—‘* At 20 minutes before 9 o’clock a. M. we had two

smart shocks of Earthquake from West to East; for some days before

and after this, the sky had a white, thick, hazy appearance. The heat

of the weather was most oppressive. Thermometer never under 90°

and often at 95° in the house, and 115° in the shade of the outside

verandah.” |

Monghyr.—ULat. 25° 23' N., long. 86° 38’ E. Mr. Palmer of Mon-

ghyr writes thus: ‘The whole of this season, I mean from January

(1842,) has been rather a remarkable one, and very different from what

I have observed at this station for the last seven years. The annual

passing showers of January and February did not visit us. March and

April, though generally one stream of strong N. W. and N. E. winds,

approached us with somewhat less fury, and with a succession of a day

or two intervening between the gusts. May was sultry in the day

without the usual hot winds, but attended with a cooler feeling by mid-

night, until near the 19th, when the air became heavy and oppressive to

a degree, and the sky had a peculiar hue about the time of sun setting.

This continued until the morning of the 21st, and though we looked

forward to some kind of coolness, or a light air about dawn, it was the

reverse this morning: a lethargic sensation seemed to hang about until

a quarter after nine, when the earth was observed to tremble and rock

from East to West (from West to East?) for half a minute, vibrating

;

eee

Seer ty

ssi

EO Sapeaani Sie a ve

1843.) Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1039*

those wall shades only in that line, when as if a second shock, though

I could perceive no stop, came from the direction of N. and S. affect-

ing the wall shades again in that line: the last undulation appeared to

be the strongest , this was repeated three times, each with less force.

On the 23rd, two more slight shocks were felt, since which period up

to the night of the 2nd of June, the sky assumed every evening an

ashy colour, blended with tints of a salmony hue and very oppressively hot.

A strange effect it appeared to have on all trees in either blossom or young

fruit. As proof of this, the whole of the fruit in my garden was stunt-

ed in its size with a kind of harsh flavour, though free from any worm :

the blossoms falling off as if each leaf was partially baked to make

it crisp.”

About five miles from Monghyr is the Seetacond, a hot spring

celebrated as a favourite resort of Hindoos. Its temperature is vari-

able, sometimes rising as high as 136°, and sometimes being only 92°

or 93°. It is a remarkable fact, that Monghyr seems to suffer more

from Earthquake shocks, from whatever direction these may come, than

any other place in its vicinity. This was observed during the shock

from the lateral Himalayan tract, of the 26th August 1833, again

during that of the 11th November 1842, and I would say from the in-

formation before me, that on the present occasion, the shocks were

smarter at Monghyr than at any other spot. What the cause of this

greater susceptibility may be, it is impossible at present to say, as it

would be necessary to know the locality thoroughly, before any could

be with propriety or confidence assigned, but the fact seems well esta-

blished.

It would appear from the following remarks of Dr. Hamilton Buchanan,

in a paper on the minerals of the Rajmahal hills, that towards the

western extremity of this range, there are decided indications of

igneous action.

“‘] have said,” Dr. Buchanan remarks, “‘ that Rangreswaritok at the

western extremity of the range appears to me to have been the crater

of a volcano. It is a conical hill about 300 feet in perpendicular

height, and very steep on all sides. On reaching the summit, you find

it consists of a great cavity surrounded by a thin ledge, and descend-

ing to very near the level of the plain. The ledge now is of un-

equal height, having in some places given way, especially towards the

East, whence a gap about 30 yards wide at the bottom gives access

from the outer plain with very little ascent, and allows the water from

the cavity to escape. Towards the summit, the inner ledge consists

of abrupt rocks, but the bottom is filled with the debris of the portions.

of the ledge that have fallen. Much slaggy matter is to be found on

the outside of the hill and at the bottom of the cavity.” ‘I was in-

formed by Isfundyer Khan, a fine young man, assistant to the Sezawal

who manages the hill tribes, that about five years ago he heard of a

smoke that issued from a hill named Chapar Bhita, about seven coss

§. E. from Karariya. He visited the place, which was not hollow, and

1040* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

consisted as usual of earth mixed with a great many fragments of stone.

In the day it was not luminous: but that a thin smoke issued con-

tinually from a space 8 or 10 cubits in diameter. He heard that at

night it was luminous, but he did not see it in that state. On throw-

ing wood on the hot place in a few minutes it took fire. These appear-

ances continued for about three years and then stopped.” Dr. Buchanan

farther-mentions that the whole tract of the Rajmahal Hills abounds

with hot springs. (Gleanings in Science, Vol. III, p. 6.)

It is anticipating materials not yet properly arranged, but I may

mention that other Earthquakes have occurred during the year 1843

referrible to the Vindhyan tract. These will be duly noticed in the

that one of them shews the continued action of the disturbing forces

throughout those igneous districts of Central India, where once its in-

tensity was displayed on so extensive a scale.

7. Earthquakes of the Tracts of the Delta of the Ganges.

The forces which have given origin to those Earthquakes which have

from an early period been known to affect Calcutta and its vicinity, are

probably to a certain extent connected with those of the tract next to

be described, namely, that of the Arracan coast ; but it is proved by

several examples that the Earthquakes of the Delta may occur with

entire independence of those on the coast, and I have therefore felt

warranted in making the former a distinct focal locality.

The earliest notice of an Earthquake referrible to the Delta of the

Ganges, that I have been able to find, is contained in the following ex-

tract from ‘‘ The Gentleman’s Magazine,” printed in 1738-39. I am

indebted to Major H. B. Henderson’s Chronological Tables for the no-

tice, which runs thus: “In the night between the 11th and 12th October

1737, there happened a furious hurricane at the mouth of the Ganges,

which reached 60 leagues up the river. There was at the same time

a violent Earthquake which threw down a great many houses along the

river side: in Galgotta (2. e. Calcutta,) alone, a port belonging to the

English, two hundred houses were thrown down, and the high and mag-

nificent steeple of the English Church, sunk into the ground without

breaking. It is computed that 20,000 ships, barks, sloops, boats,

canoes, &c. have been cast away. Of nine English ships then in the

Ganges, eight were lost, and most of the crews drowned. Barks of

60 tons were blown two leagues up into land over the tops of high

trees: of four Dutch ships in the river, three were lost with their men

and cargoes ; 300,000 souls are said to have perished. The water rose

forty feet higher than usual in the Ganges.”—-N. B. The steeple of the

Church was described to have been lofty and magnificent, and as con-

stituting before this period the chief ornament of the settlement.”

No Earthquake of equal violence with this has ever since occurred,

and it is the only one in which fissures insthe earth to any extent have

been observed. It is farther remarkable as having been accompanied

by a terrific hurricane, a coincidence however by no means rare, and

a he, ee eed oe re

1843.) Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1041*

to which attention will be more particularly directed at a subsequent

time. |

The next shock of which I have obtained intelligence, occurred at

Calcutta in the month of April 1810. It is described in the following

Extract from the Asiatic Annual Register, Vol. XII., kindly forwarded

to me by Mr. Piddington.* ‘ April 3d, on Sunday evening last, pre-

sently after the cessation of a smart north-wester, two successive shocks

of an Earthquake were distinctly felt in many parts of Calcutta and its

vicinity. The time of its occurrence, as noted by different persons, was

between 20 and 25 minutes past 7 Pp. M., and the duration of each suc-

cessive shock was variously estimated at from 6 to 30 seconds. The

vibrations appeared at first to pass in a line from north-east to south-

west, and then to return in an opposite direction. They were almost

universally perceptible to those who were sitting at the time in the

upper apartments of their houses, but were in a few instances, ob-

served on the ground floors. At one house in Garden Reach, where

a party of eleven were sitting at dinner, the shocks were very strongly

felt by three of the number seated at one corner of the table, and also

by the three others at the opposite corner, while they passed unob-

served by the rest of the company. Besides the peculiar sensation

experienced in their own persons by those who witnessed the pheno-

* With the above account of the Calcutta Earthquake of 1810, Mr. Piddington for-

warded to me another of a shock experienced at Matura on the night between the 3lst

August and Ist September, 1803. I have found it impossible to identify to my own

satisfaction the geographical position of the place called Matura. In the month of

September 1803, the British Troops took possession of Mathura, a town in the province

of Agra, (lat. 27° 32’ N., long. 77° 37’ E.) and this may possibly be the place alluded

to, in which case the Earthquake would be referrible to the Aravulli tract. From

my uncertainty as to the position of Matura, I have given the account of the Earthquake

in a note, instead of in the body of the memoir. From the style, the notice would

appear to be a translation from a native account.

Extract from Asiatic Annual Register for 1804, Vol. VI.

Bengal Occurrences for October, 1803.

Matura, September 24th, 1803.

**On the night between the 3lst August and the Ist of September, at half an hour

after midnight, a severe shock of an Earthquake was felt at this place, which lasted

for many minutes, and was violent beyond the memory of man. Probably not a living

creature in the place but was roused from his slumbers by the alarm, and felt its effects.

Many of the pucka (Masonry) buildings were cast down, and zenanahs hitherto unas-

sailed by violence were deserted, and their fair inhabitants took refuge in the streets

and in the fields in dishabilles which had no effect to conceal them, and in affright

which elevated their charms, seeking protection with men whose visages it would

otherwise have disgraced them to behold.

‘In the morning very extensive fissures were observed in the fields, which had been

caused by the percussion of the night before, through which water rose with great vio-

lence and continues to run to the present date, though the violence has gradually

abated. ‘This has been a great benefit to the neighbouring ryots, as they were thence

enabled to draw the water over their parched fields.

**The principal mosque of the place erected on an eminence by the famous Ghauzi

Khan as a token of his triumph over the infidelity of the Hindoos, has been shattered

ie piece and a considerable part of the dome was swallowed up during the opening of

the earth.

“* Several slighter shocks have since occurred, but I do not hear they have occasioned

anv farther damage.’’

1042* Memotr on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144.

menon, in many houses a very distinct motion was communicated to

the oil in the wall-shades ; the girandoles and lamps were seen to swing,

and even the mirrors (such as were fastened at the upper extremity

with a cord) were observed to vibrate towards the wall. In a room on

the central floor of one of the turrets of the lower Orphan School at

Howrah, (which is a very old and infirm building, ) the force of the un-

dulations was so considerable, that a couch on which a person happen-

ed to be reclining was moved on its castors at the first shock to the

distance of nearly a foot from its original position close to the wall,

and was again thrown back to its place by the returning succession.

To some persons the vibration appeared to be accompanied by a noise

which they describe as resembling the sound of muffled bells.

‘Reports from various stations in the lower parts of Bengal, as

far up as Moorshedabad, mention the occurrence of a similar pheno-

menon, nearly about the same hour. By a letter from Ramnagur, the

vibration is stated to have been felt there at half-past seven, and to

have continued for an unusually long time.”

No farther notice of Earthquakes in the Delta of the Ganges occurs

until the year 1829, when on the 18th September, at a little past 7

a. M., two shocks which are described as having been “ very strong,”

were experienced at Calcutta. I have found only a very brief notice

of these shocks, and beyond the fact, that the movement of the earth

during their continuance was vertical, or ‘“‘ up and down,” I find nothing

else of interest recorded.

Another long interval of quiescence occurs, and it is not until the

11th November 1842, that we have any other Earthquakes at Calcutta,

or in its vicinity. On that day at nearly half-past 9 Pp. m., an Earth-

quake was experienced throughout the Delta of the Ganges, which from

the published accounts would appear to have been the most severe felt

within the previous twenty-five years. All particulars connected with

this shock have been given in ample detail in the first part of this

memoir, and I need not therefore dwell long upon it here. It was a

shock evidently originating within the Gangetic Delta, not communi-

cated from any other tract: it was felt very feebly indeed at the north-

ern extremity of the Arracan region, and not at all, that I am aware

of, at any of our stations along that coast: its intensity diminished

perceptibly in its course from the vicinity of Calcutta, in all directions,

and even had we no other grounds for establishing the Delta of the

Ganges as an independent Earthquake tract, this shock alone would I

think be sufficient to warrant our doing so. The point where the dis-

turbing forces act is in the immediate vicinity of Calcutta, since it is

there that the intensity of the recorded shocks has always been greatest.

It is possible, however, that had we equally good intelligence from

other localities in the Delta, it would appear that the vicinity of

Calcutta was not the only centre of disturbance, and as observers and

observations are multiplied, a wider range may perhaps be given to the

forces in action.

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1043*

The occurrence of Earthquakes is at present the only indication

furnished of the existence of disturbing forces beneath the Delta, but if

we may form a judgment from the results of the Boring operations in

Fort William, such forces must at no distant period have acted with

an intensity much greater than we have had any evidence of since we

became acquainted with India. The section of the Delta furnished by

these operations exhibits a series of strata alternately composed of

coarse gravel and fine river sand, or lacustrine mud, accompanied by

two remarkable deposits of carbonaceous matter, one near the lower,

the other near the upper extremity of the section. The lowest stra-

tum, attained at a depth of 392 feet from the present surface of the

Delta, and continued to 480 feet, consists of coarse conglomerate com-

posed of large rolled fragments of primary rocks. To this stratum,

on grounds as plausible as the circumstances of the case will admit,

Dr. McClelland has assigned an age of nearly 3,300 years. Since that

epoch, therefore, all the subsequent changes of level in the Delta, so

clearly intimated by the nature of its constituent, strata must have

taken place, and as in the latest of these changes, a subsidence of the

surface of the land to an extent of 75 feet in depth is indicated, it may

reasonably be inferred, that a high intensity must have characterised

the disturbing forces to which a change of such amount was due.

Those who may wish to examine the points just alluded to in greater

detail, are referred to my Memoir on the Structure of the Delta of the

Ganges in No. 3 of Dr. McClelland’s Journal, where all necessary in-

formation will be found.

8.—Earthquakes of the Eastern Coast of the Bay of Bengal.

In tracing the geographical limits of the various volcanic regions

throughout the world, Mr. Lyell makes the great train of the Molaccus

to terminate abruptly with Barren Island in the Bay of Bengal, (lat.

12° N.)* But the entire eastern coast of the Bay of Bengal, as far to

the northward as Chittagong is essentially and prominently volcanic,

and along the Arracan coast especially are the indications of igneous

forces most distinct. To these I will subsequently refer more in detail,

but at present I must proceed to notice the Earthquakes which have

been experienced throughout this tract.

Our acquaintance with the Arracan tract is comparatively speaking,

so recent, that the evidence of the frequent occurrence of Earthquakes

throughout it, is chiefly traditional and physical, and it is not until

the middle of the eighteenth century that we have the actual date of

any such convulsion, strictly ascertained. On the 2nd of April 1762,

however, a great shock occurred, affecting the whole of the eastern

coast of the Bay of Bengal, and extending to some distance into the

interior. The most ample details of the nature and effects of this

shock were observed in the vicinity of Chittagong, and are recorded in

*In the map the sixth Edition of Mr. Lyell’s work, which Lieut. Smith has evi-

_ dently not seen, the volcanic band is very properly carried on to Chittagong.—Eps.

1044* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. | [ No. 144.

Vol. LII. of the Philosophical Transactions, from which the succeeding

extracts have been taken.

“ XXXIX.—An account of an Earthquake at Chittagong: tran-

slated from the Persian by Mr. Edward Gulston, and communicated

by him to the Rev. Mr. Hirst. Read, 17th November, 1763.

Reverend Sir,—The following was written by a Persian writer,

pursuant to an order from Harry Verelst, Ksq., Chief of the Honorable

Kast India Company’s province of Chattigaon, in the kingdom of Ben-

gal, and sent to Calcutta, for the information of Messrs. Vansittart,

Hastings and others, acquainted with that language. As it is of indis-

putable authority, I have taken the pains to copy and translate it for

your satisfaction, being, &c. &c.

Calcutta, November 1, 1762.” Epwarpb GULSTON.

Account of an Earthquake which happened in the region of Islama-

bad on the 22d of the month Chyte, 1168, Bengal era, (answering

to the 2d of April 1762,) on Friday about 5 o’clock in the afternoon,

which according to the best advices I have written and now send you.

Particulars are as follow :-—

“‘ The land of Mahommed Assad, Chowdry of the Pergunnah Deeang,

at a place called Barreeah, is laid open by the shock from 10 to 12

cubits in width, and become as it were, a deep creek: the water rising

up so, that the ground of the farmers inhabiting the place is 8 cubits

overflowed.

‘And at Deep in the Chowdraj of Mahommed Athyar, the like hath

come to pass.

‘* And Moktaram Fowtahdar, dwelling at Goyparah, has written that

to the North and East, his house was cracked, and water there spouted

up like a fountain, and the ground also sinks every day by little and

little.

“And by letter from Satos Mester, Darogah of the Salt-works at

Bansbareeah, it so fell out that to the westward, Akl’poorah, an island

of the salt-works was levelled with the water on its East side, and on

the North and South the ground opened from 5 to 7 cubits in width,

and sunk like a pit to the depth of 10 cubits, the water spouting up;

nor is there the least appearance of its subsiding: we know not what

will come of it.

And from the reports of the people there we hear, that these places

were never before overflowed by the water, we cannot at present tell

what misfortune has happened. However, all the Government’s salt

was before this laid up in store-houses. Moreover a mud building of

your servants’ (the writer of this account, ) was almost destroyed by the

shock ; but it still stands upright.

And at Haldah, about 12 doon of land belonging to Sacheeram

Cannoongoey, is entirely sunk into the water.

In like manner in Takaleah, about 5 doon of ground, the property of

Barjallaal Chowdry, has fallen something below its primitive level.

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1045*

And at ditto Hazary, Harry Singh’s house and a brick building

of Shere Zaman Khan’s came down, and the Khan was hurt by the fall

of his: and there opened a cavity like a ditch of 200 cubits in length,

which filled with water.

At Howla, the house of Shiam Ram, tax-gatherer, broke down, and

his whole enclosure was torn up, and in most places his house and fish-

ponds were filled with sand banks: even now the whole spot is two

cubits under water.

And, at Dahrampoor, the house of Santeeram, the Cannoongoey’s

writer, entirely fell down.

The KatwaAll of Islamabad (Chittagong,) informed us with his own

mouth, that in a place called Baramcharah, the water was up to a

man’s waist, and the people there have betaken themselves to flight

through fear of perishing: no living creature but the cattle remaining.

And in the house of Santeeram Cannoongoey of Islamabad, a brick-

ed room was ruined, and one of his brethren, named Rajah Ram, was

killed by the fall of the bricks.

And the house of Nandaram coming down in the same manner, a

son of his was knocked on the head.

And to the westward of Kadr Katcheah, a large hill, called Kad-

daleah, very near Karn Phooly, was rent, and it stopped up the passage

for boats in and out of that river. And at Bajabeah, Sangetty and

ditto Hazary, creeks were closed up by banks of sand rising from their

bottom. And at Gandarah Jowar, about three doon of land belonging

to Mahommed Alli Chowdry, rent, and was swallowed up, and the

passage in and out his house also cleaving asunder, the water rose up,

and has flowed all round the house.

Moreover, the factory house, a strong building in the fort of Islama-

bad cracked from top to bottom and tumbled down, and an apartment

newly built was also rent.

And to the eastward, a large pond of Belah Khan, became a deep

gulf: and to the east also of Aghy Gunge, belonging to the city of

Islamabad, the ground in different places clave asunder, water rising

up as from so many springs.

And at Chehpayttlee, about 12 katy of land, belonging to Sajir

Chowdry, was overflowed, and rendered unfit for tillage.

And from letter of Chehtarnarayn, surveyor of the lands, we learn,

that the north side of the Chacklah Sowabeel, just by Haldah river,

broke down, and is swallowed up by the river, and also four people

were overwhelmed in its ruins.

And Mr. Griffith’s brick house (in Islamabad) has been cracked,

also the house and walls of Juan de Baris, a Portuguese here.

And from Nahal Charah there is news, that greater part of the

ground of that island clave asunder, and is swallowed up by the waters,

and hundreds of people perished with it. Besides this, the state of

that island will be known to you from a Bengal account.

From the Jooms, whose country is about four days off from Islama-

1046* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

bad, we learn that Reang hill split in two, and sunk 40 cubits: also

that Kachalang hill is even with the ground.

And Bahugoo Changu, a Joom hill, rent in twain, and is sunk 30

cubits, and the houses of most of the inhabitants in these parts thrown

down.

And a Joom hill, Chahter Patterah, split by little and little, till it is

almost level with the plain: and because of the opening of the hills and

the destruction of the trees on them, the way by which the Jooms used

to pass is stopped up.

And Bajaleeah, another Joom hill, opened 30 cubits, and sinking,

water rose up: and Palanga Joom hill split and sunk 25 cubits.

The design of this is to lay before you the wonderful disorders that

have come to pass in these regions, and which continue to happen, in so

much, that since the time of Adam until now, in this place no one has

heard of the like.

If I should describe them with a thousand instances and relations,

and make mention of so many particulars, still there would not be a

part in ten that I could bring within the compass of writing. But

these few particulars I send for your Excellency’s information.”

Farther details of this great catastrophe are contained in the follow-

ing communication from the Rev. Mr. Hirst, to the Rev. Thomas

Birch, Secretary to the Royal Society, read November 17, 1763.

Calcutta, November 3, 1762.

REVEREND Sir,—To the enclosed accounts of the transit of Venus,

I have subjoined others of an extraordinary Earthquake felt in this

part of the world, which I flatter myself will not be unacceptable to the

Royal Society.

The Earthquake happened the second day of April last, was very

violent in the kingdom of Bengal, Arracan and Pegu; but especially at

the metropolis of Arracan, where, according to the accounts of an Eng-

lish merchant residing there, the effects have been as fatal as at Lisbon,

and where it is thought the chief force of the Earthquake vented itself.

At Dacca, in this kingdom of Bengal, the consequences have been ter-

rible ; the rise of the waters in the river was very sudden, and so violent,

that some hundreds of large country boats were driven ashore or lost,

and great numbers of lives lost in them.

No less deplorable are the accounts from Chattigaon in this same

kingdom; three of these accounts I herewith enclose, one of them

wrote by Mr. Edward Gulston, a young gentleman in the service of

the East India Company, and two others translated from a Persian ori-

ginal, made out by order of Mr. Verlst, chief of our East India Com-

pany’s affairs in that province ; in consequence of which accounts, the

Company’s lands there have not been so highly assessed as before this

calamity. Both these accounts are translated from the same original ;

but that which I received from Governor Vansittart, being thought

exaggerated from interested motives, I begged Mr. Gulston to give me

a literal translation from the Persian, in which language he has made

ocd

1848. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1047*

an uncommon progress, as much fo his present honour, as I hope it will

be to his future advantage. This favour he obligingly granted me, and

I send it to you, Sir, not only to compare it with the other translation,

but to give you some distant idea of the idiom and great simplicity of

this Eastern language.

“The same Earthquake was also very alarming at Ghiratty, when

Colonel Coote, with his Majesty’s troops, was in cantonments, about 18

miles up the river from this place. The water in the river and tanks

there were violently agitated, and in many places rose to more than six

feet perpendicular height, of which I had occular demonstration myself

on my return from Chandernagore, a settlement lately belonging to the

French, about three miles North from Ghiratty, and in latitude 22° 54’

N. where it was felt, but not in a great degree: for I knew nothing of

it myself, till it was soon after told me by a certain French gentleman

there.

“‘ Nearly, at the same time, was this Earthquake felt at Calcutta, as I

am informed the agitation of the waters in the tanks rose upwards of

six feet, and was to the direction North and South. The height of the

thermometer on Fahrenheit’s scale was then at Calcutta 95° 30’, much

higher than it had been observed to be during the whole month, the

lowest descent of the mercury being 89 degrees. In this month, there

was much thunder and lightning, and there were fresh gales of wind at

S. E. ; the weather in general being close and sultry.

‘“« A subsequent Karthquake was felt at Calcutta on the 13th of July

following, at half-past two in the afternoon. The thermometer was

then at 87° 4' at a medium, the wind S. W., and the weather fair: to

this I was a witness myself, being then at dinner with Capt. Kiser of

H. M.’s 84th Regiment. The motion of the earth caused a very

sensible vibration of the wine in our glasses, and the shock was repeat-

ed twice at the interval of a few seconds.”

The great shock of the 2nd was followed by a succession of minor

shocks, which continued until the 19th April, and are detailed in the fol-

lowing Extract of a letter from Mr. Edward Gulston at Chittagong,

to Major John Carnac at Calcutta.

‘Dear Sir,—The reason principally of this address is to give you a

particular account of the shocks of a violent Earthquake whick were felt

here on the 2nd instant, at 5 in the afternoon, lasting the space of four

minutes. The factory, a brick building, is quite spoiled, so as not to be

safely habitable: for thereabouts, and in many other places, the earth

opened, and the waters rushed out prodigiously: and in the chaise-road,

especially towards the north quarter, there are great chasms, two feet wide

and upwards, so strange, that the morning after riding that way, my

horse started and went round another way, not willing to go over them.

** At the time of the first shock, great explosions were heard, like the

noise of cannons, of which Mr. Plaisted and others counted 15.

‘* All the tanks overflowed their banks, fish were cast up, and the river

rushed upon the shore like the surf of the sea. It was the most extra-

1048* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

ordinary event I was ever witness to. By the enclosed paper you will

discern how many alarms we had; however, nothing equal to the first,

in which the whole force of the Earthquake seems to have been exerted.

At present, the afternoon of the 4th April, all our heads seem to be

quiet and still, and consequently the earth at rest; but really yesterday,

from the repeated tremors of the ground, every one appeared giddy

and alarmed, fancying the earth to be in perpetual vibration, which,

however, an experiment of placing a glass of water on the floor proved

to be not the case. I would not that such a shock as the first should

happen at Calcutta for all 1 am worth, since of necessity the terraced

houses must fall to ruin, and I please myself with the thoughts, that we

have had the worst of it.— Chittagong, 4th April, |'762.

‘‘ Copy of the paper mentioned in the foregoing letter :—

Chittagong, April 2, 1762.

“April 2, at Sh. p.m. A severe shock of an Earthquake, lasted

four minutes.

dh. 12m. A second, lasted one minute. .

5 30 A third.

7 OA fourth.

10 0 A fifth.

¥ 3, l a.m. A sixth.

2 » A seventh.

3 » An eighth.

5 » A ninth.

10. 25 A tenth.

10 30 A eleventh.

“‘ Between 6 and 7 in the evening, I felt a twelfth shock : also others

upon Marriott’s hill, at a distance from Mount Pleasant, which every

one thought in continual motion.”

The following translation of another Persian paper, concludes the

series illustrative of the effects of the shock now under notice.

“The weather being very close and warm for some days preceding,

on the 2nd April, about 5 in the afternoon, we were alarmed by an

Earthquake; which beginning with a gentle motion, increased to so

violent a degree for about two minutes, that the trees, hills, and houses

shook so severely, that it was with difficulty many could keep their

feet ; and some of the black people were thrown on the ground, whose |

fears operated so powerfully, that they died on the spot: others again

were so greatly affected, that they have not recovered themselves

since.

‘‘On the plains, by the river and near the sea, it was chiefly felt with

great severity.

‘‘Our bungalows proved very convenient on so melancholy an occa-

sion, for had we been in brick houses, they must inevitably have been

shattered or levelled with the ground ; as there is not a brick wall or

house but is either greatly damaged or fallen.

1843.] | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1049*

‘“¢ Our new room in the fort, although as strong as bricks and chunam

could make it, is shivered from all sides from top to bottom; and the

old building; equally cracked, is in great part tumbled down.

“ The motions were so complicated, that we could not well determine

their direction: being sometimes from West to Kast, and again from

East to West: and the tanks in some places overflowed from North to

South.*

“In Pergunnah Deeang, Bursea Gong, the ground in several places

opened ten and twelve cubits wide: and in some parts so deep, that

they could not fathom its bottom, the water immediately overflowing

the whole town, which is sunk about seven cubits.

“ Deep Gong, a village near the other is also sunk, and now lies seven

cubits under water.

“From Patter Gattah to Howlah, a distance of 8 coss (12 miles, ) the

ground opened, and a great quantity of water was immediately thrown

out, and in several places the ground entirely sunk.

** At Bansburreah, Akulpoor, near the sea, the earth opened in seven

places, like wells, throwing up the water ten cubits high: the great

cutchery there with brick walls, is cracked and shivered to pieces.

‘‘ At Huldah Creek, near Sancheram Conguy’s house, twelve don of

ground is entirely sunk.

“In the Pergunnah ditto Hazary, Hurry Sing Hazary’s brick house

was entirely thrown down : the hall of Seer Jumma Khan’s brick house

also fell, and himself was greatly hurt by the bricks : near which the

ground opened 200 cubits, and immediately filled with water, which is

now unfathomable.

“In Howla Pergunnah, Sam Roy Gapildar’s house broke down, and

his compound was filled with water of two cubits deep for two days.

‘In Berrum Cherra, the ground overflowed about two cubits deep.

“Near Kutcha Ghaut, Kurrolea hill opened, and a great part of it

fell into the river.

*“‘ Bagally Creek and ditto Hazarry Creek are both filled up.

** At Gunderah Juwar, three don of ground is entirely sunk.

“‘ Ali Chowdry’s compound opened, and the water that immediately

flowed out, filled a deep ditch that surrounded his house.

“From Suwabill Purgunnah to Mooradabad, three Taluckdar’s

grounds are entirely sunk, and four people killed.

‘At Bar Chara, near the sea, five or six coss of ground immediately

sunk, and out of four or five hundred people, about two hundred were

lost, with all their cattle: and the greatest part of the remaining inha-

bitants, who ran into the woods, have not since been heard of.

“ Nulla Nunderam’s brick house was broken down, and his son who

was in it then, was so much bruised, that he died in three days after-

wards.

* The ground opened in several places in the town, throwing up water of a very

_sulphurous smell: and several tanks and ditches were filled up, which are now level

dry land.

1050* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

“‘ At Lalettee, Seleope Chukla, the ground in some places opened’and

threw up great quantities of salt water, and in others entirely sunk ; the

- channel of several creeks and little vallies between the hills were filled

up with great quantities of sand ; in some places, the water still conti-

nues twenty cubits deep, and in others unfathomable.

** Silluk creek and [slammuttee river are both stopped up; several

boats laden with goods then coming down, are not now able to get out

of them: the country around there opened greatly in some places, and

in others, entirely sunk: and a great many tanks filled with sand.

‘“‘ Bur Coller hill opened about forty cubits wide.

“‘ Sess Lung, Joom hill, one of the Mug mountains, is entirely sunk.

** Chungee hill opened between twenty and thirty cubits.

‘“‘ Padoorah Creek, at that time without water, opened and threw up

two hills of sand: and all the houses in these parts were broke down.

“ Joom Chatea Pedea hill is sunk so low, that its top is now on a

level with the plains.

‘‘ Rigerry hill, which was very large, opened thirty cubits wide.

*¢ Joom Palang hill opened twenty-five cubits.

‘¢ By the accounts already come in, there are 120 dons* of ground

lost in the different parts of the province; but these I am afraid will

not be one-eighth part of the whole damages, as we have farther rela-

tions coming in every hour.

‘‘ As we are informed that two volcanoes opened, I am in great:

hopes these will prove a sufficient vent to discharge all the remaining

sulphurous matter in the bowels of these countries, and put a stop to

any farther Earthquakes here, at least for many years to come.”

The hope, with which this paper closes, would seem to have been

realised, as no farther shocks of severity from 1762 to the present time,

are recorded, as having occurred in the province of Chittagong.

We have but very limited accounts of the effects of the Earthquake

of 1762 upon the Arracan coast in general; but its influence on the

Island of Chedooba, as described by Captain Halsted, (J. A. S. Vol. X.

p. 433, &c.) may be taken as a specimen of what occurred, in all pro-

bability throughout the entire archipelago of volcanic islands which

skirts that interesting coast. The whole of Captain Halsted’s remarks

are so intimately connected with my subject, that finding a difficulty

in making a selection, I have thought it preferable to quote them in full.

‘‘The geology of Chedooba,” Captain Halsted remarks, “ presents

characters of so much general interest, that any report on this island

might be looked on as imperfect in which the subject was wholly

omitted.

‘“‘ But as it is intended in a separate notice to give such details as may

render the subject capable of investigation by those able and interested

in the science, the present one will be confined to a mere statement of

the general features exhibited.

* One sye don of ground is 1,920 cubits long, and 1,600 cubits broad.

1843.] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1051*

“‘ The elevation out of the sea of large tracts of land by effect of vol-

canic action, has in more modern times been noted as occurring on the

coast of Chili in South America, and in the territory of Cutch in this

country. In the former case, some doubt has been thrown both on the

fact itself, as well as its amount: and the circumstance of a similar

phenomenon having taken place within the memory of man, not only

throughout the coasts of Chedooba, but extending over all the shoals

and islands from the Terribles, off the North end of Ramree, to Foul

Island, will be held a not unwelcome addition to the evidence yet

gleaned of the occurrence of such extensive changes of level to the

present day. The above are the limits of the survey on which the

‘¢ Childers” was employed, over every part of which the evidences of this

elevation were seen, and in many plaees accurately measured, and it

includes the whole of that irregular collection of islands and shoals,

which, projecting far into the Bay of Bengal, yet maintains the general

direction of the mainland coast near it.

** But these limits are not to be taken as those which bound the ele-

vation, which with little doubt, from the similarity of formation, will be

found to extend North, South, and East over all those parts of Arracan,

so peculiarly marked by the intersection of deep, narrow, salt-water

creeks from Akyab, even perhaps as far South as Cape Negrais.

‘‘ The line which was under observation was about 100 miles in length,

varying from 20 miles in breadth to that of a mere patch, according as

the opportunity for notice was afforded by the existence or islets above

water, and its general direction is from NW. by N. to SE. by 8S. The

elevation has been greatest towards the centre of the line examined. At

the Terribles, about 13 feet; on various parts of the N. W. reef of

Chedooba 22 feet; at the North point of the Island 16 feet; at the

centre of the Island, on the West coast, 13 feet; at the South end 12;

and at the Islands south of it, as far as Foul Island, from that to 9 feet.

‘“‘It would also seem to have been greater on the western limit of

Chedooba than on the eastern; a fact however not ascertained from

the extensive level plains which exist on this side, whereas on that,

measurements were easily made on the sides of the perpendicular

rocks. This elevation occurred about 90 years ago.* There is now

living a party, 106 years of age, who was then 15 years old, and had

been accustomed to fish over the now-upraised land. On the coasts of

Chedooba, its traces are in most parts as clear as could be wished,

bounding the natural jungle with a bank of greater or less height, com-

posed of sand or of shingle: the plain beyond being thickly strewed

with corals and shells, such as are now growing on the shores. The

natives are all perfectly aware of the bank having formerly been the

limit of their island, and even the youngest would point it out, if asked

to do so.

_ ™® This is no doubt the great Earthquake of 1762, which, as before mentioned, ex-

tended all along this coast.

1052* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. LNo. 144.

‘The old man, above-mentioned, was not at Chedooba, but at Ava

when the event happened: he had gone thither that year, and experi-

enced at that place the violent Earthquake which accompanied the

elevation. From other natives of great age I received the information

not direct, but traditionally, from their parents.

“The Earthquake was very violent, the sea washed to and fro several

times with great fury, and then retired from the ground, leaving an

immense quantity of fish: the feasting on which is a favourite story

throughout the island; no lives were lost, no rents in the earth occur-

red, nor fire from the volcanoes of the island.

“The above is not the only event of the sort traditionally known,

as another occurred a century previous to it, and these elevations are

considered periodical by the inhabitants, occurring every hundred years,

and the next is even expected within the course of a few years, and

would excite but little surprise.

‘“‘ Traces of a third beach line were several times thought to be found

before this information was given: but on the western coast, about

half way down, an evidence of its truth was afforded by a remarkable

column, or rock, about 40 feet high, standing on the beach, which

shewed the remains of a second line of rock. Oysters adhering to it

at an equal elevation of 13 feet above the first, as it was again above

the one which on all the rocks of the western coast distinctly points

out the limit of the present high water. On Flat Island were subse-

quently found these distinct beaches, and the corals found on the dif-

ferent extents of the island, clearly proclaimed, in their relative states

of decomposition, the difference of their periods of exposure.

‘<The external and more apparent means by which these great changes

are effected, are, so far as yet known, I believe quite peculiar, and ex-

hibit features which may be valuable in assisting investigation into

the immediate causes of volcanic violence.

‘“‘ Every one of the mud volcanoes of Chedooba was visited and ex-

amined, as well as those of the neighbouring islands south of it, and on

none, with strictest search could be found any traces of direct fire, or

of those peculiar formations produced by that agent. Gas alone

seems to be the one occasioning these strange exceptions to the gene-

ral character of volcanoes. It is no doubt inflammable gas, and the

light given by some of them has been so great, as to enable a book to

be read by it at a distance of nine miles, as was credibly related to me

as having occurred at the last eruption of the large volcano of Meu-

brung, the largest on the island. That heat is present in the more

recent ones, I found myself to be the case, in one examined on Ramree,

where the mud brought up on a bamboo from 17 feet in depth, shewed

a temperature of 92° 20' above that of the atmosphere. But a white

stone-like chalk, found on all the large volcanoes, which was considered

to be the common greenish sandstone discoloured by heat, was the only

substance found which exhibited a trace of intense heat, and in this

case the abstraction of colour above was effected without the least

ee eS

1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1053*

change of composition or form. The large volcanoes of Chedooba are

_ four in number: they are detached mounds rather than cones, varying

from 100 to 1,000 feet above the level of the sea, composed of a stiff

grey clay, with large quantities of singular fragments of stone; their

sides much cut up by the effects of rain; their summits quite bare, and

from 240 to 250 yards in diameter: on these are disposed cones of stiff

clay from a few inches to four feet in height, and the same variety of

dimensions in diameter. These are hard on the outside, but filled half

way up with a thick, well mixed mud, which every now and then

exudes from a hole at the side or summit, at the bursting of a bubble

of gas which takes place every three or four minutes. There are two

other voleanoes of small dimensions, and but little elevation above the

plains where they are found to exist; they are composed of the same

soil of mud emitting large bubbles of gas: and besides, there are two

spots where water alone is brought up by the gas. In all these the

water or mud is salt, and their number, with the four petroleum wells

which are in constant ebullition with gaseous exhalations, seem to ex-

hibit the agent as powerfully and extensively at work throughout the

island. The minor volcanic vents seldom exhibit any change: the

larger ones when in eruption, which generally takes place during the

rains, either throw forth to a considerable height accompanied by

flame, fluid mud which spreads over a certain extent on the surface

affected boils with the escapement of gas, being too consistent to flow,

or be thrown up. The angular fragments of stone mixed with the

mud are clearly torn from the strata, through which the vent is forced,

and small portions of copper ore (? more probably sulphuret of iron)

are found attached to them.

‘Besides the volcanoes seen, one was described as existing under

water on what is now a reef N. W. of Flat Island, and which a few

years since gave forth flame when in eruption. But independent of

such direct evidence, a new examination of many of the reefs would

convince us of the fact of the bed of the sea having been equally affect-

ed with the surface of the land.

‘“‘] was informed by a native, that the extensive new plain on the N.

W. part of the island, which was raised out of the sea about 90 years

ago, was only then acquiring its first covering of grass when he visited

it 15 years after its elevation.

“‘ The Island of Chedooba measures 154 miles in length; viz. from 18°

40’ to 18° 55’ 30” N. latitude and 17 miles in width; viz. from 93° 30’

to 93° 47’ E. longitude, and shews on the map as a square, the South-

west angle of which has been reduced with its dependency of Flat Is-

land on the South coast ; it covers an area of about 200 square miles.

Its general appearance is that of a fertile, well-wooded island of mo-

derate height and irregular outline. A band of level plain but little

raised above the sea, extends around its coasts, of far greater width on

the East than on the West. Within this lie irregular, low, undulating

hills, varying in height from 50 to 500 feet, enclosing several higher

7 v*

1054* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 144.

detached mounds of steep well-wooded sides, the loftiest of which, near

the South part of the island, rises nearly 1,400 feet.”

From the details given in this extract in combination with those

given before, it appears that the range of the great Earthquake of April

1762 was from about 16° to 23° North latitude, or from near Cape

Negrais to the northward of Calcutta, and from about 87° to 94° East

longitude. These limits are I need scarcely remark, by no means

certain, but the yare the nearest, which existing information admits of our

arriving at. The province of Arracan seems to have been the seat of

the greatest intensity of the shock, and the whole eastern coast of the

Bay exhibits indications of having experienced its violence. We are

fortunate in having such ample details from the province of Chittagong,

as they furnish several phenomena of interest which will be discussed

hereafter.

The other Earthquakes attributable to the tract now under notice are,

as I previously remarked, traditional, and the traditions of their occur-

rence are confirmed by physical evidence on the coast. But as to their

dates or phenomena, I have no information to give.

I may conclude the notice of the Arracan tract by a brief descrip-

tion of the volcanic features of portions of the coast not yet referred

to.

I before stated, that in tracing the geographical limits of volcanic

regions, Mr. Lyell did not carry that of the Moluccas beyond Barren

Island, in latitude 12° N. The only indication of activity furnished by

this island when described by Dr. Adam in 1832, consisted in the con-

stant evolution of thin light smoke, (Jour. As. Soc. Vol. I, p. 128,) and

ten years later when visited by Capt. Miller, the same effect continued

(McClelland’s Journal, No. 11, p. 423.) No records exist of any inter-

mediate convulsion, either in the form of eruption or earthquake, nor

am I aware of the island having exhibited any sympathy with the

shocks that have been experienced on the coast of the main land.

Proceeding northward, the Island of Narcaudam, Dr. McClelland in-

forms us, (J. A. S. vol. VII, p. 77,) is a voleanic cone raised to the

height of 700 or 800 feet. This cone is situated in 13° 22’ North lati-

tude: “‘its upper part is quite naked, presenting lines such as were

doubtlessly formed by lava currents descending from the crater to the

base, which last is covered with vegetation. No soundings are to be

found within half a mile from the shore.”

Chedooba, in latitude 18° 40’ 55” has already been described at

length. In old charts it is represented as a burning mountain, a cir-

cumstance traceable to the intense light which, according to Captain

Halsted, is occasionally emitted by the larger mud volcanoes, and

which seen from a distance, would make the island appear to be in ge-

neral eruption.

Ramree, in lat. 19° N. abounds in highly interesting volcanic pheno-

mena. Mud volcanoes similar to those in Chedooba are numerous,

and earthy cones of smaller dimensions covered merely with a green

1848. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1055*

sward, and emitting gas in bubbles, occur in great profusion along the

coast. It is an interesting circumstance recorded by Dr. McClelland,

that from the summit of one of the largest of these mud volcanoes,

called Nayadong, vapour and flame were seen by the inhabitants of

Kyook Phoo to issue to the height of several hundred feet above the

summit, during the principal shock of the Earthquake of the 26th

August 1833. ‘‘ The phenomenon,” Dr. McClelland remarks, ‘“ may

have been occasioned by the concussion of the Earthquake bursting

Open some new fissure, from which a transitory stream of inflammable

gas, such as supplies the celebrated burning fountain of Chittagong,

may have issued.”

The mud volcanoes here referred to are precisely similar in their

character to those previously described as occurring throughout the

coasts of Scinde and Mukran, and farther, to those which have been

found on the coasts of Chili and Calabria, two of the most remarkable

of modern Earthquake tracts.

Advancing still farther northward, we arrive at the Chittagong coast,

where evidences of extensive alterations of level due to volcanic action

are no less remarkable. An interesting proof of these is given in the

** Mohit,” or Ocean, a Turkish work on navigation in the Indian seas,

written in 1554, and translated by Von Purgstall, (Jour. As. Soc. Vol.

V. p. 466). In this work the author, Sidi, giving detailed instructions

for the voyage from Diu to Shattigam, or Bengal, warns navigators

with much earnestness against the dangers in their course among the

islands on the coast of Chittagong. To the sailing instructions of

Sidi, Mr. James Prinsep appends the following note: “‘ There are now no

islands seaward of the Chittagong coast to which the sailing directions

of Sidi will apply: but Lieut. Lloyd of the Indian Navy, who has sur-

veyed the line, informs us, that there is a long shoal, called ‘The

Patch,’ parallel with the coast, which is nearly dry at low water, and

may have formed the islands of Zengilia (referred to by Sidi,) three

centuries ago, for there have evidently been great changes in those parts

even within the memory of our own navigators.”

I am not aware whether the coast of Chittagong generally presents

those marked indications of active volcanic forces so strikingly deve-

loped throughout that of Arracan, but that such forces do exist beneath

it, is proved by the remarkable hot spring about twenty miles to the

northward of the town of Chittagong, the gaseous exhalations from

which are very considerable, and are frequently in a state of ignition.

I have been unable, however, to find any detailed account of the physi-

eal structure of this district, and its general character is accordingly

unknown to me.

During the year 1843, volcanic action on the Arracan coast was dis-

played in a rare and interesting manner, by the formation of a new

island, but as details of this phenomenon, more ample than any yet

published, are to be expected, I defer any remarks upon it to a future

Opportunity. During the same year, shocks of Earthquake were also

1056* Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144.

experienced, which will be duly recorded in the Register, the materials

for which are not yet arranged.

9. Earthquakes of the Tract of the Eastern Ghauts.

The notices of Earthquakes along the line of the Eastern Ghauts

which I have been able to procure are few and brief: indeed my in-

formation from Southern India generally is of a very limited character,

but as there are many intelligent and active cultivators of natural

science in that portion of the empire, I do not despair of yet having it

considerably extended.

The earliest, as also the most severe recorded shock was experienced

at Ongole, (lat. 15° 13’ N., long. 79° 56’ E.) in the year 1800. Iam

indebted to H. Piddington, Esq. for the following extract from the

Asiatic Annual Register for 1801, in which the effects of the Earth-

quake and its accompanying hurricane are detailed :—

‘‘ Extract from a letter dated Ongole, 29th October 1800. We have

experienced such exceeding heavy rain at Ongole for the last twenty-

four days, that the surface of the country exhibits an entire sheet of

water.

“‘On the 19th instant, about 10 minutes after 4 o'clock a. m., the wind

blew a hurricane, when suddenly we felt a severe shock of an Earth-

quake, which kept the earth in continued agitation for nearly a minute.

It shook down many houses, but I believe no person was killed in con-

sequence.

‘The Earthquake was introductory to a scene the most painful to my

feelings to describe: at about 8 o’clock last night, the wind began

to blow strongly with rain, and in about two hours the wind and rain

had increased so violently, that the doors and windows were blown open

and shivered to atoms.

“In this dreadful situation, it would have been advisable to have

quitted our houses for the open plain, but that was impossible, as no one

could stand for a moment against the impetuosity of the hurricane, nor

would an object be observed at a yard’s distance. We trusted in this

dilemma to Omnipotence for protection, and placing ourselves in the

strongest situations we could think of, we continually heard the trees

and walls falling around us.

“The incessant loud claps of thunder, the vivid lightning, the

strength of the wind, and the uncommonly heavy rain, were such as the

oldest inhabitant never before experienced. The wind blew from the

N. E., and continued till two o’clock this morning, when we had an in-

terval of calm till three o’clock, during which we were employed in

endeavouring to extricate our cattle from the ruins of the fallen build-

ings.

‘* At three o'clock, the storm recommenced from the S. E., and if pos-

sible with increased violence, and the houses being at this time-all

unroofed, we remained till day-break exposed to its utmost fury.

When day-light appeared, nothing but death and destruction met the

eye in every direction. The ground was covered with dead cattle,

a i i i ty

1843. | Memowr on Indian Earthquakes. 1053+

birds, and fallen houses and trees; even the largest banian trees have

not escaped: indeed there is scarcely a tree left in the district. It

is melancholy to observe the devastation in the villages, and the in-

habitants labouring to remove their families and cattle from the

ruins.”

In his note accompanying the above extract, Mr. Piddington informs

me, that Dr. Malcomson, in his Paper in the Geological Transactions

on the Basaltic districts of South India, (which 1 have unfortunately

for myself never seen,) mentions, that up to the present time, the tract

of country in which Ongole is situated is subject to slight shocks of

Earthquake, and internal noises are frequently heard.*

Captain Newbold makes a similar remark relative to the district

around Nellore, in which the copper mines are situated, in one of his

Papers on the Mineral Resources of Southern India, published in the

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society.

The only other notice of Earthquakes referrible to this tract, is

contained in Captain Henderson’s Chronological Tables, from which it

appears, that on the 15th of June 1837, a severe shock was experienced

at Ganjam. No details however are given. |

The preceding brief notices constitute the whole of the information

relevant to the subject of Earthquakes I have as yet been able to col-

lect from Southern India, and with them, the present summary closes.

I may now state in general terms, the results of the summary as

illustrative of the distribution of disturbing forces throughout India

and its frontier countries.

The great volcanic region which stretches from the Azores to Cen-

tral Asia, is not extended by Mr. Lyell, beyond the country bordering

the Oxus. From the details previously given, it however appears, that

with this region are connected the Earthquake tracts of the Himalayas.

We have seen that from the meridian of Herat to that of Assam

earthquake shocks, sometimes of great severity, have been experienced

along the central axis, and the lateral valleys of the Himalayan chain,

and there is every probability therefore, that one great tract of volcanic

action extends from the Azores to the eastern limit of these moun-

tains. We still require farther information to enable us to define

strictly the termination of the tract on the eastward. Since we know

The extract alluded to is as follows:—H. P.

* On emerging from the gorge in the Nella Malla range, the Pennar enters the

plains of the Carnatic, and near its mouth flows through low hills of laterite. This

deposit rests on the ordinary granite of the Carnatic, with its associated sienites,

hornblende, schist, quartz rock, and mica slate. It is in a rock composed of a mixture

of the last two minerals that the copper-mines of the Nellore district are situated. In

the same neighbourhood, the sandstone and argillaceous limestone are little elevated

above the sea, and are continuous with the same rocks on each side of the Kistnah.

They are broken through by insulated basaltic hills, in the neighbourhood of which

subterranean sounds and frequent local Earthquakes are reported to occur; an asser-

tion L am the more inclined to believe, having myself experienced two slight shocks

during a casual visit to the district.—Geol. Trans. Vol. V. N.

1054t Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144.

that Earthquakes of great violence have frequently devastated China,

it is not improbable, that we may yet find this region extending across

that country, and ultimately intersecting the train of the Philippines

and Moluccas.

Returning to the westward, it would appear that from the eastern

shores of the Caspian Sea, the line of volcanic force becomes divided,

one portion following the course through the Himalayas just noted,

while another diverging to the southward, passes through Persia, along

the shores of the Persian Gulf and those of the Arabian Sea, till

through Mukran, Scinde and Cutch, it becomes connected with the

tract of the Vindhyas, and is thus prolonged across the base of the

Indian Peninsula, until it abuts upon the Himalayan line, by means of

the mountains bordering Assam.

In this same vicinity, we find the northern limit of the great band of

the Moluccas which has been extended through Arracan and Chitta-

gong to the Kassya Mountains, where as formerly adverted to, indications

of violent action are remarkably developed. With this portion of the

Vindhyan and Molucca bands, are probably connected those forces

which have given origin to the Earthquakes of the Gangetic Delta.

And these latter may again form the link that joins the tract of the

Eastern Ghauts with that of Chittagong, Arracan, and the-Malayalan

peninsula.

The tract of the Solimaun Mountains connects those of the Hima-

layas and the Delta of the Indus, while that of the Aravulli would

seem to be an off-shoot from the Vindhyas.

Two main lines in which the volcanic forces are distributed through-

out India are therefore directly connected with that band which Mr.

Lyell has traced from the Western Islands to the shores of the Caspian,

while the third is similarly connected with the band that extends from

the Aleutian or Fox Islands, in Russian America, to Barren Island

in the Bay of Bengal. Nine distinct Earthquake tracts have been spe-

cified in this paper: of these two, namely, the central and lateral

Himalayan tracts, are the indices of one of the main lines above alluded

to ; the other two, those of the Delta of the Indus and the Vindhyas, con-

stitute the second, while the third is that of the Eastern Coast of the

Bay of Bengal. With the last mentioned, the tracts of the Delta of

the Ganges and of the Eastern Ghauts are considered to be connected,

and the two remaining tracts, those of the Solimaun and Aravulli

mountains, are merely subordinate lines.

Having thus endeavoured to exhibit briefly the results of this sum-

mary, I may now conclude by presenting a general Tabular View of

Indian Earthquakes, compiled from the materials here collected. A

very few shocks have not been referred to specific tracts, because the

information relative to them was indistinct, but this may - rectified

under more favourable circumstances.

1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 1055+

General Tabular View of Indian Earthquakes.

Date of Earth-

Remarks.

quake.

Focal Tracts.

Number of

ODOUR WN | Earthquakes,

_———

ae ee

1. Central Hima-

layan. ...

i i rs nse re re Nee EY RT

veceeceoee 1803,|/Verv severe.

eovessseee 1809, | Ditto.

26th May =_1817,|Ditto.

27th Ditto ....|Slight.

28th Ditto .... |Ditto.

to {Ditto ----|Ditto, felt in Kemaon.

47\25th Dec. 1831,)Ditto.

48} 2nd July 1832,/Ditto.

49|18th Aug. ..../Ditto.

00/23rd Sept. ....| Ditto.

51/30th May 1833,| Ditto.

52| 4th Jan. 1835, Ditto.

53/l4th Jan. 1835,/|Ditto.

54} Sth March 1842,|Smart.

55| 7th Sept. .... |Slight.

2. Lateral Hima-

layan. 4

A. Cabool. BG ae aiviicele 1505,| Very severe.

eseee 1829,/Severe.

eeseseee 1836,/Slight, several shocks experienced.

14th Dec. 1837,| Ditto.

19th Feb. 1842.|Very severe.

[22nd Feb. ....{Smart.

}423rd Ditto ....|Ditto, shocks incessantly night and day.

24th Ditto ....|Ditto.

96) 8rd March ....|Ditto. :

20th April ....|Ditto.

4th Jan. ---./Slight.

910th June’ .... |Smart.

‘29th Ditto aie Slight.

bisiiei aiei(eians - 1780,\Severe.

73) 6th June 1828,| Very severe.

74) .eeeeee- 1831-2,|Severe.

72) an sim anes 1230,

Maal eis cial 6 «16 1829,|Smart.

77/26th Aug. 1833,|Very severe.

B. Jellalabad.

C. Cashmere.

D. Nepaul. ....

fe From Aug. to

113 November.....

E. Assam. ..-.++| 114/14th Jan. —1839,|Slight.

115\3d June SAW Doe

BUG) aaron: ts Pl ce dine ACEO

EZ ee Ke oes | Ditto.

118 14th Jan. 1840,| Ditto.

119), siejo a IELO.

120) 3rd Feb, _—.....| Ditto.

121) 4th March ....|Smart.

122; 9th Feb. 1841,|Smart.

123|12th Oct. _....|Slight.

124) 4th Jan. 1842,\Smart.

125] 4th Feb. —....|Slight.

126/23rd Oct. ateiee itt.

127|29th Ditto ....' Ditto.

MUINIARMROMAAMAGE VU

MUO SOUSA EADHS OOK

1056+ Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 144.

General Tabular View of Indian Earthquakes.

Date of Earth-

Focal Tracts. Remarks.

Number o

Earthquakes.

quakes.

3. Solimaun

Mountains. ..| ]28)eccccvcscce 1831,|Severe.

4. Aravulli

Mountains. ..| 129j/loth June 1505,| Very severe.

130 July 1720, | Ditto.

131 /24th Oct. 1831,|Smart.

132' Jan. 1842,| Slight.

Laat isiccte see | seolel DittDs

134| 4th July —..../ Ditto.

135 25th July —_....| Ditto.

5. Delta of the

nds, «ssees

6. Vindhya

Mountains.

7. Delta of the

Ganges.

8. Eastern coast

of the Bay of

Bengal. ....

9.EasternGhauts.' 161 29th Oct.

136 26th Sept.

137 27th Ditto

138 6th Nov.

139 16th June

140 B.

14] 23rd May

142 24th Ditto

143, 11th Oct.

-144| April

145|18th Sept.

146 eoeoe e@eee

147/1lth Nov.

148/2nd April

149} .c06

holies S.cnuios

Toe al

154) 3rd April

155 eeee

feat ee

1G0lo ac.

| 162'15th June

In addition to the shocks registered, an immense number of minor shocks have oc-

ee .|Ditto.

cove Ditto.

«+ee|Ditto.

1819,| Very severe.

C. 56./?

1842,| Smart.

---- | Ditto.

1737,| Very severe.

1810,|Smart.

1829,| Ditto.

-ee-| Ditto.

1842, |Severe.

1762,| Very severe.

Smart.

Ditto.

--e-| Ditto.

---. Ditto.

- Ditto.

- Slight.

Ditto.

. | Ditto.

-| Ditto.

eeee| Ditto.

1800,| Smart.

1837,| Ditto.

cured throughout the several tracts.

1057

Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality, the Expectation of Life,

and the Values of Annuities in India and England. By Captain

J.C. Hannyneton, 24th N. I. lst Assistant G. G. A. Maun-

bhome.

The following Tables have been compiled from those prepared by

Major Henderson, Mr. Griffith Davies, and the late Mr. Robert

Christie. They exhibit nearly all that is known respecting the Law of

Mortality among European Military Officers in India. To facilitate

comparison the Northampton and Carlisle Tables are added.

Of the Indian Tables, Major Henderson’s is presumed to be the most

correct. It was deduced from actual returns for a period of 20 years ;

and was published with its data in the 17th Vol. of the Transactions of

the Asiatic Society. From the age of 75, Major Henderson has

adopted the Northampton Table, but has fixed 92 instead of 96 as the

limiting age, which prevents literal agreement between the Tables.

Mr. Davies’ Table was prepared for the Madras Military Fund, and

is founded partly on data furnished by Col. DeHavilland, and partly

on Mr. Christie’s Table. From the age of 74, Mr. Davies has adopted

the Northampton Table.

Mr. Christie’s Table was ‘‘ deduced from a record of 930 Officers,

whose dates of appointments, retirements, and deaths he extracted

from the books of the Honorable Company at the India House.”

From the age of 82, Mr. Christie has adopted the Carlisle Table.

The annual per centage of mortality for the Northampton and

Carlisle Tables ; the expectation of life for Christie’s Table ; and the

values of Annuities at 6 per cent. for all the Indian Tables, have

been computed by the writer of this Memorandum. Much care has

been taken to render them correct.

1058 Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality, §c. (No. 144.

Tasie 1.—Evhibiting the Law of Mortality in India and in England, ac-

cording to various Authorities.

ais Henderson for| Davies for | Price—Nor- ee Re- Milne—

“Ss” | Indian Army. |Madras Army.| thampton. "cat Carlisle.

16 oe 11300 0373 | Scitte 6261

iv api 11006 9320 Sate 6219

18 10000 10705 5262 Gilat 6176

19 9741 10394 5199 sale 6133

20 9489 10077 5132 | lalate 6090

21 9243 9761 5060 aot 6047

22 9004 9446. 4985 hove 6005

P23) 8771 9136 4910 ciel 9963

24 8501 8830 4835 ae 0921

25 8239 8529 4760 Sia 0879

26 7985 8234 4685 soe 9836

27 7739 7944 4610 fe ‘att 9793

28 7901 7660 4535 Ae 5748

29 7246 7381 4460 Hae 5698

30 7000 7108 4385 cai 9642

31 6762 6841 4310 adie 5589

32 6532 6581 4235 ASP 9928

33 6310 6328 4160 iaiete 0472

34 6080 6083 4085 wpidte 0417

35 5859 5847 4010 | Neiala 5362 :

36 5646 9619 3935 re 9307 |

37 5441 9399 3860 we 5251 :

38 5243 5187 3785 - 5194

39 5034 4983 3710 Saar 0136

40 4833 4787 3635 6655 9075

4] 4640 4598 3559 6557 9009

42 4455 4416 3482 6458 4940

43 4277 4241 3404 6396 4869

44 4093 4072 3326 6253 4798

45 3917 3909 3248 6146 4727

46 3748 3799 3170 6037 4657

47 3587 3602 3092 2925 4588

48 3432 3457 3014 5810 4521

49 3281 3317 2936 5691 4458

90 3136 3182 2857 5570 4397

a1 2998 3052 2776 9446 4338

5Y 2866 2926 2694 5318 4276

a3 2740 2804 2612 5188 4211

54 2628 2687 2530 0054 4143

5) 2520 2573 2448 4916 40735

56 2417 2464 2360 4776 4000

57 2318 2358 2284 4632 3924

58 2223 2256 2202 4486 3842

59 2120 2158 2120 4338 3749

60 2022 2063 2038 4187 3643

6] 1929 1971 1956 4034 3021

62 1840 1882 1874 3879 3395

63 1755 1796 1793 3722 3268

64 1639 1713 1712 3564 3143

65 1531 1632 1682 3405 3018

66 1430 1553 1552 3244 2894

67 1336 1476 1472 3082 2771

68 1248 1399 1392 2921 2648

69 1114 1321 1312 2759 2525

70 | 994 1241 1232 2593 2401

1843.] Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality, Sc. 1059

Taste 1.—vhibiting the Law of Mortality in India and in England, ac-

cording to various Authorities,—(Continued.)

Age Henderson for) Davies for Price—N or- Chere eG Milne —

Indian Army. |Madras Army.| thampton. | “te ORE Carlisle.

71 887 116] 1152 2424 2277

72 792 1079 1072 2253 2143

73 707 996 992 2081 1997

74 63l 913 912 1907 1841

79 263 832 832 1737 1675

76 499 ; 752 752 1571 1515

77 429 675 675 1410 1359

78 366 | 602 602 1255 1213

79 366 | 534 034 1109 1081

80 Z| 469 469 971 953

81 179 406 406 843 837

82 154 346 346 720 720

83 118 289 289 623 623

84 88 | 234 234 529 529

85 66 | 186 186 445 445

86 oh 145 145 367 367

97 36 111 111 296 296

88 20 83 83 232 232

89 16 62 62 181 181

90 r) 46 46 142 142

9] 4 34 34 105 105

92 1 24 24 75 75

93 ae 16 16 54 54

94 . | 9 9 40 40

95 - 4 4 30 30

96 . ] 1 23 23

97 A 18 18

98 | ‘: 14 14

99 zs eee . ] 1 ] l

100 Serer: , ecco 9 9

101 : ate 7) 7

102 sees a | r 9) o

103 see . 3 3

104 Siclers Sate l l

1060 Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality, §c. (No. 144.

Tasix I1.—Shewing the Annual rate per cent. of Mortality in India and

England.

; : Christie for Re- :

Henderson for) Davies for | Price—Nor- ° : Milne—

Age. | Indian Army. Madras Army.! thampton. a ier Carlisle.

16 aoe 2.60 0.99 i ates 0.67

17. ene 2.73 1.09 ees 0.69

18 2.52 2.90 1.20 pe 0.70

19 pari 3.05 1.29 a alate 0.70

20 2.79 3.14 1.40 slots 0.71

21 2.80 3.23 1.48 cee 0.69

22 2.90 3.28 1.50 siete 0.70

23 2.96 3.30 1.53 sae 0.70

24 3.02 3.41 1.55 Shee 0.71

25 3.09 3.46 1.58 aia 0.73

26 3.14 See 1.60 Bp 0.74

27 3.21 3.57 1.63 Bate 0.78

28 ee 3.64 1.65 Ae 0.87

29 3.31 3.70 1.68 Ss 0.98

30 3.35 3.76 1.71 Cie 1.01

31 3.40 3.80 1.74 sigan 1.02

32 3.44 3.84 1.77 a latote 1.01

33 3.49 3.87 1.80 a 1.01

34 3.53 3.88 1.84 es 1.02

35 3.58 3.90 1.87 pe Te 1.03

36 3.62 3.91 | 1.91 ae 1.04

37 3.67 3.93 1.94 Weta 1.09

38 Sete 3.93 1.98 pele 1.12

39 3.76 3.93 2.02 <icjais 1.19

40 3.81 3.95 2.09 1.47 1.30

4) 3.86 3.96 2.16 1.51 1.38

42 3.90 3.96 2.24 1.58 1,44

43 3.95 3.98 2.29 1.62 1.46

44 3.99 4.00 2.35 1.71 1.48

45 4.03 3.99 2.40 1.77 1.48

46 4.08 4.02 2.46 1.85 1,48

47 4.12 4.03 2.52 1,94 1.46

48 4.16 4.05 2.59 2.05 1.39

49 4.23 4.07 2.69 2.13 1.37

50 4.29 4.08 2.84 2.23 1,34

51 4.38 | 4.13 2.95 | 1.43

Ry 4.44 4.17 3.04 2.44 1.52

53 4.52 4.17 3.14 2.58 1.61

54 4.59 4.24 3.24 2.73 1.69

55 4.67 4,24 oa0 2.85 1.79

56 4.76 4.30 3.47 3.02 1.90

57 4.84 4,33 3.59 3.15 2.08

58 4.92 4,34 3.72 3,30 2.42

59 4,99 4.40 3.87 3.48 2.83

60 5.07 4.46 4.02 3.65 3°35

6| 5.15 4.51 4.19 3.84 3.58

62 5.43 4.57 4.32 4.05 3.74

63 = 4.62 4.52 4.25 3.82

64 §.09 4.73 4.67 4.46 3.98

65 6.49 4.84 4.90 4.73 4.11

66 6.95 4.96 3.15 L 4.99 4.25

67 7.46 5.22 5.43 | Rep 4.44

68 8.06 a. 5.74 5.59 4.65

69 8.77 6.06 6.10 6.02 492

70 9.61 6.45 | 6.49 6.52 5.16

1843.] Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality, &c. 1061

Tasxe I].—Shewing the Annual rate per cent. of Mortality in India and

Eingland.—(Continued.)

Age | Henderson for, Davies for Price—N or- Panes Rone Milne—

Indian Army. | Madras Army.| thampton. Cincre: Carlisle.

| UO ae Ls eS MS ed

71 10.2 7.06 6.94 7.05 9.88

72 10.8 7.69 7.46 7.63 6.81

73 PYs2 8.33 8.06 8.36 7.81

74 12.1 8.87 8.77 8.91 9.02

75 13.4 9.62 9.62 9.56 9.59

76 14.7 10.24 10.24 10.25 10.30

77 16.4 10.81 10.81 10.99 10.74

78 19.0 11.30 11.30 11.63 10.88

79 20.5 12.17 12.17 12.44 11.84

80 22.0 13.43 13.43 j 13.18 12.17

81 23.4 14.78 14.78 13.99 13.38

82 29.2 | 16.47 16.47 14,07 14.07

83 2.3 19.03 19.03 15.09 15.09

84 25.8 20.51 20.51 15.88 15.88

85 26.0 22.04 22.04 17.53 17.53

86 29.4 | 23.45 23.45 19.34 19.34

87 33.3 Dy 22 25,22 21.62 21.62

83 43.7 25.30 25.30 21.99 21.99

89 55.5 23.81 29.81 21.95 21.55

90 75.0 26.09 26.09 26.06 26.06

91 100.0 | 29.41 29.41 28.57 28.57

92 ses 33.33 33.33 28.00 28.00

93 was 43.75 | 4375) 2) 25.93 25.93

94 siae 55.56 59.06 25.00 25.00

95 Bs 75.00. ve 75,00 23.33 23.33

96 | ’ 100.00 100.00 Sa eee

Cas eee cats sen 22.22 22.22

98 oe Are dda 21.43 21.43

19 aes waite aa 18.18 18.18

100 apie ees BEG 22.22 22.22

101 pichase te 28.57 28.57

102 dane ara : 40.00 40.00

103 2 | }

1062 Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality. __[_No. 144.

Tasxe IITl.—Shewing the Expectation of Life in India and England.

re | Henderson for} “Davies for Price—N or- (Christie for Re -| Milne—

8° | Indian Army. | Madras Army. thampton. | Officers. Carlisle.

16 ies 94.72 35.85 : 44.27

7 shee 24.37 35.20 : 43.57

18 24.76 24.04 34.58 ak 42.87

19 24.40 23.75 33.99 Eu 42.17

20 24,04 93.48 35-490 64 ae 41.46

a 93.67 23.22 32 90 ce 40.75

29 23.28 22..98 32.39 ef 40.04

3 92.89 22.74 31.88 hee 39.31

a 22..60 22.52 31.36 3 38.59

5 22.30 93196 pal 30.85 sae 37.86

26 92.00 22.07 30.33 nae 37.14

27 21.68 21.86 29.82 ales 36.41

28 21.35 21.65 29.30 seals 35.69

99 21.08 21.45 98.79 both 35.00

30 20.81 21.26 28.27 duos 34.34

31 20.52 21.07 97.76 deat 33.68

32 20.23 20.88 97.24 3 33.03

3 19.92 20.69 26.72 aie 32.36

a | 19.66 20.51 26.20 Ae 31.68

35 19.38 20.32 25.68 f 31.00

36 19.09 20.12 95.16 ae: 30.32

27 18.79 19.92 94.64 ia . 29.64

38 18.48 19.71 24.12 woes 28.96

39 18.23 4 | 19.50 23.60 es 28.28

40 17.97 19.28 23.08 95.35 97.61

i 17.69 19.05 92.56 24.48 26.97

3 17.41 18.81 22.04 93.85 26.34

re 17.11 18.57 21.54 23:93 5 oi 25.71

: 16.86 18.32 21.03 22.60 25.09

ss 16.59 18.06 90.52 21.99 24.46

ie 16.32 17.79 2002 | 21.38 23.82

as 16.03 17.52 19.51 || 20.77 93.17

a 15.73 17.23 19.00 90.17 92.50

a 15:43 16.94 18.49 19.58 21.81

= 15.12 16.63 17.99 19.00 21.11

a 14.80 16.32 17.50 18.42 920.39

oa 14.45 16.00 17.02 17.85 19.68

ae 14:10 15.68 16.54 17.29 18.97

on 13.67 15.34 16.06 16.73 18.28

55 13.24 14.99 15.58 16.19 17.58

56 12.78 14.63 15.10 15.65 16.89

57 12.31 14.27 14.63 15.12 16.21

58 11.81 13.89 14.15 14.59 15.55

59 11.36 13.50 13.68 14.07 14.92

60 10.88 13.10 13.21 13.56 14.34

61 10.39 12.69 12.75 13.06 13.82

62 9.87 12.26 12.28 12.56 13.31

63 9.32 11.83 11.81 12.07 12.81

64 8.94 11.38 11.35 11.58 12.30

eat 8.55 10.92 10.88 11.10 11.79

66 8.11 10.45 10.42 10.63 11.27

67 7.64 9,96 9.96 10.16 10.75

68 7.15 9.48 9.50 9.69 10.23

69 6.95 9.02 9.05 9,23 9.70

70 6.73 8.56 8.60 8.79 9.18

1843.] Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality. 1063

Tasxe III1.—Shewing the Expectation of Life in India and England,—

(Continued. )

| aoe Pa

Henderson for, Davies for | Price—Nor- Christie for Re- Milne—

Age. | Indian Army. |Madras Army.| thampton. Byes gnee Carlisle.

71 6.47 8.12 8.17 8.37 8.65

7 6.20 7.72 7.74 7.97 8.16

73 5.88 7.31 7.33, 7.08 7.72

74 0.03 6.92 6.92 7.23 7.33

75 5.13 6.04 6.54 6.89 7.01

76 4.77 6.18 6.18 6.96 6.69

77 4.43 5.83 5.83 6.25 6.40

78 4.41 5.48 5.48 5.97 6.12

79 3.81 Del] 5.11 5.68 5.80

80 3.09 4.75 4.79 0.42, D.51

81 3.39 4.4] 4.4] 0.17 0.21

82 3.19 4.09 4.09 4.92 4,93

83 3.01 3.80 3.80 3.65 4.65

84 2.87 3.98 3.58 4.39 4.39

85 2.66 3 37 3.37 4.12 4.12

86 2.40 3.19 3.19 3.90 3.90

87 2.08 | 3.01 3.01 3.71 3.71

88 | 1.80 2,86 2.86 3.09 3.09

89 1.50 2.66 2.66 3.47 3.47

90 1.22 | 2.41 2.41 3.28 3.28

91 0) Oa 2.09 2.09 3.26 3.26

92 0.50 1.75 1.75 3.37 3.37

93 0.00 1.37 1.37 3.48 3.48

94 Seek 1.65 1.05 3.03 3-08

95 eps 0.79 0.79 3.03 3.03

96 ae 0.90 0.50 3.46 3.46

97 ees 0.00 0.00 3.28 3.28

98 mare ee sacs 3.07 3.07

99 os cee sees 2.77 2.77

100 cee eee o- 2:28 2.28

101 oe ee 1.79 1.79

102 ae coe seis 1.30 1.30

103 saints wee 0.83 0.83

104 | . 0,00 0.00

be |

1064 Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality. (No. 144.

Taste 1V.—Shewing the Value of an Annuity on a Single Life, according

to Indian and English Tables. Interest being 6 per cent. :

f ; Christie for Re- .

Henderson for Davies for | Price—Nor- 5 ‘ Milne— |

Age. Indian Army.| Madras Army.| thampton. tired Indian Carlisle. :

Officers:

16 ages 10.314 12.759 elatets 14.067

17 ates 10.225 12.655 Ree er 14.012

18 10.526 10.144 12.562 a ee 13.956

19 10.454 10.074 12.477 pine 13.897

20 10.376. 10.014 12.398 | ayeava 13.835

21 10.291 9.959 12.329 ae 13.769

22 10.198 9.908 12.265 balan 13.697

23 10.097 9.859 12.200 be 13.621

24 10.040 9.813 12.132 a antes 13.541

25 9.98] 9.769 12.063 Pera 13.456

26 9.916 9.726 11.992 | san 13.368

27 9.846 9.686 11.917 wince 13.275 |

28 9.770 9.647 11.841 jctee 13.182 |

29 9.720 9.613 11.763 ae: 13.096 .

30 9.666 9.581 11.682 ais at 13.020

3k 9.606 9.552 11.598 oie 12.942 :

32 9.541 9.528 11.512 12.860 :

33 9.470 9.503 11.423 ae 12.771

34 9.417 9.479 11.331 weve 12.675

39 9.359 9.453 11.236 acs 12.573

36 9.295 9.427 11.137 uk 12.465

37 9,224 9.400 11.035 awldhe 12.354

38 9.147 9.371 10.929 wiiet 12.239

39 9.098 9.340 10.819 Seine 12.120

40 9.045 9.306 10.705 11.369 12.002

4) 8.986 9.270 10.589 11.232 11.890

42 8.921 9.231 10.473 11.088 11.779

43 8.850 9.189 10.356 10.942 11.668

44 8.803 9.144 10.235 10.790 11.551

45 8.750 9,097 10.110 10.636 11.428

46 8.693 9.044 9.980 10.478 11.296

47 8.628 8.988 9.846 10.316 11.154

48 8.559 8.925 9.707 10.152 10.998

49 8.490 8.859 9.563 9.986 10.823

50 8.416 8.789 9.417 9.815 10.631

51 8.331 8.713 9.273 9.640 10.422

52 8.238 8.634 9.129 9.465 10.208

53 8.134 8.590 8.980 9.285 9.988

54 7.989 8.458 8.827 9.101 9.761

55 7.832 8.363 8.670 | 8.920 9.524

56 7.659 8.257 8.509 8.732 9.280

57 7.461 8.145 8.343 8.044 9.027

58 7.247 8.024 8.173 8.39] 8.772

09 7.055 7.892 7.999 8.154 8.529

60 6.841 7.J01 7.820 7.951 8.304

61 6.601 7.600 7.637 itor 8.108

62 6.335 7.436 7.449 7.546 7.913

63 6.040 7.260 7.203 7.336 7.714

64 5.806 7.069 7.052 7.121 7.502

65 5.645 6.865 6.841 6.900 7.281

66 - 5.407 6.647 6.625 6.778 7.049

67 5.134 6.413 6.405 6.450 6.803

- 68 4.826 6.172 6.179 6.214 6.546

69 4.731 5.929 9.949 5.974 6.277

70 4.620 5.689 5.716 5.738 5.998

1843.] Comparative Tables of the Law of Mortality. 1065

Tasie IV.—Shewing the Value of an Annuity on a Single Life, according

to Indian and English Tables. Interest being 6 per cent.—(Continued.)

Christie for Re-|

Henderson for} Davies for | Price—Nor- : Milne—

Age. Indian Army.|Madras Army. | thampton. ieengian Carlisle.

F 4.488 5.446 3.479 0.506 0-704

72 4.328 9.212 5.241 5.279 5-424

7a 4.139 4.985 5.004 0.059 5.170

74 3.916 4.764 4.769 4.851 4.944

75 3.652 4.542 4.542 4,645 4.760

76 3.403 4,326 4.326 4,445 4.579

79 3.163 4.109 4.109 4.250 4.410

78 2.929 3.884 3.884 4.061 4.238

79 2.714 3.641 3.641 3.959 4.040

80 2.550 3.394 3.394 3.792 3.898

81 2.402 3.156 3.156 3.630 3.696

82 2.258 3.926 3.926 3.474 3.474

83 2.123 2.713 2.713 3.286 3.286

84 2.018 2.001 2.551 3-102 | 3.102

85 1.851 2.402 2.402 2.909 2.909

86 1.642 2.266 2.266 2.739 2.739

87 1.369 2.138 2.138 2.599 2.599

88 1.090 2.031 2.031 2.515 2.515

89 0.806 1.882 1.882 2.417 2.417

90 0.518 1.689 1.689 2.266 2.266

91 0.236 1.422 1.422 2.248 2.248

92 0.000 1.136 1.136 2.337 2.337

93 eeee 0.806 0.806 2.440 2.440

94 655 0.518 0.518 2.492 2.492

95 2005 0.236 0.236 2.522 2.022

96 eee 0.000 0-000 2.486 2.486

97 Saito Se vee 2.368 2.368

98 - os Gates 2.227 2.227

99 ar ous Gries 2.004 2.004

101: eiale of seve 1.175 1.175

102 eee core eooe 0.744 0.744

103 ele °° eae 0.314 0.314

104 ! eee Sela Gos 0.000 0.000

1066

Experiments and Papers, principally by W. B. O’Suaucunsssy, Esq.

B. M. S. relating to the effects of Sea-water on Iron. Communi-

cated by the Government of Bengal.

No. 2556.

From the Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. Tor-

RENS, Esq. Secretary to the Asiatic Society, dated Fort William,

380th October, 1843.

Sir,—I am directed by the Deputy Governor of Bengal to forward

copy of a letter from the Superintendent of Marine, No. 591, dated the

23d ultimo, and its original enclosures, relative to the corrosive effects

of Salt-water on Iron, with His Honor’s permission for the publication

of the whole, or any part of the information therein contained on this

highly important subject. I have, &c.

(Signed) Ceci, Beapon,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

(Copy.) No. 591.

From Major A. Irvine, Superintendent of Marine, to the Howble W.

W. Birp, Deputy Governor of Bengal, dated Fort William, 23rd

September, 18438.

HonoraBuiE S1r,—On the receipt of Mr. Secretary Bushby’s letter,

Letterto Dr. O’Shaugh- No. 198, dated 10th March 1841, a correspon-

nessy, No. 1246, dated

13th April, 1841.

ey es Nee 599, dated copy of which, as per margin, I have now the

ugust. .

Do. from do. dated 31st “honor to forward, together with copy of a letter,

A 5

te ae do. dated 23rd No. 1156, dated 24th July, from the Superin-

November with Enclosures. tendent of the Indian Navy.

dence was entered into with Dr. O’Shaughnessy,

2nd. Copy of this very interesting report was forwarded to the Con-

troller of Government Steam Vessels, and I am now induced to send it

to your Honor, under the idea that it may not be considered inexpe-

dient to permit its publication in some of the periodical works of this

Presidency. I have, &c.

(Signed) A. IRVINE,

Superintendent of Marine.

(True Copy.)

(Signed) Crcit BEAbon,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

meee aa | Ci,

1843.] Effects of Sea-nater on Iron. 1067

No. 1246.

To Dr. W. B. O’SHavuGunessy.

S1r,-—In continuation of my letter, No. 1076, dated the 26th ultimo,

I am directed by the Marine Board to forward to you, for your infor-

mation, the accompanying copy of a letter, dated the 3rd instant, from

the Acting Assistant Master Attendant at Madras, relative to the cor-

rosive effects of Sea-water on Iron. I have, &e.

Fort William, Marine Board (Signed’ C. B. Greenuaw,

Office, the 13th April, 1841. Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's Office,

the 23rd Sept. 1848. (True Copy.)

| (Signed) C. B. GreEen.aw, Secretary.

No. 599.

To Dr. W. B. O’SHaucunessy, Chemical Examiner.

Sir,— With reference to my letters as per margin, I am directed

No. Ze dated gist Jan. 1841. by the Marine Board to request you will be

> @ C ”

, 874 ;. th March ,, good enough to report whether you have

», 1076 ,, 26th

1246 |, 13th April ,, made any experiments with a view to as-

certain the effects of Sea-water on Iron; and if so, the Board will feel

obliged by your favoring them with the result of such experiments.

Fort William, Marine Board I have, &c.

Office, the 28th August, 1841. (Signed) C. B. GrEENLAW,

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's Office, Secretary.

the 23rd Sept. 1843. (True Copy.)

(Signed) C. B. GreEnuaw, Secretary.

C. B. GrEENLAW, Esq. Secretary to the Marine Board.

Sir,—In reply to your letter, No. 599, I beg leave to state, that

I have completed a very extensive series of experiments on the effects

of Sea-water on Iron. The results I trust will be found of some

interest and usefulness. The voluminous notes of the experiments re-

quired to be reduced to order and copied, I fear much I can scarcely

undertake to lay my report before the Board before the end of next

1068 Experiments and Papers, [No. 144.

month, but if it be deemed emergently requisite, I will endeavour,

at any inconvenience, to comply with the Board’s wishes.

Calcutta, 3\st August, 1841. I have, &c.

(Signed) W. B. O’SHaucunessy,

Chemical Examiner.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's Office,

the 23d Sept. 1843. (True Copy.)

(Signed) C. B. Greenuaw, Secretary.

C. B. GreeniAw, Esq. Secretary to the Marine Board.

Srr,—In continuation of a previous letter, I have the honor to re-

sume the subject of the corrosion of Sea-going Iron Vessels, and the

best means of its prevention. |

2d. There exists no material difference in the constitution of the

several waters you forwarded to me for analysis, or which I received

from time to time from other sources, beyond a variable degree of dilu-

tion with fresh water from the influence of the tides.

3d. The object of my experiments, was to ascertain the comparative

rate of corrosion effected by the waters of Saugor, the Bay of Bengal,

and Kyook Phoo, the nature of the corrosion, and the best means of its

prevention.

Rate of Corrosion.

4th. For the first object, pieces of sheet iron of six inches long, three —

broad, and accurately weighed, were immersed in the water in glass

vessels, slightly covered to check evaporation, any loss from this cause

being made up by rain water from time to time. The result of very

numerous experiments conducted on this plan, is, that the rate of corro-

sion is exactly the same in all the waters under experiment, in a period

of six months, being as nearly as possible 5 grains loss from each super-

ficial foot daily.

Sth. The influence of size of the plates was examined as far as op-

portunities permitted, by arranging sets of iron sheets, all in metallic

contact, in the manner shewn in the accompanying diagram.* From

* The sheets of iron being merely arranged vertically, it has not been thought

necessary to add the diagram.

1843. ] on the effects of Sea-water on Tron. 1069

experiments conducted in this way, the corrosion was found to in-

crease, in an arithmetical proportion to the increase of the surface

exposed. These experiments were carried as far as the exposure of

100 superficial feet.

6th. The influence of density was also studied, both on the waters

sent by the Marine Board, and artificial saline solutions. The general

result is, that so long as the temperature continues the same, no differ-

ence of corrosion occurs within the limits of the natural variations in

the density of the sea-water under eaperiment.

The nature of the Corrosion.

7th. This is simple oxidation, the red oxide of iron being deposited

in loose flakes on the exposed surface. The presence of air in the

water accelerates the commencement of the action, but is not essential

to its continuance. I have found that corrosion will not occur in boil-

ed distilled water, hermetically sealed up. It takes place more slowly

in salt-water, previously boiled, and then hermetically sealed up ; and it

occurs in the ordinary manner in common salt-water, not boiled, but

secluded from access of air.

Obviation of Corrosion.

8th. The experiments made on this head may be classified as fol-

lows :—

a. Protection by Galvanic action.

6. Protection by Cements.

ce. Protection by Varnishes.

Oth. a. The experiments on this head were very numerous, and

may be thus described.

Pieces or arrangements of sheet iron, ranging from eight superficial

inches to 100 superficial feet, were tried for equal periods with zinc

protectors, ranging from an equal size to one-hundreth the size of the

sheet iron. The results I obtained are as follow :—

10th. For the protection of the iron the zinc must undergo corrosion,

and when this ceases from any cause, the iron is attacked as usual. The

corrosion or loss of 60 grains of zinc daily protects 100 superficial feet

of iron, less than this will not suffice. On the other hand, increasing

the surface of the zine protectors increases the amount of corrosion of

1070 Experiments and Papers, [No. 144.

the zine, without giving greater protection. The practical inference is,

that the protectors should be massive, but of small surface, and placed

where they can be conveniently renewed ; further, that it is an error to

suppose, that merely zincing the heads of nails or rivets would suffice ;

such a method would be worse than useless, for the quantity of zinc

thus used, would be insufficient to sustain the protection, and the corro-

sion which follows always commences at the points of contact with the

late protector, thus endangering a vessel in its most important parts.

The zinc undergoes oxydation. H moving through sea water the oxyde

is washed off and dissolved ;—if quiescent, the oxyde is deposited in a

spongy white coating on the iron. Besides oxydation the zinc also suffers

considerable loss by its structure becoming granular and brittle, and

readily disintegrated by friction.

llth. I have tried many other metals beside zinc, and found only

one superior to it in protecting power. This is capmium, which

presents advantages of extraordinary value, were these not counter-

balanced by the scarcity and dearness of the metal. While cadmium

protects the iron with equal energy, its own corrosion is little more

than one-third that of the zinc, and instead of becoming granular and

incoherent like the zinc, its surface is always bright and solid. The

present price of cadmium of course forbids its employment; but the

high price I believe is attributable to there having been hitherto no use

discovered for the article, which exists to the amount of 3 per 100 in

many of the zinc ores of Great Britain. Were cadmium cheaply obtain-

able, it would at once be resorted to as an iron protector ; its influence

on copper I have not yet studied.

Protection of Tin Plate.

12th. I have extended this enquiry to the protection of tin plate, and

with rather interesting results. Tin plate is perfectly protected by pro-

portionally much smaller quantities of zznc than are required for iron.

The surface of the tin fouls very slowly, the fouling is caused by the

diffusion over it of the oxide of zinc. This is readily removed by

washing it, by a brush or coir scrubber, with a weak alkaline liquid

(a solution of one tb of saji-mati in 4 pounds of water is sufficient).

This fact I represent as one of considerable value, and calculated to lead

to much economy in the construction of buoys for Salt-water harbours,

‘

1843.] | on the effects of Sea-water on Tron. 1071

and for the sheathing of boats and other small crafts, which can be

hauled up from time to time. I beg to observe, that these remarks do

not apply to fresh water buoys or boats. In fresh water, the tinned iron

suffers corrosion, notwithstanding the presence of the zinc.

Cements and Varnishes.

13th. The plates forwarded to me by your Board from Captain

Kinsman were immersed in Sea-water. In a week all began to soften,

and in 14 days corrosion of the iron was taking place through the pores

in the substance of the cement. I consider this method quite inappli-

cable from these and many other reasons.

14th. Caoutchouc.—This I applied in various forms.’ I find to my

surprise that by three weeks’ immersion, it softens so as to be detached

by the slightest friction.

15th. Asphaltum.—This invaluable substance completely protects

the iron if rubbed on while hot: it resists even strong nitric acid for

months. But the application requiring the heating of the iron, opposes

a great practical difficulty to its use. I find by mixing a small

quantity (about one-eighth its weight) of fine sifted road dust with

the asphaltum while melted, that it will adhere to the cold iron. It

should be laid on by a wire brush, as no hair, or coir, or yarn brush will

stand the heat. Practical men in the dock-yards can soon turn this fact

to account.

16th. Coal Tar answers well as a retarder rather than a preven-

ter of corrosion, provided all the volatile oil of the tar is entirely ex-

pelled by heat or exposure to the air, before the immersion of the iron.

If this be neglected, the varnish soon washes away.

17th. Coal Tar boiled with one-eighth asphaltum gives an excel-

lent protecting varnish, and one which can be applied to cold iron, and

which dries much more perfectly than the coal-tar alone.

18th. Along with those above-mentioned, I have tried many others,

such as the Gab juice, white and red lead paint, &c. but none approach-

ed in efficacy the articles above cited. Asphaltum is procurable cheaply

from the Persian Gulf, whence it is occasionally imported into Cal-

cutta under the name of Zift-c-Roomie. Purchasers not knowing its

exact qualities, will have boiled pitch palmed on them instead, by the

bazar venders. A simple test is exposure to the sun for from five to

“5

1072 Experiments and Papers, [ No. 144.

ten minutes, according to the season; while this scarcely affects the

asphaltum, it softens the pitch into a ductile mass.

Fouling by Marine Animals and Plants.

19th. This serious evil, so familiar to navigators, and so importantly

exemplified in many of the papers submitted with this report, (see the

statements regarding the Phlegethon, the Sylph, &c.) has of course en-

gaged my attention, but as yet has led to no important results. Seve-

ral proposals have been made to prevent this by the use of poisonous

paints of different kinds. I do not anticipate much benefit from the

proposal. If the paints are soluble in water, they must wash off. If

insoluble, they are not likely to exercise any poisonous power. The

simplest way to test this would be, by immersing a log of nux-vomica

wood in Kyouk Phoo harbour, or any other place infested with the

Balani or Teredo.

Singular inactivity of the water of the Baleaghaut Salt-works on tin

| plates.

20th. While carrying on the experiments on tin plate, my stock of

Sea-water having been exhausted, I procured a quantity of brine in va-

rious stages of concentration from the Salt-works at Baleaghaut.

Tin plate immersed without protectors in this water, underwent no

change in four months, and the corrosion of iron was much retarded,

though not entirely prevented. The water was rich in organic matter,

and gradually became mouldy, as the experiments proceeded. This

singular fact opens a most interesting field for investigation, which

I regret much I have no longer the opportunity to pursue.

}

Mr. Mallet’s Experiments.

21st. When my experiments were nearly completed, a report on

those carried on for five years, and on amuch larger scale, by Mr. Mal-

let in Dublin, reached this country, in the last volume of the ‘ Proceed-

ings of the British Association.” Mr. Mallet’s copious tables of results

correspond so exactly with mine, that it becomes superfluous for me to

encumber your Board with details. I send the volume containing the

report, and which deserves the close attention of the Marine Board,

and of all Engineers connected with sub-marine-works in iron.

1843.) on the effects of Sea-water on Iron. 1073

22d. I forward also several papers which have reached me on this

subject, and in which many facts and observations of much interest will

be found.

23d. Lastly, I have to express my regret that in consequence of the

state of my health compelling me to return to Europe immediately,

I have not the leisure to present a more complete Report on this very

interesting subject.* I have, &c.

(Signed) W. B. O’SHaucunessy, HM. D.

Calcutta, the 23d November, 1841. Chemical Examiner.

Memorandum of Papers appended.

1. Capt. Kinsman on a poisonous Cement.

2. ,, Henderson, communicating various facts.

3. ,, Williams of the “ Sylph,” ditto ditto.

4, 5, 6. Capt. Cleaveland’s Abstracts of the voyage of the Iron

Steamer ‘“ Phlegethon.”

7. Mr. Johnson’s observations on the corrosion of iron in the

Phlegethon, communicated by Mr. Maddock.

(True Copy.)

(Signed) C. B. Greentaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's

Office, the 23d Sept. 1843.

To E. A. BLUNDELL, Esa. Commissioner in the Tenasserim Provinces.

Siz,—Having been requested by you to give my opinion regarding

the corrosive effects water may have on iron in these seas, I beg to

state that 1 am of opinion, water in these seas is as destructive to iron

as in any part of the world,

* The proofs of this report have been submitted to Dr. O’Shaughnessy for revision

and correction.—Eps.

1074 Experiments and Papers, LNo. 144.

I have the honor to inform you of one particular instance which

came under my notice about three years ago. When at anchor in the

“¢ Swinton,”

a little below your wharf, a large Burman boat hooked a

chain, the original size of which must have been upwards of an inch in

diameter, and was lost with the Brig ‘“ Macaulay” about ten years

previous; it was completely eaten away with rust, and broke with its

own weight in two fathoms of water; it must be taken into consideration

that this chain was lying in fresh water more than half the time above-

mentioned.

As the tenor of your letter leads me to suppose that an object would

be gained by preventing corrosion on the bottom of iron steamers only,

I beg to forward three experiments of mine on sheet iron, the ingre-

dients are the same in each, but differ in quantity.

No. 1 has two measures of dammer and one of chunam, with one-

sixteenth measure or less of arto/, (or crude arsenic,) each pounded

separately and sifted through a fine sieve, to which is added a sufficient

quantity of wood-oil, and then well pounded together until it becomes

in substance a stiff paste.

Directions for using the above.

Heat the bottom of the vessel as on common occasions, and lay it on

with the hand, warm towels should immediately follow, which will make

it as smooth as may be required, and the vessel may be floated as soon

as finished ; each coat I feel certain will remain good under water

longer than any other composition yet known.

The qualities of inferior composition have often been proved under

water on wood, with the exception of artol, but barnacles will adhere

to it, which the artol will prevent.

On receiving your letter, I was doubtful whether the composition

would adhere to iron, which doubt I trust has now been removed by

the experiments now forwarded.

No. 2 has one measure of dammer and one of chunam, with the same

proportion of artol. No.8 has three measures of chunam, and one

measure of dammer mixed and prepared as the above.

Moulmein, 1st De- I have, &e.

cember, 1840. (Signed) Tuos. Kinsman,

_ Commander H. C. Schr. “ Swinton.”

1843.] on the effects of Sea-water on Iron. 1075

P.S.—While using the above composition, the pounding of it should

not cease, otherwise the substance will become hard.

(True Copy.)

(Signed ) C. BE. Greenutaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's

Office, the 23d Sept. 1843.

To Dr. O’'Suavaunessy, Medical College.

20th May.

My pear Sir,—I have been engaged for sometime at home in ob-

taining information as to the best means of preventing corrosion of Iron

Sea-going Vessels, and had contracted to build an iron opium clipper,

but waited to see the effect of the barnacle and limpet on the iron

sides in three voyages from Liverpool to the Brazils. On docking her

on her first return, you could not put the palm of the hand on her

bottom clear of a limpet. On the second return, I could not find room

for the ball of my thumb, so completely covered was it. The first

voyage she was painted with red lead and linseed oil, the second some

white lead was added, and the third voyage she was offered for sale in

consequence of the inability to keep the bottom from getting so very

foul, as to reduce her sailing qualities far below a common merchant

ship, though she was a fast vessel.

The Leviathan Steamer, 2700 tons, building at Bristol, I visited,

and saw experiments being made with 8 or 10 different compositions.

The builder told me they had tried near 40, and I dare say by this time

something will have been discovered.

I am a member of the institution of Civil Engineers, and will write

to the Secretary next mail, to ascertain what has been done or discover-

ed, and inform you of the result.

As to the copper, it had a bar of iron along the keel, and up and

down stern and stern-posts. We had it on our voyage to China. The

iron was destroyed in two years, I think, and I never renewed it. The

copper lasted eleven years; with exception of her voyage to China and

to Suez, she was running in the Hooghly. The patent yellow metal, or

Muntz’s patent, much used now for shipping, being about 20 per cent.

1076 Experiments and Papers, [No. 144.

cheaper, (first cost,) is not superior to copper in any way. The zinc is

not used now; I suppose from its so soon corroding, and in fact be-

coming rotten.

I shall be glad to afford you any information in my power, and am,

Yours, &c.

(Signed) Anprew HENDERSON.

Dr. O’SHaucunrssy, Medical College.

(True Copy. )

(Signed) C. B. Greenitaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superinten-

dent's Office, the 23d Sept. 1843.

To M. Rusromser, Esa.

Dear Sir,—When the “ Sylph” was docked after her return

from the coast of China last December, we found her copper covered

with large barnacles in clusters, although after she came in fresh

water a great many had dropped off, but left the mark where they

had been. The copper was likewise all in small holes, and rusted

at the edges, the same as a piece of iron, a great quantity of which

I think was mixed with the copper, which caused the barnacles and

sea-weed to adhere, amongst which, when on the coast, were a large

quantity of long worms resembling centipedes, but much smaller.

. T remain, &c.

May 18, 1841. . (Signed) T. Wiurams.

(True Copy.)

(Signed) C. B. Greenuaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's

Office, the 23rd Sept. 1843.

Hi. C. S. Vessel *‘ Phiegethon,”’ Calcutia, May 27, 184}.

Sir,—In reply to your letter of the 24th May, I beg to assure you

I shall have great pleasure in affording all the information in my

power on the effects of the voyage on our Iron Vessel.

1843. ] on the effects of Sea-water on Iron. 1077

The “‘ Phiegethon” left England with a clean bottom, having when

on the slip received three coats of red lead and three of black varnish,

which with an additional coating we partly succeeded in putting on at

the Mozambique, will I hope be found to have entirely preserved the

iron from corrosion, as at Mozambique I observed the coatings of red

lead remained perfect, when the blacking had been worn off.

The first barnacles appeared and rapidly increased after crossing

the Tropic, with another species, I think called the Teredo.

These were invariably scraped off on the arrival of the vessel in

port, as well as a narrow belt of soft green weed, of which the water

line was the margin, and the depth 8 to 9 inches, and of most rapid

growth.

These obstructions to the vessel’s sailing have, in from three to five

weeks, become very great, reducing her rate of sailing frequently one-

ninth, and occasionally upwards.

The barnacles are fast disappearing since our arrival in fresh water.

/ I have, &c.

(Signed) R. F. CLhEaVELAND.

W. B. O’Suavcanessy, MM: D.

(True Copy.)

(Signed) C. B. Greenutaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's 7

Office, the 23d Sept. 1843.

(Copy. )

To T. H. Mappock, Esa.

Dear Sr1r,—I beg to have the honor of laying before you, a few

remarks upon the nature of iron considered simply with relation to its

adaptation for the entire construction of the hulls of Sea-going Vessels.

The grand experiment of the practicability of this has been sufficiently

and satisfactorily tried, by the recent arrival from England of three

large Steamers built wholly of iron, but questions of great moment

respecting the integrity (for want of a better term) of this metal when

exposed to the chemical action of air or water, and also concerning the

evils that are occasioned by the facility with which several kinds of

_ mnarine animals appear to attach themselves to its surface, still occupy

the attention of many very able naturalists, with the view of determin-

1078 Experiments and Papers, [ No. 144.

ing the extent of the former, and of preventing as much as possible the

latter of these two great objections to the general employment of iron

as a material for the purpose of Naval Architecture.

My appointment as Surgeon to the Phlegethon, one of the Steam

Boats above alluded to, enabled me to make some observations upon

the subject, not perhaps of any great value, but such as they are, I

respectfully communicate them, with one or two suggestions resulting

therefrom, which have at least this recommendation of being ap-

proved by Captain Cleaveland himself, particularly interested in the

enquiry.

Knowing, however, that the Indian Government, with its usual energy

and desire for the public good, has already instituted an investigation

of the properties of iron, conducted by some of the most scientific men

in Calcutta, I enter the discussion with diffidence, especially, as perhaps

my views and recommendations upon the subject may differ very con-

siderably from theirs, the result of long-conducted, and of course very

accurate experiments. Scholastic leisure too, as it admits of an intimate

knowledge with the whole circle of the sciences, or in lieu of that, of

an immediate reference to the best authorities, is an advantage I have

not possessed ; but as an equivalent, and an apology also for intruding

my remarks, I offer a constant residence and continual experience for

above 18 months on board Iron Vessels, where opportunity was daily

afforded me of observing and recording those facts, I conceived to be

best suited for the determination of questions such as are now before

us.

In the first place I have been led to believe, that the corrosion or

oxydization of iron by sea-water is far from being an evil of that mag-

nitude which it has been assumed to be; and in fact, I consider it to be

the natural and only certain remedy to prevent the accumulation of

marine animals and their habitations upon the surface of the metal ex-

posed to the sea, resembling in this respect the very useful protective

influence of the sea-salts on copper sheathing upon wooden vessels

against a similar evil.

As regards the definition of oxydization, which the proper consi-

deration of our subject certainly requires, the progress of Chemistry as

a popular science, renders it unnecessary for one to enter more fully into

details, than merely observing, that by the operation of general law of

1843.] on the effects of Sea-water on Tron. 1079

nature, called the attraction of affinity, metals and all kinds of simple

matter are disposed to join and form compound bodies with other kinds

of matter in their immediate neighbourhood, and even when thus com-

bined, if placed under favoring circumstances, compound bodies will

frequently dissolve spontaneously intimate and very close relations, to

assume new and totally different combinations with other substances ;

the only explanations for which, in our present state of knowledge,

is, that in such cases, the elementary bases of the compound bodies are

said to have a greater affinity or pre-disposition to join with the latter,

than their former co-constituents, thus the carbonate of soda is disin-

tegrated, and the union dissolved between the carbonic acid and the

alkali soda, if it be placed in juxta-position with tartaric acid, for

which soda has a greater affinity than it has for the carbonic acid ; but

to proceed would be to write a chemical lecture, and I will therefore

terminate this otherwise endless digression, and return to my subject,

by observing, that it requires the presence of very particular circum-

stances to produce any metal in a purely native state. The general

rule is, that they are extracted from the earth in the condition of

pyrites or salts, that is, in combination with oxygen, or some one of the

various mineral acids, and from these salts, by the process of fusion,

the different metals are reduced to the pure or working state.

After all the labor, however, bestowed upon them, the general ten-

dency of metals is to return to their original condition of compound

salts, and more than all iron seems disposed to this chemical alteration

of structure, deriving readily from air, earth, and water, the necessary

co-constituent oxygen, whilst fire only increases the intensity of at-

tractive affinity, and thus accelerates the operation, so that all sur-

rounding nature seems opposed to its remaining long in that metallic

state which renders it at all useful or profitable ; and as iron is daily

becoming more and more employed for the purposes of mankind, it is

an object of considerable moment to lessen as much as possible the

vast expense, occasioned by the continually required replacement of

the corroded or oxydized metal.

This, it is found, can be easily accomplished by opposing one law of

nature to another, or in other words, antagonizing chemical affinity on

the one hand, by electro-galvanism on the other, the best demonstrable

proof of which operation is the well-known suspension of chemical

1080 Experiments and Papers, LNo. 144.

corrosion upon iron or copper when protected by contact with zinc ;

but here also I must be permitted to remark, that our best Chemists

are altogether in the dark as regards a knowledge of the nature of

these two powerful agents in the economy of the universe; we perceive

their effects, and theorise upon their probable mode of acting, but

nothing satisfactory or conclusive has yet been proved, except that we

see the exercise of their opposite actions in the result of the protected

metals before-mentioned, and are convinced, that analogy alone must

direct us at present, in any attempts to extend our knowledge of the

application of the anti-corrosive property ‘of electro-galvanism, to use-

fal and beneficial purposes.

But will the application of this principle or property of electro-

galvanism be useful in the construction of iron ships; that is to say,

will the protection from oxydization thus afforded to the hulls, be

equivalent as a benefit obtained, to an evil which will certainly be

consequent upon non-oxydization, namely, the accumulation of marine

animals and their testaceous habitations upon the bottom of the

vessel, and the same question may be also asked in cases where the

iron is mechanically protected by thick layers of carbonaceous matter ? I

certainly think not; for independent of the retardation on the speed

occasioned by the extensive surface, and sinuous character of the

foreign bodies adhering, the necessity of every three or four months

placing the vessel upon shore for the purpose of removing them from

her bottom, must materially injure and strain her hull, besides the

chances on such occasions in unknown parts, of her bed being of a

rocky character, which would hazard at once her total loss, by the ex-

tensive injury she must sustain with her whole weight supported only

upon points of rocks.

Let us, on the contrary, suppose, that an iron vessel starts for sea

completely unprotected, the naked metallic surface of the iron fully ex-

posed to the action of the water, we could anticipate no other conse-

quence would result after a voyage of a few months, than perhaps a

slight oxydization along the line of immersion, (owing to the combined

action in that situation of air and water,) whilst the remainder of her

bottom would be found to be clean, neither acted upon chemically by

oxydization, nor affording the least harbour for those masses of barna-

cles, pedunculate or sessile, which, in the other case, experience has

1843. on the effects of Sea-water on Iron. 1081

proved would be the result. In fact such a vessel’s bottom might be

expected to present an appearance similar to that which an iron cable

would do after a ship has continued at anchor some months, shewing

evidences of corrosion only around the point immediately in contact

with the surface of the water.

An opportunity of observing this difference in the condition of pro-

tected and unprotected iron placed in the same situation, and under the

same circumstances, was afforded me whilst Surgeon of the Pluto Iron

Steamer, which during a stay of nearly five months (repairing) in a

small port in the south of Portugal, never raised her mooring anchors.

It was found upon our departure, that an accumulation of testaceous

animals, at least one inch in thickness, had taken place upon her bot-

tom, covered or protected, as it was termed, with a coating of red lead

paint, and afterwards with several layers of coal-tar, whilst the naked

iron cables exposed to exactly the same aqueous influences, came up as

clean as upon the day of our first anchoring.

Many experiments have also been made to prove this fact, that iron

perfectly cleaned, will remain many months entirely submersed in

water, without the least change being observed upon its surface.

I would also observe, that even the oxydization along the line of

immersion, where it is exposed to the united action of the atmosphere

and the water, is of such a character, as to afford no point for the

adhesion of marine animals, for forming in small scales, easily detached,

the attrition of the passing water is sufficient to remove them, and also

the embryo attachments of such animal life that may have been depo-

sited upon their surface.

It is curious to observe, how theory has in the case of iron-built

ships, occasioned attention to be directed to an action in one situation

and determined it to be an evil, while in reality it is most beneficial,

and caused to be overlooked entirely the same action in another situa-

tion, where the corrosive influence exerts uncontrouled its fullest power,

namely, in the hold of the vessel, upon the internal surface of the iron.

Here, where there is always an accumulation of water to a certain

extent, oxydization finds every circumstance favorable for operation—

an increased temperature, water, both fluid and in a state of vapour,

and a continued wash from the rolling of the vessel, which removing

the newly-formed scales of oxydized metal, leaves again the naked

1082 Experiments and Papers, [No. 144.

iron exposed to fresh attacks from the combined action of air and

water. As surely and as rapidly as are the iron tanks for containing

fresh water in men of war rendered useless by a similar operation, so

will the hulls of iron vessels be corroded and destroyed, whilst the

same mechanical means of protection which externally acts injuriously,

forming a bed favorable for the attachment of marine vermin, would,

applied internally, be the very best remedy that could be devised for pre-

venting the extensive oxydization of the iron in this situation. I allude

of course to the layers of coal tar, or otherwise bituminous compounds

with which it is usual at present to overlay the bottoms of iron vessels.

As general opinion, however, appears to be in favor of some external

covering for the iron, I know of none better suited to the purpose,

than a medicated application long in use among the Persians and

Arabs to protect the bottoms of their dows and other vessels from the

adhesion, and consequent depredations of marine Snimals, and which

appears to owe its protective power to the character of its principal

ingredient — aloes, which either from its bitterness, or being a positive

poison to such animals, completely prevents their adhesion ; and as this

in the case of iron vessels is a desideratum, a trial of it might be made,

for I see no reason why the application should not operate equally

beneficial in the one case as the other. The formula for its preparation,

according to a recent publication under the head ‘‘Aloes,” is as follows :

One ounce of aloes mixed with turpentine, tallow and white lead, is

sufficient for covering two feet, and it requires about twelve pounds for

a vessel of fifty tons burden. As a simple modification of this, I

should recommend, that to the common red lead paint usually applied

to the bottoms of iron vessels, such a quantity of aloes be added, as to

make it correspond as nearly as possible with the composition used by

the Arabs. One hundred weight of aloes, would be about sufficient for

a vessel of 500 tons burden.

With respect to iron tanks for containing fresh water, here perhaps

the electro-galvanic influence might be beneficially employed, although

one probable result might be the putrefaction of the water, which in

common unprotected tanks, remains for a considerable length of time

both sweet and wholesome. Its admixture with the very visible parti-

cles of detached oxide of iron, is the only thing complained of by the

sailors, but as this is in some measure conducive to their health, a

1843. ] on the effects of Sea-water on Iron. 1083

remedy on this account only is unnecessary, but as a means of lessen-

ing ship’s expenses with respect to the replacement of iron tanks,

which I believe in five years’ use are completely worn out, perhaps the

anti-corrosive agency of electro-galvanism might in this case be ad-

vantageously tried.

The accumulation of the oxide of iron in the water of the tanks

after a long voyage, is certainly excessive ; and to obviate this inconve-

nience, I would suggest, that a large filter, of simple construction, should

be placed forward for the use of the crew; to be made of wood in the

form of a large box, three feet high, with a breadth from side to side

of three feet; and from before, backwards, one foot and a half should

be divided into two compartments by a central division, which should

be perforated with a number of small holes to the height of the nine

inches from its lower edge, so as to admit of a free passage for water

from one compartment to the other. At the bottom of one of these

compartments, must be placed layers of sand to a corresponding height

with that of the small holes in the division, or nine inches, gradually

changing the character of the sand upwards, from fine beach to rough

coarse shingle. Let the water to be filtered be poured over this sand,

which it immediately percolates, rising on the other side to an equal

height, according to a well-known law of Hydraulics, perfectly clear

and pure, partaking of all the characters of the best spring water.

Thus simply can be procured a daily supply of clean draught water,

sufficient for the use of sixty or seventy men. I scarcely need add,

that the box would be rendered more water-tight, were it to be lined

either with zinc or lead. A small filter upon this principle, but made of

slate by Sterling of London, we had on board the Pluto and the Phlege-

thon, and its simple construction and efficiency were frequently the

subject of remark and admiration.

As regards iron tanks again, although I do not myself see any great

necessity for affording them the protection of electro-galvanism, except

to prevent expense, still it would be satisfactory I think to the pro-

fession at large, if the following experiment were permitted to be

made on a vessel proceeding to sea. It would consist of nothing

more than observing the condition of the water contained in two

separate tanks, one of which should be brought under the influence of

electro-galvanism by being placed in contact with zinc, whilst the

other should be in the usual unprotected state. The Captain or

1084 Experiments and Papers, [No. 144.

Surgeon might be instructed to report, after a certain interval of time,

upon the condition of the tanks, and the comparative amount of the

oxide of iron found in each, also as to the state of the water they res-

pectively contained, whether pure and wholesome, or otherwise ; and as

the result of the whole, which of the two tanks they recommend as

best calculated for the storing of water.

These remarks have been thrown together under circumstances par-

ticularly unfavorable, for from a very painful abscess forming subse-

quently to an attack of fever, the greater part of the rough draught of

this letter has been drawn up in bed, whilst this copy has been written

in great pain; this must be my apology for the very desultory and very

hurried character of my communication, which I was anxious should be

forwarded to you previously to the docking of the Proserpine, which I

have been given to understand will take place in a few days, and which

will afford a favorable opportunity for experimental trial, and of forming

a fair comparison between her condition and that of the Phlegethon,

after they have been a few months at sea, should any of the suggestions

contained in this letter be acted upon in the refit of the Proserpine.

Should you consider these observations to be either presumptuous or

intrusive, I am sorry for having occupied so much of your time in such

a manner, but ask your excuse upon this ground, that they have been

dictated solely by a desire to promote, as far as lay in my power, the

interest of my country, both political and commercial, in this quarter of

the globe. But not to detain you longer, with every respect, 1 am,

Howrah, July 12, 1841. Dear Sir, &c.

(Signed) CHARLES JOHNSON.

(True Copy.)

(Signed) CC. B. Greenutaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's

Office, the 23d Sept. 1848.

No. 1156 of 1841.

Superintendent’s Office, Bombay, 24th July, 1841.

Sir,—In compliance with your request, I have the honor to state,

that as yet experience on the durability of Iron Vessels exposed to

Sea-water in Bombay, does not afford sufficient data for judging of the

probable durability in comparison with the same material on the Ganges.

SS eeE—eeEeeeeeeeeee

—— ee ee ee ee

re a I a

1843. ] on the effects of Sea-water on Iron. 1085

2nd. There is reason to believe the corrosive power of Sea-water

varies in different localities of this Harbour and the Red Sea ; it appears

to be far greater than in the intermediate ocean, while on the Western

Coast of South Africa, it far exceeds either. The corrosion sustained

by the “ Berenice’s” paddle-wheels, during the short time she was off

the Cape of Good Hope, was apparently greater in extent than during

the whole time she has since been in India, and the Iron Boat taken

out to the Niger by Mr. Laird, is said to have suffered much from corro-

sion. In the Red Sea a small description of barnacle forms on iron,

beneath which corrosion is very rapid, destroying the outer coat of the

metal ; it becomes honey-combed, the same effect in a degree in Bombay

Harbour also, a weed grows upon it, destroying any paint or varnish

with which it may be coated; the best preservative has been found in

a composition of red lead and linseed oil; but for Steam Vessels’

bottoms, mineral pitch and rosin melted in spirits of turpentine.

3rd. It may be worthy of remark, that the “‘ Hugh Lindsay” has

still the identical paddle-arm segments she started with in 1829.

4th. Time has not yet been given to form any very correct data of

the durability of the Iron Boats, and in any opinion founded on analogy

with the paddle-wheels of Sea-going Steam Vessels, various elements

which we are as yet little acquainted with, must be taken into ac-

count. Thus the galvanic action of a stream of water passing

along the copper, has been known to cut through heavy paddle-

beam stays in an incredible short time, as also the arm and segments ;

the quality of the iron may have an influence, as also the smoothness

of surface in the plates composing the bottom of an Iron Vessel.

Sth. Mooring chains are observed to be perfectly sound when laying

in the mud, partially corroded when suspended, but very soon destroy-

ed near the surface and in contact with the copper.

6th. Time and observation can alone throw light upon this little-

understood and interesting theory. I have, &c.

(Signed) . R. Outver, Capt. R. N.

To C. B. Greenuaw, Esa. Secretary Marine Board, Calcutta.

(True Copy.)

(Signed) C. B. Greentaw, Secretary.

Fort William, Marine Superintendent's

Office, the 23d September, 1843.

1086

Notes on, and a short Vocabulary of, the Hinduvee Dialect of Bun-

delkhand. By Major R. Lercn, c. B. Political Agent. From the

Political Secretariat of the Government of India.

The Notes and Vocabulary were collected in the course of a five

months’ residence at Punna.

The Banphara dialect differs from that now to be treated of. The

latter is a mixture of corrupt Sanscrit, and perverted Persian ; a kind

of slurred and slovenly Oordoo.

The first peculiarity that strikes a stranger, is the substitution, at

the end of words, of o instead of the Oordoo 4; as, haméro, instead of

hamardé. It is sometimes substituted for other vowels in the middle of

words ; as, moro, instead of mera. Another peculiarity, is, the substi-

tution of 7, and 2, for the Oordoo /; as, mooree, for mulee ; and naka-

reeyd, for lakree; and, sometimes, vice versa; as, leelo, for neelo.

The Oordoo the is slovenly pronounced te.

The diminutives, or derogatives, of substantives are very generally

used ; as ghurwa as well as ghord ; tateewa as well as tatoo.

Of the Alphabet and Character.

The character is based on the Devanagree. The Sanscrit vowels

The kh is written G, and not gy, while the real g gh is not known.

The gh is written , and differs only from the q dh by having the

cross stroke.

The Sanscrit @ 57 and q are unknown.

The b q differs from the w q only by a dot below ; and the p q

differs from the y @ only in the same manner.

The Sanscrit a y is not known as a consonant, except in a com-

pound letter; its place being supplied by j, which is also substituted

for z. The Sanscrit yy is unknown ; its place being supplied by sim-

ples. In the same manner the Sanscrit kgh “a is supplied by chh.

The Sanscrit we has two pronunciations ;: one, as @ in mane, cane,

&c. ; the other, which I have expressed by ae, has the sound of a@ in

1843.] of Bundelkhand. 1087

mare, care. The o has also two: as, 0 in cone; and o in bore, or oa

in hoar.

I have distinguished the soft and hard letters, as follows :—

at Bt Sa Adah

ft Sth Ed ES dh

and the harsh € I have expressed generally by d, and not by r follow-

The Hinduvee character of Bundelkhand is written most correctly

by the tribe of Kaiths. The Banyans, in writing it, leave out all the

vowels. |

The Oordoo w is often changed into b ; as, be for we (they).

The nasal - dot (sun) I have expressed by 2.

“aq I have expressed by a; and gt by 4.

fx by i, and ¥} by ce; @ by u, and q by oo.

Gender.

A noun is made feminine from masculine, as follows: beta, bitiya ;

ghord, ghuriya ; a female speaking uses ee instead of 0 in the termina-

tion of the first person.

Number.

The plural number is formed from the singular, as follows :—

ghoro, ghore.

patee, pateen.

kutiya, kutiyan.

Case.

The inflected case, ready for receiving the addition of the post

positions, is formed as follows :—~

Singular. Plural.

ghoro, ghore.

ghore, ghoran.

Pronouns.

Singular. Plural.

mae, I ham.

mo, inflected case, ham (hawa.)

1088 Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect [No. 144.

tae, thou tum.

to, inflected case, tum.

ae, this ae.

in, inflected case, in.

oo, that 00.

00, inflected case, oon.

apun, self

apun, inflected case.

ko, who

kee, inflected case.

ka, what

kde, inflected case.

The Cardinal numbers that differ from the Oordoo, are :—

16 sora, 51 inkyéwan.

38 adtees, 54 chouwan.

44 chawéalees, 57 santawan.

46 cha,dlees, 58 authawan.

49 unanchas, 67 sarsath.

68 arsath, 93 teranawe.

83 terasee, 97 santanawe.

89 nouwasee, 98 antanawe.

91 inkydnawe, 99 ninyanawe.

In like manner the following are the Ordinal numbers :—

Sth pénchanw, 8th atanw.

6th chhatanw, 9th namanw.

7th satanw, 10th dasanw.

1843.) of Bundelkhand. 1089

Fractions.

+ paw. 4+ adho. 1 tihdo.

Names of the Months.

Chait, sunwat 1900, commenced or will commence in 1843 on 14th Mar.

12th April.

Baisack, 43 - 99

Jeth, x. ie “ 12th May.

Asad, oe Hi os 11th June

Sawan, fe re a 11th July.

Bhado, - , = 10th Augt.

Koohar, a as 4 9th Sept.

Katik, ip i s 9th Oct.

Aghan, ys aM Le 8th Nov.

Poos, He A ¥ 8th Dec.

Mah, Ps Ai Hy 13th Jan.

Phagan, i ig 12th Feb.

Lond, the 13th intercalary month every 3d year.

Days of the Month.

parmd, Ist (after full moon,) 8th 4the.

do}, 2d 9th name.

tee], 3d 10th dase.

choth, 4th 11th eka dasee.

panche, Sth 12th dua dasee.

chhat, 6th 13th teras.

site, 7th 14th chondas.

15th Amawas, 30th Poone.

From Ist to 15th, is termed badee or lagat.

From 15th to 30th, is termed sudee or utarat.

Jeth badee athee

Samvat, 1900

CONJUGATION OF AUXILIARY VERBS.

INDICATIVE Moon.

\ 20th May, 1843.

Present Tense.

mae anw, ham hae.

tae 4, i, tum ho.

00 4, 1, be hae.

1090 Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect [No. 144.

Perfect Past Tense.

mae hato, ham hate.

tae hato, tum hate.

oo hato, be hate.

Imperfect Past Tense.

mae hot to, ham hot te.

tae hot to, tum hot te.

oo hot to, be hot te.

Pluperfect Past Tense.

mae bhoa to, ham bhai,e te.

tae bhoa to, tum bhai,e te.

oo bhoa to, be bhai,e te.

Future Tense.

mae hochon, ham hoonhe.

tae hoohae, tum hoonho.

oo hoohae, be hoonhe.

IMPERATIVE Moon.

tae ho, tum how.

Sugsunctive Moop.

(Kajat, of Perfect Past Tense.)

mae hoto, ham hote.

tae hoto, tum hote.

oo hoto, be hote.

Verbal noun. hubainya.

Infinitive. hobo.

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB Khabo, to tell.

Present Tense.

mae kahat, ham kahat.

tae kahat, tum kahat.

oo kahat, be kahat.

Perfect Past Tense.

maene kahee, ham ne kahee. -

taene kahee, tum ne kahee. -

oone kahee, un ne kahee.

1843.]

oonche,

oopar,

khale,

taren,

mae kahto, ham kahte.

tae kahto, tum kahte.

oo kahto, be kahte.

Verbal Noun. kahainya.

Adverbs, Past and Prepositions, Conjunctions, 5c. &c.

\ above: bheetar, in.

| bahar, without.

\ rep ee adhpar, in the middle.

ite, here.

of Bundelkhand.

Imperfect Past Tense.

mae kahat hato, ham kahat hate.

tae kahat hato, _ tum kahat hate.

00 kahat hato, be kahat hate.

Pluperfect Past Tense.

maene kahee hatee, ham ne kahee hatee.

taene kahee hatee, tum ne kahee hatee.

oone kahee hatee, un ne kahee hatee.

Future Tense.

mae kenhon, ham kenhen.

tae kenhe, | tum kenho.

oo kenhe, be kenhen.

IMPERATIVE Moon.

tae kon, tum kaho.

SussunctTiveE Moon.

Present Tense.

mae kahon, ham kahen.

tae kahe, tum kaho.

oo kahe, be kahen.

Perfect Past Tense.

1091

1092 Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect [No. 144.

ute, there. deelan, in person

ee kana een, on this js engar, \ ar

oo kané een, on that side. nere, ;

» dahne, to the right. pe, on.

deren, to the left. sénmoo, | PE ee

sdme, in front. muhran,

pachhe, behind.

jaldee, quickly.

haren, slowly.

lo, up to, till.

ko, kee, of.

kon, to.

se, from.

parant, but.

kabe, when ?

jabe, when,

tabe, then.

dkasmat, suddenly.

aj, to-day.

kal, yesterday.

bhyane, to-morrow.

paron, day after.

naron, day after that.

l4nen, for.

saetmaet, gratis.

nit nit, daily.

murak, phir, again.

ange, formerly.

abe, now.

azpher, \ roundabout.

gerger,

hou, yes.

anhan, no.

bigar, without.

chanhen, or.

kae, what is it?

saddmat, always,

gujdrath, by the hands of.

hoke, via.

dheer se, _ slowly.

bilat, much.

kabon, ever.

tanak, a little.

darak, sometimes.

barydnee, violently.

babut 00, much indeed.

pahlegiude, on the other side.

aele gi ude, on this side.

nira,

kewal, entirely.

nirbak,

agen, before,

pachhe, after.

se, than.

kajat, if.

athae, in the evening.

darobast, altogether.

bdnokee, quickly.

kandee, on the part of.

Ram dhu-) by Ram, for Ram’s

wal ee, \ sake.

aay by God (patron or lo-

sonh, cal saint. )

woa, and.

sakdro, early in the day.

eee ee ee ee eee Pe

1843.]

of Bundelkhand. 1093

List of Verbs that differ from the Oordoo.

ringbo, to proceed.

abo, to come.

jebo, to go.

terbo, to call.

batebo, to speak.

lukabo, to hide.

madbo, to knead.

leabo, to bring.

rakhabo, to put.

uthbo, to rise.

banabo, to cook.

todbo, to break.

khujdbo, _ to scratch.

batebo, to speak.

ench lebo, to abstract.

oll devo, to imprison.

ban lebo, to takea hand or wrist

(protection. )

hat karbo,, to insist on.

gamm

khebo, é to wait.

cheenbo, __to recognise.

dheer dharbo, \ to be silent.

monge rahbo,

usebo, to boil.

baebo, to sow. —

udelbo, to pour.

kapabo, to tremble.

ripatabo, to slip.

rupabo, to wait.

janbo, to understand. |

le jebo, to carry away.

~ uthabo, to raise.

baithbo, to sit.

marbo, to beat.

bhoojbo, to roast.

udhelabo, to pour.

chedbo, to prevent.

lambandebo, to concentrate a

force.

chhoochhee to fire blank am-

toofak ghalbo, § munition.

band karbo, to prevent.

latak jebo, to return.

gala phasbo,

garsentee debo, \ to hang one-self.

lab debo, be make specious

bala debo, promises.

khebo, to ply a boat.

khaebo, to eat.

Baraeens; \ to finish, settle.

niptadebo,

talab karbo, to demand impera-

tively.

bitarbo, to distribute.

peecho ho ae ita

pas jebo,

leelbo, gutakabo, to swallow.

disa hobo,

farakat hobo,

matyabo,

\ to ease one-self.

to rub earth on the

~ hands previous to

washing.

karoola karbo, to rinse the mouth.

kalebaé karbo, to breakfast.

pharbo, to bear fruit.

simit rahbo, to contract from

fear.

1094

halko,

garaw,

buro,

achho, nono,

patro,

motho,

pakko,

neechat, \

bejar,

bado,

choto,

lamon,

chonro,

peda,

bitiya,

agee,

purwa,

chonharo,

sanp,

parrwa,

batero,

bighana,

nghar,

tidua,

sreeghos,

ker,

gadar,

medo,

gaiyan,

bael,

jawa,

dasta,

khand,

cheenee,

nakareeyd-

kath,

Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect

light.

heavy.

bad.

good.

thin.

fat.

strong.

ill.

large.

small.

long.

broad.

tree.

girl.

fire.

a hamlet.

a rat.

a snake.

pigeon.

quail.

wolf.

tiger.

leopard.

panther.

plantain.

sheep.

a ram.

cow.

bullock.

barley.

pewter.

sugar.

soft sugar.

\ wood.

Vocabulary of Nouns.

nennoo,

goras,

matha,

hadiya,

paro,

sil,

ludiya,

karaiya,

seeso,

peetar,

lodee,

tarwa,

piduree,

ghoote,

kurchee,

tdree,

teonee,

kabjs,

kandha,

ghitkee,

dadee,

bironee,

tope,

pag,

konro,

karro,

sonsar,

bheenjo,

bar,

kakwa,

choondaiya,

kankaree,

kwamee,

rand,

muns,

litar,

butter.

(cow-juice) milk.

butter-milk.

cooking pot.

cover.

mortar.

pestle.

tin.

lead.

brass.

soft part of the ear.

sole.

calf.

knee.

ancle.

palm.

elbow.

arm, above elbow.

shoulder.

windpipe.

chin.

eye-lash.

eye-lid.

turban.

soft.

hard.

smooth.

wet.

hair.

locks of hair.

top-knot of hair.

arm-pit.

virgin.

widow.

husband.

- forehead.

[ No. 144.

1843.)

karo,

leelo,

hareero,

chanda,

chandrma,

tarainya,

baehar.

bagroodo,

ujyaro,

gehro,

bora,

bihro,

loolo,

kanwan,

charo,

sufet,

anand,

pirat,

kuwa,

gael,

palecha,

paero,

mohra,

har,

joona,

kudéree,

haseeya,

toriya,

bakala,

dar.

soodho,

ondo,

iradah,

saksee,

kissah,

sahsa

kumak,

anger.

of Bundelkhand. 1095

black lapka, laparha, active.

blue sarick, enemy.

green khuns, anger.

\ ee allball, shuffling.

kachee, a gardener.

star. dheemar, a bearer.

wind kaith, Hinduvee writer.

dust-storm. badar, cloud.

light. chipee, a tailor.

deep. ladiyd, mason.

dumb. hirano, stray (animal. )

deaf. aber, kubera, delay.

lame with both legs. chapra, sealing wax.

blind of one eye. patee, note.

grass. badalo, answer to letter.

white. sikhapan, instructions.

pleasure. bideewar, stating particulars.

pain. lag, provisions.

well. milak, black mail.

road. gilawo (khaban,) mud.

saddle. seho, waterfall.

stirrup. soondo, island.

headstall. dang, jungle.

plough. lugye, woman, wife.

yoke. sare, brother-in-law.

pick-axe. dukara, old man.

sickle. dukariya, old woman.

hillock. sasurar, village of father-in-

bark. law.

branch. mamyaro, ditto of maternal un-

straight. cle.

upset. samdhyano, ditto of son’s father-

corruption of ilakah. in-law.

ditto of sakhtee. maiko, village of married

quarrel. woman’s mother.

injustice, mistake. _ bikat, difficult.

moora, mooree, reddish.

1096

judhaiya,

_nydo,

thanwar,

baredee,

cheree, |

chiriyd,

gadariya,

pardanee,

Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect

moonshine.

quarrel.

horse-keeper.

cow-herd.

goat.

shepherd.

man’s dhotee.

pidee (méchee), chair.

gham,

lapat,

gagra,

nad,

likhaiyd,

jhanjiree,

nattet,

natedar, \

ristedar,

ada,

kamtana,

eek deel,

deelan,

badk4o,

maksad,

purt,

dat,

dugaiee,

labree,

chhan, \

taddrak,

bakree,

nonee, é

khaso,

saha,

baramna,

penkara,

sunshine.

hot wind.

earthen pitcher.

earthen tub.

writer.

lattice work.

relation.

' place of dwelling,

refuge.

work, building.

one person.

in person,

conversation.

consultation.

secret.

key to plunder.

verandah.

falsehood.

enquiry, justice.

walled dwelling.

good.

honest man.

anxiety.

fetters.

siydnee,

jablo,

bintee,

sujas,

newto,

Choumas,

bhanware,

oognee,

dgonee,

Barat

khadan,

marwa,

n4oo,

naw,

nanw,

‘dondé,

saroo,

bahu,

damad,

jet,

dewur,

nand,

babajoo,

bhabhgjoo,

baiyah,

baijoo,

Parwa,

k, hero,

[No. 144.

grown up(daughter. )

former.

petition.

fame,

congratulation, a

guest.

4 months, rainy sea-

son.

the day on which the

bride is handed

over to the bride-

groom.

the day on which the

Barat arrives.

bridegroom’s party.

mine of diamonds.

first day of marriage

ceremonies.

a barber.

name ?

a boat.

a cause.

each of two men who

have married sis-

ter’sis to the other.

son’s wife.

daughter’s husband.

husband’s — brother

(elder. )

ditto ditto (younger)

ditto sister (older. )

ditto father.

ditto mother.

— sister (younger. )

ditto elder sister.

small village.

few huts.

nae

1843.]

ganw,

sahar,

naro,

baj k,hyee,

jeto,

majhlo,

sajhlo,

lohro,

kaka, t

peetee,

phuw4,

aja,

djee,

mama,

mosee,

nana,

nanee.

saraj,

saree,

bhateejo,

bhanej,

of Bundelkhand.

village.

town.

nullah (rivulet. )

suddenly happened.

elder brother.

2d ditto.

3d ditto.

younger ditto.

father’s brother.

father’s sister.

father’s father.

father’s mother.

mother’s brother.

mother’s sister.

mother’s father.

mother’s mother.

wife’s sister (elder. )

ditto (younger. )

brother’s son.

sister’s son.

ditto daughter.

_bhyee, (brother) kakd’s son.

jareendmah,

mamlo,

daur,

bast,

k,haleeta,

bhojye,

karro,

kajureea,

phuwa’s ditto.

mama’s ditto.

mosee’s ditto.

fine.

thing, article.

pocket.

brother’s wife.

stiff.

young wheat grown

in pots and thrown

into the tank on the

last day of Sawan.

patureea,

pero,

houldir,

sirree,

beha,

pagil,

manas,

manukh,

behuro,

tihaiee,

1097

musulman concu-

bine.

a tree.

mad, crazy.

\ man.

creditor who lendsmo-

ney.

4 instalment of re-

venue, sawap, aghan,

chait.

khojndmah, search.

patta,

bheer,

trace (of marauders. )

force, party of armed

men.

jan chindr, acquaintance.

lekha,

tal,

athye,

medo,

dot,

jurdan,

rabab,

rawye, f

writing, accounts.

rank.

assembly of villagers

in consultation.

boundary (near. }

inkstand.

writing materials.

custom.

Thakuriya, a thaékur,

dankoo,

rakhoee,

a marauder.

levying troops. [ lands.

punyarthee, the enjoyer of charity

Bamanye,

tans,

matricide, suicide, &c.

committed by a bra-

min, &c. in supposed

self-defence.

reprimand,

1098

sanad,

diwaro,

mood,

thar,

panda,

padiya,

usareeya,

baro,

dor,

prasang,

gujarath,

Prohit,

kewat,

had,

bukra,

Pichora,

chakariya,

sustye,

datas,

Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect

ready.

door.

head.

head (of cattle.)

a cook.

young buffaloe.

a little larger one.

a child.

cattle.

conversation.

by hands of.

family priest, (a bra-

min.)

boatmen.

boundary (far. )

a tax fixed, and half

levied, by the chief

in whose territory a

widow (of all but the

four principal castes)

first married from the

man who intends to

keep her.

ditto, 3 dittowhereborn

ditto—N. B. The

chief does not give

the widow without

her consent, and she

cannot give herself

away without his

consent.

(chdkar), servant, a

sepal

ployment.

absence of suspicion,

seeking em-

and care, unprepared

fear, dread.

pat,

[No. 144.

dandas oppression.

chutkee, a note.

kham, envelope.

lakhota, wafer or gum which

closes a letter.

teeto, - damp.

khapra, a title.

_ \ tank.

talaiya,

cheep, slate.

dundee, marauding.

dundet, marauder.

setee, whistling.

bekh, dress.

machree, fish.

badmdasee, disturbance of peace.

banjee, a banyan’s traps haw-

king about.

bhowree, circuit for hawking or

intelligence.

that, a chief’s herd.

bagar, a villager’s ditto.

nar besa village

raha,un, herds.

altrdeeso, }

Prithee

na Teeete Histories relating to

Ue fate: { Bundelkand.

je,) cha-

tur pur- |

kas, J

bagare, separated.

narwa, streamlet.

janaba, acquainted.

jhungee a tent.

(ahijdee),

breadth of river.

1843.} of Bundelkhand. - 1099

chhura, razor. bilat, many (days.)

kathanee, scissors. ojee, one man taking ano-

Patwaree, statistics of a village. ther’s place.

dujagee, having two masters. _ sistacharee, flattery.

barejo, a pan plantation santo, eatable.

sadharan, easy. gamm, ability.

katahar, fruit (jack.) phuskara, fawn.

lathar, harsh. bhuchch, a jungle man.

chironjee, seeds oftheachar fruit. galee, a road.

parora, a vegetable. parae, roe.

jakka, concern of mind. chikra, deer.

dasee, a sign, proof. les, trace.

swam madye, a man.

abauuice. \ fidelity to one’s master. dole faults

asaro, dependence. huzooranee,a concubine given to

sapar, bathing. a dependent of the

douwa, title of an Aheer. Rajah’s, a cast off

dhdee, nurse. mistress.

dhouwa, ditto’s husband, called Pardwar, a Hindoo mistress of a

by child daoo. Rajah who lives in

Barwaree, title. seclusion (purdah.)

kakaroo, gravel in which dia- huzooree, a servant to whom a

monds are found. cast off mistress is

jamokh, confronting. given to keep.

nadar, dispraise. Horee, the Holee festival.

khara, a hare. Budhwa ) the Tuesday after the

laraiya, jackal. mangal, Holee.

lukhareeya, fox. panainyan, shoes.

kul, plenty of. mihpar, honey.

sarak, high road. maen, wax.

kowwa, crow. machho, honey-bee.

kuliya, a lane. machhee. ditto smaller, fly.

diwalo, a temple. kontiyo, ditto still smaller.

teep, written promise to pay sawad, caste.

for indemnification — teelee, the milk of a she-buf-

from plunder.

verses.

_doha, \

ser,

faloe just thrown a

young one before it

has sucked.

1100

kheer, rice first browned and

then boiled in milk.

chhima, silently.

ditto karo, hold your tongue.

kisee ke . commit suicide on

oopar account of another’s

marna, treatment.

kadero, stick maker.

Jenroo, a coward.

nira,

a complete, entire.

rasoee, a meal, food.

bardd,is, provisions, earthern

utensils, firewood,

grass, pegs.

rasad, ditto, atta, dal, &c.

kisan, cultivator.

Inisal, caste, connection.

padath, custom of a caste.

upacheer, )

aehann , disturbance.

deen band, defender of the faith,

(address to a supe-

rior.)

parwar, a vegetable.

kundaroo, ditto.

non, salt.

najor, weak.

kharo, salt, (adj.)

karwo, bitter. |

khato, sour.

meeto, Sweet.

gureero, t tasting of ghoor.

chirparo, not pungent.

madheer, greasy.

etdeelo, astringent.

garist, bloating, indigestible.

Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect

[ No. 144.

bharetoo, a pair of animals.

bya, weighman.

palledér, a grain porter.

thapareeya a slap.

lateeya, a walking-stick.

badaiee, —_a carpenter.

kundero, a turner.

lakhero, worker in lac.

kachero, worker in kach (glass. )

kunjaree, fruiterer.

barchee, a footman’s spear,

mark of a Bundela.

nutheha, confectioner.

bajaj, cloth seller.

Be . butcher.

khateek,

baree, torch-bearer.

halaleeya a sweeper.

fards, to the usual occupa-

tion adds that of ca-

mel man.

chatewree, painter of figures.

baraiee, —_ pan-seller.

josee, receiver of alms of re-

ligious feasts or fasts.

kagdeegir, paper-maker.

nabdeegir, pad-maker.

chawar, rice.

chonr, chowree.

panchhee

chetawa- list of birds.

nee.

gahno

chetawa- j list of jewels.

nee.

phool che-

list of flowers.

tdwanee,

1843.)

charo,

geda,

dalee,

pattee,

beboocha,

kaif,

chun,

ghane,

panam,

surag,

gonhoon,

duhaiee,

dalidra \

daridra,

johukm,

satyanas,

bipat,

sawkas,

phaldan,

sagaiee,

Jagun,

palecha,

gadee,

jahdj,

palan

bandhej,

of Bundelkhand.

fodder for horses, cows,

and buffaloes.

ditto for elephants.

ditto for camels.

ditto for sheep.

taken up with.

anger.

bird’s food.

crowded together.

poor man’s salute of

a dhamee.

tracing of thieves.

wheat.

rule, government.

cares and troubles.

as order, answer toa

superior’s order.

annihilation, ruina-

tion.

cares and troubles.

worldly means.

the present sent by the

father-in-law to his

intended son-in-law,

cocoanut, a rupee or

mohur, &e.

first entertainment at

the son-in-law’s house.

the paper containing

the appointed wed-

ding days.

horse’s pad.

elephant’s pad.

camel’s pad. wood.

pad do. [rangement.

livelihood, means, ar-

koowa,

daskhat,

sarjant,

dhepan.

dohra,

angochha,

modlo,

duhai,ee,

khawas,

samaree,

anhan,

tanak,

seedho,

kanak,

tanak,

surag,

1101

a son.

circumstance.

arrangement.

office of nurse.

door.

handkerchief.

recrimination,

sal.

rule, government.

repri-

¢ title of a barber.

no!

little, least.

plain fare, wheat, ghee,

salt and dal (rations. )

wheaten flour.

a small quantity.

tracing of thieves.

larj kee bat,suspicious expressions.

jhulahoolo, twilight.

thadho,

kuchee,

taro,

akras,

badeeya,

banda,

standing.

key.

lock.

enmity.

crop. tailed horse.

raised place to hold

wheat.

khondeeyd, sunk place to hold

bar,

noh,

mekh,

sum,

alas,

wheat.

hair of men.

hair of animal.

wool.

nail of finger or toe.

iron nail.

hoof. [ yawning.

inattention, laziness,

1102

kus, a kind of grass.

luchaiee, a cake (pooree.)

hetee, a friend.

Be,uhdree, an equal in society of

i a different caste.

barbast, fee for jageer.

bandej, preparations, arrange-

ment.

barbas, oppression, extortion.

pooro, even.

oono, odd.

swaha, amen, empty, echo of

another’s sentiments.

chunduwa, bald-headed.

basor, basket-maker.

bakhar, enclosed dwelling.

kachwaro, kitchen garden.

bheda,

bifaneiges vegetable.

both, swell of river.

pasopes, indecision.

oot patank, wild schemes or say-

ings.

mahago, _ dear.

sasto, cheap.

bardan, __ blessing, favor.

seeng, horn of animal.

sawdhan, intelligent.

amasee, mixed (Ban) amez.

toonka, chip.

Banduwa, a prisoner.

ghail, wounded.

wafic, conversant.

sahna, revenue collector for

village.

mukalabo, confronture.

salakhan, ruler.

Vocabulary of the Hinduvee Dialect

[No. 444.

bichlee, routed, dispersed.

sustye, confidence, absence of

apprehension, tran-

quillity.

sudhar, advantage, benefit.

choakhté, enclosure, gate.

hirmijee, cochineal colored (kir-

mizee, Persian.)

pahoonaee, guest for some time.

byaree, dinner after sunset.

dataon, vegetable tooth-brush.

kariya, black complexion.

savroa, dark do.

goshuywa \ wheat colored ditto.

baran,

goroa, fair ditto.

bhoora, white, European ditto.

(leper-like.)

bhata, tomatus.

khameenda, authentic, competent,

(authority).

bat, award, a sentence.

tapurs, entrusted.

daskat, syllable,hand-writing.

bihee, guava.

pachhyaur, curds sweetened with

goor. ;

‘sadee, cream.

behar, a well with steps.

baree, garden ground en-

closed with thorns.

chitase, spotted.

thor, head-piece.

ato, hindrance, draw-back

want of completion.

damar, a continued thick jun-

gle.

1843.)] of Bundelkhand. 1103

thakurdin, wife of a thakoor. baraee, t sugar hs

ans, ‘“< tuhmat.” ookh,

kujas, ill fame. guichah, false rumour.

kunnas, t paltiaiion, (low). bhatiya, hillock.

mujra, samaeta, assembly.

moos, loan. galgal ni- \ ae

gael, a road. muwa.

unsar, inkling. beuhdr, return wedding pre-

tipariya, basket. sent.

madeee, ‘‘ mendee.” phaka, piece of any thing di-

khoba, milk boiled to a thick- vided.

ness. pisan, flour of any kind.

oatbo, to fry milk to a con- _ beero, brother.

sistency. phar, fruit.

jaraeta, thorns. sadawart, permanent alm’s fund.

boal, a runner, creeper.

N. B.—Few or none of the words have been entered that were not

first actually heard in conversation

The Vocabulary could of course be added to, by those who have had

the advantage of a longer residence than I had in Bundelcund.

Logan ke nardans mens surwaran

ko bede 4,0,

Parna kee khabar ko kachhu

bhado naee,

Ham athai ka bhanhan,

Rotee bhat hai,

Kaddchit sarkér ho manas Jeit-

poor waran ke hath 4 jenhen to

be mar dashen,

Ko Thakur hai,

Raja kee bhet to nahoohen,

Haméro nara Lodee men gado

hai,

Ute rehabo kare,

Ambalah, 3\st December, 1843.

Conceal the swords in the people’s

gutters and return.

There is no dependence on the

Punna news.

I will eat this evening.

He is eating bread.

Would the Jeitpoor man kill a

government servant were he to

fall into his hands?

What caste are you.

You may not have seen the Raja.

Lowri is the place I (literally my

naod) sprung from.

Continue to remain there.

1404

A note on the Winds, as influencing the Tracks sailed by Bermuda

Vessels ; and on the advantage which may be derived from sailing

on Curved Courses when meeting with Revolving Winds. By Lieut.

Col. Rew, Governor of Bermuda.

It may at first sight appear, that we in India have little to do with ‘‘the Tracks

sailed by Bermuda Vessels;’’ but further consideration will shew to those who have

paid attention to this subject, that not only as a general question of science, and a new

and beautiful practical result of theory and research in this new branch of Meteorology,

but also as being capable of extensive application in our own seas to the Eastward of

the Cape, this paper merits the closest study: for it is much more than probable, that

future research will shew us, that by an analogous system, the great storms of both

Southern and Northern latitudes may all be used as means of shortening voyages

by the simple rule of sailing, partly round their circumferences, or keeping in their

favourable quadrants, instead of beating across or lying to in them, or pursuing tracks

which lead into meeting with them ‘‘on their wrong sides,”’ in the latitudes in which

they prevail. We are indebted to Col. Reid for a copy of this valuable note.—H. P..

In high latitudes the atmospheric currents, when undisturbed, are

westerly, particularly in the winter season. If storms and gales re-

-volve by a fixed law, and we are able by studying these disturbing

causes of the usual atmospheric currents, to distinguish revolving gales,

it is likely that voyages may be shortened.

The indications of a revolving gale are, a descending barometer

with a regularly veering wind.

In a voyage from Bermuda to New York in the winter, strong

en are westerly winds, together with the Gulf Stream. would

New York. carry vessels attempting to sail direct to New York, to

the eastward of their course. No doubt all seamen are aware of this,

and do in consequence make some allowance by keeping to the west-

ward. But according to usual practice, on an east wind overtaking

them, they would steer in a direct course for their destined port,

making allowance only for the current, as the wind would be con-

sidered a fair one. If however the gale were a revolving one, the

wind, at first easterly, would veer until it became westerly : and would

probably blow from the westward with increased force, when the ves-

sel would be carried off her course. It is therefore a subject deserv-

ing consideration whether advantage should not be taken of the tempo-

rary east wind in order to run to the westward nearly as far as the

meridian of Cape Hatteras; so that in the rest of the voyage to New

1843. } Colonel Reid on Winds. 1105

York, the chance of reaching that port would be the same as that of

coasting vessels in their voyage from the Carolinas.

But should a dry easterly wind set in, and the barometer maintain

its mean height, or rise above it, the case would be altogether dif-

ferent; for these would be indications of a steady wind, and not of

a revolving gale. The ship may then be steered direct for the intend-

ed port; and this shews that the hygrometer might prove a useful

instrument at sea, though not hitherto used that I am aware of, in

aid of navigation.

Since vessels sailing from Bermuda and bound to New York, or

the Chesapeake, must necessarily cross the Gulf Stream, they will have

an advantage in doing so before that stream begins to set strongly to

the eastward. For this reason, as well as to have a better chance of

getting to the westward, it would seem advisable on first leaving

Bermuda, to make no northing, but if the wind should at the time

blow, for example, from the north-west, to sail free upon the starboard

tack, and to keep on this tack, until the vessel be so far advanced

as to fall into the northerly current of the Gulf stream ; and this might

prove to be the best course to pursue, even should the ship for a time

make southing. The more southerly the port to be gained, as for

example, Baltimore, the more does it appear advisable that this should

be persevered in. The same principle of sailing for Boston and even

for Halifax, (though in a much less degree) might be found to be that

by which the most certain course would be secured. It may appear

unreasonable to propose, that a ship bound to a port to the northward,

should on leaving Bermuda, steer southerly—yet when we shall be

better acquainted with the causes of the variable winds, and their

changes, this may really not appear to be so unreasonable.

For example, towards the end of a revolving gale passing over

Bermuda, the wind may still be west, and blowing hard. Since the

courses of such gales are northerly, a ship by steering north would only

continue the longer in the same westerly gale, whereas by steering

southerly, the ship and the storm would be moving in opposite direc-

tions, and the vessel would the sooner have the chance of falling into a

_ new variation of the wind. Sailing southerly, on the starboard tack,

the latter end of such revolving gales as the one supposed above, might

(as frequently happens) veer to west-north-west and even to north-west,

1106 Colonel Reid on Winds. [No. 144.

which would enable a ship to come up and make a better course to-

wards the west.

These suggestions are offered to practical seamen, in the hope

that some persons will be induced to consider this subject; and if

gales really revolve, that advantage. may be taken of their mode of

action. ’

In sailing from the West Indies to Bermuda in the winter sea-

sie Bare son, the trade wind will generally enable vessels to gain a

Bermuda. meridian, sufficiently to the westward, before they leave

the latitudes where it usually blows; and in winter, it would seem

desirable to make the 68th or 70th degrees of west longitude, before

leaving the 25th of latitude.

In voyages between Bermuda and Halifax, in the winter season,

From cer the same reasons hold good for keeping to the westward,

Halifax. as have been recommended for the passage from the West

Indies to Bermuda, but in a much greater degree; for in this latter

case there is not the easterly trade wind to carry ships to the west-

ward.—On the contrary, the west wind may blow throughout, whilst

the Gulf Stream also would tend to set vessels to the eastward. The

degree of westing to be made in this passage in the different seasons,

does not seem to be agreed upon.

The chief object however of this note is to point out the benefit

which may be derived from profiting from the east wind, which blows

on the polar side of a revolving gale, before the wind shall veer to the

westward.

On leaving England for Bermuda, instead of following the usual

Fro Epes practice of steering straight for the destined port, on the

muda. setting in of an easterly wind, it deserves consideration

whether ships should not sail west; and if the wind should veer from

the east by the south, towards S.S.W., S.W., and West, whether they

should not continue on the larboard tack, running free, until by chang-

ing, they could lie their course.

The wind after this might continue to veer towards the north, so

that the ship might still come up, with her head to the westward of her

direct course.. On both tacks she would have sailed on curved lines, the

object of which would be to carry her to the westward against the

prevailing wind and currents. )

1843. Colonel Reid on Winds. 1107

The east wind which sets in at the commencement of a revolving

gale, may veer either by the north or by the south, according as a ship

may be situated in the right or the left hand side of a progressive whirl-

wind ; but the westerly wind of high latitudes will neutralize the effect

of this east wind, when it does not blow hard, so that it may sometimes

produce a calm.

For example, if the wind’s force in a whirlwind be represented by

the number 4, and the force of the general atmospheric current of air

blowing at the same time, be also represented by the number 4, the east

wind in the whirlwind will be balanced by the general west wind pre-

vailing beyond the limits of the whirlwind ; but on the opposite side of

the whirlwind, the wind’s force will be doubled, so that it may be equal

in strength to a gale. This is supposed to be the explanation of west-~

erly gales in high latitudes blowing harder than easterly ones.

A ship’s best course from England to Bermuda therefore, may

neither be by the straight course, nor yet one by the trade winds, but

it may sometimes be in a curved direction to the northward.

The principle of taking advantage of the changes of revolving

winds, by sailing free on curved lines, is applicable to high latitudes, in

both hemispheres, when ships are sailing westerly. W. R.

GOVERNMENT House, BERMUDa,

11th May, 1842.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 6th December, 1843.

The usual Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s Rooms, on Wednesday

Evening the 6th instant.

H. Torrens, Esq. Vice President in the chair.

The following new Members proposed at the last Meeting, were balloted for and

declared duly elected :— |

Lieutenant Hickey, ist N, I. and Willis Earle, Esq.

Associate Member.

The Rev. W. J. Long.

1108 Asiatic Society. [ No. 144.

Corresponding Members.

Mons. C. Alex. Challaye, late French Consul in China.

Mons. M. H. E. de Chonski, Secretary of the Consulate in China.

And the following new Member :—

R. Macdonald Stephenson, Esq. was proposed by Col. Forbes, and seconded

by H. Torrens, Esq.

The Secretary reported to the Meeting, that the reprint of Lieut. (now Major)

Leech’s Grammar and Vocabulary of the Beloochee and Punjabee languages, which

had been requested by the Right Hon’ble the Governor General, was completed,

and the Government copies sent into the Foreign Secretary’s Office. Spare copies

had also been struck off for the Society, and were now on the table.

Also, that the Library contained only the Philosophical Transactions up to the

year 1837, although it appeared from a printed list in the work that the Asiatic

Society of Bengal, was one of the public bodies with which the Royal Society

exchanged Transactions. He therefore requested to be authorized to write to the

Royal Society on the subject ; which was agreed to.

The Vice President introduced to the Meeting, Messrs. C. Alex. Challaye, late

French Consul in China, and H. E. de Chonski, Secretary to the French Con-

sulate at Canton, as Members of the Societé Asiatique de Paris, and themselves

Orientalists of much merit. These gentlemen were now on their way to Europe,

and he proposed from the chair, that they should be elected Corresponding Mem-

bers of the Society ; which was unanimously carried.

Mons. Challaye presented to the Society a copy of the work of the Rev. Pere Cal-

lery, Missionaire Apostolique in China, entitled ‘‘ Systema Phoneticum Scripture

Sinice,’’ as also two specimen numbers, in French and English, of his proposed

translation of the great Chinese Encyclopedic Dictionary of Kang-hi, known hitherto

to Europeans only through the translation of its abridgement, entitled Kang-hi-tze-

tien, by Dr. Morrison. For the proposed translation of the entire Encyclopedia by M.

Callery, the patronage of the Society was requested.

The Vice President after detailing at some length the indefatigable labours of the

Rev. M. Callery, in the publication of his first work, the Systema Phoneticum, which

was mostly performed, down to the meanest details, by his own hands, rendering it

thus also a monument of the untiring energy of a man of genius, referred to the spe-

cimens of the new work on the table as one in the highest degree worthy of the

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 1109

patronage of the Society. He much regretted the absence of the Honorable the

President, as he thought he would doubtless have earnestly supported the proposal

he intended to make, which was, that the Society should subscribe for two copies of

the Encyclopedia, and address Government, requesting also that its support be ac-

corded to M. Callery’s most useful and honourable enterprise.

The Sub-Secretary thought that the absence of the Honorable the President was

scarcely to be regretted, as any proposal to Government now carried, would thus

come more independently from the Society, as a body, in his absence. He observed,

that it was scarcely possible sufficiently to appreciate such an undertaking, since at

the present moment no Englishman could be indifferent to any work, great or small,

which could throw any light whatsoever on any matterrelative to China or the Chinese.

Some conversation ensued, when it was elicited, that (as stated in the preface, )

the work will extend to 20 Volumes of 600 pages each, royal octavo, and the price

will be 25 francs per Volume. It was proposed by the Vice President, seconded

by Mr. Heatly, and carried unanimously, that the Society should subscribe for two

copies, and that it should be referred to the Committee of Papers to frame a letter

for the approbation of the Society at the next Meeting, in which the support of Go-

vernment might be solicited for this important work,

The Vice President brought to the notice of the Meeting, that it had been long

considered by many Members of the Society, that the Busts were placed in far too

elevated a position, and that it would be proper to lower the pillar-pedestals on

which they stand, so as to bring them to the usual height at which Busts were placed.

He also submitted to the Meeting, a specimen Slab on which it was proposed to

inscribe the names of the persons whose effigies were represented, placing it against

the pillar beneath the Bust ; but he stated, that as some difference of opinion might

arise as to the proper mode of inscribing the name, he begged to submit the question

for the decision of the Society.

After some conversation, it was agreed upon, that a Gommitiaa to be composed of

N. B. E. Baillie, Esq.

F. G. S. Heatly, Esq., and

H. Piddington, Esq.

-be requested to settle this matter.

The Secretary also stated, that as a reprint of the Lithographed Rules of the Socie-

ty which were distributed to new Members was necessary, he was desirous of know-

1110 ; Asiatic Society. [No. 144.

ing if it was the pleasure of the Society that any alteration should be made in

them.

Referred to the Committee of Papers for report.

The following list of Books presented was read :—

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, on the 6th December, 1843.

The Calcutta Christian Observer, November and December 1843, New series,

vol. ive Nos. 47 and 48.—Presented by the Editor.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, new series, Bombay, November 1843, vol. iv.

No. 11.—Presented by the Editor. |

The Calcutta Journal of Natural History, April 1843, vol. iv. No. 13.—Presented

by the Editor.

Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, 1843, vol. ii. No. 9.

Presented by the Society.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. i. Nos. 20,

21, 22 and 23, November and December 1842, and January and February 1843.—

From the Society.

Report of the Twelfth Meeting of the British Association for the advancement of

Science, for 1842. London, 1843.—From the Association.

Papers regarding the Scinde and Begaree Canals, in the Neighbourhood of Shikar-

pore, in Upper Scinde. Calcutta, 1843.—From Government.

The Zoology of the Voyage of H. M. S, Sulphur, Mammalia, by J. E. ei

London, 1843.—Purchased.

Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, 1842, part x.—Presented by the

Society, through Dr. McClelland.

List of the Fellows and Honorary Members &c. of ditto ditto. London, 1842.—Pre-

sented by the Society, through Dr. McClelland.

Memorandum upon the state of Indian Bazaar Weights and Measures. Calcutta,

1843.—Presented by Mr. Landers.

The following Letter from the Librarian, with its accompanying documents, was

read :—

To H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary, Asiatic Society.

Sir,—Having examined the rules of the Society’s Library, printed in the 16th

volume of the Asiatic Researches, I have the honour to state, that with a few excep-

tions, they fully answer their intended purpose of preserving the books without incon-

venience to the Members of the Society ; but as it appears from the Library records,

that those rules which provide for the safety of the books have never been adhered

to, I beg to suggest the propriety of now enforcing them, and to propose the following

alterations and additions :—

I. Books are to be borrowed by written or personal application to the Secretary:

in either case, the person applying is to furnish a written receipt, specifying the

name of the work, and the time for which it is borrowed; at the expiration of which,

he is to return the Book borrowed, or renew his application for an extended loan

of it.

1843. | Asiatic Soctety. 1111

This form of the rule is, I think, preferable to the former, it being more regular to

fix a certain period for the keeping of the books, and also as it does not exclude other

Members from the use of a particular work.

II. To add the following rules :—

I. The Librarian should be authorised to call in any work which is detained beyond

the time fixed by the preceding rule.

2. All works, borrowed from the Library, should be returned once a year, viz. the

first of October, in order to enable the Librarian to have the most efficient control over

them, and to report to the Secretary on the state of the Library.

3. Valuable manuscripts should not be removed from the Library, and no work of

the Oriental division of the Library should be borrowed by Native gentlemen, not

Members of the Society, without a special order of the Secretary.

In conclusion, I would propose, that the rules of the Library be printed and annexed

to the Catalogue. I have the honour to be, Sir,

Asiatic Society, 14th October, 1843. Your most obedient servant,

G. Rokr.

Memorandum by the Sub-Secretary.

With reference to new arrangements respecting the Library, I beg on the part of the

Curators to suggest, that some rule like the following be laid down for the guidance

of the Librarian, and for assuring to the Curators that control over the books which are

specially required for their several departments, without which they must be seriously

impeded, and may often be totally stopped in the progress of their labours.

«« Rule.—All books being books of general or special reference in the various branch-

es of Natural History, in the departments of the Zoological, Geological, and Mineralogi-

cal Curators, to be understood by the Librarian to be books of reference for the use of

those officers, and as such, not to be lent out of the Library.

‘«The Curators are farther to be allowed to take over for daily use, such books as they

may select for that purpose, giving the usual receipt to the Librarian.”’

The motive for this rule is, farther, not only to assure to the Curators the use of books

often bought specially for their use, but moreover because there is no question, not only

that books of daily reference to the working Naturalist are in a manner almost appropri-

ated and kept for months, and even years, by parties who often make but little use of

them, but that such works often disappear entirely from the Library ;—this has certainly

occurred with books relating to my own department, and which I cannot now obtain

in Calcutta. H. PIDDINGTON,

Sub-Secretary and Curator Museum Econ.

Geol. and Mineral, Geol. Dept. &c.

Memorandum by the Secretary.

I have the honor to submit a new Rule for the Library, having special reference to

the class of works ordinarily required by the Curators to the Society in the course of

their labours.

Hand books and text books of science should evidently be kept in the reach of

parties actively engaged in Scientific investigation. For this purpose they either be

detained in the Library as proposed, or, as opportunity occurs, procured in duplicate,

one copy being always reserved as the Museum copy. H. TorrEns,

Vice Président and Secretary, Asiatic Society.

7 @

1112 7 Asiatic Society. [No. 144.

I should just venture to suggest, that for the volumes specially entrusted to the

Curators, in cases where no duplicates exist, the Curator may be permitted to lend

them out to Members on a receipt to himself, as it will then be in his power to call

them in as soon as he likes. S. G. T. Heat iy.

Resolved—That the proposed amendments be adopted as the future Rules for the

Library.

Read the following Letters from Government, accompanying the Books and Papers

to which they refer: —

No. 2556.

From Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary

to the Asiatic Society, dated Fort William, 13th October, 1843.

Sir,—I am directed by the Deputy Governor of Bengal, to forward Copy of a Letter

from the Superintendent of Marine, No. 591, dated the 23d ultimo, and its original

enclosures, relative to the corrosive effects of Salt-water on Iron, with His Honor’s

permission for the publication of the whole, or any part of the information therein con-

tained, on this highly important subject. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Crcin BEapon,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

No. 241, of 1843.

From W. Evwarps, Esa. Under-Secretary io the Government of India, to the Se-

cretary to the Asiatic Society, dated Fort William, the 3d November, 1843.

Foreign Department.

Sir,—I have the honor to transmit for the use of the Society’s Library, the accom-

panying Copy of Papers regarding the Scinde and Begaree Canals in Upper Scinde,

printed by order of the Right Hon’ble the Governor General in Council.

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

W. Epwarps,

Under-Secretary to the Government of India.

No. 1034.

From Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. Torrens, Esa. Secretary

to the Asiatic Society, dated Fort William, 13th November, 1843.

Revenue.

Sik,—By direction of the Deputy Governor, I have the honor to forward for such

use as the Society may wish to make of them, the accompanying Papers relative to the

variation of the Compass throughout the Bengal Presidency.

2. You are requested to return the Documents in question, when no longer required-

I have the honor to be, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

_Cxcit Brapon,

Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

es ee

1843.] Asiatic Society. 1113

Read the following Letter from E. C. Ravenshaw, Esq. accompanying a sketch of

the Image to which it refers: —

To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Sir,—I have the pleasure to send a copy of an Inscription on the back of a small

brass Image, about six inches high, which was recently found at Bodh Gya, by the

Mohunt of the Monastery of the Sunyasis, while making excavations among the ruins

of the Old Fort. The writing is illegible by the scholars of these parts, but it is proba-

ble that some of the eminent Pundits employed by the Asiatic Society may be able

to decypher it. If they should be successful in so doing, | shall feel much obliged by

your favoring me with a translation, as it would be very interesting to ascertain the

precise date or era in which these images of Bodh or Mohamuni were made and

worshipped. Your obedient servant,

Gya, November 19, 1843. BK, C. RavENsHAW,

P. S.—The Tiara on the head of the Image is very peculiar; a Sketch is enclosed.

The following was the rendering, in Sanscrit characters, of the Inscription by the

Society’s Sanscrit Librarian :—

eas

SACICS SAMTAATEATA |

RasMOHUN NayavaGIsH,

Sanscrit Librarian, Asiatic Society.

And the following in English and Sanscrit is given by Baboo Saroda Presad :—

MaTMteeg aay s [a ?] ars

Brahma Varoda heti Samanta Devasyayam.

Literal Translation.

This (this image) is of Samanta Deva, who yields blessings for Brahma, (for obtain-

ing true divine knowledge, ) and who is the cause (or source) of Brahma (or extinction

in Brahma, ) 7. e. salvation.

Nore.—Here the word Brahma has two meanings ; viz. True divine knowledge and extinction

in Brahma, or the supreme creator, 2. ¢. salvation.

Besides next the letter @ dé, one @& B-a is indispensably necessary to be inserted, as without it

no sense can come out.

The character appears to be the character of the 9th Century.—S. P.

Read a Note from Major Ouseley, Agent to the Governor General, North-West

Frontier, forwarding a skin of the black Leopard, which he states, is considered a

novelty in that neighbourhood, i. e. Chota Nagpore.

Read Letter from Captain Russell, Commanding the Honourable Company’s

Steamer Ganges, reporting his trip to examine the site of the late Volcanic Island in

the Cheduba Archipelago. This letter will be found in the Report of the Curator

Museum of Economic Geology, as following there, naturally, the letter of instructions

given to Capt. Russell on the part of the Society.

1114 Asiatic Society. LNo. 144.

REPORT OF THE CURATOR MUSEUM OF ECONOMIC GEOLOGY.

Report of the Curator Museum Economic Geology and Mineralogical and Geological

Departments, for the month of November.

Geological and Mineralogical.—As we have been unable to despacth a scientific

geologist to visit the Cheduba groupe as at first recommended, all that could be

done was to frame a letter for the Captain of the Steamer, so as to enable him to do

the best he could in the way of collecting what he might meet with, and this he

has done very zealously. I have but just received his collection, and shall therefore

be obliged to delay my report upon it till I learn the localities visited, and other

particulars, but the following copy of our letter should be placed upon record :—

Captain RussELL, Commanding H. C. Steamer Ganges.

Sir,—As it is not improbable that much preliminary geological, and even some

mineralogical knowledge may be obtainable by yourself and Officers on your ap-

proaching survey trip to the Straits of Cheduba and adjacent Islands, I have been de-

sired by the Honorable the President of the Asiatic Society, to point out to you briefly,

how this may be best accomplished.

Geological.—Y our first object is, I believe, to ascertain what traces, as shoals, &c.

may remain of the Volcanic Island, which recently rose and disappeared off the S. E.

point of False Island, near Cheduba. If the place of the new island can be correctly

ascertained, and the water be not too deep, specimens of the scoriz and mud should be, if

possible, obtained by dredging and diving, with as many shells, stones, &c. as can be had,

particularly if with marks of action of fire. A 6-dozen wine chest full of these or more

will be none too many, ¢f there are many kinds, and the more variety the better.

Whether the Volcanic shoal has any connection with: the reef tothe South of False

Island or not, specimens taken up to the dry reef and the shores of the island, should also

be collected; the island itself should be carefully examined and a section of it taken, if

possible, numbering or marking all the varieties of rocks, soils and corals, &c. &c. to

correspond as A, B, C, &c. The names you give to the stones or rocks, donot signify in

the least. You may call them any name you like, but the points are their exact place,

and how the beds of them lie, if the lines of beds can be seen, as thus :—

‘*L. No.1 to 7.—Hard blue stone ; beds slope with their faces to the S. E. and are ele-

vated about 30° from the sea horizon, the line of the faces of the beds lies N. and S.*

M.—Confused masses of yellow, dark brown, and black stone and boulders with shells,

no beds to be made out.

N.—Level beds of soft sandstone much worn by the sea,’’ and so forth: noting ¢mme-

diately every specimen or lot of specimens as obtained.

The other small Islands should also be visited and examined in like manner.

Traces of elevations are, according to Captain Halstead, every where to be seen on

Flat Island, in beaches of shells at different heights, particularly at ‘* Square Rock,”’

(see his chart.) A good description with plenty of specimens from this rock and the Island

would be very desirable. These should be described, measured, and plenty of specimens

brought from them, as well as from the present beach ; not only to enable us to judge

of the number of risings, but also if there have been sinkings again between the dif-

* This is called the dip and the strike of rocks, or mineral beds, or strata.

1843. Asiatic Society. 1115

ferent risings. For these we require plenty of specimens, (two or three boxes full, ) both

of the rock of the beaches and of the beds of shells, oysters, &c. as found fastened upon

and in them, and lying loose upon the ledges, with the various heights marked as nearly

as can be measured or guessed. The inland beds, rocks, peaks, &c. are usually the most

interesting, as being the most ancient. Any imbedded shells, skeletons of fish, &c. are

of the greatest importance.

Mineralogical.—Any veins in the rocks, remarkable stones, ores, &c. should be

collected ; five to ten specimens at least of each kind.

It appears that a rich Copper ore has been found upon Round Island by a native

searching for Coal, employed by Captain Williams, who has been requested to have

him ready to accompany you, if possible, to point out the spot. Specimens ofthe rocks

or soil in which, and with which, the Copper ore is foundshould be obtained, as also

a good supply of the ore itself, if obtainable. Shining and glittering ores you will

readily pick up if met with, but as these are not usually the most valuable, a few of

the plain stone-like looking ones are sent herewith. All blue, green, red, or yellow

stained rocks, cliffs, banks, or veins should be carefully examined; of these the red

and yellow are most frequently Iron, and the blue and green often Copper. Spots

which appear thus coloured, and nearly or quite bare amongst the surrounding vegeta-

tion, should be searched and dug into, and specimens of all the stones, earth, &c. taken.

All beds of streams, fissures of rocks and strata, and often the sand and gravel of

rivers afford you chances of picking up something of value in this way.

Amongst the specimens you will receive a very small one of a very important,

though very worthless-looking one, which is the Asphalte of France, from which the

asphaltum terraces and roads are made. This you will easily recognise by its burning,

and by its effervescence with acids. Any earthy-looking stones resembling it should be

collected ; as also specimens of *Mineral Tar, if any thing of the kind is found. This is

not the petroleum or earth-oil, but a thick, tarry, and almost pitchy substance which has

not the smell of the earth-oil, but rather that of leather, but very faint. Where the

one of these two mineral products, the Asphalte and the Mineral Tar, is found, the

other is most probably present, and should be carefully looked for.

You will receive with the present a printed Pamphlet, containing directions in detail

for the collecting of Geological specimens by persons unacquainted with science, in

which Ihave marked a few passages in pencil; these with the foregoing, will, I trust,

enable you to add something to our knowledge.

The Asiatic Society of Bengal, will owe you their heartiest acknowledgments,

should your search be so conducted as to lead to the collection of a complete set of Geo-

logical and Mineralogical specimens from the site to be examined, and I am directed to

express the hope of the Society, that vou will be facilitated in conducting your search

deliberately, by instructions from the Marine Department admitting of some license

of interpretation as to the length of time available to you for it.

1 have the honor to be, Sir,

Your faithful servant,

H. Torrens,

V. P. and Sec. As. Soc. of Bengal.

Capt. Russell’s Letter to Mr. Torrens is as follows. His chart and report to Govern-

ment have not yet reached us.

1116 Asiatic Society. [ No. 144.

To H. Torrens, Ese. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Srr,—I have the honor to state, that the Hon’ble Company’s Steamer Ganges, after

having taken on board the Soogrees of Cheduba and Flat Island, arrived off False

Island on the 20th of November, when I took with me the natives of both Islands, who

pointed out to me where the Volcanic Island was. I have examined and surveyed the

spot, and find it was situated on a continuation of the Reef extending to the South-

ward from False Island, which is only a sand bank surrounded with rocks, with a few

small shrubs on it. Where the Island was, there is now from two and a half to three

fathoms water, with the bottom so rocky, that 1 could not succeed in getting any

of it up.

The following is an account of the appearance of the Volcanic Island, by the natives

of Cheduba and Flat Island, which occurred on the 26th, 27th, 28th, and 29th of July,

1843 :— j

** About our morning meal, or seven or eight o’clock, on the morning of the first day,

we heard a great noise, and saw fire rising out of the sea, which continued for four

days; on the second day we saw a small Island newly formed in the sea, between

‘‘Flat Rock’? and ‘‘ Round Rock,’’ (names will be seen in the chart,) about the size :

of the sand bank called False Island.

‘We saw the newly-formed Island for a month, but could not approach it on ac-

count of the boisterous sea on the coast. We felt an earthquake before we saw the

fire in the sea; in the month of October we came out in our boats, to look for the

Island, but saw nothing. The rocks, as they now lay, are of the same number and posi-

tion as before the appearance of the new Island.

‘* We did not feel the earthquake felt at Ramree on the 30th of October last, it was

felt on Cheduba Island by some of the natives.”’

I am sorry 1 could not procure you specimens of the bottom where the Island was,

as it was hard rock. I was unable to do so, on account of the depth of water, 4

I have the pleasure of forwarding you a specimen of Copper Ore from Round Island, 4

found by Captain Williams while I was at False Island, and another of Iron I believe, ,

picked up on Round Island by one of the natives; these were the only ones procured ye

on that Island.

I also send specimens of the Rocks, &c. of Flat Island, and the mud thrown out from

the Volcano at the same place.

Also a specimen of Iron Ore from False Island, and the different rocks and mud,

formed stone there, which appears to me to have been the same sort of mud petrified,

as 1 send specimens of, thrown up from the Volcano on Flat Island.

There are also specimens of Treble Rock to the Southward of where the Volcanic Is-

land was, as you will observe in my chart, forwarded to the Superintendent of Marine.

I also send a specimen of Iron Ore thrown up from a Volcano, about five miles to

the Southward of Kyouk Phyoo, on Ramree Island. I regret that I had not further

opportunities of gathering specimens, which the shortness of my stay prevented, on ac- -

count of the Island having disappeared. I have the honor to be, Sir,

Calcutta, 1st December, 1843. Your obedient servant,

J. RUSSELL,

Commander of the H,. C, Steamer Ganges.

eFC ee. et

1843.] Asiatic Society. 1117

Capt. Boyes of the 6th Cavalry, who it will be recollected was proceeding on a trip to

the Himalayan Passes, and was unfortunately compelled to return by the loss of all his

baggage down a precipice, has given us new cause to regret this most untoward acci-

dent, for he has sert us a most beautiful series of geological specimens as far as he

went; viz. a little beyond Melum, and I doubt not that when his Memorandum reaches

us, this little collection will be truly an ornament to our Museum. Capt. Boyes has

proceeded from the hills to Bundlecund, and I trust, that in that interesting route, he

will be able to enrich us farther. It is most certain that zeal and ability abound with

him, if he can only find time.

Mr. Mornay has obliged us with an analysis of some of the singular Copper Ore

sent up from Round Island in Capt. Williams’ second despatch, which though it may

be now read, should, I submit, in justice to that gentleman, have a separate place in the

Journal, for it is certainly a very curious one, and a natural amalgam little to be looked

for. The presence of the Mercury in the Ore would allow us to hope, that when better

acquainted with this most interesting spot, that valuable mineral may be found there-

abouts. Mr. Mornay finds it to be an alloy of Copper, Titanium, Mercury, Lead,

Cobalt, and Iron, in different proportions, the different pieces varying in their compnsi-

tien.

Messrs. Weaver and Co. have been good enough to send us two fine specimens of

petrified palms from Upper India, the exact locality they have not yet been able to

ascertain for us.

We have received the following letter from Dr. Tamnaw, of Berlin, reiterating the

offers of exchange of Minerals made by him in 1841.

To Messrs. the Directors of the Bengal Asiatic Society, Calcutia.*

Berlin, Prussia, July 20, 1843.

GENTLEMEN,—A long while before I had the honour to receive your kind and

esteemed letter, dated February 3, 1841, and I saw with great pleasure, that you

do not refuse my proposal for an exchange in Minerals and Fossils from Europe, and

particularly from Germany, for such mineralogical productions from the East Indies.

However, Gentlemen, you did not wish, that 1 may forward to you a first invoice,

as like as I did offer, because this part of your collections at the time were not sc order-

ed for deciding what you may wish to receive, or what you may be in a state to give.

You promised at the same time to make an invoice to me in fine and well cristallized

Minerals from Hindostan, for which I should return such of Europe.

I take the confidence, Gentlemen, to refer myself to your remembrance, and so

repeat the offer, which I made in my first letter. I should be exceedingly anxious to

enter with you in such a relation of exchange; the science of Mineralogy may never

be studied without collections so large as possible, and particularly in a country so

large and so very unknown than yours it must be advantageous for the science, if the

common sense for it may be awaked by an augmentation of the public collections by

the productions of foreign countries. I repeat my offer to make to you a first invoice

in the manner and in the way, as [I said it in my first letter, and I request you to

* This letter is printed verbatim, being a record of proceedings,

1118 Asiatic Society. [No. 144.

inform me so soon as possible, if your arrangement of collections may be so much pro-

- ceeded, that it should be desirable to you to receive any things from Europe in the

way of exchange.

At the same time I take the confidence to include here some letters and little

addresses, expressing my wishes of exchanging Minerals. In the interests of the science

1 beg you, Gentlemen, not only to communicate those letters and addresses to such

of your honourable members or other scientific Gentlemen, friends to Mineralogy,

who you may think able and willing to enter in such a relation of exchange with me,—

but also to give their consent such a publication as possible in the scientific world of

your country. I should be exceedingly indebted to you for every one communica-

tion, which could bring me to the desired relation of exchange, and I believe it advan-

tageous to both parties, and to the science in general.

I expect your honourable reply, and I have the honour to remain with the greatest

consideration and respect,

Gentlemen,

Your most obedient servant,

Dr. Fr. TamMan, Jun.

Address to Fr. Tamman, jun., Berlin, Prussia, care Mr. H. Pontoppidan,

Hamburgh.

CIRCULAR.

Berlin, Prussia, July 17, 1843.

Sir,—In possession of one of the greatest and most beautiful collections of Minerals

we have on the Continent, I take the confidence to propose to you an exchange of

fine and well cristallized Minerals and Petrifactions from Germany, Sweden, Norway,

&c. &c. for such Mineral productions of your country. The conditions which I propose,

are the most simple in the world. I make you the first invoice, and after its arrival, you

return me in British Minerals, what you may think an equitable and just equivalent.

The expences for the transport must pay, who receives the box.

Being a scholar of celebrated Mr. Mohs, I occupy myself particularly with Cristallo-

graphy, and cristallized specimens are, following, particularly desirable and interesting

tome. I collect not petrifacts, and occupy myself less with Geology than with Minera-

logy; following I prefer to receive minerals and cristals, also for the sent petrifacts,

supposed that you may not have in the last rare and here unknown things. In relation

of exchange with a great number of friends of the science I consent to receive a num-

ber of specimens of the same sort, which perhaps you may have abundantly, supposed

that the sort may be interesting, and the specimens fine.

On the other side, I give vou of the things which I can offer in this moment a

Catalogue, and also a list of those specimens of your country, which I desire particular-

ly- Remark, that those, which are underlined, are the most desirable. Have you,

Sir, some scientific friends, who you may think able and willing to enter in such an

exchange with me, then, Sir, I should be highly indebted to you for the communica-

tion of their addresses to me, and of the mine, which you find on the end of those lines,

to them.

I expect, Sir, your honourable reply, and I have the honour to remain, Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

Dr, Fr. TaMNnan, Jun.

1843. ] Asiatic Society. 1119

Catalogue of those Minerals, which I can offer in this moment.

A. From Sweden.—Blue Spinell xx, Chondrodite, Petalite, Spodumene, Lepidolite.

Indicolite, Pyrrholite (new), Amphodelite (new), Glance Kobalt xx, Dichroite,

Cerite, Cerine, Gadolinite, Yttro-Tantalite, Orthite, Pyrorthite, White massive To-

paz, Pyrophysalite xx, Massive Emerald, Albite, Yttro Cerite, Fluo-Yttro-Cerite,

Laumonite, Fahlunite, Automolite xx, Yellow Triklasite, Epidote, Asbestus, Red

Silicate of Manganese, White Scapolite, Sphene xx, Tourmaline xx.

B. From Norway.—Zircon xx, Polymignite xx, Pyrochlor xx, Labrador spar, Elaolite

(green and red) ,Apatite, Tourmaline xx, Ilmenite xx, Noble Serpentine, Anthophyl-

lite, Massive Apatite, Rutil xx, Foliated Titanic Iron Ore, Talcite, Pyrope, Titanic

Iron Ore, Telluric Bismuth glance, Rose Qnartz, Garnet xx, Skapolith xx, Epidote xx,

Oligoklase xx, Felspar xx, Stilbite xx, Kolophonite, Blue Apatite, Fluor Spar xx.

C. From Bohemia.—Sphene xx in Klinkstone, Augite xx, Amphibole xx in Iron Clay

Arragonite xx, Analcime xx,Chabasite xx, Natrolite xx, Apophyllite xx, Ryakolithe xx,

Hyalite, Pyrope, Miemite xx, Bitter spar xx, Opal jasper, Porcelain jasper, Tungstate

of Lime, Molybdena, Pitch Opal, Peastone, Wavellite, Egeran xx, Apatite xx, Fluor

Spar xx, Quartz xx, Heavy Spar xx, Carbonate of Iron xx, Felspar xx, Comptonite xx.

C. a. From the Harz. Thuringia and Saxony.—Celestine fibrous xxx. Felspar in

Pseudomorphous xx, Braunite xx, Hausmannite xx, Manganite xx, Pyrolusite xx,

Harmotome xx, Apophyllite xx, Stilbite xx, Calcareous Spar xx, Fluor Spar xx,

Tourmaline xx, Rournonite xx, Grey Antimonial Ore xx, Carbonate of Iron xx, Ura-

nite xx, Andalusite xx, &c. &c.

-D. From Bavaria.— Anatase xx, Chiasotolith xx, Felspar xx, Tourmaline xx, Arseniate

of Iron xx, Carbonate of Iron xx, Sulphuret of Nickel, Tronsit, (Breithaupt new),

Garnet xx, Zoisie, Rose Quartz, Triphylin, Triplite, Vivianite xx, Dichroit, Beril xx,

Sphene xx, Grey Antimony, Magnetic Iron Pyrites.

E. From other countries.—Yellow amber from the Baltic, Olivine xx, Manganese

Ores, etc. from Saxony. A number of things from Tyrol, the Hartz, Salzburg, and

other parts of Germany. A few specimens from Iceland, the Faroe {slands, Fin-

land, Hungary, Italy, &c. A great quantity of interesting things from North

America, etc. etc.

F, A number of fine and interesting Petrefacts from Germany, particularly from

Bohemia, Bavaria, etc. etc. Sweeden, Norway, ete. etc.

List of such British Minerals, which I wish particularly to receive.

1. From England and Wales.—Hatchettine, Bournonite xx, Haytorite xx, Brookite

xx, Oxyde of Tin xx, Vivianite xx, Cube Ore xx, Avinite xx, Pinite xx, Sulphuret of

Copper xx, Arseniate of Copper xx, Phosphate of Copper xx, Tourmaline xx, Sulphate

of Lead xx, Cupreous Sulphate of Lead xx, Arseniate of Lead xx, Arsenio Phosphate of

Lead xx, Chlorate of Lead xx (from Mendip), Arsenio Sulphate of Lead xx, Ruby

Copper xx, Apatite xx, Topaz xx from Cornwall, Fluor Spar xx in its diverse forms,

Heavy Spar xx, particularly the great crystals from Alstone Moor and Durham, Car-

- bonate of Barytes xx, Bi-Calcareo Carbonate of Barytes xx, Baryto Chalcite xx, Sul-

phate Carbonate of Barytes xx, Tungstate of Lime xx, Tungstate of Iron xx, Hydrous

Oxide of Iron xx, Carbonate of Iron xx, Anatase xx, Uranite xx, Felspar xx, Murchi-

7 4H

1120 Asiatic Sociely. LNo. 144.

sonite xx, Blende xx, Sulphuret of Tin xx, Tennantite xx, Sulphuret of Copper xx,

Copper Pyrites xx, Fluellin xx, Childrenite xx, Wavellite.

2. From Scotland.—Greenockite xx, Prehnite xx, Felspar xx, Chabasite xx, Stil-

bite xx, Withamite xx, Harmotome xx, Brewsterite xx, Edingtonite xx, Laumonite

xx, Strontianite xx, Mesotype xx, Sulphato Carbonate of Lead xx, Sulphato Tri-Car-

bonate of Lead xx, Carbonate of Lead xx, Cupreous Sulphate of Lead xx, Cupreous

Sulphato Carbonate of Lead xx, Topaz xx from Mar and Cairngorm, Hydrate of

Magnesia from Swinness, Thomsonite xx, Stellite, Apophyllite xx from Fifeshire,

Red Hewlandite.

3. From Ireland.—Felspar xx from Newry, Topaz xx, Beril xx, Antrimolite, Le-

vyine, Gmelinite, Chabasite xx, Apophyllite xx, Natrolite, Harringtonite, Analcime

xx, Erinite xx.

4.—Minerals from the East Indies, New Holland, the Cape of Good Hope, Brasil,

Peru, Chili, Mexico, Spain, and Portugal.

5. From Hindostan.—Apophyllite and Poohnahlite xx from Poonah, Mesotype xx,

Stilbite xx, Zircon xx, Diamond xx, Corundum xx, (Sapphir xx), Ceylonite xx, (Spi-

nell xx), Red Tourmaline xx, etc. etc.

Address: Dr. Fr. Tamnan, Jun. Berlin, Prussia, care of Mr. Ed. Nicol, Stettin, or

Mr. H. Pontoppidan, Hamburgh, or Messrs. F. Behm and Co. Dantzig.

In reply to it 1 may say that we shall soon, I trust, be in a position to say what we can

spare, but that we have first heavy debts to pay off, for which the very few duplicates of

rare and Indian minerals we possess will certainly not be too many. And with refer-

ence to this matter I may repeat here what I had occasion to remark, touching both

geological and mineralogical specimens in India, in a former report namely; that

we unfortunately receive, for the most part, but single geological series, or speci-

mens of minerals, and then that twenty years may elapse before we obtain another;

so that while in Europe no sooner is a mineral or geological locality known as produc-

ing something of value to collectors, than it is ransacked, and in fact made a mine of,

till the supply equals the demand, or as is sometimes the case, till the mineral is ex-

hausted ; in India we obtain a notice and specimens, or a series or two, and then even

at our very doors, no more are to be obtained till another geologist or mineralogist visits

the spot. I quoted there the case of Captain Franklin’s specimens from the Diamond

mines of Punnah; I may add in explanation of the words ‘‘ our very doors”’ used above,

and as a striking instance of what I wish here to explain, that I have now been for the

last two years endeavouring to obtain a supply of the vegetable impressions from the

coal shales of our Burdwan coal mines, and that I have not yet succeeded! We have

a very beautiful collection of them presented by Dr. Royle ten or fifteen years ago,

but none to spare; and yet these things are but the rubbish of the mines !—and within

fifty miles of Calcutta!

Museum of Economic Geology.—1 have here the pleasure to announce the discovery

of an Indian Lithographic Stone, almost equal to the German. It is another of the

specimens sent down by Capt. Shortrede from near Rewah, as noticed at the last meet-

ing and Mr. Black’s letter relative to it is as follows :—

To H. Pippineton, Esq. Sub-Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Sir,—lI have pleasure in sending a few impressions taken off the two little stones you

first sent me; those from the larger piece have come off well, and I think if a slab of

1843.] Asiatic Society. 1121

the size of 8 or 10 inches, or a little larger, could be obtained, | could give a favourable

report of it. From what I have been able to ascertain, I think this quality will answer

remarkably well, and as far as my experience enables me to judge, being 20 years

practically engaged in Lithographic Printing, I can safely say I have not met with

any Indian stone approach so near to the German, which is the best we now have.

Of the smaller piece [ cannot form an opinion, being too small to admit of a fair

trial, but it takes a good polish, and may answer pretty well for Lithographing written

forms upon, if not too soft; the black marks upon it would be an objection to its being

used for taking off drawings.

I have not been able to try the other specimens yet, but will report upon them as

soon as I am able to do so.

As requested, I have pleasure in sending the accompanying three pieces of Europe

Stones, of such as I use in my establishment, and remain, _

Sir, your obedient faithful servant,

Asiatic Lithographic Press, 3, Hare Street, THos. Brack.

13th November 1843.

This is certainly most satisfactory, and I have written to Capt. Shortrede to obtain a

larger piece as desired, as also to know if his public duties will admit of his shortly

visiting the spot with sufficient leisure to examine the quarry or quarries from whence

the heap of stones, amongst which this fine specimen was found, was taken; or if it may

be necessary either for him or for the Society to address Government on the subject,

which I venture respectfully to submit it might with great propriety do. The proba-

ble direct saving to Government in its own lithographic establishments at the three

presidencies, though a large item, is a mere trifle when compared with the immense

benefit to the native literary community, to whom the high price of lithographic stones

is almost a prohibition upon many enterprises of great utility ; the price of good Ger-

man stones varying in Calcutta, from six annas to twelve annas a pound weight. A stone

large enough for an octavo page, costing thus from 25 to40 Rupees: Large ones for maps

from 80to 120 Rs. or more. If the quarry should afford a good supply, and water carriage

down the Tonse be available, it is quite possible these stones may become an article of

export at least to various parts of India, if not to Europe.

Mr. Black has farther obliged us with a set of specimens of the various kinds of

stones used in his establishment, for the Museum. Capt. Lyrand Jacobs of the

Bombay Army, has sent us a valuable printed memoir on the Iron of Kattywar, and

modes of smelting the ores, and obligingly offers to procure for us a set of specimens,

which will be most acceptable; and I take this opportunity of mentioning, that any

thing of the nature of papers, whether written or printed, old or new, relative to any

inorganic product of the earth or the processes whereby it is fitted for the service of

man, will find a place in our Museum, or its records.

H. Pippineton,

Oriental Publications for Sale, at REDUCED prices, by the Asiatic Society.

Works.

Mah4bharata, vol. 1st. pages 831, vol. 2d, Been 868, vol. 3rd, pages 859, vol. 4th,

pages 1007, royal4to. ... ane ot oie ces

Large paper do. do. aa Bee :

Index to the 4 vols. of the Mahabharut complete, Hs A one

Harriwansa, 563 pages, royal 4to. ne ck oa

Raja Tarangini, 440 pages, 4to. ae $34 a ae nes

Large paper, do. do. ay an age Soe x es

Naishada, 917 pages, 8vo. ... te

Sausruta, Ist vol. 378 pages, 2d vol. BED pages, 8vo.

Fatawé A/lemgiri, 1st vol. 763 pages, 2d vol. 759 pages, 3d vol. 565 pages, 4th vol.

759 pages, 5th vol.€97 pages, 6th vol. 667 pages, royal 4to. per vol.

Indya, 2d vol. 680 pages, 3rd vol. 682 pages, 4th vol. 937 pages, 4to. tas

Khazanat ul Ilm, 694 pages, 4to. sie 3 ae

JawAme ul Ilm ul Riazi, 168 pages, with 17 plates, bie: as a

Anis ul Musharrahin, 544% pages, 4to. bor one a0 eae

Sharaya-ool-Islam, 631 pages, 4to. ... a eee aa +c

Tibetan Grammar, 256 pages, 4to. cee “oe ae a

Tibetan Dictionary, 373 pages. 4to. ahs one Ax =a

Asiatic Researches, per vol. aa aoe

Burnouf Memoire sur deux inscriptions cunéiformes, Ato. “199 PD =

Burnouf Commentaire sur le Yacna, with notes &c. 2 parts, pp 945....

Rs.

bod bab

CSOocaeemrraenerrm ooncn

10.

Burnouf et Lassen, Essai sur le Pali, ou Langue Sacrée de la Dicsnaie au de 14

du Gange. Paris, 1826, pages 222, 8vo. —.... ee

Elémens de la Grammaire Jpponsise, par M.M. Heaibuls et Remusat. Paris,

1825, pages 158, 8vo. See eee a

Ditto ditto Supplément. Paris, 1826, pages 31, =

ove

Contes Arabes, traduits par J. J. Marcel. Paris, 1835, avec notes, vor: T. pages

484, vol. II. pages 496, vol. III. pages 508, 8vo.

Brosset, Elémens de la Langue Georgienne. Paris 1837, pages 122, Gio.

eee

Klaproth, Vocabulaire et Grammaire de la langue Georgienne. Paris, 1827, pages

232, Ist part, 8vo. net ies aoe oie

Cronique Georgienne, traduite par M. Brosset, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,

nt ee 4

pages 370, 8vo. me See ioe A33 ee

Choix de Fables de Vartan, en Arménien et en Francais. Paris, 1825, pages 96,

8vo. se sek see

Elegie sur La Prise D’Edesse, en Arménien. Paris 1828, pages 112, Bs

Chrestomathie Chinoise—Chinese Characters, 1833, pages 183, ate oF

Meng-Tseu, texte Chinoise, pages 161, 8vo.__... noo aa cee

Meng-Tseu, traduction Latine, par S. Julien. Lutetie Parisiorum,: 1824, pages

593, 8vo. to nen th ve at 2

Lassen, Institutiones Lingue Pracritice. Bonne ad paca: 1837, pages 167,

8vo. oes ae a0 “5 sae one eve

Lassen, Anthologia Sanscritica. Bonne, 1838, pages 371, 8vo. He tts

Lassen, Gita Govinda, Sanscrit et Latine. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1836, pages 180,

4to. aes oat ase coe tee an

Chezy, Yajnadattabada, ou La Mort ica iiatate Text, Analysis and Transla-

tion. Paris, 1826, pages 142, 4to. oo 4: aay

Chezy, La reconnaissance de Sacountala, Text and Ceanelation’ Paris, 1830,

pages 665, 4to. aus eo “<< Ss eg

Geographie D’ Aboulféda, Texte Arabe. Paris, 1837- -40, pages 586, 4to. aes

The Travels of Ibn Batuta, translated from the Arabic aye ae" by S. Lea.

London 1829, 143 pages, 4to. ... as ate

The Travels of Macarius, translated by F. c. ‘Belfour: London, 1829, pt. I. 114

pages, 4to. or eee eee one eo eee

Memoir of the Emperor Jehanguire, translated from the Persian Manuscript, by

Major D. Price. London, 1829, 141 pages, 4to. see tee onc

History of the Afghans, translated from the Persian, by B. Dorn, part I. London,

1829, 184 pages, 4to, fee one a3 eee ove

Han-Koong-Tsew, or the Sorrows of Han, a Chinese Tragedy, translated by J

F. Davis. Loncon, 1829, 28 pages, 4to. Ne on “ee ene “et

Vocabulary of Scinde Language, by Capt. Eastwick Leach. ost mts

Grammar and Vocabulary of the Baloochi and Punjabee Languages, ~ ae

Former

Price.

Rs. As

3.0

3 0

5 0

4 0

3 (0

1 8

2 0

5 0

BO x

6 0

4 0

2248

ond

10 0

550

6 0

4 0

5 0

}iees

1 0

1 8

Les

aan

ay Set.